قصبو

<mediawiki xmlns="http://www.mediawiki.org/xml/export-0.11/" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.mediawiki.org/xml/export-0.11/ http://www.mediawiki.org/xml/export-0.11.xsd" version="0.11" xml:lang="sd">
  <siteinfo>
    <sitename>وڪيپيڊيا</sitename>
    <dbname>sdwiki</dbname>
    <base>https://sd.wikipedia.org/wiki/%D9%85%D9%8F%DA%A9_%D8%B5%D9%81%D8%AD%D9%88</base>
    <generator>MediaWiki 1.47.0-wmf.10</generator>
    <case>first-letter</case>
    <namespaces>
      <namespace key="-2" case="first-letter">ذريعات</namespace>
      <namespace key="-1" case="first-letter">خاص</namespace>
      <namespace key="0" case="first-letter" />
      <namespace key="1" case="first-letter">بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="2" case="first-letter">واپرائيندڙ</namespace>
      <namespace key="3" case="first-letter">واپرائيندڙ بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="4" case="first-letter">وڪيپيڊيا</namespace>
      <namespace key="5" case="first-letter">وڪيپيڊيا بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="6" case="first-letter">فائل</namespace>
      <namespace key="7" case="first-letter">فائل بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="8" case="first-letter">ذريعات وڪي</namespace>
      <namespace key="9" case="first-letter">ذريعات وڪي بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="10" case="first-letter">سانچو</namespace>
      <namespace key="11" case="first-letter">سانچو بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="12" case="first-letter">مدد</namespace>
      <namespace key="13" case="first-letter">مدد بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="14" case="first-letter">زمرو</namespace>
      <namespace key="15" case="first-letter">زمرو بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="100" case="first-letter">باب</namespace>
      <namespace key="101" case="first-letter">باب بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="710" case="first-letter">TimedText</namespace>
      <namespace key="711" case="first-letter">TimedText talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="828" case="first-letter">ماڊيول</namespace>
      <namespace key="829" case="first-letter">ماڊيول بحث</namespace>
      <namespace key="1728" case="first-letter">Event</namespace>
      <namespace key="1729" case="first-letter">Event talk</namespace>
    </namespaces>
  </siteinfo>
  <page>
    <title>قصبو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>6546</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394052</id>
      <parentid>393830</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T16:45:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* پاڪستان */</comment>
      <origin>394052</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="103280" sha1="8m4mefajh2aagw8yf4jcgu4t2wkt31j" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي. 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  


the statutory towns, census towns and [[out growth]]s are considered as urban settlements, as opposed to rural areas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Towns in India usually have basic infrastructure like shops, electricity, bitumenised roads, [[post offices]], banks, telephone facilities, high schools and sometimes a few government offices. The human population living in these towns may be a few thousand. There are some towns which can be labelled as Main road town.

In state of [[Karnataka]], towns are known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pete}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Pura}} in the [[Kannada language]]. Sometimes the terms {{lang|kn-latn|pattana}} ('city') or {{lang|kn-latn|ooru}}, which generally means 'place', are used for towns. The administrative council which governs these towns is known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pura Sabhe}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Nagara Sabhe}} in Kannada depending on the number of people living within the town's boundaries.

===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}}  
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>8m4mefajh2aagw8yf4jcgu4t2wkt31j</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394102</id>
      <parentid>394052</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:09:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394102</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="106219" sha1="ddu35xlogmisjqfmqfs79288pakhhhr" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي. 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  


the statutory towns, census towns and [[out growth]]s are considered as urban settlements, as opposed to rural areas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Towns in India usually have basic infrastructure like shops, electricity, bitumenised roads, [[post offices]], banks, telephone facilities, high schools and sometimes a few government offices. The human population living in these towns may be a few thousand. There are some towns which can be labelled as Main road town.

In state of [[Karnataka]], towns are known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pete}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Pura}} in the [[Kannada language]]. Sometimes the terms {{lang|kn-latn|pattana}} ('city') or {{lang|kn-latn|ooru}}, which generally means 'place', are used for towns. The administrative council which governs these towns is known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pura Sabhe}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Nagara Sabhe}} in Kannada depending on the number of people living within the town's boundaries.

===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}}  
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي.
=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>ddu35xlogmisjqfmqfs79288pakhhhr</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394103</id>
      <parentid>394102</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:26:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* پاڪستان */</comment>
      <origin>394103</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="106633" sha1="c7phh261k7irqg01pa8res2bxn3qn64" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي. 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  


the statutory towns, census towns and [[out growth]]s are considered as urban settlements, as opposed to rural areas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Towns in India usually have basic infrastructure like shops, electricity, bitumenised roads, [[post offices]], banks, telephone facilities, high schools and sometimes a few government offices. The human population living in these towns may be a few thousand. There are some towns which can be labelled as Main road town.

In state of [[Karnataka]], towns are known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pete}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Pura}} in the [[Kannada language]]. Sometimes the terms {{lang|kn-latn|pattana}} ('city') or {{lang|kn-latn|ooru}}, which generally means 'place', are used for towns. The administrative council which governs these towns is known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pura Sabhe}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Nagara Sabhe}} in Kannada depending on the number of people living within the town's boundaries.

===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}}  
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن شهر ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>c7phh261k7irqg01pa8res2bxn3qn64</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394104</id>
      <parentid>394103</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:28:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* پولينڊ */</comment>
      <origin>394104</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="106656" sha1="qvfxa6hfpx9rlff3yv8jtrnijak22o3" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي. 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  


the statutory towns, census towns and [[out growth]]s are considered as urban settlements, as opposed to rural areas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Towns in India usually have basic infrastructure like shops, electricity, bitumenised roads, [[post offices]], banks, telephone facilities, high schools and sometimes a few government offices. The human population living in these towns may be a few thousand. There are some towns which can be labelled as Main road town.

In state of [[Karnataka]], towns are known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pete}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Pura}} in the [[Kannada language]]. Sometimes the terms {{lang|kn-latn|pattana}} ('city') or {{lang|kn-latn|ooru}}, which generally means 'place', are used for towns. The administrative council which governs these towns is known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pura Sabhe}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Nagara Sabhe}} in Kannada depending on the number of people living within the town's boundaries.

===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}}  
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن شهر ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

===پولينڊ===
{{Main|پولينڊ ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>qvfxa6hfpx9rlff3yv8jtrnijak22o3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394105</id>
      <parentid>394104</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:36:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394105</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="106714" sha1="7i10yvkyspxnfg0f0xnsgauzhaqtzgr" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي. 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  


the statutory towns, census towns and [[out growth]]s are considered as urban settlements, as opposed to rural areas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Towns in India usually have basic infrastructure like shops, electricity, bitumenised roads, [[post offices]], banks, telephone facilities, high schools and sometimes a few government offices. The human population living in these towns may be a few thousand. There are some towns which can be labelled as Main road town.

In state of [[Karnataka]], towns are known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pete}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Pura}} in the [[Kannada language]]. Sometimes the terms {{lang|kn-latn|pattana}} ('city') or {{lang|kn-latn|ooru}}, which generally means 'place', are used for towns. The administrative council which governs these towns is known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pura Sabhe}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Nagara Sabhe}} in Kannada depending on the number of people living within the town's boundaries.

===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[فائل:Thari Mirwah-2016.jpg|thumb|Thari Mirwah-2016]]
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن شهر ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

===پولينڊ===
{{Main|پولينڊ ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>7i10yvkyspxnfg0f0xnsgauzhaqtzgr</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394106</id>
      <parentid>394105</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:39:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* پاڪستان */</comment>
      <origin>394106</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="106727" sha1="18w5axbdsp790sbqsl69abi8ntut2uu" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي. 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  


the statutory towns, census towns and [[out growth]]s are considered as urban settlements, as opposed to rural areas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Towns in India usually have basic infrastructure like shops, electricity, bitumenised roads, [[post offices]], banks, telephone facilities, high schools and sometimes a few government offices. The human population living in these towns may be a few thousand. There are some towns which can be labelled as Main road town.

In state of [[Karnataka]], towns are known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pete}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Pura}} in the [[Kannada language]]. Sometimes the terms {{lang|kn-latn|pattana}} ('city') or {{lang|kn-latn|ooru}}, which generally means 'place', are used for towns. The administrative council which governs these towns is known as {{lang|kn-latn|Pura Sabhe}} or {{lang|kn-latn|Nagara Sabhe}} in Kannada depending on the number of people living within the town's boundaries.

===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[فائل:Thari Mirwah-2016.jpg|thumb|ٺري ميرواهه، سنڌ]]
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن شهر ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

===پولينڊ===
{{Main|پولينڊ ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>18w5axbdsp790sbqsl69abi8ntut2uu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394107</id>
      <parentid>394106</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:42:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* ڀارت */</comment>
      <origin>394107</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="105821" sha1="i90nups4el7b3kr22sakpsimyhqkee2" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  
===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[فائل:Thari Mirwah-2016.jpg|thumb|ٺري ميرواهه، سنڌ]]
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن شهر ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

===پولينڊ===
{{Main|پولينڊ ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>i90nups4el7b3kr22sakpsimyhqkee2</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394108</id>
      <parentid>394107</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:44:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* پاڪستان */</comment>
      <origin>394108</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="105831" sha1="ok6nwppedq1g6ihc7ovw8ala3alwx4w" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  
===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[فائل:Thari Mirwah-2016.jpg|thumb|[[ٺري ميرواهه]]، [[سنڌ]]]]
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن قصبن ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

===پولينڊ===
{{Main|پولينڊ ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>ok6nwppedq1g6ihc7ovw8ala3alwx4w</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394109</id>
      <parentid>394108</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:48:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* پاڪستان */</comment>
      <origin>394109</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="105912" sha1="szsvouf35eg7xmtxbit8jxzua9qsi2o" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  
===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Thari Road - panoramio - kamran.solangi (1).jpg|thumb|Setharjah, Sind]]


[[فائل:Thari Mirwah-2016.jpg|thumb|[[ٺري ميرواهه]]، [[سنڌ]]]]
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن قصبن ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

===پولينڊ===
{{Main|پولينڊ ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>szsvouf35eg7xmtxbit8jxzua9qsi2o</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394110</id>
      <parentid>394109</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:51:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* پاڪستان */</comment>
      <origin>394110</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="105838" sha1="god51s3p38pv5rwktratvs9hq833znd" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  
===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Thari Road - panoramio - kamran.solangi (1).jpg|thumb|سيٺارجه، سنڌ]]
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن قصبن ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

===پولينڊ===
{{Main|پولينڊ ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>god51s3p38pv5rwktratvs9hq833znd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394111</id>
      <parentid>394110</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T06:53:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* پاڪستان */</comment>
      <origin>394111</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="105846" sha1="p3c95tipm321edfq6k443o8qpujjtyo" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  
===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Thari Road - panoramio - kamran.solangi (1).jpg|thumb|[[سيٺارجا]]، [[سنڌ]]]]
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن قصبن ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

===پولينڊ===
{{Main|پولينڊ ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>p3c95tipm321edfq6k443o8qpujjtyo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394185</id>
      <parentid>394111</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T11:46:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Memon2025</username>
        <id>21315</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* پولينڊ */</comment>
      <origin>394185</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="107242" sha1="h5tyg6j68tgah114dbljon8n4dub5n8" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Type of human settlement}}
{{Redirect|Small town||Town (disambiguation)|and|Towns (disambiguation)|and|Small Town (disambiguation)}}
{{pp-move}}
{{multiple image
| total_width       = 350px
| perrow            = 1/2/3/2/1
| image1            = St Mary's Church, Castle Street 1.jpg
| alt1              = Castle Street in the town venter of Reading
| image2            = Porvoo in January.jpg
| alt2              = Old Town of Porvoo in January
| image3            = Lemgo - Marktplatz mit Rathaus.jpg
| alt3              = Lemgo Town Hall at the market square
| image4            = Luftbild Davos2.jpg
| alt4              = The alpine town of Davos in the Swiss Alps
| image5            = View from tower of church st michal during skalica days.JPG
| alt5              = View from tower of St. Michal Church in Skalica
| image6            = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| alt6              = Monkey_Forest_Street_of_Ubud_200507.jpg
| image7            = Fatima 0549 (19531851070).jpg
| alt7              = The Marian town of Fátima
| image8            = Viljandi, Estonia (7182836211).jpg
| alt8              = The center of the inland town of Viljandi
| footer  = کاٻي کان ساڄي، مٿي کان: [[انگلينڊ]] ۾ ريڊنگ، [[فنلينڊ]] ۾ پوروو، [[جرمني]] ۾ ليمگو، [[سوئٽزرلينڊ]] ۾ ڊيووس، [[سلوواڪيا]] ۾ اسڪاليڪا، [[بالي]] ([[انڊونيشيا]]) ۾ اوبود، [[پرتگال]] ۾ فاطمه، [[ايسٽونيا]] ۾ ولجندي ٽائون.
}}

'''قصبو''' (Town) هڪ قسم جي انساني آباديءَ جو قسم آهي، جٿي ڪجهه ماڻھو آباد ھجن ۽ انھن جو تعداد عموماً ھزارن ۾ ھجي. ھي [[ڳوٺ]] کان وڏو ۽ [[شھر]] کان ننڍو ھوندو آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt;

قصبي کي فرق ڪرڻ جا معيار عالمي سطح تي مختلف هوندا آهن، اڪثر ڪري آبادي جي سائيز، معاشي ڪردار، انتظامي حيثيت، يا تاريخي اهميت جهڙن عنصرن تي منحصر هوندا آهن. ڪجهه علائقن ۾، قصبن کي رسمي طور تي قانوني چارٽرن يا سرڪاري عهدن ذريعي بيان ڪيو ويندو آهي، جڏهن ته ٻين ۾، اصطلاح غير رسمي طور تي استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. قصبن ۾ عام طور تي مرڪزي خدمتون، انفراسٽرڪچر، ۽ گورننس شامل آهن، جهڙوڪ ميونسپل اختيارين، ۽ انهن جي علائقن اندر واپار، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي سرگرمين لاءِ مرڪز طور ڪم ڪن ٿا. 
[[عڪس:Shahrak-e Namak Abrud villas.jpg|alt=قصبو|thumb|220x220 عڪسلون|'''قصبو''']]
قصبي جو تصور ثقافتي ۽ قانوني طور تي مختلف هوندو آهي. مثال طور، برطانيه ۾، هڪ قصبو تاريخي طور تي مارڪيٽ ٽائون جي عهدي يا شاهي چارٽر مان پنهنجي حيثيت حاصل ڪري سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ته آمريڪا ۾، اصطلاح اڪثر ڪري شامل ٿيل ميونسپلٽيز تي لاڳو ڪيو ويندو آهي. ڪجهه ملڪن ۾، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا ۽ ڪينيڊا، شهرن، قصبن ۽ ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي وچ ۾ فرق آبادي جي حد تي ٻڌل آهي. عالمي سطح تي، قصبا مختلف ڪردار ادا ڪن ٿا، جن ۾ زرعي سروس سينٽرن کان وٺي ميٽروپوليٽن علائقن اندر مضافاتي برادرين تائين شامل آهن.

==تعريف==

==تاريخ== 
==ملڪ جي لحاظ کان==

=== افغانستان ===
{{Further|افغانستان ۾ شهرن جي فهرست}}
[[افغانستان]] ۾ هڪ شهر ۽ هڪ قصبي ٻنهي کي &quot;شهر&quot; (دري: شهر؛ پشتو: زار: {{langx|ps|ښار}}) سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://dsal.uchicago.edu/dictionaries/raverty/ |title=A dictionary of the Puk'hto, Pus'hto, or language of the Afghans: with remarks on the originality of the language, and its affinity to other oriental tongues |last=Raverty |first=Henry G. |date=1860 |publisher=University of Chicago |access-date=4 May 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان جي 34 صوبن مان هر هڪ جي گاديءَ ۾ [[ڪابل]] جهڙو وڏو شهر, جنهن جي آبادي پنج لک کان وڌيڪ ماڻهن تي مشتمل هجي يا [[نورستان|نورستان صوبي]] جو گاديءَ جي هنڌ، پارون جهڙو شهر، جنهن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;20,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ هجي, شامل ٿي سگهي ٿو. 

. فارسي ٻولي. پشتو.  

=== البانيا ===
[[البانيا]] ۾ &quot;قيٽيزي&quot; (&lt;small&gt;qytezë&lt;/small&gt;) جو مطلب &quot;قصبو آهي جيڪو شهر (&lt;small&gt;qytet&lt;/small&gt;) جي لفظ سان تمام گهڻو ملندڙ جلندڙ آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪنهن به آباديءَ لاءِ اصطلاح جو ڪو به سرڪاري استعمال ناهي. الباني ۾، قيٽيزي جو مطلب 'ننڍو شهر' يا 'نئون شهر' آهي، جڏهن ته قديم زماني ۾ اهو قلعي جي ڀتين اندر هڪ ننڍڙي رهائشي مرڪز جو حوالو ڏيندو هو.


===آسٽريليا===
[[آسٽريليا]] ۾، آبادي جي اڪثر ڳوٺاڻن ۽ علائقائي مرڪزن کي قصبو سڏيو وڃي ٿو؛ ڪيترن ئي ننڍن قصبن ۾ 200 کان گهٽ آبادي &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web | publisher=Australian Bureau of Statistics | title=Frequently Asked Questions | date=21 March 2023 |url=https://www.abs.gov.au/websitedbs/D3310114.nsf/home/Frequently+Asked+Questions#Anchor12 | access-date=16 August 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt; هوندي آهي. ننڍي ۾ ننڍي کي ٽائون شپ طور بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿو.  

ان کان علاوه، ڪجهه مقامي سرڪاري ادارن کي سرڪاري طور تي [[ڪوئينزلينڊ|ڪوئنزلينڊ]]، [[ڏکڻ آسٽريليا]]، مغربي آسٽريليا ۽ اترين علائقي ۽ اڳ ۾ (1990 جي ڏهاڪي تائين) وڪٽوريا ۾ پڻ, قصبن جي طور تي اسٽائل ڪيو ويو آهي.
===آئس لينڊ===
{{Main|آئس لينڊ جي شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:A street in Húsavík.jpg|thumb|[[آئس لينڊ]] ۾ هوساويڪ (Húsavík) جو قصبو]]

=== آسٽريا ===
{{see also|آسٽريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}

[[آسٽريا]] جو قانوني نظام ڳوٺن، شهرن ۽ قصبن ۾ فرق نٿو ڪري. ملڪ کي بنيادي طور تي برابر درجو رکندڙ &lt;small&gt;2098&lt;/small&gt; ميونسپلٽيز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Gemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) ۾ ورهايو ويو آهي. وڏين ميونسپلٽيز کي مارڪيٽ ٽائونز (جرمن: &lt;small&gt;Marktgemeinden&lt;/small&gt;) يا شهرن (&lt;small&gt;Städte&lt;/small&gt;) طور نامزد ڪيو ويو آهي، پر اهي فرق خالص علامتي آهن ۽ اضافي قانوني ذميواريون نه ڏيندا آهن. ڪيتريون ئي ننڍيون برادريون آهن جن کي شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته اهي دور ماضي ۾ علائقائي آبادي جا مرڪز هئا. مثال طور رتنبرگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;400&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. هارڊيگ شهر ۾ لڳ ڀڳ &lt;small&gt;1200&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهو رهن ٿا. ڪو به غير شامل ٿيل علائقو ناهي. 

آسٽريا جي &lt;small&gt;201&lt;/small&gt; شهرن مان، &lt;small&gt;15&lt;/small&gt; قانوني شهر (&lt;small&gt;Statutarstädte&lt;/small&gt;) آهن. هڪ قانوني شهر هڪ اهڙو شهر آهي جيڪو ميونسپلٽي جي دائري کان علاوه ضلعي انتظامي اختيار جي فرضن سان گڏ هوندو آهي. حيثيت ڪنهن به اضافي خودمختياري سان نه ايندي آهي: ضلعي انتظامي اختيار بنيادي طور تي صرف سروس سينٽر آهن جيڪي شهري قومي حڪومت سان رابطو ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندا آهن، مثال طور ڊرائيونگ لائسنس يا پاسپورٽ لاءِ درخواست ڏيڻ لاءِ. قومي حڪومت عام طور تي صوبن کي پنهنجي طرفان رابطي جي انهن نقطن کي هلائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪندي آهي؛ قانوني شهرن جي صورت ۾، ميونسپلٽي کي اڳتي وڌڻو پوندو آهي.

=== برازيل ===
برازيل ۾، 1938 کان وٺي، اهو بيان ڪيو ويو هو ته ميونسپلٽيز جي سيٽ شهر جي درجي ۾ منتقل ٿيندي ۽ ان کي نالو ڏيندي ۽ ضلعن کي انهن جي لاڳاپيل سيٽن جي نالي سان نامزد ڪيو ويندو، ۽ جيڪڏهن اهي ميونسپل سيٽون نه هجن ها، ته انهن وٽ قصبي جو درجو هوندو. 

=== بلغاريا ===
{{Main|بلغاريا ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}}
[[File:Peshtera--downtown.jpg|thumb|پيشتيرا، [[بلگاريا|بلغاريا]] جو قصبو]]
بلغاريا وارا عام طور تي 'شهر' ۽ 'قصبي' ۾ فرق نٿا ڪن. پڻ روزمره جي ٻولي ۽ ميڊيا ۾ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''وڏا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; ۽ &quot;&lt;small&gt;'''ننڍا شهر'''&lt;/small&gt;&quot; اصطلاح استعمال ۾ آهن. &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; عام طور تي صوفيا، پلوڊيو، ورنا ۽ برگاس کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا، جن جي آبادي &lt;small&gt;2&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; کان وڌيڪ آهي, روس ۽ اسٽارزگورا کي اڪثر ڪري شامل ڪيو ويندو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته نسبتاً ترقي يافته انفراسٽرڪچر ۽ آبادي &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,00,000&lt;/small&gt; جي حد کان وڌيڪ آهي. صوبائي گاديءَ واري شهرن کي پڻ &quot;وڏا شهر&quot; سڏڻ ڏکيو آهي ڇاڪاڻ ته، عام طور تي، اهي گهٽ ترقي يافته آهن ۽ انهن جي آبادي گهٽجي رهي آهي، ڪجهه ۾ 30,000 کان گهٽ آبادي آهي. 

بلغاريا ۾ وزيرن جي ڪائونسل بيان ڪري ٿي ته آباديءَ کي ڇا چئبو آهي، جڏهن ته بلغاريا جو صدر هر آباديءَ کي ان جو لقب ڏئي ٿو. سال &lt;small&gt;2005&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ اهو شرط هو ته ڳوٺ جيڪي پاڻ کي شهر جي طور تي درجه بندي ڪرڻ چاهين ٿا انهن وٽ سماجي ۽ ٽيڪنيڪل انفراسٽرڪچر هجڻ گهرجي، انهي سان گڏ &lt;small&gt;3&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,500&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن کان گهٽ آبادي نه هجڻ گهرجي. ريسورٽ آبادين لاءِ گهرجون گهٽ آهن، آبادي گهٽ ۾ گهٽ &lt;small&gt;1&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;,000&lt;/small&gt; ماڻهن جي هجڻ گهرجي پر انفراسٽرڪچر جون گهرجون برقرار آهن. 

=== ڀارت ===
[[File:One of the high streets in Paravur.jpg|right|thumb|ڀارت جي قصبي پاراور ۾ هڪ گهٽي]]
ڀارت جي 2011 جي مردم شماري ٻن قسمن جي قصبن کي بيان ڪري ٿي: قانوني قصبا ۽ مردم شماري قصبا. قانوني قصبن کي ميونسپلٽي، ڪارپوريشن، ڪينٽونمينٽ بورڊ يا نوٽيفائيڊ ٽائون ايريا ڪميٽي سان گڏ سڀني هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي. مردم شماري قصبا انهن هنڌن جي طور تي بيان ڪيا ويا آهن جيڪي هيٺ ڏنل معيارن کي پورو ڪن ٿا:
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ آبادي 5,000
# گهٽ ۾ گهٽ %75 مرد ڪم ڪندڙ آبادي غير زرعي سرگرمين ۾ مصروف 
# آبادي جي کثافت گهٽ ۾ گهٽ 400 / چورس ڪلوميٽر (1,000 في چورس ميل)

سڀني قانوني قصبن، مردم شماري قصبن ۽ ٻاهرين واڌ کي, ڳوٺاڻن علائقن جي برعڪس, شهري آباديون سمجهيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Some Concepts and Definitions|url=http://censusindia.gov.in/2011-prov-results/paper2/data_files/kerala/13-concept-34.pdf|publisher=Census of India|access-date=7 February 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ڀارت ۾ قصبن ۾ عام طور تي بنيادي ڍانچي جهڙوڪ دڪان، بجلي، بٽومينائيزڊ روڊ، پوسٽ آفيسون، بينڪ، ٽيليفون سهولتون، هاءِ اسڪول ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن ڪجهه سرڪاري آفيسون هونديون آهن. انهن شهرن ۾ رهندڙ انساني آبادي ڪجهه هزار ٿي سگهي ٿي. ڪجھ شهر اهڙا آهن جن کي مين روڊ ٽائون سڏيو وڃي ٿو.  

ڪرناٽڪا رياست ۾، شهرن کي ڪنڙ ٻولي ۾ پيٽ يا پورو طور سڃاتو وڃي ٿو. ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اصطلاح پٽانا ('شهر') يا اورو، جنهن جو عام طور تي مطلب 'جڳهه' آهي، شهرن لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن. انتظامي ڪائونسل جيڪا انهن شهرن کي هلائي ٿي ان کي ڪنڙ ۾ پورو سبهي يا ناگارا سبهي سڏيو ويندو آهي، شهر جي حدن اندر رهندڙ ماڻهن جي تعداد تي منحصر آهي.  
===پاڪستان===
{{Main|پاڪستان جي شهرن/قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Thari Road - panoramio - kamran.solangi (1).jpg|thumb|[[سيٺارجا]]، [[سنڌ]]]]
پاڪستان ۾، 2023ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ڪنهن علائقي کي ”قصبو“ (Town) سڏرائڻ لاءِ اتي جي آبادي 10,000 کان وڌيڪ ۽ 100,000 کان گهٽ هجڻ لازمي آهي. پاڪستان ۾، هڪ قصبو عام طور تي ڪيترن ئي ڳوٺن ۽ ٻهراڙي وارن علائقن سان گھريل هوندو آهي ۽ مارڪيٽ طور ڪم ڪندو آهي. هاري پنهنجا فصل وڪڻڻ ۽ پنهنجو سامان خريد ڪرڻ لاءِ آڻيندا آهن. تقريبن قصبن ۾ هڪ هاءِ اسڪول ۽ هڪ ڳوٺاڻي صحت مرڪز هوندو  آهي.

===پولينڊ===
{{Main|پولينڊ ۾ شهرن ۽ قصبن جي فهرست}} 
[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[پولينڊ]] ۾ زاموسچ ([[Zamość]]) هڪ مثالي يوٽوپيائي شهر آهي. ان کي 1992 ۾ [[عالمي ورثو ماڳ|يونيسڪو جي عالمي ورثي واري]] جڳهه قرار ڏنو ويو.]]
پولش ٻولي ۾، شهر ۽ قصبي جي وچ ۾ ڪو به لساني فرق ناهي، ٻنهي جو ترجمو مياسٽو ({{lang|pl|miasto}}) آهي. ٻنهي لاءِ لفظ مياسٽو آهي، جيڪو ڳوٺاڻن آبادين جي قسمن کان مختلف آباديءَ جي هڪ صورت آهي: ڳوٺ (wieś)، پرزيسيوولڪ، اوساڊا، يا ڪولونيا، پولينڊ ۾ مقامي علائقن ۽ انهن جي حصن جي درجه بندي ڏسو. شهر سڀ کان وڏيون ميونسپلٽيون آهن، جن کي شهر جي ميئر (پريزيڊن  مياسٽا، {{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}} لفظي طور تي ترجمو: شهر جو صدر) پاران منظم ڪرڻ جي ذريعي سڃاڻپ ڪئي ويندي آهي، بجاءِ شهر جي ميئر (برميسٽرز) جي شهر جي ايگزيڪيوٽو جي سربراهه جي طور تي، ان ڪري غير رسمي طور تي مياسٽو پريزيڊنڪي سڏيو ويندو آهي، اهڙي امتياز سان خودڪار طريقي سان ميونسپلٽيون يا ته 100,000 کان وڌيڪ رهواسين (في الحال 37) يا انهن کي ڏنو ويندو آهي جيڪي پوويٽ حقن سان شهر جي حيثيت مان لطف اندوز ٿين ٿا (في الحال 66). 2022 تائين، سڀئي اڳوڻو گروپ بعد ۾ فٽ ٿين ٿا، جيتوڻيڪ ماضي ۾ هميشه ائين نه هو. بهرحال، تاريخي يا سياسي سببن جي ڪري ڪيتريون ئي استثناون آهن، جڏهن ڪا ميونسپلٽي انهن ٻنهي شرطن مان ڪنهن کي به پورو نه ڪري ٿي پر ان جي باوجود شهر جي حيثيت رکي ٿي، جنهن ۾ پولينڊ جي اڳوڻي وائيووڊشپ (1975-1998) جي صرف 3 گاديءَ جا هنڌ شامل آهن جيڪي مٿي ذڪر ڪيل معيارن کي پورو نه ٿا ڪن، انهي سان گڏ 38 وڌيڪ ميونسپلٽيون جيڪي ڪنهن به ذڪر ڪيل درجي ۾ نه ٿيون اچن پر ان جي باوجود غير واضح تاريخي سببن جي ڪري اڳئين ڏنل حيثيت کي برقرار رکڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي آهي. شهرن کي ڪڏهن ڪڏهن مياستيڪزڪو سڏيو وڃي ٿو، هڪ معمولي چوڻي جيڪا ڪجهه هزار رهاڪن سان علائقن لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي. اهڙن علائقن ۾ هڪ ٽائون ميئر (برميسٽرز) ٽائون سربراهه طور هوندو آهي. {{lang|pl|burmistrz}}

قصبن/شهر جا حق سرڪاري قانون سازي ذريعي عطا ڪيا ويندا آهن؛ نوان قصبا/شهر حڪومت پاران سال جي پهرين ڏينهن کان لاڳو ٿيندڙ سالياني ضابطي ۾ مقرر ڪيا ويندا آهن. ڪجھ آباديون ڳوٺ ئي رهنديون آهن جيتوڻيڪ انهن جي آبادي ڪيترن ئي ننڍن شهرن کان وڌيڪ آهي، بنيادي طور تي يورپي زرعي فنڊ فار رورل ڊولپمينٽ جي اهليت نه وڃائڻ لاءِ. 30 اپريل 2022 تائين، پولينڊ ۾ ڪل 2477 گمينا (gmina: ميونسپلٽيون) آهن، جن ۾ 1513 ڳوٺاڻا گمينا شامل آهن، جڏهن ته باقي 968 ۾ شهر ۽ قصبا شامل آهن. انهن مان، 666 شهر شهري-ڳوٺاڻي گمينا جو حصو آهن جڏهن ته 302 شهر ۽ قصبا شهري گمينا جي طور تي الڳ الڳ آهن. آخري گروپ ۾ 107 شهر شامل آهن (هڪ صدارتي مياسٽا جي حڪومت هيٺ)، جنهن ۾ 66 شهر پوويٽ حقن سان گڏ آهن. آخري گروپ ۾ 37 شهر 100,000 کان وڌيڪ آهن، جن ۾ 18 شهر شامل آهن جيڪي وائيووڊ يا وائيووڊشپ سيجمڪ جي سيٽ طور ڪم ڪن ٿا، جن کي غير رسمي طور تي وائيووڊشپ شهر سڏيو ويندو آهي. 

===ڪينيڊا===
{{Main|ڪينيڊا ۾ قصبن جي فهرست|ڪينيڊا ۾ ميونسپل حڪومت}}
ڪينيڊا ۾ هڪ قصبي جي قانوني تعريف صوبي يا علائقي جي لحاظ کان مختلف هوندي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ ته هر هڪ کي پنهنجي حدن اندر شهرن، شهرن ۽ ٻين قسمن جي ميونسپل تنظيمن کي بيان ڪرڻ ۽ قانون سازي ڪرڻ جو اختيار حاصل آهي.

ڪيوبيڪ صوبو ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو شهرن ۽ شهرن جي وچ ۾ قانون جي تحت ڪو به فرق نٿو ڪري. فرانسيسي ۾ ڳوٺ ۽ وِل جي وچ ۾ ڪو به وچولي سطح ناهي (ميونسپلٽي هڪ انتظامي اصطلاح آهي جيڪو عام طور تي قانوني طور تي لاڳو ٿئي ٿو، نه ته جاگرافيائي وجود تي)، تنهن ڪري ٻنهي کي وِل جي واحد قانوني حيثيت هيٺ گڏ ڪيو ويو آهي. جڏهن ته انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن ۾ هڪ غير رسمي ترجيح موجود ٿي سگهي ٿي ته ڪنهن به انفرادي وِل کي عام طور تي شهر يا شهر طور حوالو ڏنو وڃي ٿو، قانون جي تحت اهڙو فرق ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو به فرق ۽ ڪو به مقصدي قانوني معيار موجود ناهي.

اونٽاريو ميونسپلٽيز کي اجازت ڏئي ٿو ته اهي جيڪو به انتظامي اصطلاح چاهين، شهرن، شهرن ۽ ڳوٺن جي وچ ۾ ڪو به قانوني فرق نه هجڻ جي ڪري چونڊي سگهن. ان جي بدران، ٽورانٽو ۽ اوٽاوا جي استثنا سان، سڀئي ميونسپلٽيز ميونسپلٽيز ايڪٽ جي تحت ٽن قانوني درجن مان هڪ ۾ اچي وڃن ٿيون: سنگل ٽائر (يعني شهر جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي اندر واقع آهن پر جيڪي ميونسپل مقصدن لاءِ الڳ سمجهيا وڃن ٿا جهڙوڪ هيملٽن)، لوئر ٽائر (يعني ميونسپلٽيز جيڪي هڪ علائقي يا ڪائونٽي جو حصو آهن جهڙوڪ سينٽ ڪيٿرائنز)، يا اپر ٽائر (يعني علائقائي ميونسپلٽيز جهڙوڪ نياگرا).

legal definition of a town in Canada varies by [[Provinces and territories of Canada|province or territory]], as each has jurisdiction over defining and legislating towns, cities and other types of municipal organization within its own boundaries.

The province of [[Quebec]] is unique in that it makes no distinction under law between towns and cities. There is no intermediate level in French between {{lang|fr|village}} and {{lang|fr|ville}} (''municipality'' is an administrative term usually applied to a legal, not geographical entity), so both are combined under the single legal status of ''[[ville]]''. While an informal preference may exist among English speakers as to whether any individual {{lang|fr|ville}} is commonly referred to as a city or as a town, no distinction and no objective legal criteria exist to make such a distinction under law.

[[Ontario]] allows municipalities to select whichever administrative term they like with no legal distinction existing between towns, townships, cities, and villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://www2.oboa.on.ca/digitizer/pdf/106.pdf | title=The municipal councillor's guide 2014 | access-date=16 August 2024 | website=www2.oboa.on.ca}}&lt;/ref&gt; Instead all municipalities, with the exception of Toronto and Ottawa, fall into one of three legal categories under the Municipalities Act: Single-tier (I.e. towns that are located within a region or county but that are considered separate for municipal purposes such as [[Hamilton, Ontario|Hamilton]]), lower-tier (i.e. municipalities that are part of a region or county such as [[St. Catharines]]), or upper-tier (i.e. regional municipalities such as [[Regional Municipality of Niagara|Niagara]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.amo.on.ca/about-us/municipal-101/ontario-municipalities | title=Ontario Municipalities &amp;#124; AMO }}&lt;/ref&gt;  Accordingly, many larger municipalities continue to use the title of town due to it better reflecting the character of the municipality. For example, [[Oakville, Ontario|Oakville]] (2021 Population: 213,759) is the largest municipality to use the title of town to reflect its largely suburban character while other municipalities such as [[Richmond Hill, Ontario|Richmond Hill]] (2021 Population: 202,022) have opted to change their status from &quot;town&quot; to &quot;city&quot; to encourage investment.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.yorkregion.com/news/council/richmond-hill-changes-status-from-town-to-city/article_d325a940-7cba-5c36-b905-5b42ee49de06.html? | title=Richmond Hill changes status from town to city | date=26 March 2019 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Chile ===
In [[Chile]], towns (Spanish: {{lang|es|pueblos}}) are defined by the National Statistics Institute (INE) as an urban entity with a population from 2001 to 5000 or an area with a population from 1001 to 2000 and an established economic activity.

===Czechia===
{{Main|Obec|List of cities and towns in the Czech Republic}}

In [[Czech Republic|Czechia]], a municipality can obtain the title of a [[statutory city (Czech Republic)|city]] ({{langx|cs|statutární město}}), town ({{langx|cs|město}}) or [[Městys|market town]] ({{langx|cs|městys}}). The title is granted by law.

Statutory cities (in English usually called just &quot;cities&quot;), which are defined by law no. 128/2000 Coll.,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.zakonyprolidi.cz/cs/2000-128|title=Consolidated version of Law no. 128/200 Coll|publisher=Zakonyprolidi.cz|language=cs|date=15 May 2000|access-date=18 April 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; can define their own self-governing municipal districts. There are 26 such cities, in addition to [[Prague]], which is a ''de facto'' statutory city. All the Czech municipalities with more than 40,000 inhabitants are cities.

Town and market town are above all ceremonious honorary degrees, referring to population, history and regional significance of a municipality. [[Obec#Statistics|As the statistics of Czech municipalities]] shows, towns usually have between 1,000 and 35,000 inhabitants, with median around 4,000 and average around 6,500. Nowadays a municipality must have at least 3,000 inhabitants to have the right to request the town title. Market towns usually have between 500 and 4,000 inhabitants, with median and average both around 1,000.

=== Denmark ===
In Denmark, in many contexts no distinction is made between &quot;city&quot;, &quot;town&quot; and &quot;village&quot;; all three translate as {{Lang|da|by}}. In more specific use, for small villages and [[hamlet (place)|hamlets]] the word {{lang|da|landsby}} (meaning 'country town') is used, while the Danish equivalent of English ''city'' is {{lang|da|storby}} (meaning 'large town'). For formal purposes, [[urban area]]s having at least 200 inhabitants are considered {{Lang|da|by}}.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dst.dk/Vejviser/dokumentation/Varedeklarationer/emnegruppe/emne.aspx?sysrid=000766 |title=Byopgørelsen pr. 1. januar – Varedeklaration – Danmarks Statistik |publisher=Dst.dk |date=22 March 2005 |access-date=6 August 2010}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically some towns held various privileges, the most important of which was the right to hold market. They were administered separately from the rural areas in both fiscal, military and legal matters. Such towns are known as {{lang|da|købstad}} (roughly the same meaning as ''borough'' albeit deriving from a different etymology) and they retain the exclusive right to the title even after the last vestiges of their privileges vanished through the reform of the local administration carried through in 1970.

===Estonia===
In [[Estonia]], there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|et|linn}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs. There are 30 [[Municipalities of Estonia|municipal towns]] ({{lang|et|omavalitsuslik linn}}) in Estonia and a [[List of cities and towns in Estonia|further 17 towns]], which have merged with a municipal parish ({{lang|et|vallasisene linn}}).

===Finland===
[[File:Vammala, Onkiniemenkatu.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Sastamala]], Finland]]
In Finland, there is no distinction between a town and a city as the word {{lang|fi|kaupunki}} is used for both bigger and smaller settlements, which are bigger than villages and boroughs; although when talking about the word ''town'', the word {{lang|fi|pikkukaupunki}} is used ({{lang|fi|pikku}} means 'little' or 'small'). There are over one hundred [[Municipalities of Finland|municipal towns]] in Finland.

=== France ===
[[File:Salins les Bains 2.JPG|thumb|The town of [[Salins-les-Bains]], France]]
From an administrative standpoint, the smallest level of local authorities are all called [[Communes of France|''communes'']]. They can have anywhere from a handful to millions of inhabitants, and France has 36,000 of them. The French term for ''town'' is ''{{ill|bourg (town)|lt=bourg|fr|Bourg|vertical-align=sup}}''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.cnrtl.fr/definition/bourg |title=BOURG: Définition de BOURG |date=n.d. |website=Centre National de Ressources Textuelles et Lexicales' |access-date=22 March 2020 |language=fr |trans-title=BOURG: Definition of BOURG }}&lt;/ref&gt; but French laws generally do not distinguish between towns and cities which are all commonly called {{Lang|fr|villes}}. However, some laws do treat these authorities differently based on the population and different rules apply to the three big cities Paris, [[Lyon]] and [[Marseille]]. For historical reasons, [[List of French villages destroyed in World War I|six communes]] in the [[Meuse (department)|Meuse]] département exist as independent administrative entities despite having no inhabitants at all.

For statistical purposes, the national statistical institute ([[INSEE]]) operates a distinction between urban areas with fewer than 2,000 inhabitants and bigger communes, the latter being called {{lang|fr|villes}}. Smaller settlements are usually called {{lang|fr|villages}}.

=== Germany ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Germany}}

{{redirect|Großstadt|the painting|Metropolis (Dix){{!}}''Metropolis'' (Dix)}}
[[File:Putbus (2011-05-21) 14.JPG|thumb|[[Putbus]] on [[Rügen|Rügen Island]], Germany]]
Germans do not, in general, differentiate between 'city' and 'town'. The German word for both is {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, as it is the case in many other languages that do not differentiate between these concepts. The word for a 'village', as a smaller settlement, is {{Lang|de|Dorf}}. However, the International Statistics Conference of 1887 defined different sizes of {{Lang|de|Stadt}}, based on their population size, as follows: {{Lang|de|Landstadt}} ('country town'; under 5,000), {{Lang|de|Kleinstadt}} ('small town'; 5,000 to 20,000), {{Lang|de|Mittelstadt}} ('middle town'; between 20,000 and 100,000) and {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} (&quot;large town&quot;; 100,000 to 1,000,000).&lt;ref&gt;Universität Dortmund: [http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf Kleine und mittlere Städte – Blaupausen der Großstadt?] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240222110058/http://www.raumplanung.uni-dortmund.de/srp/web/dokumente/downloads/64_SRPapers%20Nr.1.pdf |date=2024-02-22 }}, Dokumentation des Expertenkolloquiums am 29. April 2004 in Dortmund&lt;/ref&gt; The term {{Lang|de|Großstadt}} may be translated as 'city'. In addition, Germans may speak of a {{Lang|de|Millionenstadt}}, a city with anywhere between one and five million inhabitants (such as [[Cologne]], [[Munich]], [[Hamburg]] and Berlin). Also, a city with more than five million inhabitants is often referred to as a {{Lang|de|Megastadt}} (commonly translated as [[megacity]]).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Megastadt |url=https://www.spektrum.de/lexikon/geographie/megastadt/4993 |access-date=25 June 2022 |website=www.spektrum.de |language=de}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Historically, many settlements became a {{Lang|de|Stadt}} by being awarded a [[Town privileges|''Stadtrecht'']] in medieval times. In modern German language use, the historical importance, the existence of central functions (education, retail etc.) and the population density of an urban place might also be taken as characteristics of a {{Lang|de|Stadt}}. The modern local government organisation is subject to the laws of each [[States of Germany|state]] and refers to a {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} ([[States of Germany#Municipalities (Gemeinden)|municipality]]), regardless of its historic title. While most {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}} form part of a {{Lang|de|Landkreis}} ([[States of Germany#Administrative districts (Kreise)|district]]) on a higher tier of local government, larger towns and cities may have the status of a {{Lang|de|kreisfreie Stadt}}, combining both the powers of a municipality and a district.

Designations in different states are as diverse as e.g. in Australian States and Territories, and differ from state to state. In some German states, the words {{Lang|de|Markt}} ('market'), {{Lang|de|Marktflecken}} (both used in southern Germany) or {{Lang|de|Flecken}} ('spot'; northern Germany e.g. in [[Lower Saxony]]) designate a town-like residential community between {{Lang|de|Gemeinde}} and {{Lang|de|Stadt}} with special importance to its outer conurbation area. Historically those had {{Lang|de|Marktrecht}} (market right) but not full town privileges; see [[Market town]]. The legal denomination of a specific settlement may differ from its common designation (e.g. {{Lang|de|Samtgemeinde}} – a legal term in [[Lower Saxony]] for a group of villages [{{Lang|de|Dorf}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Dörfer}}] with common local government created by combining municipalities [{{Lang|de|Gemeinde}}, pl. {{Lang|de|Gemeinden}}]).

=== Greece and Cyprus ===
In ordinary speech, Greeks use the word {{Lang|el|χωριό}} ('village') to refer to smaller settlements and the word {{Lang|el|πόλη}} or {{Lang|el|πολιτεία}} ('city') to refer to larger ones. Careful speakers may also use the word {{Lang|el|κωμόπολη}} to refer to towns with a population of 2,000–9,999.

In Greek administrative law there used to be a distinction between {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, i.e. municipalities with more than 10,000 inhabitants or considered important for some other geographical (county seats), historical or ecclesiastical (bishops' seats) reason, and κοινότητες, referring to smaller self-governing units, mostly villages. A sweeping reform, carried out in two stages early in the 21st century, merged most {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}} with the nearest {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}, dividing the whole country into 325 self-governing {{Lang|el|δήμοι}}. The former municipalities survive as administrative subdivisions ({{Lang|el|δημοτικά διαμερίσματα}}, {{Lang|el|δημοτικές ενότητες}}).

Cyprus, including the Turkish-occupied areas, is also divided into 39 {{Lang|el|δήμοι}} (in principle, with at least 5,000 inhabitants, though there are exceptions) and 576 {{Lang|el|κοινότητες}}.

=== Hong Kong ===

{{Main|List of cities and towns in Hong Kong#Towns|l1 = List of cities and towns in Hong Kong}}

[[File:ShatinTownHall 20070529.jpg|thumb|Nearly every town in Hong Kong has its own town hall. The picture shows the [[Sha Tin Town Hall]] in the town of [[Sha Tin]].]]

Hong Kong started developing new towns in the 1950s, to accommodate exponential population increase. The first new towns included [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]] and [[Kwun Tong]]. In the late 1960s and the 1970s, another stage of new town developments was launched. Nine new towns have been developed so far. Land use is carefully planned and development provides plenty of room for public housing projects. Rail transport is usually available at a later stage. The first towns are [[Sha Tin New Town|Sha Tin]], [[Tsuen Wan New Town|Tsuen Wan]], [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] and [[Tseung Kwan O]]. [[Tuen Mun New Town|Tuen Mun]] was intended to be self-reliant, but was not successful and turned into a [[bedroom community]] like the other new towns. More recent developments are [[Tin Shui Wai New Town|Tin Shui Wai]] and [[North Lantau New Town|North Lantau (Tung Chung-Tai Ho)]].

=== Hungary ===
In Hungary there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Hungarian is {{lang|hu|város}}). Nevertheless, the expressions formed by adding the adjectives {{lang|hu|kis}} ('small') and {{lang|hu|nagy}} ('large') to the beginning of the root word (e.g. {{lang|hu|nagyváros}}) have been normalized to differentiate between cities and towns (towns being smaller, therefore bearing the name {{lang|hu|kisváros}}.) In Hungary, a village can gain the status of {{lang|hu|város}} ('town'), if it meets a set of diverse conditions for quality of life and development of certain public services and utilities (e.g. having a local secondary school or installing full-area sewage collection pipe network). Every year the Minister of Internal Affairs selects candidates from a committee-screened list of applicants, whom the President of Republic usually affirms by issuing a bill of town's rank to them. Since being a town carries extra fiscal support from the government, many relatively small villages try to win the status of {{lang|hu|városi rang}} ('town rank') nowadays.

Before the [[End of communism in Hungary|fall of communism]] in 1990, Hungarian villages with fewer than 10,000 residents were not allowed to become towns. Recently some settlements as small as 2,500 people have received the rank of town (e.g. Visegrád, Zalakaros or Gönc) and meeting the conditions of development is often disregarded to quickly elevate larger villages into towns. As of middle 2013, there are 346 towns in Hungary, encompassing some 69% of the entire population.

Towns of more than 50,000 people are able to gain the status of {{lang|hu|megyei jogú város}} (town with the rights of a [[county]]), which allows them to maintain a higher degree of [[Public service|services]]. (There are a few exceptions, when towns of fewer than 50,000 people gained the status: [[Érd]], [[Hódmezővásárhely]], [[Salgótarján]] and [[Szekszárd]])&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.ksh.hu/docs/hun/xftp/idoszaki/regiok/veszpremmjv10.pdf Megyei jogú városok] – essay of [[Hungarian Central Statistical Office]] (Hungarian, July 2012)&lt;/ref&gt; As of middle 2013, there are only 23 such towns in Hungary.&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai &quot;Magyarország megyei jogú városai&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210416025240/http://www.terport.hu/telepulesek/telepulestipusok/megyei-jogu-varosok/magyarorszag-megyei-jogu-varosai |date=16 April 2021 }} – list of Hungarian town with the rights of a county on &quot;Térport&quot; related webpage of Ministry of National Development (Hungarian, access date: 4 May 2013.)&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Iran ===
In contemporary [[Persian language|Persian]] texts, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|fa-latn|Shahr}} ({{lang|fa|شهر}}). In older Persian texts (until the first half of the 20th century), the Arabic word {{lang|ar|Qasabeh}} ({{lang|ar|قصبه}}) was used for a town. However, in the past 50 years,{{As of?|date=February 2022}} this word has become obsolete.

There is a word in Persian which is used for special sort of satellite townships and city neighborhoods. It is {{lang|fa|Shahrak}} ({{lang|fa|شهرک}}), (lit.: 'small city').
Another smaller type of town or neighborhood in a big city is called {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} ({{lang|fa|کوی}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrak}} and {{lang|fa-latn|Kuy}} each have different legal definitions.
Large cities such as [[Tehran]], [[Mashhad]], [[Isfahan]], [[Tabriz]], etc. which have millions inhabitants are referred to as {{lang|fa-latn|Kalan-shahr}} ({{lang|fa|کلان‌شهر}}), [[metropole]].

The pace in which different large villages have gained city status in [[Iran]] shows a dramatic increase in the last two decades.

Bigger cities and towns usually are centers of a [[township]] (in Persian: {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} ({{lang|fa|شهرستان}}). {{lang|fa-latn|Shahrestan}} itself is a subdivision of {{lang|fa-latn|Ostan}} ({{lang|fa|استان}}), 'province'.

=== Iraq ===
The word {{lang|ar-latn|Jarayeh}} ({{lang|ar|جرَية}}) is used to describe villages, the word {{lang|ar-latn|Garmat}} ({{lang|ar|كَرمة}}) to describe towns, and the word {{lang|ar-latn|Wilaya}} ({{lang|ar|ولاية}}) to describe cities.

=== Ireland ===
{{Main|List of populated places in the Republic of Ireland}}

The '''Local Government act 2001''' provides that from 1 January 2002 (section 10 subsection (3)):
{{blockquote|Within the county in which they are situated and of which they form part, there continue to be such other local government areas as are set out in Schedule 6 which –{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(a) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 1 of Part 1 of that Schedule, shall be known as boroughs, and
|(b) in the case of the areas set out in Chapter 2 of Part 1 and Part 2 of that Schedule,}}
shall be known as towns, and in this Act a reference to a town shall include a reference to a borough.}}

These provisions affect the replacement of the boroughs, towns and urban districts which existed before then. Similar reforms in the nomenclature of local authorities (but not their functions) are affected by section 11 part 17 of the act includes provision (section 185(2))
{{blockquote|Qualified electors of a town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census or such other figure as the Minister may from time to time prescribe by regulations, and not having a [[town council]], may make a proposal in accordance with paragraph (b) for the establishment of such a council}}
and contains provisions enabling the establishment of new town councils and provisions enabling the dissolution of existing or new town councils in certain circumstances

The reference to &quot;town having a population of at least 7,500 as ascertained at the last preceding census&quot; hands much of the power relating to defining what is in fact a town over to the Central Statistics Office and their criteria are published as part of each census.

====Planning and Development Act 2000====
Another reference to the Census and its role in determining what is or is not a town for some administrative purpose is in the Planning and Development act 2000 (part II chapter I which provides for Local area plans):

{{blockquote|A local area plan shall be made in respect of an area which—{{unbulleted list|item_style=margin-left: 1.5em; text-indent:-1.5em
|(i) is designated as a town in the most recent census of population, other than a town designated as a suburb or environs in that census,
|(ii) has a population in excess of 2,000, and
|(iii) is situated within the functional area of a planning authority which is a county council.}}}}

====Central Statistics Office criteria====
These are set out in full at [https://www.cso.ie/en/media/csoie/census/documents/census_2006_Appendices.pdf 2006 Census Appendices].

In short they speak of &quot;towns with legally defined boundaries&quot; (i.e. those established by the Local Government Act 2001) and the remaining 664 as &quot;census towns&quot;, defined by themselves since 1971 as &quot;a cluster of 50 or more occupied dwellings in which within a distance of 800 meters there is a nucleus of 30 occupied houses on both sides of the road or twenty occupied [[House]]s on one side of the road&quot;. There is also a &quot;200 meter criterion&quot; for determining whether a house is part of a census town.

===Isle of Man===
There are four settlements which are historically and officially designated as towns (Douglas, Ramsey, Peel, Castletown); however
* Peel is also sometimes referred to as a city by virtue of its cathedral.
* Onchan and Port Erin are both larger in population than the smallest &quot;town&quot;, having expanded in modern times, but are designated as villages.

=== Israel ===
[[Modern Hebrew]] does provide a word for the concept of a town: {{lang|he-latn|Ayara}} ({{lang|he|עיירה}}), derived from {{lang|he-latn|Ir}} ({{lang|he|עיר}}), the biblical word for 'city'. However, the term {{lang|he-latn|ayara}} is normally used only to describe towns in foreign countries, i.e. urban areas of limited population, particularly when the speaker is attempting to evoke nostalgic or romantic attitudes. The term is also used to describe a [[shtetl]], a pre-[[The Holocaust|Holocaust]] Eastern European Jewish town.

Within Israel, established urban areas are always referred to as cities (with one notable exception explained below) regardless of their actual size. Israeli law does not define any nomenclature for distinction between urban areas based on size or any other factor – meaning that all urban settlements in Israel are legally referred to as &quot;cities&quot;.

The exception to the above is the term {{lang|he-latn|Ayeret Pituakh}} ({{lang|he|עיירת פיתוח}}, lit. 'Development Town') which is applied to certain cities in Israel based on the reasons for their establishment. These cities, created during the earlier decades of Israeli independence (1950s and 1960s, generally), were designed primarily to serve as commercial and transportation hubs, connecting smaller agricultural settlements in the northern and southern regions of the country (the &quot;Periphery&quot;) to the major urban areas of the coastal and central regions. Some of these development towns have since grown to a comparatively large size, and yet are still referred to as development towns, particularly when the speaker wishes to emphasize their (often low) socio-economic status. Nonetheless, they are rarely (if ever) referred to simply as towns; when referring to one directly, it will be called either a development town or a city, depending on context.

=== Italy ===
[[File:Satriano_di_Lucania_centro.JPG|thumb|[[Satriano di Lucania]], a town in the [[Melandro|Melandro Valley]], [[Basilicata]], south Italy]]
Although Italian provides different words for city ({{lang|it|città}}), town ({{lang|it|cittadina or paese}}) and village ({{lang|it|villaggio}}, old-fashioned, or {{Lang|it|[[frazione]]}}, most common), no legal definitions exist as to how settlements must be classified. Administratively, both towns and cities are ruled as [[comuni]]/[[comune]]s, while villages might be subdivisions of the former.
Generally, in everyday speech, a town is larger or more populated than a village and smaller than a city. Various cities and towns together may form a metropolitan area ({{lang|it|area metropolitana}}). A city can also be a culturally, economically, or politically prominent community with respect to surrounding towns. Moreover, a city can be such by [[President of Italy|Presidential]] decree. A town, in contrast, can be an inhabited place which would elsewhere be styled a city, but has not received any official recognition.
Remarkable exceptions do exist: for instance, [[Bassano del Grappa]], was given the status of {{lang|it|città}} in 1760 by [[Francesco Loredan]]'s [[Doge (title)|dogal]] decree and has since then carried this title. Also, the Italian word for 'town' ({{lang|it|paese}} with lowercase P) must not be confused with the Italian word for 'country/nation' ({{lang|it|Paese}} usually with uppercase P).

=== Japan ===
In Japan, city status (市 ''[[Cities of Japan|shi]]'') was traditionally reserved for only a few particularly large settlements. Over time however the necessary conditions to be a city have been watered down and today the only loose rules that apply are having a population over 50,000 and over 60% of the population in a &quot;city centre&quot;. In recent times many small villages and towns have merged in order to form a city despite seeming geographically to be just a collection of villages.

The distinction between towns (町 ''[[Towns of Japan|machi/chō]]'') and villages (村 ''[[Villages of Japan|mura/son]]'') is largely unwritten and purely one of population size when the settlement was founded with villages having under 10,000 and towns 10,000–50,000.

=== Korea ===
{{main|Eup (administrative division)}}

In both of South Korea and North Korea, towns are called ''[[Eup (administrative division)|eup]]'' ({{lang|ko|읍}}). Most cities in North Korea are built around a central square. Perhaps it is to symbolize the importance of the society over the individual, or just a handy place for mass gatherings and celebrations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=22 October 2020 |title=What is a North Korean City Really Like? – Koryo Tours |url=https://koryogroup.com/blog/what-is-a-north-korean-city-really-like |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=koryogroup.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Latvia ===
[[File:Valka, Semināra iela (1).JPG|thumb|The town of [[Valka]], [[Latvia]]]]
In [[Latvia]], towns and cities are indiscriminately called {{lang|lv|pilsēta}} in singular form. The name is a [[Contraction (grammar)|contraction]] of two Latvian words: {{lang|lv|pils}} ('castle') and {{lang|lv|sēta}} ('fence'), making it very obvious what is meant by the word – what is situated between the castle and the castle fence. However, a city can be called {{lang|lv|lielpilsēta}} (big city) or ''mazpilsēta'' (small city/town) in reference to its size. Latvia also has administrative units such as state cities({{ill|valstspilsēta|lv|Valstspilsēta|vertical-align=sup}}) A village is called {{lang|lv|ciemats}} or {{lang|lv|ciems}} in Latvian.

=== Lithuania ===
{{main|List of towns in Lithuania}}

In [[Lithuania]]n, a city is called ''{{ill|miestas|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' and a town is called ''{{ill|miestelis|lt|vertical-align=sup}}'' (literally 'small {{Lang|lt|miestas}}'). [[Metropolis]]es are called {{ill|lt=''didmiestis''|didmiestis|lt|didmiestis|vertical-align=sup}} (literally 'big {{Lang|lt|miestas}}').

=== Malaysia ===
In [[Malaysia]], a town ({{langx|ms|bandar}} or ''kota'') is the area administered by a municipal council ({{lang|ms|Majlis Perbandaran}}).

===New Zealand===
{{expand-section|date=August 2025}}
In [[New Zealand]], the term &quot;town&quot; has no current statutory meaning. Certain towns are regionally part of cities.

=== Netherlands ===
[[File:41012 Zuidhavenpoort zierikzee Met Noordhavenpoort.jpg|thumb|The small town of [[Zierikzee]], Netherlands]]
Before 1848 there was a legal distinction between {{lang|nl|stad}} and non-{{lang|nl|stad}} parts of the country, but the word no longer has any legal significance. About 220 places were granted {{lang|nl|stadsrechten}} ('city rights') and are still so called for historical and traditional reasons, though the word is also used for large urban areas that never obtained such rights. Because of this, in the Netherlands, no distinction is made between ''city'' and ''town''; both translate as {{lang|nl|stad}}. A hamlet ({{lang|nl|gehucht}}) usually has fewer than 1,000 inhabitants, a village ({{lang|nl|dorp}}) ranges from 1,000 up to 25,000 inhabitants, and a place above 25,000 can call itself either village or city, mostly depending on historic reasons or size of the place. As an example, [[The Hague]] never gained city rights, but because of its size – more than half a million inhabitants – it is regarded as a city. [[Staverden]], with only 40 inhabitants, would be a hamlet, but because of its city rights it may call itself a city.

For statistical purposes, the Netherlands has three sorts of cities:
* {{lang|nl|kleine stad}} (small city): 50,000–99,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|middelgrote stad}} (medium-sized city): 100,000–249,999 inhabitants
* {{lang|nl|grote stad}} (large city): 250,000 or more

Only [[Amsterdam]], [[Rotterdam]], [[The Hague]] and [[Utrecht]] are regarded as a {{lang|nl|grote stad}}.

=== Norway ===
In Norway, ''city'' and ''town'' both translate to [[By (city or town)|''by'']], even if a city may be referred to as {{lang|no|storby}} ('large town'). They are all part of and administered as a ''[[Municipalities of Norway|kommune]]'' ('[[municipality]]').

Norway has had inland the northernmost city in the world: Hammerfest.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Nikel |first=David |date=2020-07-05 |title=Hammerfest: The Town of Norway's High North |url=https://www.lifeinnorway.net/hammerfest-norway/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=Life in Norway |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Hammerfest: In The Far North of Norway |url=https://www.scandi.co.uk/travel/hammerfest/ |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=SCANDI |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt; Now the record is held by New Ålesund on the Norwegian island Svalbard.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Northernmost Cities |url=https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-city-rankings/northernmost-cities |access-date=2025-08-22 |website=World Population Review |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Brygga i Tønsberg.JPG|thumb|The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]]. Originally a [[market town]], it is today a big city.]]
The oldest town in Norway is [[Tønsberg]], founded during the [[Viking Age]]. The year when the town was founded and which person who founded it is unknown, but [[Snorri Sturluson]] says in the [[Saga of Harald Fairhair]] that the [[market town]] existed before the [[Battle of Hafrsfjord]] in the year 872. Nowadays Tønsberg is considered a city ({{lang|no|storby}}).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Tønsbergs historie|url=https://www.visitvestfold.com/no/tonsberg/artikler/tonsbergs-historie/|website=Visit Vestfold|access-date=16 October 2023|language=nb}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Philippines ===
{{Main|List of cities and municipalities in the Philippines|Municipalities of the Philippines}}

[[File:Loboc Bohol 1.jpg|thumb|The town center of [[Loboc, Bohol]]]]
In the [[Philippines]], the local official equivalent of the town is the [[Philippine municipality|municipality]] (Filipino: {{lang|fil|bayan}}). Every municipality, or town, in the country has a mayor ({{lang|fil|alkalde}}) and a vice mayor ({{lang|fil|bise alkalde}}) as well as local town officials ([[Sangguniang Bayan]]). Philippine towns, otherwise called municipalities, are composed of a number of villages and communities called ''[[barangays]]'' with one (or a few cluster of) {{lang|fil|barangay}}(s) serving as the town center or ''[[poblacion]]''.

Unique in Philippine towns is that they have fixed budget, population and land requirements to become as such, i.e. from a {{lang|fil|barangay}}, or a cluster of such, to a town, or to become cities, i.e. from town to a city. Respectively, examples of these are the town of [[Braulio E. Dujali, Davao del Norte|B. E. Dujali]] in [[Davao del Norte]] province, which was formed in 1998 from a cluster of five {{lang|fil|barangays}}, and the city of [[El Salvador, Misamis Oriental|El Salvador]], which was converted from a town to a city in 2007. Each town in the Philippines was classified by its [[Municipalities of the Philippines#Income classification|annual income and budget]].

A sharp, hierarchical distinction exists between Philippine [[Philippine city|cities]] ({{lang|fil|lungsod}} or {{lang|fil|siyudad}}) and towns, as towns in the country are juridically separate from cities, which are typically larger and more populous (some smaller and less populated) and which political and economic status are above those of towns. This was further supported and indicated by the income classification system implemented by the National Department of Finance, to which both cities and towns fell into their respective categories that indicate they are such as stated under Philippine law. However, both towns and cities equally share the status as [[Administrative divisions of the Philippines#Local government units|local government units]] (LGUs) grouped under and belong to [[Provinces of the Philippines|provinces]] and [[Regions of the Philippines|regions]]; both each are composed of {{lang|fil|barangays}} and are governed by a mayor and a vice mayor supplemented by their respective LGU legislative councils. However, despite this some towns in the Philippines are significantly larger than some cities in the Philippines such as [[Rodriguez, Rizal]], [[Santa Maria, Bulacan]] and [[Minglanilla, Cebu]] are actually bigger than some regional centers.

=== Poland ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Poland}}

[[File:Zamość. Ratusz..jpg|thumb|right|[[Zamość]] in Poland is an example of a [[utopia]]n [[ideal town]]. It was declared a [[UNESCO World Heritage Site]] in 1992.]]
In the Polish language, there is no linguistic distinction between a city and a town, both translated {{lang|pl|miasto}}. The word for both is {{lang|pl|miasto}}, as a form of settlement distinct from types of rural settlements: village ({{lang|pl|wieś}}), ''[[przysiółek]]'',  ''{{lang|pl|osada}}'', or ''{{lang|pl|kolonia}}'', see [[Classification of localities and their parts in Poland]]. Cities are the biggest municipalities, distinguished through being managed by a city mayor ({{lang|pl|prezydent miasta}}, literally translated city president) instead of a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the city executive, thus being informally called ''miasto prezydenckie'', with such privilege automatically awarded to municipalities either inhabited by more than 100,000 residents (currently 37) or those enjoying the status of a [[city with powiat rights]] (currently 66). As of 2022, all of the former group fit into the latter, though it was not always the case in the past. There is, however, a number of exemptions due to historic or political reasons, when a municipality meets neither of these two conditions but nevertheless has the city status, including the only 3 capitals of the former [[voivodeships of Poland (1975–1998)]] not meeting the abovementioned criteria, as well as further 38 municipalities which do not fit into any of the mentioned categories but have nevertheless been allowed to keep the earlier awarded status due to unspecified historical reasons. Towns may sometimes be called {{lang|pl|miasteczko}}, a diminutive colloquially used for localities with a few thousand residents. Such localities have a town mayor ({{lang|pl|burmistrz}}) as the head of the town executive.

Town/city rights are conferred by government legislation; new towns/cities are designated by the government in an annual regulation effective from the first day of the year. Some settlements tend to remain villages even though they have a larger population than many smaller towns, primarily in order not to lose eligibility for the [[European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development]]. As of 30 April 2022, there are altogether 2477 municipalities ([[gmina]]) in Poland, including 1513 rural gminas, while the remaining 968 ones contain cities and towns. Among them, 666 towns are part of an urban-rural gmina while 302 cities and towns are standalone as an urban gmina. The latter group includes 107 cities (governed by a ''prezydent miasta''), including 66 [[city with powiat rights|cities with powiat rights]]. 37 cities among the latter group are over 100,000, including 18 cities serving as a seat for [[voivode]] or [[voivodeship sejmik]], informally called voivodeship cities.

=== Portugal ===
Like other Latin cultures, in Portugal a town ({{lang|pt|vila}}) is a populated place larger than a village ({{lang|pt|aldeia}} and smaller than a city ({{lang|pt|cidade}}). Similarly, although these places are not defined under the [[Constitution of Portugal|Portuguese Constitution]] and have no political and administrative functions (with associated organs), they are defined by law,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |title=Law no. 11/82 (Lei das designações e determinação de categoria das povoações), of June 2 |access-date=6 August 2010 |archive-url=https://arquivo.pt/wayback/20100608050009/http%3A//www.povt.qren.pt/tempfiles/20080213151143moptc.pdf |archive-date=8 June 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; and a town must have:
* at least 3,000 voters
* at least half of these services: health unit, pharmacy, cultural centre, public transportation network, post office, commercial food and drinking establishments, primary school and/or bank office

In special cases, villages can receive the status of town if they possess historical, cultural or architectonic importance.

A Portuguese town or city is so merely an urban settlement located in the area of a [[concelho|municipality]], in comparison to the North American context, where they have political functions.

A town can be enterily located inside the area of a single [[freguesia]] (subdivion of a municipality) or can occupy several freguesias.

[[Portuguese heraldry#Municipal heraldry|Portuguese local governments heraldry]] reflects if the seat of the respective freguesia or municipality is a city, town or another type of settlement. The [[coat of arms]] of a local government with a seat in a town bears a mural crown with four towers, while the coat of arms of a local government with a set in a city bears a crown with five towers.{{CN|date=May 2026}}

This difference between towns and cities is still in use in other Portuguese-speaking countries. In Brazil, since the beginning of the 20th century, all municipal seats receive the status of city.

=== Romania ===
{{Main|List of cities and towns in Romania}}

In Romania there is no official distinction between a city and a town (the word for both in Romanian is {{lang|ro|oraş}}). Cities and towns in Romania can have the status either of {{lang|ro|oraş [[municipiu]]}}, conferred to large urban areas, or only {{lang|ro|oraş}} to smaller urban localities. Some settlements remain villages ({{lang|ro|[[Communes of Romania|comune]]}}) even though they have a larger population than other smaller towns.

=== Russia ===
{{Main|Types of inhabited localities in Russia}}

[[File:Vyborg SevernyVal3-5 006 8242.jpg|thumb|The town of [[Vyborg]] in [[Leningrad Oblast]], Russia]]

Unlike English, the Russian language does not distinguish the terms ''city'' and ''town''—both are translated as {{lang|ru|город}} ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}). Occasionally the term {{lang|ru|город}} is applied to [[urban-type settlement]]s as well, even though the status of those is not the same as that of a city/town proper.

In Russia, the criteria an inhabited locality needs to meet in order to be granted city/town ({{lang|ru-latn|gorod}}) status vary in different [[federal subjects of Russia|federal subjects]]. In general, to qualify for this status, an inhabited locality should have more than 12,000 inhabitants and the occupation of no less than 85% of inhabitants must be other than agriculture. However, inhabited localities which were previously granted the city/town status but no longer meet the criteria can still retain the status for historical reasons.

===Singapore===
{{main|New towns of Singapore}}

[[File:1 2014 panorama bishan park aerial gopro dji phantom.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|[[Bishan, Singapore|Bishan]], one of Singapore's towns, is the 38th biggest in terms of geographical size and the 21st most populated planning area in the country.]]
In Singapore, towns are large-scale satellite housing developments which are designed to be self-contained. It includes public housing units, a town centre and other amenities.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Wong|first=Maisy|date=July 2014|title=Estimating the distortionary effects of ethnic quotas in Singapore using housing transactions|journal=Journal of Public Economics|volume=115|pages=131–145|doi=10.1016/j.jpubeco.2014.04.006|s2cid=52236776 |url=https://repository.upenn.edu/real-estate_papers/9|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; Helmed by a hierarchy of commercial developments, ranging from a town centre to precinct-level outlets, there is no need to venture out of town to meet the most common needs of residences. Employment can be found in industrial estates located within several towns. Educational, health care, and recreational needs are also taken care of with the provision of schools, hospitals, parks, sports complexes, and so on. The most populous town in the country is [[Bedok]].

===South Africa===
In South Africa the [[Afrikaans]] term {{lang|af|dorp}} is used interchangeably with the English equivalent ''town''. A town is a settlement that has a size that is smaller than that of a city.

=== Spain ===
In Spain, the equivalent of town would be {{lang|es|villa}}, a population unit between a village ({{lang|es|pueblo}}) and a city ({{lang|es|ciudad}}), and is not defined by the number of inhabitants, but by some historical rights and privileges dating from the Middle Ages, such as the right to hold a market or fair. For instance, while [[Madrid]] is technically a {{lang|es|villa}}, [[Barcelona]], with a smaller population, is known as a city.

=== Sweden ===
{{See also|Stad (Sweden)|Köping}}
[[File:Övre Finngränd 7 Sta Maria 29 Visby Gotland.jpg|thumbnail|View towards [[Visby Cathedral|St Mary's Cathedral]] in [[Visby]], Sweden. Visby is one of the most well-preserved former [[Hanseatic League|Hanseatic]] cities in Sweden and a [[UNESCO]] [[World Heritage Site]]. Today it is the seat of [[Gotland Municipality]].]]

The Swedish language does not differentiate between towns and cities in the English sense of the words; both words are commonly translated as {{lang|sv|stad}}, a term which has no legal significance today. The term {{lang|sv|tätort}} is used for an [[Urban areas in Sweden|urban area]] or a locality, which however is a statistical rather than an administrative concept and encompasses densely settled villages with only 200 inhabitants as well as the major cities. The word ''[[köping]]'' corresponds to an English ''[[market town]]'' ''(chipping)'' or German ''[[wikt:Markt|Markt]]'' but is mainly of historical significance, as the term is not used today and only survives in some [[toponym]]s. Some towns with names ending in {{Lang|sv|-köping}} are cities with over 100,000 inhabitants today, e.g. [[Linköping]].

Before 1971, 132 larger [[Municipality|municipalities]] in Sweden enjoyed special royal charters as {{Lang|sv|[[Stad (Sweden)|stad]]}} instead of ''[[kommun]]'' (which is similar to a US [[county (United States)|county]]). However, since 1971 all municipalities are officially defined as {{lang|sv|kommun}}, thus making no legal difference between, for instance, [[Stockholm]] and a small countryside municipality. Every urban area that was a {{lang|sv|stad}} before 1971 is still often referred to as a {{lang|sv|stad}} in daily speech. Since the 1980s, 14 of these municipalities have branded themselves as {{lang|sv|stad}} again, although this has no legal or administrative significance, as they still have to refer to themselves as {{lang|sv|kommun}} in all legal documentation.

For statistical purposes, [[Statistics Sweden]] officially defines a {{lang|sv|stad}} as an urban area of at least 10,000 inhabitants. Since 2017 it also defines a {{lang|sv|storstad}} (literally 'big town') as a municipality with a population of at least 200,000 of which at least 200,000 are in its largest {{lang|sv|tätort}}.&lt;ref&gt;[https://skr.se/tjanster/kommunerlandsting/faktakommunerochlandsting/kommungruppsindelning.2051.html Kommungruppsindelning], Sveriges Kommuner och Regioner 2017. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; This means that [[Stockholm]], [[Gothenburg]] and [[Malmö]] are {{lang|sv|storstäder}}, i.e. 'major cities', while [[Uppsala]], with a population of approximately 230,000 in the municipality, which covers an unusually large area, almost three times larger than the combined land area of the municipalities of Stockholm, Gothenburg and Malmö, is not. The largest contiguous urban area within Uppsala municipality has a population of well below 200,000, while the population of both Malmö municipality, with a land area only 1/14 the size of Uppsala municipality, and Malmö {{lang|sv|tätort}}, i.e. contiguous urban area, is well over 300,000, and the population of the [[Metropolitan Malmö|Malmö Metropolitan Area]], with a land area only slightly larger than Uppsala Municipality, is well over 700,000. A difference in the size and population of the urban area between Uppsala and the smallest {{lang|sv|storstad}} in Sweden, Malmö, is the reason Statistics Sweden changed the definition of {{lang|sv|storstad}} in 2017.&lt;ref&gt;[https://unt.se/nyheter/uppsala/beskedet-uppsala-blir-ingen-storstad-4451151.aspx Uppsala blir ingen storstad], Upsala Nya Tidning. Retrieved 16 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt;

=== Ukraine ===
[[File:Богородчани, 4 державна пожежно-рятувальна частина у ДСНС України, 2.jpg|thumb|Fire station in town of [[Bohorodchany]]]]
In Ukraine the term ''town'' ({{lang|uk|містечко}}, {{lang|uk-latn|mistechko}}) existed from the Medieval period until 1925, when it was replaced by the [[Politics of the Soviet Union|Soviet government]] with ''[[urban type settlement]]''.&lt;ref&gt;[https://web.archive.org/web/20160829023834/http://ukrlit.org/slovnyk/%D0%BC%D1%96%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%87%D0%BA%D0%BE Mistechko]. Public electronic dictionary of Ukrainian language (ukrlit.org)&lt;/ref&gt; Historically, a town in the Ukrainian lands was a smaller populated place that was chartered under the [[German town law]] and had a market square (see [[Market town]]).

=== United Kingdom ===
{{Main|City status in the United Kingdom}}

==== England and Wales ====
{{Main|List of urban areas in England by population|list of urban areas in Wales by population}}

[[File:Rugby town centre.jpg|thumb|right|A traditional English town centre at [[Rugby, Warwickshire|Rugby]]]]

In England and Wales, a town traditionally was a settlement which had a charter to hold a [[Market (place)|market]] or [[fair]] and therefore became a &quot;[[market town]]&quot;. Market towns were distinguished from villages in that they were the economic hub of a surrounding area, and were usually larger and had more facilities.

In parallel with popular usage, however, there are many technical and official definitions of what constitutes a town, to which various interested parties cling.

In modern official usage the term ''town'' is employed either for old market towns, or for settlements which have a [[town council]], or for settlements which elsewhere would be classed a city, but which do not have [[city status in the United Kingdom|the legal right]] to call themselves such. Any parish council can decide to describe itself as a town council, but this will usually only apply to the smallest &quot;towns&quot; (because larger towns will be larger than a single civil parish).

Not all settlements which are commonly described as towns have a town council or borough council. In fact, because of many successive changes to the structure of local government, there are now few large towns which are represented by a body closely related to their historic borough council. These days, a smaller town will usually be part of a local authority which covers several towns. And where a larger town ''is'' the seat of a local authority, the authority will usually cover a much wider area than the town itself (either a large rural hinterland, or several other, smaller towns).

Additionally, there are &quot;[[New towns in the United Kingdom|new town]]s&quot; which were created during the 20th century, such as [[Basildon]], [[Redditch]] and [[Telford]].

Some settlements which describe themselves as towns (e.g. [[Shipston-on-Stour]], [[Warwickshire]]) are smaller than some large villages (e.g. [[Kidlington]], [[Oxfordshire]]).

The status of a ''city'' is reserved for places that have [[letters patent]] entitling them to the name, historically associated with the possession of a cathedral. Some large municipalities (such as [[Northampton]] and [[Bournemouth]]) are legally [[borough]]s but not cities, whereas some cities are quite small — such as [[Ely, Cambridgeshire|Ely]] or [[St David's]]. The city of [[Brighton and Hove]] was created from the two former towns and some surrounding villages, and within the city the correct term for the former distinct entities is somewhat unclear.

[[File:Windhill.jpg|thumb|[[Bishop's Stortford]]]]

It appears that a city may become a town, though perhaps only through administrative error: [[Rochester, Kent|Rochester]] in Kent had been a city for centuries but, when in 1998 the [[Medway]] district was created, a bureaucratic blunder meant that Rochester lost its official [[City status in the United Kingdom|city status]] and is now technically a town.

It is often thought that towns with [[cathedral|bishops' seats]] rank automatically as cities: however, [[Chelmsford]] was a town until 5 June 2012 despite being the seat of the [[diocese of Chelmsford]], created in 1914. [[St Asaph]], which is the seat of the [[diocese of St Asaph]], only became a city on 1 June 2012 though the diocese was founded in the mid-sixth century. In reality, the pre-qualification of having a cathedral of the established [[Church of England]], and the formerly established [[Church in Wales]] or [[Church of Ireland]], ceased to apply from 1888.

The word ''town'' can also be used as a general term for urban areas, including cities and in a few cases, districts within cities. In this usage, a city is a type of town; a large one, with a certain status. For example, central [[Greater London]] is sometimes referred to colloquially as &quot;London town&quot;. (The &quot;[[City of London]]&quot; is the historical nucleus, informally known as the &quot;Square Mile&quot;, and is administratively separate from the rest of Greater London, while the [[City of Westminster]] is also technically a city and is also a [[London borough]].) [[Camden Town]] and [[Somers Town, London|Somers Town]] are districts of London, as [[New Town, Edinburgh|New Town]] is a district of [[Edinburgh]] – actually the Georgian centre.

In recent years the division between cities and towns has grown, leading to the establishment of groups like the Centre for Towns, who work to highlight the issues facing many towns.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.centrefortowns.org/about-us|title=About Us|last=Design|first=Concom Website|website=Centre For Towns|language=en-gb|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt; Towns also became a significant issue in the [[2020 Labour Party leadership election (UK)|2020 Labour Party leadership election]], with [[Lisa Nandy]] making significant reference to Labour needing to win back smaller towns which have swung away from the party.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.politicshome.com/news/uk/economy/house/house-magazine/107129/lisa-nandy-mp-britains-towns-are-short-changed-cities|title=Lisa Nandy MP: Britain's towns are short-changed as cities capture an ever-greater share of foreign investment|last=PoliticsHome.com|date=8 October 2019|website=PoliticsHome.com|language=en|access-date=26 January 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==== Scotland ====
{{Main|List of burghs in Scotland|List of towns and cities in Scotland by population}}

In Scotland the word ''town'' has no specific legal meaning and (especially in areas which were or are still [[Scottish Gaelic|Gaelic]]-speaking) can refer to a mere collection of buildings (e.g. a ''farm-town'' or in [[Scots language|Scots]] {{lang|sco|ferm-toun}}), not all of which might be inhabited, or to an inhabited area of any size which is not otherwise described in terms such as [[city]], [[burgh]], etc. Many locations of greatly different size will be encountered with a name ending with ''-town'', ''-ton'', ''-toun'' etc. (or beginning with the Gaelic equivalent {{lang|gd|baile}} etc.).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=23 December 2021 |title=Here all the Scottish towns and areas applying for city status in 2021 |url=https://www.scotsman.com/lifestyle/homes-and-gardens/here-all-the-scottish-towns-applying-for-city-status-in-2021-3505403 |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The Scotsman |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

&quot;[[Burgh]]&quot; (pronounced ''burruh'') is the [[Scots language|Scots]] term for a town or a municipality. They were highly [[Autonomous area|autonomous]] units of [[Local government in Scotland|local government]] from at least the 12th century until their abolition in 1975, when a new [[Local government areas of Scotland 1973 to 1996|regional structure of local government]] was introduced across the country. Usually based upon a town, they had a [[municipal corporation]] and certain rights, such as a degree of [[self-governance]] and representation in the sovereign [[Parliament of Scotland]] adjourned in 1707.

The term no longer describes units of local government, although various claims are made from time to time that the legislation used was not competent to change the status of the Royal Burghs described below. The status is now chiefly ceremonial but various functions have been inherited by current councils (e.g. the application of various endowments providing for public benefit) which might only apply within the area previously served by a burgh; in consequence a burgh can still exist (if only as a defined geographical area) and might still be signed as such by the current local authority. The word 'burgh' is generally not used as a synonym for 'town' or 'city' in everyday speech, but is reserved mostly for government and administrative purposes.

Historically, the most important burghs were [[royal burgh]]s, followed by [[burgh of regality|burghs of regality]] and [[burgh of barony|burghs of barony]]. Some newer settlements were only designated as [[police burgh]]s from the 19th century onward, a classification which also applies to most of the older burghs.

=== United States ===
[[File:Wyatt-indiana-from-above.jpg|thumb|The tiny farming community of [[Wyatt, Indiana]]]]

In the United States, the meaning of the term town is different in each state. In some states, a town is a town if the state says it is. In other states, like Wisconsin, a town is a subdivision of a county. In other states, like Michigan, the name &quot;town&quot; has no official meaning. People use it to describe any place where many people live. In the six New England states, a town is a kind of municipality that is like a city, but smaller. For example, in Pennsylvania, a town is a specific type of incorporated municipality, distinct from townships and boroughs, with only one town, Bloomsburg, officially designated as such under state law.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Pennsylvania Municipalities: Classifications |publisher=Pennsylvania Department of Community and Economic Development |url=&lt;a href=&quot;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&quot;&gt;https://dced.pa.gov/local-government/municipal-statistics/&lt;/a&gt; |access-date=2025-09-04}}&lt;/ref&gt; They're originally based around a population center and in most cases correspond to the geographical designations used by the United States Census Bureau for reporting of housing and population statistics. Municipalities vary greatly in size, from the millions of residents of New York City and Los Angeles to the few hundred people who live in Jenkins, Minnesota.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=State and Local Government |url=https://bidenwhitehouse.archives.gov/about-the-white-house/our-government/state-local-government/ |access-date=23 May 2023 |website=The White House |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; In some instances, the term ''town'' refers to a small incorporated municipality of less than a population threshold specified by state statute, while in others a town can be significantly larger. Some states do not use the term ''town'' at all, while in others the term has no official meaning and is used informally to refer to a populated place, of any size, whether incorporated or unincorporated. In some other states, the words ''town'' and ''city'' are legally interchangeable. The [[Census of Governments]] treats jurisdictions called towns in the [[New England]] states, [[Minnesota]], [[New York (state)|New York]], and [[Wisconsin]] as [[civil township|townships]] rather than municipalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot;&gt;[https://www.census.gov/content/dam/Census/library/publications/2024/econ/2022ISD.pdf Individual State Descriptions: 2022], 2022 [[United States Census of Governments|Census of Governments]], [[United States Census Bureau]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Small-town life has been a major theme in American literature, especially stories of rejection by young people leaving for the metropolis.&lt;ref&gt;[[Miles Orvell]], ''The Death and Life of Main Street: Small Towns in American Memory, Space, and Community'' (University of North Carolina Press; 2012)&lt;/ref&gt;

Since the use of the term varies considerably by state, individual usages are presented in the following sections:

====Alabama====
In [[Alabama]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population.  A municipality with a population of 2,000 or more is a city, while less than 2,000 is a town (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104014/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-6.htm Section 11-40-6]).  For legislative purposes, municipalities are divided into eight classes based on population.  Class 8 includes all towns, plus cities with populations of less than 6,000 (Code of Alabama 1975, [https://web.archive.org/web/20130616104906/http://alisondb.legislature.state.al.us/acas/CodeOfAlabama/1975/11-40-12.htm Section 11-40-12]).

====Arizona====

In [[Arizona]], the terms ''town'' and ''city'' are largely interchangeable. A community may incorporate under either a town or a city organization with no regard to population or other restrictions according to Arizona law (see [[Arizona Revised Statutes]], Title 9). Cities may function under slightly differing governmental systems, such as the option to organize a district system for city governments, but largely retain the same powers as towns. Arizona law also allows for the consolidation of neighboring towns and the unification of a city and a town, but makes no provision for the joining of two adjacent cities.

====California====
In [[California]], the words ''town'' and ''city'' are synonymous by law (see Cal. Govt. Code §§ 34500–34504).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://law.justia.com/codes/california/code-gov/title-4/division-2/part-1/chapter-3/|title=2024 California Code :: Government Code - GOV :: TITLE 4 - GOVERNMENT OF CITIES :: DIVISION 2 - ORGANIZATION AND BOUNDARIES :: PART 1 - ORGANIZATION :: CHAPTER 3 - Corporate Name|website=Justia Law}}&lt;/ref&gt; There are two types of cities in California: charter and general law. Cities organized as charter cities derive their authority from a [[municipal charter|charter]] that they draft and file with the state, and which, among other things, states the municipality's name as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot; Government Code §§ 34500–34504 apply to cities organized as [[general-law municipality|general law cities]], which differ from charter cities in that they do not have charters but instead operate with the powers conferred them by the pertinent sections of the Government Code. Like charter cities, general law cities may incorporate as &quot;City of (Name)&quot; or &quot;Town of (Name).&quot;

Some cities change what they are referred to as. The sign in front of the municipal offices in [[Los Gatos, California]], for example, reads &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot;, but the words engraved on the building above the front entrance when the city hall was built read &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; There are also signs at the municipal corporation limit, some of which welcome visitors to the &quot;City of Los Gatos&quot; while older, adjacent signs welcome people to the &quot;Town of Los Gatos.&quot; Meanwhile, the village does not exist in California as a municipal corporation. Instead, the word ''town'' is commonly used to indicate any unincorporated community that might otherwise be known as an unincorporated village. Additionally, some people may still use the word ''town'' as shorthand for ''township'', which is not an incorporated municipality but an administrative division of a county.

====Georgia====
Georgia is divided into 159 [[County (United States)|counties]] and contains 535 [[Municipal corporation|municipalities]] consisting of cities, towns, consolidated city-counties, and consolidated cities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Census Georgia 2010&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.census.gov/prod/cen2010/cph-2-12.pdf|title=Georgia: 2010 Population and Housing Unit Counts 2010 Census of Population and Housing | date = September 2012|publisher = [[United States Census Bureau]]| website = [[2010 United States census]]| access-date = 8 August 2016|page=III-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Census 2020&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.legis.ga.gov/api/document/docs/default-source/reapportionment-document-library/2020-census-count-by-city-population.pdf?sfvrsn=274928ba_2|title= 2020 Census Count by Georgia City Population | access-date = 17 April 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt; There is no legal difference in Georgia between cities and towns.&lt;ref name=&quot;NGE&quot;&gt;Perry Hiott &amp; Chris Dobbs, [https://www.georgiaencyclopedia.org/articles/government-politics/georgias-city-governments Georgia's City Governments], ''New Georgia Encyclopedia'' (last updated 12 November 2015).&lt;/ref&gt;

====Hawaii====

In Hawaii, the Department of Business, Economic Development, and Tourism has the statutory authority to establish, modify, or abolish the statistical boundaries for cities, town, and. villages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240911174516/https://casetext.com/statute/hawaii-revised-statutes/division-1-government/title-4-state-organization-and-administration-generally/chapter-26-executive-and-administrative-departments/part-i-organization-generally/section-26-18-department-of-business-economic-development-and-tourism|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 September 2024|title=Section 26-18 - Department of business, economic development, and tourism, Haw. Rev. Stat. § 26-18 &amp;#124; Casetext Search + Citator|website=casetext.com}}&lt;/ref&gt; However, the only municipal government in Hawaii is the City and County of [[Honolulu]].&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Illinois====
In [[Illinois]], the word ''town'' has been used both to denote a subdivision of a county called a township,&lt;ref&gt;See the Township Code, 60 ILCS 1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt; and to denote a form of municipality similar to a [[village]], in that it is generally governed by a president and trustees rather than a mayor.&lt;ref&gt;See ''Phillips v. Town of Scales Mound'', 195 Ill. 353, 357, 63 N.E. 180 (1902)&lt;/ref&gt; In some areas a town may be incorporated legally as a village (meaning it has at large trustees) or a city (meaning it has aldermen from districts) and absorb the duties of the [[coterminous municipality|township it is coterminous with]] (maintenance of birth records, certain welfare items). [[Evanston, Illinois|Evanston]], [[Berwyn, Illinois|Berwyn]] and [[Cicero, Illinois|Cicero]] are examples of towns in this manner. Under the current Illinois Municipal Code, an incorporated or unincorporated town may choose to incorporate as a city or as a village, but other forms of incorporation are no longer allowed.&lt;ref&gt;''See generally'' Article 2 of the Illinois Municipal Code, 65 ILCS 5/2‑1‑1 et seq.&lt;/ref&gt;

====Indiana====
In [[Indiana]], a ''town'' is differentiated from a ''city'' in that a town can not become a city until it has a population of at least 2,000. The form of government is also different from that of a city in that the town council is both the legislative and executive branches of government. The mayor is selected by the council from within its ranks and operates as a [[first among equals]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Town vs. City|url=http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|website=Townofclarksville.com|access-date=11 September 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160908020047/http://www.townofclarksville.com/town_vs_city.php|archive-date=8 September 2016}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Louisiana====
In [[Louisiana]], a town is defined as being a municipal government having a population of 1,001 to 4,999 inhabitants.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt;

====Maryland====

While a town is generally considered a smaller entity than a city, the two terms are legally interchangeable in Maryland.&lt;ref name=&quot;isd2022&quot; /&gt; The only exception is the [[independent city]] of [[Baltimore]], which is a special case, as it was created by the [[Constitution of Maryland]].

====Mississippi====
Municipalities in Mississippi are classified according to population size. At time of incorporation, municipalities with populations of more than 2,000 are classified as cities, municipalities containing between 301 and 2000 persons are classified as towns, and municipalities between 100 and 300 persons are classified as villages.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| title = Municipal Government| date = October 2014| publisher = Secretary of State| work = State of Mississippi| access-date = 10 August 2016| page = 381| url-status = dead| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170126110031/http://www.sos.ms.gov/Education-Publications/Documents/BlueBook/10-2014-Municipal-Government.pdf| archive-date = 26 January 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; Places may be incorporated to become a city, town, or village through a petition signed by two-thirds of the qualified voters who reside in the proposed municipality.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt; The major function of municipal governments are to provide services for its citizens such as maintaining roads and bridges, providing law, fire protection, and health and sanitation services.&lt;ref name=&quot;MississippiLaw&quot; /&gt;

====Nevada====

In [[Nevada]], a town has a form of government, but is not considered to be incorporated. It generally provides a limited range of services, such as [[Land-use planning]] and recreation, while leaving most services to the county. Many communities have found this &quot;semi-incorporated&quot; status attractive; the state has only 20 incorporated [[List of cities in Nevada|cities]], and towns as large as [[Paradise, Nevada|Paradise]] (186,020 in 2000 Census), home of the [[Las Vegas Strip]]. Most [[county seat]]s are also towns, not cities.

====New England====
{{Main|New England town}}

[[File:Downtown Ipswich MA.jpg|thumb|A downtown of [[Ipswich, Massachusetts]]]]
In the six [[New England]] states, a [[New England town|town]] is the most prevalent minor civil division, and in most cases, are a more important form of government than the county. In [[Connecticut]], [[Rhode Island]] and seven out of fourteen counties in [[Massachusetts]], in fact, counties only exist as boundaries for state services and chambers of commerce at most, and have no independent legal functions. In [[New Hampshire]], [[Maine]], and [[Vermont]], counties function at a limited scope, and are still not as important in northern New England as they are outside of the northeast. In all six states, towns perform functions that in most states would be county functions. The defining feature of a New England town, as opposed to a city, is that a [[town meeting]] and a [[board of selectmen]] serve as the main form of government for a town, while cities are run by a mayor and a city council.  For example, [[Brookline, Massachusetts]] is a town, even though it is fairly urban, because of its form of government.  In the three southern New England states, the entire land area is divided into towns and cities, while the three northern states have small areas that are unincorporated. In Vermont and New Hampshire, the population of these areas is practically nonexistent, while in Maine, unincorporated areas make up roughly half of the state's area but only one percent of the state's population.

Though the U.S. Census Bureau defines New England towns as &quot;minor civil divisions&quot; for statistical purposes, all New England towns are [[municipal corporations]] equivalent to cities in all legal respects, except for form of government.  For statistical purposes, the Census Bureau uses [[census-designated place]]s for the built-up population centers within towns, though these have no legal or social recognition for residents of those towns.  Similarly, the Census Bureau uses a special designation for [[urban areas]] within New England, the [[New England city and town area]], instead of the [[metropolitan statistical area]] it uses in the rest of the country.

====New Jersey====
{{Main|Town (New Jersey)}}

A ''town'' in the context of New Jersey local government refers to one of five types and one of eleven forms of municipal government. While ''town'' is often used as a shorthand to refer to a township, the two are not the same. The Town Act of 1895 allowed any municipality or area with a population exceeding 5,000 to become a Town through a petition and referendum process. Under the 1895 Act, a newly incorporated town was divided into at least three wards, with two councilmen per ward serving staggered two-year terms, and one councilman at large, who also served a two-year term. The councilman at large served as chairman of the town council. The Town Act of 1988 completely revised the town form of government and applied to all towns incorporated under the Town Act of 1895 and to those incorporated by a special charter granted by the Legislature prior to 1875.

Under the 1988 Act, the mayor is also the councilman at large, serving a term of two years, unless increased to three years by a petition and referendum process. The council under the Town Act of 1988 consists of eight members serving staggered two-year terms with two elected from each of four wards. One council member from each ward is up for election each year. Towns with different structures predating the 1988 Act may retain those features unless changed by a petition and referendum process. Two new provisions were added in 1991 to the statutes governing towns. First, a petition and referendum process was created whereby the voters can require that the mayor and town council be elected to four-year terms of office. The second new provision defines the election procedure in towns with wards. The mayor in a town chairs the town council and heads the municipal government. The mayor may both vote on legislation before council and veto ordinances. A veto may be overridden by a vote of two-thirds of all the members of the council. The council may enact an ordinance to delegate all or a portion of the executive responsibilities of the town to a municipal administrator. Fifteen New Jersey municipalities currently have a type of town, nine of which operate under the town form of government.

====New York====
{{Main|Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Town}}

In [[Administrative divisions of New York|New York]], a town is a division of the county that possesses home rule powers, but generally with fewer functions than towns in New England. A town provides a closer level of governance than its enclosing county, providing almost all municipal services to unincorporated communities, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Hamlet|hamlets]], and selected services to incorporated areas, called [[Administrative divisions of New York (state)#Village|villages]]. In New York, a town typically contains a number of such hamlets and villages. However, due to their independent nature, incorporated villages may exist in two towns or even two counties (example: [[Almond (village), New York]]). Everyone in New York who does not live in a city or [[Native Americans in the United States|Indian]] reservation lives in a town and possibly in one of the town's hamlets or villages. New York City and [[Geneva, New York|Geneva]] are the only two cities that span county boundaries. The only part of Geneva in [[Seneca County, New York|Seneca County]] is water; each of the [[boroughs of New York City]] is a county.

====North Carolina====
In [[North Carolina]], all cities, towns, and villages are incorporated as [[List of municipalities in North Carolina|municipalities]]. According to the North Carolina League of Municipalities,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|website = North Carolina League of Municipalities|title = How NC Cities Work|url=https://www.nclm.org/advocacy/how-nc-cities-work |url-status = live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100516211303/http://www.nclm.org/resource-center/Pages/How-Municipalities-Work.aspx |archive-date=16 May 2010 }}&lt;/ref&gt; there is no legal distinction among a city, town, or village—it is a matter of preference of the local government.  Some North Carolina cities have populations as small as 1,000 residents, while some towns, such as [[Cary, North Carolina|Cary]], have populations of greater than 100,000.

====Oklahoma====
In [[Oklahoma]], according to the state's municipal code, ''city'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a city in accordance with the laws of the state, whereas ''town'' means a municipality which has incorporated as a town in accordance with the laws of the state, and ''municipality'' means any incorporated city or town.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75748 |title= 11 O.S. 1–102 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 1-102, Definitions)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;  The term ''village'' is not defined or used in the act.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw1&quot; /&gt;  Any community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a town; however, if the resident population is one thousand or more, a town or community of people residing in compact form may become incorporated as a city.&lt;ref name=&quot;OklahomaLaw2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.oscn.net/applications/oscn/DeliverDocument.asp?CiteID=75750|title= 11 O.S. 2–101 (Oklahoma Statutes, Title 11, Cities and Towns; Chapter 1, Oklahoma Municipal Code; Section 2-101, Incorporation of a Municipality)|publisher=Oklahoma State Courts Network|access-date=14 April 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Pennsylvania====
In [[Pennsylvania]], the incorporated divisions are townships, boroughs, and cities, of which boroughs are equivalent to towns (example: [[State College, Pennsylvania|State College]] is a borough). However, one borough is incorporated as a town: [[Bloomsburg, Pennsylvania|Bloomsburg]].

====South Carolina====
At incorporation,  municipalities may choose to be named either &quot;City of&quot; or &quot;Town of&quot;, however there is no legal difference between the two.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c007.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 7 – Municipal Corporations |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; All municipalities are responsible for providing local service including law enforcement, fire protection, waste and water management, planning and zoning, recreational facilities, and street lighting.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c001.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 1 – Incorporation |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt; Municipalities may incorporate with one of three forms of government: 141 chose [[Mayor–council government|mayor–council]], 95 chose [[Municipal council|council]], and 33 chose [[Council–manager government|council–manager]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.scstatehouse.gov/code/t05c005.php |title=Code of Laws – Title 5 – Chapter 5 – Selection Of Forms Of Municipal Government |publisher=Scstatehouse.gov |access-date=25 July 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Tennessee====
Some Tennessee municipalities are called &quot;cities&quot; and others are called &quot;towns.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |title=Tennessee 2000 Population Summary |publisher=Office of Local Government, Tennessee Comptroller of the Treasury |access-date=15 October 2007 |url-status=unfit |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080116203543/http://www.comptroller.state.tn.us/lg/2000city.htm |archive-date=16 January 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; These terms do not have legal significance in Tennessee&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.tennessee.gov/tacir/PDF_FILES/Taxes/State%20Shared%20Taxes04.pdf |title=State Tax Sharing, Fairness, and Local Government Finances in Tennessee |work=Tennessee.gov |publisher=[[Tennessee Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental Relations]] |date=January 2004 |page=xiv |access-date=7 November 2008 |quote=There are 348 cities in Tennessee and each is characterized as either a city or a town (in our state, there is no legal distinction between the two).}}&lt;/ref&gt; and are not related to population, date of establishment, or type of [[municipal charter]].

====Texas====
In [[Texas]], although some municipalities refer to themselves as &quot;towns&quot; or &quot;villages&quot; (to market themselves as an attractive place to live), these names have no specific designation in Texas law; legally all incorporated places are considered [[List of municipalities in Texas|cities]].

====Utah====
{{see also|List of municipalities in Utah}}
In [[Utah]], the legal use of the terms ''town'' and ''city'' is based on population. A municipality with a population of 1,000 or more is a city, while less than 1,000 is a town. In addition, cities are divided into five separate classes based on the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|title=Utah Code, Title 10, Chapter 2, Section 301|publisher=Utah State Legislature|access-date=11 May 2010|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110808233054/http://le.utah.gov/~code/TITLE10/htm/10_02_030100.htm|archive-date=8 August 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Virginia====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Virginia#Towns}}

In [[Virginia]], a town is an incorporated municipality similar to a city (though with a smaller required minimum population).  But while cities are by Virginia law independent of counties, towns are contained within counties.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web  |author=Charles A. Grymes|url=http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |title=County vs. Town vs. City in Virginia  |access-date=31 May 2011  |quote=Cities own and maintain their roads, while Virginia counties (except for Arlington and Henrico) rely upon [[Virginia Department of Transportation|VDOT]] for road maintenance. Cities get a fixed allocation of state funding for building and maintaining those roads, while counties must compete with each other and other VDOT priorities for a substantial portion of their road budget. Cities have been granted more authorities, such as the right of city councils to issue bonds to build roads without a voter referendum (counties must get voter approval in a referendum before issuing road bonds). In Virginia, towns have distinct boundaries, established by the [[Virginia General Assembly|General Assembly]] or by courts guided by laws passed by the legislature. Towns are not independent from counties; residents of towns are still residents of the county in which the town is located. For example, residents of the four towns of [[Haymarket, Virginia|Haymarket]], [[Quantico, Virginia|Quantico]], [[Dumfries, Virginia|Dumfries]], and [[Occoquan, Virginia|Occoquan]] are also residents of [[Prince William County, Virginia|Prince William County]]. They pay both town and county property taxes, and town residents get to vote for a town council/mayor.  |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100620092601/http://virginiaplaces.org/vagupnova/countytowncity.html  |archive-date=20 June 2010  }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Washington====
{{Further|City government in Washington (state)}}
A town in the state of [[Washington (state)|Washington]] is a municipality that has a population of less than 1,500 at incorporation, however an existing town can reorganize as a code city.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx |title=Classification of Washington Cities |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-date=20 June 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130620001644/http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/governance/locgov31.aspx }}&lt;/ref&gt; Town government authority is limited relative to [[city (Washington)|cities]], the other main classification of municipalities in the state.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.mrsc.org/subjects/management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |title=A Comparison of the Powers of a Town and a Noncharter Code City |publisher=Municipal Research and Services Center of Washington |access-date=14 December 2012 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080725204227/http://www.mrsc.org/Subjects/Management/forms/townandcodecity.aspx |archive-date=25 July 2008 }}&lt;/ref&gt; {{As of|2012|post=,}} most municipalities in Washington are cities (see: [[List of towns in Washington]]).

====Wisconsin====
{{main|Administrative divisions of Wisconsin}}

{{See also|List of towns in Wisconsin}}
[[Wisconsin]] has towns which are areas outside of incorporated cities and villages. These towns retain the name of the civil township from which they evolved and are often the same name as a neighboring city. Some towns, especially those in urban areas, have services similar to those of incorporated cities, such as police departments. These towns will, from time to time, incorporate into cities, such as [[Fox Crossing, Wisconsin|Fox Crossing]] in 2016 from the former town of [[Menasha (town), Wisconsin|Menasha]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |title=Incorporation Information – Town of Menasha Town of Menasha |access-date=4 March 2017 |url-status=usurped |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170211054509/http://www.town-menasha.com/town-of-menasha-incorporation-update/ |archive-date=11 February 2017 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Often this is to avoid annexation into neighboring cities and villages.

====Wyoming====
A [[Wyoming]] statute indicates towns are incorporated municipalities with populations of less than 4,000. Municipalities of 4,000 or more residents are considered &quot;first-class cities&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx|title=Title 15 – Cities and Towns; Chapter 1 – General Provisions; Article 1 – Powers and Miscellaneous Matters; 15-1-101. Definitions|publisher=State of Wyoming|access-date=26 August 2019|archive-date=2 November 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211102125427/https://wyoleg.gov/statutes/compress/title15.docx}}&lt;/ref&gt;
Some examples are [[Moorcroft, Wyoming]] and [[Sundance, Wyoming]].

=== Vietnam ===
In Vietnam, a [[District-level town (Vietnam)|district-level town]] ({{langx|vi|thị xã}}) is the second subdivision, below a province ({{lang|vi|tỉnh}}) or municipality ({{lang|vi|thành phố trực thuộc trung ương}}). A [[Commune-level town (Vietnam)|commune-level town]] ({{lang|vi|thị trấn}}) a third-level (commune-level) subdivision, below a [[List of districts of Vietnam|district]] ({{lang|vi|huyện}}).

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ڳوٺ]]
* [[شهر]]
* [[صوبو]]
* [[ملڪ]]
* مسافر شهر 
* ڪمپني شهر 
* ترقي يافته ماحول
* آگ جو نشان 
* شهرن جون فهرستون 
* مقام 
* ميگالوپولس 
* پروٽو-شهر
* ٽائون چارٽر 
* ٽائون هال
* ٽائون جون حدون
* ٽائون جا مراعات 
* ٽائون اسڪوائر

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}} 
==ذريعا== 
==ٻاهرين لنڪس==
{{Wiktionary}}
* [http://www.abs.gov.au/Ausstats/abs@.nsf/0/9f0b5791ed98061fca256f1900128409?OpenDocument Australian Bureau of Statistics: Australian Standard Geographical Classification (ASGC) 2005]
* [http://www.open-site.org/Regional Open-Site Regional] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210129142135/http://www.open-site.org/Regional |date=2021-01-29 }} — Contains information about towns in numerous countries.
* [http://arquivo.pt/wayback/20091226080929/http://www.e-geopolis.eu/ Geopolis]: research group, university of Paris-Diderot, France — Access to Geopolis Database

{{Types of administrative division}}

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:قصبو]] 
[[زمرو:آباد جڳھون]]  
[[زمرو:انساني آبادي]] 
[[زمرو:آبادين جي جاگرافي]]</text>
      <sha1>h5tyg6j68tgah114dbljon8n4dub5n8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>وزير تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30365</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393990</id>
      <parentid>393985</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:09:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>393990</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2673" sha1="fjrnh4q7x1464shd6p7lgkkdviggjmq" xml:space="preserve">[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]]
'''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اولھ ۾ اتر وزيرستان ۽ ڏکڻ ۾ ڏکڻ وزيرستان واقع آھن.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

== __LEAD_SECTION__ ==
{{Infobox settlement|image_skyline=|image_map1={{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}|map_caption=Location in Pakistan|image_caption=Bannu Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]|name=بنون تعلقو|official_name=اردو|native_name=پشتو|settlement_type=[[تعلقو]]}}'''بنو تعلقو (اردو؛ پشتو: بنون''' تحصيل) [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جي هڪ انتظامي ذيلي ڊويزن ([[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|تعلقو]]) آهي، [[بنون ڊويزن|جيڪو بنون ڊويزن]]، [[خيبر پختونخوا|خيبر پختونخواه صوبي]]، [[پاڪستان|پاڪستان ۾ واقع]] آهي. سال [[آدمشماري پاڪستان، 2017ع|2017ع جي مردم شماري]] مطابق تعلقي جي آبادي 9,58,504 هئي. 

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>fjrnh4q7x1464shd6p7lgkkdviggjmq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394014</id>
      <parentid>393990</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:09:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394014</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7318" sha1="m7aszrzwwtckdp8k83m8vv2mjm9qrzx" xml:space="preserve">[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]]
'''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اولھ ۾ اتر وزيرستان ۽ ڏکڻ ۾ ڏکڻ وزيرستان واقع آھن.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt;
==وزير تعلقو==
{{Short description|Subdivision of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan}}
{{Use american english|date=March 2024}}
{{Use dmy dates|date=March 2024}}{{Other uses|Bannu District|Bannu Tehsil}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Wazir Tehsil
| native_name        = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل گومتی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ګوماتي تحصیل}}}}
| other_name         = Frontier Region Bannu&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ur|{{nq|سرحدی علاقہ بنوں}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|بنو سرحدي سیمه}}}}
| native_name_lang   = 
| settlement_type    = Tehsil
| image_skyline      = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_flag         = 
| flag_alt           = 
| image_seal         = 
| seal_alt           = 
| image_shield       = 
| shield_alt         = 
| etymology          = 
| nickname           = 
| motto              = 
| image_map          = {{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption        = Wazir Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]
| pushpin_map        = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_map_alt    = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| coordinates        = &lt;!-- {{Coord}} --&gt;
| coor_pinpoint      = 
| coordinates_footnotes = 
| subdivision_type   = Country
| subdivision_name   = {{flagu|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1  = [[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Region]]
| subdivision_name1  = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2  = 
| subdivision_name2  = 
| subdivision_type3  = 
| subdivision_name3  = 
| established_title  = 
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = 
| seat               = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = 
| governing_body     = 
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = 
| leader_name        = 
| leader_title1      = 
| leader_name1       = 
| leader_title2      = 
| leader_name2       = 
| leader_title3      = 
| leader_name3       = 
| leader_title4      = 
| leader_name4       = 
| legislature        = 
| upper_house        = 
| lower_house        = 
| unit_pref          = Metric
&lt;!-- ALL fields with measurements have automatic unit conversion --&gt;
&lt;!-- for references: use &lt;ref&gt; tags --&gt;| area_footnotes     = 
| area_urban_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_rural_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_metro_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_magnitude     = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_note          = 
| area_water_percent = 
| area_rank          = 
| area_blank1_title  = 
| area_blank2_title  = &lt;!-- square kilometers --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 
| area_land_km2      = 
| area_water_km2     = 
| area_urban_km2     = 
| area_rural_km2     = 
| area_metro_km2     = 
| area_blank1_km2    = 
| area_blank2_km2    = &lt;!-- hectares --&gt;
| area_total_ha      = 
| area_land_ha       = 
| area_water_ha      = 
| area_urban_ha      = 
| area_rural_ha      = 
| area_metro_ha      = 
| area_blank1_ha     = 
| area_blank2_ha     = 
| length_km          = 
| width_km           = 
| dimensions_footnotes = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m        = 
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=&quot;DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|title=DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|access-date=2017-12-17|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170829164748/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|archive-date=2017-08-29|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_total   = 43,114
| population_density_km2 = auto
| population_note    = 
| population_demonym = 
| timezone1          = 
| utc_offset1        = 
| timezone1_DST      = 
| utc_offset1_DST    = 
| postal_code_type   = 
| postal_code        = 
| area_code_type     = 
| area_code          = 
| iso_code           = 
| website            = &lt;!-- {{URL|example.com}} --&gt;
| footnotes          = 
}}

'''Wazir Tehsil''' is an administrative subdivision ([[Administrative units of Pakistan#Tehsil|tehsil]]) of [[Bannu District]], Bannu Division, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Province, Pakistan. The total population, according to the 1998 census, was {{sigfig|19593|3}},&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |title=1998 census report of Tribal Area Adjoining Bannu District |date=2001 |publisher=Population Census Organization, Statistics Division, Government of Pakistan |series=Census publication |volume=150 |location=Islamabad}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|5}} 98.1% of which have [[Pashto]] as a [[first language]], and the remaining 1.9% speak [[Punjabi language|Punjabi]].&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot; /&gt;{{rp|6}}

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

== __LEAD_SECTION__ ==
{{Infobox settlement|image_skyline=|image_map1={{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}|map_caption=Location in Pakistan|image_caption=Bannu Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]|name=بنون تعلقو|official_name=اردو|native_name=پشتو|settlement_type=[[تعلقو]]}}'''بنو تعلقو (اردو؛ پشتو: بنون''' تحصيل) [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جي هڪ انتظامي ذيلي ڊويزن ([[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|تعلقو]]) آهي، [[بنون ڊويزن|جيڪو بنون ڊويزن]]، [[خيبر پختونخوا|خيبر پختونخواه صوبي]]، [[پاڪستان|پاڪستان ۾ واقع]] آهي. سال [[آدمشماري پاڪستان، 2017ع|2017ع جي مردم شماري]] مطابق تعلقي جي آبادي 9,58,504 هئي. 

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>m7aszrzwwtckdp8k83m8vv2mjm9qrzx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394019</id>
      <parentid>394014</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:17:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394019</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6487" sha1="lrlug5p4y6fyv50lo3bma3lggimvxun" xml:space="preserve">[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]]
'''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اولھ ۾ اتر وزيرستان ۽ ڏکڻ ۾ ڏکڻ وزيرستان واقع آھن.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt;
==وزير تعلقو==
{{Short description|Subdivision of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan}}
{{Use american english|date=March 2024}}
{{Use dmy dates|date=March 2024}}{{Other uses|Bannu District|Bannu Tehsil}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Wazir Tehsil
| native_name        = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل گومتی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ګوماتي تحصیل}}}}
| other_name         = Frontier Region Bannu&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ur|{{nq|سرحدی علاقہ بنوں}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|بنو سرحدي سیمه}}}}
| native_name_lang   = 
| settlement_type    = Tehsil
| image_skyline      = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_flag         = 
| flag_alt           = 
| image_seal         = 
| seal_alt           = 
| image_shield       = 
| shield_alt         = 
| etymology          = 
| nickname           = 
| motto              = 
| image_map          = {{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption        = Wazir Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]
| pushpin_map        = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_map_alt    = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| coordinates        = &lt;!-- {{Coord}} --&gt;
| coor_pinpoint      = 
| coordinates_footnotes = 
| subdivision_type   = Country
| subdivision_name   = {{flagu|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1  = [[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Region]]
| subdivision_name1  = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2  = 
| subdivision_name2  = 
| subdivision_type3  = 
| subdivision_name3  = 
| established_title  = 
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = 
| seat               = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = 
| governing_body     = 
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = 
| leader_name        = 
| leader_title1      = 
| leader_name1       = 
| leader_title2      = 
| leader_name2       = 
| leader_title3      = 
| leader_name3       = 
| leader_title4      = 
| leader_name4       = 
| legislature        = 
| upper_house        = 
| lower_house        = 
| unit_pref          = Metric
&lt;!-- ALL fields with measurements have automatic unit conversion --&gt;
&lt;!-- for references: use &lt;ref&gt; tags --&gt;| area_footnotes     = 
| area_urban_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_rural_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_metro_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_magnitude     = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_note          = 
| area_water_percent = 
| area_rank          = 
| area_blank1_title  = 
| area_blank2_title  = &lt;!-- square kilometers --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 
| area_land_km2      = 
| area_water_km2     = 
| area_urban_km2     = 
| area_rural_km2     = 
| area_metro_km2     = 
| area_blank1_km2    = 
| area_blank2_km2    = &lt;!-- hectares --&gt;
| area_total_ha      = 
| area_land_ha       = 
| area_water_ha      = 
| area_urban_ha      = 
| area_rural_ha      = 
| area_metro_ha      = 
| area_blank1_ha     = 
| area_blank2_ha     = 
| length_km          = 
| width_km           = 
| dimensions_footnotes = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m        = 
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=&quot;DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|title=DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|access-date=2017-12-17|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170829164748/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|archive-date=2017-08-29|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_total   = 43,114
| population_density_km2 = auto
| population_note    = 
| population_demonym = 
| timezone1          = 
| utc_offset1        = 
| timezone1_DST      = 
| utc_offset1_DST    = 
| postal_code_type   = 
| postal_code        = 
| area_code_type     = 
| area_code          = 
| iso_code           = 
| website            = &lt;!-- {{URL|example.com}} --&gt;
| footnotes          = 
}}

'''Wazir Tehsil''' is an administrative subdivision ([[Administrative units of Pakistan#Tehsil|tehsil]]) of [[Bannu District]], Bannu Division, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Province, Pakistan. The total population, according to the 1998 census, was {{sigfig|19593|3}},&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |title=1998 census report of Tribal Area Adjoining Bannu District |date=2001 |publisher=Population Census Organization, Statistics Division, Government of Pakistan |series=Census publication |volume=150 |location=Islamabad}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|5}} 98.1% of which have [[Pashto]] as a [[first language]], and the remaining 1.9% speak [[Punjabi language|Punjabi]].&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot; /&gt;{{rp|6}}

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>lrlug5p4y6fyv50lo3bma3lggimvxun</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394020</id>
      <parentid>394019</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:17:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394020</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5712" sha1="r982g7urhjl7ea1t9efkebqgymr6fym" xml:space="preserve">==وزير تعلقو==
{{Short description|Subdivision of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan}}
{{Use american english|date=March 2024}}
{{Use dmy dates|date=March 2024}}{{Other uses|Bannu District|Bannu Tehsil}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Wazir Tehsil
| native_name        = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل گومتی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ګوماتي تحصیل}}}}
| other_name         = Frontier Region Bannu&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ur|{{nq|سرحدی علاقہ بنوں}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|بنو سرحدي سیمه}}}}
| native_name_lang   = 
| settlement_type    = Tehsil
| image_skyline      = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_flag         = 
| flag_alt           = 
| image_seal         = 
| seal_alt           = 
| image_shield       = 
| shield_alt         = 
| etymology          = 
| nickname           = 
| motto              = 
| image_map          = {{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption        = Wazir Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]
| pushpin_map        = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_map_alt    = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| coordinates        = &lt;!-- {{Coord}} --&gt;
| coor_pinpoint      = 
| coordinates_footnotes = 
| subdivision_type   = Country
| subdivision_name   = {{flagu|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1  = [[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Region]]
| subdivision_name1  = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2  = 
| subdivision_name2  = 
| subdivision_type3  = 
| subdivision_name3  = 
| established_title  = 
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = 
| seat               = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = 
| governing_body     = 
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = 
| leader_name        = 
| leader_title1      = 
| leader_name1       = 
| leader_title2      = 
| leader_name2       = 
| leader_title3      = 
| leader_name3       = 
| leader_title4      = 
| leader_name4       = 
| legislature        = 
| upper_house        = 
| lower_house        = 
| unit_pref          = Metric
&lt;!-- ALL fields with measurements have automatic unit conversion --&gt;
&lt;!-- for references: use &lt;ref&gt; tags --&gt;| area_footnotes     = 
| area_urban_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_rural_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_metro_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_magnitude     = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_note          = 
| area_water_percent = 
| area_rank          = 
| area_blank1_title  = 
| area_blank2_title  = &lt;!-- square kilometers --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 
| area_land_km2      = 
| area_water_km2     = 
| area_urban_km2     = 
| area_rural_km2     = 
| area_metro_km2     = 
| area_blank1_km2    = 
| area_blank2_km2    = &lt;!-- hectares --&gt;
| area_total_ha      = 
| area_land_ha       = 
| area_water_ha      = 
| area_urban_ha      = 
| area_rural_ha      = 
| area_metro_ha      = 
| area_blank1_ha     = 
| area_blank2_ha     = 
| length_km          = 
| width_km           = 
| dimensions_footnotes = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m        = 
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=&quot;DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|title=DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|access-date=2017-12-17|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170829164748/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|archive-date=2017-08-29|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_total   = 43,114
| population_density_km2 = auto
| population_note    = 
| population_demonym = 
| timezone1          = 
| utc_offset1        = 
| timezone1_DST      = 
| utc_offset1_DST    = 
| postal_code_type   = 
| postal_code        = 
| area_code_type     = 
| area_code          = 
| iso_code           = 
| website            = &lt;!-- {{URL|example.com}} --&gt;
| footnotes          = 
}}

'''Wazir Tehsil''' is an administrative subdivision ([[Administrative units of Pakistan#Tehsil|tehsil]]) of [[Bannu District]], Bannu Division, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Province, Pakistan. The total population, according to the 1998 census, was {{sigfig|19593|3}},&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |title=1998 census report of Tribal Area Adjoining Bannu District |date=2001 |publisher=Population Census Organization, Statistics Division, Government of Pakistan |series=Census publication |volume=150 |location=Islamabad}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|5}} 98.1% of which have [[Pashto]] as a [[first language]], and the remaining 1.9% speak [[Punjabi language|Punjabi]].&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot; /&gt;{{rp|6}}

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>r982g7urhjl7ea1t9efkebqgymr6fym</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394021</id>
      <parentid>394020</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:18:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394021</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6465" sha1="j2wgwm090tvx149lrnvncssx3m0xep4" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Subdivision of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan}}
{{Use american english|date=March 2024}}
{{Use dmy dates|date=March 2024}}{{Other uses|Bannu District|Bannu Tehsil}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Wazir Tehsil
| native_name        = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل گومتی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ګوماتي تحصیل}}}}
| other_name         = Frontier Region Bannu&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ur|{{nq|سرحدی علاقہ بنوں}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|بنو سرحدي سیمه}}}}
| native_name_lang   = 
| settlement_type    = Tehsil
| image_skyline      = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_flag         = 
| flag_alt           = 
| image_seal         = 
| seal_alt           = 
| image_shield       = 
| shield_alt         = 
| etymology          = 
| nickname           = 
| motto              = 
| image_map          = {{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption        = Wazir Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]
| pushpin_map        = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_map_alt    = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| coordinates        = &lt;!-- {{Coord}} --&gt;
| coor_pinpoint      = 
| coordinates_footnotes = 
| subdivision_type   = Country
| subdivision_name   = {{flagu|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1  = [[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Region]]
| subdivision_name1  = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2  = 
| subdivision_name2  = 
| subdivision_type3  = 
| subdivision_name3  = 
| established_title  = 
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = 
| seat               = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = 
| governing_body     = 
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = 
| leader_name        = 
| leader_title1      = 
| leader_name1       = 
| leader_title2      = 
| leader_name2       = 
| leader_title3      = 
| leader_name3       = 
| leader_title4      = 
| leader_name4       = 
| legislature        = 
| upper_house        = 
| lower_house        = 
| unit_pref          = Metric
&lt;!-- ALL fields with measurements have automatic unit conversion --&gt;
&lt;!-- for references: use &lt;ref&gt; tags --&gt;| area_footnotes     = 
| area_urban_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_rural_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_metro_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_magnitude     = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_note          = 
| area_water_percent = 
| area_rank          = 
| area_blank1_title  = 
| area_blank2_title  = &lt;!-- square kilometers --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 
| area_land_km2      = 
| area_water_km2     = 
| area_urban_km2     = 
| area_rural_km2     = 
| area_metro_km2     = 
| area_blank1_km2    = 
| area_blank2_km2    = &lt;!-- hectares --&gt;
| area_total_ha      = 
| area_land_ha       = 
| area_water_ha      = 
| area_urban_ha      = 
| area_rural_ha      = 
| area_metro_ha      = 
| area_blank1_ha     = 
| area_blank2_ha     = 
| length_km          = 
| width_km           = 
| dimensions_footnotes = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m        = 
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=&quot;DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|title=DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|access-date=2017-12-17|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170829164748/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|archive-date=2017-08-29|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_total   = 43,114
| population_density_km2 = auto
| population_note    = 
| population_demonym = 
| timezone1          = 
| utc_offset1        = 
| timezone1_DST      = 
| utc_offset1_DST    = 
| postal_code_type   = 
| postal_code        = 
| area_code_type     = 
| area_code          = 
| iso_code           = 
| website            = &lt;!-- {{URL|example.com}} --&gt;
| footnotes          = 
}}
[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]]
'''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اولھ ۾ اتر وزيرستان ۽ ڏکڻ ۾ ڏکڻ وزيرستان واقع آھن.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt;


'''Wazir Tehsil''' is an administrative subdivision ([[Administrative units of Pakistan#Tehsil|tehsil]]) of [[Bannu District]], Bannu Division, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Province, Pakistan. The total population, according to the 1998 census, was {{sigfig|19593|3}},&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |title=1998 census report of Tribal Area Adjoining Bannu District |date=2001 |publisher=Population Census Organization, Statistics Division, Government of Pakistan |series=Census publication |volume=150 |location=Islamabad}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|5}} 98.1% of which have [[Pashto]] as a [[first language]], and the remaining 1.9% speak [[Punjabi language|Punjabi]].&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot; /&gt;{{rp|6}}

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>j2wgwm090tvx149lrnvncssx3m0xep4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394022</id>
      <parentid>394021</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:19:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394022</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6390" sha1="gxd6cb1k8sxobu4zxvcz416v041jenf" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Subdivision of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan}}{{Other uses|Bannu District|Bannu Tehsil}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Wazir Tehsil
| native_name        = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل گومتی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ګوماتي تحصیل}}}}
| other_name         = Frontier Region Bannu&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ur|{{nq|سرحدی علاقہ بنوں}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|بنو سرحدي سیمه}}}}
| native_name_lang   = 
| settlement_type    = Tehsil
| image_skyline      = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_flag         = 
| flag_alt           = 
| image_seal         = 
| seal_alt           = 
| image_shield       = 
| shield_alt         = 
| etymology          = 
| nickname           = 
| motto              = 
| image_map          = {{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption        = Wazir Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]
| pushpin_map        = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_map_alt    = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| coordinates        = &lt;!-- {{Coord}} --&gt;
| coor_pinpoint      = 
| coordinates_footnotes = 
| subdivision_type   = Country
| subdivision_name   = {{flagu|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1  = [[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Region]]
| subdivision_name1  = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2  = 
| subdivision_name2  = 
| subdivision_type3  = 
| subdivision_name3  = 
| established_title  = 
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = 
| seat               = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = 
| governing_body     = 
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = 
| leader_name        = 
| leader_title1      = 
| leader_name1       = 
| leader_title2      = 
| leader_name2       = 
| leader_title3      = 
| leader_name3       = 
| leader_title4      = 
| leader_name4       = 
| legislature        = 
| upper_house        = 
| lower_house        = 
| unit_pref          = Metric
&lt;!-- ALL fields with measurements have automatic unit conversion --&gt;
&lt;!-- for references: use &lt;ref&gt; tags --&gt;| area_footnotes     = 
| area_urban_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_rural_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_metro_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_magnitude     = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_note          = 
| area_water_percent = 
| area_rank          = 
| area_blank1_title  = 
| area_blank2_title  = &lt;!-- square kilometers --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 
| area_land_km2      = 
| area_water_km2     = 
| area_urban_km2     = 
| area_rural_km2     = 
| area_metro_km2     = 
| area_blank1_km2    = 
| area_blank2_km2    = &lt;!-- hectares --&gt;
| area_total_ha      = 
| area_land_ha       = 
| area_water_ha      = 
| area_urban_ha      = 
| area_rural_ha      = 
| area_metro_ha      = 
| area_blank1_ha     = 
| area_blank2_ha     = 
| length_km          = 
| width_km           = 
| dimensions_footnotes = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m        = 
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=&quot;DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|title=DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|access-date=2017-12-17|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170829164748/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|archive-date=2017-08-29|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_total   = 43,114
| population_density_km2 = auto
| population_note    = 
| population_demonym = 
| timezone1          = 
| utc_offset1        = 
| timezone1_DST      = 
| utc_offset1_DST    = 
| postal_code_type   = 
| postal_code        = 
| area_code_type     = 
| area_code          = 
| iso_code           = 
| website            = &lt;!-- {{URL|example.com}} --&gt;
| footnotes          = 
}}
[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]]
'''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اولھ ۾ اتر وزيرستان ۽ ڏکڻ ۾ ڏکڻ وزيرستان واقع آھن.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt;


'''Wazir Tehsil''' is an administrative subdivision ([[Administrative units of Pakistan#Tehsil|tehsil]]) of [[Bannu District]], Bannu Division, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Province, Pakistan. The total population, according to the 1998 census, was {{sigfig|19593|3}},&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |title=1998 census report of Tribal Area Adjoining Bannu District |date=2001 |publisher=Population Census Organization, Statistics Division, Government of Pakistan |series=Census publication |volume=150 |location=Islamabad}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|5}} 98.1% of which have [[Pashto]] as a [[first language]], and the remaining 1.9% speak [[Punjabi language|Punjabi]].&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot; /&gt;{{rp|6}}

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>gxd6cb1k8sxobu4zxvcz416v041jenf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394023</id>
      <parentid>394022</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:29:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394023</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6189" sha1="jhpu6g3dd4fqmpfw6in2q8tp55r8gkh" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Subdivision of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan}}{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Wazir Tehsil
| native_name        = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل گومتی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ګوماتي تحصیل}}}}
| other_name         = Frontier Region Bannu&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ur|{{nq|سرحدی علاقہ بنوں}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|بنو سرحدي سیمه}}}}
| native_name_lang   = 
| settlement_type    = Tehsil
| image_skyline      = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_flag         = 
| flag_alt           = 
| image_seal         = 
| seal_alt           = 
| image_shield       = 
| shield_alt         = 
| etymology          = 
| nickname           = 
| motto              = 
| image_map          = {{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption        = Wazir Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]
| pushpin_map        = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_map_alt    = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| coordinates        = &lt;!-- {{Coord}} --&gt;
| coor_pinpoint      = 
| coordinates_footnotes = 
| subdivision_type   = Country
| subdivision_name   = {{flagu|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1  = [[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Region]]
| subdivision_name1  = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2  = 
| subdivision_name2  = 
| subdivision_type3  = 
| subdivision_name3  = 
| established_title  = 
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = 
| seat               = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = 
| governing_body     = 
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = 
| leader_name        = 
| leader_title1      = 
| leader_name1       = 
| leader_title2      = 
| leader_name2       = 
| leader_title3      = 
| leader_name3       = 
| leader_title4      = 
| leader_name4       = 
| legislature        = 
| upper_house        = 
| lower_house        = 
| unit_pref          = Metric
&lt;!-- ALL fields with measurements have automatic unit conversion --&gt;
&lt;!-- for references: use &lt;ref&gt; tags --&gt;| area_footnotes     = 
| area_urban_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_rural_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_metro_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_magnitude     = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_note          = 
| area_water_percent = 
| area_rank          = 
| area_blank1_title  = 
| area_blank2_title  = &lt;!-- square kilometers --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 
| area_land_km2      = 
| area_water_km2     = 
| area_urban_km2     = 
| area_rural_km2     = 
| area_metro_km2     = 
| area_blank1_km2    = 
| area_blank2_km2    = &lt;!-- hectares --&gt;
| area_total_ha      = 
| area_land_ha       = 
| area_water_ha      = 
| area_urban_ha      = 
| area_rural_ha      = 
| area_metro_ha      = 
| area_blank1_ha     = 
| area_blank2_ha     = 
| length_km          = 
| width_km           = 
| dimensions_footnotes = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m        = 
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=&quot;DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|title=DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|access-date=2017-12-17|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170829164748/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|archive-date=2017-08-29|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_total   = 43,114
| population_density_km2 = auto
| population_note    = 
| population_demonym = 
| timezone1          = 
| utc_offset1        = 
| timezone1_DST      = 
| utc_offset1_DST    = 
| postal_code_type   = 
| postal_code        = 
| area_code_type     = 
| area_code          = 
| iso_code           = 
| website            = &lt;!-- {{URL|example.com}} --&gt;
| footnotes          = 
}}
[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون ضلعو ]]
'''وزير تعلقو''' ([[اردو]]، [[پشتو ٻولي|پشتو]])، [[پاڪستان]] جي [[خيبر پختونخوا]] صوبي جي [[بنون ڊويزن]] جي ضلعي [[بنون ضلعو|بنون]] جو هڪ انتظامي ذيلي حصو ([[خيبرپختونخواه جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقو]]) آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt; سال &lt;small&gt;1998&lt;/small&gt;ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، هتي جي ڪل آبادي &lt;small&gt;19,600&lt;/small&gt; هئي، &lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |title=1998 census report of Tribal Area Adjoining Bannu District |date=2001 |publisher=Population Census Organization, Statistics Division, Government of Pakistan |series=Census publication |volume=150 |location=Islamabad}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن مان &lt;small&gt;98.1&lt;/small&gt; سيڪڙو ماڻهن جي [[لنگئا فرانڪا|مادري ٻولي]] [[پشتو ٻولي|پشتو]] هئي، جڏهن ته باقي &lt;small&gt;1.9&lt;/small&gt; سيڪڙو ماڻهو [[پنجابي ٻولي|پنجابي]] ڳالهائيندا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot; /&gt;

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>jhpu6g3dd4fqmpfw6in2q8tp55r8gkh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394024</id>
      <parentid>394023</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:30:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394024</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6189" sha1="lfv02jt14hxk4y64f7hsj942iqhkym4" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Subdivision of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan}}{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Wazir Tehsil
| native_name        = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل گومتی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ګوماتي تحصیل}}}}
| other_name         = Frontier Region Bannu&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ur|{{nq|سرحدی علاقہ بنوں}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|بنو سرحدي سیمه}}}}
| native_name_lang   = 
| settlement_type    = Tehsil
| image_skyline      = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_flag         = 
| flag_alt           = 
| image_seal         = 
| seal_alt           = 
| image_shield       = 
| shield_alt         = 
| etymology          = 
| nickname           = 
| motto              = 
| image_map          = {{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption        = Wazir Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]
| pushpin_map        = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_map_alt    = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| coordinates        = &lt;!-- {{Coord}} --&gt;
| coor_pinpoint      = 
| coordinates_footnotes = 
| subdivision_type   = Country
| subdivision_name   = {{flagu|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1  = [[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Region]]
| subdivision_name1  = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2  = 
| subdivision_name2  = 
| subdivision_type3  = 
| subdivision_name3  = 
| established_title  = 
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = 
| seat               = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = 
| governing_body     = 
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = 
| leader_name        = 
| leader_title1      = 
| leader_name1       = 
| leader_title2      = 
| leader_name2       = 
| leader_title3      = 
| leader_name3       = 
| leader_title4      = 
| leader_name4       = 
| legislature        = 
| upper_house        = 
| lower_house        = 
| unit_pref          = Metric
&lt;!-- ALL fields with measurements have automatic unit conversion --&gt;
&lt;!-- for references: use &lt;ref&gt; tags --&gt;| area_footnotes     = 
| area_urban_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_rural_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_metro_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_magnitude     = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_note          = 
| area_water_percent = 
| area_rank          = 
| area_blank1_title  = 
| area_blank2_title  = &lt;!-- square kilometers --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 
| area_land_km2      = 
| area_water_km2     = 
| area_urban_km2     = 
| area_rural_km2     = 
| area_metro_km2     = 
| area_blank1_km2    = 
| area_blank2_km2    = &lt;!-- hectares --&gt;
| area_total_ha      = 
| area_land_ha       = 
| area_water_ha      = 
| area_urban_ha      = 
| area_rural_ha      = 
| area_metro_ha      = 
| area_blank1_ha     = 
| area_blank2_ha     = 
| length_km          = 
| width_km           = 
| dimensions_footnotes = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m        = 
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=&quot;DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|title=DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|access-date=2017-12-17|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170829164748/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|archive-date=2017-08-29|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_total   = 43,114
| population_density_km2 = auto
| population_note    = 
| population_demonym = 
| timezone1          = 
| utc_offset1        = 
| timezone1_DST      = 
| utc_offset1_DST    = 
| postal_code_type   = 
| postal_code        = 
| area_code_type     = 
| area_code          = 
| iso_code           = 
| website            = &lt;!-- {{URL|example.com}} --&gt;
| footnotes          = 
}}
[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون ضلعو ]]
'''وزير تعلقو''' ([[اردو]]، [[پشتو ٻولي|پشتو]])، [[پاڪستان]] جي [[خيبر پختونخوا]] صوبي جي [[بنون ڊويزن]] جي ضلعي [[بنون ضلعو|بنون]] جو هڪ انتظامي ذيلي حصو ([[خيبرپختونخواه جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقو]]) آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt; سال &lt;small&gt;1998&lt;/small&gt;ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، هتي جي ڪل آبادي &lt;small&gt;19,600&lt;/small&gt; هئي، &lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |title=1998 census report of Tribal Area Adjoining Bannu District |date=2001 |publisher=Population Census Organization, Statistics Division, Government of Pakistan |series=Census publication |volume=150 |location=Islamabad}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن مان &lt;small&gt;98.1&lt;/small&gt; سيڪڙو ماڻهن جي [[لنگئا فرانڪا|مادري ٻولي]] [[پشتو ٻولي|پشتو]] هئي، جڏهن ته باقي &lt;small&gt;1.9&lt;/small&gt; سيڪڙو ماڻهو [[پنجابي ٻولي|پنجابي]] ڳالهائيندا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot; /&gt;

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:وزير تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>lfv02jt14hxk4y64f7hsj942iqhkym4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394026</id>
      <parentid>394024</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:31:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[بنون تعلقو]] کي [[وزير تعلقو]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394024</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6189" sha1="lfv02jt14hxk4y64f7hsj942iqhkym4" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Subdivision of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan}}{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Wazir Tehsil
| native_name        = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل گومتی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ګوماتي تحصیل}}}}
| other_name         = Frontier Region Bannu&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ur|{{nq|سرحدی علاقہ بنوں}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|بنو سرحدي سیمه}}}}
| native_name_lang   = 
| settlement_type    = Tehsil
| image_skyline      = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_flag         = 
| flag_alt           = 
| image_seal         = 
| seal_alt           = 
| image_shield       = 
| shield_alt         = 
| etymology          = 
| nickname           = 
| motto              = 
| image_map          = {{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption        = Wazir Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]
| pushpin_map        = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_map_alt    = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| coordinates        = &lt;!-- {{Coord}} --&gt;
| coor_pinpoint      = 
| coordinates_footnotes = 
| subdivision_type   = Country
| subdivision_name   = {{flagu|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1  = [[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Region]]
| subdivision_name1  = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2  = 
| subdivision_name2  = 
| subdivision_type3  = 
| subdivision_name3  = 
| established_title  = 
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = 
| seat               = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = 
| governing_body     = 
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = 
| leader_name        = 
| leader_title1      = 
| leader_name1       = 
| leader_title2      = 
| leader_name2       = 
| leader_title3      = 
| leader_name3       = 
| leader_title4      = 
| leader_name4       = 
| legislature        = 
| upper_house        = 
| lower_house        = 
| unit_pref          = Metric
&lt;!-- ALL fields with measurements have automatic unit conversion --&gt;
&lt;!-- for references: use &lt;ref&gt; tags --&gt;| area_footnotes     = 
| area_urban_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_rural_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_metro_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_magnitude     = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_note          = 
| area_water_percent = 
| area_rank          = 
| area_blank1_title  = 
| area_blank2_title  = &lt;!-- square kilometers --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 
| area_land_km2      = 
| area_water_km2     = 
| area_urban_km2     = 
| area_rural_km2     = 
| area_metro_km2     = 
| area_blank1_km2    = 
| area_blank2_km2    = &lt;!-- hectares --&gt;
| area_total_ha      = 
| area_land_ha       = 
| area_water_ha      = 
| area_urban_ha      = 
| area_rural_ha      = 
| area_metro_ha      = 
| area_blank1_ha     = 
| area_blank2_ha     = 
| length_km          = 
| width_km           = 
| dimensions_footnotes = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m        = 
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=&quot;DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|title=DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|access-date=2017-12-17|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170829164748/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|archive-date=2017-08-29|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_total   = 43,114
| population_density_km2 = auto
| population_note    = 
| population_demonym = 
| timezone1          = 
| utc_offset1        = 
| timezone1_DST      = 
| utc_offset1_DST    = 
| postal_code_type   = 
| postal_code        = 
| area_code_type     = 
| area_code          = 
| iso_code           = 
| website            = &lt;!-- {{URL|example.com}} --&gt;
| footnotes          = 
}}
[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون ضلعو ]]
'''وزير تعلقو''' ([[اردو]]، [[پشتو ٻولي|پشتو]])، [[پاڪستان]] جي [[خيبر پختونخوا]] صوبي جي [[بنون ڊويزن]] جي ضلعي [[بنون ضلعو|بنون]] جو هڪ انتظامي ذيلي حصو ([[خيبرپختونخواه جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقو]]) آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt; سال &lt;small&gt;1998&lt;/small&gt;ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، هتي جي ڪل آبادي &lt;small&gt;19,600&lt;/small&gt; هئي، &lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |title=1998 census report of Tribal Area Adjoining Bannu District |date=2001 |publisher=Population Census Organization, Statistics Division, Government of Pakistan |series=Census publication |volume=150 |location=Islamabad}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن مان &lt;small&gt;98.1&lt;/small&gt; سيڪڙو ماڻهن جي [[لنگئا فرانڪا|مادري ٻولي]] [[پشتو ٻولي|پشتو]] هئي، جڏهن ته باقي &lt;small&gt;1.9&lt;/small&gt; سيڪڙو ماڻهو [[پنجابي ٻولي|پنجابي]] ڳالهائيندا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot; /&gt;

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:وزير تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>lfv02jt14hxk4y64f7hsj942iqhkym4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>مظفر آباد ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30408</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393999</id>
      <parentid>287284</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:20:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>393999</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11031" sha1="mh2dtc370ihnzs26j5dqrzqe153eolh" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement
| name = مظفرآباد ضلعو
| official_name = 
| native_name = ضلع مُظفّرآباد
| native_name_lang = ur
| settlement_type = پاڪستان جي زير انتظام آزاد ڪشمير جو ضلعو&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| image_skyline = New muzaffarabad city view.JPG
| imagesize = 250px
| image_alt = 
| image_caption = مظفرآباد شهر
| image_map1 = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_alt = 
| map_caption1 = هڪ نقشو جنهن ۾ پاڪستان جي انتظام هيٺ ڪشمير (آزاد ڪشمير+ گلگت+ بلتستان) (سيج سائي ۾ ڇانيل) تڪراري ڪشمير واري علائقي ۾ ڏيکاريل آهي.&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| coordinates = {{coord|34|20|N|73|36|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:100000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Muzaffarabad District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption = مظفرآباد جو انٽر اڪٽيو نقشو
| coor_pinpoint = مظفرآباد
| subdivision_name = [[پاڪستان]]
| subdivision_type = ملڪ (جنهن جي زير انتظام آهي)
| subdivision_type1 = [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|علائقو]]
| subdivision_name1 = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2 = ڊويزن
| subdivision_name2 = [[مظفرآباد ڊويزن]]
| founder = 
| seat_type = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| seat = [[مظفرآباد]]
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type = ضلعي انتظاميا
| leader_party = 
| leader_title = [[ڊپٽي ڪميشنر (پاڪستان)|ڊپٽي ڪميشنر]]
| leader_name = راجا طاهر ممتاز
| leader_title1 = ضلعي پوليس آفيسر (ڊي ايس پي)
| leader_name1 = طارق شفيع
| leader_title2 = ضلعي ايجوڪيشن آفيسر
| leader_name2 = صائمه نذير
| unit_pref = Metric&lt;!-- or US or UK --&gt;
| area_footnotes = 
| area_total_km2 = 1,642
| population_total = 6,50,370
| population_as_of = 2017ع
| population_density_km2 = 396
| demographics_type1 = Languages
| demographics1_title1 = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1 = [[اردو]]
| demographics1_title2 = Spoken
| demographics1_info2 = {{hlist|[[Pahari-Pothwari|Pahari]]/[[Hindko]]|[[Gujari]]|[[ڪشمري ٻولي|ڪشميري]]}}
| blank_name_sec1 = [[آزاد ڪشمير جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقن]] جو تعداد
| blank_info_sec1 = 2
| blank1_name_sec1 = 
| blank1_info_sec1 = 
| website = 
| longEW = 
| leader_title3 = ضلعي ناظم
| leader_name3 = امتياز احمد عباسي
}}
'''مظفر آباد''' [[پاڪستان]] جي زيرانتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمو ۽ ڪشمير]] جي  ڏھن  ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;tertiary-kashmir2&quot;&gt;The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of [[Kashmir]] and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[وڪيپيڊيا:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[وڪيپيڊيا:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicized usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below). 

(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent|accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;

(b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin|accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;; 

(c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;; 

(d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot; 

(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;  

(f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}

(g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}} 

(h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot; 

(i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;; 

(j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicised terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;&lt;/ref&gt; هي ضلعو جهلم ۽ نيلم ندين جي ڪنارن تي واقع آهي ۽ تمام گهڻو جبلن وارو علائقو آهي. ضلعو مظفرآباد ڊويزن جو حصو آهي ۽ مظفرآباد شهر آزاد ڪشمير جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ آهي. هي ضلعو اتر-اوڀر طرف [[نيلم ضلعو|نيلم ضلعي]] ۽ هندستان جي انتظام هيٺ ڄمون ۽ ڪشمير جي ڪپواڙا ضلعي، ڏکڻ-اوڀر ۾ [[هٽيان بالا ضلعو|هٽيان بالا ضلعي]]، ڏکڻ ۾ [[باغ ضلعو|باغ ضلعي]] ۽ اولهه ۾ پاڪستان جي صوبي خيبرپختونخوا جا ضلعا [[مانسھرہ ضلعو|مانسهره]] ۽ [[ايبٽ آباد ضلعو|ايبٽ آباد]] آهن. ضلعي مظفر آباد جي ڪل ايراضي 6,117 چورس ڪلوميٽر آھي. سال 1998ع جي مردم شماری جي مطابق ضلعي جي آبادي 7,25،000 ھئي.[[File:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Muzaffarabad.svg|thumb|right|300px|A map of Azad Kashmir with the Muzaffarabad District highlighted in red]]

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:مظفر آباد ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>mh2dtc370ihnzs26j5dqrzqe153eolh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ھٽيان بالا ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30409</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394010</id>
      <parentid>279892</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:29:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394010</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10554" sha1="msj8f4rd3hro2ip61ihlj8txhl935li" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|District of Azad Kashmir, administered by Pakistan}}
{{Infobox settlement
| native_name             = {{nq|ضلع ہٹیاں بالا}}
| settlement_type         = [[List of districts in Azad Kashmir|District of Azad Kashmir]] administered by Pakistanz{{efn|name=tertiary-kashmir}}
| image_map1         = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption1       = A map showing Pakistani-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] (shaded in [[sage (color)|sage]] green) in the disputed [[Kashmir]] region{{efn|name=tertiary-kashmir}}
| coordinates      = {{coord|34|12|N|73|47|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:50000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map          = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Hattian Bala District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption        = Interactive map of Hattian Bala district
| coor_pinpoint            = Hattian Bala
| subdivision_type        = Administering country
| subdivision_name        = [[Pakistan]]
| subdivision_type1       = [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|علائقو]]
| subdivision_name1       = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2       = [[پاڪستان جون ڊويزنون|ڊويزن]]
| subdivision_name2       = [[مظفرآباد ڊويزن]]
| seat_type               = Headquarters
| seat                    = [[ھٽيان مٿيون]]
| government_footnotes    = 
| government_type         = ضلعي انتظاميا
| leader_party            = 
| leader_title            = [[ڊپٽي ڪميشنر (پاڪستان)|ڊپٽي ڪميشنر]]
| leader_name             = [[نديم احمد جنجوہ]]
| leader_title1           = ضلعي پوليس آفيسر (ڊي ايس پي)
| leader_name1            = N/A
| leader_title2           = ضلعي صحت آفيسر
| leader_name2            = N/A
| unit_pref               = Metric&lt;!-- or US or UK --&gt;
| area_land_km2 = 854
| population_total = 230,529
| population_as_of = 2017
| demographics_type1      = Languages
| demographics1_title1    = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1     = [[اردو]]
| demographics1_title2    = مقامي
| demographics1_info2     = {{hlist|[[Pahari language (Kashmir)|Pahari]]|[[Gojri language|Gojri]]|[[ڪشمري ٻولي|ڪشميري]]}}
| population_density_km2 = 270
| blank_name_sec1         = [[آزاد ڪشمير جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقن]] جو تعداد
| blank_info_sec1         = 3 
| blank1_name_sec1        = 
| blank1_info_sec1        = 
| website                 =
}}
'''ھٽيان بالا''' [[پاڪستان]] جي زيرانتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمو ۽ ڪشمير]] جي  ڏھن ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي. سال 2009ع کان پھريان ھي ضلعي [[حويلي ضلعو|حويلي]] جو حصو ھو.

'''Hattian Bala District''' ({{lang-ur|{{Nastaliq|ضلع ہٹیاں بالا}}}}) is a district of [[Pakistan]]-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] in the [[Kashmir#Dispute|disputed]] [[Kashmir]] region.{{efn|name=tertiary-kashmir |The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of [[Kashmir]] and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[WP:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[WP:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicized usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below). &lt;br/&gt;
(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent |accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, a region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;&lt;br/&gt; (b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin |accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopaedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopaedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot; &lt;br/&gt;(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;  &lt;br/&gt; (f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopaedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}&lt;br/&gt;  (g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|publisher=Oxford University Press|location = Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}} &lt;br/&gt; (h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot; &lt;br/&gt; (i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicized terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;}} The town of [[ھٽيان مٿيون]] is where the district headquarters are located. The Hattian Bala District was a part of the [[Muzaffarabad District]] until 2009 when it was made a separate district.

[[File:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Hattian Bala.svg|right|thumb|300px|Map of Azad Kashmir with the Hattian Bala District highlighted in red]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:هٽيان بالا ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>msj8f4rd3hro2ip61ihlj8txhl935li</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394012</id>
      <parentid>394010</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:30:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[ھٽيان مٿيون ضلعو]] کي [[ھٽيان بالا ضلعو]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394010</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10554" sha1="msj8f4rd3hro2ip61ihlj8txhl935li" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|District of Azad Kashmir, administered by Pakistan}}
{{Infobox settlement
| native_name             = {{nq|ضلع ہٹیاں بالا}}
| settlement_type         = [[List of districts in Azad Kashmir|District of Azad Kashmir]] administered by Pakistanz{{efn|name=tertiary-kashmir}}
| image_map1         = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption1       = A map showing Pakistani-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] (shaded in [[sage (color)|sage]] green) in the disputed [[Kashmir]] region{{efn|name=tertiary-kashmir}}
| coordinates      = {{coord|34|12|N|73|47|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:50000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map          = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Hattian Bala District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption        = Interactive map of Hattian Bala district
| coor_pinpoint            = Hattian Bala
| subdivision_type        = Administering country
| subdivision_name        = [[Pakistan]]
| subdivision_type1       = [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|علائقو]]
| subdivision_name1       = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2       = [[پاڪستان جون ڊويزنون|ڊويزن]]
| subdivision_name2       = [[مظفرآباد ڊويزن]]
| seat_type               = Headquarters
| seat                    = [[ھٽيان مٿيون]]
| government_footnotes    = 
| government_type         = ضلعي انتظاميا
| leader_party            = 
| leader_title            = [[ڊپٽي ڪميشنر (پاڪستان)|ڊپٽي ڪميشنر]]
| leader_name             = [[نديم احمد جنجوہ]]
| leader_title1           = ضلعي پوليس آفيسر (ڊي ايس پي)
| leader_name1            = N/A
| leader_title2           = ضلعي صحت آفيسر
| leader_name2            = N/A
| unit_pref               = Metric&lt;!-- or US or UK --&gt;
| area_land_km2 = 854
| population_total = 230,529
| population_as_of = 2017
| demographics_type1      = Languages
| demographics1_title1    = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1     = [[اردو]]
| demographics1_title2    = مقامي
| demographics1_info2     = {{hlist|[[Pahari language (Kashmir)|Pahari]]|[[Gojri language|Gojri]]|[[ڪشمري ٻولي|ڪشميري]]}}
| population_density_km2 = 270
| blank_name_sec1         = [[آزاد ڪشمير جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقن]] جو تعداد
| blank_info_sec1         = 3 
| blank1_name_sec1        = 
| blank1_info_sec1        = 
| website                 =
}}
'''ھٽيان بالا''' [[پاڪستان]] جي زيرانتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمو ۽ ڪشمير]] جي  ڏھن ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي. سال 2009ع کان پھريان ھي ضلعي [[حويلي ضلعو|حويلي]] جو حصو ھو.

'''Hattian Bala District''' ({{lang-ur|{{Nastaliq|ضلع ہٹیاں بالا}}}}) is a district of [[Pakistan]]-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] in the [[Kashmir#Dispute|disputed]] [[Kashmir]] region.{{efn|name=tertiary-kashmir |The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of [[Kashmir]] and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[WP:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[WP:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicized usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below). &lt;br/&gt;
(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent |accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, a region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;&lt;br/&gt; (b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin |accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopaedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopaedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot; &lt;br/&gt;(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;  &lt;br/&gt; (f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopaedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}&lt;br/&gt;  (g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|publisher=Oxford University Press|location = Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}} &lt;br/&gt; (h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot; &lt;br/&gt; (i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicized terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;}} The town of [[ھٽيان مٿيون]] is where the district headquarters are located. The Hattian Bala District was a part of the [[Muzaffarabad District]] until 2009 when it was made a separate district.

[[File:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Hattian Bala.svg|right|thumb|300px|Map of Azad Kashmir with the Hattian Bala District highlighted in red]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:هٽيان بالا ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>msj8f4rd3hro2ip61ihlj8txhl935li</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>نيلم ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30410</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393991</id>
      <parentid>309839</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:12:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>393991</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1670" sha1="cqi9owygfflvoyxaselge66y05qdamo" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement
| name = نيلم ضلعو
| nickname = 
| native_name = نيٖلم ویلی
| native_name_lang = ks
| coordinates = {{coord|34|36|43|N|73|53|58|E|type:_city|display=title,inline}}
| settlement_type = ضلعو
| image_skyline = File:Arangkel Ajk.JPG
| imagesize = 
| image_caption = 
| pushpin_map = Azad Kashmir
| pushpin_map_caption = ڪشمير جي نقشي ۾
| subdivision_type = ملڪ
| subdivision_name = [[پاڪستان]]
| subdivision_type1 = رياست
| subdivision_name1 = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2 = [[صدر مقام]]
| subdivision_name2 = 
}}

'''نيلم''' (Neelum) [[پاڪستان ]] جي زير انتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمون ۽ ڪشمير ]]جي ڏھن ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي. نيلم ضلعي جي علائقي جي طرف آزاد ڪشمير جو سڀ کان وڏو ضلعو آھي. ھي نيلم درياھ سان گڏوگڏ تقريباََ 200 ڪلو ميٽر وسيع ھڪ وادي آھي. 

ضلعي ۾ قابل ذڪر جڳھن ۾ شامل آھن؛

•  نوسیري

• لیسوا

•  باریان

• جورا

• ڪنڊل شاھي 

• ڪاسي

• سلخالا 

• شاھ ڪوٽ 

• اتمقام 

• ڪيرن

• شاردا

• ڪيل

• تائوبٽ   ۽

• ھلمٽ 

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[نيلم ندي|نيلم وادي]]
* [[نيلم ندي]]&lt;br&gt;

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:نيلم ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان ۾ واديون]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جاگرافي اسٽب]]</text>
      <sha1>cqi9owygfflvoyxaselge66y05qdamo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ميرپور ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30411</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394001</id>
      <parentid>279885</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:22:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394001</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11411" sha1="em1pgv222tga07jjqk4umncbmooqhzk" xml:space="preserve">{{For|بئین جایون میرپور جی نالی سان|میرپور (ضد ابھام)}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Mirpur District
| native_name        = {{nq|ضلع میرپور}}
| native_name_lang   = ur
| settlement_type    = [[List of districts in Azad Kashmir|District of Azad Kashmir]] administered by Pakistan&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| image_skyline      = Mirpur Azad Kashmir.jpg
| image_blank_emblem = 
| blank_emblem_type  = 
| image_map1         = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_caption1       = Pakistani-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] (shaded in green) in the disputed [[Kashmir]] region&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| coordinates      = {{coord|33|9|0|N|73|44|0|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:100000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map          = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Mirpur District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption        = Interactive map of Mirpur district
| coor_pinpoint      = Mirpur, Azad Kashmir
| subdivision_type   = Administering country
| subdivision_name   = [[Pakistan]]
| subdivision_type1  = [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|علائقو]]
| subdivision_name1  = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2  = [[پاڪستان جون ڊويزنون|ڊويزن]]
| subdivision_name2  = [[Mirpur Division]]
| established_title  = قيام
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = صدرمقام
| seat               = [[Mirpur, Azad Kashmir|Mirpur]]
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = ضلعي انتظاميا
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = [[ڊپٽي ڪميشنر (پاڪستان)|ڊپٽي ڪميشنر]]
| leader_name        = N/A
| leader_title1      = ضلعي پوليس آفيسر (ڊي ايس پي)
| leader_name1       = N/A
| leader_title2      = ضلعي صحت آفيسر
| leader_name2       = N/A
| unit_pref          = Metric&lt;!-- or US or UK --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 1,010
| population_total   = 456,200
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_density_km2 = 452
| demographics_type1 = Languages
| demographics1_title1 = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1 = [[اردو]]&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nationalia.info/profile/10/kashmir|title = Kashmir| date=20 June 2023 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
| demographics1_title2 = Spoken
| demographics1_info2 = {{hlist|[[Pahari-Pothwari]]|[[Gojri]]}}
| blank_name_sec1    = [[آزاد ڪشمير جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقن]] جو تعداد
| blank_info_sec1    = 2
| blank1_name_sec1   = 
| blank1_info_sec1   = 
| website            = 
| image_caption      = Mirpur is the capital of Mirpur district
}}
'''ميرپور (Mirpur District)''' [[پاڪستان]] جي زيرانتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمو ۽ ڪشمير]] جي ڏھن ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;tertiary-kashmir2&quot;&gt;The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of Kashmir and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[وڪيپيڊيا:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[وڪيپيڊيا:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicized usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below).

(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent|accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;

(b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin|accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;;

(c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;;

(d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot;

(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;

(f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}

(g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|year=2022|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}}

(h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot;

(i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;;

(j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicised terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;&lt;/ref&gt; ميرپور ضلعو اتر ۾ آزاد ڪشمير جي ضلعي ڪوٽلي، اوڀر ۾ ڀمبر، ڏکڻ ۾ پاڪستان جی صوبی پنجاب جی ضلعي  گجرات، پنجاب، ڏکڻ۔اولهه ۾ جهلم، ء اوپر م پنجاب، پاڪستان جو ضلعو راولپنڊي آهي. ضلعي جو نالو ان جي مکيه شهر ميرپور جي نالي تي رکيو ويو آهي. ميرپور ضلعي جي آبادي 456,200 آهي&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=http://nation.com.pk/national/27-Aug-2017/census-2017-ajk-population-rises-to-over-4m|title=Census 2017: AJK population rises to over 4m|work=The Nation|access-date=2017-09-01|language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جي ايراضي 1,010 چورس ڪلوميٽر (390 چورس ميل) آهي. ضلعو گهڻو ڪري جبل واری علایقن ۽ ڪجهه ميداني علایقن تي مشتمل آهي. ميرپور ضلعي جی آبهوا نمی واری آھی،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://hess.copernicus.org/articles/11/1633/2007/hess-11-1633-2007.pdf|title=Updated world map of the Köppen-Geiger climate classification|access-date=2023-08-27}}&lt;/ref&gt;  جيڪا پاڪستان جي صوبي پنجاب  جي ضلعن گجرات، جهلم ۽  ڀرپاسي وارن ضلعن سان ملي ٿي.[[File:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Mirpur.svg|thumb|right|300px|Map of Azad Kashmir with the Mirpur District highlighted in red]]

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>em1pgv222tga07jjqk4umncbmooqhzk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394002</id>
      <parentid>394001</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:22:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394002</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11413" sha1="e3pbyyo9xgmlc3xsbwb8dh04m9648vd" xml:space="preserve">{{For|بئین جایون میرپور جی نالی سان|میرپور (ضد ابھام)}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Mirpur District
| native_name        = {{nq|ضلع میرپور}}
| native_name_lang   = ur
| settlement_type    = [[List of districts in Azad Kashmir|District of Azad Kashmir]] administered by Pakistan&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| image_skyline      = Mirpur Azad Kashmir.jpg
| image_blank_emblem = 
| blank_emblem_type  = 
| image_map1         = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_caption1       = Pakistani-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] (shaded in green) in the disputed [[Kashmir]] region&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| coordinates      = {{coord|33|9|0|N|73|44|0|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:100000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map          = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Mirpur District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption        = Interactive map of Mirpur district
| coor_pinpoint      = Mirpur, Azad Kashmir
| subdivision_type   = Administering country
| subdivision_name   = [[Pakistan]]
| subdivision_type1  = [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|علائقو]]
| subdivision_name1  = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2  = [[پاڪستان جون ڊويزنون|ڊويزن]]
| subdivision_name2  = [[Mirpur Division]]
| established_title  = قيام
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = صدرمقام
| seat               = [[Mirpur, Azad Kashmir|Mirpur]]
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = ضلعي انتظاميا
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = [[ڊپٽي ڪميشنر (پاڪستان)|ڊپٽي ڪميشنر]]
| leader_name        = N/A
| leader_title1      = ضلعي پوليس آفيسر (ڊي ايس پي)
| leader_name1       = N/A
| leader_title2      = ضلعي صحت آفيسر
| leader_name2       = N/A
| unit_pref          = Metric&lt;!-- or US or UK --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 1,010
| population_total   = 456,200
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_density_km2 = 452
| demographics_type1 = Languages
| demographics1_title1 = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1 = [[اردو]]&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nationalia.info/profile/10/kashmir|title = Kashmir| date=20 June 2023 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
| demographics1_title2 = Spoken
| demographics1_info2 = {{hlist|[[Pahari-Pothwari]]|[[Gojri]]}}
| blank_name_sec1    = [[آزاد ڪشمير جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقن]] جو تعداد
| blank_info_sec1    = 2
| blank1_name_sec1   = 
| blank1_info_sec1   = 
| website            = 
| image_caption      = Mirpur is the capital of Mirpur district
}}
'''ميرپور (Mirpur District)''' [[پاڪستان]] جي زيرانتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمو ۽ ڪشمير]] جي ڏھن ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي.&lt;ref name=&quot;tertiary-kashmir2&quot;&gt;The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of Kashmir and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[وڪيپيڊيا:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[وڪيپيڊيا:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicized usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below).

(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent|accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;

(b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin|accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;;

(c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;;

(d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot;

(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;

(f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}

(g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|year=2022|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}}

(h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot;

(i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;;

(j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicised terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;&lt;/ref&gt; ميرپور ضلعو اتر ۾ آزاد ڪشمير جي ضلعي ڪوٽلي، اوڀر ۾ ڀمبر، ڏکڻ ۾ پاڪستان جی صوبی پنجاب جی ضلعي  گجرات، پنجاب، ڏکڻ۔اولهه ۾ جهلم، ء اوپر م پنجاب، پاڪستان جو ضلعو راولپنڊي آهي. ضلعي جو نالو ان جي مکيه شهر ميرپور جي نالي تي رکيو ويو آهي. ميرپور ضلعي جي آبادي 456,200 آهي&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=http://nation.com.pk/national/27-Aug-2017/census-2017-ajk-population-rises-to-over-4m|title=Census 2017: AJK population rises to over 4m|work=The Nation|access-date=2017-09-01|language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جي ايراضي 1,010 چورس ڪلوميٽر (390 چورس ميل) آهي. ضلعو گهڻو ڪري جبل واری علایقن ۽ ڪجهه ميداني علایقن تي مشتمل آهي. ميرپور ضلعي جی آبهوا نمی واری آھی،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://hess.copernicus.org/articles/11/1633/2007/hess-11-1633-2007.pdf|title=Updated world map of the Köppen-Geiger climate classification|access-date=2023-08-27}}&lt;/ref&gt;  جيڪا پاڪستان جي صوبي پنجاب  جي ضلعن گجرات، جهلم ۽  ڀرپاسي وارن ضلعن سان ملي ٿي.[[File:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Mirpur.svg|thumb|right|300px|Map of Azad Kashmir with the Mirpur District highlighted in red]]

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ميرپور ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>e3pbyyo9xgmlc3xsbwb8dh04m9648vd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ڀمبر ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30412</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394006</id>
      <parentid>279889</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:25:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394006</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10579" sha1="lige5shduczxlhf1uzp2sxv55dvyb3t" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|District in Azad Jammu and Kashmir, Pakistan}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name                    = Bhimber District
| official_name           = Bhimber
| native_name             = {{nq|ضلع بھمبر}}
| settlement_type    = [[List of districts in Azad Kashmir|District of Azad Kashmir]] administered by Pakistan&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| image_skyline           = Bhimber, AJK.jpg
| imagesize               =
| image_alt               =
| image_caption           = Rural scene in Bhimber District
| image_map1         = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_caption1       = A map showing Pakistani-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] (shaded in [[sage (color)|sage]] green) in the disputd [[Kashmir]] region&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| coordinates      = {{coord|33|00|N|74|06|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:50000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map          = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Bhimber District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption        = Interactive map of Bhimber district
| coor_pinpoint      = Bhimber
| subdivision_type   = Administering country
| subdivision_name   = [[Pakistan]]
| subdivision_type1       = [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|علائقو]]
| subdivision_name1       = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2       = [[پاڪستان جون ڊويزنون|ڊويزن]]
| subdivision_name2       = [[Mirpur Division]]
| established_title       = 
| established_date        =
| founder                 =
| seat_type               = Headquarters
| seat                    = [[Bhimber]]
| government_footnotes    = 
| government_type         = ضلعي انتظاميا
| leader_party            = 
| leader_title            = [[ڊپٽي ڪميشنر (پاڪستان)|ڊپٽي ڪميشنر]]
| leader_name             = N/A
| leader_title1           = ضلعي پوليس آفيسر (ڊي ايس پي)
| leader_name1            = N/A
| leader_title2           = ضلعي صحت آفيسر
| leader_name2            = N/A
| unit_pref               = Metric&lt;!-- or US or UK --&gt;
| area_footnotes          =
| area_total_km2          = 1516
| population_total        = 420,624
| population_as_of        = 2017
| population_density_km2  = 277
| demographics_type1      = Languages
| demographics1_title1               = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1     = [[اردو]]
| demographics1_title2    = Spoken
| demographics1_info2     = {{hlist|[[Punjabi language|Punjabi]]|[[Pahari-Pothwari]]|[[Dogri language|Dogri]]}}
| blank_name_sec1         = [[آزاد ڪشمير جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقن]] جو تعداد
| blank_info_sec1         = 3
| blank1_name_sec1        = 
| blank1_info_sec1        = 
}}
'''ڀمبر''' [[پاڪستان]] جي زير انتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمو ۽ ڪشمير]] جي ڏھن ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي.

'''Bhimber District''' ({{lang-ur|{{nq|ضلع بھمبر}}}}) is a district of Pakistan-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] in the [[Kashmir#Dispute|disputed]] [[Kashmir]] region.&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir&gt;The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of [[Kashmir]] and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[WP:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[WP:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicized usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below). &lt;br/&gt;
(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent |accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;&lt;br/&gt; (b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin |accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot; &lt;br/&gt;(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;  &lt;br/&gt; (f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}&lt;br/&gt;  (g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|publisher=Oxford University Press|location = Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}} &lt;br/&gt; (h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot; &lt;br/&gt; (i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicised terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;  
&lt;/ref&gt; It is the southernmost of the 10 districts of [[Pakistan]]'s territory of [[آزاد ڪشمير]]. It has an area of 1,516&amp;nbsp;km², and the district headquarter is the town of [[Bhimber]].

[[File:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Bhimber.svg|right|thumb|300px|Map of Azad Kashmir with the Bhimber District highlighted in red]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڀمبر ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>lige5shduczxlhf1uzp2sxv55dvyb3t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ڪوٽلي ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30413</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394008</id>
      <parentid>279890</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:27:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394008</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12288" sha1="0hrb6ixbmx7adid6m03yasclblqur0l" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|District in Azad Kashmir, Pakistan}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Kotli District
| official_name      = 
| native_name        = {{nq|ضلع کوٹلی}}
| native_name_lang   = ur
| settlement_type    = [[List of districts in Azad Kashmir|District of Azad Kashmir]] administered by Pakistan&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| image_skyline      = Kotli 5, Azad Kashmir. Pakistan.jpg
| imagesize          = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_map1         = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_caption1       = A map showing Pakistani-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] (shaded in [[sage (color)|sage]] green) in the disputed [[Kashmir]] region&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| coordinates        = {{coord|33|30|20|N|73|53|57|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:50000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map          = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Kotli District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption        = Interactive map of Kotli district
| coor_pinpoint      = Kotli
| subdivision_type   = Administrating country
| subdivision_name   = [[Pakistan]]
| subdivision_type1  = [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|علائقو]]
| subdivision_name1  = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2  = [[پاڪستان جون ڊويزنون|ڊويزن]]
| subdivision_name2  = [[Mirpur Division]]
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = صدرمقام
| seat               = [[Kotli]]
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = ضلعي انتظاميا
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = [[ڊپٽي ڪميشنر (پاڪستان)|ڊپٽي ڪميشنر]]
| leader_name        = N/A
| leader_title1      = ضلعي پوليس آفيسر (ڊي ايس پي)
| leader_name1       = N/A
| leader_title2      = ضلعي صحت آفيسر
| leader_name2       = Syed Shafqat Hussain Shah
| unit_pref          = Metric&lt;!-- or US or UK --&gt;
| area_footnotes     = 
| area_total_km2     = 1,862
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_total   = 774,194&lt;ref name=city&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.citypopulation.de/AzadKashmir.html |website=Citypopulation.de website |title=Kotli District |access-date=29 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200629022906/http://www.citypopulation.de/AzadKashmir.html|url-status=dead|archive-date=29 June 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_density_km2 = 416
| blank_name_sec1    = [[آزاد ڪشمير جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقن]] جو تعداد
| blank_info_sec1    = 5
| blank1_name_sec1   = 
| blank1_info_sec1   = 
| demographics_type1 = Languages
| demographics1_title1 = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1 = [[اردو]]
| demographics1_title2 = Spoken
| demographics1_info2 = {{hlist|[[Pahari language (Kashmir)|Pahari]]|[[Gujari language|Gujari]]}}
}}
'''ڪوٽلي''' [[پاڪستان]] جي زيرانتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمو ۽ ڪشمير]] جي ڏھن ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي.

'''Kotli District''' ({{lang-ur|{{Nastaliq|ضلع کوٹلی}}}}) is a district of Pakistan-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] in the [[Kashmir#Dispute|Azad]] [[Kashmir]] region.&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir&gt;The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of [[Kashmir]] and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[WP:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[WP:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicized usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below). &lt;br/&gt;
(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent |accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;&lt;br/&gt; (b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin |accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot; &lt;br/&gt;(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;  &lt;br/&gt; (f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}&lt;br/&gt;  (g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|publisher=Oxford University Press|location = Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}} &lt;br/&gt; (h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot; &lt;br/&gt; (i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;; &lt;br/&gt; (j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicised terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;  
&lt;/ref&gt;  It is one of the 10 [[Districts of Pakistan|districts]] of [[Pakistan]]'s dependent territory of [[آزاد ڪشمير]].  It is bounded on the north by the [[Sudhanoti District]] and the [[Poonch District, Pakistan|Poonch District]], on the north-east by the [[Poonch district, India|Poonch District]] of Indian-administered Jammu and Kashmir, on the south by the [[Mirpur District|Mirpur]] and [[Bhimber District|Bhimber]] districts, and on the west by the [[Rawalpindi District]] on [[Pakistan]]'s [[Punjab, Pakistan|Punjab Province]]. Kotli is the biggest district of [[آزاد ڪشمير]] by population and the second biggest by land area, after the [[Neelum District]].  The district headquarters is the city of [[Kotli]].&lt;ref name=AJK&gt;{{cite web|url=http://ajk.gov.pk/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=39&amp;Itemid=78|access-date=29 March 2023|archive-date=30 June 2014|website=Azad Kashmir Government website|url-status=dead|title=Kotli District|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140630132739/http://ajk.gov.pk/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=39&amp;Itemid=78}}&lt;/ref&gt; The main native languages are [[Pahari language (Kashmir)|Pahari]] (estimated to be spoken by just under two thirds of the population), and [[Gujari language|Gujari]] (spoken by about a third of the population).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book| title = Statistical Year Book 2020| place = Muzaffarabad| publisher = AJ&amp;K Bureau Of Statistics| url = https://www.pndajk.gov.pk/uploadfiles/downloads/Statistical%20Year%20Book%202020.pdf| access-date = 3 March 2022| page = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Shakil 2012&quot;&gt;{{Cite web| last = Shakil| first = Mohsin| date = 2012| title = Languages of Erstwhile State of Jammu Kashmir (A Preliminary Study)| url = https://www.academia.edu/6485567| page = 12}} Pahari: 64%, Gorji: 35%; Others: 2%.&lt;/ref&gt;
[[File:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Kotli.svg|thumb|right|300px|Map of Azad Kashmir with the Kotli District highlighted in red]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪوٽلي ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>0hrb6ixbmx7adid6m03yasclblqur0l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>پونڇ ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30414</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394004</id>
      <parentid>279888</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:24:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394004</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16555" sha1="nup8h6dsvrbepta57uqwdth8g237onj" xml:space="preserve">{{For|Poonch district administered by India|Poonch district, India}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name = پونڇ ضلعو
| official_name = 
| native_name = {{nq|ضلع پونچھ}}
| native_name_lang = ur
| settlement_type = پاڪستان جي زير انتظام آزاد ڄمو ۽ ڪشمير جو ضلعو&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| image_skyline = [[File:Poonch valley - AJK.jpg|250px]]&lt;br/&gt;[[File:Toli Peer17.jpg|250px]]
| imagesize = 
| image_alt = 
| image_caption = ٽاپ: پونڇ جي وادي&lt;br/&gt;باٽم: ٽولي پير
| image_map1 = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_caption1 = A map showing Pakistani-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] (shaded in [[sage (color)|sage]] green) in the disputed [[Kashmir]] region&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| coordinates = {{coord|33|51|12|N|73|45|5|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:50000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Poonch District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption = پونڇ ضلعي جو نقشو
| coor_pinpoint = Rawalakot
| subdivision_type = [[ملڪ|ملڪ جن جي زير انتظام آزاد آھي]]
| subdivision_name = [[پاڪستان]]
| subdivision_type1 = زیر انتظام علایقو
| subdivision_name1 = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2 = ڈویزن
| subdivision_name2 = پونڇ ڈویزن
| established_title = قیام
| established_date = 
| founder = 
| seat_type = ھیدڪوارٽر
| seat = راولاڪوٽ
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type = ضلعي انتظامیا
| leader_party = 
| leader_title = ڈپٽي ڪمشنر
| leader_name = N/A
| leader_title1 = ڈسٽرڪٽ پولیس آفیسر
| leader_name1 = N/A
| leader_title2 = ضلعي صحت آفيسر
| leader_name2 = N/A
| unit_pref = Metric&lt;!-- or US or UK --&gt;
| area_footnotes = 
| area_total_km2 = 855
| population_total = 5,00,571
| population_as_of = 2017ع
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name =statyearbook2019&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.pndajk.gov.pk/uploadfiles/downloads/AJ&amp;K%20Statistical%20Year%20Book%202019.pdf|title=Statistical Year Book 2019
 |access-date=20 April 2020 |website=Statistics Azad Jammu and Kashmir| df=dmy }}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_density_km2 = 
| blank_name_sec1 = تعلقا
| blank_info_sec1 = 4
| blank1_name_sec1 = 
| blank1_info_sec1 = 
| website = 
| demographics_type1 = بولیون
| demographics1_title1 = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1 = اردو&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book| last = Rahman| first = Tariq| author-link = Tariq Rahman| title = Language and politics in Pakistan| date = 1996| publisher = Oxford University Press| isbn = 978-0-19-577692-8| page = 226}}&lt;!-- ref is only for Urdu's status in Azad Kashmir as a whole--&gt;&lt;/ref&gt;
| demographics1_title2 = بولی ویندیون
| demographics1_info2 = {{hlist|پھاڑی۔پوٹھوھاری|گوجری}}
}}
'''پونڇ ضلعو''' (اردو: ضلع پونچھ) [[پاڪستان]] جي زير انتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمو ۽ ڪشمير]] جي ڏھن ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي. هن جي اتر۔اولھہ ۾ [[باغ ضلعو]] ء اتر۔اوڀر ۾ [[حويلي ضلعو]] آھی. اوڀر ۾ هندستان جي انتظام هيٺ ڪشمير جو پونڇ ضلعو، ڏکڻ ۾ آزاد ڪشمير جا [[سڌنوتي ضلعو|سڊنوتي]] ۽ [[ڪوٽلي ضلعو|ڪوٽلي]] ضلعا ۽ اولهه ۾ پاڪستان جي صوبي [[پنجاب، پاڪستان|پنجاب]] جو ضلعو [[راولپنڊي ضلعو|راولپنڊي]] آهي. پونڇ ضلعو هندستان ۽ پاڪستان جي وچ ۾ وڏي ڪشمير تڪرار جو حصو آهي. ضلعي جو صدر مقام راولاڪوٽ شهر آهي. هي آزاد ڪشمير جو ٽيون وڏو آبادي وارو ضلعو آهي.

سال 1947ع ۾ آزاديءَ کان پوءِ، پونڇ ضلعي جي الهندي حصي ۾ بغاوت ٿي. سردار ابراهيم خان جي اڳواڻي ۾ باغين، پاڪستان کان مدد طلب ڪئي، جنهن هٿيار فراهم ڪيا ۽ پوءِ پشتون قبائلين کي استعمال ڪندي، پنهنجو حملو شروع ڪيو. جواب ۾، ڄمون ۽ ڪشمير جو مهاراجا هندستان ۾ شامل ٿيو ۽ تڪرار هڪ هندستان-پاڪستان جنگ ۾ تبديل ٿي ويو. جڏهن جنگ بندي جو اثر ٿيو، پونڇ ضلعي کي ٻن الڳ ضلعن ۾ ورهايو ويو. اڳوڻو هيڊ ڪوارٽر، پونڇ جو شهر، هندستاني انتظاميا هيٺ آيو، ۽ اولهندي ضلعي ۾ هڪ نئون هيڊ ڪوارٽر آخرڪار راولاڪوٽ ۾ قائم ڪيو ويو. پونڇ ضلعي جي پاڪستان جي انتظام هيٺ حصي کي پونڇ ڊويزن جي طور تي ٻيهر منظم ڪيو ويو. اصل پونڇ ضلعي جي چئن تعلقن يعني باغ، سڌنوتي، حويلي ۽ مينڌر، پونڇ ڊويزن ۾ پهريون ٻه ۽ ٽيون حصو شامل هئا. انهن ٽنهي تعلقن کي آخرڪار الڳ الڳ ضلعو بڻايو ويو، ۽ پونڇ ڊويزن جي مرڪز ۾ باغ ۽ سڌنوتي تعلقن جا حصا شامل ڪري هڪ نئون پونڇ ضلعو ٺاهيو ويو. پونڇ ضلعو سال 1955ع جي پونڇ بغاوت دوران حڪومت مخالف پرتشدد بغاوت (سڌن قبيلي جي اڳواڻي ۾) جو مکيه علائقو هو، جيڪو 1955ع جي شروعات کان 1956ع جي آخر تائين هليو.

==انتظامي ڊويزنون== 
ضلعو انتظامي طور تي چئن تعلقن ۾ ورهايل آهي:

• عباسپور

• اجیره

• راولاڪوٽ

• ٿروڙ

==تعليم==

==ٽرانسپورٽ== 
==پڻ ڏسو==

'''Poonch District''' ({{lang-ur|{{Nastaliq|ضلع پونچھ }}}}) is a district of [[Pakistan]]-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] in the [[Kashmir#Dispute|disputed]] [[Kashmir]] region.&lt;ref name=&quot;tertiary-kashmir&quot;&gt;The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of [[Kashmir]] and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[وڪيپيڊيا:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[وڪيپيڊيا:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicised usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below). &lt;br /&gt;
(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent|accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;&lt;br /&gt; (b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin|accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;; &lt;br /&gt; (c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;; &lt;br /&gt; (d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot; &lt;br /&gt;(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;  &lt;br /&gt; (f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}&lt;br /&gt;  (g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|year=2022|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}} &lt;br /&gt; (h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot; &lt;br /&gt; (i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;; &lt;br /&gt;(j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicised terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;  
&lt;/ref&gt;  It is one of the 10 districts of this Pakistan-administered territory. It is bounded on the north by [[Bagh District]], on the north-east by [[Haveli District]], on the south-east by the [[Poonch district, India|Poonch District]] of Indian-administered Kashmir, on the south by Azad Kashmir's [[Sudhanoti District|Sudhanoti]] and [[Kotli District|Kotli]] districts, and on the west by [[Rawalpindi District]] of Pakistan's [[Punjab, Pakistan|Punjab Province]]. The Poonch District is part of the greater Kashmir dispute between India and Pakistan. The district headquarters is the city of [[Rawalakot]]. It is the third most populous district of Azad Kashmir.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=AJK at glance -2020|url=https://pndajk.gov.pk/uploadfiles/downloads/AJK%20At%20A%20Glance-2020.pdf|website=Planning and Development Department of AJK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=University of Poonch VC Prof. Dr. Zakaria directed to complete construction of campuses on war footing |url=https://www.azaditimes.com/2022/07/university-of-poonch-vc-prof-dr-zakaria.html |access-date=8 August 2022 |website=Azadi Times |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

The main language is [[Pahari-Pothwari|Pahari]] (&quot;Punchi&quot;), native to an estimated 95% of the population, but there are also speakers of [[Gujari language|Gujari]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book| title = Statistical Year Book 2020| place = Muzaffarabad| publisher = AJ&amp;K Bureau Of Statistics| url = https://www.pndajk.gov.pk/uploadfiles/downloads/Statistical%20Year%20Book%202020.pdf| access-date = 3 March 2022| page = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt; while [[اردو]] has official status.
[[File:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Poonch.svg|thumb|right|300px|Map of Azad Kashmir with the Poonch District highlighted in red]]

{|table id=&quot;toc&quot; style=&quot;margin:0;background:#ccccff&quot;;width:130%&quot; align=&quot;left&quot; cellpadding=&quot;1&quot;
| style=&quot;background:#ACE1AF&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;130px&quot; colspan=2 |'''&lt;font size=&quot;+1&quot; color=black&gt;پونڇ ضلعو&lt;font&gt;'''
|-
| style=&quot;background:#d0f0c0&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;130px&quot; colspan=2 |'''&lt;font size=&quot;1&quot; 
 color=gray&gt;Ponch District&lt;font&gt;'''
|- align=&quot;center&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;border-bottom: 2px solid #D3D3D3;&quot; | [[Image:Flag of Azad Kashmir.svg|280px]]
|-style=&quot;margin:0;background:#ccccff&quot;;width:100%&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot;
|
|- align=&quot;center&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;border-bottom: 2px solid #D3D3D3;&quot; | [[Image:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Poonch.svg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-
| ملڪ: || [[پاڪستان]][[فائل:Flag of Pakistan.svg|30px]]
|-
| صوبو: || [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
|-
| ضلعي گاديءَ جو ھنڌ: || [[راولاڪوٽ]]
|-
| ايراضي: || 855 چورس ڪلوميٽر
|-
| آبادي: || 459,000
|-
|[[ٻولي|ٻوليون]]: || اردو، پونچي (پهاڙي-پوٽوهاري) گجري، پنجابي
|-
|تعلقا: ||2
|-
|}
پونڇ ضلعي جا چار تعلقا آھن؛

1. [http://ur.wikipedia.org/wiki/%D8%B1%D8%A7%D9%88%D9%84%D8%A7_%DA%A9%D9%88%D9%B9 راولاڪوٽ]

2. [http://ur.wikipedia.org/wiki/%DB%81%D8%AC%DB%8C%D8%B1%DB%81 ھجيره]
 
3. عباسپور

4. تراڙکل

{|
| [[عڪس:Banjosa.JPG|thumb|150x150 عڪسلون|راولاڪرٽ]]
| [[عڪس:AbbaspurAjk1.jpg|thumb|150x150 عڪسلون|عباس پور]]
| [[عڪس:MaindlaSunrise.jpg|thumb|150x150 عڪسلون|پونڇ]]
| [[عڪس:Destroyedbridgeriverpoonch.JPG|thumb|150x150 عڪسلون|لائين آف ڪنٽرول]]
|}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:پونڇ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>nup8h6dsvrbepta57uqwdth8g237onj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>باغ ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30415</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393993</id>
      <parentid>269311</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:14:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>393993</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2643" sha1="nrfsxc064t7vzxqq91pzp720a1wjwhm" xml:space="preserve">{|table id=&quot;toc&quot; style=&quot;margin:0;background:#ccccff&quot;;width:130%&quot; align=&quot;left&quot; cellpadding=&quot;1&quot;
| style=&quot;background:#ACE1AF&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;130px&quot; colspan=2 |'''&lt;font size=&quot;+1&quot; color=black&gt;باغ ضلعو&lt;font&gt;'''
|-
| style=&quot;background:#d0f0c0&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; width=&quot;130px&quot; colspan=2 |'''&lt;font size=&quot;1&quot; 
 color=gray&gt;Bagh District&lt;font&gt;'''
|- align=&quot;center&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;border-bottom: 2px solid #D3D3D3;&quot; | [[Image:Flag of Azad Kashmir.svg|280px]]
|-style=&quot;margin:0;background:#ccccff&quot;;width:100%&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; cellpadding=&quot;2&quot;
|- align=&quot;center&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;border-bottom: 2px solid #D3D3D3;&quot; | [[Image:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Bagh.svg|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-
| ملڪ: || [[پاڪستان]][[فائل:Flag of Pakistan.svg|30px]]
|-
| صوبو: || [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
|-
|ضلعي گاديءَ جو ھنڌ: || [[باغ]]
|-
| ايراضي: || 1368 چورس ڪلوميٽر
|-
| آبادي: || 434,000
|-
| [[ٻولي]]: || [[پنجابي]]
|-
| تعلقا: || 3
|-
|}

'''باغ''' [[پاڪستان]] جي زير انتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد ڄمون ۽ ڪشمير]] جي ڏھن ضلعن مان ھڪ آھي۔ ان کي 1988ع ۾ [[پونچ ضلعو|ضلعي پونڇ]] کان الڳ ڪري جداگانہ ضلعي جي حيثيت ڏني وئي &lt;ref&gt;[http://www.ajk.gov.pk/tourism/bagh.html حڪومت آزاد ڪشمير]&lt;/ref&gt;۔ ضلعي باغ جي اتر ۾ ضلعو مظفرآباد، ڏکڻ ۾ [[پونچ ضلعو|ضلعو پونڇ]]، اولھ ۾ پاڪستان جي صوبي پنجاب ۽ اوڀر ۾ ڀارت جي زير انتظام ڪشمير سان ڳنڍيال آھي۔ ھن ضلعي جي ڪل ايراضي 1368 چورس ڪلوميٽر آھي&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.ajk.gov.pk/site/index.php?option=com_content&amp;task=view&amp;id=2354&amp;Itemid=138 ضلعو باغ، انگ اکر]&lt;/ref&gt; ۔ ضلعو باغ ٻن شاھراھن جي ذريعي رياست جي گاديء جي ھنڌ مظفرآباد سان ڳنڍيل آھي۔ ھڪ رستو سڌن گلي ۽ ٻيو ڪوھالہ جي  طرف کان اچي ٿو۔ ضلعي صدر مقام [[باغ]] شھر آھي جيڪو مظفرآباد کان 100 ڪلوميٽر ۽ راولاڪوٽ کان 46 ڪلوميٽرن جي فاصلي تي واقع آھي۔

2005ع ۾ ڪشمير ۾ اچڻ واري زلزلي ۾ ھي سڀ کان وڌيڪ متاثر ٿيڻ وارو علائقو ھو۔

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:باغ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جاگرافي اسٽب]]</text>
      <sha1>nrfsxc064t7vzxqq91pzp720a1wjwhm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>حويلي ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30416</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393995</id>
      <parentid>279880</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:17:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>393995</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13212" sha1="8360h4lua3dxyfq27sva8z2t1x1vh0k" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement
| name = حويلي ضلعو
| official_name = 
| native_name = {{nq|ضلع حویلی}}
| native_name_lang = 
| settlement_type = پاڪستان جی زیر انتظام ڪشمير جو ضلعو&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| image_skyline = Lasdunna Haveli Kahutta Azad Kashmir - panoramio.jpg
| imagesize = 
| image_alt = 
| image_caption = حويلي ڪهوٽا
| image_map1 = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_caption1 = A map showing Pakistani-administered [[Pakistan Occupied Kashmir]] (shaded in [[sage (color)|sage]] green) in the disputed [[Kashmir]] region&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| coordinates = {{coord|33|56|N|74|06|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:50000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Haveli District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption = حويلي ضلعي جو نقشو
| coor_pinpoint = Forward Kahuta
| subdivision_type = ملک جن جی زیر انتظام آھي
| subdivision_name = [[پاڪستان]]
| subdivision_type1 = علایقو
| subdivision_name1 = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2 = ڊویزن
| subdivision_name2 = پونچھ
| established_title = قیام
| established_date = 
| founder = 
| seat_type = ھیڊ ڪوارٽر
| seat = فارورڊ ڪهوٽا
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type = ضلعي انتظاميا
| leader_party = 
| leader_title = ڊپٽي ڪمشنر
| leader_name = N/A
| leader_title1 = ڊسٽرڪٽ پولیس آفیسر
| leader_name1 = N/A
| leader_title2 = ضلعي صحت آفيسر
| leader_name2 = N/A
| unit_pref = Metric&lt;!-- or US or UK --&gt;
| area_footnotes = 
| area_total_km2 = 598
| population_total = 1,52,124
| population_as_of = 2017ع
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=city&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.citypopulation.de/AzadKashmir.html |archive-date=29 June 2020|url-status=dead|title=Haveli District population per 2017 census|website=Citypopulation.de website|access-date=19 December 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200629022906/http://www.citypopulation.de/AzadKashmir.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_density_km2 = 268
| demographics_type1 = Languages
| demographics1_title1 = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1 = [[اردو]]
| demographics1_title2 = Spoken
| demographics1_info2 = Gojari 60% pahari 35% Kashmiri 5%
| blank_name_sec1 = [[آزاد ڪشمير جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقن]] جو تعداد
| blank_info_sec1 = 3
| blank1_name_sec1 = 
| blank1_info_sec1 = 
}}
'''حويلي''' (Haveli) [[پاڪستان]] جي زير انتظام [[آزاد ڪشمير]] جو هڪ ضلعو آهي جيڪو تڪراري ڪشمير واري علائقي ۾ آهي. اهو پاڪستان جي انتظام هيٺ آزاد ڪشمير جي 10 ضلعن مان هڪ آهي. اها اڳي باغ ضلعي جي هڪ تحصيل هئي پر پهرين جولاءِ 2009ع تي ان کي ضلعي جو درجو ڏنو ويو. سال 2017ع جي مردم شماري مطابق، ضلعي جي آبادي 1,52,124 آهي. مکيه مادري ٻوليون گوجري ٻولي آهن (انداز طور تي 60 سيڪڙو آبادي ڳالهائيندا آهن)، پهاڙي (13 سيڪڙو) ۽ ڪشميري (5 سيڪڙو) آهن.
 
حويلي ضلعي ۾ ڪيترائي سياحتي جايون آھن جھڙوڪ:
 
1. نيلفري

2. هلان آبشار

3. ماٿيڪا

4. سنک ميڊوز

5. بدوري

6. محمود گلي

7. درہ حاجي پير

8. لسانا

9. شروع ڏارا

10. منگي شهيد

11. ڪلامولا

12. پاجا گلي

13. پهلو آبشار

14. خاريا آبشار

15. راڻي باغ

16. جبي سيدان ۽ ٻيا ڪيترائي

The '''Haveli District''' ({{lang-ur|{{Nastaliq|ضلع حویلی}}}}) is a district of Pakistan-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] in the [[Kashmir#Dispute|disputed]] [[Kashmir]] region.&lt;ref name=&quot;tertiary-kashmir&quot;&gt;The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of [[Kashmir]] and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[وڪيپيڊيا:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[وڪيپيڊيا:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicized usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below).

(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent|accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;

(b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin|accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;;

(c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;;

(d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot;

(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;

(f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}

(g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}}

(h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot;

(i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;;

(j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicised terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;&lt;/ref&gt;  It is one of the 10 districts of the [[Pakistan]]-administered territory of [[آزاد ڪشمير]]. It was previously a tehsil of the [[Bagh District]] but was elevated to the district status on 1 July 2009.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://ajk.gov.pk/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=178&amp;Itemid=50|title=District Haveli (Kahutta)|publisher=Government of Azad Jammu &amp; Kashmir|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140408214622/http://ajk.gov.pk/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=178&amp;Itemid=50|archive-date=8 April 2014|access-date=19 December 2023|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

According to the [[2017 Census of Pakistan|2017 census]], the district has a population of 152,124.&lt;ref name=&quot;city&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://nation.com.pk/national/27-Aug-2017/census-2017-ajk-population-rises-to-over-4m|title=Census 2017: AJK population rises to over 4m|newspaper=The Nation newspaper|access-date=2023-12-19|language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The main native languages are [[Gojari language (estimated to be spoken by around 60% of the inhabitants), [[Pahari language|pahari]] ({{c.}} 35%), and [[ڪشمري ٻولي|ڪشميري]] ({{c.}} 5%).&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|url=https://www.pndajk.gov.pk/uploadfiles/downloads/Statistical%20Year%20Book%202020.pdf|title=Statistical Year Book 2020|publisher=AJ&amp;K Bureau Of Statistics|place=Muzaffarabad|page=140|access-date=3 March 2022}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Shakil 2012&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.academia.edu/6485567|title=Languages of Erstwhile State of Jammu Kashmir (A Preliminary Study)|last=Shakil|first=Mohsin|date=2012|page=12}}&lt;/ref&gt; Haveli District has many tourism places such as:

1. Neelfairy (or Neilferi) 2. Hillan Waterfall 3. Mathatika 4. Sankh Meadows 5. Badori 6. Mahmood Gali 7. Darra Haji Peer 8. Lasdana 9. Sharu Dhara 10. Mangi Shaheed 11. Kalamula 12. Pajja Gali 13. pahala waterfall (Kalamula) 14.khariyan waterfall( UC Keerni Mandhar) 15.Rani Bagh 16. jabbi syedyan and many more un explore tourist spots
[[فائل:Pakistan_-_Azad_Kashmir_-_Haveli.svg|ساڄو|thumb|380x380 عڪسلون|Map of Azad Kashmir with the Haveli District highlighted in red]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:حويلي ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جاگرافي اسٽب]]</text>
      <sha1>8360h4lua3dxyfq27sva8z2t1x1vh0k</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>سڌنوتي ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>30417</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393997</id>
      <parentid>279882</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:19:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>393997</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12985" sha1="lvv3sqkxz8umhdtyj97t89fapxsftvw" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|District in Azad Jammu and Kashmir}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Sudhanoti District
| official_name      = 
| native_name        = {{nq|ضلع سدھنوتی}}
| native_name_lang   = ur
| settlement_type    = [[List of districts in Azad Kashmir|District of Azad Kashmir]] administered by Pakistan&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| image_skyline      = A view of Pallandri city and Cadet Collage Pallandri..jpg
| imagesize          = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = A view of Cadet College Pallandri in the Sudhanoti District
| image_map1         = Kashmir region. LOC 2003626427 - showing sub-regions administered by different countries.jpg
| map_caption1       = A map showing Pakistani-administered [[آزاد ڪشمير]] (shaded in [[sage (color)|sage]] green) in the disputed [[Kashmir]] region&lt;ref name=tertiary-kashmir/&gt;
| coordinates      = {{coord|33|40|N|73|43|E|type:adm2nd_region:PK_dim:50000|display=inline,title}}
| image_map          = {{maplink|frame=yes|plain=yes|frame-width=300|frame-height=170|frame-align=center|zoom=4|type=point|title=Sudhanoti District|marker=district|type2=shape|stroke-width2=2|stroke-color2=#808080}}
| map_caption        = Interactive map of Sudhanoti district
| coor_pinpoint      = Pallandri Tehsil
| subdivision_type   = Administering country
| subdivision_name   = [[Pakistan]]
| subdivision_type1  = [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|علائقو]]
| subdivision_name1  = [[آزاد ڪشمير]]
| subdivision_type2  = [[پاڪستان جون ڊويزنون|ڊويزن]]
| subdivision_name2  = [[Poonch Division]]
| established_title  = قيام
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = صدرمقام
| seat               = [[Pallandri]]
| government_type    = ضلعي انتظاميا
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = [[ڊپٽي ڪميشنر (پاڪستان)|ڊپٽي ڪميشنر]]
| leader_name        = N/A
| leader_title1      = ضلعي پوليس آفيسر (ڊي ايس پي)
| leader_name1       = N/A
| leader_title2      = ضلعي صحت آفيسر
| leader_name2       = N/A
| area_total_km2     = 569
| population_total   = 297,584
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes   =&lt;ref name=city&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.citypopulation.de/AzadKashmir.html |url-status=dead|title=Population of Districts of Azad Jammu and Kashmir - Sudhanoti District population|website=Citypopulation.de website|archive-date=29 June 2020|access-date=19 December 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200629022906/http://www.citypopulation.de/AzadKashmir.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_density_km2 = 523
| demographics_type1 = Languages
| demographics1_title1 = سرڪاري
| demographics1_info1 = [[اردو]]&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| last = Rahman| first = Tariq| author-link = Tariq Rahman| title = Language and politics in Pakistan| date = 1996| publisher = Oxford University Press| isbn = 978-0-19-577692-8| page = 226}}&lt;!-- ref is only for Urdu's status in Azad Kashmir as a whole--&gt;&lt;/ref&gt;
| demographics1_title2 = Spoken
| demographics1_info2 = [[Gujari]]; [[Pahari-Pothwari]]
| timezone1          = [[پاڪستان جو معياري وقت|پ.م.و]]
| utc_offset1        = +5
| blank_name_sec1    = District Council
| blank_info_sec1    = 
| blank1_name_sec1   = [[آزاد ڪشمير جي تعلقن جي فهرست|تعلقن]] جو تعداد
| blank1_info_sec1   = 4
| website            = [https://sudhanoti.com/ sudhanoti.com]
}}
'''سڌنوتي ضلعو''' (اردو: ضلع سدھنوتي) مطلب ته &quot;سڌن جي دل واري سرزمين&quot; يا &quot;سڌن جي دل واري زمين&quot;،&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Watch (Organization) |first=Human Rights |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=QfyEAAAAMAAJ&amp;q=heartland+of+sudhans |title=Pakistan, with Friends Like These |date=2006 |publisher=Human Rights Watch |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=99WTTyxnkDYC&amp;dq=heartland+of+sudhans&amp;pg=PA13 |title=Human Rights Watch: &quot;With Friends Like These...&quot; |publisher=Human Rights Watch |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Talbot |first=Ian |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=sXsmCwAAQBAJ&amp;dq=heartland+sudhan&amp;pg=PA23 |title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas |date=28 January 2016 |publisher=Yale University Press |isbn=978-0-300-21659-2 |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; تڪراري ڪشمير واري علائقي ۾ [[پاڪستان]] جي انتظام هيٺ [[آزاد ڪشمير|آزاد جمو ء ڪشمير]] جي 10 ضلعن مان هڪ آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;tertiary-kashmir2&quot;&gt;The application of the term &quot;administered&quot; to the various regions of [[Kashmir]] and a mention of the Kashmir dispute is supported by the [[وڪيپيڊيا:TERTIARY|tertiary sources]] (a) through (e), reflecting [[وڪيپيڊيا:DUE|due weight]] in the coverage. Although &quot;controlled&quot; and &quot;held&quot; are also applied neutrally to the names of the disputants or to the regions administered by them, as evidenced in sources (h) through (i) below, &quot;held&quot; is also considered politicized usage, as is the term &quot;occupied,&quot; (see (j) below).

(a) {{citation|title=Kashmir, region Indian subcontinent|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Kashmir-region-Indian-subcontinent|accessdate=15 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Kashmir, region of the northwestern Indian subcontinent ... has been the subject of dispute between India and Pakistan since the partition of the Indian subcontinent in 1947. The northern and western portions are administered by Pakistan and comprise three areas: Azad Kashmir, Gilgit, and Baltistan, the last two being part of a territory called the Northern Areas. Administered by India are the southern and southeastern portions, which constitute the state of Jammu and Kashmir but are slated to be split into two union territories.&quot;;

(b) {{citation|last1=Pletcher|first1=Kenneth|title=Aksai Chin, Plateau Region, Asia|publisher=Encyclopaedia Britannica|url=https://www.britannica.com/place/Aksai-Chin|accessdate=16 August 2019}} (subscription required) Quote: &quot;Aksai Chin, Chinese (Pinyin) Aksayqin, portion of the Kashmir region, at the northernmost extent of the Indian subcontinent in south-central Asia. It constitutes nearly all the territory of the Chinese-administered sector of Kashmir that is claimed by India to be part of the Ladakh area of Jammu and Kashmir state.&quot;;

(c) {{citation|chapter=Kashmir|title=Encyclopedia Americana|publisher=Scholastic Library Publishing|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=l_cWAQAAMAAJ&amp;pg=PA328|year=2006|isbn=978-0-7172-0139-6|page=328}} C. E Bosworth, University of Manchester Quote: &quot;KASHMIR, kash'mer, the northernmost region of the Indian subcontinent, administered partlv by India, partly by Pakistan, and partly by China. The region has been the subject of a bitter dispute between India and Pakistan since they became independent in 1947&quot;;

(d) {{citation|last1=Osmańczyk|first1=Edmund Jan|title=Encyclopedia of the United Nations and International Agreements: G to M|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=fSIMXHMdfkkC&amp;pg=PA1191|year=2003|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|isbn=978-0-415-93922-5|pages=1191–}} Quote: &quot;Jammu and Kashmir: Territory in northwestern India, subject to a dispute between India and Pakistan. It has borders with Pakistan and China.&quot;

(e) {{citation|last=Talbot|first=Ian|title=A History of Modern South Asia: Politics, States, Diasporas|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=eNg_CwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA28|year=2016|publisher=Yale University Press|isbn=978-0-300-19694-8|pages=28–29}} Quote: &quot;We move from a disputed international border to a dotted line on the map that represents a military border not recognized in international law. The line of control separates the Indian and Pakistani administered areas of the former Princely State of Jammu and Kashmir.&quot;;

(f) {{citation|last=Skutsch|first=Carl|editor-last=Ciment|editor-first=James|title=Encyclopedia of Conflicts Since World War II|edition=2nd|year=2015|orig-year=2007|isbn=978-0-7656-8005-1|chapter=China: Border War with India, 1962|location=London and New York|publisher=Routledge|page=573|quote=The situation between the two nations was complicated by the 1957–1959 uprising by Tibetans against Chinese rule.  Refugees poured across the Indian border, and the Indian public was outraged.  Any compromise with China on the border issue became impossible.  Similarly, China was offended that India had given political asylum to the Dalai Lama when he fled across the border in March 1959.  In late 1959, there were shots fired between border patrols operating along both the ill-defined McMahon Line and in the Aksai Chin.}}

(g) {{citation|last=Clary|first=Christopher|title=The Difficult Politics of Peace: Rivalry in Modern South Asia|date=25 February 2024|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford and New York|isbn=9780197638408|page=109|quote=Territorial Dispute: The situation along the Sino-Indian frontier continued to worsen.  In late July (1959), an Indian reconnaissance patrol was blocked, &quot;apprehended,&quot; and eventually expelled after three weeks in custody at the hands of a larger Chinese force near Khurnak Fort in Aksai Chin.  ... Circumstances worsened further in October 1959, when a major class at Kongka Pass in eastern Ladakh led to nine dead and ten captured Indian border personnel, making it by far the most serious Sino-Indian class since India's independence.}}

(h) {{citation|last=Bose|first=Sumantra|title=Kashmir: Roots of Conflict, Paths to Peace|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=3ACMe9WBdNAC&amp;pg=PA294|year=2009|publisher=Harvard University Press|isbn=978-0-674-02855-5|pages=294, 291, 293}} Quote: &quot;J&amp;K: Jammu and Kashmir. The former princely state that is the subject of the Kashmir dispute. Besides IJK (Indian-controlled Jammu and Kashmir. The larger and more populous part of the former princely state. It has a population of slightly over 10 million, and comprises three regions: Kashmir Valley, Jammu, and Ladakh.) and AJK ('Azad&quot; (Free) Jammu and Kashmir. The more populous part of Pakistani-controlled J&amp;K, with a population of approximately 2.5 million.), it includes the sparsely populated &quot;Northern Areas&quot; of Gilgit and Baltistan, remote mountainous regions which are directly administered, unlike AJK, by the Pakistani central authorities, and some high-altitude uninhabitable tracts under Chinese control.&quot;

(i) {{citation|last=Fisher|first=Michael H.|title=An Environmental History of India: From Earliest Times to the Twenty-First Century|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=kZVuDwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA166|year=2018|publisher=Cambridge University Press|isbn=978-1-107-11162-2|page=166}} Quote: &quot;Kashmir’s identity remains hotly disputed with a UN-supervised “Line of Control” still separating Pakistani-held Azad (“Free”) Kashmir from Indian-held Kashmir.&quot;;

(j) {{citation|last=Snedden|first=Christopher|title=Understanding Kashmir and Kashmiris|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=5amKCwAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA10|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-1-84904-621-3|page=10}} Quote:&quot;Some politicised terms also are used to describe parts of J&amp;K. These terms include the words 'occupied' and 'held'.&quot;&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.ajk.gov.pk/site/index.php?option=com_content&amp;task=view&amp;id=2256&amp;Itemid=144|title=AJ&amp;K Portal|website=www.ajk.gov.pk}}&lt;/ref&gt; سڌنوتي ضلعو اتر ۽ اوڀر ۾ پونڇ ضلعي،&lt;ref name=&quot;pndajk.gov.pk2&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pndajk.gov.pk/ajk_glance2007.asp#DDSDAJK|title=Subdivisions of AJK|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170405225014/http://pndajk.gov.pk/ajk_glance2007.asp#DDSDAJK|archive-date=5 April 2017|access-date=24 May 2009|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڏکڻ ۾ ڪوٽلي ضلعي سان ۽ اولهه ۾ پاڪستان جي صوبي پنجاب جي راولپنڊي ضلعي سان لڳل آهي. اهو پاڪستان جي راڄڌاني اسلام آباد کان 90 ڪلوميٽر (56 ميل) جی مفاصلي تي واقع آهي. اهو راولپنڊي ۽ اسلام آباد سان آزاد پتن روڊ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهي. ضلعي جو صدر مقام پلندري شهر آهي. اهو 1,372 ميٽر جي اوچائي تي آهي ۽ راولپنڊي کان آزاد پتن روڊ ذريعي 97 ڪلوميٽرن جي مفاصلي تي آهي. پلندري راولاڪوٽ سان 64 ڪلوميٽر جي پڪی روڊ سان ڳنڍيل آهي.
[[File:Pakistan - Azad Kashmir - Sudhnati.svg|thumb|300px|right|Map of Azad Kashmir with the Sudhanoti District highlighted in red]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:سڌنوتي ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:پاڪستان جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>lvv3sqkxz8umhdtyj97t89fapxsftvw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>آفريقي اتحاد</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>38025</id>
    <redirect title="آفريڪي يونين" />
    <revision>
      <id>394095</id>
      <parentid>96285</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T23:19:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>EmausBot</username>
        <id>1754</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Fixing double redirect from [[آفريڪي اتحاد]] to [[آفريڪي يونين]]</comment>
      <origin>394095</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39" sha1="rrjagkkesnziz7y94q5msff0v8610b4" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[آفريڪي يونين]]</text>
      <sha1>rrjagkkesnziz7y94q5msff0v8610b4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>بحث:آفريقي اتحاد</title>
    <ns>1</ns>
    <id>38026</id>
    <redirect title="بحث:آفريڪي يونين" />
    <revision>
      <id>394101</id>
      <parentid>96287</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T23:20:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>EmausBot</username>
        <id>1754</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Fixing double redirect from [[بحث:آفريڪي اتحاد]] to [[بحث:آفريڪي يونين]]</comment>
      <origin>394101</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="46" sha1="2yrlr0lxmbtsqohuys9o5y06p72dyj9" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[بحث:آفريڪي يونين]]</text>
      <sha1>2yrlr0lxmbtsqohuys9o5y06p72dyj9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>فاشيان</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>38374</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394085</id>
      <parentid>254663</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:38:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394085</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4326" sha1="4xb8x2s5z2x0cywnt6p8omk9m42sj7c" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfnp|Deeg|2019}}{{sfnp|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfnp|Deeg|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>4xb8x2s5z2x0cywnt6p8omk9m42sj7c</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394086</id>
      <parentid>394085</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:41:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394086</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4323" sha1="svvfwbfw5lc0orx2fxsrfzuqjkmza5i" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}{{sfnp|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>svvfwbfw5lc0orx2fxsrfzuqjkmza5i</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394087</id>
      <parentid>394086</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:42:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Intisar Ali صفحي [[فاھيان]] کي [[فاشيان]] ڏانھن چوريو: غلط ھجي سان عنوان</comment>
      <origin>394086</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4323" sha1="svvfwbfw5lc0orx2fxsrfzuqjkmza5i" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}{{sfnp|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>svvfwbfw5lc0orx2fxsrfzuqjkmza5i</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394089</id>
      <parentid>394087</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:43:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394089</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4336" sha1="c49kfsnkc4110dcyw7s4f8cmgjbvtsg" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}{{sfnp|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>c49kfsnkc4110dcyw7s4f8cmgjbvtsg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394090</id>
      <parentid>394089</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:44:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394090</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4334" sha1="bh11ndqv32ik2xkyxsjdvdnuixp1bdw" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>bh11ndqv32ik2xkyxsjdvdnuixp1bdw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394091</id>
      <parentid>394090</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:47:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394091</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10350" sha1="d55cipxbc2ieg8i7351st2rei24g10s" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==
{{More citations needed section|date=August 2022}}

[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>d55cipxbc2ieg8i7351st2rei24g10s</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394092</id>
      <parentid>394091</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:47:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394092</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10300" sha1="3n5t5basbdmx79crdiy72f23i2dth78" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>3n5t5basbdmx79crdiy72f23i2dth78</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394093</id>
      <parentid>394092</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:52:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394093</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17348" sha1="1jjftwrd59jydq3hseakv7fwiulxyf3" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

هيٺ ڏنل اقتباس [[جيمس ليگ]] پاران اوڻيهين صديءَ ۾ فاشيان جي ڪتاب جي انگريزي ترجمي جي مهاڳ مان ورتل آهي. جيتوڻيڪ ليگ جون ڪجهه راءِون، جهڙوڪ فاشيان جو 25 ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان وڃڻ، بعد جي تحقيق سان رد ٿي چڪيون آهن، پر سندس مهاڳ ۾ فاشيان بابت ڪجهه ڪارائتيون سوانحي ڄاڻون موجود آهن.

[[File:Fa Hsien at the ruins of Asoka's palace.jpg|thumb|right|250px|اشوڪ جي محل جي کنڊرن وٽ فاشيان]]

[[File:BEAL(1869) FAH-HIAN'S ROUTE THROUGH INDIA AND TARTARY.jpg|thumb|right|250px|بيل جي ايڊيشن موجب هندستان ۽ تاتارستان ۾ فاشيان جو سفري رستو{{sfn|Beal|1884}}]]

{{blockquote|
فاشيان بابت سندس پنهنجي سفرنامي کان سواءِ ڪا گهڻي اهم معلومات موجود ناهي. مون سندس باري ۾ 519ع ۾ ترتيب ڏنل ''[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون]]'' ۽ ان کان پوءِ [[منگ خاندان]] جي ٽئين شهنشاهه (1403–1424ع) جي دور ۾ لکيل ''عجيب ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون'' پڙهيون آهن، پر انهن مان لڳ ڀڳ سموري معلومات اڳئين ڪتاب تان ورتل آهي، ۽ جيڪا ٿوري گهڻي معتبر معلوم ٿئي ٿي، سا مختصر لفظن ۾ بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿي.

انهن ڪتابن موجب سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو، ۽ هو پِنگ-يانگ جي وو-يانگ جو رهواسي هو، جيڪو اڄ به [[شانشي]] صوبي جو هڪ وڏو علائقو آهي. هن کان ٽي وڏا ڀائر هئا، پر اهي سڀ پنهنجا پهريان ڏند نڪرڻ کان اڳ ئي فوت ٿي ويا. ان کان پوءِ سندس پيءُ کيس ٻڌ ڌرم جي خدمت لاءِ وقف ڪيو ۽ [[شرامڻير]] بڻائي ڇڏيو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه وقت تائين کيس گهر ۾ ئي رکيو ويو. ننڍپڻ ۾ هو سخت بيمار ٿي پيو، تنهن ڪري سندس پيءُ کيس هڪ [[وهار]] ۾ موڪليو، جتي هو جلد صحتياب ٿي ويو ۽ پوءِ والدين وٽ واپس وڃڻ کان انڪار ڪري ڇڏيائين.

جڏهن هو ڏهن سالن جو ٿيو، تڏهن سندس پيءُ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس چاچي، جيڪو سندس ماءُ جي اڪيلي زندگيءَ تي افسوس ڪندو هو، کيس صلاح ڏني ته وهار واري زندگي ڇڏي پنهنجي ماءُ وٽ موٽي اچي. پر هن جواب ڏنو: ”مون پنهنجي پيءُ جي خواهش تي گهر نه ڇڏيو، پر ان ڪري جو دنيا جي غبار ۽ عام رواجن کان پري رهڻ ٿي چاهيم. انهيءَ سبب مون ڀڪشو ٿيڻ پسند ڪيو.“ چاچي سندس جواب کي ساراهيو ۽ وڌيڪ زور ڀرڻ ڇڏي ڏنو. جڏهن سندس ماءُ به وفات ڪئي، تڏهن سندس سٺي طبيعت ۽ ماءُ سان محبت ظاهر ٿي؛ پر تدفين کان پوءِ هو ٻيهر وهار موٽي آيو.

هڪ ڀيري هو ٻين ڪيترن ئي نوآموز ڀڪشن سان گڏ ڌان جي فصل جي لاباري ۾ مصروف هو، ته بکيا چور اناج ڦرڻ لاءِ اچي پهتا. ٻيا سڀ شرامڻير ڀڄي ويا، پر فاشيان پنهنجي جاءِ تي بيٺو رهيو ۽ چورن کي چيائين: ”جيڪڏهن اوهان کي اناج گهرجي ته جيترو وڻيوَ اوترو کڻي وڃو، پر ياد رکو، توهان جي اڳوڻي سخاوت جي کوٽ ئي اوهان کي هن محتاجيءَ تائين پهچايو آهي، ۽ هاڻي وري اوهان ٻين کي ڦرڻ چاهيو ٿا. مون کي ڊپ آهي ته ايندڙ جنمن ۾ اوهان جي غربت ۽ ڏک اڃا به وڌندا. مون کي اڳواٽ ئي اوهان تي افسوس آهي.“ ائين چئي هو پنهنجي ساٿين سان گڏ وهار موٽي ويو، جڏهن ته چور اناج ڇڏي هليا ويا. وهار جا ڪيترائي سؤ ڀڪشو سندس همت ۽ اخلاق کان ايترا متاثر ٿيا، جو سندس عزت ڪرڻ لڳا.

جڏهن هن پنهنجي ابتدائي مذهبي تربيت مڪمل ڪئي ۽ مڪمل ڀڪشو بڻيو، تڏهن سندس همت، ذهانت ۽ نظم و ضبط سڀني لاءِ نمايان ٿي ويا. ٿوري ئي عرصي کان پوءِ هن [[ونيه پٽڪ]] جا مڪمل متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ هندستان جو سفر شروع ڪيو. ان کان پوءِ سندس سفرنامو هندستان جي سفر ۽ سمنڊ رستي چين واپسيءَ جو بيان آهي، جيڪو سندس پنهنجي احوال مان ورتل آهي، جنهن ۾ [[ڳجھ واري چوٽي]] (ولچر پیڪ) وٽ [[راجگريهه]] جي زيارت دوران پيش آيل ڪجهه غيرمعمولي واقعن جو به ذڪر شامل ڪيو ويو آهي.

آخر ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي ته چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هو گاديءَ واري شهر (ظاهر آهي [[نانجنگ]]) ۾ رهيو، جتي هن ڀارتي ڀڪشو [[ٻڌڀدرا (مترجم)|ٻڌڀدرا]] سان گڏجي هندستان مان آندل ڪيترن ئي متنن جا ترجما ڪيا. ان کان اڳ جو هو پنهنجو سڄو ارادو پورو ڪري سگهي، هو [[جنگجو]] (هاڻوڪو [[هوبي]]) منتقل ٿي ويو، جتي ''سن'' نالي وهار ۾ اٺاسي ورهين جي عمر ۾ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس وفات تي سڀني واقف ماڻهن گهرو ڏک ظاهر ڪيو. اهو به ٻڌايو ويو آهي ته مختلف ملڪن جي سفرن بابت سندس هڪ ٻيو وڌيڪ مفصل ڪتاب پڻ موجود هو.

اسان جي هن ليکڪ بابت، سندس پنهنجي بيان کان سواءِ، ايتري ئي معلومات ملي ٿي. ''فاشيان'' سندس مذهبي نالو هو، جنهن جي معنيٰ آهي ”ڌرم ۾ درخشنده“ يا ”ڌرم جو نامور استاد“. سندس نالي کان اڳ ايندڙ ''شي''، [[گوتم ٻڌ|شاڪيامني ٻڌ]] جي نالي جو مخفف آهي، ۽ ان کي ٻڌ ڀڪشو هجڻ جي علامت سمجهيو ويندو آهي. ڪڏهن کيس اوڀرئين [[جن خاندان (265–420)|جن خاندان]] (317–419ع) سان لاڳاپيل ڄاڻايو ويو آهي، ته ڪڏهن [[ليو سونگ خاندان|ليو سونگ خاندان]] (420–478ع) سان. جيڪڏهن هن ويهن سالن جي عمر ۾ مڪمل ڀڪشو ٿيڻ کان پوءِ پنجويهن ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان جو سفر ڪيو هجي، ته سندس ڊگهي زندگي تقريباً انهن ٻنهي خاندانن جي دورن ۾ برابر ورهائجي ٿي.{{sfn|Legge|1886}}
}}

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>1jjftwrd59jydq3hseakv7fwiulxyf3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394094</id>
      <parentid>394093</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:59:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394094</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25698" sha1="7yt7sguquzrjqfz06hjhnw18n58go4t" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

هيٺ ڏنل اقتباس [[جيمس ليگ]] پاران اوڻيهين صديءَ ۾ فاشيان جي ڪتاب جي انگريزي ترجمي جي مهاڳ مان ورتل آهي. جيتوڻيڪ ليگ جون ڪجهه راءِون، جهڙوڪ فاشيان جو 25 ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان وڃڻ، بعد جي تحقيق سان رد ٿي چڪيون آهن، پر سندس مهاڳ ۾ فاشيان بابت ڪجهه ڪارائتيون سوانحي ڄاڻون موجود آهن.

[[File:Fa Hsien at the ruins of Asoka's palace.jpg|thumb|right|250px|اشوڪ جي محل جي کنڊرن وٽ فاشيان]]

[[File:BEAL(1869) FAH-HIAN'S ROUTE THROUGH INDIA AND TARTARY.jpg|thumb|right|250px|بيل جي ايڊيشن موجب هندستان ۽ تاتارستان ۾ فاشيان جو سفري رستو{{sfn|Beal|1884}}]]

{{blockquote|
فاشيان بابت سندس پنهنجي سفرنامي کان سواءِ ڪا گهڻي اهم معلومات موجود ناهي. مون سندس باري ۾ 519ع ۾ ترتيب ڏنل ''[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون]]'' ۽ ان کان پوءِ [[منگ خاندان]] جي ٽئين شهنشاهه (1403–1424ع) جي دور ۾ لکيل ''عجيب ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون'' پڙهيون آهن، پر انهن مان لڳ ڀڳ سموري معلومات اڳئين ڪتاب تان ورتل آهي، ۽ جيڪا ٿوري گهڻي معتبر معلوم ٿئي ٿي، سا مختصر لفظن ۾ بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿي.

انهن ڪتابن موجب سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو، ۽ هو پِنگ-يانگ جي وو-يانگ جو رهواسي هو، جيڪو اڄ به [[شانشي]] صوبي جو هڪ وڏو علائقو آهي. هن کان ٽي وڏا ڀائر هئا، پر اهي سڀ پنهنجا پهريان ڏند نڪرڻ کان اڳ ئي فوت ٿي ويا. ان کان پوءِ سندس پيءُ کيس ٻڌ ڌرم جي خدمت لاءِ وقف ڪيو ۽ [[شرامڻير]] بڻائي ڇڏيو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه وقت تائين کيس گهر ۾ ئي رکيو ويو. ننڍپڻ ۾ هو سخت بيمار ٿي پيو، تنهن ڪري سندس پيءُ کيس هڪ [[وهار]] ۾ موڪليو، جتي هو جلد صحتياب ٿي ويو ۽ پوءِ والدين وٽ واپس وڃڻ کان انڪار ڪري ڇڏيائين.

جڏهن هو ڏهن سالن جو ٿيو، تڏهن سندس پيءُ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس چاچي، جيڪو سندس ماءُ جي اڪيلي زندگيءَ تي افسوس ڪندو هو، کيس صلاح ڏني ته وهار واري زندگي ڇڏي پنهنجي ماءُ وٽ موٽي اچي. پر هن جواب ڏنو: ”مون پنهنجي پيءُ جي خواهش تي گهر نه ڇڏيو، پر ان ڪري جو دنيا جي غبار ۽ عام رواجن کان پري رهڻ ٿي چاهيم. انهيءَ سبب مون ڀڪشو ٿيڻ پسند ڪيو.“ چاچي سندس جواب کي ساراهيو ۽ وڌيڪ زور ڀرڻ ڇڏي ڏنو. جڏهن سندس ماءُ به وفات ڪئي، تڏهن سندس سٺي طبيعت ۽ ماءُ سان محبت ظاهر ٿي؛ پر تدفين کان پوءِ هو ٻيهر وهار موٽي آيو.

هڪ ڀيري هو ٻين ڪيترن ئي نوآموز ڀڪشن سان گڏ ڌان جي فصل جي لاباري ۾ مصروف هو، ته بکيا چور اناج ڦرڻ لاءِ اچي پهتا. ٻيا سڀ شرامڻير ڀڄي ويا، پر فاشيان پنهنجي جاءِ تي بيٺو رهيو ۽ چورن کي چيائين: ”جيڪڏهن اوهان کي اناج گهرجي ته جيترو وڻيوَ اوترو کڻي وڃو، پر ياد رکو، توهان جي اڳوڻي سخاوت جي کوٽ ئي اوهان کي هن محتاجيءَ تائين پهچايو آهي، ۽ هاڻي وري اوهان ٻين کي ڦرڻ چاهيو ٿا. مون کي ڊپ آهي ته ايندڙ جنمن ۾ اوهان جي غربت ۽ ڏک اڃا به وڌندا. مون کي اڳواٽ ئي اوهان تي افسوس آهي.“ ائين چئي هو پنهنجي ساٿين سان گڏ وهار موٽي ويو، جڏهن ته چور اناج ڇڏي هليا ويا. وهار جا ڪيترائي سؤ ڀڪشو سندس همت ۽ اخلاق کان ايترا متاثر ٿيا، جو سندس عزت ڪرڻ لڳا.

جڏهن هن پنهنجي ابتدائي مذهبي تربيت مڪمل ڪئي ۽ مڪمل ڀڪشو بڻيو، تڏهن سندس همت، ذهانت ۽ نظم و ضبط سڀني لاءِ نمايان ٿي ويا. ٿوري ئي عرصي کان پوءِ هن [[ونيه پٽڪ]] جا مڪمل متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ هندستان جو سفر شروع ڪيو. ان کان پوءِ سندس سفرنامو هندستان جي سفر ۽ سمنڊ رستي چين واپسيءَ جو بيان آهي، جيڪو سندس پنهنجي احوال مان ورتل آهي، جنهن ۾ [[ڳجھ واري چوٽي]] (ولچر پیڪ) وٽ [[راجگريهه]] جي زيارت دوران پيش آيل ڪجهه غيرمعمولي واقعن جو به ذڪر شامل ڪيو ويو آهي.

آخر ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي ته چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هو گاديءَ واري شهر (ظاهر آهي [[نانجنگ]]) ۾ رهيو، جتي هن ڀارتي ڀڪشو [[ٻڌڀدرا (مترجم)|ٻڌڀدرا]] سان گڏجي هندستان مان آندل ڪيترن ئي متنن جا ترجما ڪيا. ان کان اڳ جو هو پنهنجو سڄو ارادو پورو ڪري سگهي، هو [[جنگجو]] (هاڻوڪو [[هوبي]]) منتقل ٿي ويو، جتي ''سن'' نالي وهار ۾ اٺاسي ورهين جي عمر ۾ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس وفات تي سڀني واقف ماڻهن گهرو ڏک ظاهر ڪيو. اهو به ٻڌايو ويو آهي ته مختلف ملڪن جي سفرن بابت سندس هڪ ٻيو وڌيڪ مفصل ڪتاب پڻ موجود هو.

اسان جي هن ليکڪ بابت، سندس پنهنجي بيان کان سواءِ، ايتري ئي معلومات ملي ٿي. ''فاشيان'' سندس مذهبي نالو هو، جنهن جي معنيٰ آهي ”ڌرم ۾ درخشنده“ يا ”ڌرم جو نامور استاد“. سندس نالي کان اڳ ايندڙ ''شي''، [[گوتم ٻڌ|شاڪيامني ٻڌ]] جي نالي جو مخفف آهي، ۽ ان کي ٻڌ ڀڪشو هجڻ جي علامت سمجهيو ويندو آهي. ڪڏهن کيس اوڀرئين [[جن خاندان (265–420)|جن خاندان]] (317–419ع) سان لاڳاپيل ڄاڻايو ويو آهي، ته ڪڏهن [[ليو سونگ خاندان|ليو سونگ خاندان]] (420–478ع) سان. جيڪڏهن هن ويهن سالن جي عمر ۾ مڪمل ڀڪشو ٿيڻ کان پوءِ پنجويهن ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان جو سفر ڪيو هجي، ته سندس ڊگهي زندگي تقريباً انهن ٻنهي خاندانن جي دورن ۾ برابر ورهائجي ٿي.{{sfn|Legge|1886}}
}}

== تصنيفون ==

فاشيان جو سڀ کان مشهور تصنيف سندس سفرنامو آهي، جيڪو انگريزيءَ ۾ سندس چيني نالي ''فوگووجي'' يا ''فوگو جي'' ({{zhi|t={{linktext|佛|國|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|国|记}}|p=Fóguójì}}) سان گڏ مختلف ترجمن جي نالن سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، جن ۾ ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال''، ''ٻڌ ڌرمي بادشاهتن جو احوال'' (''Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms'')،{{sfn|Giles|1877}}{{sfn|Legge|1886}} ''ٻڌ ملڪن جا احوال'' (''Buddhist Country Records''){{sfn|Beal|1884}} وغيره شامل آهن. هي ڪتاب ٻين نالن سان پڻ مشهور آهي، جهڙوڪ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جا سفر|t={{linktext|法顯|行|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|行|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎn Xíngzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي سوانح|t={{linktext|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎnzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون|نامور ڀڪشو فاشيان جون يادگيريون]]|t={{linktext|高|僧|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|高|僧|法显|传}}|p=Gāosēng Fǎxiǎn Zhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان ڏانهن ٻڌ ڌرمي ياترا|t={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|记}}|p=Fóyóu Tiānzhú Jì}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي هندستاني سفر جي رپورٽ|t={{linktext|歷游|天竺|記傳}}|s={{linktext|历游|天竺|记传}}|p=Lìyóu Tiānzhú Jìzhuàn}} ۽ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان بابت|t={{linktext|天竺國記}}|s={{linktext|天竺|国|记}}|p=Tiānzhúguó Jì}}.

فاشيان جون يادگيريون انهن علائقن، خاص طور تي [[هندستان]]، جي سماج ۽ ثقافت بابت هڪ آزاد ۽ اهم تاريخي ماخذ آهن، جن جو هن دورو ڪيو. سنسڪرت مان گڏ ڪيل متنن جا سندس چيني ترجما ٻڌ ڌرم جي روايتن، تاريخي شخصيتن ۽ قديم متنن جي تاريخ طئي ڪرڻ لاءِ اهم وسيلو آهن. اهي ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، قلمي نسخن، واقعن ۽ نظرين جي {{lang|la|terminus ante quem}} (ممڪن آخري تاريخ) مقرر ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ مددگار ثابت ٿين ٿا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان لکي ٿو ته وچ ايشيا جا شهر، جهڙوڪ [[ختن]]، ٻڌ ڌرمي مرڪز هئا، جتي ڀڪشو هندستاني ٻولين ۾ لکيل صحيفا پڙهندا هئا ۽ مقامي ماڻهو انهن جو وڏو احترام ڪندا هئا. هن [[ٽيڪسيلا]] (هاڻوڪو پاڪستان) ۾ هڪ خوشحال ٻڌ ڌرمي برادريءَ جو پڻ ذڪر ڪيو آهي، جيڪا گهڻي ڀاڱي غير ٻڌ ڌرمي آباديءَ جي وچ ۾ آباد هئي. هو هندستان ۽ [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻڌ جي عزت ۾ بادشاهن جي سرپرستيءَ هيٺ ٿيندڙ شاندار مذهبي رسمن ۽ عوامي پوڄائن جو به احوال ڏئي ٿو.

فاشيان [[پاٽلي پتر]]، [[مٿرا]] ۽ [[ڪنوج]] جهڙن شهرن بابت پڻ لکيو آهي. هن جو بيان آهي ته [[مدھيه ديش]] جا رهواسي کاڌ خوراڪ ۽ لباس جي لحاظ کان چينين سان مشابهت رکن ٿا. هن پاٽلي پتر کي هڪ خوشحال ۽ آباد شهر قرار ڏنو آهي.{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}} فاشيان 409ع ڌاري هندستان جي اوڀرئين سامونڊي بندرگاهه [[تمرلپتي]] مان روانو ٿيو، پر سندس ڪجهه چيني ياتري ساٿي، جيڪي ساڻس گڏ آيا هئا، هندستان ۾ ئي رهجي ويا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

; هندستان بابت تاثرات

{{Blockquote|هن ملڪ [[مگڌ]] جا شهر ۽ ڳوٺ وچئين ملڪ ([[مٿرا]] کان ڏکڻ تائين) جي سڀني علائقن کان وڏا آهن. هتان جا ماڻهو مالدار ۽ خوشحال آهن ۽ هڪ ٻئي کان نيڪي ۽ انصاف ۾ اڳتي وڌڻ جي ڪوشش ڪندا آهن. هر سال ٻئي مهيني جي اٺين ڏينهن تي هو مجسمن جي جلوس جو اهتمام ڪندا آهن. هو چار ڦيٿن واري هڪ وڏي گاڏي تي بانس سان چار ماڙن جيتري اوچي بناوت تيار ڪندا آهن. ان جي چوڌاري اڇو، ريشم جهڙو ڪپڙو ويڙهي، ان کي مختلف رنگن سان سينگاريو ويندو آهي. پوءِ ديوتائن جون سون، چاندي ۽ لاجورد سان سينگاريل مورتيون رکبيون آهن، جن جي مٿان ريشمي جهنڊا ۽ ڇٽون هونديون آهن. چئني پاسن تي خانا هوندا آهن، جن مان هر هڪ ۾ هڪ ٻڌ ويٺل هوندو آهي ۽ ڀرسان هڪ بوديستو بيٺل هوندو آهي. اهڙيون ويهه يا ان کان وڌيڪ گاڏيون هونديون آهن، سڀئي شاندار، پر هڪ ٻئي کان مختلف. ان ڏينهن ڀڪشو ۽ عام ماڻهو گڏ ٿيندا آهن، ڳائڻا ۽ ماهر سازندا موسيقي پيش ڪندا آهن، گلن ۽ لوبان سان عقيدت ظاهر ڪندا آهن. برهمڻ ٻڌن کي شهر ۾ اچڻ جي دعوت ڏيندا آهن، جتي هو ٻه راتيون ترسندا آهن. رات ڀر ڏيئا روشن رکيا ويندا آهن، موسيقي وڄندي آهي ۽ نذرانو پيش ڪيو ويندو آهي. ٻين بادشاهتن ۾ پڻ اهوئي رواج آهي. وايشيه خاندانن جا سربراهه شهرن ۾ خيراتي گهر ۽ دواخانا قائم ڪندا آهن، جتي غريب، مسڪين، يتيم، بيوه، بي اولاد، معذور ۽ بيمار ماڻهو ايندا آهن. انهن کي هر قسم جي مدد، مناسب کاڌو، دوا ۽ علاج مهيا ڪيو ويندو آهي، ۽ صحتياب ٿيڻ کان پوءِ هو پاڻ هليا ويندا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}}}}

; جاوا کان واپسيءَ دوران سامونڊي ڏکيائيون

{{Blockquote|ان وقت آسمان لڳاتار اونداهو ۽ ابر آلود رهيو، ۽ جهاز هلائيندڙ پاڻ ۾ اختلاف ڪرڻ لڳا، جنهن سبب رستو وڃائي ويٺا. جاوا ڇڏڻ کان پوءِ ستر ڏينهن کان وڌيڪ گذري ويا، ۽ سندن خوراڪ ۽ مٺو پاڻي لڳ ڀڳ ختم ٿي ويو. هو سمنڊ جي لوڻياٺي پاڻيءَ ۾ کاڌو پچائيندا هئا، جڏهن ته مٺو پاڻي وڏي احتياط سان ورهايو ويندو هو ۽ هر ماڻهوءَ کي فقط ٻه پائو ملندو هو. نيٺ اهو به ختم ٿيڻ لڳو، تڏهن واپارين صلاح ڪئي: ”عام حالتن ۾ ته اسان کي هن وقت تائين [[گوانگجو]] پهچي وڃڻ گهرجي ها، پر ڪيترائي ڏينهن وڌيڪ گذري چڪا آهن؛ لڳي ٿو اسان غلط رستو اختيار ڪيو آهي.“ پوءِ جهاز کي اتر اولهه طرف موڙيو ويو ۽ خشڪيءَ جي ڳولا ڪئي وئي. ٻارهن ڏينهن ۽ راتين جي سفر کان پوءِ هو [[لائو جبل]] جي ڏکڻ واري سامونڊي ڪناري تي، چانگ گوانگ ضلعي جي حدن ۾ پهتا، جتي کين تازو پاڻي ۽ ڀاڄيون مليون. ڪيترين ئي تڪليفن ۽ خطرن مان گذرڻ ۽ ڊگهي عرصي تائين خوف ۾ رهڻ کان پوءِ، جڏهن هنن اهي سڃاتل ڀاڄيون ڏٺيون ته کين يقين ٿي ويو ته هو هان (چين) جي سرزمين تي پهچي ويا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 40}}}}

[[جان-پيئر ابيل-ريمسا|ريمسا]] جي هن ڪتاب جي ترجمي{{sfn|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} يورپي علمي حلقن ۾ وڏي دلچسپي پيدا ڪئي، پر ڪيترن عالمن کي اها ڳالهه ڏکي لڳي ته فاشيان جن سنسڪرت لفظن کي [[وچين چيني]] [[چيني اکر]]ن ۾ لکي نقل ڪيو هو، انهن جي صحيح سڃاڻپ ۽ تشريح ڪيئن ڪجي.{{sfn|Walravens|2014|p=272}}

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>7yt7sguquzrjqfz06hjhnw18n58go4t</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394166</id>
      <parentid>394094</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:11:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394166</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25664" sha1="ph4i58gqnommfb48xqybo03kh2maunp" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

هيٺ ڏنل اقتباس [[جيمس ليگ]] پاران اوڻيهين صديءَ ۾ فاشيان جي ڪتاب جي انگريزي ترجمي جي مهاڳ مان ورتل آهي. جيتوڻيڪ ليگ جون ڪجهه راءِون، جهڙوڪ فاشيان جو 25 ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان وڃڻ، بعد جي تحقيق سان رد ٿي چڪيون آهن، پر سندس مهاڳ ۾ فاشيان بابت ڪجهه ڪارائتيون سوانحي ڄاڻون موجود آهن.

[[File:Fa Hsien at the ruins of Asoka's palace.jpg|thumb|right|250px|اشوڪ جي محل جي کنڊرن وٽ فاشيان]]

[[File:BEAL(1869) FAH-HIAN'S ROUTE THROUGH INDIA AND TARTARY.jpg|thumb|right|250px|بيل جي ايڊيشن موجب هندستان ۽ تاتارستان ۾ فاشيان جو سفري رستو{{sfn|Beal|1884}}]]

{{blockquote|
فاشيان بابت سندس پنهنجي سفرنامي کان سواءِ ڪا گهڻي اهم معلومات موجود ناهي. مون سندس باري ۾ 519ع ۾ ترتيب ڏنل ''[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون]]'' ۽ ان کان پوءِ [[منگ خاندان]] جي ٽئين شهنشاهه (1403–1424ع) جي دور ۾ لکيل ''عجيب ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون'' پڙهيون آهن، پر انهن مان لڳ ڀڳ سموري معلومات اڳئين ڪتاب تان ورتل آهي، ۽ جيڪا ٿوري گهڻي معتبر معلوم ٿئي ٿي، سا مختصر لفظن ۾ بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿي.

انهن ڪتابن موجب سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو، ۽ هو پِنگ-يانگ جي وو-يانگ جو رهواسي هو، جيڪو اڄ به [[شانشي]] صوبي جو هڪ وڏو علائقو آهي. هن کان ٽي وڏا ڀائر هئا، پر اهي سڀ پنهنجا پهريان ڏند نڪرڻ کان اڳ ئي فوت ٿي ويا. ان کان پوءِ سندس پيءُ کيس ٻڌ ڌرم جي خدمت لاءِ وقف ڪيو ۽ [[شرامڻير]] بڻائي ڇڏيو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه وقت تائين کيس گهر ۾ ئي رکيو ويو. ننڍپڻ ۾ هو سخت بيمار ٿي پيو، تنهن ڪري سندس پيءُ کيس هڪ [[وهار]] ۾ موڪليو، جتي هو جلد صحتياب ٿي ويو ۽ پوءِ والدين وٽ واپس وڃڻ کان انڪار ڪري ڇڏيائين.

جڏهن هو ڏهن سالن جو ٿيو، تڏهن سندس پيءُ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس چاچي، جيڪو سندس ماءُ جي اڪيلي زندگيءَ تي افسوس ڪندو هو، کيس صلاح ڏني ته وهار واري زندگي ڇڏي پنهنجي ماءُ وٽ موٽي اچي. پر هن جواب ڏنو: ”مون پنهنجي پيءُ جي خواهش تي گهر نه ڇڏيو، پر ان ڪري جو دنيا جي غبار ۽ عام رواجن کان پري رهڻ ٿي چاهيم. انهيءَ سبب مون ڀڪشو ٿيڻ پسند ڪيو.“ چاچي سندس جواب کي ساراهيو ۽ وڌيڪ زور ڀرڻ ڇڏي ڏنو. جڏهن سندس ماءُ به وفات ڪئي، تڏهن سندس سٺي طبيعت ۽ ماءُ سان محبت ظاهر ٿي؛ پر تدفين کان پوءِ هو ٻيهر وهار موٽي آيو.

هڪ ڀيري هو ٻين ڪيترن ئي نوآموز ڀڪشن سان گڏ ڌان جي فصل جي لاباري ۾ مصروف هو، ته بکيا چور اناج ڦرڻ لاءِ اچي پهتا. ٻيا سڀ شرامڻير ڀڄي ويا، پر فاشيان پنهنجي جاءِ تي بيٺو رهيو ۽ چورن کي چيائين: ”جيڪڏهن اوهان کي اناج گهرجي ته جيترو وڻيوَ اوترو کڻي وڃو، پر ياد رکو، توهان جي اڳوڻي سخاوت جي کوٽ ئي اوهان کي هن محتاجيءَ تائين پهچايو آهي، ۽ هاڻي وري اوهان ٻين کي ڦرڻ چاهيو ٿا. مون کي ڊپ آهي ته ايندڙ جنمن ۾ اوهان جي غربت ۽ ڏک اڃا به وڌندا. مون کي اڳواٽ ئي اوهان تي افسوس آهي.“ ائين چئي هو پنهنجي ساٿين سان گڏ وهار موٽي ويو، جڏهن ته چور اناج ڇڏي هليا ويا. وهار جا ڪيترائي سؤ ڀڪشو سندس همت ۽ اخلاق کان ايترا متاثر ٿيا، جو سندس عزت ڪرڻ لڳا.

جڏهن هن پنهنجي ابتدائي مذهبي تربيت مڪمل ڪئي ۽ مڪمل ڀڪشو بڻيو، تڏهن سندس همت، ذهانت ۽ نظم و ضبط سڀني لاءِ نمايان ٿي ويا. ٿوري ئي عرصي کان پوءِ هن [[ونيه پٽڪ]] جا مڪمل متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ هندستان جو سفر شروع ڪيو. ان کان پوءِ سندس سفرنامو هندستان جي سفر ۽ سمنڊ رستي چين واپسيءَ جو بيان آهي، جيڪو سندس پنهنجي احوال مان ورتل آهي، جنهن ۾ [[ڳجھ واري چوٽي]] (ولچر پیڪ) وٽ [[راجگريهه]] جي زيارت دوران پيش آيل ڪجهه غيرمعمولي واقعن جو به ذڪر شامل ڪيو ويو آهي.

آخر ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي ته چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هو گاديءَ واري شهر (ظاهر آهي [[نانجنگ]]) ۾ رهيو، جتي هن ڀارتي ڀڪشو [[ٻڌڀدرا (مترجم)|ٻڌڀدرا]] سان گڏجي هندستان مان آندل ڪيترن ئي متنن جا ترجما ڪيا. ان کان اڳ جو هو پنهنجو سڄو ارادو پورو ڪري سگهي، هو [[جنگجو]] (هاڻوڪو [[هوبي]]) منتقل ٿي ويو، جتي ''سن'' نالي وهار ۾ اٺاسي ورهين جي عمر ۾ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس وفات تي سڀني واقف ماڻهن گهرو ڏک ظاهر ڪيو. اهو به ٻڌايو ويو آهي ته مختلف ملڪن جي سفرن بابت سندس هڪ ٻيو وڌيڪ مفصل ڪتاب پڻ موجود هو.

اسان جي هن ليکڪ بابت، سندس پنهنجي بيان کان سواءِ، ايتري ئي معلومات ملي ٿي. ''فاشيان'' سندس مذهبي نالو هو، جنهن جي معنيٰ آهي ”ڌرم ۾ درخشنده“ يا ”ڌرم جو نامور استاد“. سندس نالي کان اڳ ايندڙ ''شي''، [[گوتم ٻڌ|شاڪيامني ٻڌ]] جي نالي جو مخفف آهي، ۽ ان کي ٻڌ ڀڪشو هجڻ جي علامت سمجهيو ويندو آهي. ڪڏهن کيس اوڀرئين [[جن خاندان (265–420)|جن خاندان]] (317–419ع) سان لاڳاپيل ڄاڻايو ويو آهي، ته ڪڏهن [[ليو سونگ خاندان|ليو سونگ خاندان]] (420–478ع) سان. جيڪڏهن هن ويهن سالن جي عمر ۾ مڪمل ڀڪشو ٿيڻ کان پوءِ پنجويهن ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان جو سفر ڪيو هجي، ته سندس ڊگهي زندگي تقريباً انهن ٻنهي خاندانن جي دورن ۾ برابر ورهائجي ٿي.{{sfn|Legge|1886}}
}}

== تصنيفون ==

فاشيان جو سڀ کان مشهور تصنيف سندس سفرنامو آهي، جيڪو انگريزيءَ ۾ سندس چيني نالي ''فوگووجي'' يا ''فوگو جي'' ({{zhi|t={{linktext|佛|國|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|国|记}}|p=Fóguójì}}) سان گڏ مختلف ترجمن جي نالن سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، جن ۾ ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال''، ''ٻڌ ڌرمي بادشاهتن جو احوال'' (''Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms'')،{{sfn|Giles|1877}}{{sfn|Legge|1886}} ''ٻڌ ملڪن جا احوال'' (''Buddhist Country Records''){{sfn|Beal|1884}} وغيره شامل آهن. هي ڪتاب ٻين نالن سان پڻ مشهور آهي، جهڙوڪ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جا سفر|t={{linktext|法顯|行|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|行|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎn Xíngzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي سوانح|t={{linktext|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎnzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون|نامور ڀڪشو فاشيان جون يادگيريون]]|t={{linktext|高|僧|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|高|僧|法显|传}}|p=Gāosēng Fǎxiǎn Zhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان ڏانهن ٻڌ ڌرمي ياترا|t={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|记}}|p=Fóyóu Tiānzhú Jì}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي هندستاني سفر جي رپورٽ|t={{linktext|歷游|天竺|記傳}}|s={{linktext|历游|天竺|记传}}|p=Lìyóu Tiānzhú Jìzhuàn}} ۽ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان بابت|t={{linktext|天竺國記}}|s={{linktext|天竺|国|记}}|p=Tiānzhúguó Jì}}.

فاشيان جون يادگيريون انهن علائقن، خاص طور تي [[هندستان]]، جي سماج ۽ ثقافت بابت هڪ آزاد ۽ اهم تاريخي ماخذ آهن، جن جو هن دورو ڪيو. سنسڪرت مان گڏ ڪيل متنن جا سندس چيني ترجما ٻڌ ڌرم جي روايتن، تاريخي شخصيتن ۽ قديم متنن جي تاريخ طئي ڪرڻ لاءِ اهم وسيلو آهن. اهي ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، قلمي نسخن، واقعن ۽ نظرين جي {{lang|la|terminus ante quem}} (ممڪن آخري تاريخ) مقرر ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ مددگار ثابت ٿين ٿا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان لکي ٿو ته وچ ايشيا جا شهر، جهڙوڪ [[ختن]]، ٻڌ ڌرمي مرڪز هئا، جتي ڀڪشو هندستاني ٻولين ۾ لکيل صحيفا پڙهندا هئا ۽ مقامي ماڻهو انهن جو وڏو احترام ڪندا هئا. هن [[ٽيڪسيلا]] (هاڻوڪو پاڪستان) ۾ هڪ خوشحال ٻڌ ڌرمي برادريءَ جو پڻ ذڪر ڪيو آهي، جيڪا گهڻي ڀاڱي غير ٻڌ ڌرمي آباديءَ جي وچ ۾ آباد هئي. هو هندستان ۽ [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻڌ جي عزت ۾ بادشاهن جي سرپرستيءَ هيٺ ٿيندڙ شاندار مذهبي رسمن ۽ عوامي پوڄائن جو به احوال ڏئي ٿو.

فاشيان [[پاٽلي پتر]]، [[مٿرا]] ۽ [[ڪنوج]] جهڙن شهرن بابت پڻ لکيو آهي. هن جو بيان آهي ته [[مدھيه ديش]] جا رهواسي کاڌ خوراڪ ۽ لباس جي لحاظ کان چينين سان مشابهت رکن ٿا. هن پاٽلي پتر کي هڪ خوشحال ۽ آباد شهر قرار ڏنو آهي.{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}} فاشيان 409ع ڌاري هندستان جي اوڀرئين سامونڊي بندرگاهه [[تمرلپتي]] مان روانو ٿيو، پر سندس ڪجهه چيني ياتري ساٿي، جيڪي ساڻس گڏ آيا هئا، هندستان ۾ ئي رهجي ويا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

; هندستان بابت تاثرات

{{Blockquote|هن ملڪ [[مگڌ]] جا شهر ۽ ڳوٺ وچئين ملڪ ([[مٿرا]] کان ڏکڻ تائين) جي سڀني علائقن کان وڏا آهن. هتان جا ماڻهو مالدار ۽ خوشحال آهن ۽ هڪ ٻئي کان نيڪي ۽ انصاف ۾ اڳتي وڌڻ جي ڪوشش ڪندا آهن. هر سال ٻئي مهيني جي اٺين ڏينهن تي هو مجسمن جي جلوس جو اهتمام ڪندا آهن. هو چار ڦيٿن واري هڪ وڏي گاڏي تي بانس سان چار ماڙن جيتري اوچي بناوت تيار ڪندا آهن. ان جي چوڌاري اڇو، ريشم جهڙو ڪپڙو ويڙهي، ان کي مختلف رنگن سان سينگاريو ويندو آهي. پوءِ ديوتائن جون سون، چاندي ۽ لاجورد سان سينگاريل مورتيون رکبيون آهن، جن جي مٿان ريشمي جهنڊا ۽ ڇٽون هونديون آهن. چئني پاسن تي خانا هوندا آهن، جن مان هر هڪ ۾ هڪ ٻڌ ويٺل هوندو آهي ۽ ڀرسان هڪ بوديستو بيٺل هوندو آهي. اهڙيون ويهه يا ان کان وڌيڪ گاڏيون هونديون آهن، سڀئي شاندار، پر هڪ ٻئي کان مختلف. ان ڏينهن ڀڪشو ۽ عام ماڻهو گڏ ٿيندا آهن، ڳائڻا ۽ ماهر سازندا موسيقي پيش ڪندا آهن، گلن ۽ لوبان سان عقيدت ظاهر ڪندا آهن. برهمڻ ٻڌن کي شهر ۾ اچڻ جي دعوت ڏيندا آهن، جتي هو ٻه راتيون ترسندا آهن. رات ڀر ڏيئا روشن رکيا ويندا آهن، موسيقي وڄندي آهي ۽ نذرانو پيش ڪيو ويندو آهي. ٻين بادشاهتن ۾ پڻ اهوئي رواج آهي. وايشيه خاندانن جا سربراهه شهرن ۾ خيراتي گهر ۽ دواخانا قائم ڪندا آهن، جتي غريب، مسڪين، يتيم، بيوه، بي اولاد، معذور ۽ بيمار ماڻهو ايندا آهن. انهن کي هر قسم جي مدد، مناسب کاڌو، دوا ۽ علاج مهيا ڪيو ويندو آهي، ۽ صحتياب ٿيڻ کان پوءِ هو پاڻ هليا ويندا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}}}}

; جاوا کان واپسيءَ دوران سامونڊي ڏکيائيون

{{Blockquote|ان وقت آسمان لڳاتار اونداهو ۽ ابر آلود رهيو، ۽ جهاز هلائيندڙ پاڻ ۾ اختلاف ڪرڻ لڳا، جنهن سبب رستو وڃائي ويٺا. جاوا ڇڏڻ کان پوءِ ستر ڏينهن کان وڌيڪ گذري ويا، ۽ سندن خوراڪ ۽ مٺو پاڻي لڳ ڀڳ ختم ٿي ويو. هو سمنڊ جي لوڻياٺي پاڻيءَ ۾ کاڌو پچائيندا هئا، جڏهن ته مٺو پاڻي وڏي احتياط سان ورهايو ويندو هو ۽ هر ماڻهوءَ کي فقط ٻه پائو ملندو هو. نيٺ اهو به ختم ٿيڻ لڳو، تڏهن واپارين صلاح ڪئي: ”عام حالتن ۾ ته اسان کي هن وقت تائين [[گوانگجو]] پهچي وڃڻ گهرجي ها، پر ڪيترائي ڏينهن وڌيڪ گذري چڪا آهن؛ لڳي ٿو اسان غلط رستو اختيار ڪيو آهي.“ پوءِ جهاز کي اتر اولهه طرف موڙيو ويو ۽ خشڪيءَ جي ڳولا ڪئي وئي. ٻارهن ڏينهن ۽ راتين جي سفر کان پوءِ هو [[لائو جبل]] جي ڏکڻ واري سامونڊي ڪناري تي، چانگ گوانگ ضلعي جي حدن ۾ پهتا، جتي کين تازو پاڻي ۽ ڀاڄيون مليون. ڪيترين ئي تڪليفن ۽ خطرن مان گذرڻ ۽ ڊگهي عرصي تائين خوف ۾ رهڻ کان پوءِ، جڏهن هنن اهي سڃاتل ڀاڄيون ڏٺيون ته کين يقين ٿي ويو ته هو هان (چين) جي سرزمين تي پهچي ويا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 40}}}}

[[جان-پيئر ابيل-ريمسا|ريمسا]] جي هن ڪتاب جي ترجمي{{sfn|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} يورپي علمي حلقن ۾ وڏي دلچسپي پيدا ڪئي، پر ڪيترن عالمن کي اها ڳالهه ڏکي لڳي ته فاشيان جن سنسڪرت لفظن کي [[وچين چيني]] [[چيني اکر]]ن ۾ لکي نقل ڪيو هو، انهن جي صحيح سڃاڻپ ۽ تشريح ڪيئن ڪجي.{{sfn|Walravens|2014|p=272}}

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>ph4i58gqnommfb48xqybo03kh2maunp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394167</id>
      <parentid>394166</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:12:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394167</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25637" sha1="heysyhn0pkrj1alz32e4w7isbev9uzq" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

هيٺ ڏنل اقتباس [[جيمس ليگ]] پاران اوڻيهين صديءَ ۾ فاشيان جي ڪتاب جي انگريزي ترجمي جي مهاڳ مان ورتل آهي. جيتوڻيڪ ليگ جون ڪجهه راءِون، جهڙوڪ فاشيان جو 25 ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان وڃڻ، بعد جي تحقيق سان رد ٿي چڪيون آهن، پر سندس مهاڳ ۾ فاشيان بابت ڪجهه ڪارائتيون سوانحي ڄاڻون موجود آهن.

[[File:Fa Hsien at the ruins of Asoka's palace.jpg|thumb|right|250px|اشوڪ جي محل جي کنڊرن وٽ فاشيان]]

[[File:BEAL(1869) FAH-HIAN'S ROUTE THROUGH INDIA AND TARTARY.jpg|thumb|right|250px|بيل جي ايڊيشن موجب هندستان ۽ تاتارستان ۾ فاشيان جو سفري رستو{{sfn|Beal|1884}}]]

{{blockquote|
فاشيان بابت سندس پنهنجي سفرنامي کان سواءِ ڪا گهڻي اهم معلومات موجود ناهي. مون سندس باري ۾ 519ع ۾ ترتيب ڏنل ''[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون]]'' ۽ ان کان پوءِ [[منگ خاندان]] جي ٽئين شهنشاهه (1403–1424ع) جي دور ۾ لکيل ''عجيب ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون'' پڙهيون آهن، پر انهن مان لڳ ڀڳ سموري معلومات اڳئين ڪتاب تان ورتل آهي، ۽ جيڪا ٿوري گهڻي معتبر معلوم ٿئي ٿي، سا مختصر لفظن ۾ بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿي.

انهن ڪتابن موجب سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو، ۽ هو پِنگ-يانگ جي وو-يانگ جو رهواسي هو، جيڪو اڄ به [[شانشي]] صوبي جو هڪ وڏو علائقو آهي. هن کان ٽي وڏا ڀائر هئا، پر اهي سڀ پنهنجا پهريان ڏند نڪرڻ کان اڳ ئي فوت ٿي ويا. ان کان پوءِ سندس پيءُ کيس ٻڌ ڌرم جي خدمت لاءِ وقف ڪيو ۽ [[شرامڻير]] بڻائي ڇڏيو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه وقت تائين کيس گهر ۾ ئي رکيو ويو. ننڍپڻ ۾ هو سخت بيمار ٿي پيو، تنهن ڪري سندس پيءُ کيس هڪ [[وهار]] ۾ موڪليو، جتي هو جلد صحتياب ٿي ويو ۽ پوءِ والدين وٽ واپس وڃڻ کان انڪار ڪري ڇڏيائين.

جڏهن هو ڏهن سالن جو ٿيو، تڏهن سندس پيءُ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس چاچي، جيڪو سندس ماءُ جي اڪيلي زندگيءَ تي افسوس ڪندو هو، کيس صلاح ڏني ته وهار واري زندگي ڇڏي پنهنجي ماءُ وٽ موٽي اچي. پر هن جواب ڏنو: ”مون پنهنجي پيءُ جي خواهش تي گهر نه ڇڏيو، پر ان ڪري جو دنيا جي غبار ۽ عام رواجن کان پري رهڻ ٿي چاهيم. انهيءَ سبب مون ڀڪشو ٿيڻ پسند ڪيو.“ چاچي سندس جواب کي ساراهيو ۽ وڌيڪ زور ڀرڻ ڇڏي ڏنو. جڏهن سندس ماءُ به وفات ڪئي، تڏهن سندس سٺي طبيعت ۽ ماءُ سان محبت ظاهر ٿي؛ پر تدفين کان پوءِ هو ٻيهر وهار موٽي آيو.

هڪ ڀيري هو ٻين ڪيترن ئي نوآموز ڀڪشن سان گڏ ڌان جي فصل جي لاباري ۾ مصروف هو، ته بکيا چور اناج ڦرڻ لاءِ اچي پهتا. ٻيا سڀ شرامڻير ڀڄي ويا، پر فاشيان پنهنجي جاءِ تي بيٺو رهيو ۽ چورن کي چيائين: ”جيڪڏهن اوهان کي اناج گهرجي ته جيترو وڻيوَ اوترو کڻي وڃو، پر ياد رکو، توهان جي اڳوڻي سخاوت جي کوٽ ئي اوهان کي هن محتاجيءَ تائين پهچايو آهي، ۽ هاڻي وري اوهان ٻين کي ڦرڻ چاهيو ٿا. مون کي ڊپ آهي ته ايندڙ جنمن ۾ اوهان جي غربت ۽ ڏک اڃا به وڌندا. مون کي اڳواٽ ئي اوهان تي افسوس آهي.“ ائين چئي هو پنهنجي ساٿين سان گڏ وهار موٽي ويو، جڏهن ته چور اناج ڇڏي هليا ويا. وهار جا ڪيترائي سؤ ڀڪشو سندس همت ۽ اخلاق کان ايترا متاثر ٿيا، جو سندس عزت ڪرڻ لڳا.

جڏهن هن پنهنجي ابتدائي مذهبي تربيت مڪمل ڪئي ۽ مڪمل ڀڪشو بڻيو، تڏهن سندس همت، ذهانت ۽ نظم و ضبط سڀني لاءِ نمايان ٿي ويا. ٿوري ئي عرصي کان پوءِ هن [[ونيه پٽڪ]] جا مڪمل متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ هندستان جو سفر شروع ڪيو. ان کان پوءِ سندس سفرنامو هندستان جي سفر ۽ سمنڊ رستي چين واپسيءَ جو بيان آهي، جيڪو سندس پنهنجي احوال مان ورتل آهي، جنهن ۾ [[ڳجھ واري چوٽي]] (ولچر پیڪ) وٽ [[راجگريهه]] جي زيارت دوران پيش آيل ڪجهه غيرمعمولي واقعن جو به ذڪر شامل ڪيو ويو آهي.

آخر ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي ته چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هو گاديءَ واري شهر (ظاهر آهي [[نانجنگ]]) ۾ رهيو، جتي هن ڀارتي ڀڪشو [[ٻڌڀدرا (مترجم)|ٻڌڀدرا]] سان گڏجي هندستان مان آندل ڪيترن ئي متنن جا ترجما ڪيا. ان کان اڳ جو هو پنهنجو سڄو ارادو پورو ڪري سگهي، هو [[جنگجو]] (هاڻوڪو [[هوبي]]) منتقل ٿي ويو، جتي ''سن'' نالي وهار ۾ اٺاسي ورهين جي عمر ۾ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس وفات تي سڀني واقف ماڻهن گهرو ڏک ظاهر ڪيو. اهو به ٻڌايو ويو آهي ته مختلف ملڪن جي سفرن بابت سندس هڪ ٻيو وڌيڪ مفصل ڪتاب پڻ موجود هو.

اسان جي هن ليکڪ بابت، سندس پنهنجي بيان کان سواءِ، ايتري ئي معلومات ملي ٿي. ''فاشيان'' سندس مذهبي نالو هو، جنهن جي معنيٰ آهي ”ڌرم ۾ درخشنده“ يا ”ڌرم جو نامور استاد“. سندس نالي کان اڳ ايندڙ ''شي''، [[گوتم ٻڌ|شاڪيامني ٻڌ]] جي نالي جو مخفف آهي، ۽ ان کي ٻڌ ڀڪشو هجڻ جي علامت سمجهيو ويندو آهي. ڪڏهن کيس اوڀرئين [[جن خاندان (265–420)|جن خاندان]] (317–419ع) سان لاڳاپيل ڄاڻايو ويو آهي، ته ڪڏهن [[ليو سونگ خاندان|ليو سونگ خاندان]] (420–478ع) سان. جيڪڏهن هن ويهن سالن جي عمر ۾ مڪمل ڀڪشو ٿيڻ کان پوءِ پنجويهن ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان جو سفر ڪيو هجي، ته سندس ڊگهي زندگي تقريباً انهن ٻنهي خاندانن جي دورن ۾ برابر ورهائجي ٿي.{{sfn|Legge|1886}}
}}

== تصنيفون ==

فاشيان جو سڀ کان مشهور تصنيف سندس سفرنامو آهي، جيڪو انگريزيءَ ۾ سندس چيني نالي ''فوگووجي'' يا ''فوگو جي'' ({{zhi|t={{linktext|佛|國|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|国|记}}|p=Fóguójì}}) سان گڏ مختلف ترجمن جي نالن سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، جن ۾ ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال''، ''ٻڌ ڌرمي بادشاهتن جو احوال'' (''Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms'')،{{sfn|Giles|1877}}{{sfn|Legge|1886}} ''ٻڌ ملڪن جا احوال'' (''Buddhist Country Records''){{sfn|Beal|1884}} وغيره شامل آهن. هي ڪتاب ٻين نالن سان پڻ مشهور آهي، جهڙوڪ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جا سفر|t={{linktext|法顯|行|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|行|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎn Xíngzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي سوانح|t={{linktext|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎnzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون|نامور ڀڪشو فاشيان جون يادگيريون]]|t={{linktext|高|僧|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|高|僧|法显|传}}|p=Gāosēng Fǎxiǎn Zhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان ڏانهن ٻڌ ڌرمي ياترا|t={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|记}}|p=Fóyóu Tiānzhú Jì}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي هندستاني سفر جي رپورٽ|t={{linktext|歷游|天竺|記傳}}|s={{linktext|历游|天竺|记传}}|p=Lìyóu Tiānzhú Jìzhuàn}} ۽ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان بابت|t={{linktext|天竺國記}}|s={{linktext|天竺|国|记}}|p=Tiānzhúguó Jì}}.

فاشيان جون يادگيريون انهن علائقن، خاص طور تي [[هندستان]]، جي سماج ۽ ثقافت بابت هڪ آزاد ۽ اهم تاريخي ماخذ آهن، جن جو هن دورو ڪيو. سنسڪرت مان گڏ ڪيل متنن جا سندس چيني ترجما ٻڌ ڌرم جي روايتن، تاريخي شخصيتن ۽ قديم متنن جي تاريخ طئي ڪرڻ لاءِ اهم وسيلو آهن. اهي ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، قلمي نسخن، واقعن ۽ نظرين جي {{lang|la|terminus ante quem}} (ممڪن آخري تاريخ) مقرر ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ مددگار ثابت ٿين ٿا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان لکي ٿو ته وچ ايشيا جا شهر، جهڙوڪ [[ختن]]، ٻڌ ڌرمي مرڪز هئا، جتي ڀڪشو هندستاني ٻولين ۾ لکيل صحيفا پڙهندا هئا ۽ مقامي ماڻهو انهن جو وڏو احترام ڪندا هئا. هن [[ٽيڪسيلا]] (هاڻوڪو پاڪستان) ۾ هڪ خوشحال ٻڌ ڌرمي برادريءَ جو پڻ ذڪر ڪيو آهي، جيڪا گهڻي ڀاڱي غير ٻڌ ڌرمي آباديءَ جي وچ ۾ آباد هئي. هو هندستان ۽ [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻڌ جي عزت ۾ بادشاهن جي سرپرستيءَ هيٺ ٿيندڙ شاندار مذهبي رسمن ۽ عوامي پوڄائن جو به احوال ڏئي ٿو.

فاشيان [[پاٽلي پتر]]، [[مٿرا]] ۽ [[ڪنوج]] جهڙن شهرن بابت پڻ لکيو آهي. هن جو بيان آهي ته [[مدھيه ديش]] جا رهواسي کاڌ خوراڪ ۽ لباس جي لحاظ کان چينين سان مشابهت رکن ٿا. هن پاٽلي پتر کي هڪ خوشحال ۽ آباد شهر قرار ڏنو آهي.{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}} فاشيان 409ع ڌاري هندستان جي اوڀرئين سامونڊي بندرگاهه [[تمرلپتي]] مان روانو ٿيو، پر سندس ڪجهه چيني ياتري ساٿي، جيڪي ساڻس گڏ آيا هئا، هندستان ۾ ئي رهجي ويا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

; هندستان بابت تاثرات

{{Blockquote|هن ملڪ [[مگڌ]] جا شهر ۽ ڳوٺ وچئين ملڪ ([[مٿرا]] کان ڏکڻ تائين) جي سڀني علائقن کان وڏا آهن. هتان جا ماڻهو مالدار ۽ خوشحال آهن ۽ هڪ ٻئي کان نيڪي ۽ انصاف ۾ اڳتي وڌڻ جي ڪوشش ڪندا آهن. هر سال ٻئي مهيني جي اٺين ڏينهن تي هو مجسمن جي جلوس جو اهتمام ڪندا آهن. هو چار ڦيٿن واري هڪ وڏي گاڏي تي بانس سان چار ماڙن جيتري اوچي بناوت تيار ڪندا آهن. ان جي چوڌاري اڇو، ريشم جهڙو ڪپڙو ويڙهي، ان کي مختلف رنگن سان سينگاريو ويندو آهي. پوءِ ديوتائن جون سون، چاندي ۽ لاجورد سان سينگاريل مورتيون رکبيون آهن، جن جي مٿان ريشمي جهنڊا ۽ ڇٽون هونديون آهن. چئني پاسن تي خانا هوندا آهن، جن مان هر هڪ ۾ هڪ ٻڌ ويٺل هوندو آهي ۽ ڀرسان هڪ بوديستو بيٺل هوندو آهي. اهڙيون ويهه يا ان کان وڌيڪ گاڏيون هونديون آهن، سڀئي شاندار، پر هڪ ٻئي کان مختلف. ان ڏينهن ڀڪشو ۽ عام ماڻهو گڏ ٿيندا آهن، ڳائڻا ۽ ماهر سازندا موسيقي پيش ڪندا آهن، گلن ۽ لوبان سان عقيدت ظاهر ڪندا آهن. برهمڻ ٻڌن کي شهر ۾ اچڻ جي دعوت ڏيندا آهن، جتي هو ٻه راتيون ترسندا آهن. رات ڀر ڏيئا روشن رکيا ويندا آهن، موسيقي وڄندي آهي ۽ نذرانو پيش ڪيو ويندو آهي. ٻين بادشاهتن ۾ پڻ اهوئي رواج آهي. وايشيه خاندانن جا سربراهه شهرن ۾ خيراتي گهر ۽ دواخانا قائم ڪندا آهن، جتي غريب، مسڪين، يتيم، بيوه، بي اولاد، معذور ۽ بيمار ماڻهو ايندا آهن. انهن کي هر قسم جي مدد، مناسب کاڌو، دوا ۽ علاج مهيا ڪيو ويندو آهي، ۽ صحتياب ٿيڻ کان پوءِ هو پاڻ هليا ويندا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}}}}

; جاوا کان واپسيءَ دوران سامونڊي ڏکيائيون

{{Blockquote|ان وقت آسمان لڳاتار اونداهو ۽ ابر آلود رهيو، ۽ جهاز هلائيندڙ پاڻ ۾ اختلاف ڪرڻ لڳا، جنهن سبب رستو وڃائي ويٺا. جاوا ڇڏڻ کان پوءِ ستر ڏينهن کان وڌيڪ گذري ويا، ۽ سندن خوراڪ ۽ مٺو پاڻي لڳ ڀڳ ختم ٿي ويو. هو سمنڊ جي لوڻياٺي پاڻيءَ ۾ کاڌو پچائيندا هئا، جڏهن ته مٺو پاڻي وڏي احتياط سان ورهايو ويندو هو ۽ هر ماڻهوءَ کي فقط ٻه پائو ملندو هو. نيٺ اهو به ختم ٿيڻ لڳو، تڏهن واپارين صلاح ڪئي: ”عام حالتن ۾ ته اسان کي هن وقت تائين [[گوانگجو]] پهچي وڃڻ گهرجي ها، پر ڪيترائي ڏينهن وڌيڪ گذري چڪا آهن؛ لڳي ٿو اسان غلط رستو اختيار ڪيو آهي.“ پوءِ جهاز کي اتر اولهه طرف موڙيو ويو ۽ خشڪيءَ جي ڳولا ڪئي وئي. ٻارهن ڏينهن ۽ راتين جي سفر کان پوءِ هو [[لائو جبل]] جي ڏکڻ واري سامونڊي ڪناري تي، چانگ گوانگ ضلعي جي حدن ۾ پهتا، جتي کين تازو پاڻي ۽ ڀاڄيون مليون. ڪيترين ئي تڪليفن ۽ خطرن مان گذرڻ ۽ ڊگهي عرصي تائين خوف ۾ رهڻ کان پوءِ، جڏهن هنن اهي سڃاتل ڀاڄيون ڏٺيون ته کين يقين ٿي ويو ته هو هان (چين) جي سرزمين تي پهچي ويا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 40}}}}

[[جان-پيئر ابيل-ريمسا|ريمسا]] جي هن ڪتاب جي ترجمي{{sfn|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} يورپي علمي حلقن ۾ وڏي دلچسپي پيدا ڪئي، پر ڪيترن عالمن کي اها ڳالهه ڏکي لڳي ته فاشيان جن سنسڪرت لفظن کي [[وچين چيني]] [[چيني اکر]]ن ۾ لکي نقل ڪيو هو، انهن جي صحيح سڃاڻپ ۽ تشريح ڪيئن ڪجي.{{sfn|Walravens|2014|p=272}}

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>heysyhn0pkrj1alz32e4w7isbev9uzq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394168</id>
      <parentid>394167</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:16:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* تصنيفون */</comment>
      <origin>394168</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30046" sha1="nergm1wexehk8qfgcghhm3kc3bkxnxb" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

هيٺ ڏنل اقتباس [[جيمس ليگ]] پاران اوڻيهين صديءَ ۾ فاشيان جي ڪتاب جي انگريزي ترجمي جي مهاڳ مان ورتل آهي. جيتوڻيڪ ليگ جون ڪجهه راءِون، جهڙوڪ فاشيان جو 25 ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان وڃڻ، بعد جي تحقيق سان رد ٿي چڪيون آهن، پر سندس مهاڳ ۾ فاشيان بابت ڪجهه ڪارائتيون سوانحي ڄاڻون موجود آهن.

[[File:Fa Hsien at the ruins of Asoka's palace.jpg|thumb|right|250px|اشوڪ جي محل جي کنڊرن وٽ فاشيان]]

[[File:BEAL(1869) FAH-HIAN'S ROUTE THROUGH INDIA AND TARTARY.jpg|thumb|right|250px|بيل جي ايڊيشن موجب هندستان ۽ تاتارستان ۾ فاشيان جو سفري رستو{{sfn|Beal|1884}}]]

{{blockquote|
فاشيان بابت سندس پنهنجي سفرنامي کان سواءِ ڪا گهڻي اهم معلومات موجود ناهي. مون سندس باري ۾ 519ع ۾ ترتيب ڏنل ''[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون]]'' ۽ ان کان پوءِ [[منگ خاندان]] جي ٽئين شهنشاهه (1403–1424ع) جي دور ۾ لکيل ''عجيب ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون'' پڙهيون آهن، پر انهن مان لڳ ڀڳ سموري معلومات اڳئين ڪتاب تان ورتل آهي، ۽ جيڪا ٿوري گهڻي معتبر معلوم ٿئي ٿي، سا مختصر لفظن ۾ بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿي.

انهن ڪتابن موجب سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو، ۽ هو پِنگ-يانگ جي وو-يانگ جو رهواسي هو، جيڪو اڄ به [[شانشي]] صوبي جو هڪ وڏو علائقو آهي. هن کان ٽي وڏا ڀائر هئا، پر اهي سڀ پنهنجا پهريان ڏند نڪرڻ کان اڳ ئي فوت ٿي ويا. ان کان پوءِ سندس پيءُ کيس ٻڌ ڌرم جي خدمت لاءِ وقف ڪيو ۽ [[شرامڻير]] بڻائي ڇڏيو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه وقت تائين کيس گهر ۾ ئي رکيو ويو. ننڍپڻ ۾ هو سخت بيمار ٿي پيو، تنهن ڪري سندس پيءُ کيس هڪ [[وهار]] ۾ موڪليو، جتي هو جلد صحتياب ٿي ويو ۽ پوءِ والدين وٽ واپس وڃڻ کان انڪار ڪري ڇڏيائين.

جڏهن هو ڏهن سالن جو ٿيو، تڏهن سندس پيءُ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس چاچي، جيڪو سندس ماءُ جي اڪيلي زندگيءَ تي افسوس ڪندو هو، کيس صلاح ڏني ته وهار واري زندگي ڇڏي پنهنجي ماءُ وٽ موٽي اچي. پر هن جواب ڏنو: ”مون پنهنجي پيءُ جي خواهش تي گهر نه ڇڏيو، پر ان ڪري جو دنيا جي غبار ۽ عام رواجن کان پري رهڻ ٿي چاهيم. انهيءَ سبب مون ڀڪشو ٿيڻ پسند ڪيو.“ چاچي سندس جواب کي ساراهيو ۽ وڌيڪ زور ڀرڻ ڇڏي ڏنو. جڏهن سندس ماءُ به وفات ڪئي، تڏهن سندس سٺي طبيعت ۽ ماءُ سان محبت ظاهر ٿي؛ پر تدفين کان پوءِ هو ٻيهر وهار موٽي آيو.

هڪ ڀيري هو ٻين ڪيترن ئي نوآموز ڀڪشن سان گڏ ڌان جي فصل جي لاباري ۾ مصروف هو، ته بکيا چور اناج ڦرڻ لاءِ اچي پهتا. ٻيا سڀ شرامڻير ڀڄي ويا، پر فاشيان پنهنجي جاءِ تي بيٺو رهيو ۽ چورن کي چيائين: ”جيڪڏهن اوهان کي اناج گهرجي ته جيترو وڻيوَ اوترو کڻي وڃو، پر ياد رکو، توهان جي اڳوڻي سخاوت جي کوٽ ئي اوهان کي هن محتاجيءَ تائين پهچايو آهي، ۽ هاڻي وري اوهان ٻين کي ڦرڻ چاهيو ٿا. مون کي ڊپ آهي ته ايندڙ جنمن ۾ اوهان جي غربت ۽ ڏک اڃا به وڌندا. مون کي اڳواٽ ئي اوهان تي افسوس آهي.“ ائين چئي هو پنهنجي ساٿين سان گڏ وهار موٽي ويو، جڏهن ته چور اناج ڇڏي هليا ويا. وهار جا ڪيترائي سؤ ڀڪشو سندس همت ۽ اخلاق کان ايترا متاثر ٿيا، جو سندس عزت ڪرڻ لڳا.

جڏهن هن پنهنجي ابتدائي مذهبي تربيت مڪمل ڪئي ۽ مڪمل ڀڪشو بڻيو، تڏهن سندس همت، ذهانت ۽ نظم و ضبط سڀني لاءِ نمايان ٿي ويا. ٿوري ئي عرصي کان پوءِ هن [[ونيه پٽڪ]] جا مڪمل متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ هندستان جو سفر شروع ڪيو. ان کان پوءِ سندس سفرنامو هندستان جي سفر ۽ سمنڊ رستي چين واپسيءَ جو بيان آهي، جيڪو سندس پنهنجي احوال مان ورتل آهي، جنهن ۾ [[ڳجھ واري چوٽي]] (ولچر پیڪ) وٽ [[راجگريهه]] جي زيارت دوران پيش آيل ڪجهه غيرمعمولي واقعن جو به ذڪر شامل ڪيو ويو آهي.

آخر ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي ته چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هو گاديءَ واري شهر (ظاهر آهي [[نانجنگ]]) ۾ رهيو، جتي هن ڀارتي ڀڪشو [[ٻڌڀدرا (مترجم)|ٻڌڀدرا]] سان گڏجي هندستان مان آندل ڪيترن ئي متنن جا ترجما ڪيا. ان کان اڳ جو هو پنهنجو سڄو ارادو پورو ڪري سگهي، هو [[جنگجو]] (هاڻوڪو [[هوبي]]) منتقل ٿي ويو، جتي ''سن'' نالي وهار ۾ اٺاسي ورهين جي عمر ۾ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس وفات تي سڀني واقف ماڻهن گهرو ڏک ظاهر ڪيو. اهو به ٻڌايو ويو آهي ته مختلف ملڪن جي سفرن بابت سندس هڪ ٻيو وڌيڪ مفصل ڪتاب پڻ موجود هو.

اسان جي هن ليکڪ بابت، سندس پنهنجي بيان کان سواءِ، ايتري ئي معلومات ملي ٿي. ''فاشيان'' سندس مذهبي نالو هو، جنهن جي معنيٰ آهي ”ڌرم ۾ درخشنده“ يا ”ڌرم جو نامور استاد“. سندس نالي کان اڳ ايندڙ ''شي''، [[گوتم ٻڌ|شاڪيامني ٻڌ]] جي نالي جو مخفف آهي، ۽ ان کي ٻڌ ڀڪشو هجڻ جي علامت سمجهيو ويندو آهي. ڪڏهن کيس اوڀرئين [[جن خاندان (265–420)|جن خاندان]] (317–419ع) سان لاڳاپيل ڄاڻايو ويو آهي، ته ڪڏهن [[ليو سونگ خاندان|ليو سونگ خاندان]] (420–478ع) سان. جيڪڏهن هن ويهن سالن جي عمر ۾ مڪمل ڀڪشو ٿيڻ کان پوءِ پنجويهن ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان جو سفر ڪيو هجي، ته سندس ڊگهي زندگي تقريباً انهن ٻنهي خاندانن جي دورن ۾ برابر ورهائجي ٿي.{{sfn|Legge|1886}}
}}

== تصنيفون ==

فاشيان جو سڀ کان مشهور تصنيف سندس سفرنامو آهي، جيڪو انگريزيءَ ۾ سندس چيني نالي ''فوگووجي'' يا ''فوگو جي'' ({{zhi|t={{linktext|佛|國|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|国|记}}|p=Fóguójì}}) سان گڏ مختلف ترجمن جي نالن سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، جن ۾ ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال''، ''ٻڌ ڌرمي بادشاهتن جو احوال'' (''Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms'')،{{sfn|Giles|1877}}{{sfn|Legge|1886}} ''ٻڌ ملڪن جا احوال'' (''Buddhist Country Records''){{sfn|Beal|1884}} وغيره شامل آهن. هي ڪتاب ٻين نالن سان پڻ مشهور آهي، جهڙوڪ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جا سفر|t={{linktext|法顯|行|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|行|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎn Xíngzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي سوانح|t={{linktext|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎnzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون|نامور ڀڪشو فاشيان جون يادگيريون]]|t={{linktext|高|僧|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|高|僧|法显|传}}|p=Gāosēng Fǎxiǎn Zhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان ڏانهن ٻڌ ڌرمي ياترا|t={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|记}}|p=Fóyóu Tiānzhú Jì}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي هندستاني سفر جي رپورٽ|t={{linktext|歷游|天竺|記傳}}|s={{linktext|历游|天竺|记传}}|p=Lìyóu Tiānzhú Jìzhuàn}} ۽ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان بابت|t={{linktext|天竺國記}}|s={{linktext|天竺|国|记}}|p=Tiānzhúguó Jì}}.

فاشيان جون يادگيريون انهن علائقن، خاص طور تي [[هندستان]]، جي سماج ۽ ثقافت بابت هڪ آزاد ۽ اهم تاريخي ماخذ آهن، جن جو هن دورو ڪيو. سنسڪرت مان گڏ ڪيل متنن جا سندس چيني ترجما ٻڌ ڌرم جي روايتن، تاريخي شخصيتن ۽ قديم متنن جي تاريخ طئي ڪرڻ لاءِ اهم وسيلو آهن. اهي ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، قلمي نسخن، واقعن ۽ نظرين جي {{lang|la|terminus ante quem}} (ممڪن آخري تاريخ) مقرر ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ مددگار ثابت ٿين ٿا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان لکي ٿو ته وچ ايشيا جا شهر، جهڙوڪ [[ختن]]، ٻڌ ڌرمي مرڪز هئا، جتي ڀڪشو هندستاني ٻولين ۾ لکيل صحيفا پڙهندا هئا ۽ مقامي ماڻهو انهن جو وڏو احترام ڪندا هئا. هن [[ٽيڪسيلا]] (هاڻوڪو پاڪستان) ۾ هڪ خوشحال ٻڌ ڌرمي برادريءَ جو پڻ ذڪر ڪيو آهي، جيڪا گهڻي ڀاڱي غير ٻڌ ڌرمي آباديءَ جي وچ ۾ آباد هئي. هو هندستان ۽ [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻڌ جي عزت ۾ بادشاهن جي سرپرستيءَ هيٺ ٿيندڙ شاندار مذهبي رسمن ۽ عوامي پوڄائن جو به احوال ڏئي ٿو.

فاشيان [[پاٽلي پتر]]، [[مٿرا]] ۽ [[ڪنوج]] جهڙن شهرن بابت پڻ لکيو آهي. هن جو بيان آهي ته [[مدھيه ديش]] جا رهواسي کاڌ خوراڪ ۽ لباس جي لحاظ کان چينين سان مشابهت رکن ٿا. هن پاٽلي پتر کي هڪ خوشحال ۽ آباد شهر قرار ڏنو آهي.{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}} فاشيان 409ع ڌاري هندستان جي اوڀرئين سامونڊي بندرگاهه [[تمرلپتي]] مان روانو ٿيو، پر سندس ڪجهه چيني ياتري ساٿي، جيڪي ساڻس گڏ آيا هئا، هندستان ۾ ئي رهجي ويا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

; هندستان بابت تاثرات

{{Blockquote|هن ملڪ [[مگڌ]] جا شهر ۽ ڳوٺ وچئين ملڪ ([[مٿرا]] کان ڏکڻ تائين) جي سڀني علائقن کان وڏا آهن. هتان جا ماڻهو مالدار ۽ خوشحال آهن ۽ هڪ ٻئي کان نيڪي ۽ انصاف ۾ اڳتي وڌڻ جي ڪوشش ڪندا آهن. هر سال ٻئي مهيني جي اٺين ڏينهن تي هو مجسمن جي جلوس جو اهتمام ڪندا آهن. هو چار ڦيٿن واري هڪ وڏي گاڏي تي بانس سان چار ماڙن جيتري اوچي بناوت تيار ڪندا آهن. ان جي چوڌاري اڇو، ريشم جهڙو ڪپڙو ويڙهي، ان کي مختلف رنگن سان سينگاريو ويندو آهي. پوءِ ديوتائن جون سون، چاندي ۽ لاجورد سان سينگاريل مورتيون رکبيون آهن، جن جي مٿان ريشمي جهنڊا ۽ ڇٽون هونديون آهن. چئني پاسن تي خانا هوندا آهن، جن مان هر هڪ ۾ هڪ ٻڌ ويٺل هوندو آهي ۽ ڀرسان هڪ بوديستو بيٺل هوندو آهي. اهڙيون ويهه يا ان کان وڌيڪ گاڏيون هونديون آهن، سڀئي شاندار، پر هڪ ٻئي کان مختلف. ان ڏينهن ڀڪشو ۽ عام ماڻهو گڏ ٿيندا آهن، ڳائڻا ۽ ماهر سازندا موسيقي پيش ڪندا آهن، گلن ۽ لوبان سان عقيدت ظاهر ڪندا آهن. برهمڻ ٻڌن کي شهر ۾ اچڻ جي دعوت ڏيندا آهن، جتي هو ٻه راتيون ترسندا آهن. رات ڀر ڏيئا روشن رکيا ويندا آهن، موسيقي وڄندي آهي ۽ نذرانو پيش ڪيو ويندو آهي. ٻين بادشاهتن ۾ پڻ اهوئي رواج آهي. وايشيه خاندانن جا سربراهه شهرن ۾ خيراتي گهر ۽ دواخانا قائم ڪندا آهن، جتي غريب، مسڪين، يتيم، بيوه، بي اولاد، معذور ۽ بيمار ماڻهو ايندا آهن. انهن کي هر قسم جي مدد، مناسب کاڌو، دوا ۽ علاج مهيا ڪيو ويندو آهي، ۽ صحتياب ٿيڻ کان پوءِ هو پاڻ هليا ويندا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}}}}

; جاوا کان واپسيءَ دوران سامونڊي ڏکيائيون

{{Blockquote|ان وقت آسمان لڳاتار اونداهو ۽ ابر آلود رهيو، ۽ جهاز هلائيندڙ پاڻ ۾ اختلاف ڪرڻ لڳا، جنهن سبب رستو وڃائي ويٺا. جاوا ڇڏڻ کان پوءِ ستر ڏينهن کان وڌيڪ گذري ويا، ۽ سندن خوراڪ ۽ مٺو پاڻي لڳ ڀڳ ختم ٿي ويو. هو سمنڊ جي لوڻياٺي پاڻيءَ ۾ کاڌو پچائيندا هئا، جڏهن ته مٺو پاڻي وڏي احتياط سان ورهايو ويندو هو ۽ هر ماڻهوءَ کي فقط ٻه پائو ملندو هو. نيٺ اهو به ختم ٿيڻ لڳو، تڏهن واپارين صلاح ڪئي: ”عام حالتن ۾ ته اسان کي هن وقت تائين [[گوانگجو]] پهچي وڃڻ گهرجي ها، پر ڪيترائي ڏينهن وڌيڪ گذري چڪا آهن؛ لڳي ٿو اسان غلط رستو اختيار ڪيو آهي.“ پوءِ جهاز کي اتر اولهه طرف موڙيو ويو ۽ خشڪيءَ جي ڳولا ڪئي وئي. ٻارهن ڏينهن ۽ راتين جي سفر کان پوءِ هو [[لائو جبل]] جي ڏکڻ واري سامونڊي ڪناري تي، چانگ گوانگ ضلعي جي حدن ۾ پهتا، جتي کين تازو پاڻي ۽ ڀاڄيون مليون. ڪيترين ئي تڪليفن ۽ خطرن مان گذرڻ ۽ ڊگهي عرصي تائين خوف ۾ رهڻ کان پوءِ، جڏهن هنن اهي سڃاتل ڀاڄيون ڏٺيون ته کين يقين ٿي ويو ته هو هان (چين) جي سرزمين تي پهچي ويا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 40}}}}

[[جان-پيئر ابيل-ريمسا|ريمسا]] جي هن ڪتاب جي ترجمي{{sfn|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} يورپي علمي حلقن ۾ وڏي دلچسپي پيدا ڪئي، پر ڪيترن عالمن کي اها ڳالهه ڏکي لڳي ته فاشيان جن سنسڪرت لفظن کي [[وچين چيني]] [[چيني اکر]]ن ۾ لکي نقل ڪيو هو، انهن جي صحيح سڃاڻپ ۽ تشريح ڪيئن ڪجي.{{sfn|Walravens|2014|p=272}}

=== ترجما ===

==== فرانسيسي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor-first=Jean-Pierre |editor-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |ref={{SfnRef|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} |date=1836 |publisher=[[Royal Printing Office (France)|Royal Printing Office]] |location=Paris |language=fr |url=https://archive.org/details/fokoukiourelatio00fahs/page/n3/mode/2up |title=''佛國記'' Foé Koué Ki, ou, Relations des Royaumes Bouddhiques: Voyage dans la Tartarie, dans l'Afghanistan, et dans l'Inde Exécuté à la Fin du IVe Siècle par Chy̆ Fă Hian |trans-title=The Foguoji ''(佛國記)'', or, Relations of the Buddhist Kingdoms: The Voyage through Tartary, Afghanistan, and India Carried Out at the End of the 4th Century by Shi Faxian }}.

==== انگريزي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Laidlay |editor-first=John Watson |editor-link=John Watson Laidlay |ref={{harvid|Laidlay &amp; al.|1848}} |editor4-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor4-first=Jean-Pierre |editor4-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |date=1848 |url=https://archive.org/details/pilgrimagefahia00rmgoog/page/n6/mode/2up |title=The Pilgrimage of Fa Hian from the French Edition of the Foe Koue Ki of MM. Remusat, Klaproth, and Landresse with Additional Notes and Illustrations |location=Calcutta |publisher=Baptist Mission Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Samuel |editor-last=Beal |editor-link=Samuel Beal |date=1869 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n1/mode/2up |title=Travels of Fah-Hian and Sung-Yun, Buddhist Pilgrims, from China to India (400 A.D. and 518 A.D.) |ref={{harvid|Beal|1869}} |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author2=Huisheng |author2-link=Huisheng (monk) |contribution=Records of Buddhist Countries by Chi Fah Hian of the Sung Dynasty |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n71/mode/2up |pages=1–174 }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert Allen |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |editor-last=Giles |date=1877 |title=''佛國記'' Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |publisher=Kelly &amp; Walsh |location=Shanghai |ref={{harvid|Giles|1877}} |url=https://archive.org/details/in.gov.ignca.19454/page/n3/mode/2up }}; revised and republished as {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert A. |editor-last=Giles |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |display-editors=0 |ref={{harvid|Giles|1923}} |date=1923 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.pahar.2228/page/n1/mode/2up |title=The Travels of Fa-hsien (399{{ndash}}414 A.D.), or, Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |location=[[Cambridge, England|Cambridge]] |publisher=Cambridge University Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Xuanzang |author-link=Xuanzang |author2=Faxian |author2-link=Faxian |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author4=Huisheng |author4-link=Huisheng (monk) |display-authors=0 |date=1884 |ref={{harvid|Beal|1884}} |editor-last=Beal |editor-first=Samuel |editor-link=Samuel Beal |title=Si-Yu-Ki: Buddhist Records of the Western World by Hiuen Tsiang |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |contribution=Travels of Fa-hian or ''Fo-kwŏ-ki'', Buddhist-Country-Records |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n47/mode/2up |pages=xxiii–lxxiii |volume=I |url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n25/mode/2up |series=Trübner's Oriental Series }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=James |editor-last=Legge |date=1886 |editor-link=James Legge |title=A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms, Being an Account by the Chinese Monk Fâ-hien of His Travels in India and Ceylon (A.D. 399{{ndash}}414) in Search of the Buddhist Books of Discipline |location=Oxford |publisher=Clarendon Press |url=https://www.gutenberg.org/files/2124/2124-h/2124-h.htm |ref={{harvid|Legge|1886}} }}.

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>nergm1wexehk8qfgcghhm3kc3bkxnxb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394169</id>
      <parentid>394168</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:18:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394169</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36488" sha1="68000abotgzub8nxc048v9szldde5hg" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

هيٺ ڏنل اقتباس [[جيمس ليگ]] پاران اوڻيهين صديءَ ۾ فاشيان جي ڪتاب جي انگريزي ترجمي جي مهاڳ مان ورتل آهي. جيتوڻيڪ ليگ جون ڪجهه راءِون، جهڙوڪ فاشيان جو 25 ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان وڃڻ، بعد جي تحقيق سان رد ٿي چڪيون آهن، پر سندس مهاڳ ۾ فاشيان بابت ڪجهه ڪارائتيون سوانحي ڄاڻون موجود آهن.

[[File:Fa Hsien at the ruins of Asoka's palace.jpg|thumb|right|250px|اشوڪ جي محل جي کنڊرن وٽ فاشيان]]

[[File:BEAL(1869) FAH-HIAN'S ROUTE THROUGH INDIA AND TARTARY.jpg|thumb|right|250px|بيل جي ايڊيشن موجب هندستان ۽ تاتارستان ۾ فاشيان جو سفري رستو{{sfn|Beal|1884}}]]

{{blockquote|
فاشيان بابت سندس پنهنجي سفرنامي کان سواءِ ڪا گهڻي اهم معلومات موجود ناهي. مون سندس باري ۾ 519ع ۾ ترتيب ڏنل ''[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون]]'' ۽ ان کان پوءِ [[منگ خاندان]] جي ٽئين شهنشاهه (1403–1424ع) جي دور ۾ لکيل ''عجيب ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون'' پڙهيون آهن، پر انهن مان لڳ ڀڳ سموري معلومات اڳئين ڪتاب تان ورتل آهي، ۽ جيڪا ٿوري گهڻي معتبر معلوم ٿئي ٿي، سا مختصر لفظن ۾ بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿي.

انهن ڪتابن موجب سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو، ۽ هو پِنگ-يانگ جي وو-يانگ جو رهواسي هو، جيڪو اڄ به [[شانشي]] صوبي جو هڪ وڏو علائقو آهي. هن کان ٽي وڏا ڀائر هئا، پر اهي سڀ پنهنجا پهريان ڏند نڪرڻ کان اڳ ئي فوت ٿي ويا. ان کان پوءِ سندس پيءُ کيس ٻڌ ڌرم جي خدمت لاءِ وقف ڪيو ۽ [[شرامڻير]] بڻائي ڇڏيو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه وقت تائين کيس گهر ۾ ئي رکيو ويو. ننڍپڻ ۾ هو سخت بيمار ٿي پيو، تنهن ڪري سندس پيءُ کيس هڪ [[وهار]] ۾ موڪليو، جتي هو جلد صحتياب ٿي ويو ۽ پوءِ والدين وٽ واپس وڃڻ کان انڪار ڪري ڇڏيائين.

جڏهن هو ڏهن سالن جو ٿيو، تڏهن سندس پيءُ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس چاچي، جيڪو سندس ماءُ جي اڪيلي زندگيءَ تي افسوس ڪندو هو، کيس صلاح ڏني ته وهار واري زندگي ڇڏي پنهنجي ماءُ وٽ موٽي اچي. پر هن جواب ڏنو: ”مون پنهنجي پيءُ جي خواهش تي گهر نه ڇڏيو، پر ان ڪري جو دنيا جي غبار ۽ عام رواجن کان پري رهڻ ٿي چاهيم. انهيءَ سبب مون ڀڪشو ٿيڻ پسند ڪيو.“ چاچي سندس جواب کي ساراهيو ۽ وڌيڪ زور ڀرڻ ڇڏي ڏنو. جڏهن سندس ماءُ به وفات ڪئي، تڏهن سندس سٺي طبيعت ۽ ماءُ سان محبت ظاهر ٿي؛ پر تدفين کان پوءِ هو ٻيهر وهار موٽي آيو.

هڪ ڀيري هو ٻين ڪيترن ئي نوآموز ڀڪشن سان گڏ ڌان جي فصل جي لاباري ۾ مصروف هو، ته بکيا چور اناج ڦرڻ لاءِ اچي پهتا. ٻيا سڀ شرامڻير ڀڄي ويا، پر فاشيان پنهنجي جاءِ تي بيٺو رهيو ۽ چورن کي چيائين: ”جيڪڏهن اوهان کي اناج گهرجي ته جيترو وڻيوَ اوترو کڻي وڃو، پر ياد رکو، توهان جي اڳوڻي سخاوت جي کوٽ ئي اوهان کي هن محتاجيءَ تائين پهچايو آهي، ۽ هاڻي وري اوهان ٻين کي ڦرڻ چاهيو ٿا. مون کي ڊپ آهي ته ايندڙ جنمن ۾ اوهان جي غربت ۽ ڏک اڃا به وڌندا. مون کي اڳواٽ ئي اوهان تي افسوس آهي.“ ائين چئي هو پنهنجي ساٿين سان گڏ وهار موٽي ويو، جڏهن ته چور اناج ڇڏي هليا ويا. وهار جا ڪيترائي سؤ ڀڪشو سندس همت ۽ اخلاق کان ايترا متاثر ٿيا، جو سندس عزت ڪرڻ لڳا.

جڏهن هن پنهنجي ابتدائي مذهبي تربيت مڪمل ڪئي ۽ مڪمل ڀڪشو بڻيو، تڏهن سندس همت، ذهانت ۽ نظم و ضبط سڀني لاءِ نمايان ٿي ويا. ٿوري ئي عرصي کان پوءِ هن [[ونيه پٽڪ]] جا مڪمل متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ هندستان جو سفر شروع ڪيو. ان کان پوءِ سندس سفرنامو هندستان جي سفر ۽ سمنڊ رستي چين واپسيءَ جو بيان آهي، جيڪو سندس پنهنجي احوال مان ورتل آهي، جنهن ۾ [[ڳجھ واري چوٽي]] (ولچر پیڪ) وٽ [[راجگريهه]] جي زيارت دوران پيش آيل ڪجهه غيرمعمولي واقعن جو به ذڪر شامل ڪيو ويو آهي.

آخر ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي ته چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هو گاديءَ واري شهر (ظاهر آهي [[نانجنگ]]) ۾ رهيو، جتي هن ڀارتي ڀڪشو [[ٻڌڀدرا (مترجم)|ٻڌڀدرا]] سان گڏجي هندستان مان آندل ڪيترن ئي متنن جا ترجما ڪيا. ان کان اڳ جو هو پنهنجو سڄو ارادو پورو ڪري سگهي، هو [[جنگجو]] (هاڻوڪو [[هوبي]]) منتقل ٿي ويو، جتي ''سن'' نالي وهار ۾ اٺاسي ورهين جي عمر ۾ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس وفات تي سڀني واقف ماڻهن گهرو ڏک ظاهر ڪيو. اهو به ٻڌايو ويو آهي ته مختلف ملڪن جي سفرن بابت سندس هڪ ٻيو وڌيڪ مفصل ڪتاب پڻ موجود هو.

اسان جي هن ليکڪ بابت، سندس پنهنجي بيان کان سواءِ، ايتري ئي معلومات ملي ٿي. ''فاشيان'' سندس مذهبي نالو هو، جنهن جي معنيٰ آهي ”ڌرم ۾ درخشنده“ يا ”ڌرم جو نامور استاد“. سندس نالي کان اڳ ايندڙ ''شي''، [[گوتم ٻڌ|شاڪيامني ٻڌ]] جي نالي جو مخفف آهي، ۽ ان کي ٻڌ ڀڪشو هجڻ جي علامت سمجهيو ويندو آهي. ڪڏهن کيس اوڀرئين [[جن خاندان (265–420)|جن خاندان]] (317–419ع) سان لاڳاپيل ڄاڻايو ويو آهي، ته ڪڏهن [[ليو سونگ خاندان|ليو سونگ خاندان]] (420–478ع) سان. جيڪڏهن هن ويهن سالن جي عمر ۾ مڪمل ڀڪشو ٿيڻ کان پوءِ پنجويهن ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان جو سفر ڪيو هجي، ته سندس ڊگهي زندگي تقريباً انهن ٻنهي خاندانن جي دورن ۾ برابر ورهائجي ٿي.{{sfn|Legge|1886}}
}}

== تصنيفون ==

فاشيان جو سڀ کان مشهور تصنيف سندس سفرنامو آهي، جيڪو انگريزيءَ ۾ سندس چيني نالي ''فوگووجي'' يا ''فوگو جي'' ({{zhi|t={{linktext|佛|國|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|国|记}}|p=Fóguójì}}) سان گڏ مختلف ترجمن جي نالن سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، جن ۾ ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال''، ''ٻڌ ڌرمي بادشاهتن جو احوال'' (''Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms'')،{{sfn|Giles|1877}}{{sfn|Legge|1886}} ''ٻڌ ملڪن جا احوال'' (''Buddhist Country Records''){{sfn|Beal|1884}} وغيره شامل آهن. هي ڪتاب ٻين نالن سان پڻ مشهور آهي، جهڙوڪ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جا سفر|t={{linktext|法顯|行|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|行|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎn Xíngzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي سوانح|t={{linktext|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎnzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون|نامور ڀڪشو فاشيان جون يادگيريون]]|t={{linktext|高|僧|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|高|僧|法显|传}}|p=Gāosēng Fǎxiǎn Zhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان ڏانهن ٻڌ ڌرمي ياترا|t={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|记}}|p=Fóyóu Tiānzhú Jì}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي هندستاني سفر جي رپورٽ|t={{linktext|歷游|天竺|記傳}}|s={{linktext|历游|天竺|记传}}|p=Lìyóu Tiānzhú Jìzhuàn}} ۽ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان بابت|t={{linktext|天竺國記}}|s={{linktext|天竺|国|记}}|p=Tiānzhúguó Jì}}.

فاشيان جون يادگيريون انهن علائقن، خاص طور تي [[هندستان]]، جي سماج ۽ ثقافت بابت هڪ آزاد ۽ اهم تاريخي ماخذ آهن، جن جو هن دورو ڪيو. سنسڪرت مان گڏ ڪيل متنن جا سندس چيني ترجما ٻڌ ڌرم جي روايتن، تاريخي شخصيتن ۽ قديم متنن جي تاريخ طئي ڪرڻ لاءِ اهم وسيلو آهن. اهي ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، قلمي نسخن، واقعن ۽ نظرين جي {{lang|la|terminus ante quem}} (ممڪن آخري تاريخ) مقرر ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ مددگار ثابت ٿين ٿا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان لکي ٿو ته وچ ايشيا جا شهر، جهڙوڪ [[ختن]]، ٻڌ ڌرمي مرڪز هئا، جتي ڀڪشو هندستاني ٻولين ۾ لکيل صحيفا پڙهندا هئا ۽ مقامي ماڻهو انهن جو وڏو احترام ڪندا هئا. هن [[ٽيڪسيلا]] (هاڻوڪو پاڪستان) ۾ هڪ خوشحال ٻڌ ڌرمي برادريءَ جو پڻ ذڪر ڪيو آهي، جيڪا گهڻي ڀاڱي غير ٻڌ ڌرمي آباديءَ جي وچ ۾ آباد هئي. هو هندستان ۽ [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻڌ جي عزت ۾ بادشاهن جي سرپرستيءَ هيٺ ٿيندڙ شاندار مذهبي رسمن ۽ عوامي پوڄائن جو به احوال ڏئي ٿو.

فاشيان [[پاٽلي پتر]]، [[مٿرا]] ۽ [[ڪنوج]] جهڙن شهرن بابت پڻ لکيو آهي. هن جو بيان آهي ته [[مدھيه ديش]] جا رهواسي کاڌ خوراڪ ۽ لباس جي لحاظ کان چينين سان مشابهت رکن ٿا. هن پاٽلي پتر کي هڪ خوشحال ۽ آباد شهر قرار ڏنو آهي.{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}} فاشيان 409ع ڌاري هندستان جي اوڀرئين سامونڊي بندرگاهه [[تمرلپتي]] مان روانو ٿيو، پر سندس ڪجهه چيني ياتري ساٿي، جيڪي ساڻس گڏ آيا هئا، هندستان ۾ ئي رهجي ويا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

; هندستان بابت تاثرات

{{Blockquote|هن ملڪ [[مگڌ]] جا شهر ۽ ڳوٺ وچئين ملڪ ([[مٿرا]] کان ڏکڻ تائين) جي سڀني علائقن کان وڏا آهن. هتان جا ماڻهو مالدار ۽ خوشحال آهن ۽ هڪ ٻئي کان نيڪي ۽ انصاف ۾ اڳتي وڌڻ جي ڪوشش ڪندا آهن. هر سال ٻئي مهيني جي اٺين ڏينهن تي هو مجسمن جي جلوس جو اهتمام ڪندا آهن. هو چار ڦيٿن واري هڪ وڏي گاڏي تي بانس سان چار ماڙن جيتري اوچي بناوت تيار ڪندا آهن. ان جي چوڌاري اڇو، ريشم جهڙو ڪپڙو ويڙهي، ان کي مختلف رنگن سان سينگاريو ويندو آهي. پوءِ ديوتائن جون سون، چاندي ۽ لاجورد سان سينگاريل مورتيون رکبيون آهن، جن جي مٿان ريشمي جهنڊا ۽ ڇٽون هونديون آهن. چئني پاسن تي خانا هوندا آهن، جن مان هر هڪ ۾ هڪ ٻڌ ويٺل هوندو آهي ۽ ڀرسان هڪ بوديستو بيٺل هوندو آهي. اهڙيون ويهه يا ان کان وڌيڪ گاڏيون هونديون آهن، سڀئي شاندار، پر هڪ ٻئي کان مختلف. ان ڏينهن ڀڪشو ۽ عام ماڻهو گڏ ٿيندا آهن، ڳائڻا ۽ ماهر سازندا موسيقي پيش ڪندا آهن، گلن ۽ لوبان سان عقيدت ظاهر ڪندا آهن. برهمڻ ٻڌن کي شهر ۾ اچڻ جي دعوت ڏيندا آهن، جتي هو ٻه راتيون ترسندا آهن. رات ڀر ڏيئا روشن رکيا ويندا آهن، موسيقي وڄندي آهي ۽ نذرانو پيش ڪيو ويندو آهي. ٻين بادشاهتن ۾ پڻ اهوئي رواج آهي. وايشيه خاندانن جا سربراهه شهرن ۾ خيراتي گهر ۽ دواخانا قائم ڪندا آهن، جتي غريب، مسڪين، يتيم، بيوه، بي اولاد، معذور ۽ بيمار ماڻهو ايندا آهن. انهن کي هر قسم جي مدد، مناسب کاڌو، دوا ۽ علاج مهيا ڪيو ويندو آهي، ۽ صحتياب ٿيڻ کان پوءِ هو پاڻ هليا ويندا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}}}}

; جاوا کان واپسيءَ دوران سامونڊي ڏکيائيون

{{Blockquote|ان وقت آسمان لڳاتار اونداهو ۽ ابر آلود رهيو، ۽ جهاز هلائيندڙ پاڻ ۾ اختلاف ڪرڻ لڳا، جنهن سبب رستو وڃائي ويٺا. جاوا ڇڏڻ کان پوءِ ستر ڏينهن کان وڌيڪ گذري ويا، ۽ سندن خوراڪ ۽ مٺو پاڻي لڳ ڀڳ ختم ٿي ويو. هو سمنڊ جي لوڻياٺي پاڻيءَ ۾ کاڌو پچائيندا هئا، جڏهن ته مٺو پاڻي وڏي احتياط سان ورهايو ويندو هو ۽ هر ماڻهوءَ کي فقط ٻه پائو ملندو هو. نيٺ اهو به ختم ٿيڻ لڳو، تڏهن واپارين صلاح ڪئي: ”عام حالتن ۾ ته اسان کي هن وقت تائين [[گوانگجو]] پهچي وڃڻ گهرجي ها، پر ڪيترائي ڏينهن وڌيڪ گذري چڪا آهن؛ لڳي ٿو اسان غلط رستو اختيار ڪيو آهي.“ پوءِ جهاز کي اتر اولهه طرف موڙيو ويو ۽ خشڪيءَ جي ڳولا ڪئي وئي. ٻارهن ڏينهن ۽ راتين جي سفر کان پوءِ هو [[لائو جبل]] جي ڏکڻ واري سامونڊي ڪناري تي، چانگ گوانگ ضلعي جي حدن ۾ پهتا، جتي کين تازو پاڻي ۽ ڀاڄيون مليون. ڪيترين ئي تڪليفن ۽ خطرن مان گذرڻ ۽ ڊگهي عرصي تائين خوف ۾ رهڻ کان پوءِ، جڏهن هنن اهي سڃاتل ڀاڄيون ڏٺيون ته کين يقين ٿي ويو ته هو هان (چين) جي سرزمين تي پهچي ويا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 40}}}}

[[جان-پيئر ابيل-ريمسا|ريمسا]] جي هن ڪتاب جي ترجمي{{sfn|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} يورپي علمي حلقن ۾ وڏي دلچسپي پيدا ڪئي، پر ڪيترن عالمن کي اها ڳالهه ڏکي لڳي ته فاشيان جن سنسڪرت لفظن کي [[وچين چيني]] [[چيني اکر]]ن ۾ لکي نقل ڪيو هو، انهن جي صحيح سڃاڻپ ۽ تشريح ڪيئن ڪجي.{{sfn|Walravens|2014|p=272}}

=== ترجما ===

==== فرانسيسي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor-first=Jean-Pierre |editor-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |ref={{SfnRef|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} |date=1836 |publisher=[[Royal Printing Office (France)|Royal Printing Office]] |location=Paris |language=fr |url=https://archive.org/details/fokoukiourelatio00fahs/page/n3/mode/2up |title=''佛國記'' Foé Koué Ki, ou, Relations des Royaumes Bouddhiques: Voyage dans la Tartarie, dans l'Afghanistan, et dans l'Inde Exécuté à la Fin du IVe Siècle par Chy̆ Fă Hian |trans-title=The Foguoji ''(佛國記)'', or, Relations of the Buddhist Kingdoms: The Voyage through Tartary, Afghanistan, and India Carried Out at the End of the 4th Century by Shi Faxian }}.

==== انگريزي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Laidlay |editor-first=John Watson |editor-link=John Watson Laidlay |ref={{harvid|Laidlay &amp; al.|1848}} |editor4-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor4-first=Jean-Pierre |editor4-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |date=1848 |url=https://archive.org/details/pilgrimagefahia00rmgoog/page/n6/mode/2up |title=The Pilgrimage of Fa Hian from the French Edition of the Foe Koue Ki of MM. Remusat, Klaproth, and Landresse with Additional Notes and Illustrations |location=Calcutta |publisher=Baptist Mission Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Samuel |editor-last=Beal |editor-link=Samuel Beal |date=1869 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n1/mode/2up |title=Travels of Fah-Hian and Sung-Yun, Buddhist Pilgrims, from China to India (400 A.D. and 518 A.D.) |ref={{harvid|Beal|1869}} |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author2=Huisheng |author2-link=Huisheng (monk) |contribution=Records of Buddhist Countries by Chi Fah Hian of the Sung Dynasty |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n71/mode/2up |pages=1–174 }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert Allen |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |editor-last=Giles |date=1877 |title=''佛國記'' Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |publisher=Kelly &amp; Walsh |location=Shanghai |ref={{harvid|Giles|1877}} |url=https://archive.org/details/in.gov.ignca.19454/page/n3/mode/2up }}; revised and republished as {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert A. |editor-last=Giles |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |display-editors=0 |ref={{harvid|Giles|1923}} |date=1923 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.pahar.2228/page/n1/mode/2up |title=The Travels of Fa-hsien (399{{ndash}}414 A.D.), or, Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |location=[[Cambridge, England|Cambridge]] |publisher=Cambridge University Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Xuanzang |author-link=Xuanzang |author2=Faxian |author2-link=Faxian |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author4=Huisheng |author4-link=Huisheng (monk) |display-authors=0 |date=1884 |ref={{harvid|Beal|1884}} |editor-last=Beal |editor-first=Samuel |editor-link=Samuel Beal |title=Si-Yu-Ki: Buddhist Records of the Western World by Hiuen Tsiang |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |contribution=Travels of Fa-hian or ''Fo-kwŏ-ki'', Buddhist-Country-Records |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n47/mode/2up |pages=xxiii–lxxiii |volume=I |url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n25/mode/2up |series=Trübner's Oriental Series }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=James |editor-last=Legge |date=1886 |editor-link=James Legge |title=A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms, Being an Account by the Chinese Monk Fâ-hien of His Travels in India and Ceylon (A.D. 399{{ndash}}414) in Search of the Buddhist Books of Discipline |location=Oxford |publisher=Clarendon Press |url=https://www.gutenberg.org/files/2124/2124-h/2124-h.htm |ref={{harvid|Legge|1886}} }}.

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[فاهيان غار]]
* [[چيني ٻڌ مت]]
* [[ريشمي واٽ وسيلي ٻڌ مت جي پکيڙ]]
* [[شوان زانگ]]، سندس ''[[اولهائين علائقن جا احوال]]'' ۽ ان تي آڌاريل افسانوي تصنيف ''[[اولهه ڏانهن سفر]]''
* [[يي جِنگ (ڀڪشو)|يي جِنگ]] ۽ سندس ''[[ڏاکڻي سمنڊ کان موڪليل ٻڌ ڌرمي عملن جو احوال]]''
* [[سونگ يون (ڀڪشو)|سونگ يون]] ۽ [[هوئي شينگ (ڀڪشو)|هوئي شينگ]]، جن جي سفرن جا احوال ٻين ماخذن ۾ محفوظ آهن
* [[هيئيچو]] ۽ سندس ''[[وانگ اوچيونچڪگوڪ جيون]]''

== حوالا ==
=== حوالا ===
{{Reflist|30em}}

=== ڪتابيات ===
{{refbegin}}
* {{citation |last= |first= |contribution=Faxian |contribution-url=https://www.britannica.com/biography/Faxian |date=2019 |ref={{harvid|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} |title=Britannica |publisher= |location= }}.
* {{citation |last=Deeg |first=Max |title=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Asian History |chapter=Chinese Buddhist Travelers: Faxian, Xuanzang, and Yijing |publisher=Oxford University Press |location=Oxford |year=2019 |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780190277727.013.217 |isbn=978-0-19-027772-7 }}.
* {{citation |last=Hodge |first=Stephen |date=2009 |url=http://www.buddhismuskunde.uni-hamburg.de/fileadmin/pdf/publikationen/The_Textual_Transmisssion_of_the_MPNS.pdf |title=The Textual Transmission of the Mahayana Mahaparinirvana-Sutra |location=Hamburg |publisher=University of Hamburg |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130928081601/http://www.buddhismuskunde.uni-hamburg.de/fileadmin/pdf/publikationen/The_Textual_Transmisssion_of_the_MPNS.pdf |archive-date=2013-09-28 }}.
* {{citation |last=Jain |first=Sandhya |author2=Meenakshi Jain |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Jain &amp; al.|2011}} |date=2011 |title=The India They Saw: Foreign Accounts |location=New Delhi |publisher=Ocean Books }}.
* {{citation |last=Li |first=Rongxi |author-mask=Li Rongxi |author2=Albert A. Dalia |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Li &amp; al.|2002}} |date=2002 |url=http://www.bdk.or.jp/pdf/bdk/digitaldl/dBET_LivesGreatMonksNuns_2002.pdf |title=The Lives of Great Monks and Nuns |location=[[برڪلي، ڪيليفورنيا|برڪلي]] |publisher=Numata Center for Translation and Research |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150920131638/http://www.bdk.or.jp/pdf/bdk/digitaldl/dBET_LivesGreatMonksNuns_2002.pdf |archive-date=2015-09-20 }}.
* {{citation |last=Průšek |first=Jaroslav |author-link=Jaroslav Průšek |author2=Zbigniew Słupski |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Průšek &amp; al.|1978}} |title=Dictionary of Oriental Literatures: East Asia |location= |publisher=Charles Tuttle |date=1978 }}.
* {{citation |last=Sen |first=Tansen |date=2006 |contribution-url=http://www.fom.sg/tours/ChinesePilgrims.pdf |contribution=The Travel Records of Chinese Pilgrims Faxian, Xuanzang, and Yijing |title=[[Education About Asia]] |volume=11 |issue=3 |pages=24–33 |publisher= |location= |access-date=2014-07-13 |archive-date=2014-07-13 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140713172856/http://www.fom.sg/tours/ChinesePilgrims.pdf |url-status=bot: unknown }}.
* {{citation |last=Shi |first=Huijiao |author-mask=Shi Huijiao |author2=Yang Tianshu |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Shi &amp; al.|2022}} |date=2022 |editor-last=Ross |editor-first=Edward A. S. |display-editors=0 |title=The Biographies of Eminent Monks 高僧傳 |url=https://www.academia.edu/90233933 |location=Hong Kong |publisher=Centre of Buddhist Studies at the University of Hong Kong }}.
* {{citation |last=Walravens |first=Harmut |language=de |contribution=Stanislas Aignan Julien{{mdash}}Leben und Werk |trans-contribution=Stanislas Aignan Julien{{mdash}}Life and Work |title=Monumenta Serica |issue=1 |volume=62 |date=2014 |pages=261–333 |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |jstor=26768561 |location=Milton Park }}.
* {{citation |last=Weerawardane |first=Prasani |date=2009 |contribution-url=http://microsite.nl.sg/PDFs/BiblioAsia/BIBA_0502Jul09.pdf |contribution=Journey to the West: Dusty Roads, Stormy Seas and Transcendence |title=Biblioasia |volume=5 |issue=2 |pages=14–18 |publisher= |location= |access-date=2014-07-13 |archive-date=2014-07-13 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140713174328/http://microsite.nl.sg/PDFs/BiblioAsia/BIBA_0502Jul09.pdf |url-status=dead }}.
{{refend}}

== ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا ==
* {{Gutenberg author |id=824}}
* {{Internet Archive author}}
* [http://afe.easia.columbia.edu/special/travel_records.pdf فاهيان ۽ ٻيا چيني ياتري]، ڪولمبيا يونيورسٽي آرڪائيوز
* [http://21dzk.l.u-tokyo.ac.jp/SAT/T2085.html اصل چيني متن، تائيشو 2085]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20170206185521/http://dev.ddbc.edu.tw/han2e/tableFormatHtmls/T51n2085ARecordOfBuddhistKingdoms.html اصل چيني متن سان ليگ جو ترجمو، T 2085]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20080911144832/http://ebooks.adelaide.edu.au/f/fa-hien/f15l/index.html ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'']، [[ايڊيليڊ يونيورسٽي]]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20100726195545/http://ebooks.adelaide.edu.au/f/fa-hien/f15l/complete.html ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال (ويب آرڪائيو تي مڪمل HTML)'']، [[ايڊيليڊ يونيورسٽي]]

{{Buddhism topics}}
{{Chinese travellers}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Faxian}}
[[Category:چيني کوجنا ڪندڙ]]
[[Category:ٻڌ مت جا چيني عالم]]
[[Category:سنسڪرت–چيني مترجم]]
[[Category:جن خاندان (266–420) جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:ليو سونگ جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:اتر ۽ ڏکڻ خاندانن جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:ياترا جا احوال]]
[[Category:337ع ۾ ڄاول]]
[[Category:چيني سفرناما لکندڙ]]
[[Category:هندستان جي تاريخ نگاري]]
[[Category:ڏکڻ ايشيا جا کوجنا ڪندڙ]]
[[Category:422ع ۾ وفاتون]]
[[Category:بعد واري زائو جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:جن خاندان (266–420) جا مترجم]]
[[Category:ليو سونگ جا مترجم]]
[[Category:چانگزي جا ماڻهو]]
[[Category:شانشي جا ليکڪ]]
[[Category:بعد واري چِن جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:سورهين بادشاهتن جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:پنجين صديءَ جا سياح]]</text>
      <sha1>68000abotgzub8nxc048v9szldde5hg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394170</id>
      <parentid>394169</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:19:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394170</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36461" sha1="s032b1l23g6etwryll8doqsz1k3u30k" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

هيٺ ڏنل اقتباس [[جيمس ليگ]] پاران اوڻيهين صديءَ ۾ فاشيان جي ڪتاب جي انگريزي ترجمي جي مهاڳ مان ورتل آهي. جيتوڻيڪ ليگ جون ڪجهه راءِون، جهڙوڪ فاشيان جو 25 ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان وڃڻ، بعد جي تحقيق سان رد ٿي چڪيون آهن، پر سندس مهاڳ ۾ فاشيان بابت ڪجهه ڪارائتيون سوانحي ڄاڻون موجود آهن.

[[File:Fa Hsien at the ruins of Asoka's palace.jpg|thumb|right|250px|اشوڪ جي محل جي کنڊرن وٽ فاشيان]]

[[File:BEAL(1869) FAH-HIAN'S ROUTE THROUGH INDIA AND TARTARY.jpg|thumb|right|250px|بيل جي ايڊيشن موجب هندستان ۽ تاتارستان ۾ فاشيان جو سفري رستو{{sfn|Beal|1884}}]]

{{blockquote|
فاشيان بابت سندس پنهنجي سفرنامي کان سواءِ ڪا گهڻي اهم معلومات موجود ناهي. مون سندس باري ۾ 519ع ۾ ترتيب ڏنل ''[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون]]'' ۽ ان کان پوءِ [[منگ خاندان]] جي ٽئين شهنشاهه (1403–1424ع) جي دور ۾ لکيل ''عجيب ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون'' پڙهيون آهن، پر انهن مان لڳ ڀڳ سموري معلومات اڳئين ڪتاب تان ورتل آهي، ۽ جيڪا ٿوري گهڻي معتبر معلوم ٿئي ٿي، سا مختصر لفظن ۾ بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿي.

انهن ڪتابن موجب سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو، ۽ هو پِنگ-يانگ جي وو-يانگ جو رهواسي هو، جيڪو اڄ به [[شانشي]] صوبي جو هڪ وڏو علائقو آهي. هن کان ٽي وڏا ڀائر هئا، پر اهي سڀ پنهنجا پهريان ڏند نڪرڻ کان اڳ ئي فوت ٿي ويا. ان کان پوءِ سندس پيءُ کيس ٻڌ ڌرم جي خدمت لاءِ وقف ڪيو ۽ [[شرامڻير]] بڻائي ڇڏيو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه وقت تائين کيس گهر ۾ ئي رکيو ويو. ننڍپڻ ۾ هو سخت بيمار ٿي پيو، تنهن ڪري سندس پيءُ کيس هڪ [[وهار]] ۾ موڪليو، جتي هو جلد صحتياب ٿي ويو ۽ پوءِ والدين وٽ واپس وڃڻ کان انڪار ڪري ڇڏيائين.

جڏهن هو ڏهن سالن جو ٿيو، تڏهن سندس پيءُ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس چاچي، جيڪو سندس ماءُ جي اڪيلي زندگيءَ تي افسوس ڪندو هو، کيس صلاح ڏني ته وهار واري زندگي ڇڏي پنهنجي ماءُ وٽ موٽي اچي. پر هن جواب ڏنو: ”مون پنهنجي پيءُ جي خواهش تي گهر نه ڇڏيو، پر ان ڪري جو دنيا جي غبار ۽ عام رواجن کان پري رهڻ ٿي چاهيم. انهيءَ سبب مون ڀڪشو ٿيڻ پسند ڪيو.“ چاچي سندس جواب کي ساراهيو ۽ وڌيڪ زور ڀرڻ ڇڏي ڏنو. جڏهن سندس ماءُ به وفات ڪئي، تڏهن سندس سٺي طبيعت ۽ ماءُ سان محبت ظاهر ٿي؛ پر تدفين کان پوءِ هو ٻيهر وهار موٽي آيو.

هڪ ڀيري هو ٻين ڪيترن ئي نوآموز ڀڪشن سان گڏ ڌان جي فصل جي لاباري ۾ مصروف هو، ته بکيا چور اناج ڦرڻ لاءِ اچي پهتا. ٻيا سڀ شرامڻير ڀڄي ويا، پر فاشيان پنهنجي جاءِ تي بيٺو رهيو ۽ چورن کي چيائين: ”جيڪڏهن اوهان کي اناج گهرجي ته جيترو وڻيوَ اوترو کڻي وڃو، پر ياد رکو، توهان جي اڳوڻي سخاوت جي کوٽ ئي اوهان کي هن محتاجيءَ تائين پهچايو آهي، ۽ هاڻي وري اوهان ٻين کي ڦرڻ چاهيو ٿا. مون کي ڊپ آهي ته ايندڙ جنمن ۾ اوهان جي غربت ۽ ڏک اڃا به وڌندا. مون کي اڳواٽ ئي اوهان تي افسوس آهي.“ ائين چئي هو پنهنجي ساٿين سان گڏ وهار موٽي ويو، جڏهن ته چور اناج ڇڏي هليا ويا. وهار جا ڪيترائي سؤ ڀڪشو سندس همت ۽ اخلاق کان ايترا متاثر ٿيا، جو سندس عزت ڪرڻ لڳا.

جڏهن هن پنهنجي ابتدائي مذهبي تربيت مڪمل ڪئي ۽ مڪمل ڀڪشو بڻيو، تڏهن سندس همت، ذهانت ۽ نظم و ضبط سڀني لاءِ نمايان ٿي ويا. ٿوري ئي عرصي کان پوءِ هن [[ونيه پٽڪ]] جا مڪمل متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ هندستان جو سفر شروع ڪيو. ان کان پوءِ سندس سفرنامو هندستان جي سفر ۽ سمنڊ رستي چين واپسيءَ جو بيان آهي، جيڪو سندس پنهنجي احوال مان ورتل آهي، جنهن ۾ [[ڳجھ واري چوٽي]] (ولچر پیڪ) وٽ [[راجگريهه]] جي زيارت دوران پيش آيل ڪجهه غيرمعمولي واقعن جو به ذڪر شامل ڪيو ويو آهي.

آخر ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي ته چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هو گاديءَ واري شهر (ظاهر آهي [[نانجنگ]]) ۾ رهيو، جتي هن ڀارتي ڀڪشو [[ٻڌڀدرا (مترجم)|ٻڌڀدرا]] سان گڏجي هندستان مان آندل ڪيترن ئي متنن جا ترجما ڪيا. ان کان اڳ جو هو پنهنجو سڄو ارادو پورو ڪري سگهي، هو [[جنگجو]] (هاڻوڪو [[هوبي]]) منتقل ٿي ويو، جتي ''سن'' نالي وهار ۾ اٺاسي ورهين جي عمر ۾ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس وفات تي سڀني واقف ماڻهن گهرو ڏک ظاهر ڪيو. اهو به ٻڌايو ويو آهي ته مختلف ملڪن جي سفرن بابت سندس هڪ ٻيو وڌيڪ مفصل ڪتاب پڻ موجود هو.

اسان جي هن ليکڪ بابت، سندس پنهنجي بيان کان سواءِ، ايتري ئي معلومات ملي ٿي. ''فاشيان'' سندس مذهبي نالو هو، جنهن جي معنيٰ آهي ”ڌرم ۾ درخشنده“ يا ”ڌرم جو نامور استاد“. سندس نالي کان اڳ ايندڙ ''شي''، [[گوتم ٻڌ|شاڪيامني ٻڌ]] جي نالي جو مخفف آهي، ۽ ان کي ٻڌ ڀڪشو هجڻ جي علامت سمجهيو ويندو آهي. ڪڏهن کيس اوڀرئين [[جن خاندان (265–420)|جن خاندان]] (317–419ع) سان لاڳاپيل ڄاڻايو ويو آهي، ته ڪڏهن [[ليو سونگ خاندان|ليو سونگ خاندان]] (420–478ع) سان. جيڪڏهن هن ويهن سالن جي عمر ۾ مڪمل ڀڪشو ٿيڻ کان پوءِ پنجويهن ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان جو سفر ڪيو هجي، ته سندس ڊگهي زندگي تقريباً انهن ٻنهي خاندانن جي دورن ۾ برابر ورهائجي ٿي.{{sfn|Legge|1886}}
}}

== تصنيفون ==

فاشيان جو سڀ کان مشهور تصنيف سندس سفرنامو آهي، جيڪو انگريزيءَ ۾ سندس چيني نالي ''فوگووجي'' يا ''فوگو جي'' ({{zhi|t={{linktext|佛|國|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|国|记}}|p=Fóguójì}}) سان گڏ مختلف ترجمن جي نالن سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، جن ۾ ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال''، ''ٻڌ ڌرمي بادشاهتن جو احوال'' (''Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms'')،{{sfn|Giles|1877}}{{sfn|Legge|1886}} ''ٻڌ ملڪن جا احوال'' (''Buddhist Country Records''){{sfn|Beal|1884}} وغيره شامل آهن. هي ڪتاب ٻين نالن سان پڻ مشهور آهي، جهڙوڪ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جا سفر|t={{linktext|法顯|行|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|行|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎn Xíngzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي سوانح|t={{linktext|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎnzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون|نامور ڀڪشو فاشيان جون يادگيريون]]|t={{linktext|高|僧|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|高|僧|法显|传}}|p=Gāosēng Fǎxiǎn Zhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان ڏانهن ٻڌ ڌرمي ياترا|t={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|记}}|p=Fóyóu Tiānzhú Jì}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي هندستاني سفر جي رپورٽ|t={{linktext|歷游|天竺|記傳}}|s={{linktext|历游|天竺|记传}}|p=Lìyóu Tiānzhú Jìzhuàn}} ۽ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان بابت|t={{linktext|天竺國記}}|s={{linktext|天竺|国|记}}|p=Tiānzhúguó Jì}}.

فاشيان جون يادگيريون انهن علائقن، خاص طور تي [[هندستان]]، جي سماج ۽ ثقافت بابت هڪ آزاد ۽ اهم تاريخي ماخذ آهن، جن جو هن دورو ڪيو. سنسڪرت مان گڏ ڪيل متنن جا سندس چيني ترجما ٻڌ ڌرم جي روايتن، تاريخي شخصيتن ۽ قديم متنن جي تاريخ طئي ڪرڻ لاءِ اهم وسيلو آهن. اهي ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، قلمي نسخن، واقعن ۽ نظرين جي {{lang|la|terminus ante quem}} (ممڪن آخري تاريخ) مقرر ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ مددگار ثابت ٿين ٿا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان لکي ٿو ته وچ ايشيا جا شهر، جهڙوڪ [[ختن]]، ٻڌ ڌرمي مرڪز هئا، جتي ڀڪشو هندستاني ٻولين ۾ لکيل صحيفا پڙهندا هئا ۽ مقامي ماڻهو انهن جو وڏو احترام ڪندا هئا. هن [[ٽيڪسيلا]] (هاڻوڪو پاڪستان) ۾ هڪ خوشحال ٻڌ ڌرمي برادريءَ جو پڻ ذڪر ڪيو آهي، جيڪا گهڻي ڀاڱي غير ٻڌ ڌرمي آباديءَ جي وچ ۾ آباد هئي. هو هندستان ۽ [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻڌ جي عزت ۾ بادشاهن جي سرپرستيءَ هيٺ ٿيندڙ شاندار مذهبي رسمن ۽ عوامي پوڄائن جو به احوال ڏئي ٿو.

فاشيان [[پاٽلي پتر]]، [[مٿرا]] ۽ [[ڪنوج]] جهڙن شهرن بابت پڻ لکيو آهي. هن جو بيان آهي ته [[مدھيه ديش]] جا رهواسي کاڌ خوراڪ ۽ لباس جي لحاظ کان چينين سان مشابهت رکن ٿا. هن پاٽلي پتر کي هڪ خوشحال ۽ آباد شهر قرار ڏنو آهي.{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}} فاشيان 409ع ڌاري هندستان جي اوڀرئين سامونڊي بندرگاهه [[تمرلپتي]] مان روانو ٿيو، پر سندس ڪجهه چيني ياتري ساٿي، جيڪي ساڻس گڏ آيا هئا، هندستان ۾ ئي رهجي ويا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

; هندستان بابت تاثرات

{{Blockquote|هن ملڪ [[مگڌ]] جا شهر ۽ ڳوٺ وچئين ملڪ ([[مٿرا]] کان ڏکڻ تائين) جي سڀني علائقن کان وڏا آهن. هتان جا ماڻهو مالدار ۽ خوشحال آهن ۽ هڪ ٻئي کان نيڪي ۽ انصاف ۾ اڳتي وڌڻ جي ڪوشش ڪندا آهن. هر سال ٻئي مهيني جي اٺين ڏينهن تي هو مجسمن جي جلوس جو اهتمام ڪندا آهن. هو چار ڦيٿن واري هڪ وڏي گاڏي تي بانس سان چار ماڙن جيتري اوچي بناوت تيار ڪندا آهن. ان جي چوڌاري اڇو، ريشم جهڙو ڪپڙو ويڙهي، ان کي مختلف رنگن سان سينگاريو ويندو آهي. پوءِ ديوتائن جون سون، چاندي ۽ لاجورد سان سينگاريل مورتيون رکبيون آهن، جن جي مٿان ريشمي جهنڊا ۽ ڇٽون هونديون آهن. چئني پاسن تي خانا هوندا آهن، جن مان هر هڪ ۾ هڪ ٻڌ ويٺل هوندو آهي ۽ ڀرسان هڪ بوديستو بيٺل هوندو آهي. اهڙيون ويهه يا ان کان وڌيڪ گاڏيون هونديون آهن، سڀئي شاندار، پر هڪ ٻئي کان مختلف. ان ڏينهن ڀڪشو ۽ عام ماڻهو گڏ ٿيندا آهن، ڳائڻا ۽ ماهر سازندا موسيقي پيش ڪندا آهن، گلن ۽ لوبان سان عقيدت ظاهر ڪندا آهن. برهمڻ ٻڌن کي شهر ۾ اچڻ جي دعوت ڏيندا آهن، جتي هو ٻه راتيون ترسندا آهن. رات ڀر ڏيئا روشن رکيا ويندا آهن، موسيقي وڄندي آهي ۽ نذرانو پيش ڪيو ويندو آهي. ٻين بادشاهتن ۾ پڻ اهوئي رواج آهي. وايشيه خاندانن جا سربراهه شهرن ۾ خيراتي گهر ۽ دواخانا قائم ڪندا آهن، جتي غريب، مسڪين، يتيم، بيوه، بي اولاد، معذور ۽ بيمار ماڻهو ايندا آهن. انهن کي هر قسم جي مدد، مناسب کاڌو، دوا ۽ علاج مهيا ڪيو ويندو آهي، ۽ صحتياب ٿيڻ کان پوءِ هو پاڻ هليا ويندا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}}}}

; جاوا کان واپسيءَ دوران سامونڊي ڏکيائيون

{{Blockquote|ان وقت آسمان لڳاتار اونداهو ۽ ابر آلود رهيو، ۽ جهاز هلائيندڙ پاڻ ۾ اختلاف ڪرڻ لڳا، جنهن سبب رستو وڃائي ويٺا. جاوا ڇڏڻ کان پوءِ ستر ڏينهن کان وڌيڪ گذري ويا، ۽ سندن خوراڪ ۽ مٺو پاڻي لڳ ڀڳ ختم ٿي ويو. هو سمنڊ جي لوڻياٺي پاڻيءَ ۾ کاڌو پچائيندا هئا، جڏهن ته مٺو پاڻي وڏي احتياط سان ورهايو ويندو هو ۽ هر ماڻهوءَ کي فقط ٻه پائو ملندو هو. نيٺ اهو به ختم ٿيڻ لڳو، تڏهن واپارين صلاح ڪئي: ”عام حالتن ۾ ته اسان کي هن وقت تائين [[گوانگجو]] پهچي وڃڻ گهرجي ها، پر ڪيترائي ڏينهن وڌيڪ گذري چڪا آهن؛ لڳي ٿو اسان غلط رستو اختيار ڪيو آهي.“ پوءِ جهاز کي اتر اولهه طرف موڙيو ويو ۽ خشڪيءَ جي ڳولا ڪئي وئي. ٻارهن ڏينهن ۽ راتين جي سفر کان پوءِ هو [[لائو جبل]] جي ڏکڻ واري سامونڊي ڪناري تي، چانگ گوانگ ضلعي جي حدن ۾ پهتا، جتي کين تازو پاڻي ۽ ڀاڄيون مليون. ڪيترين ئي تڪليفن ۽ خطرن مان گذرڻ ۽ ڊگهي عرصي تائين خوف ۾ رهڻ کان پوءِ، جڏهن هنن اهي سڃاتل ڀاڄيون ڏٺيون ته کين يقين ٿي ويو ته هو هان (چين) جي سرزمين تي پهچي ويا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 40}}}}

[[جان-پيئر ابيل-ريمسا|ريمسا]] جي هن ڪتاب جي ترجمي{{sfn|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} يورپي علمي حلقن ۾ وڏي دلچسپي پيدا ڪئي، پر ڪيترن عالمن کي اها ڳالهه ڏکي لڳي ته فاشيان جن سنسڪرت لفظن کي [[وچين چيني]] [[چيني اکر]]ن ۾ لکي نقل ڪيو هو، انهن جي صحيح سڃاڻپ ۽ تشريح ڪيئن ڪجي.{{sfn|Walravens|2014|p=272}}

=== ترجما ===

==== فرانسيسي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor-first=Jean-Pierre |editor-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |ref={{SfnRef|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} |date=1836 |publisher=[[Royal Printing Office (France)|Royal Printing Office]] |location=Paris |language=fr |url=https://archive.org/details/fokoukiourelatio00fahs/page/n3/mode/2up |title=''佛國記'' Foé Koué Ki, ou, Relations des Royaumes Bouddhiques: Voyage dans la Tartarie, dans l'Afghanistan, et dans l'Inde Exécuté à la Fin du IVe Siècle par Chy̆ Fă Hian |trans-title=The Foguoji ''(佛國記)'', or, Relations of the Buddhist Kingdoms: The Voyage through Tartary, Afghanistan, and India Carried Out at the End of the 4th Century by Shi Faxian }}.

==== انگريزي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Laidlay |editor-first=John Watson |editor-link=John Watson Laidlay |ref={{harvid|Laidlay &amp; al.|1848}} |editor4-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor4-first=Jean-Pierre |editor4-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |date=1848 |url=https://archive.org/details/pilgrimagefahia00rmgoog/page/n6/mode/2up |title=The Pilgrimage of Fa Hian from the French Edition of the Foe Koue Ki of MM. Remusat, Klaproth, and Landresse with Additional Notes and Illustrations |location=Calcutta |publisher=Baptist Mission Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Samuel |editor-last=Beal |editor-link=Samuel Beal |date=1869 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n1/mode/2up |title=Travels of Fah-Hian and Sung-Yun, Buddhist Pilgrims, from China to India (400 A.D. and 518 A.D.) |ref={{harvid|Beal|1869}} |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author2=Huisheng |author2-link=Huisheng (monk) |contribution=Records of Buddhist Countries by Chi Fah Hian of the Sung Dynasty |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n71/mode/2up |pages=1–174 }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert Allen |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |editor-last=Giles |date=1877 |title=''佛國記'' Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |publisher=Kelly &amp; Walsh |location=Shanghai |ref={{harvid|Giles|1877}} |url=https://archive.org/details/in.gov.ignca.19454/page/n3/mode/2up }}; revised and republished as {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert A. |editor-last=Giles |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |display-editors=0 |ref={{harvid|Giles|1923}} |date=1923 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.pahar.2228/page/n1/mode/2up |title=The Travels of Fa-hsien (399{{ndash}}414 A.D.), or, Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |location=[[Cambridge, England|Cambridge]] |publisher=Cambridge University Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Xuanzang |author-link=Xuanzang |author2=Faxian |author2-link=Faxian |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author4=Huisheng |author4-link=Huisheng (monk) |display-authors=0 |date=1884 |ref={{harvid|Beal|1884}} |editor-last=Beal |editor-first=Samuel |editor-link=Samuel Beal |title=Si-Yu-Ki: Buddhist Records of the Western World by Hiuen Tsiang |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |contribution=Travels of Fa-hian or ''Fo-kwŏ-ki'', Buddhist-Country-Records |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n47/mode/2up |pages=xxiii–lxxiii |volume=I |url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n25/mode/2up |series=Trübner's Oriental Series }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=James |editor-last=Legge |date=1886 |editor-link=James Legge |title=A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms, Being an Account by the Chinese Monk Fâ-hien of His Travels in India and Ceylon (A.D. 399{{ndash}}414) in Search of the Buddhist Books of Discipline |location=Oxford |publisher=Clarendon Press |url=https://www.gutenberg.org/files/2124/2124-h/2124-h.htm |ref={{harvid|Legge|1886}} }}.

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[فاهيان غار]]
* [[چيني ٻڌ مت]]
* [[ريشمي واٽ وسيلي ٻڌ مت جي پکيڙ]]
* [[شوان زانگ]]، سندس ''[[اولهائين علائقن جا احوال]]'' ۽ ان تي آڌاريل افسانوي تصنيف ''[[اولهه ڏانهن سفر]]''
* [[يي جِنگ (ڀڪشو)|يي جِنگ]] ۽ سندس ''[[ڏاکڻي سمنڊ کان موڪليل ٻڌ ڌرمي عملن جو احوال]]''
* [[سونگ يون (ڀڪشو)|سونگ يون]] ۽ [[هوئي شينگ (ڀڪشو)|هوئي شينگ]]، جن جي سفرن جا احوال ٻين ماخذن ۾ محفوظ آهن
* [[هيئيچو]] ۽ سندس ''[[وانگ اوچيونچڪگوڪ جيون]]''

== حوالا ==
=== حوالا ===
{{Reflist|30em}}

=== ڪتابيات ===
{{refbegin}}
* {{citation |last= |first= |contribution=Faxian |contribution-url=https://www.britannica.com/biography/Faxian |date=2019 |ref={{harvid|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} |title=Britannica |publisher= |location= }}.
* {{citation |last=Deeg |first=Max |title=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Asian History |chapter=Chinese Buddhist Travelers: Faxian, Xuanzang, and Yijing |publisher=Oxford University Press |location=Oxford |year=2019 |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780190277727.013.217 |isbn=978-0-19-027772-7 }}.
* {{citation |last=Hodge |first=Stephen |date=2009 |url=http://www.buddhismuskunde.uni-hamburg.de/fileadmin/pdf/publikationen/The_Textual_Transmisssion_of_the_MPNS.pdf |title=The Textual Transmission of the Mahayana Mahaparinirvana-Sutra |location=Hamburg |publisher=University of Hamburg |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130928081601/http://www.buddhismuskunde.uni-hamburg.de/fileadmin/pdf/publikationen/The_Textual_Transmisssion_of_the_MPNS.pdf |archive-date=2013-09-28 }}.
* {{citation |last=Jain |first=Sandhya |author2=Meenakshi Jain |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Jain &amp; al.|2011}} |date=2011 |title=The India They Saw: Foreign Accounts |location=New Delhi |publisher=Ocean Books }}.
* {{citation |last=Li |first=Rongxi |author-mask=Li Rongxi |author2=Albert A. Dalia |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Li &amp; al.|2002}} |date=2002 |url=http://www.bdk.or.jp/pdf/bdk/digitaldl/dBET_LivesGreatMonksNuns_2002.pdf |title=The Lives of Great Monks and Nuns |location=[[برڪلي، ڪيليفورنيا|برڪلي]] |publisher=Numata Center for Translation and Research |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150920131638/http://www.bdk.or.jp/pdf/bdk/digitaldl/dBET_LivesGreatMonksNuns_2002.pdf |archive-date=2015-09-20 }}.
* {{citation |last=Průšek |first=Jaroslav |author-link=Jaroslav Průšek |author2=Zbigniew Słupski |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Průšek &amp; al.|1978}} |title=Dictionary of Oriental Literatures: East Asia |location= |publisher=Charles Tuttle |date=1978 }}.
* {{citation |last=Sen |first=Tansen |date=2006 |contribution-url=http://www.fom.sg/tours/ChinesePilgrims.pdf |contribution=The Travel Records of Chinese Pilgrims Faxian, Xuanzang, and Yijing |title=[[Education About Asia]] |volume=11 |issue=3 |pages=24–33 |publisher= |location= |access-date=2014-07-13 |archive-date=2014-07-13 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140713172856/http://www.fom.sg/tours/ChinesePilgrims.pdf |url-status=bot: unknown }}.
* {{citation |last=Shi |first=Huijiao |author-mask=Shi Huijiao |author2=Yang Tianshu |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Shi &amp; al.|2022}} |date=2022 |editor-last=Ross |editor-first=Edward A. S. |display-editors=0 |title=The Biographies of Eminent Monks 高僧傳 |url=https://www.academia.edu/90233933 |location=Hong Kong |publisher=Centre of Buddhist Studies at the University of Hong Kong }}.
* {{citation |last=Walravens |first=Harmut |language=de |contribution=Stanislas Aignan Julien{{mdash}}Leben und Werk |trans-contribution=Stanislas Aignan Julien{{mdash}}Life and Work |title=Monumenta Serica |issue=1 |volume=62 |date=2014 |pages=261–333 |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |jstor=26768561 |location=Milton Park }}.
* {{citation |last=Weerawardane |first=Prasani |date=2009 |contribution-url=http://microsite.nl.sg/PDFs/BiblioAsia/BIBA_0502Jul09.pdf |contribution=Journey to the West: Dusty Roads, Stormy Seas and Transcendence |title=Biblioasia |volume=5 |issue=2 |pages=14–18 |publisher= |location= |access-date=2014-07-13 |archive-date=2014-07-13 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140713174328/http://microsite.nl.sg/PDFs/BiblioAsia/BIBA_0502Jul09.pdf |url-status=dead }}.
{{refend}}

== ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا ==
* {{Gutenberg author |id=824}}
* {{Internet Archive author}}
* [http://afe.easia.columbia.edu/special/travel_records.pdf فاهيان ۽ ٻيا چيني ياتري]، ڪولمبيا يونيورسٽي آرڪائيوز
* [http://21dzk.l.u-tokyo.ac.jp/SAT/T2085.html اصل چيني متن، تائيشو 2085]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20170206185521/http://dev.ddbc.edu.tw/han2e/tableFormatHtmls/T51n2085ARecordOfBuddhistKingdoms.html اصل چيني متن سان ليگ جو ترجمو، T 2085]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20080911144832/http://ebooks.adelaide.edu.au/f/fa-hien/f15l/index.html ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'']، [[ايڊيليڊ يونيورسٽي]]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20100726195545/http://ebooks.adelaide.edu.au/f/fa-hien/f15l/complete.html ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال (ويب آرڪائيو تي مڪمل HTML)'']، [[ايڊيليڊ يونيورسٽي]]

{{Buddhism topics}}
{{Chinese travellers}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Faxian}}
[[Category:چيني کوجنا ڪندڙ]]
[[Category:ٻڌ مت جا چيني عالم]]
[[Category:سنسڪرت–چيني مترجم]]
[[Category:جن خاندان (266–420) جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:ليو سونگ جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:اتر ۽ ڏکڻ خاندانن جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:ياترا جا احوال]]
[[Category:337ع ۾ ڄاول]]
[[Category:چيني سفرناما لکندڙ]]
[[Category:هندستان جي تاريخ نگاري]]
[[Category:ڏکڻ ايشيا جا کوجنا ڪندڙ]]
[[Category:422ع ۾ وفاتون]]
[[Category:بعد واري زائو جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:جن خاندان (266–420) جا مترجم]]
[[Category:ليو سونگ جا مترجم]]
[[Category:چانگزي جا ماڻهو]]
[[Category:شانشي جا ليکڪ]]
[[Category:بعد واري چِن جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:سورهين بادشاهتن جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:پنجين صديءَ جا سياح]]</text>
      <sha1>s032b1l23g6etwryll8doqsz1k3u30k</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394171</id>
      <parentid>394170</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:20:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394171</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36353" sha1="buzq9xq6smrw9jztsfvlulnrjafqs7f" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي. سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

هيٺ ڏنل اقتباس [[جيمس ليگ]] پاران اوڻيهين صديءَ ۾ فاشيان جي ڪتاب جي انگريزي ترجمي جي مهاڳ مان ورتل آهي. جيتوڻيڪ ليگ جون ڪجهه راءِون، جهڙوڪ فاشيان جو 25 ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان وڃڻ، بعد جي تحقيق سان رد ٿي چڪيون آهن، پر سندس مهاڳ ۾ فاشيان بابت ڪجهه ڪارائتيون سوانحي ڄاڻون موجود آهن.

[[File:Fa Hsien at the ruins of Asoka's palace.jpg|thumb|right|250px|اشوڪ جي محل جي کنڊرن وٽ فاشيان]]

[[File:BEAL(1869) FAH-HIAN'S ROUTE THROUGH INDIA AND TARTARY.jpg|thumb|right|250px|بيل جي ايڊيشن موجب هندستان ۽ تاتارستان ۾ فاشيان جو سفري رستو{{sfn|Beal|1884}}]]

{{blockquote|
فاشيان بابت سندس پنهنجي سفرنامي کان سواءِ ڪا گهڻي اهم معلومات موجود ناهي. مون سندس باري ۾ 519ع ۾ ترتيب ڏنل ''[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون]]'' ۽ ان کان پوءِ [[منگ خاندان]] جي ٽئين شهنشاهه (1403–1424ع) جي دور ۾ لکيل ''عجيب ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون'' پڙهيون آهن، پر انهن مان لڳ ڀڳ سموري معلومات اڳئين ڪتاب تان ورتل آهي، ۽ جيڪا ٿوري گهڻي معتبر معلوم ٿئي ٿي، سا مختصر لفظن ۾ بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿي.

انهن ڪتابن موجب سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو، ۽ هو پِنگ-يانگ جي وو-يانگ جو رهواسي هو، جيڪو اڄ به [[شانشي]] صوبي جو هڪ وڏو علائقو آهي. هن کان ٽي وڏا ڀائر هئا، پر اهي سڀ پنهنجا پهريان ڏند نڪرڻ کان اڳ ئي فوت ٿي ويا. ان کان پوءِ سندس پيءُ کيس ٻڌ ڌرم جي خدمت لاءِ وقف ڪيو ۽ [[شرامڻير]] بڻائي ڇڏيو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه وقت تائين کيس گهر ۾ ئي رکيو ويو. ننڍپڻ ۾ هو سخت بيمار ٿي پيو، تنهن ڪري سندس پيءُ کيس هڪ [[وهار]] ۾ موڪليو، جتي هو جلد صحتياب ٿي ويو ۽ پوءِ والدين وٽ واپس وڃڻ کان انڪار ڪري ڇڏيائين.

جڏهن هو ڏهن سالن جو ٿيو، تڏهن سندس پيءُ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس چاچي، جيڪو سندس ماءُ جي اڪيلي زندگيءَ تي افسوس ڪندو هو، کيس صلاح ڏني ته وهار واري زندگي ڇڏي پنهنجي ماءُ وٽ موٽي اچي. پر هن جواب ڏنو: ”مون پنهنجي پيءُ جي خواهش تي گهر نه ڇڏيو، پر ان ڪري جو دنيا جي غبار ۽ عام رواجن کان پري رهڻ ٿي چاهيم. انهيءَ سبب مون ڀڪشو ٿيڻ پسند ڪيو.“ چاچي سندس جواب کي ساراهيو ۽ وڌيڪ زور ڀرڻ ڇڏي ڏنو. جڏهن سندس ماءُ به وفات ڪئي، تڏهن سندس سٺي طبيعت ۽ ماءُ سان محبت ظاهر ٿي؛ پر تدفين کان پوءِ هو ٻيهر وهار موٽي آيو.

هڪ ڀيري هو ٻين ڪيترن ئي نوآموز ڀڪشن سان گڏ ڌان جي فصل جي لاباري ۾ مصروف هو، ته بکيا چور اناج ڦرڻ لاءِ اچي پهتا. ٻيا سڀ شرامڻير ڀڄي ويا، پر فاشيان پنهنجي جاءِ تي بيٺو رهيو ۽ چورن کي چيائين: ”جيڪڏهن اوهان کي اناج گهرجي ته جيترو وڻيوَ اوترو کڻي وڃو، پر ياد رکو، توهان جي اڳوڻي سخاوت جي کوٽ ئي اوهان کي هن محتاجيءَ تائين پهچايو آهي، ۽ هاڻي وري اوهان ٻين کي ڦرڻ چاهيو ٿا. مون کي ڊپ آهي ته ايندڙ جنمن ۾ اوهان جي غربت ۽ ڏک اڃا به وڌندا. مون کي اڳواٽ ئي اوهان تي افسوس آهي.“ ائين چئي هو پنهنجي ساٿين سان گڏ وهار موٽي ويو، جڏهن ته چور اناج ڇڏي هليا ويا. وهار جا ڪيترائي سؤ ڀڪشو سندس همت ۽ اخلاق کان ايترا متاثر ٿيا، جو سندس عزت ڪرڻ لڳا.

جڏهن هن پنهنجي ابتدائي مذهبي تربيت مڪمل ڪئي ۽ مڪمل ڀڪشو بڻيو، تڏهن سندس همت، ذهانت ۽ نظم و ضبط سڀني لاءِ نمايان ٿي ويا. ٿوري ئي عرصي کان پوءِ هن [[ونيه پٽڪ]] جا مڪمل متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ هندستان جو سفر شروع ڪيو. ان کان پوءِ سندس سفرنامو هندستان جي سفر ۽ سمنڊ رستي چين واپسيءَ جو بيان آهي، جيڪو سندس پنهنجي احوال مان ورتل آهي، جنهن ۾ [[ڳجھ واري چوٽي]] (ولچر پیڪ) وٽ [[راجگريهه]] جي زيارت دوران پيش آيل ڪجهه غيرمعمولي واقعن جو به ذڪر شامل ڪيو ويو آهي.

آخر ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي ته چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هو گاديءَ واري شهر (ظاهر آهي [[نانجنگ]]) ۾ رهيو، جتي هن ڀارتي ڀڪشو [[ٻڌڀدرا (مترجم)|ٻڌڀدرا]] سان گڏجي هندستان مان آندل ڪيترن ئي متنن جا ترجما ڪيا. ان کان اڳ جو هو پنهنجو سڄو ارادو پورو ڪري سگهي، هو [[جنگجو]] (هاڻوڪو [[هوبي]]) منتقل ٿي ويو، جتي ''سن'' نالي وهار ۾ اٺاسي ورهين جي عمر ۾ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس وفات تي سڀني واقف ماڻهن گهرو ڏک ظاهر ڪيو. اهو به ٻڌايو ويو آهي ته مختلف ملڪن جي سفرن بابت سندس هڪ ٻيو وڌيڪ مفصل ڪتاب پڻ موجود هو.

اسان جي هن ليکڪ بابت، سندس پنهنجي بيان کان سواءِ، ايتري ئي معلومات ملي ٿي. ''فاشيان'' سندس مذهبي نالو هو، جنهن جي معنيٰ آهي ”ڌرم ۾ درخشنده“ يا ”ڌرم جو نامور استاد“. سندس نالي کان اڳ ايندڙ ''شي''، [[گوتم ٻڌ|شاڪيامني ٻڌ]] جي نالي جو مخفف آهي، ۽ ان کي ٻڌ ڀڪشو هجڻ جي علامت سمجهيو ويندو آهي. ڪڏهن کيس اوڀرئين [[جن خاندان (265–420)|جن خاندان]] (317–419ع) سان لاڳاپيل ڄاڻايو ويو آهي، ته ڪڏهن [[ليو سونگ خاندان|ليو سونگ خاندان]] (420–478ع) سان. جيڪڏهن هن ويهن سالن جي عمر ۾ مڪمل ڀڪشو ٿيڻ کان پوءِ پنجويهن ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان جو سفر ڪيو هجي، ته سندس ڊگهي زندگي تقريباً انهن ٻنهي خاندانن جي دورن ۾ برابر ورهائجي ٿي.{{sfn|Legge|1886}}
}}

== تصنيفون ==

فاشيان جو سڀ کان مشهور تصنيف سندس سفرنامو آهي، جيڪو انگريزيءَ ۾ سندس چيني نالي ''فوگووجي'' يا ''فوگو جي'' ({{zhi|t={{linktext|佛|國|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|国|记}}|p=Fóguójì}}) سان گڏ مختلف ترجمن جي نالن سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، جن ۾ ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال''، ''ٻڌ ڌرمي بادشاهتن جو احوال'' (''Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms'')،{{sfn|Giles|1877}}{{sfn|Legge|1886}} ''ٻڌ ملڪن جا احوال'' (''Buddhist Country Records''){{sfn|Beal|1884}} وغيره شامل آهن. هي ڪتاب ٻين نالن سان پڻ مشهور آهي، جهڙوڪ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جا سفر|t={{linktext|法顯|行|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|行|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎn Xíngzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي سوانح|t={{linktext|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎnzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون|نامور ڀڪشو فاشيان جون يادگيريون]]|t={{linktext|高|僧|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|高|僧|法显|传}}|p=Gāosēng Fǎxiǎn Zhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان ڏانهن ٻڌ ڌرمي ياترا|t={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|记}}|p=Fóyóu Tiānzhú Jì}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي هندستاني سفر جي رپورٽ|t={{linktext|歷游|天竺|記傳}}|s={{linktext|历游|天竺|记传}}|p=Lìyóu Tiānzhú Jìzhuàn}} ۽ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان بابت|t={{linktext|天竺國記}}|s={{linktext|天竺|国|记}}|p=Tiānzhúguó Jì}}.

فاشيان جون يادگيريون انهن علائقن، خاص طور تي [[هندستان]]، جي سماج ۽ ثقافت بابت هڪ آزاد ۽ اهم تاريخي ماخذ آهن، جن جو هن دورو ڪيو. سنسڪرت مان گڏ ڪيل متنن جا سندس چيني ترجما ٻڌ ڌرم جي روايتن، تاريخي شخصيتن ۽ قديم متنن جي تاريخ طئي ڪرڻ لاءِ اهم وسيلو آهن. اهي ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، قلمي نسخن، واقعن ۽ نظرين جي {{lang|la|terminus ante quem}} (ممڪن آخري تاريخ) مقرر ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ مددگار ثابت ٿين ٿا.{{sfnp|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان لکي ٿو ته وچ ايشيا جا شهر، جهڙوڪ [[ختن]]، ٻڌ ڌرمي مرڪز هئا، جتي ڀڪشو هندستاني ٻولين ۾ لکيل صحيفا پڙهندا هئا ۽ مقامي ماڻهو انهن جو وڏو احترام ڪندا هئا. هن [[ٽيڪسيلا]] (هاڻوڪو پاڪستان) ۾ هڪ خوشحال ٻڌ ڌرمي برادريءَ جو پڻ ذڪر ڪيو آهي، جيڪا گهڻي ڀاڱي غير ٻڌ ڌرمي آباديءَ جي وچ ۾ آباد هئي. هو هندستان ۽ [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻڌ جي عزت ۾ بادشاهن جي سرپرستيءَ هيٺ ٿيندڙ شاندار مذهبي رسمن ۽ عوامي پوڄائن جو به احوال ڏئي ٿو.

فاشيان [[پاٽلي پتر]]، [[مٿرا]] ۽ [[ڪنوج]] جهڙن شهرن بابت پڻ لکيو آهي. هن جو بيان آهي ته [[مدھيه ديش]] جا رهواسي کاڌ خوراڪ ۽ لباس جي لحاظ کان چينين سان مشابهت رکن ٿا. هن پاٽلي پتر کي هڪ خوشحال ۽ آباد شهر قرار ڏنو آهي.{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}} فاشيان 409ع ڌاري هندستان جي اوڀرئين سامونڊي بندرگاهه [[تمرلپتي]] مان روانو ٿيو، پر سندس ڪجهه چيني ياتري ساٿي، جيڪي ساڻس گڏ آيا هئا، هندستان ۾ ئي رهجي ويا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

; هندستان بابت تاثرات

{{Blockquote|هن ملڪ [[مگڌ]] جا شهر ۽ ڳوٺ وچئين ملڪ ([[مٿرا]] کان ڏکڻ تائين) جي سڀني علائقن کان وڏا آهن. هتان جا ماڻهو مالدار ۽ خوشحال آهن ۽ هڪ ٻئي کان نيڪي ۽ انصاف ۾ اڳتي وڌڻ جي ڪوشش ڪندا آهن. هر سال ٻئي مهيني جي اٺين ڏينهن تي هو مجسمن جي جلوس جو اهتمام ڪندا آهن. هو چار ڦيٿن واري هڪ وڏي گاڏي تي بانس سان چار ماڙن جيتري اوچي بناوت تيار ڪندا آهن. ان جي چوڌاري اڇو، ريشم جهڙو ڪپڙو ويڙهي، ان کي مختلف رنگن سان سينگاريو ويندو آهي. پوءِ ديوتائن جون سون، چاندي ۽ لاجورد سان سينگاريل مورتيون رکبيون آهن، جن جي مٿان ريشمي جهنڊا ۽ ڇٽون هونديون آهن. چئني پاسن تي خانا هوندا آهن، جن مان هر هڪ ۾ هڪ ٻڌ ويٺل هوندو آهي ۽ ڀرسان هڪ بوديستو بيٺل هوندو آهي. اهڙيون ويهه يا ان کان وڌيڪ گاڏيون هونديون آهن، سڀئي شاندار، پر هڪ ٻئي کان مختلف. ان ڏينهن ڀڪشو ۽ عام ماڻهو گڏ ٿيندا آهن، ڳائڻا ۽ ماهر سازندا موسيقي پيش ڪندا آهن، گلن ۽ لوبان سان عقيدت ظاهر ڪندا آهن. برهمڻ ٻڌن کي شهر ۾ اچڻ جي دعوت ڏيندا آهن، جتي هو ٻه راتيون ترسندا آهن. رات ڀر ڏيئا روشن رکيا ويندا آهن، موسيقي وڄندي آهي ۽ نذرانو پيش ڪيو ويندو آهي. ٻين بادشاهتن ۾ پڻ اهوئي رواج آهي. وايشيه خاندانن جا سربراهه شهرن ۾ خيراتي گهر ۽ دواخانا قائم ڪندا آهن، جتي غريب، مسڪين، يتيم، بيوه، بي اولاد، معذور ۽ بيمار ماڻهو ايندا آهن. انهن کي هر قسم جي مدد، مناسب کاڌو، دوا ۽ علاج مهيا ڪيو ويندو آهي، ۽ صحتياب ٿيڻ کان پوءِ هو پاڻ هليا ويندا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}}}}

; جاوا کان واپسيءَ دوران سامونڊي ڏکيائيون

{{Blockquote|ان وقت آسمان لڳاتار اونداهو ۽ ابر آلود رهيو، ۽ جهاز هلائيندڙ پاڻ ۾ اختلاف ڪرڻ لڳا، جنهن سبب رستو وڃائي ويٺا. جاوا ڇڏڻ کان پوءِ ستر ڏينهن کان وڌيڪ گذري ويا، ۽ سندن خوراڪ ۽ مٺو پاڻي لڳ ڀڳ ختم ٿي ويو. هو سمنڊ جي لوڻياٺي پاڻيءَ ۾ کاڌو پچائيندا هئا، جڏهن ته مٺو پاڻي وڏي احتياط سان ورهايو ويندو هو ۽ هر ماڻهوءَ کي فقط ٻه پائو ملندو هو. نيٺ اهو به ختم ٿيڻ لڳو، تڏهن واپارين صلاح ڪئي: ”عام حالتن ۾ ته اسان کي هن وقت تائين [[گوانگجو]] پهچي وڃڻ گهرجي ها، پر ڪيترائي ڏينهن وڌيڪ گذري چڪا آهن؛ لڳي ٿو اسان غلط رستو اختيار ڪيو آهي.“ پوءِ جهاز کي اتر اولهه طرف موڙيو ويو ۽ خشڪيءَ جي ڳولا ڪئي وئي. ٻارهن ڏينهن ۽ راتين جي سفر کان پوءِ هو [[لائو جبل]] جي ڏکڻ واري سامونڊي ڪناري تي، چانگ گوانگ ضلعي جي حدن ۾ پهتا، جتي کين تازو پاڻي ۽ ڀاڄيون مليون. ڪيترين ئي تڪليفن ۽ خطرن مان گذرڻ ۽ ڊگهي عرصي تائين خوف ۾ رهڻ کان پوءِ، جڏهن هنن اهي سڃاتل ڀاڄيون ڏٺيون ته کين يقين ٿي ويو ته هو هان (چين) جي سرزمين تي پهچي ويا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 40}}}}

[[جان-پيئر ابيل-ريمسا|ريمسا]] جي هن ڪتاب جي ترجمي{{sfn|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} يورپي علمي حلقن ۾ وڏي دلچسپي پيدا ڪئي، پر ڪيترن عالمن کي اها ڳالهه ڏکي لڳي ته فاشيان جن سنسڪرت لفظن کي [[وچين چيني]] [[چيني اکر]]ن ۾ لکي نقل ڪيو هو، انهن جي صحيح سڃاڻپ ۽ تشريح ڪيئن ڪجي.{{sfn|Walravens|2014|p=272}}

=== ترجما ===

==== فرانسيسي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor-first=Jean-Pierre |editor-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |ref={{SfnRef|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} |date=1836 |publisher=[[Royal Printing Office (France)|Royal Printing Office]] |location=Paris |language=fr |url=https://archive.org/details/fokoukiourelatio00fahs/page/n3/mode/2up |title=''佛國記'' Foé Koué Ki, ou, Relations des Royaumes Bouddhiques: Voyage dans la Tartarie, dans l'Afghanistan, et dans l'Inde Exécuté à la Fin du IVe Siècle par Chy̆ Fă Hian |trans-title=The Foguoji ''(佛國記)'', or, Relations of the Buddhist Kingdoms: The Voyage through Tartary, Afghanistan, and India Carried Out at the End of the 4th Century by Shi Faxian }}.

==== انگريزي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Laidlay |editor-first=John Watson |editor-link=John Watson Laidlay |ref={{harvid|Laidlay &amp; al.|1848}} |editor4-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor4-first=Jean-Pierre |editor4-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |date=1848 |url=https://archive.org/details/pilgrimagefahia00rmgoog/page/n6/mode/2up |title=The Pilgrimage of Fa Hian from the French Edition of the Foe Koue Ki of MM. Remusat, Klaproth, and Landresse with Additional Notes and Illustrations |location=Calcutta |publisher=Baptist Mission Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Samuel |editor-last=Beal |editor-link=Samuel Beal |date=1869 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n1/mode/2up |title=Travels of Fah-Hian and Sung-Yun, Buddhist Pilgrims, from China to India (400 A.D. and 518 A.D.) |ref={{harvid|Beal|1869}} |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author2=Huisheng |author2-link=Huisheng (monk) |contribution=Records of Buddhist Countries by Chi Fah Hian of the Sung Dynasty |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n71/mode/2up |pages=1–174 }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert Allen |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |editor-last=Giles |date=1877 |title=''佛國記'' Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |publisher=Kelly &amp; Walsh |location=Shanghai |ref={{harvid|Giles|1877}} |url=https://archive.org/details/in.gov.ignca.19454/page/n3/mode/2up }}; revised and republished as {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert A. |editor-last=Giles |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |display-editors=0 |ref={{harvid|Giles|1923}} |date=1923 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.pahar.2228/page/n1/mode/2up |title=The Travels of Fa-hsien (399{{ndash}}414 A.D.), or, Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |location=[[Cambridge, England|Cambridge]] |publisher=Cambridge University Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Xuanzang |author-link=Xuanzang |author2=Faxian |author2-link=Faxian |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author4=Huisheng |author4-link=Huisheng (monk) |display-authors=0 |date=1884 |ref={{harvid|Beal|1884}} |editor-last=Beal |editor-first=Samuel |editor-link=Samuel Beal |title=Si-Yu-Ki: Buddhist Records of the Western World by Hiuen Tsiang |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |contribution=Travels of Fa-hian or ''Fo-kwŏ-ki'', Buddhist-Country-Records |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n47/mode/2up |pages=xxiii–lxxiii |volume=I |url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n25/mode/2up |series=Trübner's Oriental Series }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=James |editor-last=Legge |date=1886 |editor-link=James Legge |title=A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms, Being an Account by the Chinese Monk Fâ-hien of His Travels in India and Ceylon (A.D. 399{{ndash}}414) in Search of the Buddhist Books of Discipline |location=Oxford |publisher=Clarendon Press |url=https://www.gutenberg.org/files/2124/2124-h/2124-h.htm |ref={{harvid|Legge|1886}} }}.

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[فاهيان غار]]
* [[چيني ٻڌ مت]]
* [[ريشمي واٽ وسيلي ٻڌ مت جي پکيڙ]]
* [[شوان زانگ]]، سندس ''[[اولهائين علائقن جا احوال]]'' ۽ ان تي آڌاريل افسانوي تصنيف ''[[اولهه ڏانهن سفر]]''
* [[يي جِنگ (ڀڪشو)|يي جِنگ]] ۽ سندس ''[[ڏاکڻي سمنڊ کان موڪليل ٻڌ ڌرمي عملن جو احوال]]''
* [[سونگ يون (ڀڪشو)|سونگ يون]] ۽ [[هوئي شينگ (ڀڪشو)|هوئي شينگ]]، جن جي سفرن جا احوال ٻين ماخذن ۾ محفوظ آهن
* [[هيئيچو]] ۽ سندس ''[[وانگ اوچيونچڪگوڪ جيون]]''

== حوالا ==
=== حوالا ===
{{Reflist|30em}}

=== ڪتابيات ===
{{refbegin}}
* {{citation |last= |first= |contribution=Faxian |contribution-url=https://www.britannica.com/biography/Faxian |date=2019 |ref={{harvid|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} |title=Britannica |publisher= |location= }}.
* {{citation |last=Deeg |first=Max |title=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Asian History |chapter=Chinese Buddhist Travelers: Faxian, Xuanzang, and Yijing |publisher=Oxford University Press |location=Oxford |year=2019 |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780190277727.013.217 |isbn=978-0-19-027772-7 }}.
* {{citation |last=Hodge |first=Stephen |date=2009 |url=http://www.buddhismuskunde.uni-hamburg.de/fileadmin/pdf/publikationen/The_Textual_Transmisssion_of_the_MPNS.pdf |title=The Textual Transmission of the Mahayana Mahaparinirvana-Sutra |location=Hamburg |publisher=University of Hamburg |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130928081601/http://www.buddhismuskunde.uni-hamburg.de/fileadmin/pdf/publikationen/The_Textual_Transmisssion_of_the_MPNS.pdf |archive-date=2013-09-28 }}.
* {{citation |last=Jain |first=Sandhya |author2=Meenakshi Jain |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Jain &amp; al.|2011}} |date=2011 |title=The India They Saw: Foreign Accounts |location=New Delhi |publisher=Ocean Books }}.
* {{citation |last=Li |first=Rongxi |author-mask=Li Rongxi |author2=Albert A. Dalia |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Li &amp; al.|2002}} |date=2002 |url=http://www.bdk.or.jp/pdf/bdk/digitaldl/dBET_LivesGreatMonksNuns_2002.pdf |title=The Lives of Great Monks and Nuns |location=[[برڪلي، ڪيليفورنيا|برڪلي]] |publisher=Numata Center for Translation and Research |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150920131638/http://www.bdk.or.jp/pdf/bdk/digitaldl/dBET_LivesGreatMonksNuns_2002.pdf |archive-date=2015-09-20 }}.
* {{citation |last=Průšek |first=Jaroslav |author-link=Jaroslav Průšek |author2=Zbigniew Słupski |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Průšek &amp; al.|1978}} |title=Dictionary of Oriental Literatures: East Asia |location= |publisher=Charles Tuttle |date=1978 }}.
* {{citation |last=Sen |first=Tansen |date=2006 |contribution-url=http://www.fom.sg/tours/ChinesePilgrims.pdf |contribution=The Travel Records of Chinese Pilgrims Faxian, Xuanzang, and Yijing |title=[[Education About Asia]] |volume=11 |issue=3 |pages=24–33 |publisher= |location= |access-date=2014-07-13 |archive-date=2014-07-13 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140713172856/http://www.fom.sg/tours/ChinesePilgrims.pdf |url-status=bot: unknown }}.
* {{citation |last=Shi |first=Huijiao |author-mask=Shi Huijiao |author2=Yang Tianshu |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Shi &amp; al.|2022}} |date=2022 |editor-last=Ross |editor-first=Edward A. S. |display-editors=0 |title=The Biographies of Eminent Monks 高僧傳 |url=https://www.academia.edu/90233933 |location=Hong Kong |publisher=Centre of Buddhist Studies at the University of Hong Kong }}.
* {{citation |last=Walravens |first=Harmut |language=de |contribution=Stanislas Aignan Julien{{mdash}}Leben und Werk |trans-contribution=Stanislas Aignan Julien{{mdash}}Life and Work |title=Monumenta Serica |issue=1 |volume=62 |date=2014 |pages=261–333 |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |jstor=26768561 |location=Milton Park }}.
* {{citation |last=Weerawardane |first=Prasani |date=2009 |contribution-url=http://microsite.nl.sg/PDFs/BiblioAsia/BIBA_0502Jul09.pdf |contribution=Journey to the West: Dusty Roads, Stormy Seas and Transcendence |title=Biblioasia |volume=5 |issue=2 |pages=14–18 |publisher= |location= |access-date=2014-07-13 |archive-date=2014-07-13 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140713174328/http://microsite.nl.sg/PDFs/BiblioAsia/BIBA_0502Jul09.pdf |url-status=dead }}.
{{refend}}

== ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا ==
* {{Gutenberg author |id=824}}
* {{Internet Archive author}}
* [http://afe.easia.columbia.edu/special/travel_records.pdf فاهيان ۽ ٻيا چيني ياتري]، ڪولمبيا يونيورسٽي آرڪائيوز
* [http://21dzk.l.u-tokyo.ac.jp/SAT/T2085.html اصل چيني متن، تائيشو 2085]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20170206185521/http://dev.ddbc.edu.tw/han2e/tableFormatHtmls/T51n2085ARecordOfBuddhistKingdoms.html اصل چيني متن سان ليگ جو ترجمو، T 2085]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20080911144832/http://ebooks.adelaide.edu.au/f/fa-hien/f15l/index.html ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'']، [[ايڊيليڊ يونيورسٽي]]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20100726195545/http://ebooks.adelaide.edu.au/f/fa-hien/f15l/complete.html ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال (ويب آرڪائيو تي مڪمل HTML)'']، [[ايڊيليڊ يونيورسٽي]]

{{Buddhism topics}}
{{Chinese travellers}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Faxian}}
[[Category:چيني کوجنا ڪندڙ]]
[[Category:ٻڌ مت جا چيني عالم]]
[[Category:سنسڪرت–چيني مترجم]]
[[Category:جن خاندان (266–420) جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:ليو سونگ جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:اتر ۽ ڏکڻ خاندانن جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:ياترا جا احوال]]
[[Category:337ع ۾ ڄاول]]
[[Category:چيني سفرناما لکندڙ]]
[[Category:هندستان جي تاريخ نگاري]]
[[Category:ڏکڻ ايشيا جا کوجنا ڪندڙ]]
[[Category:422ع ۾ وفاتون]]
[[Category:بعد واري زائو جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:جن خاندان (266–420) جا مترجم]]
[[Category:ليو سونگ جا مترجم]]
[[Category:چانگزي جا ماڻهو]]
[[Category:شانشي جا ليکڪ]]
[[Category:بعد واري چِن جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:سورهين بادشاهتن جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:پنجين صديءَ جا سياح]]</text>
      <sha1>buzq9xq6smrw9jztsfvlulnrjafqs7f</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394172</id>
      <parentid>394171</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:21:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394172</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36352" sha1="7os78cus4mpu2sfb15wzui5u59nr7y4" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻڌ مت جو ريشمي واٽ وارو ياتري (337–تقريباً 422ع)}}

{{Infobox religious biography
| background    = #FFA500
| name          = فاشيان
| image         = Faxian statue in Maritime Experiential Museum &amp; Aquarium Singapore.jpg
| caption       = فاشيان جو مجسمو، [[ميري ٽائيم ايڪسپيرينشل ميوزيم]]، [[سنگاپور]]
| religion      = [[ٻڌ مت]]
| other_names   = گونگ سيهي
| monastic_name = فاشيان
| birth_date    = 337ع
| birth_place   = پنگيانگ وويانگ ({{lang|zh|平陽武陽}})، موجوده [[لنفين]]، [[شانشي]]
| death_date    = {{Circa|422ع}} (عمر 85 سال)
| notable_works = ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'')
| birth_name    = گونگ (خانداني نالو)
}}
{{Infobox Chinese
| t = {{linktext|法|顯}}
| s = {{linktext|法|显}}
| p = Fǎxiǎn
| w = Fa-hsien
| l = [[ڌرم]] جي عظمت
| mi = {{IPAc-cmn|f|a|3|.|x|ian|3}}
| y = Fat&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;-hin&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;
| h = Fap&lt;sup&gt;5&lt;/sup&gt;-hien&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt;
| ci = {{IPAc-yue|f|at|3|.|h|in|2}}
| poj = Huat-hién
| mc = Pjop-xén
| kanji = 法顕
| kana = ほっけん
| romaji = Hokken
| san = फा हियान{{citation needed|date=February 2026}}
| hangul = 법현
| vie = Pháp Hiển
}}

'''فاشيان''' [فاھيان] '''Faxian''' (337ع – {{circa|422ع}})، جنهن کي اڳ انگريزي رومنائيزيشن ۾ '''فا-هيئن''' يا '''فا-هسين''' پڻ لکيو ويندو هو، هڪ [[چيني]] [[ٻڌ مت|ٻڌ ڌرمي]] [[ڀڪشو]]، مترجم ۽ ياتري هو، جنهن [[بعد وارو چِن]] (Later Qin) رياست مان پيادل سفر ڪري [[وچئين دور جي هندستان]] جو رخ ڪيو ته جيئن [[ٻڌ ڌرمي صحيفا]] حاصل ڪري سگهي. سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو. لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾ هن پنهنجي سفر جي شروعات ڪئي ۽ خشڪيءَ واري [[ريشمي واٽ]] سان اولهه طرف روانو ٿيو، جتي هن [[وچ ايشيا]]، [[ڏکڻ ايشيا]] ۽ [[ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا]] جي ڪيترن ئي ٻڌ ڌرمي ماڳن جو دورو ڪيو. هن جو سفر ۽ واپسي 399ع کان 412ع تائين جاري رهي، جنهن مان ڏهه سال هن هندستان ۾ گذاريا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

فاشيان پنهنجي [[ٻڌ ياترا]] جو احوال ''فوگووجي'' (''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'') ۾ قلمبند ڪيو، جيڪو هندستان ۾ ٻڌ مت بابت هڪ اهم ۽ خودمختيار تاريخي ماخذ شمار ڪيو وڃي ٿو. هو وڏي تعداد ۾ [[سنسڪرت]] متن کڻي چين موٽي آيو، جن جا ترجما اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ٻڌ مت جي واڌ ويجهه تي گهرو اثرانداز ٿيا. اهي ترجما ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، واقعن، متنن ۽ نظرين جي تاريخي حدِّ بالا ({{lang|la|terminus ante quem}}) طئي ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ اهم حيثيت رکن ٿا.

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سنڌ]] بابت سڀ کان آڳاٽو ذڪر [[چين]] جي ٻڌ ڌرمي ياتري [[فاهيان]] (فاشيان) سان لاڳاپيل ملي ٿو. فاهيان 399ع ڌاري پنهنجي سفر دوران هن خطي (سنڌ) مان گذريو، پر سندس سفرنامي ۾ سنڌ بابت ڪا تفصيلي ڄاڻ يا احوال موجود نه آهي.&lt;ref&gt;سنڌ- سياحن جي نظر ۾--ڊاڪٽر ميمڻ عبدالمجيد سنڌي (قسط- 1)؛ رسالو: مهراڻ؛ 1991ع، جلد 1؛ ڇپيندڙ: سنڌي ادبي بورڊ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== سوانح ==


[[File:Faxian zhuan.JPG|thumb|12هين صديءَ جو ڪاٺ جي ڇپائيءَ وارو نسخو، ''فاشيان جي سفرنامي'' (''ٻڌ ملڪن جو احوال'') جو پهريون صفحو. شروعاتي جملا هن ريت آهن: ”[[چانگ آن]] ۾ فاشيان کي افسوس هو ته ''ونيه'' جا مجموعا اڻپورا هئا. تنهن ڪري [[يائو شِنگ|هونگشي]] جي ٻئي سال يا [[چيني جنسي چڪر|جنسي چڪر]] جي جي-هائي سال (36) ۾ (يعني چيني سال، جيڪو 399ع جي پڇاڙيءَ ۽ 400ع جي شروعات تي پکڙيل هو)، هن هُوجِنگ، دائوژينگ، هوئِيِنگ ۽ هوئِي وِي سان گڏ هندستان مان ''ونيه'' جا وڌيڪ متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ سفر ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.“]]

[[File:Faxian at Daishō-in Temple.jpg|thumb|right|250px|جاپان جي دائيشو-اِن مندر ۾ فاشيان جو مجسمو]]

فاشيان چوٿين صدي عيسويءَ ۾ [[شانشي]] ۾، [[سورهين بادشاهتن]] واري دور جي [[بعد وارو زائو]] سلطنت ۾ پيدا ٿيو. بعد ۾ هن ''فاشيان'' نالو اختيار ڪيو، جنهن جي لفظي معنيٰ ”ڌرم جي عظمت“ آهي. سندس ٽي وڏا ڀائر ننڍي عمر ۾ فوت ٿي ويا. سندس پيءُ کي ڊپ هو ته متان سندس به ساڳي قسمت ٿئي، تنهن ڪري هن ٽن سالن جي عمر ۾ کيس [[شرامڻير|نوآموز ڀڪشو]] بڻائي ڇڏيو.{{sfn|Shi &amp; al.|2022}}

399ع ۾، لڳ ڀڳ سٺ سالن جي عمر ۾، فاشيان هندستان ڏانهن ويندڙ قديم ترين معلوم ٻڌ ياترين مان هڪ هو. هن [[چانگ آن]]، جيڪا [[بعد وارو چِن]] سلطنت جي گاديءَ جو هنڌ هئي، مان چئن ساٿين سان گڏ روانگي اختيار ڪئي ته جيئن ٻڌ ڌرمي جا مقدس صحيفا حاصل ڪري سگهي. بعد ۾ [[ژانگيي]] ۾ پنج ٻيا ياتري به هن سان شامل ٿيا.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}{{sfn|Sen|2006}} هن پنجين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ هندستان جو دورو ڪيو. روايت موجب هن چين کان برفاني ريگستانن ۽ ڏکين جبلائي لڪن کي پيادل پار ڪندي سفر ڪيو. هو اتر اولهه کان هندستان ۾ داخل ٿيو ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] پهتو. اتان هن ٻڌ ڌرم سان لاڳاپيل سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي صحيفا ۽ مقدس تصويرون گڏ ڪيون. چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هن انهن سنسڪرت متنن جا چيني ٻوليءَ ۾ ترجما پڻ ڪيا.{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان جو هندستاني سفر [[چندرگپت ٻيون|چندرگپت ٻئي]] جي دورِ حڪومت ۾ ٿيو. هو اتر اولهه کان برصغير ۾ داخل ٿيو. سندس سفرنامي موجب هن ڏهه سال هندستان ۾ گذاريا. هن [[مهاتما ٻڌ]] جي زندگيءَ سان لاڳاپيل اهم ماڳن ۽ مشهور تعليمي مرڪزن سان گڏ ٻڌ وهارن جو به دورو ڪيو. هن [[ڪپل وستو]] ([[لمبني]])، [[بودھ گيا]]، بنارس ([[وارانسي]])، [[شراوستي]] ۽ [[ڪشيناگر]] جا به سفر ڪيا، جيڪي سڀئي ٻڌ جي زندگيءَ جي اهم واقعن سان لاڳاپيل هئا. فاشيان سنسڪرت ٻولي سکي ۽ [[پاٽلي پتر]] (هاڻوڪو پٽنه)، [[اُڊيانا]] ۽ [[گنڌارا]] جي [[ٽيڪسيلا]] مان هندستاني ادب گڏ ڪيو. سندس يادگيرين ۾ هينايان ۽ اُڀرندڙ مهايان روايتن سان گڏ پنجين صديءَ جي هندستاني ٻڌ مت ۾ ٿيراواد جي مختلف شاخن ۽ انهن جي اختلافن جو به ذڪر ملي ٿو. چين موٽڻ کان اڳ هن پنهنجي دور جا سنسڪرت جا ڪيترائي متن گڏ ڪري ورتا هئا.{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

چين ڏانهن واپسيءَ دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻن سالن جي قيام کان پوءِ، هڪ شديد طوفان سندس ٻيڙيءَ کي رستو ڀلائي غالباً [[جاوا]] ٻيٽ تي پهچايو.&lt;ref&gt;Buswell, Robert E. &amp; Lopez, Donald S. Jr. (2014). ''[https://books.google.com/books?id=DXN2AAAAQBAJ&amp;q=amala&amp;pg=PA275 The Princeton Dictionary of Buddhism]'', Princeton: Princeton University Press, p. 297&lt;/ref&gt; اتي پنج مهينا رهڻ کان پوءِ هن ڏکڻ چين ڏانهن ويندڙ ٻي ٻيڙيءَ ۾ سفر ڪيو، پر اها ٻيڙي به رستو ڀلجي وئي ۽ آخرڪار هو اتر چين جي هاڻوڪي [[شنڊونگ]] صوبي ۾ [[لائو جبل]] وٽ، [[چنگدائو]] شهر کان {{convert|30|km}} اوڀر طرف، لٿو. پنهنجي باقي زندگي هن گڏ ڪيل صحيفن جي ترجمي ۽ تدوين ۾ گذاري. سندس اهي ترجما بعد جي چيني ٻڌ مت جي تاريخ تي گهرو اثر ڇڏي ويا.{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان 412ع ۾ چين موٽي آيو ۽ هاڻوڪي [[نانجنگ]] ۾ رهائش اختيار ڪئي. لڳ ڀڳ 414ع ۾ هن پنهنجي سفرن بابت هڪ ڪتاب لکيو، جنهن ۾ ابتدائي ٻڌ مت سان گڏ [[ريشمي واٽ]] تي واقع ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي جاگرافي ۽ تاريخ بابت تفصيلي احوال ڏنل آهي، جيئن اهي پنجين صدي عيسويءَ جي شروعات ۾ هئا. ان کان پوءِ پنهنجي وفات تائين ايندڙ ڏهاڪي دوران هن [[هندستان]] مان آندل ٻڌ ڌرمي [[سوتر]]ن جي ترجمي ۾ پاڻ کي وقف رکيو.{{sfn|Průšek &amp; al.|1978|p=35}}

هيٺ ڏنل اقتباس [[جيمس ليگ]] پاران اوڻيهين صديءَ ۾ فاشيان جي ڪتاب جي انگريزي ترجمي جي مهاڳ مان ورتل آهي. جيتوڻيڪ ليگ جون ڪجهه راءِون، جهڙوڪ فاشيان جو 25 ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان وڃڻ، بعد جي تحقيق سان رد ٿي چڪيون آهن، پر سندس مهاڳ ۾ فاشيان بابت ڪجهه ڪارائتيون سوانحي ڄاڻون موجود آهن.

[[File:Fa Hsien at the ruins of Asoka's palace.jpg|thumb|right|250px|اشوڪ جي محل جي کنڊرن وٽ فاشيان]]

[[File:BEAL(1869) FAH-HIAN'S ROUTE THROUGH INDIA AND TARTARY.jpg|thumb|right|250px|بيل جي ايڊيشن موجب هندستان ۽ تاتارستان ۾ فاشيان جو سفري رستو{{sfn|Beal|1884}}]]

{{blockquote|
فاشيان بابت سندس پنهنجي سفرنامي کان سواءِ ڪا گهڻي اهم معلومات موجود ناهي. مون سندس باري ۾ 519ع ۾ ترتيب ڏنل ''[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون]]'' ۽ ان کان پوءِ [[منگ خاندان]] جي ٽئين شهنشاهه (1403–1424ع) جي دور ۾ لکيل ''عجيب ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون'' پڙهيون آهن، پر انهن مان لڳ ڀڳ سموري معلومات اڳئين ڪتاب تان ورتل آهي، ۽ جيڪا ٿوري گهڻي معتبر معلوم ٿئي ٿي، سا مختصر لفظن ۾ بيان ڪري سگهجي ٿي.

انهن ڪتابن موجب سندس خانداني نالو '''گونگ''' هو، ۽ هو پِنگ-يانگ جي وو-يانگ جو رهواسي هو، جيڪو اڄ به [[شانشي]] صوبي جو هڪ وڏو علائقو آهي. هن کان ٽي وڏا ڀائر هئا، پر اهي سڀ پنهنجا پهريان ڏند نڪرڻ کان اڳ ئي فوت ٿي ويا. ان کان پوءِ سندس پيءُ کيس ٻڌ ڌرم جي خدمت لاءِ وقف ڪيو ۽ [[شرامڻير]] بڻائي ڇڏيو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه وقت تائين کيس گهر ۾ ئي رکيو ويو. ننڍپڻ ۾ هو سخت بيمار ٿي پيو، تنهن ڪري سندس پيءُ کيس هڪ [[وهار]] ۾ موڪليو، جتي هو جلد صحتياب ٿي ويو ۽ پوءِ والدين وٽ واپس وڃڻ کان انڪار ڪري ڇڏيائين.

جڏهن هو ڏهن سالن جو ٿيو، تڏهن سندس پيءُ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس چاچي، جيڪو سندس ماءُ جي اڪيلي زندگيءَ تي افسوس ڪندو هو، کيس صلاح ڏني ته وهار واري زندگي ڇڏي پنهنجي ماءُ وٽ موٽي اچي. پر هن جواب ڏنو: ”مون پنهنجي پيءُ جي خواهش تي گهر نه ڇڏيو، پر ان ڪري جو دنيا جي غبار ۽ عام رواجن کان پري رهڻ ٿي چاهيم. انهيءَ سبب مون ڀڪشو ٿيڻ پسند ڪيو.“ چاچي سندس جواب کي ساراهيو ۽ وڌيڪ زور ڀرڻ ڇڏي ڏنو. جڏهن سندس ماءُ به وفات ڪئي، تڏهن سندس سٺي طبيعت ۽ ماءُ سان محبت ظاهر ٿي؛ پر تدفين کان پوءِ هو ٻيهر وهار موٽي آيو.

هڪ ڀيري هو ٻين ڪيترن ئي نوآموز ڀڪشن سان گڏ ڌان جي فصل جي لاباري ۾ مصروف هو، ته بکيا چور اناج ڦرڻ لاءِ اچي پهتا. ٻيا سڀ شرامڻير ڀڄي ويا، پر فاشيان پنهنجي جاءِ تي بيٺو رهيو ۽ چورن کي چيائين: ”جيڪڏهن اوهان کي اناج گهرجي ته جيترو وڻيوَ اوترو کڻي وڃو، پر ياد رکو، توهان جي اڳوڻي سخاوت جي کوٽ ئي اوهان کي هن محتاجيءَ تائين پهچايو آهي، ۽ هاڻي وري اوهان ٻين کي ڦرڻ چاهيو ٿا. مون کي ڊپ آهي ته ايندڙ جنمن ۾ اوهان جي غربت ۽ ڏک اڃا به وڌندا. مون کي اڳواٽ ئي اوهان تي افسوس آهي.“ ائين چئي هو پنهنجي ساٿين سان گڏ وهار موٽي ويو، جڏهن ته چور اناج ڇڏي هليا ويا. وهار جا ڪيترائي سؤ ڀڪشو سندس همت ۽ اخلاق کان ايترا متاثر ٿيا، جو سندس عزت ڪرڻ لڳا.

جڏهن هن پنهنجي ابتدائي مذهبي تربيت مڪمل ڪئي ۽ مڪمل ڀڪشو بڻيو، تڏهن سندس همت، ذهانت ۽ نظم و ضبط سڀني لاءِ نمايان ٿي ويا. ٿوري ئي عرصي کان پوءِ هن [[ونيه پٽڪ]] جا مڪمل متن حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ هندستان جو سفر شروع ڪيو. ان کان پوءِ سندس سفرنامو هندستان جي سفر ۽ سمنڊ رستي چين واپسيءَ جو بيان آهي، جيڪو سندس پنهنجي احوال مان ورتل آهي، جنهن ۾ [[ڳجھ واري چوٽي]] (ولچر پیڪ) وٽ [[راجگريهه]] جي زيارت دوران پيش آيل ڪجهه غيرمعمولي واقعن جو به ذڪر شامل ڪيو ويو آهي.

آخر ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي ته چين موٽڻ کان پوءِ هو گاديءَ واري شهر (ظاهر آهي [[نانجنگ]]) ۾ رهيو، جتي هن ڀارتي ڀڪشو [[ٻڌڀدرا (مترجم)|ٻڌڀدرا]] سان گڏجي هندستان مان آندل ڪيترن ئي متنن جا ترجما ڪيا. ان کان اڳ جو هو پنهنجو سڄو ارادو پورو ڪري سگهي، هو [[جنگجو]] (هاڻوڪو [[هوبي]]) منتقل ٿي ويو، جتي ''سن'' نالي وهار ۾ اٺاسي ورهين جي عمر ۾ وفات ڪري ويو. سندس وفات تي سڀني واقف ماڻهن گهرو ڏک ظاهر ڪيو. اهو به ٻڌايو ويو آهي ته مختلف ملڪن جي سفرن بابت سندس هڪ ٻيو وڌيڪ مفصل ڪتاب پڻ موجود هو.

اسان جي هن ليکڪ بابت، سندس پنهنجي بيان کان سواءِ، ايتري ئي معلومات ملي ٿي. ''فاشيان'' سندس مذهبي نالو هو، جنهن جي معنيٰ آهي ”ڌرم ۾ درخشنده“ يا ”ڌرم جو نامور استاد“. سندس نالي کان اڳ ايندڙ ''شي''، [[گوتم ٻڌ|شاڪيامني ٻڌ]] جي نالي جو مخفف آهي، ۽ ان کي ٻڌ ڀڪشو هجڻ جي علامت سمجهيو ويندو آهي. ڪڏهن کيس اوڀرئين [[جن خاندان (265–420)|جن خاندان]] (317–419ع) سان لاڳاپيل ڄاڻايو ويو آهي، ته ڪڏهن [[ليو سونگ خاندان|ليو سونگ خاندان]] (420–478ع) سان. جيڪڏهن هن ويهن سالن جي عمر ۾ مڪمل ڀڪشو ٿيڻ کان پوءِ پنجويهن ورهين جي عمر ۾ هندستان جو سفر ڪيو هجي، ته سندس ڊگهي زندگي تقريباً انهن ٻنهي خاندانن جي دورن ۾ برابر ورهائجي ٿي.{{sfn|Legge|1886}}
}}

== تصنيفون ==

فاشيان جو سڀ کان مشهور تصنيف سندس سفرنامو آهي، جيڪو انگريزيءَ ۾ سندس چيني نالي ''فوگووجي'' يا ''فوگو جي'' ({{zhi|t={{linktext|佛|國|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|国|记}}|p=Fóguójì}}) سان گڏ مختلف ترجمن جي نالن سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، جن ۾ ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال''، ''ٻڌ ڌرمي بادشاهتن جو احوال'' (''Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms'')،{{sfn|Giles|1877}}{{sfn|Legge|1886}} ''ٻڌ ملڪن جا احوال'' (''Buddhist Country Records''){{sfn|Beal|1884}} وغيره شامل آهن. هي ڪتاب ٻين نالن سان پڻ مشهور آهي، جهڙوڪ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جا سفر|t={{linktext|法顯|行|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|行|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎn Xíngzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي سوانح|t={{linktext|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|法显|传}}|p=Fǎxiǎnzhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=[[نامور ڀڪشن جون يادگيريون|نامور ڀڪشو فاشيان جون يادگيريون]]|t={{linktext|高|僧|法顯|傳}}|s={{linktext|高|僧|法显|传}}|p=Gāosēng Fǎxiǎn Zhuàn}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان ڏانهن ٻڌ ڌرمي ياترا|t={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|記}}|s={{linktext|佛|游|天竺|记}}|p=Fóyóu Tiānzhú Jì}}، {{zhi|out=tr|tr=فاشيان جي هندستاني سفر جي رپورٽ|t={{linktext|歷游|天竺|記傳}}|s={{linktext|历游|天竺|记传}}|p=Lìyóu Tiānzhú Jìzhuàn}} ۽ {{zhi|out=tr|tr=هندستان بابت|t={{linktext|天竺國記}}|s={{linktext|天竺|国|记}}|p=Tiānzhúguó Jì}}.

فاشيان جون يادگيريون انهن علائقن، خاص طور تي [[هندستان]]، جي سماج ۽ ثقافت بابت هڪ آزاد ۽ اهم تاريخي ماخذ آهن، جن جو هن دورو ڪيو. سنسڪرت مان گڏ ڪيل متنن جا سندس چيني ترجما ٻڌ ڌرم جي روايتن، تاريخي شخصيتن ۽ قديم متنن جي تاريخ طئي ڪرڻ لاءِ اهم وسيلو آهن. اهي ڪيترن ئي تاريخي نالن، قلمي نسخن، واقعن ۽ نظرين جي {{lang|la|terminus ante quem}} (ممڪن آخري تاريخ) مقرر ڪرڻ ۾ پڻ مددگار ثابت ٿين ٿا.{{sfn|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}}{{sfn|Deeg|2019}}

فاشيان لکي ٿو ته وچ ايشيا جا شهر، جهڙوڪ [[ختن]]، ٻڌ ڌرمي مرڪز هئا، جتي ڀڪشو هندستاني ٻولين ۾ لکيل صحيفا پڙهندا هئا ۽ مقامي ماڻهو انهن جو وڏو احترام ڪندا هئا. هن [[ٽيڪسيلا]] (هاڻوڪو پاڪستان) ۾ هڪ خوشحال ٻڌ ڌرمي برادريءَ جو پڻ ذڪر ڪيو آهي، جيڪا گهڻي ڀاڱي غير ٻڌ ڌرمي آباديءَ جي وچ ۾ آباد هئي. هو هندستان ۽ [[سري لنڪا]] ۾ ٻڌ جي عزت ۾ بادشاهن جي سرپرستيءَ هيٺ ٿيندڙ شاندار مذهبي رسمن ۽ عوامي پوڄائن جو به احوال ڏئي ٿو.

فاشيان [[پاٽلي پتر]]، [[مٿرا]] ۽ [[ڪنوج]] جهڙن شهرن بابت پڻ لکيو آهي. هن جو بيان آهي ته [[مدھيه ديش]] جا رهواسي کاڌ خوراڪ ۽ لباس جي لحاظ کان چينين سان مشابهت رکن ٿا. هن پاٽلي پتر کي هڪ خوشحال ۽ آباد شهر قرار ڏنو آهي.{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}} فاشيان 409ع ڌاري هندستان جي اوڀرئين سامونڊي بندرگاهه [[تمرلپتي]] مان روانو ٿيو، پر سندس ڪجهه چيني ياتري ساٿي، جيڪي ساڻس گڏ آيا هئا، هندستان ۾ ئي رهجي ويا.{{sfn|Sen|2006}}

; هندستان بابت تاثرات

{{Blockquote|هن ملڪ [[مگڌ]] جا شهر ۽ ڳوٺ وچئين ملڪ ([[مٿرا]] کان ڏکڻ تائين) جي سڀني علائقن کان وڏا آهن. هتان جا ماڻهو مالدار ۽ خوشحال آهن ۽ هڪ ٻئي کان نيڪي ۽ انصاف ۾ اڳتي وڌڻ جي ڪوشش ڪندا آهن. هر سال ٻئي مهيني جي اٺين ڏينهن تي هو مجسمن جي جلوس جو اهتمام ڪندا آهن. هو چار ڦيٿن واري هڪ وڏي گاڏي تي بانس سان چار ماڙن جيتري اوچي بناوت تيار ڪندا آهن. ان جي چوڌاري اڇو، ريشم جهڙو ڪپڙو ويڙهي، ان کي مختلف رنگن سان سينگاريو ويندو آهي. پوءِ ديوتائن جون سون، چاندي ۽ لاجورد سان سينگاريل مورتيون رکبيون آهن، جن جي مٿان ريشمي جهنڊا ۽ ڇٽون هونديون آهن. چئني پاسن تي خانا هوندا آهن، جن مان هر هڪ ۾ هڪ ٻڌ ويٺل هوندو آهي ۽ ڀرسان هڪ بوديستو بيٺل هوندو آهي. اهڙيون ويهه يا ان کان وڌيڪ گاڏيون هونديون آهن، سڀئي شاندار، پر هڪ ٻئي کان مختلف. ان ڏينهن ڀڪشو ۽ عام ماڻهو گڏ ٿيندا آهن، ڳائڻا ۽ ماهر سازندا موسيقي پيش ڪندا آهن، گلن ۽ لوبان سان عقيدت ظاهر ڪندا آهن. برهمڻ ٻڌن کي شهر ۾ اچڻ جي دعوت ڏيندا آهن، جتي هو ٻه راتيون ترسندا آهن. رات ڀر ڏيئا روشن رکيا ويندا آهن، موسيقي وڄندي آهي ۽ نذرانو پيش ڪيو ويندو آهي. ٻين بادشاهتن ۾ پڻ اهوئي رواج آهي. وايشيه خاندانن جا سربراهه شهرن ۾ خيراتي گهر ۽ دواخانا قائم ڪندا آهن، جتي غريب، مسڪين، يتيم، بيوه، بي اولاد، معذور ۽ بيمار ماڻهو ايندا آهن. انهن کي هر قسم جي مدد، مناسب کاڌو، دوا ۽ علاج مهيا ڪيو ويندو آهي، ۽ صحتياب ٿيڻ کان پوءِ هو پاڻ هليا ويندا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 27}}}}

; جاوا کان واپسيءَ دوران سامونڊي ڏکيائيون

{{Blockquote|ان وقت آسمان لڳاتار اونداهو ۽ ابر آلود رهيو، ۽ جهاز هلائيندڙ پاڻ ۾ اختلاف ڪرڻ لڳا، جنهن سبب رستو وڃائي ويٺا. جاوا ڇڏڻ کان پوءِ ستر ڏينهن کان وڌيڪ گذري ويا، ۽ سندن خوراڪ ۽ مٺو پاڻي لڳ ڀڳ ختم ٿي ويو. هو سمنڊ جي لوڻياٺي پاڻيءَ ۾ کاڌو پچائيندا هئا، جڏهن ته مٺو پاڻي وڏي احتياط سان ورهايو ويندو هو ۽ هر ماڻهوءَ کي فقط ٻه پائو ملندو هو. نيٺ اهو به ختم ٿيڻ لڳو، تڏهن واپارين صلاح ڪئي: ”عام حالتن ۾ ته اسان کي هن وقت تائين [[گوانگجو]] پهچي وڃڻ گهرجي ها، پر ڪيترائي ڏينهن وڌيڪ گذري چڪا آهن؛ لڳي ٿو اسان غلط رستو اختيار ڪيو آهي.“ پوءِ جهاز کي اتر اولهه طرف موڙيو ويو ۽ خشڪيءَ جي ڳولا ڪئي وئي. ٻارهن ڏينهن ۽ راتين جي سفر کان پوءِ هو [[لائو جبل]] جي ڏکڻ واري سامونڊي ڪناري تي، چانگ گوانگ ضلعي جي حدن ۾ پهتا، جتي کين تازو پاڻي ۽ ڀاڄيون مليون. ڪيترين ئي تڪليفن ۽ خطرن مان گذرڻ ۽ ڊگهي عرصي تائين خوف ۾ رهڻ کان پوءِ، جڏهن هنن اهي سڃاتل ڀاڄيون ڏٺيون ته کين يقين ٿي ويو ته هو هان (چين) جي سرزمين تي پهچي ويا آهن.|فاشيان، لڳ ڀڳ 415ع{{sfn|Legge|1886|loc=Ch. 40}}}}

[[جان-پيئر ابيل-ريمسا|ريمسا]] جي هن ڪتاب جي ترجمي{{sfn|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} يورپي علمي حلقن ۾ وڏي دلچسپي پيدا ڪئي، پر ڪيترن عالمن کي اها ڳالهه ڏکي لڳي ته فاشيان جن سنسڪرت لفظن کي [[وچين چيني]] [[چيني اکر]]ن ۾ لکي نقل ڪيو هو، انهن جي صحيح سڃاڻپ ۽ تشريح ڪيئن ڪجي.{{sfn|Walravens|2014|p=272}}

=== ترجما ===

==== فرانسيسي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor-first=Jean-Pierre |editor-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |ref={{SfnRef|Abel-Rémusat &amp; al.|1836}} |date=1836 |publisher=[[Royal Printing Office (France)|Royal Printing Office]] |location=Paris |language=fr |url=https://archive.org/details/fokoukiourelatio00fahs/page/n3/mode/2up |title=''佛國記'' Foé Koué Ki, ou, Relations des Royaumes Bouddhiques: Voyage dans la Tartarie, dans l'Afghanistan, et dans l'Inde Exécuté à la Fin du IVe Siècle par Chy̆ Fă Hian |trans-title=The Foguoji ''(佛國記)'', or, Relations of the Buddhist Kingdoms: The Voyage through Tartary, Afghanistan, and India Carried Out at the End of the 4th Century by Shi Faxian }}.

==== انگريزي ====
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-last=Laidlay |editor-first=John Watson |editor-link=John Watson Laidlay |ref={{harvid|Laidlay &amp; al.|1848}} |editor4-last=Abel-Rémusat |editor4-first=Jean-Pierre |editor4-link=Jean-Pierre Abel-Rémusat |editor2-last=Klaproth |editor2-first=Julius |editor2-link=Julius Klaproth |editor3-last=De Landresse |editor3-first=Ernest Augustin Xavier Clerc |display-editors=1 |date=1848 |url=https://archive.org/details/pilgrimagefahia00rmgoog/page/n6/mode/2up |title=The Pilgrimage of Fa Hian from the French Edition of the Foe Koue Ki of MM. Remusat, Klaproth, and Landresse with Additional Notes and Illustrations |location=Calcutta |publisher=Baptist Mission Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Samuel |editor-last=Beal |editor-link=Samuel Beal |date=1869 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n1/mode/2up |title=Travels of Fah-Hian and Sung-Yun, Buddhist Pilgrims, from China to India (400 A.D. and 518 A.D.) |ref={{harvid|Beal|1869}} |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author2=Huisheng |author2-link=Huisheng (monk) |contribution=Records of Buddhist Countries by Chi Fah Hian of the Sung Dynasty |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/dli.csl.4774/page/n71/mode/2up |pages=1–174 }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert Allen |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |editor-last=Giles |date=1877 |title=''佛國記'' Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |publisher=Kelly &amp; Walsh |location=Shanghai |ref={{harvid|Giles|1877}} |url=https://archive.org/details/in.gov.ignca.19454/page/n3/mode/2up }}; revised and republished as {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=Herbert A. |editor-last=Giles |editor-link=Herbert Allen Giles |display-editors=0 |ref={{harvid|Giles|1923}} |date=1923 |url=https://archive.org/details/dli.pahar.2228/page/n1/mode/2up |title=The Travels of Fa-hsien (399{{ndash}}414 A.D.), or, Record of the Buddhistic Kingdoms |location=[[Cambridge, England|Cambridge]] |publisher=Cambridge University Press }}.
* {{citation |author=Xuanzang |author-link=Xuanzang |author2=Faxian |author2-link=Faxian |author3=Songyun |author3-link=Songyun (monk) |author4=Huisheng |author4-link=Huisheng (monk) |display-authors=0 |date=1884 |ref={{harvid|Beal|1884}} |editor-last=Beal |editor-first=Samuel |editor-link=Samuel Beal |title=Si-Yu-Ki: Buddhist Records of the Western World by Hiuen Tsiang |location=London |publisher=Trübner &amp; Co. |contribution=Travels of Fa-hian or ''Fo-kwŏ-ki'', Buddhist-Country-Records |contribution-url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n47/mode/2up |pages=xxiii–lxxiii |volume=I |url=https://archive.org/details/siyukibuddhistre01hsua/page/n25/mode/2up |series=Trübner's Oriental Series }}.
* {{citation |author=Faxian |author-link=Faxian |display-authors=0 |editor-first=James |editor-last=Legge |date=1886 |editor-link=James Legge |title=A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms, Being an Account by the Chinese Monk Fâ-hien of His Travels in India and Ceylon (A.D. 399{{ndash}}414) in Search of the Buddhist Books of Discipline |location=Oxford |publisher=Clarendon Press |url=https://www.gutenberg.org/files/2124/2124-h/2124-h.htm |ref={{harvid|Legge|1886}} }}.

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[فاهيان غار]]
* [[چيني ٻڌ مت]]
* [[ريشمي واٽ وسيلي ٻڌ مت جي پکيڙ]]
* [[شوان زانگ]]، سندس ''[[اولهائين علائقن جا احوال]]'' ۽ ان تي آڌاريل افسانوي تصنيف ''[[اولهه ڏانهن سفر]]''
* [[يي جِنگ (ڀڪشو)|يي جِنگ]] ۽ سندس ''[[ڏاکڻي سمنڊ کان موڪليل ٻڌ ڌرمي عملن جو احوال]]''
* [[سونگ يون (ڀڪشو)|سونگ يون]] ۽ [[هوئي شينگ (ڀڪشو)|هوئي شينگ]]، جن جي سفرن جا احوال ٻين ماخذن ۾ محفوظ آهن
* [[هيئيچو]] ۽ سندس ''[[وانگ اوچيونچڪگوڪ جيون]]''

== حوالا ==
=== حوالا ===
{{Reflist|30em}}

=== ڪتابيات ===
{{refbegin}}
* {{citation |last= |first= |contribution=Faxian |contribution-url=https://www.britannica.com/biography/Faxian |date=2019 |ref={{harvid|''Enc. Brit.''|2019}} |title=Britannica |publisher= |location= }}.
* {{citation |last=Deeg |first=Max |title=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Asian History |chapter=Chinese Buddhist Travelers: Faxian, Xuanzang, and Yijing |publisher=Oxford University Press |location=Oxford |year=2019 |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780190277727.013.217 |isbn=978-0-19-027772-7 }}.
* {{citation |last=Hodge |first=Stephen |date=2009 |url=http://www.buddhismuskunde.uni-hamburg.de/fileadmin/pdf/publikationen/The_Textual_Transmisssion_of_the_MPNS.pdf |title=The Textual Transmission of the Mahayana Mahaparinirvana-Sutra |location=Hamburg |publisher=University of Hamburg |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130928081601/http://www.buddhismuskunde.uni-hamburg.de/fileadmin/pdf/publikationen/The_Textual_Transmisssion_of_the_MPNS.pdf |archive-date=2013-09-28 }}.
* {{citation |last=Jain |first=Sandhya |author2=Meenakshi Jain |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Jain &amp; al.|2011}} |date=2011 |title=The India They Saw: Foreign Accounts |location=New Delhi |publisher=Ocean Books }}.
* {{citation |last=Li |first=Rongxi |author-mask=Li Rongxi |author2=Albert A. Dalia |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Li &amp; al.|2002}} |date=2002 |url=http://www.bdk.or.jp/pdf/bdk/digitaldl/dBET_LivesGreatMonksNuns_2002.pdf |title=The Lives of Great Monks and Nuns |location=[[برڪلي، ڪيليفورنيا|برڪلي]] |publisher=Numata Center for Translation and Research |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150920131638/http://www.bdk.or.jp/pdf/bdk/digitaldl/dBET_LivesGreatMonksNuns_2002.pdf |archive-date=2015-09-20 }}.
* {{citation |last=Průšek |first=Jaroslav |author-link=Jaroslav Průšek |author2=Zbigniew Słupski |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Průšek &amp; al.|1978}} |title=Dictionary of Oriental Literatures: East Asia |location= |publisher=Charles Tuttle |date=1978 }}.
* {{citation |last=Sen |first=Tansen |date=2006 |contribution-url=http://www.fom.sg/tours/ChinesePilgrims.pdf |contribution=The Travel Records of Chinese Pilgrims Faxian, Xuanzang, and Yijing |title=[[Education About Asia]] |volume=11 |issue=3 |pages=24–33 |publisher= |location= |access-date=2014-07-13 |archive-date=2014-07-13 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140713172856/http://www.fom.sg/tours/ChinesePilgrims.pdf |url-status=bot: unknown }}.
* {{citation |last=Shi |first=Huijiao |author-mask=Shi Huijiao |author2=Yang Tianshu |display-authors=1 |ref={{harvid|Shi &amp; al.|2022}} |date=2022 |editor-last=Ross |editor-first=Edward A. S. |display-editors=0 |title=The Biographies of Eminent Monks 高僧傳 |url=https://www.academia.edu/90233933 |location=Hong Kong |publisher=Centre of Buddhist Studies at the University of Hong Kong }}.
* {{citation |last=Walravens |first=Harmut |language=de |contribution=Stanislas Aignan Julien{{mdash}}Leben und Werk |trans-contribution=Stanislas Aignan Julien{{mdash}}Life and Work |title=Monumenta Serica |issue=1 |volume=62 |date=2014 |pages=261–333 |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |jstor=26768561 |location=Milton Park }}.
* {{citation |last=Weerawardane |first=Prasani |date=2009 |contribution-url=http://microsite.nl.sg/PDFs/BiblioAsia/BIBA_0502Jul09.pdf |contribution=Journey to the West: Dusty Roads, Stormy Seas and Transcendence |title=Biblioasia |volume=5 |issue=2 |pages=14–18 |publisher= |location= |access-date=2014-07-13 |archive-date=2014-07-13 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140713174328/http://microsite.nl.sg/PDFs/BiblioAsia/BIBA_0502Jul09.pdf |url-status=dead }}.
{{refend}}

== ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا ==
* {{Gutenberg author |id=824}}
* {{Internet Archive author}}
* [http://afe.easia.columbia.edu/special/travel_records.pdf فاهيان ۽ ٻيا چيني ياتري]، ڪولمبيا يونيورسٽي آرڪائيوز
* [http://21dzk.l.u-tokyo.ac.jp/SAT/T2085.html اصل چيني متن، تائيشو 2085]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20170206185521/http://dev.ddbc.edu.tw/han2e/tableFormatHtmls/T51n2085ARecordOfBuddhistKingdoms.html اصل چيني متن سان ليگ جو ترجمو، T 2085]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20080911144832/http://ebooks.adelaide.edu.au/f/fa-hien/f15l/index.html ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال'']، [[ايڊيليڊ يونيورسٽي]]
* [https://web.archive.org/web/20100726195545/http://ebooks.adelaide.edu.au/f/fa-hien/f15l/complete.html ''ٻڌ بادشاهتن جو احوال (ويب آرڪائيو تي مڪمل HTML)'']، [[ايڊيليڊ يونيورسٽي]]

{{Buddhism topics}}
{{Chinese travellers}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Faxian}}
[[Category:چيني کوجنا ڪندڙ]]
[[Category:ٻڌ مت جا چيني عالم]]
[[Category:سنسڪرت–چيني مترجم]]
[[Category:جن خاندان (266–420) جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:ليو سونگ جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:اتر ۽ ڏکڻ خاندانن جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:ياترا جا احوال]]
[[Category:337ع ۾ ڄاول]]
[[Category:چيني سفرناما لکندڙ]]
[[Category:هندستان جي تاريخ نگاري]]
[[Category:ڏکڻ ايشيا جا کوجنا ڪندڙ]]
[[Category:422ع ۾ وفاتون]]
[[Category:بعد واري زائو جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:جن خاندان (266–420) جا مترجم]]
[[Category:ليو سونگ جا مترجم]]
[[Category:چانگزي جا ماڻهو]]
[[Category:شانشي جا ليکڪ]]
[[Category:بعد واري چِن جا ٻڌ ڌرمي]]
[[Category:سورهين بادشاهتن جا ٻڌ ڀڪشو]]
[[Category:پنجين صديءَ جا سياح]]</text>
      <sha1>7os78cus4mpu2sfb15wzui5u59nr7y4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>مالڪنگڻي</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>39577</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394173</id>
      <parentid>211268</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:30:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394173</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3034" sha1="0et8g8eaezjuzcpptmnuc1inqcvvnew" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption = ''[[Celastrus scandens]]''
|taxon= Celastrus
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L. |website=Plants of the World Online |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|subdivision_ranks = Species
|subdivision = متن ڏسو
|synonyms = {{species list
|Evonimoides |Duhamel
|Evonymoides |Isnard ex Medik.
|Monocelastrus |F.T.Wang &amp; Tang
|Schieckea |H.Karst.
}}
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = Celastrus scandens
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ جمنا سپوريا ۽ سيلاسٽرس چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهن.&lt;ref name = POWO/&gt;


[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''Celastrus orbiculatus'']]
'''مالڪنگڻي''' ({{lang-en|Celastrus}}) هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ جمنا سپوريا ۽ سيلاسٽرس چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>0et8g8eaezjuzcpptmnuc1inqcvvnew</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394174</id>
      <parentid>394173</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:31:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394174</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3029" sha1="tt5n11nrz5x9dtibhogdx51qujl71lg" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption = ''[[Celastrus scandens]]''
|taxon= Celastrus
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L. |website=Plants of the World Online |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|subdivision_ranks = Species
|subdivision = متن ڏسو
|synonyms = {{species list
|Evonimoides |Duhamel
|Evonymoides |Isnard ex Medik.
|Monocelastrus |F.T.Wang &amp; Tang
|Schieckea |H.Karst.
}}
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = Celastrus scandens
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهن.&lt;ref name = POWO/&gt;


[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''Celastrus orbiculatus'']]
'''مالڪنگڻي''' ({{lang-en|Celastrus}}) هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ جمنا سپوريا ۽ سيلاسٽرس چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>tt5n11nrz5x9dtibhogdx51qujl71lg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394175</id>
      <parentid>394174</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:32:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394175</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2377" sha1="nwhkcfuh8a3o4zwxjjlaf8j6x0d7giv" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption = ''[[Celastrus scandens]]''
|taxon= Celastrus
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L. |website=Plants of the World Online |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|subdivision_ranks = Species
|subdivision = متن ڏسو
|synonyms = {{species list
|Evonimoides |Duhamel
|Evonymoides |Isnard ex Medik.
|Monocelastrus |F.T.Wang &amp; Tang
|Schieckea |H.Karst.
}}
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = Celastrus scandens
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهن.&lt;ref name = POWO/&gt;

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>nwhkcfuh8a3o4zwxjjlaf8j6x0d7giv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394176</id>
      <parentid>394175</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:36:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394176</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3539" sha1="9vls0dusvt3krp7cyqomeqmapgo0ns4" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption = ''[[Celastrus scandens]]''
|taxon= Celastrus
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L. |website=Plants of the World Online |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|subdivision_ranks = Species
|subdivision = متن ڏسو
|synonyms = {{species list
|Evonimoides |Duhamel
|Evonymoides |Isnard ex Medik.
|Monocelastrus |F.T.Wang &amp; Tang
|Schieckea |H.Karst.
}}
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = Celastrus scandens
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهن.&lt;ref name = POWO/&gt;

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== بيان ==
{{Unreferenced section|date=June 2026}}

هن جنس جي ٻوٽن جا پن وراڻي ترتيب وارا، سادا، بيضوي شڪل جا ۽ عام طور {{convert|5|-|20|cm|in|abbr=on}} ڊگها هوندا آهن. گل ننڍا، اڇا، گلابي يا سائي مائل هوندا آهن ۽ ڊگهن [[گلن جو ڇڳ]] (پينڪل) ۾ لڳندا آهن. انهن جو ڦر ٽن ڦاڪن وارو [[ٻير]] هوندو آهي.

اتر آمريڪا ۾ هن جنس کي عام طور '''بٽرسويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي، جيڪو غالباً شروعاتي آبادڪارن طرفان غير واسطيدار ٻوٽي ''[[سولينم ڊلڪامارا]]'' سان منجهائڻ سبب پيو.{{or|date=June 2026}} ''[[Celastrus orbiculatus|سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' اوڀر اتر آمريڪا جي ڪيترن ئي علائقن ۾ هڪ انتهائي نقصانڪار [[دخل انداز نوع]] سمجهي وڃي ٿي.

== جنسون ==

جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>9vls0dusvt3krp7cyqomeqmapgo0ns4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394177</id>
      <parentid>394176</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:44:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* جنسون */</comment>
      <origin>394177</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7085" sha1="jeaz2ecw4lqhjqn2yrjgy9swr49pws0" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption = ''[[Celastrus scandens]]''
|taxon= Celastrus
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L. |website=Plants of the World Online |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|subdivision_ranks = Species
|subdivision = متن ڏسو
|synonyms = {{species list
|Evonimoides |Duhamel
|Evonymoides |Isnard ex Medik.
|Monocelastrus |F.T.Wang &amp; Tang
|Schieckea |H.Karst.
}}
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = Celastrus scandens
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهن.&lt;ref name = POWO/&gt;

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== بيان ==
{{Unreferenced section|date=June 2026}}

هن جنس جي ٻوٽن جا پن وراڻي ترتيب وارا، سادا، بيضوي شڪل جا ۽ عام طور {{convert|5|-|20|cm|in|abbr=on}} ڊگها هوندا آهن. گل ننڍا، اڇا، گلابي يا سائي مائل هوندا آهن ۽ ڊگهن [[گلن جو ڇڳ]] (پينڪل) ۾ لڳندا آهن. انهن جو ڦر ٽن ڦاڪن وارو [[ٻير]] هوندو آهي.

اتر آمريڪا ۾ هن جنس کي عام طور '''بٽرسويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي، جيڪو غالباً شروعاتي آبادڪارن طرفان غير واسطيدار ٻوٽي ''[[سولينم ڊلڪامارا]]'' سان منجهائڻ سبب پيو.{{or|date=June 2026}} ''[[Celastrus orbiculatus|سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' اوڀر اتر آمريڪا جي ڪيترن ئي علائقن ۾ هڪ انتهائي نقصانڪار [[دخل انداز نوع]] سمجهي وڃي ٿي.

== جنسون ==

جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

== جنسون ==
جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

{{columns-list|colwidth=20em|
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ايڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Merr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اينگيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Maxim.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس آسٽرالس]]'' {{small|Harv. &amp; F.Muell.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪيسياريفوليئس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪونيئٽس]]'' {{small|(Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فليجيليئرس]]'' {{small|Rupr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فرانشيشيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيميئٽس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گلوڪوفيليس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گريناڊينسس]]'' {{small|Urb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هِنڊسي آئي]]'' {{small|Benth.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هرسوٽس]]'' {{small|H.F.Comber}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوماليئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|P.S.Hsu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوڪري]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪوئيڊيز]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪس]]'' {{small|(Oliv.) Warb. ex Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪوسانوئي]]'' {{small|Hayata}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس لينٽيسيليئٽس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميڊاگاسڪيرينسس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميمبرينيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مائيڪروڪارپس]]'' {{small|D.Don}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرموئيڊيز]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرمس]]'' {{small|Roxb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس نوووگنيئينسس]]'' {{small|Merr. &amp; L.M.Perry}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبلانسيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Chen H.Wang &amp; P.C.Tsoong}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبوواٽيفوليئس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu &amp; Z.X.Zhang}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينامينسس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينيڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Willd.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پرنگلي آئي]]'' {{small|Rose}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پنڪٽيئٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس رچي آئي]]'' {{small|A.Gray}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس روسٿورنيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ريوگوسس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]'' {{small|L.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽيفانوٽيئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|(Makino) Makino}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽائلوسس]]'' {{small|Wall.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس سبسپيڪيٽس]]'' {{small|Hook.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ٽونڪينينسس]]'' {{small|Pit.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وينيئوٽي آئي]]'' {{small|(H.Lév.) Rehder}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وائرينس]]'' {{small|(F.T.Wang &amp; T.Tang) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ولڪينيڪولا]]'' {{small|Donn.Sm.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس يولوئينسس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيجيانگينسس]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu, G.Y.Li &amp; Z.H.Chen}}
}}

== حوالا ==
{{Commonscat}}
{{Reflist}}

{{Taxonbar|from=Q811662}}
{{Authority control}}

[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي]]
[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي جون جنسون]]
[[زمرو:1753ع ۾ بيان ڪيل ٻوٽا]]
[[زمرو:ڪارل لينيئس پاران ناليل نباتاتي ٽيڪسا]]</text>
      <sha1>jeaz2ecw4lqhjqn2yrjgy9swr49pws0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394178</id>
      <parentid>394177</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:45:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394178</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7067" sha1="l8i5vqnai2mygryiosqs5qqk2bs5zrw" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption = ''[[Celastrus scandens]]''
|taxon= Celastrus
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L. |website=Plants of the World Online |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|subdivision_ranks = Species
|subdivision = متن ڏسو
|synonyms = {{species list
|Evonimoides |Duhamel
|Evonymoides |Isnard ex Medik.
|Monocelastrus |F.T.Wang &amp; Tang
|Schieckea |H.Karst.
}}
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = Celastrus scandens
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهي.

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== بيان ==
{{Unreferenced section|date=June 2026}}

هن جنس جي ٻوٽن جا پن وراڻي ترتيب وارا، سادا، بيضوي شڪل جا ۽ عام طور {{convert|5|-|20|cm|in|abbr=on}} ڊگها هوندا آهن. گل ننڍا، اڇا، گلابي يا سائي مائل هوندا آهن ۽ ڊگهن [[گلن جو ڇڳ]] (پينڪل) ۾ لڳندا آهن. انهن جو ڦر ٽن ڦاڪن وارو [[ٻير]] هوندو آهي.

اتر آمريڪا ۾ هن جنس کي عام طور '''بٽرسويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي، جيڪو غالباً شروعاتي آبادڪارن طرفان غير واسطيدار ٻوٽي ''[[سولينم ڊلڪامارا]]'' سان منجهائڻ سبب پيو.{{or|date=June 2026}} ''[[Celastrus orbiculatus|سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' اوڀر اتر آمريڪا جي ڪيترن ئي علائقن ۾ هڪ انتهائي نقصانڪار [[دخل انداز نوع]] سمجهي وڃي ٿي.

== جنسون ==

جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

== جنسون ==
جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

{{columns-list|colwidth=20em|
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ايڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Merr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اينگيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Maxim.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس آسٽرالس]]'' {{small|Harv. &amp; F.Muell.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪيسياريفوليئس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪونيئٽس]]'' {{small|(Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فليجيليئرس]]'' {{small|Rupr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فرانشيشيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيميئٽس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گلوڪوفيليس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گريناڊينسس]]'' {{small|Urb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هِنڊسي آئي]]'' {{small|Benth.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هرسوٽس]]'' {{small|H.F.Comber}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوماليئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|P.S.Hsu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوڪري]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪوئيڊيز]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪس]]'' {{small|(Oliv.) Warb. ex Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪوسانوئي]]'' {{small|Hayata}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس لينٽيسيليئٽس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميڊاگاسڪيرينسس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميمبرينيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مائيڪروڪارپس]]'' {{small|D.Don}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرموئيڊيز]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرمس]]'' {{small|Roxb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس نوووگنيئينسس]]'' {{small|Merr. &amp; L.M.Perry}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبلانسيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Chen H.Wang &amp; P.C.Tsoong}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبوواٽيفوليئس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu &amp; Z.X.Zhang}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينامينسس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينيڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Willd.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پرنگلي آئي]]'' {{small|Rose}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پنڪٽيئٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس رچي آئي]]'' {{small|A.Gray}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس روسٿورنيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ريوگوسس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]'' {{small|L.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽيفانوٽيئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|(Makino) Makino}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽائلوسس]]'' {{small|Wall.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس سبسپيڪيٽس]]'' {{small|Hook.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ٽونڪينينسس]]'' {{small|Pit.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وينيئوٽي آئي]]'' {{small|(H.Lév.) Rehder}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وائرينس]]'' {{small|(F.T.Wang &amp; T.Tang) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ولڪينيڪولا]]'' {{small|Donn.Sm.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس يولوئينسس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيجيانگينسس]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu, G.Y.Li &amp; Z.H.Chen}}
}}

== حوالا ==
{{Commonscat}}
{{Reflist}}

{{Taxonbar|from=Q811662}}
{{Authority control}}

[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي]]
[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي جون جنسون]]
[[زمرو:1753ع ۾ بيان ڪيل ٻوٽا]]
[[زمرو:ڪارل لينيئس پاران ناليل نباتاتي ٽيڪسا]]</text>
      <sha1>l8i5vqnai2mygryiosqs5qqk2bs5zrw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394179</id>
      <parentid>394178</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:45:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394179</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7045" sha1="1u1pmeetzx27332po1m5lbvmmz687r6" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption = ''[[Celastrus scandens]]''
|taxon= Celastrus
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L. |website=Plants of the World Online |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|subdivision_ranks = Species
|subdivision = متن ڏسو
|synonyms = {{species list
|Evonimoides |Duhamel
|Evonymoides |Isnard ex Medik.
|Monocelastrus |F.T.Wang &amp; Tang
|Schieckea |H.Karst.
}}
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = Celastrus scandens
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهي.

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== بيان ==
{{Unreferenced section|date=June 2026}}

هن جنس جي ٻوٽن جا پن وراڻي ترتيب وارا، سادا، بيضوي شڪل جا ۽ عام طور {{convert|5|-|20|cm|in|abbr=on}} ڊگها هوندا آهن. گل ننڍا، اڇا، گلابي يا سائي مائل هوندا آهن ۽ ڊگهن [[گلن جو ڇڳ]] (پينڪل) ۾ لڳندا آهن. انهن جو ڦر ٽن ڦاڪن وارو [[ٻير]] هوندو آهي.

اتر آمريڪا ۾ هن جنس کي عام طور '''بٽرسويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي، جيڪو غالباً شروعاتي آبادڪارن طرفان غير واسطيدار ٻوٽي ''[[سولينم ڊلڪامارا]]'' سان منجهائڻ سبب پيو.{{or|date=June 2026}} ''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' اوڀر اتر آمريڪا جي ڪيترن ئي علائقن ۾ هڪ انتهائي نقصانڪار [[دخل انداز نوع]] سمجهي وڃي ٿي.

== جنسون ==

جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

== جنسون ==
جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

{{columns-list|colwidth=20em|
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ايڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Merr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اينگيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Maxim.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس آسٽرالس]]'' {{small|Harv. &amp; F.Muell.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪيسياريفوليئس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪونيئٽس]]'' {{small|(Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فليجيليئرس]]'' {{small|Rupr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فرانشيشيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيميئٽس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گلوڪوفيليس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گريناڊينسس]]'' {{small|Urb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هِنڊسي آئي]]'' {{small|Benth.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هرسوٽس]]'' {{small|H.F.Comber}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوماليئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|P.S.Hsu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوڪري]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪوئيڊيز]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪس]]'' {{small|(Oliv.) Warb. ex Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪوسانوئي]]'' {{small|Hayata}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس لينٽيسيليئٽس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميڊاگاسڪيرينسس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميمبرينيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مائيڪروڪارپس]]'' {{small|D.Don}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرموئيڊيز]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرمس]]'' {{small|Roxb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس نوووگنيئينسس]]'' {{small|Merr. &amp; L.M.Perry}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبلانسيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Chen H.Wang &amp; P.C.Tsoong}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبوواٽيفوليئس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu &amp; Z.X.Zhang}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينامينسس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينيڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Willd.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پرنگلي آئي]]'' {{small|Rose}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پنڪٽيئٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس رچي آئي]]'' {{small|A.Gray}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس روسٿورنيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ريوگوسس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]'' {{small|L.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽيفانوٽيئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|(Makino) Makino}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽائلوسس]]'' {{small|Wall.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس سبسپيڪيٽس]]'' {{small|Hook.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ٽونڪينينسس]]'' {{small|Pit.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وينيئوٽي آئي]]'' {{small|(H.Lév.) Rehder}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وائرينس]]'' {{small|(F.T.Wang &amp; T.Tang) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ولڪينيڪولا]]'' {{small|Donn.Sm.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس يولوئينسس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيجيانگينسس]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu, G.Y.Li &amp; Z.H.Chen}}
}}

== حوالا ==
{{Commonscat}}
{{Reflist}}

{{Taxonbar|from=Q811662}}
{{Authority control}}

[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي]]
[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي جون جنسون]]
[[زمرو:1753ع ۾ بيان ڪيل ٻوٽا]]
[[زمرو:ڪارل لينيئس پاران ناليل نباتاتي ٽيڪسا]]</text>
      <sha1>1u1pmeetzx27332po1m5lbvmmz687r6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394180</id>
      <parentid>394179</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:46:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394180</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6863" sha1="azt0j1jmhwdfuxkhv5azm7h5vqtsafc" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption = ''[[Celastrus scandens]]''
|taxon= Celastrus
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L. |website=Plants of the World Online |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|subdivision_ranks = Species
|subdivision = متن ڏسو
|synonyms = {{species list
|Evonimoides |Duhamel
|Evonymoides |Isnard ex Medik.
|Monocelastrus |F.T.Wang &amp; Tang
|Schieckea |H.Karst.
}}
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = Celastrus scandens
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهي.

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== بيان ==
{{Unreferenced section|date=June 2026}}

هن جنس جي ٻوٽن جا پن وراڻي ترتيب وارا، سادا، بيضوي شڪل جا ۽ عام طور {{convert|5|-|20|cm|in|abbr=on}} ڊگها هوندا آهن. گل ننڍا، اڇا، گلابي يا سائي مائل هوندا آهن ۽ ڊگهن [[گلن جو ڇڳ]] (پينڪل) ۾ لڳندا آهن. انهن جو ڦر ٽن ڦاڪن وارو [[ٻير]] هوندو آهي.

اتر آمريڪا ۾ هن جنس کي عام طور '''بٽرسويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي، جيڪو غالباً شروعاتي آبادڪارن طرفان غير واسطيدار ٻوٽي ''[[سولينم ڊلڪامارا]]'' سان منجهائڻ سبب پيو.{{or|date=June 2026}} ''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' اوڀر اتر آمريڪا جي ڪيترن ئي علائقن ۾ هڪ انتهائي نقصانڪار [[دخل انداز نوع]] سمجهي وڃي ٿي.

== جنسون ==
جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

{{columns-list|colwidth=20em|
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ايڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Merr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اينگيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Maxim.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس آسٽرالس]]'' {{small|Harv. &amp; F.Muell.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪيسياريفوليئس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪونيئٽس]]'' {{small|(Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فليجيليئرس]]'' {{small|Rupr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فرانشيشيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيميئٽس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گلوڪوفيليس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گريناڊينسس]]'' {{small|Urb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هِنڊسي آئي]]'' {{small|Benth.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هرسوٽس]]'' {{small|H.F.Comber}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوماليئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|P.S.Hsu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوڪري]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪوئيڊيز]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪس]]'' {{small|(Oliv.) Warb. ex Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪوسانوئي]]'' {{small|Hayata}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس لينٽيسيليئٽس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميڊاگاسڪيرينسس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميمبرينيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مائيڪروڪارپس]]'' {{small|D.Don}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرموئيڊيز]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرمس]]'' {{small|Roxb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس نوووگنيئينسس]]'' {{small|Merr. &amp; L.M.Perry}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبلانسيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Chen H.Wang &amp; P.C.Tsoong}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبوواٽيفوليئس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu &amp; Z.X.Zhang}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينامينسس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينيڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Willd.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پرنگلي آئي]]'' {{small|Rose}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پنڪٽيئٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس رچي آئي]]'' {{small|A.Gray}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس روسٿورنيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ريوگوسس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]'' {{small|L.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽيفانوٽيئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|(Makino) Makino}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽائلوسس]]'' {{small|Wall.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس سبسپيڪيٽس]]'' {{small|Hook.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ٽونڪينينسس]]'' {{small|Pit.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وينيئوٽي آئي]]'' {{small|(H.Lév.) Rehder}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وائرينس]]'' {{small|(F.T.Wang &amp; T.Tang) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ولڪينيڪولا]]'' {{small|Donn.Sm.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس يولوئينسس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيجيانگينسس]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu, G.Y.Li &amp; Z.H.Chen}}
}}

== حوالا ==
{{Commonscat}}
{{Reflist}}

{{Taxonbar|from=Q811662}}
{{Authority control}}

[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي]]
[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي جون جنسون]]
[[زمرو:1753ع ۾ بيان ڪيل ٻوٽا]]
[[زمرو:ڪارل لينيئس پاران ناليل نباتاتي ٽيڪسا]]</text>
      <sha1>azt0j1jmhwdfuxkhv5azm7h5vqtsafc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394181</id>
      <parentid>394180</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:50:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394181</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6704" sha1="8cu48gexkyrm3vdqndlscd1ccf1n6wa" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption = ''[[Celastrus scandens]]''
|taxon= Celastrus
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web
|url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2
|title=''Celastrus'' L.
|website=[[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]]
|publisher=[[ڪيو شاهي نباتاتي باغ]]
|year=2026
|access-date=14 June 2026
}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = Celastrus scandens
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهي.

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== بيان ==
{{Unreferenced section|date=June 2026}}

هن جنس جي ٻوٽن جا پن وراڻي ترتيب وارا، سادا، بيضوي شڪل جا ۽ عام طور {{convert|5|-|20|cm|in|abbr=on}} ڊگها هوندا آهن. گل ننڍا، اڇا، گلابي يا سائي مائل هوندا آهن ۽ ڊگهن [[گلن جو ڇڳ]] (پينڪل) ۾ لڳندا آهن. انهن جو ڦر ٽن ڦاڪن وارو [[ٻير]] هوندو آهي.

اتر آمريڪا ۾ هن جنس کي عام طور '''بٽرسويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي، جيڪو غالباً شروعاتي آبادڪارن طرفان غير واسطيدار ٻوٽي ''[[سولينم ڊلڪامارا]]'' سان منجهائڻ سبب پيو.{{or|date=June 2026}} ''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' اوڀر اتر آمريڪا جي ڪيترن ئي علائقن ۾ هڪ انتهائي نقصانڪار [[دخل انداز نوع]] سمجهي وڃي ٿي.

== جنسون ==
جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

{{columns-list|colwidth=20em|
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ايڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Merr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اينگيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Maxim.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس آسٽرالس]]'' {{small|Harv. &amp; F.Muell.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪيسياريفوليئس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪونيئٽس]]'' {{small|(Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فليجيليئرس]]'' {{small|Rupr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فرانشيشيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيميئٽس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گلوڪوفيليس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گريناڊينسس]]'' {{small|Urb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هِنڊسي آئي]]'' {{small|Benth.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هرسوٽس]]'' {{small|H.F.Comber}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوماليئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|P.S.Hsu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوڪري]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪوئيڊيز]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪس]]'' {{small|(Oliv.) Warb. ex Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪوسانوئي]]'' {{small|Hayata}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس لينٽيسيليئٽس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميڊاگاسڪيرينسس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميمبرينيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مائيڪروڪارپس]]'' {{small|D.Don}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرموئيڊيز]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرمس]]'' {{small|Roxb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس نوووگنيئينسس]]'' {{small|Merr. &amp; L.M.Perry}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبلانسيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Chen H.Wang &amp; P.C.Tsoong}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبوواٽيفوليئس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu &amp; Z.X.Zhang}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينامينسس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينيڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Willd.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پرنگلي آئي]]'' {{small|Rose}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پنڪٽيئٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس رچي آئي]]'' {{small|A.Gray}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس روسٿورنيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ريوگوسس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]'' {{small|L.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽيفانوٽيئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|(Makino) Makino}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽائلوسس]]'' {{small|Wall.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس سبسپيڪيٽس]]'' {{small|Hook.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ٽونڪينينسس]]'' {{small|Pit.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وينيئوٽي آئي]]'' {{small|(H.Lév.) Rehder}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وائرينس]]'' {{small|(F.T.Wang &amp; T.Tang) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ولڪينيڪولا]]'' {{small|Donn.Sm.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس يولوئينسس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيجيانگينسس]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu, G.Y.Li &amp; Z.H.Chen}}
}}

== حوالا ==
{{Commonscat}}
{{Reflist}}

{{Taxonbar|from=Q811662}}
{{Authority control}}

[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي]]
[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي جون جنسون]]
[[زمرو:1753ع ۾ بيان ڪيل ٻوٽا]]
[[زمرو:ڪارل لينيئس پاران ناليل نباتاتي ٽيڪسا]]</text>
      <sha1>8cu48gexkyrm3vdqndlscd1ccf1n6wa</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394182</id>
      <parentid>394181</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:53:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394182</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6746" sha1="ncqnszb0om4a9xa5ofof6knsnhnmu07" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption =''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]''
|taxon= سيلاسٽرس
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web
|url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2
|title=''Celastrus'' L.
|website=[[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]]
|publisher=[[ڪيو شاهي نباتاتي باغ]]
|year=2026
|access-date=14 جون 2026
}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهي.

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== بيان ==
{{Unreferenced section|date=June 2026}}

هن جنس جي ٻوٽن جا پن وراڻي ترتيب وارا، سادا، بيضوي شڪل جا ۽ عام طور {{convert|5|-|20|cm|in|abbr=on}} ڊگها هوندا آهن. گل ننڍا، اڇا، گلابي يا سائي مائل هوندا آهن ۽ ڊگهن [[گلن جو ڇڳ]] (پينڪل) ۾ لڳندا آهن. انهن جو ڦر ٽن ڦاڪن وارو [[ٻير]] هوندو آهي.

اتر آمريڪا ۾ هن جنس کي عام طور '''بٽرسويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي، جيڪو غالباً شروعاتي آبادڪارن طرفان غير واسطيدار ٻوٽي ''[[سولينم ڊلڪامارا]]'' سان منجهائڻ سبب پيو.{{or|date=June 2026}} ''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' اوڀر اتر آمريڪا جي ڪيترن ئي علائقن ۾ هڪ انتهائي نقصانڪار [[دخل انداز نوع]] سمجهي وڃي ٿي.

== جنسون ==
جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

{{columns-list|colwidth=20em|
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ايڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Merr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اينگيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Maxim.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس آسٽرالس]]'' {{small|Harv. &amp; F.Muell.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪيسياريفوليئس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪونيئٽس]]'' {{small|(Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فليجيليئرس]]'' {{small|Rupr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فرانشيشيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيميئٽس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گلوڪوفيليس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گريناڊينسس]]'' {{small|Urb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هِنڊسي آئي]]'' {{small|Benth.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هرسوٽس]]'' {{small|H.F.Comber}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوماليئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|P.S.Hsu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوڪري]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪوئيڊيز]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪس]]'' {{small|(Oliv.) Warb. ex Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪوسانوئي]]'' {{small|Hayata}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس لينٽيسيليئٽس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميڊاگاسڪيرينسس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميمبرينيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مائيڪروڪارپس]]'' {{small|D.Don}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرموئيڊيز]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرمس]]'' {{small|Roxb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس نوووگنيئينسس]]'' {{small|Merr. &amp; L.M.Perry}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبلانسيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Chen H.Wang &amp; P.C.Tsoong}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبوواٽيفوليئس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu &amp; Z.X.Zhang}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينامينسس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينيڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Willd.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پرنگلي آئي]]'' {{small|Rose}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پنڪٽيئٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس رچي آئي]]'' {{small|A.Gray}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس روسٿورنيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ريوگوسس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]'' {{small|L.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽيفانوٽيئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|(Makino) Makino}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽائلوسس]]'' {{small|Wall.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس سبسپيڪيٽس]]'' {{small|Hook.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ٽونڪينينسس]]'' {{small|Pit.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وينيئوٽي آئي]]'' {{small|(H.Lév.) Rehder}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وائرينس]]'' {{small|(F.T.Wang &amp; T.Tang) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ولڪينيڪولا]]'' {{small|Donn.Sm.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس يولوئينسس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيجيانگينسس]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu, G.Y.Li &amp; Z.H.Chen}}
}}

== حوالا ==
{{Commonscat}}
{{Reflist}}

{{Taxonbar|from=Q811662}}
{{Authority control}}

[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي]]
[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي جون جنسون]]
[[زمرو:1753ع ۾ بيان ڪيل ٻوٽا]]
[[زمرو:ڪارل لينيئس پاران ناليل نباتاتي ٽيڪسا]]</text>
      <sha1>ncqnszb0om4a9xa5ofof6knsnhnmu07</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394183</id>
      <parentid>394182</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:54:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394183</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6768" sha1="6wz8df7m3wjbxwuqeiqzxmwvqvvkf26" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = مالڪنگڻي &lt;br/&gt;اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption =''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]''
|taxon= سيلاسٽرس
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web
|url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2
|title=''Celastrus'' L.
|website=[[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]]
|publisher=[[ڪيو شاهي نباتاتي باغ]]
|year=2026
|access-date=14 جون 2026
}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو'''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهي.

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== بيان ==
{{Unreferenced section|date=June 2026}}

هن جنس جي ٻوٽن جا پن وراڻي ترتيب وارا، سادا، بيضوي شڪل جا ۽ عام طور {{convert|5|-|20|cm|in|abbr=on}} ڊگها هوندا آهن. گل ننڍا، اڇا، گلابي يا سائي مائل هوندا آهن ۽ ڊگهن [[گلن جو ڇڳ]] (پينڪل) ۾ لڳندا آهن. انهن جو ڦر ٽن ڦاڪن وارو [[ٻير]] هوندو آهي.

اتر آمريڪا ۾ هن جنس کي عام طور '''بٽرسويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي، جيڪو غالباً شروعاتي آبادڪارن طرفان غير واسطيدار ٻوٽي ''[[سولينم ڊلڪامارا]]'' سان منجهائڻ سبب پيو.{{or|date=June 2026}} ''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' اوڀر اتر آمريڪا جي ڪيترن ئي علائقن ۾ هڪ انتهائي نقصانڪار [[دخل انداز نوع]] سمجهي وڃي ٿي.

== جنسون ==
جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

{{columns-list|colwidth=20em|
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ايڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Merr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اينگيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Maxim.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس آسٽرالس]]'' {{small|Harv. &amp; F.Muell.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪيسياريفوليئس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪونيئٽس]]'' {{small|(Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فليجيليئرس]]'' {{small|Rupr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فرانشيشيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيميئٽس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گلوڪوفيليس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گريناڊينسس]]'' {{small|Urb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هِنڊسي آئي]]'' {{small|Benth.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هرسوٽس]]'' {{small|H.F.Comber}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوماليئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|P.S.Hsu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوڪري]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪوئيڊيز]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪس]]'' {{small|(Oliv.) Warb. ex Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪوسانوئي]]'' {{small|Hayata}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس لينٽيسيليئٽس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميڊاگاسڪيرينسس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميمبرينيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مائيڪروڪارپس]]'' {{small|D.Don}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرموئيڊيز]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرمس]]'' {{small|Roxb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس نوووگنيئينسس]]'' {{small|Merr. &amp; L.M.Perry}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبلانسيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Chen H.Wang &amp; P.C.Tsoong}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبوواٽيفوليئس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu &amp; Z.X.Zhang}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينامينسس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينيڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Willd.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پرنگلي آئي]]'' {{small|Rose}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پنڪٽيئٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس رچي آئي]]'' {{small|A.Gray}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس روسٿورنيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ريوگوسس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]'' {{small|L.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽيفانوٽيئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|(Makino) Makino}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽائلوسس]]'' {{small|Wall.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس سبسپيڪيٽس]]'' {{small|Hook.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ٽونڪينينسس]]'' {{small|Pit.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وينيئوٽي آئي]]'' {{small|(H.Lév.) Rehder}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وائرينس]]'' {{small|(F.T.Wang &amp; T.Tang) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ولڪينيڪولا]]'' {{small|Donn.Sm.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس يولوئينسس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيجيانگينسس]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu, G.Y.Li &amp; Z.H.Chen}}
}}

== حوالا ==
{{Commonscat}}
{{Reflist}}

{{Taxonbar|from=Q811662}}
{{Authority control}}

[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي]]
[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي جون جنسون]]
[[زمرو:1753ع ۾ بيان ڪيل ٻوٽا]]
[[زمرو:ڪارل لينيئس پاران ناليل نباتاتي ٽيڪسا]]</text>
      <sha1>6wz8df7m3wjbxwuqeiqzxmwvqvvkf26</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394184</id>
      <parentid>394183</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T10:54:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394184</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6769" sha1="0n1pt23bu257b5se7jjbonfqn5qb1uf" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|ٻوٽن جي جنس}}

{{Automatic taxobox
|name = مالڪنگڻي &lt;br/&gt;اسٽاف وائين
|image = Celastrus scandens.jpg
|image_caption =''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]''
|taxon= سيلاسٽرس
|authority = [[ڪارل لينيئس|L.]]&lt;ref name=&quot;POWO&quot;&gt;{{cite web
|url=https://powo.science.kew.org/taxon/urn:lsid:ipni.org:names:30042347-2
|title=''Celastrus'' L.
|website=[[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]]
|publisher=[[ڪيو شاهي نباتاتي باغ]]
|year=2026
|access-date=14 جون 2026
}}&lt;/ref&gt;
|synonyms_ref = {{R|POWO}}
|type_species = سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس
|type_species_authority = L.&lt;ref name=&quot;IPNI&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ipni.org/n/30042347-2 |title=''Celastrus'' L., Sp. Pl. 1: 196 (1753), nom. cons. |website=International Plant Names Index (IPNI) |publisher=Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew |year=2026 |access-date=14 June 2026}}&lt;/ref&gt;
}}

'''مالڪنگڻي''' سائنسي نالو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' (''Celastrus'') انگريزي  ۾ جنھن کي '''اسٽاف وائين'''، '''اسٽاف ٽري''' يا '''بٽر سويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي،، هڪڙو مشھور ننڍو وڻ يا ٻوڙو آهي، جنھن جي کل لسي ٿي ٿئي، مگر ڪنڊا وڏا،  پن ننڍڙا، گل اڇا، خوشبودار ۽ سھڻا ٿا ٿينس. هن جي هڪڙي قسم جا گل ساوڙا ۽ پيلڙا ٿيندا آهن، جنهن کي دکن ۾ ڪنگڻي يا ڪرنگ ڪنگڻي سڏيندا آهن. انگريزيءَ ۾ ان کي جمنا سپوريا پڻ چوندا اٿس.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: باغ ۽ باغباني؛ ليکڪ: مرزا قليچ بيگ؛ ايڊيشن:1960ع؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي ادبي بورڊ]]، ڄامشورو، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;
اھو '''''سيلاسٽرس''''' [[سيلاسٽريسيئي]] خاندان جي ٻوٽن جي هڪ [[جنس (حياتيات)|جنس]] آهي. هن جنس ۾ جهنگڙن ۽ ولين جون 40 کان وڌيڪ جنسون شامل آهن، جيڪي اوڀر ايشيا، آسٽريليشيا، آفريڪا ۽ آمريڪا ۾ وڏي پيماني تي پکڙيل آهي.

[[Image:Celastrus orbiculatus.jpg|left|thumb|''سيلاسٽريس اوربيڪيليٽس'']]

== بيان ==
{{Unreferenced section|date=June 2026}}

هن جنس جي ٻوٽن جا پن وراڻي ترتيب وارا، سادا، بيضوي شڪل جا ۽ عام طور {{convert|5|-|20|cm|in|abbr=on}} ڊگها هوندا آهن. گل ننڍا، اڇا، گلابي يا سائي مائل هوندا آهن ۽ ڊگهن [[گلن جو ڇڳ]] (پينڪل) ۾ لڳندا آهن. انهن جو ڦر ٽن ڦاڪن وارو [[ٻير]] هوندو آهي.

اتر آمريڪا ۾ هن جنس کي عام طور '''بٽرسويٽ''' چيو ويندو آهي، جيڪو غالباً شروعاتي آبادڪارن طرفان غير واسطيدار ٻوٽي ''[[سولينم ڊلڪامارا]]'' سان منجهائڻ سبب پيو.{{or|date=June 2026}} ''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' اوڀر اتر آمريڪا جي ڪيترن ئي علائقن ۾ هڪ انتهائي نقصانڪار [[دخل انداز نوع]] سمجهي وڃي ٿي.

== جنسون ==
جون 2026ع مطابق، [[ٻوٽا آف دي ورلڊ آن لائن]] موجب هن جنس جون هيٺيون 44 جنسون قبول ڪيون وڃن ٿيون:

{{columns-list|colwidth=20em|
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ايڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Merr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اينگيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Maxim.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس آسٽرالس]]'' {{small|Harv. &amp; F.Muell.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪيسياريفوليئس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪونيئٽس]]'' {{small|(Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فليجيليئرس]]'' {{small|Rupr.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس فرانشيشيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيميئٽس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گلوڪوفيليس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس گريناڊينسس]]'' {{small|Urb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هِنڊسي آئي]]'' {{small|Benth.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هرسوٽس]]'' {{small|H.F.Comber}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوماليئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|P.S.Hsu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هوڪري]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪوئيڊيز]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس هائپولييوڪس]]'' {{small|(Oliv.) Warb. ex Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ڪوسانوئي]]'' {{small|Hayata}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس لينٽيسيليئٽس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميڊاگاسڪيرينسس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ميمبرينيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Prain}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مائيڪروڪارپس]]'' {{small|D.Don}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرموئيڊيز]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس مونوسپرمس]]'' {{small|Roxb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس نوووگنيئينسس]]'' {{small|Merr. &amp; L.M.Perry}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبلانسيفوليئس]]'' {{small|Chen H.Wang &amp; P.C.Tsoong}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوبوواٽيفوليئس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu &amp; Z.X.Zhang}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اوربيڪيوليٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينامينسس]]'' {{small|Lundell}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پينيڪيوليئٽس]]'' {{small|Willd.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پرنگلي آئي]]'' {{small|Rose}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس پنڪٽيئٽس]]'' {{small|Thunb.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس رچي آئي]]'' {{small|A.Gray}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس روسٿورنيئنس]]'' {{small|Loes.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ريوگوسس]]'' {{small|Rehder &amp; E.H.Wilson}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسڪينڊينس]]'' {{small|L.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽيفانوٽيئيفوليئس]]'' {{small|(Makino) Makino}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس اسٽائلوسس]]'' {{small|Wall.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس سبسپيڪيٽس]]'' {{small|Hook.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ٽونڪينينسس]]'' {{small|Pit.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وينيئوٽي آئي]]'' {{small|(H.Lév.) Rehder}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس وائرينس]]'' {{small|(F.T.Wang &amp; T.Tang) C.Y.Cheng &amp; T.C.Kao}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس ولڪينيڪولا]]'' {{small|Donn.Sm.}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس يولوئينسس]]'' {{small|X.Y.Mu}}
*''[[سيلاسٽرس جيجيانگينسس]]'' {{small|P.L.Chiu, G.Y.Li &amp; Z.H.Chen}}
}}

== حوالا ==
{{Commonscat}}
{{Reflist}}

{{Taxonbar|from=Q811662}}
{{Authority control}}

[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي]]
[[زمرو:سيلاسٽريسيئي جون جنسون]]
[[زمرو:1753ع ۾ بيان ڪيل ٻوٽا]]
[[زمرو:ڪارل لينيئس پاران ناليل نباتاتي ٽيڪسا]]</text>
      <sha1>0n1pt23bu257b5se7jjbonfqn5qb1uf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>رابطي جي ٻولي</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>40760</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394028</id>
      <parentid>333850</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:32:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[لنگئا فرانڪا]] کي [[عام ٻولي]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>333850</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="762" sha1="ts1nfyfdmr6xa3aroqg1pt5zfpks9d8" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]</text>
      <sha1>ts1nfyfdmr6xa3aroqg1pt5zfpks9d8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394030</id>
      <parentid>394028</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:33:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[عام ٻولي]] کي [[رابطي جي ٻولي]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>333850</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="762" sha1="ts1nfyfdmr6xa3aroqg1pt5zfpks9d8" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]</text>
      <sha1>ts1nfyfdmr6xa3aroqg1pt5zfpks9d8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394032</id>
      <parentid>394030</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:35:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394032</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94488" sha1="ixtdidt3yy4q1gmumgnkbpl9o3k25r3" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[French language]]}}
{{Use dmy dates|date=December 2018}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|French dictionary printed in 1830 detailing the [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] ]]

A '''lingua franca''' ({{IPAc-en|ˌ|l|ɪ|ŋ|ɡ|w|ə|_|ˈ|f|r|æ|ŋ|k|ə}}; {{literal translation|Frankish tongue}}; for plurals see {{section link|#Usage notes}}), also known as a '''bridge language''', '''common language''', '''trade language''', '''auxiliary language''', '''link language''', or '''language of wider communication''' ('''LWC'''), is a [[Natural language|language]] systematically used to make communication possible between groups of people who do not share a [[First language|native language]] or dialect, particularly when it is a third language that is distinct from both of the speakers' native languages.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas have developed around the world throughout human history, sometimes for commercial reasons (so-called &quot;trade languages&quot; facilitated trade), but also for cultural, religious, diplomatic and administrative convenience, and as a means of exchanging information between scientists and other scholars of different nationalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last1=Gordin|first1=Michael D.|title=Scientific Babel: How Science Was Done Before and After Global English|date=2015|publisher=University of Chicago Press|location=Chicago, Illinois|isbn=9780226000299}}&lt;/ref&gt; The term is taken from the medieval [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]], a [[Romance languages|Romance]]-based [[pidgin language]] used especially by traders in the [[Mediterranean Basin]] from the 11th to the 19th centuries.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; A [[world language]]—a language spoken internationally and by many people—is a language that may function as a global lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==See also==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Creole language}}
* {{annotated link|Global language system}}
* {{annotated link|Interlinguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Language contact}}
* [[List of countries by number of languages]]
* [[List of languages by number of native speakers]]
* [[List of languages by total number of speakers]]
* {{annotated link|Pidgin}}
* {{annotated link|Rosetta Stone}}
* {{annotated link|Trading zones|Trading zones (metaphor)}}
* {{annotated link|Universal language}}
* {{annotated link|Working language}}

==References==
{{Reflist}}

==Further reading==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==External links==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[Category:Lingua francas]]
[[Category:Languages by place in society]]
[[Category:Interlinguistics]]
[[Category:Italian words and phrases]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]</text>
      <sha1>ixtdidt3yy4q1gmumgnkbpl9o3k25r3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394033</id>
      <parentid>394032</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:36:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394033</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94461" sha1="6kaqi0og4v86n4zua53b5fpbaptn7kq" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|French dictionary printed in 1830 detailing the [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] ]]

A '''lingua franca''' ({{IPAc-en|ˌ|l|ɪ|ŋ|ɡ|w|ə|_|ˈ|f|r|æ|ŋ|k|ə}}; {{literal translation|Frankish tongue}}; for plurals see {{section link|#Usage notes}}), also known as a '''bridge language''', '''common language''', '''trade language''', '''auxiliary language''', '''link language''', or '''language of wider communication''' ('''LWC'''), is a [[Natural language|language]] systematically used to make communication possible between groups of people who do not share a [[First language|native language]] or dialect, particularly when it is a third language that is distinct from both of the speakers' native languages.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas have developed around the world throughout human history, sometimes for commercial reasons (so-called &quot;trade languages&quot; facilitated trade), but also for cultural, religious, diplomatic and administrative convenience, and as a means of exchanging information between scientists and other scholars of different nationalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last1=Gordin|first1=Michael D.|title=Scientific Babel: How Science Was Done Before and After Global English|date=2015|publisher=University of Chicago Press|location=Chicago, Illinois|isbn=9780226000299}}&lt;/ref&gt; The term is taken from the medieval [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]], a [[Romance languages|Romance]]-based [[pidgin language]] used especially by traders in the [[Mediterranean Basin]] from the 11th to the 19th centuries.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; A [[world language]]—a language spoken internationally and by many people—is a language that may function as a global lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==See also==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Creole language}}
* {{annotated link|Global language system}}
* {{annotated link|Interlinguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Language contact}}
* [[List of countries by number of languages]]
* [[List of languages by number of native speakers]]
* [[List of languages by total number of speakers]]
* {{annotated link|Pidgin}}
* {{annotated link|Rosetta Stone}}
* {{annotated link|Trading zones|Trading zones (metaphor)}}
* {{annotated link|Universal language}}
* {{annotated link|Working language}}

==References==
{{Reflist}}

==Further reading==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==External links==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[Category:Lingua francas]]
[[Category:Languages by place in society]]
[[Category:Interlinguistics]]
[[Category:Italian words and phrases]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]</text>
      <sha1>6kaqi0og4v86n4zua53b5fpbaptn7kq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394034</id>
      <parentid>394033</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:37:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394034</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94319" sha1="kyjykonru4odlyq6crhqu78y2e56ada" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|French dictionary printed in 1830 detailing the [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] ]]

A '''lingua franca''' ({{IPAc-en|ˌ|l|ɪ|ŋ|ɡ|w|ə|_|ˈ|f|r|æ|ŋ|k|ə}}; {{literal translation|Frankish tongue}}; for plurals see {{section link|#Usage notes}}), also known as a '''bridge language''', '''common language''', '''trade language''', '''auxiliary language''', '''link language''', or '''language of wider communication''' ('''LWC'''), is a [[Natural language|language]] systematically used to make communication possible between groups of people who do not share a [[First language|native language]] or dialect, particularly when it is a third language that is distinct from both of the speakers' native languages.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas have developed around the world throughout human history, sometimes for commercial reasons (so-called &quot;trade languages&quot; facilitated trade), but also for cultural, religious, diplomatic and administrative convenience, and as a means of exchanging information between scientists and other scholars of different nationalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last1=Gordin|first1=Michael D.|title=Scientific Babel: How Science Was Done Before and After Global English|date=2015|publisher=University of Chicago Press|location=Chicago, Illinois|isbn=9780226000299}}&lt;/ref&gt; The term is taken from the medieval [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]], a [[Romance languages|Romance]]-based [[pidgin language]] used especially by traders in the [[Mediterranean Basin]] from the 11th to the 19th centuries.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; A [[world language]]—a language spoken internationally and by many people—is a language that may function as a global lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==See also==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Creole language}}
* {{annotated link|Global language system}}
* {{annotated link|Interlinguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Language contact}}
* [[List of countries by number of languages]]
* [[List of languages by number of native speakers]]
* [[List of languages by total number of speakers]]
* {{annotated link|Pidgin}}
* {{annotated link|Rosetta Stone}}
* {{annotated link|Trading zones|Trading zones (metaphor)}}
* {{annotated link|Universal language}}
* {{annotated link|Working language}}

==References==
{{Reflist}}

==Further reading==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==External links==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[Category:Lingua francas]]
[[Category:Languages by place in society]]
[[Category:Interlinguistics]]
[[Category:Italian words and phrases]]</text>
      <sha1>kyjykonru4odlyq6crhqu78y2e56ada</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394035</id>
      <parentid>394034</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:41:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394035</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94509" sha1="772vl0paf97ahvny2y5rrxckcmd1tp3" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|French dictionary printed in 1830 detailing the [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] ]]

A '''lingua franca''' ({{IPAc-en|ˌ|l|ɪ|ŋ|ɡ|w|ə|_|ˈ|f|r|æ|ŋ|k|ə}}; {{literal translation|Frankish tongue}}; for plurals see {{section link|#Usage notes}}), also known as a '''bridge language''', '''common language''', '''trade language''', '''auxiliary language''', '''link language''', or '''language of wider communication''' ('''LWC'''), is a [[Natural language|language]] systematically used to make communication possible between groups of people who do not share a [[First language|native language]] or dialect, particularly when it is a third language that is distinct from both of the speakers' native languages.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas have developed around the world throughout human history, sometimes for commercial reasons (so-called &quot;trade languages&quot; facilitated trade), but also for cultural, religious, diplomatic and administrative convenience, and as a means of exchanging information between scientists and other scholars of different nationalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last1=Gordin|first1=Michael D.|title=Scientific Babel: How Science Was Done Before and After Global English|date=2015|publisher=University of Chicago Press|location=Chicago, Illinois|isbn=9780226000299}}&lt;/ref&gt; The term is taken from the medieval [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]], a [[Romance languages|Romance]]-based [[pidgin language]] used especially by traders in the [[Mediterranean Basin]] from the 11th to the 19th centuries.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; A [[world language]]—a language spoken internationally and by many people—is a language that may function as a global lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==See also==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Creole language}}
* {{annotated link|Global language system}}
* {{annotated link|Interlinguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Language contact}}
* [[List of countries by number of languages]]
* [[List of languages by number of native speakers]]
* [[List of languages by total number of speakers]]
* {{annotated link|Pidgin}}
* {{annotated link|Rosetta Stone}}
* {{annotated link|Trading zones|Trading zones (metaphor)}}
* {{annotated link|Universal language}}
* {{annotated link|Working language}}

==References==
{{Reflist}}

==Further reading==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>772vl0paf97ahvny2y5rrxckcmd1tp3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394036</id>
      <parentid>394035</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:42:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394036</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94512" sha1="swl8wfxr3zfsp2oe2h7cuhq3lws4ns9" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|French dictionary printed in 1830 detailing the [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] ]]

A '''lingua franca''' ({{IPAc-en|ˌ|l|ɪ|ŋ|ɡ|w|ə|_|ˈ|f|r|æ|ŋ|k|ə}}; {{literal translation|Frankish tongue}}; for plurals see {{section link|#Usage notes}}), also known as a '''bridge language''', '''common language''', '''trade language''', '''auxiliary language''', '''link language''', or '''language of wider communication''' ('''LWC'''), is a [[Natural language|language]] systematically used to make communication possible between groups of people who do not share a [[First language|native language]] or dialect, particularly when it is a third language that is distinct from both of the speakers' native languages.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas have developed around the world throughout human history, sometimes for commercial reasons (so-called &quot;trade languages&quot; facilitated trade), but also for cultural, religious, diplomatic and administrative convenience, and as a means of exchanging information between scientists and other scholars of different nationalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last1=Gordin|first1=Michael D.|title=Scientific Babel: How Science Was Done Before and After Global English|date=2015|publisher=University of Chicago Press|location=Chicago, Illinois|isbn=9780226000299}}&lt;/ref&gt; The term is taken from the medieval [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]], a [[Romance languages|Romance]]-based [[pidgin language]] used especially by traders in the [[Mediterranean Basin]] from the 11th to the 19th centuries.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; A [[world language]]—a language spoken internationally and by many people—is a language that may function as a global lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==See also==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Creole language}}
* {{annotated link|Global language system}}
* {{annotated link|Interlinguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Language contact}}
* [[List of countries by number of languages]]
* [[List of languages by number of native speakers]]
* [[List of languages by total number of speakers]]
* {{annotated link|Pidgin}}
* {{annotated link|Rosetta Stone}}
* {{annotated link|Trading zones|Trading zones (metaphor)}}
* {{annotated link|Universal language}}
* {{annotated link|Working language}}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==Further reading==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>swl8wfxr3zfsp2oe2h7cuhq3lws4ns9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394037</id>
      <parentid>394036</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:43:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* وڌيڪ مطالعو */</comment>
      <origin>394037</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94518" sha1="077bdk5faroae95lp4upgaez5xa2o32" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|French dictionary printed in 1830 detailing the [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] ]]

A '''lingua franca''' ({{IPAc-en|ˌ|l|ɪ|ŋ|ɡ|w|ə|_|ˈ|f|r|æ|ŋ|k|ə}}; {{literal translation|Frankish tongue}}; for plurals see {{section link|#Usage notes}}), also known as a '''bridge language''', '''common language''', '''trade language''', '''auxiliary language''', '''link language''', or '''language of wider communication''' ('''LWC'''), is a [[Natural language|language]] systematically used to make communication possible between groups of people who do not share a [[First language|native language]] or dialect, particularly when it is a third language that is distinct from both of the speakers' native languages.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas have developed around the world throughout human history, sometimes for commercial reasons (so-called &quot;trade languages&quot; facilitated trade), but also for cultural, religious, diplomatic and administrative convenience, and as a means of exchanging information between scientists and other scholars of different nationalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last1=Gordin|first1=Michael D.|title=Scientific Babel: How Science Was Done Before and After Global English|date=2015|publisher=University of Chicago Press|location=Chicago, Illinois|isbn=9780226000299}}&lt;/ref&gt; The term is taken from the medieval [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]], a [[Romance languages|Romance]]-based [[pidgin language]] used especially by traders in the [[Mediterranean Basin]] from the 11th to the 19th centuries.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; A [[world language]]—a language spoken internationally and by many people—is a language that may function as a global lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==See also==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Creole language}}
* {{annotated link|Global language system}}
* {{annotated link|Interlinguistics}}
* {{annotated link|Language contact}}
* [[List of countries by number of languages]]
* [[List of languages by number of native speakers]]
* [[List of languages by total number of speakers]]
* {{annotated link|Pidgin}}
* {{annotated link|Rosetta Stone}}
* {{annotated link|Trading zones|Trading zones (metaphor)}}
* {{annotated link|Universal language}}
* {{annotated link|Working language}}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>077bdk5faroae95lp4upgaez5xa2o32</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394038</id>
      <parentid>394037</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:50:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394038</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94366" sha1="h870o52iuqgysro72gc62o5bg28d6p4" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|French dictionary printed in 1830 detailing the [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] ]]

A '''lingua franca''' ({{IPAc-en|ˌ|l|ɪ|ŋ|ɡ|w|ə|_|ˈ|f|r|æ|ŋ|k|ə}}; {{literal translation|Frankish tongue}}; for plurals see {{section link|#Usage notes}}), also known as a '''bridge language''', '''common language''', '''trade language''', '''auxiliary language''', '''link language''', or '''language of wider communication''' ('''LWC'''), is a [[Natural language|language]] systematically used to make communication possible between groups of people who do not share a [[First language|native language]] or dialect, particularly when it is a third language that is distinct from both of the speakers' native languages.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas have developed around the world throughout human history, sometimes for commercial reasons (so-called &quot;trade languages&quot; facilitated trade), but also for cultural, religious, diplomatic and administrative convenience, and as a means of exchanging information between scientists and other scholars of different nationalities.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last1=Gordin|first1=Michael D.|title=Scientific Babel: How Science Was Done Before and After Global English|date=2015|publisher=University of Chicago Press|location=Chicago, Illinois|isbn=9780226000299}}&lt;/ref&gt; The term is taken from the medieval [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]], a [[Romance languages|Romance]]-based [[pidgin language]] used especially by traders in the [[Mediterranean Basin]] from the 11th to the 19th centuries.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; A [[world language]]—a language spoken internationally and by many people—is a language that may function as a global lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>h870o52iuqgysro72gc62o5bg28d6p4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394039</id>
      <parentid>394038</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T14:12:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394039</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95627" sha1="pqtcx9i7x3w33k5z9z6jt2uy7z3s53w" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.  ]]

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي. هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (Global Lingua franca) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي. 

== خاصيتون ==

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==

== مثالون ==
.&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last1=Gordin|first1=Michael D.|title=Scientific Babel: How Science Was Done Before and After Global English|date=2015|publisher=University of Chicago Press|location=Chicago, Illinois|isbn=9780226000299}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

The term is taken from the medieval [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]], a [[Romance languages|Romance]]-based [[pidgin language]] used especially by traders in the [[Mediterranean Basin]] from the 11th to the 19th centuries.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; A [[world language]]—a language spoken internationally and by many people—is a language that may function as a global lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>pqtcx9i7x3w33k5z9z6jt2uy7z3s53w</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394040</id>
      <parentid>394039</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T14:13:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394040</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94485" sha1="jahok0ukuashgrrpv0c9rh4meys2dij" xml:space="preserve">'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.  ]]

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي. هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (Global Lingua franca) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي. 

== خاصيتون ==

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>jahok0ukuashgrrpv0c9rh4meys2dij</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394041</id>
      <parentid>394040</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T14:15:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394041</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95361" sha1="l0mu99vrzeuxpuejcfwusq6igoatyn2" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي. هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (Global Lingua franca) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.


The term is taken from the medieval [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]], a [[Romance languages|Romance]]-based [[pidgin language]] used especially by traders in the [[Mediterranean Basin]] from the 11th to the 19th centuries.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; A [[world language]]—a language spoken internationally and by many people—is a language that may function as a global lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== خاصيتون ==

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>l0mu99vrzeuxpuejcfwusq6igoatyn2</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394042</id>
      <parentid>394041</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T14:56:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394042</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95015" sha1="qsg9541hqdcfmpfrniouqkj7l5i4d05" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== خاصيتون ==

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>qsg9541hqdcfmpfrniouqkj7l5i4d05</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394043</id>
      <parentid>394042</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T15:15:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* استعمال */</comment>
      <origin>394043</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95563" sha1="izzier4222cvqvehft3zty7vnsfb2zo" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== خاصيتون ==

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Usage notes==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>izzier4222cvqvehft3zty7vnsfb2zo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394044</id>
      <parentid>394043</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T15:16:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394044</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="93895" sha1="nbmw2sv28nrqluudvq43zw6449zmraw" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== خاصيتون ==

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>nbmw2sv28nrqluudvq43zw6449zmraw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394045</id>
      <parentid>394044</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T15:16:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* استعمال */</comment>
      <origin>394045</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95550" sha1="8s1kudae1ko9ds4vi37rw6y18z884o7" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== خاصيتون ==

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.

==
The term is well established in its naturalization to English, so major dictionaries do not [[Italic type|italicize]] it as a &quot;foreign&quot; term.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Its plurals in English are ''lingua francas'' and ''linguae francae'',&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; with the former being the first&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt; or only&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt; form listed in major dictionaries, while the latter is rarely used.

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>8s1kudae1ko9ds4vi37rw6y18z884o7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394046</id>
      <parentid>394045</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T15:19:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* استعمال */</comment>
      <origin>394046</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95178" sha1="q139qgiyz03ab7swqx5s9kaf6ailxop" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== خاصيتون ==

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>q139qgiyz03ab7swqx5s9kaf6ailxop</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394047</id>
      <parentid>394046</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T15:20:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394047</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="89120" sha1="ft3fppqn8l1wudi3hd9esmnj77eism8" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== خاصيتون ==

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>ft3fppqn8l1wudi3hd9esmnj77eism8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394048</id>
      <parentid>394047</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T15:20:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394048</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95175" sha1="9h3t93f0pbo8p2929dwrtrwh6wlv085" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
==Characteristics==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>9h3t93f0pbo8p2929dwrtrwh6wlv085</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394049</id>
      <parentid>394048</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T15:25:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394049</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="99244" sha1="9no1pcqto9v5w7d5iq2z7qoksonyw1m" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|Trade languages of the world in 1908 from ''The Harmsworth Atlas and Gazetteer'']]
1908 ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون ٻوليون واپار ڪيون ويون. * ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگوا فرانڪا آهي. لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي. * تنهن ڪري، لنگوا فرانڪا آهن. ڪريول ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿو جيڪا هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي. * لنگوا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊن يا ڪريول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريول کي عام طور تي پڊن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي. گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگوا فرينڪا جهڙوڪ فرينچ وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿا. اڳ ۾ موجود لنگوا فرينڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن ۾ ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ آهن. ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا، ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن. * جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي. هڪ لنگوا فرينڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ (زور) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ (زور) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. * جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>9no1pcqto9v5w7d5iq2z7qoksonyw1m</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394050</id>
      <parentid>394049</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T15:27:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* خاصيتون */</comment>
      <origin>394050</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="99153" sha1="q26nezbz3if4kxspuiyemyps7eqm3v0" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگوا فرانڪا آهي. لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي. * تنهن ڪري، لنگوا فرانڪا آهن. ڪريول ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿو جيڪا هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي. * لنگوا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊن يا ڪريول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريول کي عام طور تي پڊن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي. گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگوا فرينڪا جهڙوڪ فرينچ وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿا. اڳ ۾ موجود لنگوا فرينڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن ۾ ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ آهن. ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا، ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن. * جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي. هڪ لنگوا فرينڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ (زور) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ (زور) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. * جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.

Any language regularly used for communication between people who do not share a native language is a lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; Lingua franca is a functional term, independent of any linguistic history or language structure.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Pidgin]]s are therefore lingua francas; [[creole languages|creoles]] and arguably [[mixed language]]s may similarly be used for communication between language groups. However, the term ''lingua franca'' is equally applicable to a non-creole language native to one nation, often a colonial power, learned as a [[second language]] and used for communication between diverse language communities in a colony or former colony.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Lingua francas are often pre-existing languages with native speakers, but they can also be pidgins or creoles developed for that specific region or context. Pidgins are rapidly developed and simplified combinations of two or more established languages, while creoles are generally viewed as pidgins that have evolved into fully complex languages in the course of adaptation by subsequent generations.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; Often, pre-existing lingua francas such as French are used to facilitate intercommunication in large-scale trade or political matters, while pidgins and creoles often arise out of colonial situations and a specific need for communication between colonists and indigenous peoples.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; Pre-existing lingua francas are generally widespread, highly developed languages with many native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; Conversely, pidgins are very simplified means of communication, containing loose structuring, few grammatical rules, and possessing few or no native speakers. [[Creole language|Creole]] languages are more developed than their ancestral pidgins, utilizing more complex structure, grammar, and vocabulary, as well as having substantial communities of native speakers.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Whereas a [[vernacular]] language is the native language of a specific geographical community,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; a lingua franca is used beyond the boundaries of its original community, for trade, religious, political, or academic reasons.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; For example, [[English language|English]] is a {{Emphasis|vernacular}} in the [[United Kingdom]] but it is used as a {{Emphasis|lingua franca}} in the [[Philippines]], alongside [[Filipino language|Filipino]]. Likewise, [[Arabic language|Arabic]], [[French language|French]], [[Standard Chinese]], [[Russian language|Russian]] and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] serve similar purposes as industrial and educational lingua francas across regional and national boundaries.

Even though they are used as bridge languages, [[international auxiliary language]]s such as [[Esperanto]] have not had a great degree of adoption, so they are not described as lingua francas.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>q26nezbz3if4kxspuiyemyps7eqm3v0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394051</id>
      <parentid>394050</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T16:06:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* خاصيتون */</comment>
      <origin>394051</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="96544" sha1="tfzd8phpkkcw6djj0l17uctn8khoxoe" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Etymology==
The term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Through changes of the term in literature, ''lingua franca'' has come to be interpreted as a general term for pidgins, creoles, and some or all forms of vehicular languages. This transition in meaning has been attributed to the idea that pidgin languages only became widely known from the 16th century on due to European colonization of continents such as The Americas, Africa, and Asia. During this time, the need for a term to address these pidgin languages arose, hence the shift in the meaning of Lingua Franca from a single proper noun to a common noun encompassing a large class of pidgin languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

As recently as the late 20th century, some restricted the use of the generic term to mean only mixed languages that are used as vehicular languages, its original meaning.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

Douglas Harper's ''Online Etymology Dictionary'' states that the term ''Lingua Franca'' (as the name of the particular language) was first recorded in English during the 1670s,&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; although an even earlier example of the use of it in English is attested from 1632, where it is also referred to as &quot;Bastard Spanish&quot;.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>tfzd8phpkkcw6djj0l17uctn8khoxoe</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394053</id>
      <parentid>394051</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:11:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* Etymology */</comment>
      <origin>394053</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="98926" sha1="pwftos05bqj6i3lrgiq2desf1vunsh0" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Etymology==
اصطلاح &quot;لنگوا فرانڪا&quot; ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا (جنهن کي سئبر پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي) مان نڪتل آهي، اها پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا ليونٽ ۽ اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين سمنڊ جي آس پاس جا ماڻهو وچين دور جي آخر کان 18 صدي تائين واپار ۽ سفارتڪاري جي مکيه ٻولي طور استعمال ڪندا هئا، خاص طور تي نشاۃِ ثانيه جي دور ۾. ان عرصي دوران، اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين ۾ خاص طور تي اطالوي ۽ اولهه ميڊيٽرينين ۾ اسپيني جو هڪ آسان نسخو، جنهن ۾ يوناني، سلاويڪ ٻولين، عربي ۽ ترڪي مان ڪيترائي قرض ورتل لفظ شامل هئا، علائقي جي &quot;لنگئا فرانڪا&quot; طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيڻ لڳو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه عالمن جو دعويٰ آهي ته ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا صرف گهٽ استعمال ٿيندڙ اطالوي هئي. 

لنگئا فرانڪا (مخصوص ٻولي) ۾، &quot;لنگئا&quot; اطالوي مان آهي جنهن جو مطلب &quot;هڪ ٻولي&quot; آهي. &quot;فرانڪا&quot; يوناني ٻولي جي لفظ &quot;فرانڪوئي&quot; (Φρᾰ́γκοι).۽ عربي ٻولي جي لفظ،  &quot;إِفْرَنْجِي&quot; سان لاڳاپيل آهي ۽ ان جي برابر اطالوي پڻ آهي. ٽنهي صورتن ۾، لفظي معنيٰ 'فرئنڪش' آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ سڌو ترجمو ٿئي ٿو: 'فرئنڪس جي ٻولي'. بازنطيني سلطنت جي آخر ۾، فرئنڪس هڪ اصطلاح هئي، جيڪي سڀني مغربي يورپين تي لاڳو ٿيندي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:9&quot; /&gt;

ادب ۾ اصطلاح جي تبديلين ذريعي، لنگئا فرانڪا کي پجن، ڪريئول ۽ گاڏين جي ٻولين جي ڪجهه يا سڀني شڪلن لاءِ هڪ عام اصطلاح طور تعبير ڪيو ويو آهي. معنيٰ ۾ هي تبديلي ان خيال سان منسوب ڪئي وئي آهي ته پجن ٻوليون صرف 16هين صدي کان آمريڪا، آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جهڙن کنڊن جي يورپي نوآبادي جي ڪري وڏي پيماني تي مشهور ٿيون. انهيءَ دوران، انهن پِڊجن ٻولين کي خطاب ڪرڻ لاءِ هڪ اصطلاح جي ضرورت پيدا ٿي، تنهن ڪري لنگئا فرانڪا جي معنيٰ ۾ هڪ واحد خاص اسم کان هڪ عام اسم ڏانهن تبديلي آئي جيڪا پِڊجن ٻولين جي هڪ وڏي طبقي کي شامل ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

20هين صدي جي آخر ۾، ڪجهه ماڻهن عام اصطلاح جي استعمال کي صرف مخلوط ٻولين جي معنيٰ تائين محدود ڪيو جيڪي، ان جي اصل معنيٰ ۾ گاڏين جي ٻولين طور استعمال ٿين ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

ڊگلس هارپر جي آن لائن ايٽائمولوجي ڊڪشنري ۾ چيو ويو آهي ته اصطلاح لنگئا فرانڪا (خاص ٻولي جي نالي جي طور تي)&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; پهريون ڀيرو 1670ع جي ڏهاڪي دوران انگريزي ۾ رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيتوڻيڪ انگريزي ۾ ان جي استعمال جي هڪ اڳوڻي مثال 1632ع کان تصديق ٿيل آهي، جتي ان کي &quot;باسٽرڊ اسپينش&quot; پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

term ''lingua franca'' derives from [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] (also known as ''Sabir''), the pidgin language that people around the [[Levant]] and the eastern Mediterranean Sea used as the main language of commerce and diplomacy from the late [[Middle Ages]] to the 18th century, most notably during the [[Renaissance era]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt; During that period, a simplified version of mainly [[Italian language|Italian]] in the eastern Mediterranean and [[Spanish language|Spanish]] in the western Mediterranean that incorporated many [[loanword]]s from [[Greek language|Greek]], [[Slavic languages]], [[Arabic]], and [[Turkish language|Turkish]] came to be widely used as the &quot;lingua franca&quot; of the region, although some scholars claim that the Mediterranean Lingua Franca was just poorly used Italian.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt;

In Lingua Franca (the specific language), {{Lang|pml|lingua}} is from the Italian for 'a language'. {{Lang|pml|Franca}} is related to Greek {{Lang|grc|Φρᾰ́γκοι}} ({{Lang|grc|[[w:Phránkoi|Phránkoi]]}}) and Arabic {{Lang|ar|إِفْرَنْجِي}} ({{Lang|ar-Latn|ʾifranjiyy}}) as well as the equivalent Italian—in all three cases, the literal sense is '[[Frankish language|Frankish]]', leading to the direct translation: 'language of the [[Franks]]'. During the late [[Byzantine Empire]], ''Franks'' was a term that applied to all Western Europeans.&lt;ref name=&quot;:9&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>pwftos05bqj6i3lrgiq2desf1vunsh0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394054</id>
      <parentid>394053</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:14:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* Etymology */</comment>
      <origin>394054</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="97534" sha1="5dh2fdkh98di620eb8xmuoy252u6l1m" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Etymology==
اصطلاح &quot;لنگوا فرانڪا&quot; ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا (جنهن کي سئبر پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي) مان نڪتل آهي، اها پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا ليونٽ ۽ اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين سمنڊ جي آس پاس جا ماڻهو وچين دور جي آخر کان 18 صدي تائين، خاص طور تي نشاۃِ ثانيه جي دور ۾، واپار ۽ سفارتڪاري جي مکيه ٻولي طور استعمال ڪندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان عرصي دوران، اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين ۾ خاص طور تي اطالوي ۽ اولهه ميڊيٽرينين ۾ اسپيني جو هڪ آسان نسخو، جنهن ۾ يوناني، سلاويڪ ٻولين، عربي ۽ ترڪي مان ڪيترائي قرض ورتل لفظ شامل هئا، علائقي جي &quot;لنگئا فرانڪا&quot; طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيڻ لڳو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه عالمن جو دعويٰ آهي ته ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا صرف گهٽ استعمال ٿيندڙ اطالوي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

لنگئا فرانڪا (مخصوص ٻولي) ۾، &quot;لنگئا&quot; اطالوي مان آهي جنهن جو مطلب &quot;هڪ ٻولي&quot; آهي. &quot;فرانڪا&quot; يوناني ٻولي جي لفظ &quot;فرانڪوئي&quot; (Φρᾰ́γκοι).۽ عربي ٻولي جي لفظ،  &quot;إِفْرَنْجِي&quot; سان لاڳاپيل آهي ۽ ان جي برابر اطالوي پڻ آهي. ٽنهي صورتن ۾، لفظي معنيٰ 'فرئنڪش' آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ سڌو ترجمو ٿئي ٿو: 'فرئنڪس جي ٻولي'. بازنطيني سلطنت جي آخر ۾، فرئنڪس هڪ اصطلاح هئي، جيڪي سڀني مغربي يورپين تي لاڳو ٿيندي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:9&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ادب ۾ اصطلاح جي تبديلين ذريعي، لنگئا فرانڪا کي پجن، ڪريئول ۽ گاڏين جي ٻولين جي ڪجهه يا سڀني شڪلن لاءِ هڪ عام اصطلاح طور تعبير ڪيو ويو آهي. معنيٰ ۾ هي تبديلي ان خيال سان منسوب ڪئي وئي آهي ته پجن ٻوليون صرف 16هين صدي کان آمريڪا، آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جهڙن کنڊن جي يورپي نوآبادي جي ڪري وڏي پيماني تي مشهور ٿيون. انهيءَ دوران، انهن پِڊجن ٻولين کي خطاب ڪرڻ لاءِ هڪ اصطلاح جي ضرورت پيدا ٿي، تنهن ڪري لنگئا فرانڪا جي معنيٰ ۾ هڪ واحد خاص اسم کان هڪ عام اسم ڏانهن تبديلي آئي جيڪا پِڊجن ٻولين جي هڪ وڏي طبقي کي شامل ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

20هين صدي جي آخر ۾، ڪجهه ماڻهن عام اصطلاح جي استعمال کي صرف مخلوط ٻولين جي معنيٰ تائين محدود ڪيو جيڪي، ان جي اصل معنيٰ ۾ گاڏين جي ٻولين طور استعمال ٿين ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

ڊگلس هارپر جي آن لائن ايٽائمولوجي ڊڪشنري ۾ چيو ويو آهي ته اصطلاح لنگئا فرانڪا (خاص ٻولي جي نالي جي طور تي)&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; پهريون ڀيرو 1670ع جي ڏهاڪي دوران انگريزي ۾ رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيتوڻيڪ انگريزي ۾ ان جي استعمال جي هڪ اڳوڻي مثال 1632ع کان تصديق ٿيل آهي، جتي ان کي &quot;باسٽرڊ اسپينش&quot; پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>5dh2fdkh98di620eb8xmuoy252u6l1m</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394055</id>
      <parentid>394054</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:15:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394055</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="90698" sha1="emk8n5rfba5fbtj3y5zpj5int1r3nee" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== اشتقاق ==

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>emk8n5rfba5fbtj3y5zpj5int1r3nee</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394056</id>
      <parentid>394055</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:16:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* اشتقاق */</comment>
      <origin>394056</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="97517" sha1="3xyowbh1zpmu3htb4chsi6jrk4irx8z" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==اشتقاق==
اصطلاح &quot;لنگوا فرانڪا&quot; ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا (جنهن کي سئبر پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي) مان نڪتل آهي، اها پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا ليونٽ ۽ اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين سمنڊ جي آس پاس جا ماڻهو وچين دور جي آخر کان 18 صدي تائين، خاص طور تي نشاۃِ ثانيه جي دور ۾، واپار ۽ سفارتڪاري جي مکيه ٻولي طور استعمال ڪندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان عرصي دوران، اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين ۾ خاص طور تي اطالوي ۽ اولهه ميڊيٽرينين ۾ اسپيني جو هڪ آسان نسخو، جنهن ۾ يوناني، سلاويڪ ٻولين، عربي ۽ ترڪي مان ڪيترائي قرض ورتل لفظ شامل هئا، علائقي جي &quot;لنگئا فرانڪا&quot; طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيڻ لڳو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه عالمن جو دعويٰ آهي ته ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا صرف گهٽ استعمال ٿيندڙ اطالوي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

لنگئا فرانڪا (مخصوص ٻولي) ۾، &quot;لنگئا&quot; اطالوي مان آهي جنهن جو مطلب &quot;هڪ ٻولي&quot; آهي. &quot;فرانڪا&quot; يوناني ٻولي جي لفظ &quot;فرانڪوئي&quot; (Φρᾰ́γκοι).۽ عربي ٻولي جي لفظ،  &quot;إِفْرَنْجِي&quot; سان لاڳاپيل آهي ۽ ان جي برابر اطالوي پڻ آهي. ٽنهي صورتن ۾، لفظي معنيٰ 'فرئنڪش' آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ سڌو ترجمو ٿئي ٿو: 'فرئنڪس جي ٻولي'. بازنطيني سلطنت جي آخر ۾، فرئنڪس هڪ اصطلاح هئي، جيڪي سڀني مغربي يورپين تي لاڳو ٿيندي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:9&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ادب ۾ اصطلاح جي تبديلين ذريعي، لنگئا فرانڪا کي پجن، ڪريئول ۽ گاڏين جي ٻولين جي ڪجهه يا سڀني شڪلن لاءِ هڪ عام اصطلاح طور تعبير ڪيو ويو آهي. معنيٰ ۾ هي تبديلي ان خيال سان منسوب ڪئي وئي آهي ته پجن ٻوليون صرف 16هين صدي کان آمريڪا، آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جهڙن کنڊن جي يورپي نوآبادي جي ڪري وڏي پيماني تي مشهور ٿيون. انهيءَ دوران، انهن پِڊجن ٻولين کي خطاب ڪرڻ لاءِ هڪ اصطلاح جي ضرورت پيدا ٿي، تنهن ڪري لنگئا فرانڪا جي معنيٰ ۾ هڪ واحد خاص اسم کان هڪ عام اسم ڏانهن تبديلي آئي جيڪا پِڊجن ٻولين جي هڪ وڏي طبقي کي شامل ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

20هين صدي جي آخر ۾، ڪجهه ماڻهن عام اصطلاح جي استعمال کي صرف مخلوط ٻولين جي معنيٰ تائين محدود ڪيو جيڪي، ان جي اصل معنيٰ ۾ گاڏين جي ٻولين طور استعمال ٿين ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

ڊگلس هارپر جي آن لائن ايٽائمولوجي ڊڪشنري ۾ چيو ويو آهي ته اصطلاح لنگئا فرانڪا (خاص ٻولي جي نالي جي طور تي)&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; پهريون ڀيرو 1670ع جي ڏهاڪي دوران انگريزي ۾ رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيتوڻيڪ انگريزي ۾ ان جي استعمال جي هڪ اڳوڻي مثال 1632ع کان تصديق ٿيل آهي، جتي ان کي &quot;باسٽرڊ اسپينش&quot; پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==Examples==
{{Main|List of lingua francas}}

===Historical lingua francas===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>3xyowbh1zpmu3htb4chsi6jrk4irx8z</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394057</id>
      <parentid>394056</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:18:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394057</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="97572" sha1="e5r7258yvhdjezf05onf0imax4g8786" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==اشتقاق==
اصطلاح &quot;لنگوا فرانڪا&quot; ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا (جنهن کي سئبر پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي) مان نڪتل آهي، اها پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا ليونٽ ۽ اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين سمنڊ جي آس پاس جا ماڻهو وچين دور جي آخر کان 18 صدي تائين، خاص طور تي نشاۃِ ثانيه جي دور ۾، واپار ۽ سفارتڪاري جي مکيه ٻولي طور استعمال ڪندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان عرصي دوران، اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين ۾ خاص طور تي اطالوي ۽ اولهه ميڊيٽرينين ۾ اسپيني جو هڪ آسان نسخو، جنهن ۾ يوناني، سلاويڪ ٻولين، عربي ۽ ترڪي مان ڪيترائي قرض ورتل لفظ شامل هئا، علائقي جي &quot;لنگئا فرانڪا&quot; طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيڻ لڳو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه عالمن جو دعويٰ آهي ته ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا صرف گهٽ استعمال ٿيندڙ اطالوي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

لنگئا فرانڪا (مخصوص ٻولي) ۾، &quot;لنگئا&quot; اطالوي مان آهي جنهن جو مطلب &quot;هڪ ٻولي&quot; آهي. &quot;فرانڪا&quot; يوناني ٻولي جي لفظ &quot;فرانڪوئي&quot; (Φρᾰ́γκοι).۽ عربي ٻولي جي لفظ،  &quot;إِفْرَنْجِي&quot; سان لاڳاپيل آهي ۽ ان جي برابر اطالوي پڻ آهي. ٽنهي صورتن ۾، لفظي معنيٰ 'فرئنڪش' آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ سڌو ترجمو ٿئي ٿو: 'فرئنڪس جي ٻولي'. بازنطيني سلطنت جي آخر ۾، فرئنڪس هڪ اصطلاح هئي، جيڪي سڀني مغربي يورپين تي لاڳو ٿيندي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:9&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ادب ۾ اصطلاح جي تبديلين ذريعي، لنگئا فرانڪا کي پجن، ڪريئول ۽ گاڏين جي ٻولين جي ڪجهه يا سڀني شڪلن لاءِ هڪ عام اصطلاح طور تعبير ڪيو ويو آهي. معنيٰ ۾ هي تبديلي ان خيال سان منسوب ڪئي وئي آهي ته پجن ٻوليون صرف 16هين صدي کان آمريڪا، آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جهڙن کنڊن جي يورپي نوآبادي جي ڪري وڏي پيماني تي مشهور ٿيون. انهيءَ دوران، انهن پِڊجن ٻولين کي خطاب ڪرڻ لاءِ هڪ اصطلاح جي ضرورت پيدا ٿي، تنهن ڪري لنگئا فرانڪا جي معنيٰ ۾ هڪ واحد خاص اسم کان هڪ عام اسم ڏانهن تبديلي آئي جيڪا پِڊجن ٻولين جي هڪ وڏي طبقي کي شامل ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

20هين صدي جي آخر ۾، ڪجهه ماڻهن عام اصطلاح جي استعمال کي صرف مخلوط ٻولين جي معنيٰ تائين محدود ڪيو جيڪي، ان جي اصل معنيٰ ۾ گاڏين جي ٻولين طور استعمال ٿين ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

ڊگلس هارپر جي آن لائن ايٽائمولوجي ڊڪشنري ۾ چيو ويو آهي ته اصطلاح لنگئا فرانڪا (خاص ٻولي جي نالي جي طور تي)&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; پهريون ڀيرو 1670ع جي ڏهاڪي دوران انگريزي ۾ رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيتوڻيڪ انگريزي ۾ ان جي استعمال جي هڪ اڳوڻي مثال 1632ع کان تصديق ٿيل آهي، جتي ان کي &quot;باسٽرڊ اسپينش&quot; پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==مثالون==
{{Main|عام رابطي جي ٻولين جي فهرست}}
===تاريخي عام رابطي جون ٻوليون===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:سماج]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين السانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>e5r7258yvhdjezf05onf0imax4g8786</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394058</id>
      <parentid>394057</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:21:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا */</comment>
      <origin>394058</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="97554" sha1="2qsdolty35rjr9kra4sai2xo7s4yfur" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==اشتقاق==
اصطلاح &quot;لنگوا فرانڪا&quot; ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا (جنهن کي سئبر پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي) مان نڪتل آهي، اها پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا ليونٽ ۽ اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين سمنڊ جي آس پاس جا ماڻهو وچين دور جي آخر کان 18 صدي تائين، خاص طور تي نشاۃِ ثانيه جي دور ۾، واپار ۽ سفارتڪاري جي مکيه ٻولي طور استعمال ڪندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان عرصي دوران، اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين ۾ خاص طور تي اطالوي ۽ اولهه ميڊيٽرينين ۾ اسپيني جو هڪ آسان نسخو، جنهن ۾ يوناني، سلاويڪ ٻولين، عربي ۽ ترڪي مان ڪيترائي قرض ورتل لفظ شامل هئا، علائقي جي &quot;لنگئا فرانڪا&quot; طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيڻ لڳو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه عالمن جو دعويٰ آهي ته ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا صرف گهٽ استعمال ٿيندڙ اطالوي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

لنگئا فرانڪا (مخصوص ٻولي) ۾، &quot;لنگئا&quot; اطالوي مان آهي جنهن جو مطلب &quot;هڪ ٻولي&quot; آهي. &quot;فرانڪا&quot; يوناني ٻولي جي لفظ &quot;فرانڪوئي&quot; (Φρᾰ́γκοι).۽ عربي ٻولي جي لفظ،  &quot;إِفْرَنْجِي&quot; سان لاڳاپيل آهي ۽ ان جي برابر اطالوي پڻ آهي. ٽنهي صورتن ۾، لفظي معنيٰ 'فرئنڪش' آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ سڌو ترجمو ٿئي ٿو: 'فرئنڪس جي ٻولي'. بازنطيني سلطنت جي آخر ۾، فرئنڪس هڪ اصطلاح هئي، جيڪي سڀني مغربي يورپين تي لاڳو ٿيندي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:9&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ادب ۾ اصطلاح جي تبديلين ذريعي، لنگئا فرانڪا کي پجن، ڪريئول ۽ گاڏين جي ٻولين جي ڪجهه يا سڀني شڪلن لاءِ هڪ عام اصطلاح طور تعبير ڪيو ويو آهي. معنيٰ ۾ هي تبديلي ان خيال سان منسوب ڪئي وئي آهي ته پجن ٻوليون صرف 16هين صدي کان آمريڪا، آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جهڙن کنڊن جي يورپي نوآبادي جي ڪري وڏي پيماني تي مشهور ٿيون. انهيءَ دوران، انهن پِڊجن ٻولين کي خطاب ڪرڻ لاءِ هڪ اصطلاح جي ضرورت پيدا ٿي، تنهن ڪري لنگئا فرانڪا جي معنيٰ ۾ هڪ واحد خاص اسم کان هڪ عام اسم ڏانهن تبديلي آئي جيڪا پِڊجن ٻولين جي هڪ وڏي طبقي کي شامل ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

20هين صدي جي آخر ۾، ڪجهه ماڻهن عام اصطلاح جي استعمال کي صرف مخلوط ٻولين جي معنيٰ تائين محدود ڪيو جيڪي، ان جي اصل معنيٰ ۾ گاڏين جي ٻولين طور استعمال ٿين ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

ڊگلس هارپر جي آن لائن ايٽائمولوجي ڊڪشنري ۾ چيو ويو آهي ته اصطلاح لنگئا فرانڪا (خاص ٻولي جي نالي جي طور تي)&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; پهريون ڀيرو 1670ع جي ڏهاڪي دوران انگريزي ۾ رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيتوڻيڪ انگريزي ۾ ان جي استعمال جي هڪ اڳوڻي مثال 1632ع کان تصديق ٿيل آهي، جتي ان کي &quot;باسٽرڊ اسپينش&quot; پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==مثالون==
{{Main|عام رابطي جي ٻولين جي فهرست}}
===تاريخي عام رابطي جون ٻوليون===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[Koine Greek]]]]

The use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:لسانيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين اللسانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>2qsdolty35rjr9kra4sai2xo7s4yfur</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394063</id>
      <parentid>394058</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:33:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* تاريخي عام رابطي جون ٻوليون */</comment>
      <origin>394063</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="101427" sha1="c03ilz47j6xnpkqj6u1v9ebzg72fbv2" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==اشتقاق==
اصطلاح &quot;لنگوا فرانڪا&quot; ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا (جنهن کي سئبر پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي) مان نڪتل آهي، اها پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا ليونٽ ۽ اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين سمنڊ جي آس پاس جا ماڻهو وچين دور جي آخر کان 18 صدي تائين، خاص طور تي نشاۃِ ثانيه جي دور ۾، واپار ۽ سفارتڪاري جي مکيه ٻولي طور استعمال ڪندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان عرصي دوران، اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين ۾ خاص طور تي اطالوي ۽ اولهه ميڊيٽرينين ۾ اسپيني جو هڪ آسان نسخو، جنهن ۾ يوناني، سلاويڪ ٻولين، عربي ۽ ترڪي مان ڪيترائي قرض ورتل لفظ شامل هئا، علائقي جي &quot;لنگئا فرانڪا&quot; طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيڻ لڳو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه عالمن جو دعويٰ آهي ته ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا صرف گهٽ استعمال ٿيندڙ اطالوي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

لنگئا فرانڪا (مخصوص ٻولي) ۾، &quot;لنگئا&quot; اطالوي مان آهي جنهن جو مطلب &quot;هڪ ٻولي&quot; آهي. &quot;فرانڪا&quot; يوناني ٻولي جي لفظ &quot;فرانڪوئي&quot; (Φρᾰ́γκοι).۽ عربي ٻولي جي لفظ،  &quot;إِفْرَنْجِي&quot; سان لاڳاپيل آهي ۽ ان جي برابر اطالوي پڻ آهي. ٽنهي صورتن ۾، لفظي معنيٰ 'فرئنڪش' آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ سڌو ترجمو ٿئي ٿو: 'فرئنڪس جي ٻولي'. بازنطيني سلطنت جي آخر ۾، فرئنڪس هڪ اصطلاح هئي، جيڪي سڀني مغربي يورپين تي لاڳو ٿيندي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:9&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ادب ۾ اصطلاح جي تبديلين ذريعي، لنگئا فرانڪا کي پجن، ڪريئول ۽ گاڏين جي ٻولين جي ڪجهه يا سڀني شڪلن لاءِ هڪ عام اصطلاح طور تعبير ڪيو ويو آهي. معنيٰ ۾ هي تبديلي ان خيال سان منسوب ڪئي وئي آهي ته پجن ٻوليون صرف 16هين صدي کان آمريڪا، آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جهڙن کنڊن جي يورپي نوآبادي جي ڪري وڏي پيماني تي مشهور ٿيون. انهيءَ دوران، انهن پِڊجن ٻولين کي خطاب ڪرڻ لاءِ هڪ اصطلاح جي ضرورت پيدا ٿي، تنهن ڪري لنگئا فرانڪا جي معنيٰ ۾ هڪ واحد خاص اسم کان هڪ عام اسم ڏانهن تبديلي آئي جيڪا پِڊجن ٻولين جي هڪ وڏي طبقي کي شامل ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

20هين صدي جي آخر ۾، ڪجهه ماڻهن عام اصطلاح جي استعمال کي صرف مخلوط ٻولين جي معنيٰ تائين محدود ڪيو جيڪي، ان جي اصل معنيٰ ۾ گاڏين جي ٻولين طور استعمال ٿين ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

ڊگلس هارپر جي آن لائن ايٽائمولوجي ڊڪشنري ۾ چيو ويو آهي ته اصطلاح لنگئا فرانڪا (خاص ٻولي جي نالي جي طور تي)&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; پهريون ڀيرو 1670ع جي ڏهاڪي دوران انگريزي ۾ رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيتوڻيڪ انگريزي ۾ ان جي استعمال جي هڪ اڳوڻي مثال 1632ع کان تصديق ٿيل آهي، جتي ان کي &quot;باسٽرڊ اسپينش&quot; پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==مثالون==
{{Main|عام رابطي جي ٻولين جي فهرست}}
===تاريخي عام رابطي جون ٻوليون===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[قديم يوناني ٻولي|ڪوائن يوناني ٻولي]]]]

لنگئا فرانڪا جو استعمال قديم زماني کان موجود آهي. اڪادي ٻولي ڪيترن ئي اڳوڻين سلطنتن کان مغربي ايشيا جي هڪ وڏي حصي جي عام ٻولي رهي، جيستائين ان کي آرامي ٻولي طرفان هن ڪردار ۾ تبديل نه ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:10&quot; /&gt;

سنسکرت تاريخي طور تي ڏکڻ ايشيا جي اڪثريت ۾ هڪ لنگوا فرينڪا طور ڪم ڪيو. سنسڪرت ٻولي جي تاريخي موجودگي ڏکڻ ايشيا کان ٻاهر هڪ وسيع جاگرافي ۾ تصديق ٿيل آهي. لکت ۽ ادبي ثبوت اهو ظاهر ڪن ٿا ته سنسڪرت پهرين صدي عيسوي ۾ ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا ۽ وچ ايشيا ۾ راهبن، مذهبي زيارتين ۽ واپارين ذريعي اختيار ڪئي پئي وئي. 

20هين صدي جي شروعات تائين، ادبي چيني ٻولي چين، ڪوريا، جاپان، ريوڪيو ۽ ويٽنام سميت اوڀر ايشيا ۾ لکيل لنگوا فرينڪا ۽ سفارتي ٻولي ٻنهي طور ڪم ڪيو. 20 صدي جي شروعات ۾، مقامي لکت واري چيني ٻولي چين اندر ڪلاسيڪل چيني ٻولي جي جاءِ تي مختلف چيني لهجن جي ڳالهائيندڙن لاءِ لکيل ۽ ڳالهائي ويندڙ لهجو طور استعمال ٿي، ۽ اوڀر ايشيا ۾ چين جي طاقت ۽ ثقافتي اثر جي گهٽتائي جي ڪري، انگريزي ٻولي اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ڪلاسيڪل چيني ٻولي جي جاءِ تي استعمال ٿي آهي. 

ڪوائن يوناني هيلينسٽڪ ڪلچر جي لينگوا فرينڪا هئي. ڪوئن يوناني (يوناني: Ελληνιστική Κοινή، رومانوي: ايلينسٽيڪي ڪيني، لفظي طور تي 'عام يوناني'؛ ايل)، جنهن کي اليگزينڊرين لهجو، عام اٽڪ، هيلينسٽڪ، يا بائيبليڪل يوناني جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، يوناني ٻولي جي عام مٿاهين علائقائي شڪل هئي جيڪا هيلينسٽڪ دور، رومن سلطنت ۽ شروعاتي بازنطيني سلطنت دوران ڳالهائي ۽ لکي ويندي هئي. اهو چوٿين صدي قبل مسيح ۾ سڪندر اعظم جي فتحن کان پوءِ يوناني ٻولي جي پکڙجڻ مان اڀريو، ۽ ايندڙ صدين دوران ميڊيٽرينين علائقي ۽ وچ اوڀر جي گهڻي ڀاڱي جي ٻولي طور ڪم ڪيو. 

لاطيني، رومن ريپبلڪ جي طاقت ذريعي، اٽلي ۾ ۽ بعد ۾ رومن سلطنت جي سڀني علائقن ۾ غالب ٻولي بڻجي وئي. مغربي رومن سلطنت جي زوال کان پوءِ به، لاطيني يورپ ۾ رابطي، سائنس ۽ تعليمي جي عام ٻولي هئي جيستائين 18 صدي تائين، جڏهن ٻين علائقائي مقامي ٻولين (ان جي پنهنجي اولاد، رومانوي ٻولين سميت) ان کي عام علمي ۽ سياسي استعمال ۾ تبديل ڪيو، ۽ آخرڪار اهو جديد لساني تعريف ۾ هڪ مئل ٻولي بڻجي ويو. 

قديم تامل ڪڏهن قديم تامل ۽ سري لنڪا جي اڪثر علائقن لاءِ ٻولي هئي. جان گائي چوي ٿو ته تامل ٻولي هندستان جي شروعاتي سامونڊي واپارين لاءِ پڻ ٻولي هئي. ٻولي ۽ ان جا لهجا ڪيرالا رياست ۾ 12هين صدي عيسوي تائين انتظاميه، ادب ۽ عام استعمال جي وڏي ٻولي طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيندا هئا.

use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:10&quot;&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Latin]], through the power of the [[Roman Republic]], became the dominant language in [[Italy (geographical region)|Italy]] and subsequently throughout the realms of the Roman Empire. Even after the [[Fall of the Western Roman Empire]], Latin was the common language of communication, science, and academia in Europe until well into the 18th century, when other regional vernaculars (including its own descendants, the Romance languages) supplanted it in common academic and political usage, and it eventually became a [[dead language]] in the modern linguistic definition.

[[Old Tamil]] was once the lingua franca for most of ancient [[Tamilakam]] and [[Sri Lanka]]. [[John Guy (historian)|John Guy]] states that Tamil was also the lingua franca for early maritime traders from India.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language and its dialects were used widely in the state of [[Kerala]] as the major language of administration, literature and common usage until the 12th century CE.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:لسانيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين اللسانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>c03ilz47j6xnpkqj6u1v9ebzg72fbv2</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394064</id>
      <parentid>394063</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:40:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* تاريخي عام رابطي جون ٻوليون */</comment>
      <origin>394064</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="104550" sha1="iqnspbru1n9bqzjc9j07ywly7ta2s30" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==اشتقاق==
اصطلاح &quot;لنگوا فرانڪا&quot; ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا (جنهن کي سئبر پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي) مان نڪتل آهي، اها پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا ليونٽ ۽ اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين سمنڊ جي آس پاس جا ماڻهو وچين دور جي آخر کان 18 صدي تائين، خاص طور تي نشاۃِ ثانيه جي دور ۾، واپار ۽ سفارتڪاري جي مکيه ٻولي طور استعمال ڪندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان عرصي دوران، اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين ۾ خاص طور تي اطالوي ۽ اولهه ميڊيٽرينين ۾ اسپيني جو هڪ آسان نسخو، جنهن ۾ يوناني، سلاويڪ ٻولين، عربي ۽ ترڪي مان ڪيترائي قرض ورتل لفظ شامل هئا، علائقي جي &quot;لنگئا فرانڪا&quot; طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيڻ لڳو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه عالمن جو دعويٰ آهي ته ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا صرف گهٽ استعمال ٿيندڙ اطالوي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

لنگئا فرانڪا (مخصوص ٻولي) ۾، &quot;لنگئا&quot; اطالوي مان آهي جنهن جو مطلب &quot;هڪ ٻولي&quot; آهي. &quot;فرانڪا&quot; يوناني ٻولي جي لفظ &quot;فرانڪوئي&quot; (Φρᾰ́γκοι).۽ عربي ٻولي جي لفظ،  &quot;إِفْرَنْجِي&quot; سان لاڳاپيل آهي ۽ ان جي برابر اطالوي پڻ آهي. ٽنهي صورتن ۾، لفظي معنيٰ 'فرئنڪش' آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ سڌو ترجمو ٿئي ٿو: 'فرئنڪس جي ٻولي'. بازنطيني سلطنت جي آخر ۾، فرئنڪس هڪ اصطلاح هئي، جيڪي سڀني مغربي يورپين تي لاڳو ٿيندي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:9&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ادب ۾ اصطلاح جي تبديلين ذريعي، لنگئا فرانڪا کي پجن، ڪريئول ۽ گاڏين جي ٻولين جي ڪجهه يا سڀني شڪلن لاءِ هڪ عام اصطلاح طور تعبير ڪيو ويو آهي. معنيٰ ۾ هي تبديلي ان خيال سان منسوب ڪئي وئي آهي ته پجن ٻوليون صرف 16هين صدي کان آمريڪا، آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جهڙن کنڊن جي يورپي نوآبادي جي ڪري وڏي پيماني تي مشهور ٿيون. انهيءَ دوران، انهن پِڊجن ٻولين کي خطاب ڪرڻ لاءِ هڪ اصطلاح جي ضرورت پيدا ٿي، تنهن ڪري لنگئا فرانڪا جي معنيٰ ۾ هڪ واحد خاص اسم کان هڪ عام اسم ڏانهن تبديلي آئي جيڪا پِڊجن ٻولين جي هڪ وڏي طبقي کي شامل ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

20هين صدي جي آخر ۾، ڪجهه ماڻهن عام اصطلاح جي استعمال کي صرف مخلوط ٻولين جي معنيٰ تائين محدود ڪيو جيڪي، ان جي اصل معنيٰ ۾ گاڏين جي ٻولين طور استعمال ٿين ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

ڊگلس هارپر جي آن لائن ايٽائمولوجي ڊڪشنري ۾ چيو ويو آهي ته اصطلاح لنگئا فرانڪا (خاص ٻولي جي نالي جي طور تي)&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; پهريون ڀيرو 1670ع جي ڏهاڪي دوران انگريزي ۾ رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيتوڻيڪ انگريزي ۾ ان جي استعمال جي هڪ اڳوڻي مثال 1632ع کان تصديق ٿيل آهي، جتي ان کي &quot;باسٽرڊ اسپينش&quot; پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==مثالون==
{{Main|عام رابطي جي ٻولين جي فهرست}}
===تاريخي عام رابطي جون ٻوليون===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[قديم يوناني ٻولي|ڪوائن يوناني ٻولي]]]]

لنگئا فرانڪا جو استعمال قديم زماني کان موجود آهي. اڪادي ٻولي ڪيترن ئي اڳوڻين سلطنتن کان مغربي ايشيا جي هڪ وڏي حصي جي عام ٻولي رهي، جيستائين ان کي آرامي ٻولي طرفان هن ڪردار ۾ تبديل نه ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:10&quot; /&gt;

سنسکرت تاريخي طور تي ڏکڻ ايشيا جي اڪثريت ۾ هڪ لنگوا فرينڪا طور ڪم ڪيو. سنسڪرت ٻولي جي تاريخي موجودگي ڏکڻ ايشيا کان ٻاهر هڪ وسيع جاگرافي ۾ تصديق ٿيل آهي. لکت ۽ ادبي ثبوت اهو ظاهر ڪن ٿا ته سنسڪرت پهرين صدي عيسوي ۾ ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا ۽ وچ ايشيا ۾ راهبن، مذهبي زيارتين ۽ واپارين ذريعي اختيار ڪئي پئي وئي. 

20هين صدي جي شروعات تائين، ادبي چيني ٻولي چين، ڪوريا، جاپان، ريوڪيو ۽ ويٽنام سميت اوڀر ايشيا ۾ لکيل لنگوا فرينڪا ۽ سفارتي ٻولي ٻنهي طور ڪم ڪيو. 20 صدي جي شروعات ۾، مقامي لکت واري چيني ٻولي چين اندر ڪلاسيڪل چيني ٻولي جي جاءِ تي مختلف چيني لهجن جي ڳالهائيندڙن لاءِ لکيل ۽ ڳالهائي ويندڙ لهجو طور استعمال ٿي، ۽ اوڀر ايشيا ۾ چين جي طاقت ۽ ثقافتي اثر جي گهٽتائي جي ڪري، انگريزي ٻولي اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ڪلاسيڪل چيني ٻولي جي جاءِ تي استعمال ٿي آهي. 

ڪوائن يوناني هيلينسٽڪ ڪلچر جي لينگوا فرينڪا هئي. ڪوئن يوناني&lt;ref name=&quot;collins&quot; /&gt; (يوناني: Ελληνιστική Κοινή، رومانوي: ايلينسٽيڪي ڪيني، لفظي طور تي 'عام يوناني'؛ ايل)، جنهن کي اليگزينڊرين لهجو، عام اٽڪ، هيلينسٽڪ، يا بائيبليڪل يوناني جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، يوناني ٻولي جي عام مٿاهين علائقائي شڪل هئي جيڪا هيلينسٽڪ دور، رومن سلطنت ۽ شروعاتي بازنطيني سلطنت دوران ڳالهائي ۽ لکي ويندي هئي. اهو چوٿين صدي قبل مسيح ۾ سڪندر اعظم جي فتحن کان پوءِ يوناني ٻولي جي پکڙجڻ مان اڀريو، ۽ ايندڙ صدين دوران ميڊيٽرينين علائقي ۽ وچ اوڀر جي گهڻي ڀاڱي جي ٻولي طور ڪم ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

لاطيني، رومن ريپبلڪ جي طاقت ذريعي، اٽلي ۾ ۽ بعد ۾ رومن سلطنت جي سڀني علائقن ۾ غالب ٻولي بڻجي وئي. مغربي رومن سلطنت جي زوال کان پوءِ به، لاطيني يورپ ۾ رابطي، سائنس ۽ تعليمي جي عام ٻولي هئي جيستائين 18 صدي تائين، جڏهن ٻين علائقائي مقامي ٻولين (ان جي پنهنجي اولاد، رومانوي ٻولين سميت) ان کي عام علمي ۽ سياسي استعمال ۾ تبديل ڪيو، ۽ آخرڪار اهو جديد لساني تعريف ۾ هڪ مئل ٻولي بڻجي ويو. 

قديم تامل ڪڏهن قديم تامل ۽ سري لنڪا جي اڪثر علائقن لاءِ ٻولي هئي. جان گائي چوي ٿو ته تامل ٻولي هندستان جي شروعاتي سامونڊي واپارين لاءِ پڻ ٻولي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ٻولي ۽ ان جا لهجا ڪيرالا رياست ۾ 12هين صدي تائين انتظاميه، ادب ۽ عام استعمال جي وڏي ٻولي طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

use of lingua francas has existed since antiquity.

[[Akkadian language|Akkadian]] remained the common language of a large part of Western Asia from several earlier empires, until it was supplanted in this role by [[Aramaic]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:10&quot;&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sanskrit]] historically served as a lingua franca throughout the majority of South Asia.&lt;ref&gt;The Last Lingua Franca: English Until the Return of Babel. Nicholas Ostler. Ch.7. {{ISBN|978-0802717719}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sanskrit language's historic presence is attested across a wide geography beyond South Asia. Inscriptions and literary evidence suggest that Sanskrit was already being adopted in Southeast Asia and Central Asia in the 1st millennium CE, through monks, religious pilgrims and merchants.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Until the early 20th century, [[Literary Chinese]] served as both the written lingua franca and the diplomatic language in East Asia, including China, [[Korea]], [[Empire of Japan|Japan]], [[Ryūkyū Kingdom|Ryūkyū]], and [[Vietnam]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 20th century, [[vernacular written Chinese]] replaced Classical Chinese within China as both the written and spoken lingua franca for speakers of different Chinese dialects, and because of the declining power and cultural influence of China in East Asia, English has since replaced Classical Chinese as the lingua franca in East Asia.

[[Koine Greek]] was the lingua franca of the Hellenistic culture. Koine Greek&lt;ref name=collins&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; (Modern {{langx|el|Ελληνιστική Κοινή|Ellinistikí Kiní|Common Greek}}; {{IPA|el|elinistiˈci ciˈni|lang}}), also known as Alexandrian dialect, common Attic, Hellenistic, or Biblical Greek, was the [[koiné language|common supra-regional form]] of Greek spoken and written during the [[Hellenistic period]], the [[Roman Empire]] and the early [[Byzantine Empire]]. It evolved from the spread of Greek following the conquests of [[Alexander the Great]] in the fourth century BC, and served as the lingua franca of much of the Mediterranean region and the Middle East during the following centuries.


ڪلاسيڪل ماوري، نيوزي لينڊ جي يورپي آبادڪاري کان 800 سال اڳ اتر ٻيٽ ۽ ڏکڻ ٻيٽ جي ٻولي (ڪيترن ئي لهجن مان ٺهيل، جيتوڻيڪ سڀئي هڪٻئي سان سمجهه ۾ ايندڙ) جو پس منظري نالو آهي. ماوري هڪ عام ٻولي شيئر ڪئي جيڪا واپار، مارائي تي بين الاقوامي ڳالهه ٻولهه ۽ وانگا ذريعي تعليم لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي هئي. ويٽانگي جي معاهدي تي دستخط ڪرڻ کان پوءِ، ماوري ٻولي نيوزي لينڊ جي ڪالوني جي ٻولي هئي جيستائين انگريزي 1870 جي ڏهاڪي ۾ ان کي ختم نه ڪيو. ماوري ٻولي کي نيوزي لينڊ جي 19 صدي جي ٻولي جي طور تي بيان ڪرڻ کي وڏي پيماني تي قبول ڪيو ويو آهي. ٻولي شروعاتي طور تي نيوزي لينڊ ۾ سڀني يورپي ۽ چيني مهاجرن لاءِ سکڻ لاءِ اهم هئي. جيئن ته ماوري آبادي جي اڪثريت ٺاهي، ملڪ جي تقريبن سڄي زمين جي مالڪ هئي ۽ 1860 جي ڏهاڪي تائين معيشت تي غلبو حاصل ڪيو. 1867 جي مقامي اسڪول ايڪٽ جهڙن امتيازي قانونن ماوري ٻولي کي ٻولي جي طور تي ختم ڪرڻ ۾ حصو ورتو. اڳئين رابطي جي دور ۾. ماوري يورپي مسافرن ۽ مجموعي طور تي واپاري پولينيشين جي وچ ۾ استعمال لاءِ سامونڊي پولينيشين پڊجن جي بنيادن مان پڻ هو. * سوگڊين کي ريشم روڊ تي مختلف ٻوليون ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ واپار کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو، اهو ئي سبب آهي ته سوگڊين جي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن کي تانگ چين ۾ مترجم طور ڪم ڪيو ويندو هو. سوگڊين روحاني عقيدن ۽ متنن کي به گردش ڪرڻ شروع ڪيو، جن ۾ ٻڌمت ۽ عيسائيت جا ماڻهو به شامل هئا، انهن جي صلاحيت جي ڪري ته اهي علائقي جي ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن سان پنهنجي مادري ٻولي ذريعي رابطو ڪري سگهن ٿا. * پراڻي چرچ سلاوونڪ، هڪ اوڀر ڏکڻ سلاوينڪ ٻولي، پهرين سلاوينڪ ادبي ٻولي آهي. 9 هين ۽ 11 هين صدي جي وچ ۾، اهو ڏکڻ اوڀر ۽ اوڀر يورپ ۾ گهڻو ڪري سلاوين رياستن ۽ آبادي جي هڪ وڏي حصي جي ٻولي هئي، عبادت ۽ چرچ جي تنظيم، ثقافت، ادب، تعليم ۽ سفارتڪاري ۾، بلغاريا جي صورت ۾ هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي ۽ قومي ٻولي جي طور تي. اها پهرين قومي ۽ بين الاقوامي سلاويڪ ادبي ٻولي هئي (خودمختياري словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ، slověnĭskŭ językŭ). گليگوليٽڪ الفابيٽ اصل ۾ ٻنهي اسڪولن ۾ استعمال ٿيندي هئي، جيتوڻيڪ سيريلڪ رسم الخط پريسلاو ادبي اسڪول ۾ شروعاتي طور تي تيار ڪيو ويو هو، جتي ان 893 ۾ بلغاريا ۾ سرڪاري رسم الخط جي طور تي گليگوليٽڪ کي ختم ڪيو. پراڻي چرچ سلاوونڪ ٻين ڏکڻ-اوڀر، مرڪزي ۽ اوڀر يورپي سلاوين علائقن ۾ پکڙجي وئي، خاص طور تي ڪروشيا، سربيا، بوهيميا، ليسر پولينڊ، ۽ ڪيويوان روس جي پرنسپالٽيز ۾ جڏهن ته خاص طور تي ڏکڻ سلاوين لساني خاصيتون برقرار رکيون ويون. اهو ڪارپيٿين جبلن، ڊينيوب ۽ ڪاري سمنڊ جي وچ ۾ مڪمل طور تي سلاوين علائقن ۾ به پکڙجي ويو، جيڪو والاچيا ۽ مولداويا سان ملندڙ جلندڙ هو.

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:لسانيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين اللسانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>iqnspbru1n9bqzjc9j07ywly7ta2s30</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394079</id>
      <parentid>394064</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:57:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* تاريخي عام رابطي جون ٻوليون */</comment>
      <origin>394079</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="102511" sha1="qpsa79iqk3982an1rcnpl6rno2jmxkf" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Language used to facilitate communication between groups without a common native language}}
{{Other uses}}
{{Distinguish|text=[[فرانسيسي ٻولي]]}}
[[File:Linguafranca.jpg|thumb|right|سال &lt;small&gt;1830&lt;/small&gt;ع ۾ ڇپيل [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|فرانسيسي]] [[فرانسيسي ٻولي|ٻولي]] جي لغت جيڪا [[رومي (ڀونوچ) سمنڊ|رومي سمنڊ]] جي علائقي جي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Mediterranean&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Lingua&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;Franca&lt;/small&gt;) کي تفصيل سان بيان ڪري ٿي.]]
'''لنگئا فرانڪا''' (Lingua Franca) رابطي جي ٻولي. اها ٻولي، جيڪا ڪنهن وسيع علائقي ۾ مختلف ٻولين ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ رابطي ۽ ابلاغ جو ڪم ڏئي سگهي. جيئن ننڍي کنڊ ۽ پاڪستان ۾ اردو، ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي ملڪن ۾ عربي وغيره لنگئا فرانڪا يا رابطي جون ٻوليون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;ڪتاب: ادبي اصطلاحن جي تشريحي لغت؛ مرتب: مختيار احمد ملاح؛ پبلشر: [[سنڌي لئنگئيج اٿارٽي]]، حيدرآباد، سنڌ.&lt;/ref&gt;

هڪ '''رابطي جي ٻولي''' (&lt;small&gt;Lingua Franca؛ /ˌlɪŋɡwə&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;ˈfræŋkə&lt;/small&gt;/)، جنهن کي پل جي ٻولي، عام ٻولي، واپاري ٻولي، معاون ٻولي يا وسيع رابطي جي ٻولي (LWC) جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي هوندي آهي جيڪا منظم طور تي ماڻهن جي گروهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي کي ممڪن بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي. جيڪا هڪ مادري ٻولي يا لهجو شيئر نٿا ڪن. خاص طور تي جڏهن اها ٽئين ٻولي هجي، جيڪا مادري ٻولين جي ٻنهي ڳالهائيندڙن کان مختلف آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Viacheslav A. Chirikba, &quot;The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund&quot; in Pieter Muysken, ed., ''From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics'', 2008, p. 31. {{ISBN|90-272-3100-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن تجارتي سببن جي ڪري، &quot;واپار جي ٻوليون&quot; واپار کي آسان بڻايو. پر ثقافتي، مذهبي، سفارتي ۽ انتظامي سهولت لاءِ پڻ ۽ سائنسدانن ۽ مختلف قوميتن جي ٻين عالمن جي وچ ۾ معلومات جي تبادلي جي هڪ ذريعي طور رابطي جي ٻوليون سڄي دنيا ۾ انساني تاريخ ۾ ترقي ڪيون آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Nye&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Nye|first1=Mary Jo|title=Speaking in Tongues: Science's centuries-long hunt for a common language|journal=Distillations|year=2016|volume=2|issue=1|pages=40–43|url=https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|access-date=20 March 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803130801/https://www.sciencehistory.org/distillations/magazine/speaking-in-tongues|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Gordin&quot; /&gt;

اصطلاح قرون وسطيٰ جي ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا مان ورتي وئي آهي، هڪ رومانوي تي ٻڌل پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا خاص طور تي 11هين کان 19هين صدي تائين رومي سمنڊ جي علائقن ۾ واپارين پاران استعمال ڪئي ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|date=1975|title=Italian-Based Pidgins and Lingua Franca|series=Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications|volume=14|pages=70–72}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ عالمي ٻولي، هڪ ٻولي جيڪا بين الاقوامي سطح تي ۽ ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن پاران ڳالهائي ويندي آهي، هڪ اهڙي ٻولي آهي جيڪا هڪ عالمي رابطي جي ٻولي (&lt;small&gt;Global Lingua franca&lt;/small&gt;) طور ڪم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Woll |first1=Bensie |title=English of often considered the de facto global language... |url=https://www.ucl.ac.uk/culture-online/case-studies/2022/mar/english-often-considered-de-facto-global-language |website=University College London Culture Online |date=22 March 2022 |publisher=University College London |access-date=17 October 2024}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==خاصيتون==
[[File:The Harmsworth atlas and Gazetter 1908 Trade language world map.jpg|thumb|upright=1.2|سال 1908ع ۾ دي هارمس ورٿ اٽلس ۽ گزيٽيئر مان دنيا جون واپاري ٻوليون]]
ڪنهن به ٻولي جيڪا باقاعدي طور تي انهن ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي هڪ مادري ٻولي شيئر نٿا ڪن، اها هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا آهي.&lt;ref&gt;&quot;vehicular, adj.&quot; ''OED Online''. Oxford University Press, July 2018. Web. 1 November 2018.&lt;/ref&gt; لنگئا فرانڪا هڪ فعلي اصطلاح آهي، جيڪو ڪنهن به لساني تاريخ يا ٻولي جي جوڙجڪ کان آزاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;[http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm Intro Sociolinguistics] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522043320/http://privatewww.essex.ac.uk/~patrickp/Courses/PCs/IntroPidginsCreoles.htm |date=22 May 2018 }} – ''Pidgin and Creole Languages: Origins and Relationships'' – Notes for LG102, – University of Essex, Peter L. Patrick – Week 11, Autumn term.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن ڪري، [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] لنگوا فرانڪا آهن ۽ دليل طور تي مخلوط ٻوليون به ساڳي طرح ٻولي گروپن جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن ٿيون. بهرحال، اصطلاح لنگوا فرانڪا هڪ غير ڪريئول ٻولي تي هڪجهڙائي سان لاڳو ٿئي ٿي جيڪي هڪ قوم جي مقامي آهي، اڪثر ڪري هڪ نوآبادياتي طاقت، جيڪا ٻي ٻولي جي طور تي سکي ويندي آهي ۽ هڪ ڪالوني يا اڳوڻي ڪالوني ۾ مختلف ٻولي برادرين جي وچ ۾ رابطي لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|url=http://www.termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|title=Lingua Franca: Chomera or Reality?|year=2010|publisher=Publ. Office of the Europ. Union |isbn=9789279189876|access-date=15 December 2018|archive-date=27 February 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200227090056/https://termcoord.eu/wp-content/uploads/2013/08/Lingua_franca.pdf|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

لنگئا فرانڪا اڪثر ڪري مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن سان اڳ ۾ موجود ٻوليون آهن، پر اهي ان مخصوص علائقي يا حوالي سان ترقي يافته پڊجن يا ڪريئول پڻ ٿي سگهن ٿيون. پڊجن ٻن يا وڌيڪ قائم ٿيل ٻولين جا تيزي سان ترقي يافته ۽ آسان ميلاپ آهن، جڏهن ته ڪريئول کي عام طور تي پڊجن جي طور تي ڏٺو ويندو آهي جيڪي ايندڙ نسلن پاران موافقت جي دوران مڪمل طور تي پيچيده ٻولين ۾ ترقي ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Pidgin and Creole Languages|last=Romaine|first=Suzanne|publisher=Longman|year=1988}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻو ڪري، اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا جهڙوڪ فرانسيسي وڏي پيماني تي واپاري يا سياسي معاملن ۾ رابطي کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو وينديون آهن، جڏهن ته پڊجن ۽ ڪريول اڪثر نوآبادياتي حالتن ۽ نوآبادياتي ۽ مقامي ماڻهن جي وچ ۾ رابطي جي هڪ خاص ضرورت مان پيدا ٿين ٿيون. &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|title=Lingua Franca, Pidgin, and Creole|date=3 April 2015|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=21 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190239/https://thariqalfathih.wordpress.com/2015/04/03/lingua-franca-pidgin-and-creole/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ موجود لنگئا فرانڪا عام طور تي وسيع، انتهائي ترقي يافته ٻوليون آهن جن جا  ڪيترائي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2024-12-31 |title=Definition of LINGUA FRANCA |url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/lingua%20franca |access-date=2025-01-13 |website=www.merriam-webster.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ان جي برعڪس، پڊجن رابطي جا تمام آسان ذريعا آهن، جن ۾ ڍڪيل جوڙجڪ، ڪجهه گراماتي قاعدا ۽ ڪجهه يا ڪو به مقامي ڳالهائيندڙ نه آهن. ڪريئول ٻوليون پنهنجي آبائي پڊجن کان وڌيڪ ترقي يافته آهن، وڌيڪ پيچيده جوڙجڪ، گرامر ۽ لفظ استعمال ڪندي، انهي سان گڏ مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن جي وڏي برادريون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Language – Pidgins and creoles|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/language|access-date=2021-05-11|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en|archive-date=5 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141205091036/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/329791/language/27194/Linguistic-change|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن ته هڪ مقامي ٻولي هڪ مخصوص جاگرافيائي برادري جي مادري ٻولي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Definition of VERNACULAR|url=https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|access-date=2021-05-11|website=www.merriam-webster.com|language=en|archive-date=15 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210515083616/https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/vernacular|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ لنگئا فرانڪا پنهنجي اصل برادري جي حدن کان ٻاهر، واپار، مذهبي، سياسي، يا تعليمي سببن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. مثال طور، انگريزي برطانيه ۾ هڪ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) آهي پر اهو فلپائن ۾ فلپائن سان گڏ ({{Emphasis|vernacular}}) طور استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي. ساڳئي طرح، عربي، فرينچ، معياري چيني، روسي ۽ اسپيني علائقائي ۽ قومي حدون پار صنعتي ۽ تعليمي لنگوا فرينڪا جي طور تي ساڳيا مقصد پورا ڪن ٿا. 

جيتوڻيڪ اهي پل ٻولين جي طور تي استعمال ٿين ٿيون، بين الاقوامي معاون ٻوليون جهڙوڪ ايسپرانٽو کي وڏي پيماني تي اپنائڻ جي صلاحيت حاصل نه آهي، تنهن ڪري انهن کي لنگوا فرينڪا طور بيان نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|last=Directorate-General for Translation|first=European Commission|year=2011|title=Studies on translation and multilingualism|url=http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|url-status=dead|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20121115090926/http://cordis.europa.eu/fp7/ict/language-technologies/docs/lingua-franca-en.pdf|archive-date=2012-11-15|publisher=Europa (web portal)|pages=8, 22–23|quote=Up to now [constructed languages] have all proved transient and none has actually achieved the status of lingua franca with a large community of fluent speakers.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==اشتقاق==
اصطلاح &quot;لنگوا فرانڪا&quot; ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا (جنهن کي سئبر پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي) مان نڪتل آهي، اها پڊجن ٻولي جيڪا ليونٽ ۽ اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين سمنڊ جي آس پاس جا ماڻهو وچين دور جي آخر کان 18 صدي تائين، خاص طور تي نشاۃِ ثانيه جي دور ۾، واپار ۽ سفارتڪاري جي مکيه ٻولي طور استعمال ڪندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite encyclopedia|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|title=lingua franca {{!}} linguistics|encyclopedia=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=8 August 2017|archive-date=31 July 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200731180042/https://www.britannica.com/topic/lingua-franca|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; ان عرصي دوران، اوڀر ميڊيٽرينين ۾ خاص طور تي اطالوي ۽ اولهه ميڊيٽرينين ۾ اسپيني جو هڪ آسان نسخو، جنهن ۾ يوناني، سلاويڪ ٻولين، عربي ۽ ترڪي مان ڪيترائي قرض ورتل لفظ شامل هئا، علائقي جي &quot;لنگئا فرانڪا&quot; طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيڻ لڳو، جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه عالمن جو دعويٰ آهي ته ميڊيٽرينين لنگوا فرانڪا صرف گهٽ استعمال ٿيندڙ اطالوي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dursteler|first=Eric R.|title=Speaking in Tongues: Language and Communication in the Early Modern Mediterranean|date=2012|journal=Past &amp; Present|issue=217|pages=47–77|doi=10.1093/pastj/gts023}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

لنگئا فرانڪا (مخصوص ٻولي) ۾، &quot;لنگئا&quot; اطالوي مان آهي جنهن جو مطلب &quot;هڪ ٻولي&quot; آهي. &quot;فرانڪا&quot; يوناني ٻولي جي لفظ &quot;فرانڪوئي&quot; (Φρᾰ́γκοι).۽ عربي ٻولي جي لفظ،  &quot;إِفْرَنْجِي&quot; سان لاڳاپيل آهي ۽ ان جي برابر اطالوي پڻ آهي. ٽنهي صورتن ۾، لفظي معنيٰ 'فرئنڪش' آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ سڌو ترجمو ٿئي ٿو: 'فرئنڪس جي ٻولي'. بازنطيني سلطنت جي آخر ۾، فرئنڪس هڪ اصطلاح هئي، جيڪي سڀني مغربي يورپين تي لاڳو ٿيندي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;HEL&quot;&gt;{{cite book |url=http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |title=''Lexico Triantaphyllide'' online dictionary, Greek Language Center (''Kentro Hellenikes Glossas''), lemma Franc ( Φράγκος ''Phrankos''), ''Lexico tes Neas Hellenikes Glossas'', G.Babiniotes, Kentro Lexikologias(Legicology Center) LTD Publications |publisher=Komvos.edu.gr |year=2002 |isbn=960-86190-1-7 |quote=Franc and (prefix) franco- (Φράγκος ''Phrankos'' and φράγκο- ''phranko-'') |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120324054919/http://www.komvos.edu.gr/dictonlineplsql/simple_search.display_full_lemma?the_lemma_id=16800&amp;target_dict=1 |archive-date=24 March 2012 |url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://archive.org/details/etymologicaldict00weekuoft/ |title=An etymological dictionary of modern English : Weekley, Ernest, 1865–1954 : Free Download &amp; Streaming : Internet Archive |access-date=18 June 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141012185830/http://www.scribd.com/doc/14047074/Dictionary-English-Etymology-Origins-A-Short-Etymological-Dictionary-of-Modern-English-Rouledge-1958-Parridge|date=12 October 2014}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:9&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=House|first=Juliane|date=2003|title=English as a lingua franca: A threat to multilingualism?|journal=Journal of Sociolinguistics|language=en|volume=7|issue=4|pages=557|doi=10.1111/j.1467-9841.2003.00242.x|issn=1467-9841|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ادب ۾ اصطلاح جي تبديلين ذريعي، لنگئا فرانڪا کي پجن، ڪريئول ۽ گاڏين جي ٻولين جي ڪجهه يا سڀني شڪلن لاءِ هڪ عام اصطلاح طور تعبير ڪيو ويو آهي. معنيٰ ۾ هي تبديلي ان خيال سان منسوب ڪئي وئي آهي ته پجن ٻوليون صرف 16هين صدي کان آمريڪا، آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جهڙن کنڊن جي يورپي نوآبادي جي ڪري وڏي پيماني تي مشهور ٿيون. انهيءَ دوران، انهن پِڊجن ٻولين کي خطاب ڪرڻ لاءِ هڪ اصطلاح جي ضرورت پيدا ٿي، تنهن ڪري لنگئا فرانڪا جي معنيٰ ۾ هڪ واحد خاص اسم کان هڪ عام اسم ڏانهن تبديلي آئي جيڪا پِڊجن ٻولين جي هڪ وڏي طبقي کي شامل ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Brosch|first=C.|date=2015|title=On the Conceptual History of the Term Lingua Franca|journal= Apples: Journal of Applied Language Studies|volume=9|issue=1|pages=71–85|doi=10.17011/apples/2015090104|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

20هين صدي جي آخر ۾، ڪجهه ماڻهن عام اصطلاح جي استعمال کي صرف مخلوط ٻولين جي معنيٰ تائين محدود ڪيو جيڪي، ان جي اصل معنيٰ ۾ گاڏين جي ٻولين طور استعمال ٿين ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language, Simon and Schuster, 1980&lt;/ref&gt;

ڊگلس هارپر جي آن لائن ايٽائمولوجي ڊڪشنري ۾ چيو ويو آهي ته اصطلاح لنگئا فرانڪا (خاص ٻولي جي نالي جي طور تي)&lt;ref name=&quot;Harper&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |title=Online Etymology Dictionary |publisher=Etymonline.com |access-date=18 June 2015 |archive-date=11 May 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150511041942/http://www.etymonline.com/index.php?search=lingua+franca |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; پهريون ڀيرو 1670ع جي ڏهاڪي دوران انگريزي ۾ رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيتوڻيڪ انگريزي ۾ ان جي استعمال جي هڪ اڳوڻي مثال 1632ع کان تصديق ٿيل آهي، جتي ان کي &quot;باسٽرڊ اسپينش&quot; پڻ سڏيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Morgan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Morgan |first=J. |year=1632 |title=A Compleat History of the Present Seat of War in Africa, Between the Spaniards and Algerines |page=98 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |access-date=8 June 2013 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152407/https://books.google.com/books?id=6M8TAAAAYAAJ&amp;pg=PA98 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

== استعمال ==
هي اصطلاح انگريزيءَ ۾ پنهنجي قدرتي ڪرڻ ۾ چڱيءَ طرح قائم آهي، تنهن ڪري وڏيون ڊڪشنريون ان کي &quot;غير ملڪي&quot; اصطلاح طور ترڪيب نه ٿيون ڏين.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Oxford Dictionaries |author-link=OxfordDictionaries.com |title=Oxford Dictionaries Online |publisher=Oxford University Press |url=http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20010516042450/http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=16 May 2001 |postscript=.}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |title=The American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language |publisher=Houghton Mifflin Harcourt |url=https://ahdictionary.com/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925104737/https://ahdictionary.com/ |archive-date=25 September 2015 |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot;&gt;{{Citation |author=Merriam-Webster |author-link=Merriam-Webster |title=MerriamWebster's Collegiate Dictionary |publisher=Merriam-Webster |url=http://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/collegiate/ |postscript=. |access-date=25 February 2018 |archive-date=10 October 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201010163505/https://unabridged.merriam-webster.com/subscriber/login?redirect_to=%2Fcollegiate%2F |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt;

انگريزيءَ ۾ ان جا جمع &quot;لنگئا فرانڪاز&quot; (lingua francas) ۽ &quot;لنگئا فرانڪائ&quot; (linguae francae) آهن، جن ۾ پهريون يا واحد فارم وڏين ڊڪشنرين ۾ درج ٿيل آهي، جڏهن ته بعد وارو گهٽ ئي استعمال ٿيندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;OxfordDictionaries&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;AHD&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;MW_Collegiate&quot; /&gt;

==مثالون==
{{Main|عام رابطي جي ٻولين جي فهرست}}
===تاريخي عام رابطي جون ٻوليون===
[[File:Ephesians 2,12 - Greek atheos.jpg|thumb|[[قديم يوناني ٻولي|ڪوائن يوناني ٻولي]]]]

لنگئا فرانڪا جو استعمال قديم زماني کان موجود آهي. اڪادي ٻولي ڪيترن ئي اڳوڻين سلطنتن کان مغربي ايشيا جي هڪ وڏي حصي جي عام ٻولي رهي، جيستائين ان کي آرامي ٻولي طرفان هن ڪردار ۾ تبديل نه ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Ostler, 2005 pp. 38–40&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:10&quot;&gt;Ostler, 2010 pp. 163–167&lt;/ref&gt;

سنسکرت تاريخي طور تي ڏکڻ ايشيا جي اڪثريت ۾ هڪ لنگوا فرينڪا طور ڪم ڪيو. سنسڪرت ٻولي جي تاريخي موجودگي ڏکڻ ايشيا کان ٻاهر هڪ وسيع جاگرافي ۾ تصديق ٿيل آهي. لکت ۽ ادبي ثبوت اهو ظاهر ڪن ٿا ته سنسڪرت پهرين صدي عيسوي ۾ ڏکڻ اوڀر ايشيا ۽ وچ ايشيا ۾ راهبن، مذهبي زيارتين ۽ واپارين ذريعي اختيار ڪئي پئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Sheldon Pollock|editor=Jan E. M. Houben|title=Ideology and Status of Sanskrit|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|year=1996|publisher=BRILL Academic|isbn=978-90-04-10613-0|pages=197–223 with footnotes|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152353/https://books.google.com/books?id=_eqr833q9qYC|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author1=William S.-Y. Wang|author-link1=William S-Y. Wang|author2=Chaofen Sun|title=The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|year=2015|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-985633-6|pages=6–19, 203–212, 236–245|access-date=19 March 2022|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152357/https://books.google.com/books?id=YqT4BQAAQBAJ|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last=Burrow |first=Thomas |author-link=Thomas Burrow |title=The Sanskrit Language |year=1973 |edition=3rd, revised |location=London |publisher=Faber &amp; Faber |pages=63–66}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

20هين صدي جي شروعات تائين، ادبي چيني ٻولي چين، جاپان، ڪوريا، ريوڪو ۽ ويٽنام سميت اوڀر ايشيا ۾ لکيل لنگئا فرانڪا ۽ سفارتي ٻولي ٻنهي طور ڪم ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2015-04-28 |title=Reclaiming a Common Language {{!}} BU Today |url=https://www.bu.edu/articles/2015/reclaiming-a-common-language/ |access-date=2023-07-23 |website=Boston University |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; 20هين صدي  جي شروعات ۾، مقامي لکت واري چيني ٻولي چين اندر ڪلاسيڪل چيني ٻولي جي جاءِ تي مختلف چيني لهجن جي ڳالهائيندڙن لاءِ لکيل ۽ ڳالهائي ويندڙ لهجو طور استعمال ٿي، ۽ اوڀر ايشيا ۾ چين جي طاقت ۽ ثقافتي اثر جي گهٽتائي جي ڪري، انگريزي ٻولي اوڀر ايشيا ۾ ڪلاسيڪل چيني ٻولي جي جاءِ تي استعمال ٿي آهي. 

ڪوائن يوناني هيلينسٽڪ ڪلچر جي لينگوا فرينڪا هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;mw&quot;&gt;{{cite Merriam-Webster|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ڪوئن يوناني&lt;ref name=&quot;collins&quot;&gt;{{cite Collins Dictionary|Koine|access-date=2014-09-24}}&lt;/ref&gt; (يوناني: Ελληνιστική Κοινή، رومانوي: ايلينسٽيڪي ڪيني، لفظي طور تي 'عام يوناني'؛ ايل)، جنهن کي اليگزينڊرين لهجو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite Dictionary.com|Koine}}&lt;/ref&gt; عام اٽڪ، هيلينسٽڪ، يا بائيبليڪل يوناني جي نالي سان پڻ سڃاتو وڃي ٿو، يوناني ٻولي جي عام مٿاهين علائقائي شڪل هئي، &lt;ref&gt;A Dictionary of Buddhism p.350 {{ISBN|0191579173}}&lt;/ref&gt;جيڪا هيلينسٽڪ دور، رومن سلطنت ۽ شروعاتي بازنطيني سلطنت&lt;ref&gt;Before the European Challenge: The Great Civilizations of Asia and the Middle East p.180 {{ISBN|0791401685}}&lt;/ref&gt; دوران ڳالهائي ۽ لکي ويندي هئي. اهو چوٿين صدي قبل مسيح ۾ سڪندر اعظم جي فتحن کان پوءِ يوناني ٻولي جي پکڙجڻ مان اڀريو، ۽ ايندڙ صدين دوران ميڊيٽرينين علائقي ۽ وچ اوڀر جي گهڻي ڀاڱي جي ٻولي طور ڪم ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bubenik&quot;&gt;{{cite book|last=Bubenik|first=V.|year=2007|chapter=The rise of Koiné|editor=A. F. Christidis|title=A history of Ancient Greek: from the beginnings to late antiquity|location=Cambridge|publisher=University Press|pages=342–345}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

لاطيني، رومن ريپبلڪ جي طاقت ذريعي، اٽلي ۾ ۽ بعد ۾ رومن سلطنت جي سڀني علائقن ۾ غالب ٻولي بڻجي وئي. مغربي رومن سلطنت جي زوال کان پوءِ به، لاطيني يورپ ۾ رابطي، سائنس ۽ تعليمي جي عام ٻولي هئي جيستائين 18 صدي تائين، جڏهن ٻين علائقائي مقامي ٻولين (ان جي پنهنجي اولاد، رومانوي ٻولين سميت) ان کي عام علمي ۽ سياسي استعمال ۾ تبديل ڪيو، ۽ آخرڪار اهو جديد لساني تعريف ۾ هڪ مئل ٻولي بڻجي ويو. 

قديم تامل ڪڏهن قديم تامل ۽ سري لنڪا جي اڪثر علائقن لاءِ ٻولي هئي. جان گائي چوي ٿو ته تامل ٻولي هندستان جي شروعاتي سامونڊي واپارين لاءِ پڻ ٻولي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;scroll.in&quot;&gt;{{citation |title=Scroll.in – News. Politics. Culture. |date=6 February 2015 |url=http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |access-date=29 March 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150208095602/http://scroll.in/article/704603/Step-aside%2C-Gujaratis%3A-Tamilians-were-India%27s-earliest-recorded-maritime-traders |archive-date=8 February 2015 |url-status=live |publisher=scroll.in}}&lt;/ref&gt;  ٻولي ۽ ان جا لهجا ڪيرالا رياست ۾ 12هين صدي تائين انتظاميه، ادب ۽ عام استعمال جي وڏي ٻولي طور وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last1=Murthy |first1=Srinivasa |title=Essays on Indian History and culture: Felicitation volume in Honour of Professor B. Sheik Ali |pages=85–106 |year=1990 |place=New Delhi |publisher=Mittal |isbn=978-81-7099-211-0 |last2=Rao |first2=Surendra |last3=Veluthat |first3=Kesavan |last4=Bari |first4=S.A.}}&lt;/ref&gt;ڪلاسيڪل ماوري، نيوزي لينڊ جي يورپي آبادڪاري کان 800 سال اڳ اتر ٻيٽ ۽ ڏکڻ ٻيٽ جي ٻولي (ڪيترن ئي لهجن مان ٺهيل، جيتوڻيڪ سڀئي هڪٻئي سان سمجهه ۾ ايندڙ) جو پس منظري نالو آهي. ماوري هڪ عام ٻولي شيئر ڪئي جيڪا واپار، مارائي تي بين الاقوامي ڳالهه ٻولهه ۽ وانگا ذريعي تعليم لاءِ استعمال ٿيندي هئي. ويٽانگي جي معاهدي تي دستخط ڪرڻ کان پوءِ، ماوري ٻولي نيوزي لينڊ جي ڪالوني جي ٻولي هئي جيستائين انگريزي 1870 جي ڏهاڪي ۾ ان کي ختم نه ڪيو. ماوري ٻولي کي نيوزي لينڊ جي 19 صدي جي ٻولي جي طور تي بيان ڪرڻ کي وڏي پيماني تي قبول ڪيو ويو آهي. ٻولي شروعاتي طور تي نيوزي لينڊ ۾ سڀني يورپي ۽ چيني مهاجرن لاءِ سکڻ لاءِ اهم هئي. جيئن ته ماوري آبادي جي اڪثريت ٺاهي، ملڪ جي تقريبن سڄي زمين جي مالڪ هئي ۽ 1860 جي ڏهاڪي تائين معيشت تي غلبو حاصل ڪيو. 1867 جي مقامي اسڪول ايڪٽ جهڙن امتيازي قانونن ماوري ٻولي کي ٻولي جي طور تي ختم ڪرڻ ۾ حصو ورتو. اڳئين رابطي جي دور ۾. ماوري يورپي مسافرن ۽ مجموعي طور تي واپاري پولينيشين جي وچ ۾ استعمال لاءِ سامونڊي پولينيشين پڊجن جي بنيادن مان پڻ هو. * سوگڊين کي ريشم روڊ تي مختلف ٻوليون ڳالهائيندڙن جي وچ ۾ واپار کي آسان بڻائڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو، اهو ئي سبب آهي ته سوگڊين جي مقامي ڳالهائيندڙن کي تانگ چين ۾ مترجم طور ڪم ڪيو ويندو هو. سوگڊين روحاني عقيدن ۽ متنن کي به گردش ڪرڻ شروع ڪيو، جن ۾ ٻڌمت ۽ عيسائيت جا ماڻهو به شامل هئا، انهن جي صلاحيت جي ڪري ته اهي علائقي جي ڪيترن ئي ماڻهن سان پنهنجي مادري ٻولي ذريعي رابطو ڪري سگهن ٿا. * پراڻي چرچ سلاوونڪ، هڪ اوڀر ڏکڻ سلاوينڪ ٻولي، پهرين سلاوينڪ ادبي ٻولي آهي. 9 هين ۽ 11 هين صدي جي وچ ۾، اهو ڏکڻ اوڀر ۽ اوڀر يورپ ۾ گهڻو ڪري سلاوين رياستن ۽ آبادي جي هڪ وڏي حصي جي ٻولي هئي، عبادت ۽ چرچ جي تنظيم، ثقافت، ادب، تعليم ۽ سفارتڪاري ۾، بلغاريا جي صورت ۾ هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي ۽ قومي ٻولي جي طور تي. اها پهرين قومي ۽ بين الاقوامي سلاويڪ ادبي ٻولي هئي (خودمختياري словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ، slověnĭskŭ językŭ). گليگوليٽڪ الفابيٽ اصل ۾ ٻنهي اسڪولن ۾ استعمال ٿيندي هئي، جيتوڻيڪ سيريلڪ رسم الخط پريسلاو ادبي اسڪول ۾ شروعاتي طور تي تيار ڪيو ويو هو، جتي ان 893 ۾ بلغاريا ۾ سرڪاري رسم الخط جي طور تي گليگوليٽڪ کي ختم ڪيو. پراڻي چرچ سلاوونڪ ٻين ڏکڻ-اوڀر، مرڪزي ۽ اوڀر يورپي سلاوين علائقن ۾ پکڙجي وئي، خاص طور تي ڪروشيا، سربيا، بوهيميا، ليسر پولينڊ، ۽ ڪيويوان روس جي پرنسپالٽيز ۾ جڏهن ته خاص طور تي ڏکڻ سلاوين لساني خاصيتون برقرار رکيون ويون. اهو ڪارپيٿين جبلن، ڊينيوب ۽ ڪاري سمنڊ جي وچ ۾ مڪمل طور تي سلاوين علائقن ۾ به پکڙجي ويو، جيڪو والاچيا ۽ مولداويا سان ملندڙ جلندڙ هو.

[[Māori language|Classical Māori]] is the retrospective name for the language (formed out of many dialects, albeit all mutually intelligible)&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=History of the Māori language |url=https://nzhistory.govt.nz/culture/maori-language-week/history-of-the-maori-language |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=nzhistory.govt.nz |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; of both the North Island and the South Island for the 800 years before the [[Immigration to New Zealand|European settlement of New Zealand]].&lt;ref&gt;''Ko Aotearoa Tēnei, Te Taumata Tuarua - Wai 262'' (2011), Waitangi Tribunal, pp. 41&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Preservation of Classical Maori', from An Encyclopaedia of New Zealand, edited by A.H. McLintock. Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand URL: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.TeAra.govt.nz/en/1966/maori-language/page-10&lt;/nowiki&gt; (accessed 16 Mar 2024)&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Belich |first=Jamie |title=Making Peoples: A History of New Zealanders |date=1996 |publisher=[[Penguin Books New Zealand]] |isbn=9781742288222 |edition=1st |location=Auckland |publication-date=1996 |pages=57, 67 |language=English}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=New Zealand literature - Modern Maori, Poetry, Novels {{!}} Britannica |url=https://www.britannica.com/art/New-Zealand-literature/Modern-Maori-literature |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.britannica.com |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;''High or Classical Māori:'' Salient. Victoria University Student Newspaper. Volume 36, Number 21. 5 September 1973&lt;/ref&gt; [[Māori people|Māori]] shared a common language that was used for trade, inter-[[iwi]] dialogue on [[marae]], and education through [[wānanga]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/economic-history/page-2|title=Early Māori economies &amp;#124; Te Ara Encyclopedia of New Zealand|website=teara.govt.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brar |first=Atarjit |title=LibGuides: The Polynesian expansion across the Pacific: Maori |url=https://libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au/polynesian-expansion/maori |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=libguides.stalbanssc.vic.edu.au |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; After the signing of the [[Treaty of Waitangi]], Māori language was the lingua franca of the [[Colony of New Zealand]] until English superseded it in the 1870s.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Post |url=https://www.thepost.co.nz/nz-news/350124740/ok-monolingual-boomer-you-might-be-having-your-final-moment-sun#:~:text=At%20the%20advent%20of%20colonisation,language%20of%20trade%20and%20education. |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=www.thepost.co.nz}}&lt;/ref&gt; The description of Māori language as New Zealand's 19th-century lingua franca has been widely accepted.&lt;ref&gt;Benton, Richard A. &quot;Changes in Language Use in a Rural Maori Community  1963-1978.&quot; ''The Journal of the Polynesian Society'', vol. 89, no. 4, 1980, pp. 455–78. ''JSTOR'', &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.jstor.org/stable/20705517&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Accessed 15 Mar. 2024.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Coffey |first=Clare |title=Demand For Māori Language Skills at Work Rises in New Zealand |url=https://lightcast.io/resources/blog/demand-for-maori-language-skills-at-work-rises-in-new-zealand |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=Lightcast |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2024-03-15 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; The language was initially vital for all European and [[Chinese New Zealanders|Chinese migrants]] in New Zealand to learn,&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Revitalizing Endangered Languages |url=https://www.iar-gwu.org/blog/vsba8c5mqrhvufzl4gjfmqz39e20x0 |access-date=2023-09-12 |website=THE INTERNATIONAL AFFAIRS REVIEW |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;auto&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;/&gt; as Māori formed a majority of the population, owned nearly all the country's land and dominated the economy until the 1860s.&lt;ref name=&quot;Revitalizing Endangered Languages&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Keane |first=Basil |date=11 March 2020 |title=Te Māori i te ohanga – Māori in the economy - Māori enterprise, 1840 to 1860 |url=https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240315040836/https://teara.govt.nz/en/te-maori-i-te-ohanga-maori-in-the-economy/page-3 |archive-date=15 March 2024 |access-date=19 November 2024 |website=Te Ara - the Encyclopedia of New Zealand}}&lt;/ref&gt; Discriminatory laws such as the [[Native schools|Native Schools Act 1867]] contributed to the demise of Māori language as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;History of the Māori language&quot;/&gt; In earlier contact eras, Māori was also among the bases for [[Maritime Polynesian Pidgin]] for use between European voyagers and trading Polynesians as a whole.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=7-17 |title=Language contact in the early colonial Pacific: Maritime Polynesian Pidgin before Pidgin English |first=Emanuel J.|last=Drechsel|year=2014 |publisher=Cambridge University Press |location=Cambridge |isbn=9781139057561 |url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/books/language-contact-in-the-early-colonial-pacific/9E4DA477392ABDA61F4C0CA7D3812FFF}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Sogdian language|Sogdian]] was used to facilitate trade between those who spoke different languages along the [[Silk Road]], which is why native speakers of Sogdian were employed as translators in [[Tang dynasty|Tang China]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Lung|first=Rachel|title=Interpreters in Early Imperial China|publisher=John Benjamins Publishing Company|year=2011|isbn=9789027284181|pages=151–154}}&lt;/ref&gt; The Sogdians also ended up circulating spiritual beliefs and texts, including those of [[Buddhism]] and [[Christianity]], thanks to their ability to communicate to many people in the region through their native language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Who Were the Sogdians, {{!}} The Sogdians|url=https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|access-date=2021-05-10|website=sogdians.si.edu|archive-date=11 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210911220242/https://sogdians.si.edu/introduction/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[Old Church Slavonic]], an [[Eastern South Slavic]] language, is the first Slavic [[literary language]]. Between 9th and 11th century, it was the lingua franca of a great part of the predominantly [[Slavs|Slavic]] states and populations in [[Southeast Europe|Southeast]] and [[Eastern Europe]], in [[liturgy]] and church organization, culture, literature, education and diplomacy, as an [[Official language]] and [[National language]] in the case of [[Bulgaria]]. It was the first national and also international Slavic literary language (autonym {{lang|cu|словѣ́ньскъ ѩꙁꙑ́къ}}, {{lang|cu-Latn|slověnĭskŭ językŭ}}).&lt;ref name=&quot;lpd&quot;&gt;{{citation|last= Wells|first= John C.|year= 2008|title= Longman Pronunciation Dictionary|edition= 3rd|publisher= Longman|isbn= 9781405881180}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |last= Jones |first= Daniel |author-link= Daniel Jones (phonetician) |title= English Pronouncing Dictionary |editor= Peter Roach |editor2= James Hartmann |editor3= Jane Setter |place= Cambridge |publisher= Cambridge University Press |orig-year= 1917 |year= 2003 |isbn= 978-3-12-539683-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt; The Glagolitic alphabet was originally used at both schools, though the [[Cyrillic script]] was developed early on at the [[Preslav Literary School]], where it superseded Glagolitic as the official script in [[First Bulgarian Empire|Bulgaria]] in 893. Old Church Slavonic spread to other South-Eastern, Central, and Eastern European Slavic territories, most notably [[Croatia]], [[Serbia]], [[Bohemia]], [[Lesser Poland]], and principalities of the [[Kievan Rus']] while retaining characteristically [[South Slavic languages|South Slavic]] linguistic features. It spread also to not completely Slavic territories between the [[Carpathian Mountains]], the [[Danube]] and the [[Black Sea]], corresponding to [[Wallachia]] and [[Moldavia]]. Nowadays, the Cyrillic [[writing system]] is used for various languages across Eurasia, and as the national script in various Slavic, [[Turkic languages|Turkic]], [[Mongolic languages|Mongolic]], [[Uralic languages|Uralic]], [[Caucasian languages|Caucasian]] and [[Iranian languages|Iranic]]-speaking countries in [[Southeast Europe]], Eastern Europe, the [[Caucasus]], Central, North, and East Asia.

The [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca,&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;&gt;{{cite book|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=yRz0DQAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA25|title=Multilingual Europe, Multilingual Europeans|date=1 January 2012|publisher=BRILL|access-date=28 November 2018|isbn=978-94-012-0803-1|pages=25|editor1-first=László|editor1-last=Marácz|editor2-first=Mireille|editor2-last=Rosello|via=Google Books}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Koyama |first=Satoshi |url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |title=Regions in Central and Eastern Europe: Past and Present |publisher=Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University |year=2007 |isbn=978-4-938637-43-9 |editor1-last=Hayashi |editor1-first=Tadayuki |pages=137–153 |chapter=Chapter 8: The Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth as a Political Space: Its Unity and Complexity |access-date=23 May 2019 |editor2-last=Fukuda |editor2-first=Hiroshi |chapter-url=http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/08_koyama.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200225015447/http://src-h.slav.hokudai.ac.jp/coe21/publish/no15_ses/contents.html |archive-date=25 February 2020 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. [[Tomasz Kamusella]] notes that &quot;Polish is the oldest, non-ecclesiastical, written Slavic language with a continuous tradition of literacy and official use, which has lasted unbroken from the 16th century to this day.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last= Kamusella |first= Tomasz |year= 2009 |title= The Politics of Language and Nationalism in Modern Central Europe |publisher= Palgrave Macmillan |page=138 |isbn= 978-0-230-55070-4 }}&lt;/ref&gt; Polish evolved into the main [[sociolect]] of the nobles in [[Polish–Lithuanian union|Poland–Lithuania]] in the 15th century.{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=111}} The history of Polish as a language of state governance begins in the 16th century in the [[Crown of the Kingdom of Poland|Kingdom of Poland]]. Over the later centuries, Polish served as the official language in the [[Grand Duchy of Lithuania]], [[Congress Poland]], the [[Kingdom of Galicia and Lodomeria]], and as the administrative language in the [[Russian Empire]]'s [[Western Krai]]. The growth of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]]'s influence gave Polish the status of ''lingua franca'' in [[Central and Eastern Europe]].{{sfn|Kamusella|2009|page=137}}

The [[Mediterranean Lingua Franca]] was largely based on Northern Italy's languages and secondarily on [[Occitano-Romance languages]]. This language was spoken from the 11th to 19th centuries around the Mediterranean basin, particularly in the European commercial empires of Italian cities ([[Genoa]], Venice, [[Florence]], Milan, [[Pisa]], [[Siena]]) and in trading ports located throughout the eastern Mediterranean rim.&lt;ref&gt;Henry Romanos Kahane. ''The Lingua Franca in the Levant'' (Turkish Nautical Terms of Italian and Greek Origin)&lt;/ref&gt;

During the [[Renaissance]], standard Italian was spoken as a language of culture in the main royal courts of Europe, and among intellectuals.{{citation needed|reason=None of the cited references verify this claim|date=May 2026}}  Italian musical terms, in particular dynamic and tempo notations, have continued in use to the present day.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=15040264|title=Italian: The Language That Sings|website=NPR|access-date=21 February 2019|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152355/https://www.npr.org/2007/10/08/15040264/italian-the-language-that-sings|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.ivirtuosidelloperadiroma.com/en/why-italian-is-the-language-of-music-and-opera/ |title=Why Italian is the language of music and opera |website=I Virtuosi dell'Opera Di Roma |date=4 January 2022 |access-date=10 January 2023}}&lt;/ref&gt;[[File:Hansesprache no text.jpg|thumb|Extent of Middle Low German in red with its use as a literary language black lines tilted right]]
[[Low German]], also known as Low Saxon, used to be the Lingua franca during the late [[Hohenstaufen]] till the mid-15th century periods ([[Middle Low German]]), in the [[North Sea]] and the [[Baltic Sea]] when extensive trading was done by the [[Hanseatic League]] along the Baltic and North Seas.

[[Classical Quechua]] is either of two historical forms of [[Quechuan languages|Quechua]], the exact relationship and degree of closeness between which is controversial, and which have sometimes been identified with each other.&lt;ref&gt;See Itier (2000: 47) for the distinction between the first and second enumerated senses, and the quote below for their partial identification.&lt;/ref&gt; These are:

# the variety of Quechua that was used as a lingua franca and administrative language in the [[Inca Empire]] (1438–1533)&lt;ref name=&quot;snow, stark1971&quot;&gt;Snow, Charles T., Louisa Rowell Stark. 1971. Ancash Quechua: A Pedagogical Grammar. P.V 'The Quechua language is generally associated with the &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, which was used as a lingua franca through Peru and Bolivia with the spread of the Inca Empire'&lt;/ref&gt; (or Inca lingua franca&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston 2007: 40&lt;/ref&gt;). Since the Incas did not have writing, the evidence about the characteristics of this variety is scant and they have been a subject of significant disagreements.&lt;ref&gt;Durston 2007: 40, 322&lt;/ref&gt;
# the variety of Quechua that was used in writing for religious and administrative purposes in the Andean territories of the Spanish Empire, mostly in the late 16th century and the first half of the 17th century and has sometimes been referred to, both historically and in academia, as ''lengua general'' ('common language')&lt;ref&gt;Beyersdorff, Margot, Sabine Dedenbach-Salazar Sáenz. 1994. Andean Oral Traditions: Discourse and Literature. P.275. 'the primarily [[catechesis|catechetical]] domain of this lingua franca – sometimes referred to as &quot;classical&quot; Quechua'...&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Bills, Garland D., Bernardo Valejo. 1969. P. XV. 'Immediately following the Spanish Conquest the Quechua language, especially the prestigious &quot;classical&quot; Quechua of the Cuzco area, was used as a lingua franca throughout the Andean region by both missionaries and administrators.'&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Cf. also Durston (2007: 17): 'The 1550–1650 period can be considered both formative and classical in relation to the late colonial and republican production'.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;See e.g. Taylor 1975: 7–8 for the dating and the name ''lengua general'' and Adelaar 2007: 183 for the dating&lt;/ref&gt; (or Standard Colonial Quechua&lt;ref&gt;Following the terminology of Durston (2007: 40)&lt;/ref&gt;).

[[Ajem-Turkic]] functioned as lingua franca in the Caucasus region and in southeastern [[Dagestan]], and was widely spoken at the court and in the army of [[Safavid Iran]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|pages=248–261|chapter=14|title=The Turkic Languages|author1=Lars Johanson|author2=Éva Á. Castó|year=1998|publisher=Routledge}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===Modern===
{{See also|Official languages of the United Nations}}

====English====
{{Main|English as a lingua franca}}
[[File:English language distribution.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|English language distribution
{{legend|#346699|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#99ccff|Official or administrative language, but not native language}}
]]

English is sometimes described as the foremost global lingua franca, being used as a working language by individuals of diverse linguistic and cultural backgrounds in a variety of fields and international organizations to communicate with one another.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|date=2017-04-25|title=The Linguistic Colonialism of English|url=https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Brown Political Review|language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424084057/https://brownpoliticalreview.org/2017/04/linguistic-colonialism-english/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; English is the [[list of languages by total number of speakers|most spoken language]] in the world, primarily due to the historical global influence of the [[British Empire]] and the [[United States]].&lt;ref&gt;{{e22|eng|English}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is a [[official languages of the United Nations|co-official language of the United Nations]] and many other international and regional organizations and has also become the ''de facto'' language of [[diplomacy]], [[science]], [[international trade]], [[tourism]], [[aviation]], [[entertainment]] and the [[Languages used on the Internet|Internet]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|title=How the English Language Conquered the World|last=Chua|first=Amy|website=[[The New York Times]]|date=18 January 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220301222132/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/18/books/review/the-rise-of-english-rosemary-salomone.html|archive-date=1 March 2022|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

When the [[United Kingdom]] became a colonial power, English served as the lingua franca of the colonies of the [[British Empire]]. In the post-colonial period, most of the newly independent nations which had many [[indigenous language]]s opted to continue using English as one of their official languages such as [[Ghana]] and [[South Africa]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt; In other former colonies with several official languages such as [[Singapore]] and [[Fiji]], English is the primary medium of education and serves as the lingua franca among citizens.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Tan|first=Jason|date=1997|title=Education and Colonial Transition in Singapore and Hong Kong: Comparisons and Contrasts|journal=Comparative Education|volume=33|issue=2|pages=303–312|doi=10.1080/03050069728587}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book | chapter-url=https://ewave-atlas.org/languages/68 | title=The Electronic World Atlas of Varieties of English | chapter=Pure Fiji English (Basilectal FijiE) | year=2020 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |title=Why Does Everyone Speak English in Fiji? |work=Raiwasa Private Resort |url-status=dead |access-date=5 December 2023 |date=26 February 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220827143620/https://fijiluxuryvacation.com/everyone-speak-english-in-fiji/ |archive-date=2022-08-27 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

Even in countries not associated with the [[English-speaking world]], English has emerged as a lingua franca in certain situations where its use is perceived to be more efficient to communicate, especially among groups consisting of native speakers of many languages. In [[Qatar]], the medical community is primarily made up of workers from countries without English as a native language. In medical practices and hospitals, nurses typically communicate with other professionals in English as a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|title=Listening instruction and patient safety: Exploring medical English as a lingua franca (MELF) for nursing education|first1=Gregory|last1=Tweedie|first2=Robert|last2=Johnson|access-date=6 January 2018|archive-date=3 August 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200803074912/http://bild-lida.ca/journal/volume_2_1_2018/tweedie_johnson/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; This occurrence has led to interest in researching the consequences of the medical community communicating in a lingua franca.&lt;ref name=&quot;melf&quot;/&gt; English is also sometimes used in [[Switzerland]] between people who do not share one of Switzerland's [[Languages of Switzerland|four official languages]], or with foreigners who are not fluent in the local language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/english-as-a-common-language-in-switzerland--a-positive-or-a-problem-/46494332 |first=Thomas |last=Stephens |access-date=4 December 2023 |title=English as a common language in Switzerland: a positive or a problem? |date=4 April 2021 }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[European Union]], the use of English as a lingua franca has led researchers to investigate whether a [[Euro English]] dialect has emerged.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Mollin|first1=Sandra|title=Euro-English assessing variety status|date=2005|publisher=Narr|location=Tübingen|isbn=382336250X}}&lt;/ref&gt; In the fields of technology and science, English emerged as a lingua franca in the 20th century.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |doi=10.1109/MC.2017.3001253 |title=The Lingua Franca of Technology |year=2017 |last1=Alan Grier |first1=David |journal=Computer |volume=50 |issue=8 |page=104 |bibcode=2017Compr..50h.104G }}&lt;/ref&gt; English has also significantly [[Englishisation|influenced]] many other languages.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Mikanowski |first=Jacob |date=2018-07-27 |title=Behemoth, bully, thief: how the English language is taking over the planet |url=https://www.theguardian.com/news/2018/jul/27/english-language-global-dominance |access-date=2024-12-15 |work=The Guardian |language=en-GB |issn=0261-3077}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Spanish====
{{Main|Hispanophone}}
[[File:Map-Hispanophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|Spanish language distribution
{{legend|#045a8d|Official language}}
{{legend|#0674b6|Co-official language}}
{{legend|#9bbae1|Culturally important or secondary language (&gt; 20% of the population)}}
]]

The Spanish language spread mainly throughout the [[New World]], becoming a lingua franca in the territories and colonies of the [[Spanish Empire]], which also included parts of Africa, Asia, and Oceania. After the breakup of much of the empire in the Americas, its function as a lingua franca was solidified by the governments of the newly independent nations of what is now [[Hispanic America]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Stavans |first1=Ilan |title=The Spanish Language in Latin America since Independence |url=https://oxfordre.com/latinamericanhistory/view/10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.001.0001/acrefore-9780199366439-e-371 |website=Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Latin American History |access-date=2 June 2021 |language=en |doi=10.1093/acrefore/9780199366439.013.371 |date=2017-04-26|isbn=978-0-19-936643-9 }}&lt;/ref&gt; While its usage in Spain's Asia-Pacific colonies has largely died out, Spanish became the lingua franca of what is now [[Equatorial Guinea]], being the main language of government and education and is spoken by the vast majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|last=Granda|first=Germán de|title=El Español en Tres Mundos: Retenciones y Contactos Lingüísticos en América y África|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pasdAQAAIAAJ|date=1 January 1991|publisher=Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de Publicaciones|isbn=9788477622062|language=es}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Due to large numbers of immigrants from Latin America in the second half of the 20th century and resulting influence, Spanish has also emerged somewhat as a lingua franca in parts of the [[Southwestern United States]] and southern [[Florida]], especially in communities where native Spanish speakers form the majority of the population.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Macías|first=Reynaldo|date=2014|title=Spanish as the Second National Language of the United States: Fact, Future, Fiction, or Hope?|url=https://www.jstor.org/stable/43284061|journal=Review of Research in Education|volume=38|pages=33–57|doi=10.3102/0091732X13506544 |jstor=43284061 |s2cid=143648085 |url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lynch|first=Andrew|date=2023|title=Heritage language socialization at work: Spanish in Miami|journal=Journal of World Languages|volume=9|issue=1|pages=111–132 |doi=10.1515/jwl-2022-0048 |s2cid=255570955 |doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

At present it is the second most used language in international trade, and the third most used in politics, diplomacy and culture after English and French.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152438/http://www.quadernsdigitals.net/index.php?accionMenu=secciones.VisualizaArticuloSeccionIU.visualiza&amp;proyecto_id=361&amp;articuloSeccion_id=4463 &quot;¿Por qué los brasileños deben aprender español?&quot;]}} – Copyright 2003 Quaderns Digitals Todos los derechos reservados ISSN 1575-9393.&lt;/ref&gt;

It is also one of the most taught foreign languages throughout the world&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ Spanish in the World] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210206042553/https://www.languagemagazine.com/2019/11/18/spanish-in-the-world/ |date=6 February 2021}}, ''Language Magazine'', 18 November 2019.&lt;/ref&gt; and is also one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].

====French====
{{Main|Francophonie}}
[[File:Map-Francophone World.svg|thumb|upright=1.5|French language distribution
{{legend|#0049a2|Majority native language}}
{{legend|#006aFF|Official language, but not a majority native language}}
{{legend|#8ec3ff|Administrative or cultural language}}
]]

French is sometimes regarded as the first global lingua franca, having supplanted [[Latin]] as the prestige language of politics, trade, education, diplomacy, and military in [[Early modern period|early modern]] Europe and later spreading around the world with the establishment of the [[French colonial empire]].&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Wright|first=Sue|date=2006|title=French as a lingua franca|url=https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/abs/french-as-a-lingua-franca/709F93AD0A5A7E7162C6E170FCA59E43|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=35–60|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000031|url-access=subscription}}&lt;/ref&gt; With [[France]] emerging as the leading political, economic, and cultural power of Europe in the mid-17th century, the language was adopted by royal courts throughout the continent, including the United Kingdom, Sweden, and Russia, and as the language of communication between European academics, merchants, and diplomats.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |title=When The World Spoke French |author=Marc Fumaroli |translator=Richard Howard |year=2011 |publisher=New York Review of Books |isbn=978-1590173756 |url-access=registration |url=https://archive.org/details/whenworldspokefr00fuma }}&lt;/ref&gt; With the expansion of Western colonial empires, French became the main language of diplomacy and international relations up until [[World War II]] when it was replaced by English due to the rise of the [[United States]] as the leading [[superpower]]. Stanley Meisler of the ''[[Los Angeles Times]]'' said that the fact that the [[Treaty of Versailles]] was written in English as well as French was the &quot;first diplomatic blow&quot; against the language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Meisler|first=Stanley|title=Seduction Still Works : French—a Language in Decline|newspaper=Los Angeles Times|date=1 March 1986|access-date=18 October 2021|url=https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1986-03-01-mn-13048-story.html|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150702203738/http://articles.latimes.com/1986-03-01/news/mn-13048_1_french-language/2|archive-date=2 July 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; Nevertheless, it remains the second most used language in international affairs and is one of the [[Official languages of the United Nations|six official languages of the United Nations]].&lt;ref name=&quot;andaman.org&quot;&gt;[http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm The World's 10 Most Influential Languages] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080312042140/http://www.andaman.org/BOOK/reprints/weber/rep-weber.htm |date=12 March 2008 }} ''Top Languages''. Retrieved 11 April 2011.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |title=The French Language Today: A Linguistic Introduction |last1=Battye |first1=Adrian |last2=Hintze |first2=Marie-Anne |last3=Rowlett |first3=Paul |publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis |year=2003 |language=en |isbn=978-0-203-41796-6 |access-date=19 March 2022 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152354/https://books.google.com/books?id=pya2KY8upAUC&amp;pg=PA2 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://ask.un.org/faq/14463?_gl=1*17fvpf2*_ga*NjYyMTgyNjE4LjE3MTM2NDc0OTQ.*_ga_TK9BQL5X7Z*MTcxMzY0NzQ5My4xLjEuMTcxMzY0NzkxMy4wLjAuMA.. What are the official languages of the United Nations?], ''Ask UN'', 23 December 2023.&lt;/ref&gt;

As a legacy of French and [[Belgian colonial empire|Belgian]] colonial rule, most former colonies of these countries maintain French as an official language or lingua franca due to the many indigenous languages spoken in their territory. Notably, in most Francophone [[West Africa|West]] and [[Central Africa]]n countries, French has transitioned from being only a lingua franca to the native language among some communities, mostly in urban areas or among the elite class.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2019-04-07|title=Why the future of French is African|language=en-GB|work=BBC News|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=11 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210411215818/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-47790128|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In other regions such as the French-speaking countries of the [[Maghreb]] ([[Algeria]], [[Tunisia]], [[Morocco]], and [[Mauritania]]) and parts of the [[French Caribbean]], French is the lingua franca in professional sectors and education, even though it is not the native language of the majority.&lt;ref name=&quot;Maamri1013&quot;&gt;Maamri, Malika Rebai. &quot;[http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf The Syndrome of the French Language in Algeria].&quot; ([https://web.archive.org/web/20151123121428/http://openaccesslibrary.org/images/Malika_Rebai_Maamri.pdf Archive]) ''International Journal of Arts and Sciences''. 3(3): 77 – 89 (2009) CD-ROM. {{ISSN|1944-6934}} p. 10 of 13&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Stevens |first=Paul |title=Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes : The Case of Tunisia |publisher=Civilisations |volume=30 |issue=1/2 |year=1980 |pages=37–59 |jstor=41802986 |url=http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802986 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Felicien, Marie Michelle. [https://globalpressjournal.com/americas/haiti/schools-teaching-creole-instead-french-rise-haiti/ Schools Teaching in Creole Instead of French on the Rise in Haiti], ''Global Press Journal'', 13 November 2019&lt;/ref&gt;

French continues to be used as a lingua franca in certain cultural fields such as [[cuisine]], [[fashion]], and [[sport]].&lt;ref&gt;Notaker, Henry. [https://lithub.com/how-french-cuisine-took-over-the-world/ How French Cuisine Took Over the World], excerpt from ''A History of Cookbooks From Kitchen to Page over Seven Centuries'', University of California Press, 13 September 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Wright&quot; /&gt;

As a consequence of [[Brexit]], French has been increasingly used as a lingua franca in the [[European Union]] and its institutions either alongside or, at times, in place of English.&lt;ref&gt;Chazan, Guy and Jim Brunsden. [https://www.ft.com/content/e70b5042-3c65-11e6-8716-a4a71e8140b0 Push to bid adieu to English as EU's lingua franca], ''Financial Times'', 28 June 2016.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Rankin, Jennifer. [https://www.theguardian.com/politics/2017/may/05/brexit-english-is-losing-its-importance-in-europe-says-juncker Brexit: English is losing its importance in Europe, says Juncker], ''[[The Guardian]]'', 5 May 2017.&lt;/ref&gt;

====German====
{{Main|DACH}}
[[File:Legal status of German in Europe.svg|thumb|right|230x230px|Legal statuses of German in Europe:
{{legend|#ffcc00|(co-)official language and first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#d98575|co-official, but not the first language of the majority}}
{{legend|#7373d9|legally recognized minority language}}
{{legend|#30efe3|sizable minority, without legal recognition}}]]

[[German language|German]] is used as a lingua franca in [[Central Europe]] and historically in [[Eastern Europe|Eastern]] and [[Northern Europe]], and continues to be one to some extent.{{sfn|Von Polenz|1999|pp=192–94, 96}} As German speakers became established in these regions in [[Early modern Europe]], [[Low German]] and later the modern [[Standard German|standardized form of High German]] became the [[prestige (sociolinguistics)|prestigious language]] of the urban centers, eventually becoming the common language of the [[Hanseatic League]] and later, lands ruled under the [[Holy Roman Empire]] and [[Habsburg monarchy]].&lt;ref&gt;Graumann, Olga and Sören Affeldt, [https://www.ide-journal.org/article/2020-volume-7-number-1-the-hanseatic-league-and-education-a-neglected-chapter-in-european-and-german-history/ The Hanseatic League and Education – A Neglected chapter in European and German history], ''International Dialogues on Education: Past and Present'', Volume 7: 2020, 20 May 2020&lt;/ref&gt; Its prominence outside of Europe grew in the 19th century, becoming a common language in science and other academic fields such as psychology, and despite the rise of English, continues to serve as an important lingua franca.&lt;ref&gt;Rocco, Goranka. [https://www.apgads.lu.lv/fileadmin/user_upload/lu_portal/apgads/PDF/LINCS-2020/lincs.2020.07.pdf The Status of German as a Lingua Franca in Written Scientific Communication: A Study on Language Policies in Linguistic Journals] Language for International Communication: Linking Interdiscipinary Perspectives, Vol. 3, 2020, pp. 79-93.&lt;/ref&gt;

Outside of the German-speaking countries of Central Europe (Germany, Switzerland, Austria, Liechtenstein), German remains a key second language in the region and the Balkans, especially in [[Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia#Federal units|former Yugoslavia]].&lt;ref&gt;Darquennes, Jeroen and Peter Nelde, [https://www.cambridge.org/core/journals/annual-review-of-applied-linguistics/article/german-as-a-lingua-franca/249BDB6060F8BB43B0D1994679A3679A German as a lingua franca], Annual Review of Applied Linguistics ,Volume 26 , January 2006, pp. 61 - 77 25 October 2006.&lt;/ref&gt; It is also a national language in the former German colony of [[Namibia]], where it is especially used in commerce and taught as a second language. German is also one of the [[working language]]s of the EU along with English and French, but it is used less in that role than the other two.

====Chinese====
{{Main|Sinosphere}}
[[File:Map-Sinophone_World.png|thumb|279x279px|Map of the [[Chinese language|Chinese]]-speaking world. {{legend|#008000|native majority}} {{legend|#5ac038|official or educational}} {{legend|#b1ff72|significant minorities}}]]

Today, [[Standard Chinese|Standard Mandarin Chinese]] is the lingua franca of [[China]] and [[Taiwan]], which are home to many mutually unintelligible [[varieties of Chinese]] and, in the case of Taiwan, indigenous [[Formosan languages]]. Among many [[Chinese diaspora]] communities, [[Cantonese]] is often used as the lingua franca instead, particularly in Southeast Asia, due to a longer history of immigration and trade networks with southern China, although Mandarin has also been adopted in some circles since the 2000s.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Li|first=David|date=2006|title=Chinese as a lingua franca in Greater China|url=https://www.researchgate.net/publication/231791003|journal=Annual Review of Applied Linguistics|volume=26|pages=149–176|doi=10.1017/S0267190506000080}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Arabic====
[[File:Arabic Dispersion.svg|thumb|left|Arabic language map&lt;br /&gt;Dark green: majority; light green: significant minority]]

[[Arabic]] was used as a lingua franca across the Islamic empires, whose sizes necessitated a common language, and spread across the Arab and Muslim worlds.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|last1=M. A.|first1=Geography|last2=B. A.|first2=English and Geography|title=How Lingua Franca Helps Different Cultures to Communicate|url=https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|access-date=2021-04-24|website=ThoughtCo|language=en|archive-date=17 October 2022|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152440/https://www.thoughtco.com/lingua-franca-overview-1434507|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; In [[Djibouti]] and parts of [[Eritrea]], both of which are countries where multiple official languages are spoken, Arabic has emerged as a lingua franca in part thanks to the population of the region being predominantly Muslim and Arabic playing a crucial role in Islam. In addition, after having fled from Eritrea due to [[Eritrean War of Independence|ongoing warfare]] and gone to some of the nearby Arab countries, Eritrean emigrants are contributing to Arabic becoming a lingua franca in the region by coming back to their homelands having picked up the Arabic language.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Simeone-Sinelle|first=Marie-Claude|date=2005|title=Arabic Lingua Franca in the Horn of Africa|journal=Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics|volume=2|via=Academia.edu}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Russian====
{{Main|Russophone}}
[[File:Idioma ruso.PNG|thumb|Areas where Russian is the majority language (medium blue) or a minority language (light blue)]]

In addition to being the largest native language in Europe, Russian is widely spoken and understood in [[Central Asia]] and the [[Caucasus]], areas formerly part of the Russian Empire and the Soviet Union. Its use still predominates in many [[post-Soviet states]]. Russian is present as a minority language in the [[Baltic states]], [[Moldova]], and [[Ukraine]]. In [[Belarus]], Russian is the second official language and is used much more widely than Belarusian. It remains the official language of the [[Commonwealth of Independent States]]. Russian is also one of the six official languages of the United Nations.&lt;ref name=&quot;un.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |title=Department for General Assembly and Conference Management – What are the official languages of the United Nations?|access-date=25 January 2008|publisher=United Nations|archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20071012035848/http://www.un.org/Depts/DGACM/faq_languages.htm |archive-date=12 October 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, its use has declined in post-Soviet states. Some members of Russian-speaking minorities outside Russia have either emigrated to Russia or become more integrated into their countries of residence, often learning the local language and, in some cases, using it more frequently in daily communication.

Unlike the former Soviet republics, in the [[Central Europe|Central European]] countries that fell under Soviet occupation and influence after [[World War II]], Russian was taught in schools as a compulsory foreign language, and its practical use was limited to international communication within the Eastern Bloc. Russian-speaking minorities in these countries were very small or nonexistent, so after the collapse of the Eastern Bloc, English completely replaced Russian as the international language.

====Italian====
{{Main|Italian language}}
[[File:Map Italophone World - updated.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Italian language distribution
{{legend|#1E90FF|Areas where it is the majority language}}
{{legend|#87CEEB|Areas where it is a minority language or where it was a former colonial language}}
{{legend|#00FF00|Areas where notable Italian-speaking communities are present}}
]]

During the [[Renaissance]], Italian, particularly the Tuscan variety that became the basis of standard Italian, was considered the lingua franca among the European elite and royal courts, especially in cultural and intellectual circles. The literary authority of figures such as [[Dante Alighieri]], [[Petrarch]] and [[Giovanni Boccaccio]] established Italian as a major language of humanist scholarship and literature. Moreover, the political and economic influence of Italian city-states like the [[Republic of Florence]] and the [[Republic of Venice]] attracted diplomats, merchants, artists, and scholars from across Europe, many of whom engaged with Italian as a language of culture, commerce, and artistic exchange. While Latin remained the primary language of formal scholarship and diplomacy, Italian functioned as an important vernacular medium within elite artistic, literary, and courtly environments during that period.&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Italian Language {{!}} Language and Linguistics {{!}} Research Starters {{!}} EBSCO Research |url=https://www.ebsco.com/ |access-date=2026-02-09 |website=EBSCO |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Grendler |first=Paul F. |url=http://archive.org/details/encyclopediaofre0000gren |title=Encyclopedia of the Renaissance |last2=Renaissance Society of America |date=1999 |publisher=New York : Scribner's |others=Internet Archive |isbn=978-0-684-80514-6}}&lt;/ref&gt;

From the 17th century onward, Italian became the principal lingua franca of [[European music]], particularly in opera and classical composition. Because Italy was the birthplace of [[opera]] and a leading center of musical innovation, its terminology was adopted internationally. Composers such as [[Claudio Monteverdi]] and later [[Antonio Vivaldi]] helped solidify Italian’s prestige, and musical terms became standard across Europe.&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

Today, Italian is the main working language of the [[Holy See]], serving as the lingua franca in the [[Roman Catholic hierarchy]] and the official language of the [[Sovereign Military Order of Malta]]. Italian influence led to the development of [[#Influence and derived languages|derivated languages and dialects]] worldwide. It is also widespread in various sectors and markets, with [[List of English words of Italian origin|its loanwords]] used in arts, luxury goods, fashion, sports and cuisine; it has a significant use in [[musical terminology]] and [[opera]], with numerous Italian words referring to music that have become international terms taken into various languages worldwide, including [[List of Italian musical terms used in English|in English]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |url=https://www.happylanguages.co.uk/italian-language-music/ |title=Why Is Italian the Language of Music? |work=Happy Languages |first=Giovanni |last=Nuccio |date=19 October 2016 |access-date=25 November 2020}}&lt;/ref&gt;

Italian is an [[official language]] in [[Italy]], [[San Marino]], [[Switzerland]] ([[Ticino]] and part of the [[Italian Grisons|Grisons]]), and [[Vatican City]], and it has official [[Minority language|minority status]] in [[Croatia]], [[Slovenia]] ([[Slovene Istria|Istria]]), [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Languages covered by the European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages |url=https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-url=http://web.archive.org/web/20260108174828/https://www.coe.int/t/dg4/education/minlang/AboutCharter/LanguagesCovered.pdf |archive-date=2026-01-08 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www.coe.int}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|title=MULTILINGVISM ŞI LIMBI MINORITARE ÎN ROMÂNIA|language=ro|access-date=13 June 2019|archive-date=14 December 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191214095127/http://www.dri.gov.ro/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Multilingvism-si-limbi-minoritare-in-Romania.pdf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;coe&quot; /&gt; and in [[Languages of Brazil#Language co-officialization|6 municipalities of Brazil]].&lt;ref name=&quot;encantado&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |title=Lei n. 5.048/2023 - Do Município de Encantado / RS |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141927/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/164 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |title=Lei n. 2.812/2021 - Do Município de Santa Teresa / ES |access-date=11 August 2024 |archive-date=11 August 2024 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240811141902/https://direitolinguistico.com.br/repositorio/s/rbll/item/95 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; It is also spoken in [[Malta]] (by 66% of the population),&lt;ref&gt;{{cite report|author=European Commission |title=Special Eurobarometer 386: Europeans and Their Languages |date=June 2012 |series=Eurobarometer Special Surveys |url=http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |access-date=12 February 2015 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160106183351/http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_386_en.pdf |archive-date= 6 January 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Albania]] (upwards of 70%),&lt;ref name=&quot;Zonova, Tatiana 2013&quot;&gt;Zonova, Tatiana. &quot;The Italian language: soft power or dolce potere?.&quot; Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali (2013): 227–231.&lt;/ref&gt; and [[Monaco]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=fh56 |title=Italian — University of Leicester |url=http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140502004444/http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/modern-languages/lal/languages%20at%20lal/italian |archive-date=2014-05-02 |access-date=2026-02-22 |website=www2.le.ac.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Polish====
Historically, the [[Polish language]] was a lingua franca of the [[Polish–Lithuanian Commonwealth]],&lt;ref name=&quot;BRILL&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Koyama 2007 137–153&quot;/&gt; important both diplomatically and academically in [[Central Europe|Central]] and part of [[Eastern Europe]]. It is currently an official language in [[Poland]] and the [[European Union]] and a recognised minority language in [[Bosnia and Herzegovina]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;&gt;[[European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages]]&lt;/ref&gt; [[Brazil]],&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |url=https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |title=Polish made official language in Brazilian town founded by Poles |date=August 2022 |access-date=31 January 2023 |archive-date=31 January 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230131205322/https://notesfrompoland.com/2022/08/01/polish-made-official-language-in-brazilian-town-founded-by-poles/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; 
[[Czech Republic]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Hungary]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|title=Nyelvi sokszínűség az EU-ban – hivatalos regionális és kisebbségi nyelvek a tagállamokban|access-date=28 November 2018|date=16 March 2016|language=hu|archive-date=9 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180809123545/https://europapont.blog.hu/2016/03/16/nyelvi_sokszinuseg_az_eu-ban_hivatalos_regionalis_es_kisebbsegi_nyelvek_a_tagallamokban|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Lithuania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite act|url=http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/Commun/QueVoulezVous.asp?NT=157&amp;CM=2&amp;DF=18/04/02&amp;CL=ENG|title=Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities|index=157|type=Treaty|legislature=Council of Europe|date=1 February 1995|access-date=28 November 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|title=MINELRES – Minority related national legislation – Lithuania|website=www.minelres.lv|access-date=28 November 2018|archive-date=18 September 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180918182544/http://www.minelres.lv/NationalLegislation/Lithuania/lithuania.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Romania]],&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Reservations and Declarations for Treaty No.148 – European Charter for Regional or Minority Languages|url=http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|website=Council of Europe|access-date=3 December 2015|url-status=live|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151208122308/http://www.coe.int/en/web/conventions/full-list/-/conventions/treaty/148/declarations?p_auth=63PpH3zN|archive-date=8 December 2015}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[Slovakia]],&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt; [[Ukraine]].&lt;ref name=&quot;euro-charter&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | title=Law of Ukraine &quot;On Principles of State Language Policy&quot; (Current version — Revision from 01.02.2014) | publisher=Zakon2.rada.gov.ua | work=Document 5029-17, Article 7: Regional or minority languages Ukraine, Paragraph 2 | date=1 February 2014 | access-date=30 April 2014 | archive-date=14 February 2014 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140214125040/http://zakon4.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/5029-17 | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; In the [[United States]], [[Polish Americans]] number more than 11 million.

====Portuguese====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Detailed SVG map of the Lusophone world.svg|thumb|left|230x230px|The [[Lusophone]] world{{legend|#002375|Native language}}
{{legend|#1886FE|Official and administrative language}}
{{legend|#79BDFF|Cultural or secondary language}}]]

[[Portuguese language|Portuguese]] served as lingua franca in the Portuguese Empire, Africa, South America and Asia in the 15th and 16th centuries. When the Portuguese started exploring the seas of Africa, America, Asia and Oceania, they tried to communicate with the natives by mixing a Portuguese-influenced version of lingua franca with the local languages. When Dutch, English or French ships came to compete with the Portuguese, the crews tried to learn this &quot;broken Portuguese&quot;. Through a process of change the lingua franca and Portuguese lexicon was replaced with the languages of the people in contact. Portuguese remains an important lingua franca in the [[Portuguese-speaking African countries]], [[East Timor]], and to a certain extent in [[Macau]] where it is recognized as an official language alongside Chinese though in practice not commonly spoken. Portuguese and Spanish have a certain degree of [[mutual intelligibility]] and [[mixed language]]s such as [[Portuñol]] are used {{Citation needed|date=July 2024}} to facilitate communication in areas like the border area between Brazil and Uruguay.

====Hindustani====
[[File:Hindi belt.png|thumb|left|The '''Hindi Belt''' (red) is a linguistic region in India where [[Hindustani language|Hindustani]] (based on [[Old Hindi|Dehlavi]]) serves as the ''lingua franca.'']]

The [[Hindustani language]], with [[Hindi]] and [[Urdu]] as dual standard varieties, serves as the lingua franca of [[Northern India]] and [[Pakistan]].&lt;ref name=&quot;siddiqi1994&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=Hindustani-English code-mixing in modern literary texts | author=Mohammad Tahsin Siddiqi | year=1994 | publisher=University of Wisconsin | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | quote=... Hindustani is the lingua franca of both India and Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152411/https://books.google.com/books?id=vnrTAAAAMAAJ | url-status=live }}{{self-published source|date=August 2018}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Self-published inline|date=August 2018}}&lt;ref name=&quot;pulsipher2005&quot;&gt;{{Citation | title=World Regional Geography: Global Patterns, Local Lives | author1=Lydia Mihelič Pulsipher | author2=Alex Pulsipher | author3=Holly M. Hapke | year=2005 | isbn=0-7167-1904-5 | publisher=Macmillan | url=https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | quote=... By the time of British colonialism, Hindustani was the lingua franca of all of northern India and what is today Pakistan ... | access-date=18 August 2020 | archive-date=17 October 2022 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152400/https://books.google.com/books?id=WfNaSNNAppQC | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;{{Page needed|date=August 2018}} Many Hindi-speaking North Indian states have adopted the [[three-language formula]] in which students are taught: &quot;(a) Hindi (with Sanskrit as part of the composite course); (b) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu and (c) English or any other modern European language.&quot; The order in non-Hindi speaking states is: &quot;(a) the major language of the state or region; (b) Hindi; (c) Any other modern Indian language including Urdu but excluding (a) and (b) above; and (d) English or any other modern European language.&quot;&lt;ref name=&quot;nic&quot;&gt;{{cite web|title=Three Language Formula|url=http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|publisher=Government of India Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of Education|access-date=16 May 2016|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120222082907/http://www.education.nic.in/cd50years/u/47/3X/473X0I01.htm|archive-date=22 February 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; Hindi has also emerged as a lingua franca in [[Arunachal Pradesh]], a linguistically diverse state in Northeast India.&lt;ref&gt;Chandra, Abhimanyu (22 August 2014). [https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh &quot;How Hindi Became the Language of Choice in Arunachal Pradesh.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190330/https://scroll.in/article/675419/how-hindi-became-the-language-of-choice-in-arunachal-pradesh |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[Scroll.in]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|title=Census of India Website : Office of the Registrar General &amp; Census Commissioner, India|access-date=17 October 2022|archive-date=13 November 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20191113211224/http://www.censusindia.gov.in/2011census/C-17.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; It is estimated that nine-tenths of the state's population knows Hindi.&lt;ref&gt;Roychowdhury, Adrija (27 February 2018). [https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ &quot;How Hindi Became Arunachal Pradesh's Lingua Franca.&quot;] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200821190341/https://indianexpress.com/article/research/how-hindi-language-became-arunachal-pradeshs-lingua-franca-narendra-modi-5079079/ |date=21 August 2020 }} ''[[The Indian Express]]''. Retrieved 12 March 2019.&lt;/ref&gt;

Urdu is the lingua franca of Pakistan and had gained significant influence amongst its people, administration and education. While it shares official status with English, Urdu is the preferred and dominant language used for inter-communication between different ethnic groups of Pakistan.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last1=Ashraf |first1=Muhammad Azeem |last2=Turner |first2=David A. |last3=Laar |first3=Rizwan Ahmed |date=January 2021 |title=Multilingual Language Practices in Education in Pakistan: The Conflict Between Policy and Practice |journal=SAGE Open |language=en |volume=11 |issue=1 |pages=215824402110041 |doi=10.1177/21582440211004140 |issn=2158-2440|doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Malay====
[[File:Malayophone world.svg|thumb|Countries where pluricentric Malay is spoken, regardless of standard variety]]

[[Malay language|Malay]] is understood across a cultural region in Southeast Asia called the &quot;[[Malay world]]&quot; including [[Brunei]], Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, southern [[Thailand]], and certain parts of the Philippines. It is [[pluricentric language|pluricentric]], with several nations codifying a local vernacular variety into several national literary standards:&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|chapter=Malay as a pluricentric language|title=Pluricentric Languages|pages=402–3, 413|year=1992|author=Asmah Haji Omar|author-link=Asmah Haji Omar|isbn=3-11-012855-1|editor-first=Michael G. |editor-last=Clyne|publisher=Gruyter|editor-link=Michael Clyne}}&lt;/ref&gt; Although [[Javanese language|Javanese]] has more native speakers, Indonesia uses a standardized form of [[Riau-Lingga Sultanate|Riau]] Malay as the basis for the national language &quot;[[Indonesian language|Indonesian]].&quot; Bahasa Indonesia is the sole official language even though it is the mother tongue of [[languages of Indonesia|only 7%]] of Indonesians.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Indonesian|website=Asian Languages &amp; Literature|publisher=University of Washington|url=https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|access-date=2021-04-24|archive-date=16 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210516173537/https://asian.washington.edu/fields/indonesian|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Swahili====
[[File:Maeneo penye wasemaji wa Kiswahili.png|thumb|left|225x225px|Geographic extent of Swahili. Dark green: native range. Medium green: official use. Light green: bilingual use but not official.]]

[[Swahili language|Swahili]] developed as a lingua franca between several [[Bantu languages|Bantu]]-speaking tribal groups on the east coast of Africa with heavy influence from Arabic.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|title=Swahili language|date=27 August 2014|website=Encyclopædia Britannica|access-date=29 April 2019|archive-date=23 July 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190723004044/https://www.britannica.com/topic/Swahili-language|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; The earliest examples of writing in Swahili are from 1711.&lt;ref&gt;E. A. Alpers, ''Ivory and Slaves in East Central Africa'', London, 1975.., pp. 98–99; T. Vernet, &quot;Les cités-Etats swahili et la puissance omanaise (1650–1720), ''Journal des Africanistes'', 72(2), 2002, pp. 102–105.&lt;/ref&gt; In the early 19th century the use of Swahili as a lingua franca moved inland with the Arabic ivory and slave traders. It was eventually adopted by Europeans as well during periods of colonization in the area. German colonizers used it as the language of administration in [[German East Africa]], later becoming [[Tanganyika (territory)|Tanganyika]], which influenced the choice to use it as a national language in what is now independent [[Tanzania]].&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot; /&gt; Swahili is currently one of the national languages and it is taught in schools and universities in several East African countries, thus prompting it to be regarded as a modern-day lingua franca by many people in the region. Several [[Pan-African]] writers and politicians have unsuccessfully called for Swahili to become the lingua franca of Africa as a means of unifying the African continent and overcoming the legacy of colonialism.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Dzahene-Quarshie|first=Josephine|date=December 2013|title=Ghana's Contribution to the Promotion of Kiswahili: Challenges and Prospects for African Unity|journal=Journal of Pan African Studies|volume=6|pages=69–85|via=Academic Search Complete}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Persian====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}
[[File:Persian Language Location Map.svg|thumb|Areas with significant numbers of people whose first language is Persian (including dialects)]]

[[Persian language|Persian]], an [[Iranian language]], is the official language of [[Iran]], [[Afghanistan]] ([[Dari language|Dari]]) and [[Tajikistan]] ([[Tajik language|Tajik]]). It acts as a lingua franca in both Iran and Afghanistan between the various ethnic groups in those countries. The Persian language in South Asia, before the [[British Raj|British colonized the Indian subcontinent]], was the region's lingua franca and a widely used official language in north India and Pakistan.

====Hausa====
[[Hausa language|Hausa]] is the language of communication between speakers of different languages in Northern [[Nigeria]] and other West African countries,&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|date=2021-03-23|title=Hausa Language: 4 interesting things you should know about Nigeria's most widely spoken dialect|url=https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|access-date=2021-04-21|newspaper=[[Pulse Nigeria]]|language=en|archive-date=21 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210421182432/https://www.pulse.ng/lifestyle/food-travel/hausa-language-4-interesting-things-you-should-know-about-nigerias-most-widely-spoken/m78gnmh|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; including the northern region of Ghana.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Obeng|first=Samuel Gyasi |author-link1=Samuel Obeng (linguist) |date=1997|title=An Analysis of the Linguistic Situation in Ghana|journal=African Languages and Cultures|volume=10|pages=63–81|doi=10.1080/09544169708717813}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Amharic====
[[Amharic language|Amharic]] is the lingua franca and most widely spoken language in Ethiopia, and is known by most people who speak another Ethiopian language.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://www.addisherald.com/amharic-language-how-it-become-ethiopias-lingua-franca/ | title=Amharic Language: How it become Ethiopia's Lingua Franca – Addis Herald }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web | url=https://omnatigray.org/amharic-lingua-franca-and-tool-of-domination/ | title=Amharic as a lingua franca and tool of domination | date=12 January 2022 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

====Creole languages====
{{unref section|date=January 2026}}

Creoles, such as [[Nigerian Pidgin]] in Nigeria, [[Haitian Creole]], and [[Patois]] etc. are used as lingua francas across the world. This is especially true in Africa, the [[Caribbean]], [[Melanesia]], Southeast Asia and in parts of Australia by [[Indigenous Australians]].

====Sign languages====
[[File:Sign Languages of Turtle Island.svg|thumb|left|Map of the various sign languages of North America, excluding [[Francosign languages|Francosign]] languages. [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]] was the predominant lingua franca prior to European settlement, able to be written down and signed alongside oral languages]]

The majority of pre-colonial North American nations communicated internationally using [[Plains Indian Sign Language|Hand Talk]].&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Plains Indian Sign Language|url=https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|access-date=2021-04-24|website=Sam Noble Museum|date=21 December 2017 |language=en-US|archive-date=24 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210424233208/https://samnoblemuseum.ou.edu/collections-and-research/native-american-languages/map-of-oklahoma-languages/plains-indian-sign-language/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Graber |first1=Jennifer |title=Who put Native American sign language in the US mail? |url=https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |website=OUPblog |date=9 May 2018 |publisher=Oxford University Press |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=15 February 2020 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200215194025/https://blog.oup.com/2018/05/native-american-sign-language-us-mail/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Also called Prairie Sign Language, Plains Indian Sign Language, or First Nations Sign Language, this language functioned predominantly—and still continues to function&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Hilleary |first1=Cecily |title=Native American Hand Talkers Fight to Keep Sign Language Alive |url=https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |website=VOA |date=3 April 2017 |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152402/https://www.voanews.com/a/native-american-hand-talker-fight-to-keep-signed-language-alive/3794333.html |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;—as a second language within most of the (now historical) countries of the Great Plains, from [[Western Shoshone|Newe Segobia]] in the West to [[Ojibwe|Anishinaabewaki]] in the East, down into what are now the northern states of Mexico and up into [[Cree]] Country stopping before [[Denendeh]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Indian Sign Language Council of 1930 |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |website=YouTube | date=9 June 2012 |publisher=Grande Polpo Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=17 October 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20221017152522/https://www.youtube.com/watch?app=desktop&amp;v=bfT2a5SGDFA |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Tomkins, William. ''Indian sign language.'' [Republication of &quot;Universal Indian Sign Language of the Plains Indians of North America&quot; 5th ed. 1931]. New York : Dover Publications 1969. (p. 7)&lt;/ref&gt; The relationship remains unknown between Hand Talk and other manual Indigenous languages like [[Keresan Sign Language]] and [[Plateau Sign Language]], the latter of which is now extinct (though Ktunaxa Sign Language is still used).&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Flynn |first1=Darin |title=Indigenous sign languages in Canada |url=https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |website=University of Calgary |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511005642/https://www.ucalgary.ca/people/darin-flynn/indigenous-sign-languages-in-Canada |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; Although unrelated, perhaps [[Inuit Sign Language]] played and continues to play a similar role across [[Inuit Nunangat]] and the various [[Inuit]] [[Inuit languages|dialects]]. The original Hand Talk is found across [[Indian Country]] in pockets, but it has also been employed to create new or revive old languages, such as with [[Oneida Sign Language]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |title=Oneida Sign language created to connect deaf community with culture {{!}} CBC News |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I8_LRBi9y0I | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/I8_LRBi9y0I| archive-date=2021-10-30|access-date=11 May 2021 |publisher=NewsHub}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[International Sign]], though a pidgin language, is present at most significant international gatherings, from which interpretations of national [[sign language]]s are given, such as in [[French Sign Language|LSF]], [[American Sign Language|ASL]], [[British Sign Language|BSL]], [[Libras]], or [[Auslan]]. International Sign, or IS and formerly Gestuno, interpreters can be found at many [[European Union]] parliamentary or committee sittings,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=International Sign |url=https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |website=European Union of the Deaf |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=28 November 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181128014325/https://www.eud.eu/about-us/eud-position-paper/international-sign-guidelines/ |url-status=dead }}&lt;/ref&gt; during certain United Nations affairs,&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=A Disability-Inclusive Response to COVID-19 – Policy Brief Executive Summary (International Sign Language) |url=http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |website=UN Web TV |publisher=United Nations |access-date=11 May 2021 |archive-date=11 May 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210511090159/http://webtv.un.org/watch/a-disability-inclusive-response-to-covid-19-policy-brief-executive-summary-international-sign-language/6154796428001 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; conducting international sporting events like the [[Deaflympics]], in all [[World Federation of the Deaf]] functions, and across similar settings. The language has few set internal grammatical rules, instead co-opting national vocabularies of the speaker and audience, and modifying the words to bridge linguistic gaps, with heavy use of gestures and [[Classifier constructions in sign languages|classifiers]].&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=DEAFGPS: International Sign Connects |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GwzSv5JpwjM | archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/varchive/youtube/20211030/GwzSv5JpwjM| archive-date=2021-10-30|website=YouTube | date=26 July 2019 |publisher=H3 WORLD TV |access-date=11 May 2021}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{Portal|Languages|Linguistics}} 
* [[ڪريئول ٻوليون]] 
* [[بين اللسانيات]]
* [[پڊجن ٻوليون]]  
* [[عالمي ٻوليون]]
* [[ڪاروهنوار جي ٻولي]]
* [[مادي ٻولي ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]] 
* [[ڪل ڳالهائيندڙن جي تعداد مطابق ٻولين جي فهرست]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}

==وڌيڪ مطالعو==
* {{cite book |last= Hall |first= R. A. Jr. |date= 1966 |title= Pidgin and Creole Languages |url= https://archive.org/details/pidgincreolelang0000hall |publisher= Cornell University Press |isbn=0-8014-0173-9 }}
* {{cite book |last= Heine |first= Bernd |date= 1970 |title= Status and Use of African Lingua Francas |publisher= BRILL |isbn=3-8039-0033-6 }}
* {{cite book |last= Kahane |first= Henry Romanos |date= 1958|title= The Lingua Franca in the Levant }}
* {{cite book |last= Melatti |first= Julio Cezar |date= 1983 |title= Índios do Brasil |location= São Paulo |publisher= Hucitec Press |edition= 48 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2005 |title= Empires of the Word|url= https://archive.org/details/empiresofwordl00ostl|url-access= registration|location=London |publisher=Harper |isbn= 978-0-00-711871-7 }}
* {{cite book |last= Ostler |first= Nicholas |date= 2010 |title= The Last Lingua Franca |url= https://archive.org/details/isbn_9780802717719 |location= New York |publisher= Walker |isbn=978-0-8027-1771-9 }}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Sister project links
&lt;!-- Configuration parameters. Do not leave empty; populate, or remove --&gt;
 |1= |collapsible= |display=Lingua franca |position= |style=
&lt;!-- Specify &quot;no&quot; to exclude the corresponding project: --&gt;
 |wikt=lingua franca |c=Lingua franca |commonscat=no |n=no |q=no |s=no |author=no |b=no |v=no |d=Q80839
}}
* {{cite web |url= https://jkorpela.fi/lingua-franca.html |title= English – the universal language on the Internet?}}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090328135757/http://www.italica.rai.it/principali/lingua/bruni/lezioni/f_lll5.htm |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-03-28 |title= ''Lingua franca del Mediterraneo o Sabir'' of professor Francesco Bruni |language=it }}
* {{cite web |url= http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20090409122609/http://www.uwm.edu/~corre/franca/edition3/texts.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2009-04-09 |title= Sample texts}} from [[Juan del Encina]], ''Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme'', [[Carlo Goldoni]]'s ''L'Impresario da Smyrna'', Diego de Haedo and other sources
* {{cite web |url= https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20100408100852/https://pantherfile.uwm.edu/corre/www/franca/go.html |url-status= dead |archive-date= 2010-04-08 |title= An introduction to the original Mediterranean Lingua Franca}}

{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Lingua Franca}}
[[زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:لسانيات]]
[[زمرو:لنگئا فرانڪا]]
[[زمرو:بين اللسانيات]]
[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا]]
[[زمرو:سماج ۾ حيثيت جي لحاظ کان ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>qpsa79iqk3982an1rcnpl6rno2jmxkf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ڪيميائي بانڊ</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>41084</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394065</id>
      <parentid>320010</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:08:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394065</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15367" sha1="f0az7yf704vzcv79y9kof9gbk783u4k" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|Association of atoms to form chemical compounds}}
{{Distinguish|Molecular binding}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (Chemical Bond) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[برقيو|اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺ (octet) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  octet قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (Resonance) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برق سڪونيات (Electrostatics)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن. 

== ڪيميائي بندن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بند''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (Valence electrons) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بندن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بند ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (Potential energy) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (Kinetic energy) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (Orbital) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بند ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بند گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بند وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بند ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بند جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بند خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بند مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (Wave nature) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بند کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بند گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بند ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بند ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

==تاريخ==
==ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ==
==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>f0az7yf704vzcv79y9kof9gbk783u4k</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394066</id>
      <parentid>394065</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:10:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394066</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15392" sha1="qo7zv6oiuf3kqvphhz7lryaavanzbwh" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|Association of atoms to form chemical compounds}}
{{Distinguish|Molecular binding}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (Resonance) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بندن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بند''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (Valence electrons) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بندن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بند ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (Potential energy) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (Kinetic energy) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (Orbital) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بند ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بند گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بند وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بند ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بند جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بند خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بند مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (Wave nature) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بند کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بند گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بند ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بند ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

==تاريخ==
==ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ==
==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>qo7zv6oiuf3kqvphhz7lryaavanzbwh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394067</id>
      <parentid>394066</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:12:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394067</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15421" sha1="5prrwpdu1o05n4odqm3fjseecvgkczf" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (Resonance) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بندن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بند''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (Valence electrons) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بندن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بند ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (Potential energy) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (Kinetic energy) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (Orbital) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بند ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بند گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بند وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بند ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بند جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بند خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بند مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (Wave nature) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بند کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بند گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بند ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بند ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

==تاريخ==
==ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ==
==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>5prrwpdu1o05n4odqm3fjseecvgkczf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394068</id>
      <parentid>394067</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:14:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394068</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15426" sha1="obd37o229aoh385n3mvex671k1jlkqa" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بندن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بند''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (Valence electrons) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بندن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بند ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (Potential energy) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (Kinetic energy) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (Orbital) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بند ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بند گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بند وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بند ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بند جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بند خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بند مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (Wave nature) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بند کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بند گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بند ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بند ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

==تاريخ==
==ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ==
==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>obd37o229aoh385n3mvex671k1jlkqa</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394069</id>
      <parentid>394068</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:15:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394069</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15465" sha1="qf86rsc6z06rdcy629mektu3ko7c8dj" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بندن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بند''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بندن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بند ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بند ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بند گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بند وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بند ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بند جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بند خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بند مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بند کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بند گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بند ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بند ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

==تاريخ==
==ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ==
==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>qf86rsc6z06rdcy629mektu3ko7c8dj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394070</id>
      <parentid>394069</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:16:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394070</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="23872" sha1="7q4y893xw13d8i4ojgkv5c10p86nusy" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بندن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بند''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بندن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بند ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بند ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بند گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بند وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بند ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بند جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بند خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بند مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بند کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بند گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بند ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بند ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

==ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ==
==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>7q4y893xw13d8i4ojgkv5c10p86nusy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394071</id>
      <parentid>394070</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:18:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394071</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33467" sha1="mdou8ojv8xtwqgqzou2d16z8iceg1gp" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بندن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بند''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بندن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بند ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بند ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بند گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بند وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بند ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بند جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بند خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بند مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بند کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بند گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بند ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بند ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بند|برقي-جوڙي واري بند]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بند]]، [[ٻٽو بند]] يا [[ٽهڻو بند]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بند]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بند جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بند جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بند جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بند جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بند ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بند نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

==ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ==
==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>mdou8ojv8xtwqgqzou2d16z8iceg1gp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394072</id>
      <parentid>394071</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:21:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394072</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39257" sha1="oubxd9kulfnr0ohbq3rszfjmudh3ecr" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بندن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بند''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بندن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بند ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بند ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بند گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بند وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بند ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بند جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بند خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بند مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بند کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بند گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بند ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بند ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بند|برقي-جوڙي واري بند]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بند]]، [[ٻٽو بند]] يا [[ٽهڻو بند]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بند]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بند جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بند جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بند جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بند جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بند ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بند نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (Three-dimensional) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بندن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بندن (يعني بند ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (Functional group) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (Conformational) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (Three-dimensional) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (Two-dimensional) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (Valence electrons) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بند ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بند جي ڊگھائي|بند ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بند جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بند جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بند
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بند''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (Intramolecular) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|سالمَن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي]]ن جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (Electronegativity) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.

برقي منفيت، [[بند توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بند توانائي بند جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بند]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بند ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>oubxd9kulfnr0ohbq3rszfjmudh3ecr</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394073</id>
      <parentid>394072</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:22:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394073</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44732" sha1="gva8dgnz1f57zrjxj7g9qgfujxjefj8" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بندن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بند''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بندن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بند ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بند ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بند گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بند وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بند ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بند جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بند خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بند مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بند ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بند کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بند گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بند ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بند ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بند|برقي-جوڙي واري بند]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بند]]، [[ٻٽو بند]] يا [[ٽهڻو بند]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بند]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بند جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بند جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بند جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بند جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بند ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بند نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (Three-dimensional) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بندن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بندن (يعني بند ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (Functional group) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (Conformational) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (Three-dimensional) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (Two-dimensional) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (Valence electrons) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بند ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بند جي ڊگھائي|بند ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بند جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بند جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بند
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بند''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (Intramolecular) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|سالمَن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي]]ن جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (Electronegativity) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.

برقي منفيت، [[بند توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بند توانائي بند جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بند]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بند ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بند ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بند ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بند گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بند ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بند جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[elementary charge|e]] کان +3[[elementary charge|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بند گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.

آئني بندن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (Ionic crystals) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بند ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بند اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (X-ray diffraction) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.

آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (Directional) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.

مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.

ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.

==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>gva8dgnz1f57zrjxj7g9qgfujxjefj8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394074</id>
      <parentid>394073</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:26:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394074</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44772" sha1="h0eju4bqf7zk0poru7ipfl6xe9n8m8i" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بند|برقي-جوڙي واري بند]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بند]]، [[ٻٽو بند]] يا [[ٽهڻو بند]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بند]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بند جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بند جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بند جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بند جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بند ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بند نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (Three-dimensional) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بندن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بندن (يعني بند ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (Functional group) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (Conformational) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (Three-dimensional) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (Two-dimensional) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (Valence electrons) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بند ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بند جي ڊگھائي|بند ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بند جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بند جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بند
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بند''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (Intramolecular) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|سالمَن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي]]ن جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (Electronegativity) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.

برقي منفيت، [[بند توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بند توانائي بند جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بند]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بند ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بند ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بند ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بند گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بند ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بند جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[elementary charge|e]] کان +3[[elementary charge|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بند گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.

آئني بندن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (Ionic crystals) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بند ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بند اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (X-ray diffraction) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.

آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (Directional) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.

مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.

ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.

==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>h0eju4bqf7zk0poru7ipfl6xe9n8m8i</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394075</id>
      <parentid>394074</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:33:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394075</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44798" sha1="inv972adh9q6adzrj4t96fninr0mmli" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ|برقي-جوڙي واري بانڊ]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بانڊ]]، [[ٻٽو بانڊ]] يا [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بانڊ]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بانڊ جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بانڊ جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بانڊ جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بانڊ جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بانڊن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (Three-dimensional) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بندن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بندن (يعني بند ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (Functional group) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (Conformational) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (Three-dimensional) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (Two-dimensional) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (Valence electrons) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بند ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بند جي ڊگھائي|بند ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بند جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بند جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بند
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بند''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (Intramolecular) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|سالمَن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي]]ن جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (Electronegativity) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.

برقي منفيت، [[بند توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بند توانائي بند جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بند]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بند ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بند ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بند ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بند گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بند ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بند جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[elementary charge|e]] کان +3[[elementary charge|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بند گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.

آئني بندن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (Ionic crystals) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بند ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بند اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (X-ray diffraction) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.

آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (Directional) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.

مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.

ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.

==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>inv972adh9q6adzrj4t96fninr0mmli</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394076</id>
      <parentid>394075</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:36:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394076</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44843" sha1="og9luoz5uwfpok4tv6kl1uh3uzjcvnl" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ|برقي-جوڙي واري بانڊ]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بانڊ]]، [[ٻٽو بانڊ]] يا [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بانڊ]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بانڊ جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بانڊ جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بانڊ جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بانڊ جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بانڊن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بانڊن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بانڊن (يعني بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (فنڪشنل گروپ) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (ڪمفرميشنل) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (ٽو-ڊائميشنل) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (وئلنس اليڪٽران) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بانڊ ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بند جي ڊگھائي|بند ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بند جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بند جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بند
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بند''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (Intramolecular) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|سالمَن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي]]ن جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (Electronegativity) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.

برقي منفيت، [[بند توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بند توانائي بند جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بند]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بند ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بند ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بند ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بند گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بند ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بند جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[elementary charge|e]] کان +3[[elementary charge|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بند گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.

آئني بندن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (Ionic crystals) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بند ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بند اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (X-ray diffraction) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.

آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (Directional) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.

مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.

ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.

==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>og9luoz5uwfpok4tv6kl1uh3uzjcvnl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394077</id>
      <parentid>394076</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:40:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394077</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44923" sha1="h6wcbzpi5hbakecygcz3eaplvvjf73x" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ|برقي-جوڙي واري بانڊ]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بانڊ]]، [[ٻٽو بانڊ]] يا [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بانڊ]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بانڊ جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بانڊ جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بانڊ جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بانڊ جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بانڊن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بانڊن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بانڊن (يعني بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (فنڪشنل گروپ) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (ڪمفرميشنل) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (ٽو-ڊائميشنل) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (وئلنس اليڪٽران) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بانڊ ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بانڊ جي ڊگھائي|بانڊ ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بانڊ جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بانڊ جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بانڊ
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (انٽرا ماليڪيولر) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|ماليڪيولن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[اليڪٽران|اليڪٽرانن]] جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (اليڪٽرونيگيٽوٽي) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.
برقي منفيت، [[بانڊ توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بانڊ توانائي بانڊ جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بانڊ]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بانڊ ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بند ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بند ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بند کي هم اشتراڪي بند کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بند گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بند ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بند جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[elementary charge|e]] کان +3[[elementary charge|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بند گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.

آئني بندن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (Ionic crystals) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بند ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بند اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (X-ray diffraction) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.

آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (Directional) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.

مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.

ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.

==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>h6wcbzpi5hbakecygcz3eaplvvjf73x</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394078</id>
      <parentid>394077</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T19:45:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394078</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44997" sha1="qvu6o9gtejv739jzvxmafhwtcgmqv8m" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ|برقي-جوڙي واري بانڊ]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بانڊ]]، [[ٻٽو بانڊ]] يا [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بانڊ]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بانڊ جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بانڊ جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بانڊ جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بانڊ جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بانڊن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بانڊن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بانڊن (يعني بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (فنڪشنل گروپ) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (ڪمفرميشنل) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (ٽو-ڊائميشنل) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (وئلنس اليڪٽران) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بانڊ ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بانڊ جي ڊگھائي|بانڊ ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بانڊ جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بانڊ جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بانڊ
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (انٽرا ماليڪيولر) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|ماليڪيولن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[اليڪٽران|اليڪٽرانن]] جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (اليڪٽرونيگيٽوٽي) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.
برقي منفيت، [[بانڊ توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بانڊ توانائي بانڊ جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بانڊ]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بانڊ ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بانڊ ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن|آئنن]] جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بانڊ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بانڊ گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بانڊ جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] کان +3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بانڊ گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.
آئني بانڊن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (آئني ڪرسٽل) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بانڊ ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (ايڪس-ري ڊسفريڪشن) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.
آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (ڊائريڪشنل) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.
مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.
ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.

==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>qvu6o9gtejv739jzvxmafhwtcgmqv8m</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394080</id>
      <parentid>394078</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:15:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394080</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49944" sha1="7gdfu6fbwi4n0jjofphwgorvzsci58j" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ|برقي-جوڙي واري بانڊ]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بانڊ]]، [[ٻٽو بانڊ]] يا [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بانڊ]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بانڊ جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بانڊ جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بانڊ جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بانڊ جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بانڊن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بانڊن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بانڊن (يعني بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (فنڪشنل گروپ) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (ڪمفرميشنل) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (ٽو-ڊائميشنل) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (وئلنس اليڪٽران) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بانڊ ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بانڊ جي ڊگھائي|بانڊ ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بانڊ جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بانڊ جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بانڊ
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (انٽرا ماليڪيولر) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|ماليڪيولن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[اليڪٽران|اليڪٽرانن]] جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (اليڪٽرونيگيٽوٽي) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.
برقي منفيت، [[بانڊ توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بانڊ توانائي بانڊ جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بانڊ]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بانڊ ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بانڊ ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن|آئنن]] جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بانڊ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بانڊ گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بانڊ جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] کان +3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بانڊ گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.
آئني بانڊن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (آئني ڪرسٽل) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بانڊ ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (ايڪس-ري ڊسفريڪشن) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.
آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (ڊائريڪشنل) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.
مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.
ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.
=== هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ===
{{Main|هم اشتراڪي بانڊ}}

[[File:covalent.svg|thumb|left|160px|[[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ. [[ليوس بناوت]] ۾ C ۽ H ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ گڏيل برقين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي.]]

هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڪيميائي بانڊن جو سڀ کان عام قسم آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه يا وڌيڪ ايٽم تڪافؤ برقين کي لڳ ڀڳ هڪجهڙي نموني پاڻ ۾ ورهائيندا آهن. ان جو سڀ کان سادو ۽ عام قسم [[اڪيلو بانڊ]] آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه ايٽم برقين جو هڪ جوڙو گڏيل طور استعمال ڪندا آهن. ٻين قسمن ۾ [[ٻٽو بانڊ]]، [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]]، [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ#هڪ- ۽ ٽي-برقي بانڊ|هڪ- ۽ ٽن-برقي بانڊ]]، [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو ٻه-برقي بانڊ]] ۽ [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو چار-برقي بانڊ]] شامل آهن.

غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ ايٽمن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ فرق تمام گهٽ، عام طور 0 کان 0.3 تائين، هوندو آهي. گهڻن [[نامياتي مرڪب]]ن ۾ موجود بانڊ هم اشتراڪي نوعيت جا هوندا آهن. شڪل ۾ ڏيکاريل [[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ هر هائڊروجن ايٽم ڪاربان سان هڪ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ٺاهي ٿو. اهڙي بانڊ جي LCAO وضاحت لاءِ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ [[پائي بانڊ]] ڏسو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Introduction to organic chemistry.|last1=Streitwieser|first1=Andrew|last2=Heathcock|first2=Clayton H.|last3=Kosower|first3=Edward M.|publisher=Macmillan|others=Heathcock, Clayton H., Kosower, Edward M.|year=1992|isbn=978-0024181701|edition=4th|location=New York|pages=[https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250 250]|oclc=24501305|url-access=registration|url=https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيڪي سالما بنيادي طور غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن، اهي پاڻي يا ٻين [[قطبي محلل]]ن ۾ عام طور نه ڳرندا آهن، پر [[غير قطبي محلل]]ن، جهڙوڪ [[هيڪسين]]، ۾ آسانيءَ سان حل ٿي ويندا آهن.

[[قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] اهڙو هم اشتراڪي بانڊ آهي، جنهن ۾ نمايان [[آئني بانڊ]] وارو ڪردار پڻ موجود هوندو آهي. اهڙي حالت ۾ گڏيل ٻئي برقي هڪ ايٽم ڏانهن ٻئي جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ چارج جي غير يڪسان ورڇ پيدا ٿيندي آهي. اهڙا بانڊ وچولي درجي جي برقي منفيت جي فرق رکندڙ ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ [[ڊائپول#سالمي ڊائپول|ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش]] جو سبب بڻجن ٿا. اهڙن بانڊن ۾ ٻنهي ايٽمن جي برقي منفيت جو فرق عام طور 0.3 کان 1.7 جي وچ ۾ هوندو آهي.

==== اڪيلا ۽ گهڻا بانڊ ====

[[اڪيلو بانڊ]] ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ برقين جي هڪ جوڙي جي گڏيل ورڇ کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. هائڊروجن (H) جي هر ايٽم وٽ هڪ تڪافؤ برقي هوندو آهي. جڏهن ٻه هائڊروجن ايٽم پاڻ ۾ گڏجن ٿا، ته اهي برقين جو هڪ گڏيل جوڙو استعمال ڪندي هڪ سالمو ٺاهين ٿا. اهڙيءَ طرح هر هائڊروجن ايٽم کي [[هيليم]] (He) جهڙي عظيم گئس واري برقي ترتيب حاصل ٿي وڃي ٿي. ٻنهي ايٽمن جي وچ واري علائقي ۾ هن گڏيل برقي جوڙي جي برقي ڪثافت، الڳ الڳ ٻن غير رابطي وارن هائڊروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ هوندي آهي.

[[File:Pi-Bond.svg|thumb|right|ٻه p-مدار جيڪي هڪ پائي بانڊ ٺاهي رهيا آهن.]]

[[ٻٽو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٻن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي. انهن مان هڪ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ ٻيو [[پائي بانڊ]] هوندو آهي، جنهن ۾ برقي ڪثافت ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي ملائيندڙ محور جي ٻنهي پاسن تي مرڪوز هوندي آهي.
[[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٽن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي، جيڪي هڪ سگما بانڊ ۽ ٻن پائي بانڊن مان ٺهندا آهن. ان جو مشهور مثال [[نائيٽروجن]] جو سالمو آهي.
[[چوڻو بانڊ]] ۽ ان کان وڌيڪ درجي جا بانڊ تمام ناياب هوندا آهن ۽ صرف ڪجهه [[منتقلي ڌاتو]]ن جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ئي ٺهندا آهن.

==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>7gdfu6fbwi4n0jjofphwgorvzsci58j</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394081</id>
      <parentid>394080</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:20:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394081</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="53055" sha1="epqsrxi91nxr7z57xu12rf7masufiiz" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ|برقي-جوڙي واري بانڊ]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بانڊ]]، [[ٻٽو بانڊ]] يا [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بانڊ]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بانڊ جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بانڊ جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بانڊ جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بانڊ جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بانڊن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بانڊن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بانڊن (يعني بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (فنڪشنل گروپ) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (ڪمفرميشنل) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (ٽو-ڊائميشنل) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (وئلنس اليڪٽران) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بانڊ ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بانڊ جي ڊگھائي|بانڊ ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بانڊ جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بانڊ جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بانڊ
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (انٽرا ماليڪيولر) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|ماليڪيولن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[اليڪٽران|اليڪٽرانن]] جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (اليڪٽرونيگيٽوٽي) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.
برقي منفيت، [[بانڊ توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بانڊ توانائي بانڊ جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بانڊ]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بانڊ ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بانڊ ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن|آئنن]] جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بانڊ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بانڊ گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بانڊ جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] کان +3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بانڊ گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.
آئني بانڊن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (آئني ڪرسٽل) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بانڊ ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (ايڪس-ري ڊسفريڪشن) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.
آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (ڊائريڪشنل) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.
مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.
ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.
=== هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ===
{{Main|هم اشتراڪي بانڊ}}

[[File:covalent.svg|thumb|left|160px|[[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ. [[ليوس بناوت]] ۾ C ۽ H ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ گڏيل برقين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي.]]

هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڪيميائي بانڊن جو سڀ کان عام قسم آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه يا وڌيڪ ايٽم تڪافؤ برقين کي لڳ ڀڳ هڪجهڙي نموني پاڻ ۾ ورهائيندا آهن. ان جو سڀ کان سادو ۽ عام قسم [[اڪيلو بانڊ]] آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه ايٽم برقين جو هڪ جوڙو گڏيل طور استعمال ڪندا آهن. ٻين قسمن ۾ [[ٻٽو بانڊ]]، [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]]، [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ#هڪ- ۽ ٽي-برقي بانڊ|هڪ- ۽ ٽن-برقي بانڊ]]، [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو ٻه-برقي بانڊ]] ۽ [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو چار-برقي بانڊ]] شامل آهن.

غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ ايٽمن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ فرق تمام گهٽ، عام طور 0 کان 0.3 تائين، هوندو آهي. گهڻن [[نامياتي مرڪب]]ن ۾ موجود بانڊ هم اشتراڪي نوعيت جا هوندا آهن. شڪل ۾ ڏيکاريل [[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ هر هائڊروجن ايٽم ڪاربان سان هڪ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ٺاهي ٿو. اهڙي بانڊ جي LCAO وضاحت لاءِ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ [[پائي بانڊ]] ڏسو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Introduction to organic chemistry.|last1=Streitwieser|first1=Andrew|last2=Heathcock|first2=Clayton H.|last3=Kosower|first3=Edward M.|publisher=Macmillan|others=Heathcock, Clayton H., Kosower, Edward M.|year=1992|isbn=978-0024181701|edition=4th|location=New York|pages=[https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250 250]|oclc=24501305|url-access=registration|url=https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيڪي سالما بنيادي طور غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن، اهي پاڻي يا ٻين [[قطبي محلل]]ن ۾ عام طور نه ڳرندا آهن، پر [[غير قطبي محلل]]ن، جهڙوڪ [[هيڪسين]]، ۾ آسانيءَ سان حل ٿي ويندا آهن.

[[قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] اهڙو هم اشتراڪي بانڊ آهي، جنهن ۾ نمايان [[آئني بانڊ]] وارو ڪردار پڻ موجود هوندو آهي. اهڙي حالت ۾ گڏيل ٻئي برقي هڪ ايٽم ڏانهن ٻئي جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ چارج جي غير يڪسان ورڇ پيدا ٿيندي آهي. اهڙا بانڊ وچولي درجي جي برقي منفيت جي فرق رکندڙ ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ [[ڊائپول#سالمي ڊائپول|ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش]] جو سبب بڻجن ٿا. اهڙن بانڊن ۾ ٻنهي ايٽمن جي برقي منفيت جو فرق عام طور 0.3 کان 1.7 جي وچ ۾ هوندو آهي.

==== اڪيلا ۽ گهڻا بانڊ ====

[[اڪيلو بانڊ]] ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ برقين جي هڪ جوڙي جي گڏيل ورڇ کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. هائڊروجن (H) جي هر ايٽم وٽ هڪ تڪافؤ برقي هوندو آهي. جڏهن ٻه هائڊروجن ايٽم پاڻ ۾ گڏجن ٿا، ته اهي برقين جو هڪ گڏيل جوڙو استعمال ڪندي هڪ سالمو ٺاهين ٿا. اهڙيءَ طرح هر هائڊروجن ايٽم کي [[هيليم]] (He) جهڙي عظيم گئس واري برقي ترتيب حاصل ٿي وڃي ٿي. ٻنهي ايٽمن جي وچ واري علائقي ۾ هن گڏيل برقي جوڙي جي برقي ڪثافت، الڳ الڳ ٻن غير رابطي وارن هائڊروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ هوندي آهي.

[[File:Pi-Bond.svg|thumb|right|ٻه p-مدار جيڪي هڪ پائي بانڊ ٺاهي رهيا آهن.]]

[[ٻٽو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٻن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي. انهن مان هڪ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ ٻيو [[پائي بانڊ]] هوندو آهي، جنهن ۾ برقي ڪثافت ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي ملائيندڙ محور جي ٻنهي پاسن تي مرڪوز هوندي آهي.
[[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٽن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي، جيڪي هڪ سگما بانڊ ۽ ٻن پائي بانڊن مان ٺهندا آهن. ان جو مشهور مثال [[نائيٽروجن]] جو سالمو آهي.
[[چوڻو بانڊ]] ۽ ان کان وڌيڪ درجي جا بانڊ تمام ناياب هوندا آهن ۽ صرف ڪجهه [[منتقلي ڌاتو]]ن جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ئي ٺهندا آهن.

== بين-سالمي بانڊ ==
{{Main|بين-سالمي قوت}}

ٻن يا وڌيڪ اهڙن سالمَن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي پاڻ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊن سان ڳنڍيل نه هجن، ڪيترن قسمن جا ڪمزور بانڊ ٺهي سگهن ٿا. [[بين-سالمي قوت]]ون سالمَن کي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڇڪين يا هڪ ٻئي کان پري ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ اهي قوتون ڪنهن مادي جي طبعي خاصيتن، جهڙوڪ [[ڳرڻ جو گرمي پد]]، تي اهم اثر وجهنديون آهن.

[[وان ڊر والز قوت]]ون بند-خول (ڪلوزڊ-شيل) وارن سالمَن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ لاڳاپا آهن. انهن ۾ [[ڪيميائي قطبيت|قطبي]] سالمَن جي جزوي چارجن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ ڪولمي ڪشش ۽ بند برقي خولن جي وچ ۾ [[پائولي اخراج اصول#مادي جي استحڪام|پائولي ڌڪ]] (پائولي ريپلشن) شامل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref name=Atkins&gt;{{cite book |last1=Atkins |first1=Peter |last2=de Paula |first2=Julio |title=Physical Chemistry |date=2002 |publisher=W.H.Freeman |isbn=0-7167-3539-3 |pages=696–706 |edition=7th}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|696}}

[[ڪيسوم قوت|ڪيسوم قوتون]] ٻن قطبي سالمَن جي مستقل [[ڊائپول#سالمي ڊائپول|ڊائپولن]] جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿيندڙ قوتون آهن.{{r|Atkins|p=701}} [[لنڊن ورڇ قوت]]ون مختلف سالمَن ۾ پيدا ٿيل (Induced) ڊائپولن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ قوتون آهن.{{r|Atkins|p=703}} اهڙيءَ طرح هڪ سالمَي جي مستقل ڊائپول ۽ ٻئي سالمَي جي پيدا ٿيل ڊائپول جي وچ ۾ به لاڳاپو پيدا ٿي سگهي ٿو.{{r|Atkins|p=702}}

[[هائڊروجن بانڊ]] A--H•••B جي صورت ۾ تڏهن ٺهندو آهي، جڏهن A ۽ B ٻه انتهائي برقي-منفي ايٽم (عام طور [[نائيٽروجن]]، [[آڪسيجن]] يا [[فلورين]]) هجن. اهڙي حالت ۾ A، H سان انتهائي قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند ٺاهي ٿو، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ H تي جزوي مثبت چارج پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جڏهن ته B وٽ [[اڪيلو برقي جوڙو]] موجود هوندو آهي، جيڪو انهيءَ جزوي مثبت چارج ڏانهن متوجهه ٿي هائڊروجن بند ٺاهي ٿو.{{r|Atkins|p=702}} هائڊروجن بند پاڻي ۽ [[امونيا]] جي بلند اُبال گرمي پد جا بنيادي ذميوار آهن، جڏهن انهن جي وڌيڪ ڳرن هم منصبن سان ڀيٽ ڪئي وڃي. ڪجهه حالتن ۾، ٻن مختلف سالمَن جي انتهائي برقي-منفي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪنهن هيلوجن ايٽم ذريعي ساڳئي نوعيت جو [[هيلوجن بند]] پڻ ٺهي سگهي ٿو.
تمام ننڍن مفاصلن تي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڌڪيندڙ (ريپلسو) قوتون پڻ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ لڳن ٿيون.{{r|Atkins|p=705-6}}

==مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ==
==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>epqsrxi91nxr7z57xu12rf7masufiiz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394082</id>
      <parentid>394081</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:25:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394082</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="58794" sha1="cvk1sd2w4rlh253f6ajz1p8xqrcuto7" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ|برقي-جوڙي واري بانڊ]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بانڊ]]، [[ٻٽو بانڊ]] يا [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بانڊ]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بانڊ جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بانڊ جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بانڊ جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بانڊ جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بانڊن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بانڊن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بانڊن (يعني بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (فنڪشنل گروپ) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (ڪمفرميشنل) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (ٽو-ڊائميشنل) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (وئلنس اليڪٽران) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بانڊ ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بانڊ جي ڊگھائي|بانڊ ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بانڊ جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بانڊ جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بانڊ
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (انٽرا ماليڪيولر) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|ماليڪيولن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[اليڪٽران|اليڪٽرانن]] جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (اليڪٽرونيگيٽوٽي) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.
برقي منفيت، [[بانڊ توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بانڊ توانائي بانڊ جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بانڊ]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بانڊ ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بانڊ ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن|آئنن]] جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بانڊ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بانڊ گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بانڊ جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] کان +3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بانڊ گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.
آئني بانڊن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (آئني ڪرسٽل) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بانڊ ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (ايڪس-ري ڊسفريڪشن) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.
آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (ڊائريڪشنل) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.
مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.
ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.
=== هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ===
{{Main|هم اشتراڪي بانڊ}}

[[File:covalent.svg|thumb|left|160px|[[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ. [[ليوس بناوت]] ۾ C ۽ H ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ گڏيل برقين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي.]]

هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڪيميائي بانڊن جو سڀ کان عام قسم آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه يا وڌيڪ ايٽم تڪافؤ برقين کي لڳ ڀڳ هڪجهڙي نموني پاڻ ۾ ورهائيندا آهن. ان جو سڀ کان سادو ۽ عام قسم [[اڪيلو بانڊ]] آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه ايٽم برقين جو هڪ جوڙو گڏيل طور استعمال ڪندا آهن. ٻين قسمن ۾ [[ٻٽو بانڊ]]، [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]]، [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ#هڪ- ۽ ٽي-برقي بانڊ|هڪ- ۽ ٽن-برقي بانڊ]]، [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو ٻه-برقي بانڊ]] ۽ [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو چار-برقي بانڊ]] شامل آهن.

غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ ايٽمن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ فرق تمام گهٽ، عام طور 0 کان 0.3 تائين، هوندو آهي. گهڻن [[نامياتي مرڪب]]ن ۾ موجود بانڊ هم اشتراڪي نوعيت جا هوندا آهن. شڪل ۾ ڏيکاريل [[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ هر هائڊروجن ايٽم ڪاربان سان هڪ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ٺاهي ٿو. اهڙي بانڊ جي LCAO وضاحت لاءِ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ [[پائي بانڊ]] ڏسو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Introduction to organic chemistry.|last1=Streitwieser|first1=Andrew|last2=Heathcock|first2=Clayton H.|last3=Kosower|first3=Edward M.|publisher=Macmillan|others=Heathcock, Clayton H., Kosower, Edward M.|year=1992|isbn=978-0024181701|edition=4th|location=New York|pages=[https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250 250]|oclc=24501305|url-access=registration|url=https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيڪي سالما بنيادي طور غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن، اهي پاڻي يا ٻين [[قطبي محلل]]ن ۾ عام طور نه ڳرندا آهن، پر [[غير قطبي محلل]]ن، جهڙوڪ [[هيڪسين]]، ۾ آسانيءَ سان حل ٿي ويندا آهن.

[[قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] اهڙو هم اشتراڪي بانڊ آهي، جنهن ۾ نمايان [[آئني بانڊ]] وارو ڪردار پڻ موجود هوندو آهي. اهڙي حالت ۾ گڏيل ٻئي برقي هڪ ايٽم ڏانهن ٻئي جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ چارج جي غير يڪسان ورڇ پيدا ٿيندي آهي. اهڙا بانڊ وچولي درجي جي برقي منفيت جي فرق رکندڙ ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ [[ڊائپول#سالمي ڊائپول|ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش]] جو سبب بڻجن ٿا. اهڙن بانڊن ۾ ٻنهي ايٽمن جي برقي منفيت جو فرق عام طور 0.3 کان 1.7 جي وچ ۾ هوندو آهي.

==== اڪيلا ۽ گهڻا بانڊ ====

[[اڪيلو بانڊ]] ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ برقين جي هڪ جوڙي جي گڏيل ورڇ کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. هائڊروجن (H) جي هر ايٽم وٽ هڪ تڪافؤ برقي هوندو آهي. جڏهن ٻه هائڊروجن ايٽم پاڻ ۾ گڏجن ٿا، ته اهي برقين جو هڪ گڏيل جوڙو استعمال ڪندي هڪ سالمو ٺاهين ٿا. اهڙيءَ طرح هر هائڊروجن ايٽم کي [[هيليم]] (He) جهڙي عظيم گئس واري برقي ترتيب حاصل ٿي وڃي ٿي. ٻنهي ايٽمن جي وچ واري علائقي ۾ هن گڏيل برقي جوڙي جي برقي ڪثافت، الڳ الڳ ٻن غير رابطي وارن هائڊروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ هوندي آهي.

[[File:Pi-Bond.svg|thumb|right|ٻه p-مدار جيڪي هڪ پائي بانڊ ٺاهي رهيا آهن.]]

[[ٻٽو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٻن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي. انهن مان هڪ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ ٻيو [[پائي بانڊ]] هوندو آهي، جنهن ۾ برقي ڪثافت ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي ملائيندڙ محور جي ٻنهي پاسن تي مرڪوز هوندي آهي.
[[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٽن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي، جيڪي هڪ سگما بانڊ ۽ ٻن پائي بانڊن مان ٺهندا آهن. ان جو مشهور مثال [[نائيٽروجن]] جو سالمو آهي.
[[چوڻو بانڊ]] ۽ ان کان وڌيڪ درجي جا بانڊ تمام ناياب هوندا آهن ۽ صرف ڪجهه [[منتقلي ڌاتو]]ن جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ئي ٺهندا آهن.

== بين-سالمي بانڊ ==
{{Main|بين-سالمي قوت}}

ٻن يا وڌيڪ اهڙن سالمَن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي پاڻ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊن سان ڳنڍيل نه هجن، ڪيترن قسمن جا ڪمزور بانڊ ٺهي سگهن ٿا. [[بين-سالمي قوت]]ون سالمَن کي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڇڪين يا هڪ ٻئي کان پري ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ اهي قوتون ڪنهن مادي جي طبعي خاصيتن، جهڙوڪ [[ڳرڻ جو گرمي پد]]، تي اهم اثر وجهنديون آهن.

[[وان ڊر والز قوت]]ون بند-خول (ڪلوزڊ-شيل) وارن سالمَن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ لاڳاپا آهن. انهن ۾ [[ڪيميائي قطبيت|قطبي]] سالمَن جي جزوي چارجن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ ڪولمي ڪشش ۽ بند برقي خولن جي وچ ۾ [[پائولي اخراج اصول#مادي جي استحڪام|پائولي ڌڪ]] (پائولي ريپلشن) شامل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref name=Atkins&gt;{{cite book |last1=Atkins |first1=Peter |last2=de Paula |first2=Julio |title=Physical Chemistry |date=2002 |publisher=W.H.Freeman |isbn=0-7167-3539-3 |pages=696–706 |edition=7th}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|696}}

[[ڪيسوم قوت|ڪيسوم قوتون]] ٻن قطبي سالمَن جي مستقل [[ڊائپول#سالمي ڊائپول|ڊائپولن]] جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿيندڙ قوتون آهن.{{r|Atkins|p=701}} [[لنڊن ورڇ قوت]]ون مختلف سالمَن ۾ پيدا ٿيل (Induced) ڊائپولن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ قوتون آهن.{{r|Atkins|p=703}} اهڙيءَ طرح هڪ سالمَي جي مستقل ڊائپول ۽ ٻئي سالمَي جي پيدا ٿيل ڊائپول جي وچ ۾ به لاڳاپو پيدا ٿي سگهي ٿو.{{r|Atkins|p=702}}

[[هائڊروجن بانڊ]] A--H•••B جي صورت ۾ تڏهن ٺهندو آهي، جڏهن A ۽ B ٻه انتهائي برقي-منفي ايٽم (عام طور [[نائيٽروجن]]، [[آڪسيجن]] يا [[فلورين]]) هجن. اهڙي حالت ۾ A، H سان انتهائي قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند ٺاهي ٿو، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ H تي جزوي مثبت چارج پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جڏهن ته B وٽ [[اڪيلو برقي جوڙو]] موجود هوندو آهي، جيڪو انهيءَ جزوي مثبت چارج ڏانهن متوجهه ٿي هائڊروجن بند ٺاهي ٿو.{{r|Atkins|p=702}} هائڊروجن بند پاڻي ۽ [[امونيا]] جي بلند اُبال گرمي پد جا بنيادي ذميوار آهن، جڏهن انهن جي وڌيڪ ڳرن هم منصبن سان ڀيٽ ڪئي وڃي. ڪجهه حالتن ۾، ٻن مختلف سالمَن جي انتهائي برقي-منفي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪنهن هيلوجن ايٽم ذريعي ساڳئي نوعيت جو [[هيلوجن بند]] پڻ ٺهي سگهي ٿو.
تمام ننڍن مفاصلن تي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڌڪيندڙ (ريپلسو) قوتون پڻ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ لڳن ٿيون.{{r|Atkins|p=705-6}}

== ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا ==

&quot;خالص&quot; [[آئني بانڊ]] جي (غير حقيقي) حد ۾، برقي بانڊ ۾ شامل ٻنهي ايٽمن مان رڳو هڪ تي مڪمل طور مقامي (لوڪلائيزڊ) هوندا آهن. اهڙن بانڊن کي [[طبعيات ڪلاسيڪي|ڪلاسيڪي طبعيات]] جي مدد سان سمجهي سگهجي ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ واري قوت [[هم رخ]] (آئسوٽراپڪ) مسلسل برقي سڪوني امڪانن (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ پوٽينشل) تي دارومدار رکي ٿي. هن قوت جي شدت [[ڪولمب جو قانون|ڪولمب جي قانون]] موجب ٻنهي آئنن جي چارجن جي حاصل ضرب سان سڌي تناسب ۾ هوندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fundamentals of Electromagnetics |url=https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/chapter/monograph/abs/pii/B9780124722576500057 |access-date=2026-05-08 |website=www.sciencedirect.com |language=en-US |doi=10.1016/B978-0-12-472257-6.50005-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] کي [[تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريو|تڪافؤ بانڊ (VB) نظريي]] يا [[سالمي مدار نظريو|سالمي مدار (MO) نظريي]] جي ذريعي وڌيڪ بهتر نموني سمجهي سگهجي ٿو. بانڊ ۾ شامل ايٽمن جون خاصيتون [[آڪسائيڊيشن انگ]]، [[رسمي چارج]] ۽ [[برقي منفيت]] جهڙن تصورن جي مدد سان بيان ڪري سگهجن ٿيون. بانڊ جي اندر موجود برقي ڪثافت ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان وابسته نه هوندي آهي، پر ٻنهي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[بي مرڪزيت|بي مرڪز]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزڊ) هوندي آهي.

تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي موجب، بانڊ برقين جي اهڙن جوڙن مان ٺهن ٿا، جيڪي ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[ايٽمي مدار]]ن جي هڪ ٻئي تي چڙهڻ (Overlap) سبب مقامي طور گڏيل هوندا آهن. [[مداري هائبرڊائيزيشن]] ۽ [[گونج (ڪيميا)|گونج]] جا تصور هن بنيادي برقي-جوڙي واري خيال کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪن ٿا.
ٻئي طرف، سالمي مدار نظريي ۾ بانڊ کي اهڙي برقي ورڇ طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيڪا سڄي سالمي ۾ پکڙيل هوندي آهي ۽ اهڙن مدارن ۾ ورهايل هوندي آهي، جيڪي سالمي جي تماثل (سميٽري) مطابق ترتيب ڏنل هوندا آهن. ان لاءِ عام طور [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ وارو سالمي مدار طريقو]] (LCAO) استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي.
تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ بانڊن کي مقامي انداز ۾ بيان ڪري ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڪيميائي تبديلين ۾ شامل سالمي جي مخصوص حصن تي ڌيان ڏيڻ وڌيڪ آسان بڻائي ٿو. ان جي ابتڙ، سالمي مدار نظريو مقداري ميخانيات جي نقطۂ نظر کان وڌيڪ &quot;قدرتي&quot; سمجهيو وڃي ٿو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ مدارن جون توانائيون حقيقي طبعي اهميت رکن ٿيون ۽ [[فٽو برقي طيف نگاري]] مان حاصل ٿيندڙ تجربي واري آئنائزيشن توانائين سان سڌي طرح لاڳاپيل هونديون آهن.
انهيءَ ڪري تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريو ۽ سالمي مدار نظريو اڪثر هڪ ٻئي جا مقابلي وارا، پر هڪ ٻئي کي مڪمل ڪندڙ، نظريا سمجهيا ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ڪيميائي نظامن بابت مختلف بصيرتون مهيا ڪن ٿا. برقي بناوت جي نظرين طور، اصولي طور ٻنهي VB ۽ MO طريقن سان گهربل درستگيءَ تائين ويجهڙائيون حاصل ڪري سگهجن ٿيون. البت، گهٽ درجي جي ويجهڙائين ۾ ٻنهي جا نتيجا مختلف ٿي سگهن ٿا، ۽ ڪنهن خاص نظام يا خاصيت جي حساب لاءِ هڪ طريقو ٻئي کان وڌيڪ موزون ثابت ٿي سگهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2014-11-26 |title=21.7: Which Is Better- MO or VB? |url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Organic_Chemistry/Basic_Principles_of_Organic_Chemistry_(Roberts_and_Caserio)/21%3A_Resonance_and_Molecular_Orbital_Methods/21.07%3A_Which_Is_Better-_MO_or_VB |access-date=2026-05-08 |website=Chemistry LibreTexts |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;
خالص آئني بانڊن ۾ موجود گوليائي هم رخ ڪولمبي قوتن جي ابتڙ، هم اشتراڪي بانڊ عام طور رخائتا (ڊائريڪشنل) ۽ [[غير هم رخ]] (اينئاسوٽراپڪ) هوندا آهن. انهن کي عام طور سالمي جي ميدان (پلين) جي لحاظ کان تماثل جي بنياد تي [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ [[پائي بانڊ]] ۾ ورهايو ويندو آهي.
عام حالتن ۾، ايٽم اهڙا بانڊ ٺاهيندا آهن جيڪي آئني ۽ هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي وچ واري نوعيت جا هوندا آهن، ۽ انهن جو دارومدار شامل ايٽمن جي لاڳاپيل [[برقي منفيت]] تي هوندو آهي. اهڙي قسم جي بانڊن کي [[قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] چيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Ouellette |first1=Robert J. |last2=Rawn |first2=J. David |title=Polar Covalent Bond |url=https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/chemistry/polar-covalent-bond |publisher=Science Direct |access-date=14 September 2023 |date=2015 |quote=A polar covalent bond exists when atoms with different electronegativities share electrons in a covalent bond.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==انٽر-ماليڪيولر بانڊ==
==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>cvk1sd2w4rlh253f6ajz1p8xqrcuto7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394083</id>
      <parentid>394082</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:27:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394083</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="58753" sha1="sgzcbysymmjx6fhd7059jyisksf18cz" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ|برقي-جوڙي واري بانڊ]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بانڊ]]، [[ٻٽو بانڊ]] يا [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بانڊ]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بانڊ جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بانڊ جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بانڊ جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بانڊ جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بانڊن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بانڊن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بانڊن (يعني بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (فنڪشنل گروپ) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (ڪمفرميشنل) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (ٽو-ڊائميشنل) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (وئلنس اليڪٽران) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بانڊ ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بانڊ جي ڊگھائي|بانڊ ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بانڊ جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بانڊ جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بانڊ
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (انٽرا ماليڪيولر) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|ماليڪيولن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[اليڪٽران|اليڪٽرانن]] جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (اليڪٽرونيگيٽوٽي) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.
برقي منفيت، [[بانڊ توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بانڊ توانائي بانڊ جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بانڊ]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بانڊ ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بانڊ ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن|آئنن]] جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بانڊ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بانڊ گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بانڊ جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] کان +3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بانڊ گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.
آئني بانڊن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (آئني ڪرسٽل) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بانڊ ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (ايڪس-ري ڊسفريڪشن) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.
آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (ڊائريڪشنل) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.
مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.
ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.
=== هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ===
{{Main|هم اشتراڪي بانڊ}}

[[File:covalent.svg|thumb|left|160px|[[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ. [[ليوس بناوت]] ۾ C ۽ H ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ گڏيل برقين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي.]]

هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڪيميائي بانڊن جو سڀ کان عام قسم آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه يا وڌيڪ ايٽم تڪافؤ برقين کي لڳ ڀڳ هڪجهڙي نموني پاڻ ۾ ورهائيندا آهن. ان جو سڀ کان سادو ۽ عام قسم [[اڪيلو بانڊ]] آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه ايٽم برقين جو هڪ جوڙو گڏيل طور استعمال ڪندا آهن. ٻين قسمن ۾ [[ٻٽو بانڊ]]، [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]]، [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ#هڪ- ۽ ٽي-برقي بانڊ|هڪ- ۽ ٽن-برقي بانڊ]]، [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو ٻه-برقي بانڊ]] ۽ [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو چار-برقي بانڊ]] شامل آهن.

غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ ايٽمن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ فرق تمام گهٽ، عام طور 0 کان 0.3 تائين، هوندو آهي. گهڻن [[نامياتي مرڪب]]ن ۾ موجود بانڊ هم اشتراڪي نوعيت جا هوندا آهن. شڪل ۾ ڏيکاريل [[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ هر هائڊروجن ايٽم ڪاربان سان هڪ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ٺاهي ٿو. اهڙي بانڊ جي LCAO وضاحت لاءِ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ [[پائي بانڊ]] ڏسو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Introduction to organic chemistry.|last1=Streitwieser|first1=Andrew|last2=Heathcock|first2=Clayton H.|last3=Kosower|first3=Edward M.|publisher=Macmillan|others=Heathcock, Clayton H., Kosower, Edward M.|year=1992|isbn=978-0024181701|edition=4th|location=New York|pages=[https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250 250]|oclc=24501305|url-access=registration|url=https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيڪي سالما بنيادي طور غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن، اهي پاڻي يا ٻين [[قطبي محلل]]ن ۾ عام طور نه ڳرندا آهن، پر [[غير قطبي محلل]]ن، جهڙوڪ [[هيڪسين]]، ۾ آسانيءَ سان حل ٿي ويندا آهن.

[[قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] اهڙو هم اشتراڪي بانڊ آهي، جنهن ۾ نمايان [[آئني بانڊ]] وارو ڪردار پڻ موجود هوندو آهي. اهڙي حالت ۾ گڏيل ٻئي برقي هڪ ايٽم ڏانهن ٻئي جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ چارج جي غير يڪسان ورڇ پيدا ٿيندي آهي. اهڙا بانڊ وچولي درجي جي برقي منفيت جي فرق رکندڙ ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ [[ڊائپول#سالمي ڊائپول|ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش]] جو سبب بڻجن ٿا. اهڙن بانڊن ۾ ٻنهي ايٽمن جي برقي منفيت جو فرق عام طور 0.3 کان 1.7 جي وچ ۾ هوندو آهي.

==== اڪيلا ۽ گهڻا بانڊ ====

[[اڪيلو بانڊ]] ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ برقين جي هڪ جوڙي جي گڏيل ورڇ کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. هائڊروجن (H) جي هر ايٽم وٽ هڪ تڪافؤ برقي هوندو آهي. جڏهن ٻه هائڊروجن ايٽم پاڻ ۾ گڏجن ٿا، ته اهي برقين جو هڪ گڏيل جوڙو استعمال ڪندي هڪ سالمو ٺاهين ٿا. اهڙيءَ طرح هر هائڊروجن ايٽم کي [[هيليم]] (He) جهڙي عظيم گئس واري برقي ترتيب حاصل ٿي وڃي ٿي. ٻنهي ايٽمن جي وچ واري علائقي ۾ هن گڏيل برقي جوڙي جي برقي ڪثافت، الڳ الڳ ٻن غير رابطي وارن هائڊروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ هوندي آهي.

[[File:Pi-Bond.svg|thumb|right|ٻه p-مدار جيڪي هڪ پائي بانڊ ٺاهي رهيا آهن.]]

[[ٻٽو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٻن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي. انهن مان هڪ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ ٻيو [[پائي بانڊ]] هوندو آهي، جنهن ۾ برقي ڪثافت ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي ملائيندڙ محور جي ٻنهي پاسن تي مرڪوز هوندي آهي.
[[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٽن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي، جيڪي هڪ سگما بانڊ ۽ ٻن پائي بانڊن مان ٺهندا آهن. ان جو مشهور مثال [[نائيٽروجن]] جو سالمو آهي.
[[چوڻو بانڊ]] ۽ ان کان وڌيڪ درجي جا بانڊ تمام ناياب هوندا آهن ۽ صرف ڪجهه [[منتقلي ڌاتو]]ن جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ئي ٺهندا آهن.

== بين-سالمي بانڊ ==
{{Main|بين-سالمي قوت}}

ٻن يا وڌيڪ اهڙن سالمَن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي پاڻ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊن سان ڳنڍيل نه هجن، ڪيترن قسمن جا ڪمزور بانڊ ٺهي سگهن ٿا. [[بين-سالمي قوت]]ون سالمَن کي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڇڪين يا هڪ ٻئي کان پري ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ اهي قوتون ڪنهن مادي جي طبعي خاصيتن، جهڙوڪ [[ڳرڻ جو گرمي پد]]، تي اهم اثر وجهنديون آهن.

[[وان ڊر والز قوت]]ون بند-خول (ڪلوزڊ-شيل) وارن سالمَن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ لاڳاپا آهن. انهن ۾ [[ڪيميائي قطبيت|قطبي]] سالمَن جي جزوي چارجن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ ڪولمي ڪشش ۽ بند برقي خولن جي وچ ۾ [[پائولي اخراج اصول#مادي جي استحڪام|پائولي ڌڪ]] (پائولي ريپلشن) شامل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref name=Atkins&gt;{{cite book |last1=Atkins |first1=Peter |last2=de Paula |first2=Julio |title=Physical Chemistry |date=2002 |publisher=W.H.Freeman |isbn=0-7167-3539-3 |pages=696–706 |edition=7th}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|696}}

[[ڪيسوم قوت|ڪيسوم قوتون]] ٻن قطبي سالمَن جي مستقل [[ڊائپول#سالمي ڊائپول|ڊائپولن]] جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿيندڙ قوتون آهن.{{r|Atkins|p=701}} [[لنڊن ورڇ قوت]]ون مختلف سالمَن ۾ پيدا ٿيل (Induced) ڊائپولن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ قوتون آهن.{{r|Atkins|p=703}} اهڙيءَ طرح هڪ سالمَي جي مستقل ڊائپول ۽ ٻئي سالمَي جي پيدا ٿيل ڊائپول جي وچ ۾ به لاڳاپو پيدا ٿي سگهي ٿو.{{r|Atkins|p=702}}

[[هائڊروجن بانڊ]] A--H•••B جي صورت ۾ تڏهن ٺهندو آهي، جڏهن A ۽ B ٻه انتهائي برقي-منفي ايٽم (عام طور [[نائيٽروجن]]، [[آڪسيجن]] يا [[فلورين]]) هجن. اهڙي حالت ۾ A، H سان انتهائي قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند ٺاهي ٿو، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ H تي جزوي مثبت چارج پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جڏهن ته B وٽ [[اڪيلو برقي جوڙو]] موجود هوندو آهي، جيڪو انهيءَ جزوي مثبت چارج ڏانهن متوجهه ٿي هائڊروجن بند ٺاهي ٿو.{{r|Atkins|p=702}} هائڊروجن بند پاڻي ۽ [[امونيا]] جي بلند اُبال گرمي پد جا بنيادي ذميوار آهن، جڏهن انهن جي وڌيڪ ڳرن هم منصبن سان ڀيٽ ڪئي وڃي. ڪجهه حالتن ۾، ٻن مختلف سالمَن جي انتهائي برقي-منفي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪنهن هيلوجن ايٽم ذريعي ساڳئي نوعيت جو [[هيلوجن بند]] پڻ ٺهي سگهي ٿو.
تمام ننڍن مفاصلن تي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڌڪيندڙ (ريپلسو) قوتون پڻ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ لڳن ٿيون.{{r|Atkins|p=705-6}}

== ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا ==

&quot;خالص&quot; [[آئني بانڊ]] جي (غير حقيقي) حد ۾، برقي بانڊ ۾ شامل ٻنهي ايٽمن مان رڳو هڪ تي مڪمل طور مقامي (لوڪلائيزڊ) هوندا آهن. اهڙن بانڊن کي [[طبعيات ڪلاسيڪي|ڪلاسيڪي طبعيات]] جي مدد سان سمجهي سگهجي ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ واري قوت [[هم رخ]] (آئسوٽراپڪ) مسلسل برقي سڪوني امڪانن (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ پوٽينشل) تي دارومدار رکي ٿي. هن قوت جي شدت [[ڪولمب جو قانون|ڪولمب جي قانون]] موجب ٻنهي آئنن جي چارجن جي حاصل ضرب سان سڌي تناسب ۾ هوندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fundamentals of Electromagnetics |url=https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/chapter/monograph/abs/pii/B9780124722576500057 |access-date=2026-05-08 |website=www.sciencedirect.com |language=en-US |doi=10.1016/B978-0-12-472257-6.50005-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] کي [[تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريو|تڪافؤ بانڊ (VB) نظريي]] يا [[سالمي مدار نظريو|سالمي مدار (MO) نظريي]] جي ذريعي وڌيڪ بهتر نموني سمجهي سگهجي ٿو. بانڊ ۾ شامل ايٽمن جون خاصيتون [[آڪسائيڊيشن انگ]]، [[رسمي چارج]] ۽ [[برقي منفيت]] جهڙن تصورن جي مدد سان بيان ڪري سگهجن ٿيون. بانڊ جي اندر موجود برقي ڪثافت ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان وابسته نه هوندي آهي، پر ٻنهي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[بي مرڪزيت|بي مرڪز]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزڊ) هوندي آهي.

تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي موجب، بانڊ برقين جي اهڙن جوڙن مان ٺهن ٿا، جيڪي ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[ايٽمي مدار]]ن جي هڪ ٻئي تي چڙهڻ (Overlap) سبب مقامي طور گڏيل هوندا آهن. [[مداري هائبرڊائيزيشن]] ۽ [[گونج (ڪيميا)|گونج]] جا تصور هن بنيادي برقي-جوڙي واري خيال کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪن ٿا.
ٻئي طرف، سالمي مدار نظريي ۾ بانڊ کي اهڙي برقي ورڇ طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيڪا سڄي سالمي ۾ پکڙيل هوندي آهي ۽ اهڙن مدارن ۾ ورهايل هوندي آهي، جيڪي سالمي جي تماثل (سميٽري) مطابق ترتيب ڏنل هوندا آهن. ان لاءِ عام طور [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ وارو سالمي مدار طريقو]] (LCAO) استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي.
تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ بانڊن کي مقامي انداز ۾ بيان ڪري ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڪيميائي تبديلين ۾ شامل سالمي جي مخصوص حصن تي ڌيان ڏيڻ وڌيڪ آسان بڻائي ٿو. ان جي ابتڙ، سالمي مدار نظريو مقداري ميخانيات جي نقطۂ نظر کان وڌيڪ &quot;قدرتي&quot; سمجهيو وڃي ٿو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ مدارن جون توانائيون حقيقي طبعي اهميت رکن ٿيون ۽ [[فٽو برقي طيف نگاري]] مان حاصل ٿيندڙ تجربي واري آئنائزيشن توانائين سان سڌي طرح لاڳاپيل هونديون آهن.
انهيءَ ڪري تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريو ۽ سالمي مدار نظريو اڪثر هڪ ٻئي جا مقابلي وارا، پر هڪ ٻئي کي مڪمل ڪندڙ، نظريا سمجهيا ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ڪيميائي نظامن بابت مختلف بصيرتون مهيا ڪن ٿا. برقي بناوت جي نظرين طور، اصولي طور ٻنهي VB ۽ MO طريقن سان گهربل درستگيءَ تائين ويجهڙائيون حاصل ڪري سگهجن ٿيون. البت، گهٽ درجي جي ويجهڙائين ۾ ٻنهي جا نتيجا مختلف ٿي سگهن ٿا، ۽ ڪنهن خاص نظام يا خاصيت جي حساب لاءِ هڪ طريقو ٻئي کان وڌيڪ موزون ثابت ٿي سگهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2014-11-26 |title=21.7: Which Is Better- MO or VB? |url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Organic_Chemistry/Basic_Principles_of_Organic_Chemistry_(Roberts_and_Caserio)/21%3A_Resonance_and_Molecular_Orbital_Methods/21.07%3A_Which_Is_Better-_MO_or_VB |access-date=2026-05-08 |website=Chemistry LibreTexts |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;
خالص آئني بانڊن ۾ موجود گوليائي هم رخ ڪولمبي قوتن جي ابتڙ، هم اشتراڪي بانڊ عام طور رخائتا (ڊائريڪشنل) ۽ [[غير هم رخ]] (اينئاسوٽراپڪ) هوندا آهن. انهن کي عام طور سالمي جي ميدان (پلين) جي لحاظ کان تماثل جي بنياد تي [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ [[پائي بانڊ]] ۾ ورهايو ويندو آهي.
عام حالتن ۾، ايٽم اهڙا بانڊ ٺاهيندا آهن جيڪي آئني ۽ هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي وچ واري نوعيت جا هوندا آهن، ۽ انهن جو دارومدار شامل ايٽمن جي لاڳاپيل [[برقي منفيت]] تي هوندو آهي. اهڙي قسم جي بانڊن کي [[قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] چيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Ouellette |first1=Robert J. |last2=Rawn |first2=J. David |title=Polar Covalent Bond |url=https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/chemistry/polar-covalent-bond |publisher=Science Direct |access-date=14 September 2023 |date=2015 |quote=A polar covalent bond exists when atoms with different electronegativities share electrons in a covalent bond.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا==
==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>sgzcbysymmjx6fhd7059jyisksf18cz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394084</id>
      <parentid>394083</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:27:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <origin>394084</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="58709" sha1="lrkumf08wap3uh9g2drpthp3uhsnl8p" xml:space="preserve">{{short description|ڪيميڪل ڪمپائونڊ ٺاھڻ لاء ايٽمن جو جوڙ}}
{{Distinguish|ماليڪيولر جوڙ}}
[[File:Dihydrogen-phase-3D-balls.png|thumb|300x300px|ٻن [[هائيڊروجن]] ايٽمن جو ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ هڪ هائيڊروجن ماليڪيول (H2) ٺاهڻ لاءِ. (a) ۾ ٻه نيوڪليس بانڊنگ مدار ۾ ٻن اليڪٽرانن جي ڪڪر سان گھريل آهن جيڪي ماليڪيول کي گڏ ڪن ٿا. (b) ڏيکاري ٿو هائڊروجن جو اينٽي بانڊنگ مدار، جيڪو توانائي ۾ وڌيڪ آهي ۽ عام طور تي ڪنهن به اليڪٽران جي قبضي ۾ نه آهي.]]
'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' (Chemical Bond) اھا قوت يا ڪشش آهي جيڪا ماليڪيولن ۾ [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] کي ملائي رکندي آهي. 

هڪ ڪيميائي بانڊ (ڪيميڪل بانڊ) [[ائٽم|ائٽمن]] يا [[آئن]] جو اتحاد آهي جيڪو [[ماليڪيول]]، [[ڪرسٽلوگرافي|ڪرسٽل]] ۽ ٻيون اڏاوتون ٺاهين ٿا. بانڊ مخالف طور تي چارج ٿيل آئنز جي وچ ۾ برقياتي قوت جي نتيجي ۾، جيئن آئني بانڊ ۾ يا [[اليڪٽران]] جي حصيداري جي ذريعي جيئن ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ ۾، يا انهن اثرات جي ڪجهه ميلاپ جي ذريعي ٿي سگھي ٿو. ڪيميائي بانڊن کي مختلف طاقتن جي طور تي بيان ڪيو ويو آهي: هتي ”مضبوط بانڊ“ يا ”پرائمري بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڪوويلنٽ، آئني ۽ ڌاتي بانڊ ۽ ”ڪمزور بانڊ“ يا ”ثانوي بانڊ“ جهڙوڪ ڊيپول-ڊيپول تعامل، لنڊن ڊسپريشن فورس ۽ هائيڊروجن بانڊنگ. 

جيئن ته مخالف [[اليڪٽرڪ چارج|برقي چارجز]] هڪ ٻئي جي طرف متوجه ٿين ٿا، ان ڪري مرڪز جي چوڌاري منفي چارج ٿيل اليڪٽران ۽ نيوڪليئس جي اندر مثبت طور تي چارج ٿيل [[پروٽان]] هڪ ٻئي کي متوجه ڪن ٿا. ٻن مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ ورهايل اليڪٽران انهن ٻنهي ڏانهن متوجه ٿيندا. &quot;تعميراتي ڪوانٽم ميڪينيڪل موج فنڪشن مداخلت&quot; &lt;ref name=&quot;Levine Head-Gordon 2020 p.2&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last1=Levine|first1=Daniel S.|last2=Head-Gordon|first2=Martin|date=2020-09-29|title=Clarifying the quantum mechanical origin of the covalent chemical bond|journal=Nature Communications|publisher=Springer Science and Business Media LLC|volume=11|issue=1|page=4893|doi=10.1038/s41467-020-18670-8|issn=2041-1723|pmc=7524788|pmid=32994392|s2cid=222157102}}&lt;/ref&gt; جوڙيل نيوڪلئيس کي مستحڪم ڪري ٿو (ڏسو ڪيميائي بانڊنگ جا نظريا). بانڊڊ نيوڪليئس هڪ بهترين فاصلو برقرار رکن ٿا (بانڊ جو فاصلو) جيڪا ڪشش ۽ رد ڪندڙ اثرن کي مقداري طور تي ڪوانٽم ٿيوري جي وضاحت سان، توازن ۾ رکي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{citation
| last    = Pauling
| first   = L.
| year    = 1931
| title   = The nature of the chemical bond. Application of results obtained from the quantum mechanics and from a theory of paramagnetic susceptibility to the structure of molecules
| journal = [[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]
| volume  = 53
| issue   = 4
| pages   = 1367–1400
| doi     = 10.1021/ja01355a027
}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Hund |first=F. |date=1928 |title=Zur Deutung der Molekelspektren. IV |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/BF01400239 |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |language=de |volume=51 |issue=11–12 |pages=759–795 |doi=10.1007/BF01400239 |bibcode=1928ZPhy...51..759H |s2cid=121366097 |issn=1434-6001}}&lt;/ref&gt; 

ماليڪيولز، ڪرسٽل، [[ڌات|ڌاتن]] ۽ مادي جي ٻين شڪلين ۾ [[ائٽم|ايٽم]] ڪيميائي بانڊن سان گڏ رکيل آهن، جيڪي مادي جي ساخت ۽ خاصيت کي طئي ڪن ٿا. 

سڀ بانڊ ڪوانٽم ٿيوري ذريعي بيان ڪري سگھجن ٿا، پر عملي طور تي، سادا ضابطا ۽ ٻيا نظريا ڪيميادان کي اجازت ڏين ٿا ته هو بانڊن جي [[قوت (فزڪس)|قوت]]، سمت ۽ قطبيت جي اڳڪٿي ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last1=Frenking|first1=Gernot|last2=Krapp|first2=Andreas|date=2007-01-15|title=Unicorns in the world of chemical bonding models|journal=Journal of Computational Chemistry|language=en|volume=28|issue=1|pages=15–24|doi=10.1002/jcc.20543|pmid=17109434|doi-access=free|s2cid-access=free|s2cid=7504671}}&lt;/ref&gt; اٺن (آڪٽيٽ) جو قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو هن جي مثالون آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن ۽ گونج شامل آهن ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري، جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي،  آڪٽيڪ قاعدو ۽ VSEPR نظريو مثال آهن. وڌيڪ نفيس نظريا ويلنس بانڊ ٿيوري آهن، جن ۾ مداري هائيبرڊائيزيشن &lt;ref name=&quot;Frank2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=Introduction to Computational Chemistry|last=Jensen|first=Frank|publisher=John Wiley and Sons|year=1999|isbn=978-0-471-98425-2}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ گونج (ريزوننس) &lt;ref name=&quot;Pauling2&quot;&gt;{{cite book|title=The Nature of the Chemical Bond – An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry|last=Pauling|first=Linus|date=1960|publisher=Cornell University Press|isbn=978-0801403330|edition=3rd|pages=10–13|chapter=The Concept of Resonance|chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=L-1K9HmKmUUC&amp;pg=PA10}}&lt;/ref&gt; شامل آهن، ۽ ماليڪيولر آربيٽل ٿيوري &lt;ref&gt;{{citation|last=Gillespie|first=R.J.|year=2004|title=Teaching molecular geometry with the VSEPR model|journal=Journal of Chemical Education|volume=81|issue=3|pages=298–304|doi=10.1021/ed081p298|bibcode=2004JChEd..81..298G|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ۾ ايٽمي مدار ۽ ليگينڊ فيلڊ ٿيوري جو لڪيري ميلاپ شامل آهي، آهن. برقي سڪونيات (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪس)، بانڊ جي قطبيت ۽ انهن جا اثر جيڪي ڪيميائي مادن تي آهن، کي بيان ڪرڻ لاءِ استعمال ڪيا ويا آهن.

== ڪيميائي بانڊن جي مکيه قسمن جو جائزو ==

'''ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهڙي ڪشش کي چيو وڃي ٿو، جيڪا ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي. هيءَ ڪشش ايٽمن جي سڀ کان ٻاهرين يا [[تڪافؤ برقي]]ن (وئلنس اليڪٽران) جي مختلف روين جو نتيجو هوندي آهي. مختلف حالتن ۾ اهي رويا هڪ ٻئي سان آهستي آهستي ملي وڃن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن جي وچ ۾ ڪا واضح حد مقرر نٿي ڪري سگهجي. تنهن هوندي به، مختلف قسمن جي بانڊن ۾ فرق ڪرڻ ڪارائتو ۽ روايتي عمل آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي [[گهاٽي مادو|گهاٽي مادي]] (ڪنڊينسڊ ميٽر) جون مختلف خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] جي سادي تصور موجب، هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي (اڪثر هڪ جوڙو) ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ واري جاءِ ۾ ورهايا وڃن ٿا. بانڊ ٺهڻ وقت توانائي خارج ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اها توانائي امڪاني توانائي (پوٽينشل انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب نه، پر برقين جي حرڪتي توانائي (ڪائنيٽڪ انرجي) ۾ گهٽتائي سبب خارج ٿئي ٿي. جڏهن برقي ٻنهي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ وڌيڪ پکڙيل مدار (آربيٽل) ۾ موجود هوندا آهن، تڏهن سندن [[ڊي برولي موج ڊگھائي]] (de Broglie wavelength) وڌي ويندي آهي، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ نظام وڌيڪ مستحڪم ٿي ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|doi=10.1007/s00897010509a|author=Rioux, F. |title=The Covalent Bond in H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; |journal=The Chemical Educator |volume=6 |issue=5 |pages=288–290 |year=2001 |s2cid=97871973 }}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙا بانڊ ٻن مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ خلا ۾ هڪ خاص رخ (ڊائريڪشن) رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري انهن کي خاڪن ۾ ٻن ايٽمن کي ملائيندڙ هڪ ليڪ يا ماڊلن ۾ ٻن گولن کي ملائيندڙ لٺ جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاري سگهجي ٿو.

قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند يا [[پولر ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]] ۾ هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي ٻن ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ اڻبرابر نموني ورهايا وڃن ٿا. هم اشتراڪي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري پاڻ ۾ مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل ايٽمن جا ننڍا مجموعا، يعني [[سالمو|سالما]] (ماليڪيول)، ٺاهين ٿا. ٺوسن ۽ مايعن ۾ اهي سالما ٻين سالمَن سان اهڙين بين-سالمي قوتن (انٽرماليڪيولر قوتون) ذريعي ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن، جيڪي اندروني هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو ڪمزور هونديون آهن. اهڙيون ڪمزور قوتون نامياتي ماليڪيولي مادن، جهڙوڪ ميڻ ۽ تيل، کي نرم بڻائين ٿيون ۽ انهن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد گهٽ هوندا آهن. پر جڏهن هم اشتراڪي بانڊ وڏي ماليڪيولن ۾ ايٽمن جون ڊگهيون زنجيرون (جهڙوڪ [[نائلون]]) ٺاهين ٿا، يا [[هيرو]]، [[ڪوارٽز]] ۽ ڪيترن پٿرن ۾ موجود [[سليڪيٽ معدنيات]] وانگر پوري ٺوس مادي ۾ ڄار (نيٽورڪ) جي صورت اختيار ڪن ٿا، تڏهن اهڙيون بناوتون انتهائي مضبوط ۽ سخت ٿي وڃن ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Housecroft |first1=Catherine E. |last2=Sharpe |first2=Alan G. |title=Inorganic Chemistry |date=2005 |publisher=Pearson Prentice-Hal |isbn=0130-39913-2 |page=100 |edition=2nd}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهڙن هم اشتراڪي جالن ۽ پوليمرن جا ڳرڻ وارا گرمي پد پڻ تمام وڌيڪ هوندا آهن.

[[آئني بانڊ]] جي سادي وضاحت موجب، بانڊ ۾ شامل برقي ورهايو نه ويندو آهي، پر هڪ ايٽم کان ٻئي ايٽم ڏانهن منتقل ٿي ويندو آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ هڪ ايٽم جي ٻاهرئين [[ايٽمي مدار]] ۾ خالي جاءِ هوندي آهي، جيڪا هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي قبول ڪري سگهي ٿي. اهي برقي نئين ايٽم ۾ گهٽ توانائي واري حالت ۾ پهچي ويندا آهن، جنهن ڪري هڪ ايٽم تي خالص مثبت ۽ ٻئي تي خالص منفي چارج پيدا ٿي ويندو آهي. ان کان پوءِ مثبت ۽ منفي چارج وارن [[آئن]]ن جي وچ ۾ برقي سڪونيت (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ) ڪشش بانڊ جو سبب بڻجي ٿي. آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ جي انتهائي قطبيت  (پولرائيزيش) واري حالت پڻ سمجهيو ويندو آهي. اهڙا بانڊ خلا ۾ ڪنهن خاص رخ جا پابند نه هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري موجود سڀني مخالف چارج وارن آئنن ڏانهن هڪجهڙي ڪشش رکي ٿو. آئني بانڊ مضبوط هوندا آهن، تنهن ڪري آئني مرڪبن کي ڳارڻ لاءِ گهڻي گرمي گهربل هوندي آهي، پر اهي ڀُرڀُرا (برٽل) به هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آئنن جي وچ واريون قوتون ننڍي مفاصلي تائين اثرائتيون هونديون آهن ۽ ٽٽل حصن کي پاڻ ۾ جوڙي نٿيون سگهن. اهڙي قسم جا بند عام معدني لوڻن، جهڙوڪ کاڌي جي لوڻ، جي قلمي (ڪرسٽلائين) بناوت جون خاصيتون پيدا ڪن ٿا.

ٻن ٻين قسمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهٽ ذڪر ٿيندڙ بند [[ڌاتي بانڊ]] (ميٽالڪ بانڊ) آهي. هن قسم جي بانڊ ۾ ڌاتوءَ جو هر ايٽم هڪ يا وڌيڪ برقي اهڙي &quot;برقين جي سمنڊ&quot; ۾ ڏئي ڇڏي ٿو، جيڪو ڪيترن ئي ڌاتي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ پکڙيل هوندو آهي. هن برقين جي سمنڊ ۾ هر برقي، پنهنجي موجي خاصيت (ويو نيچر) سبب، هڪ ئي وقت ڪيترن ايٽمن سان لاڳاپيل ٿي سگهي ٿو. نتيجي طور ڌاتي ايٽم پنهنجا ڪجهه برقي وڃائڻ سبب جزوي طور مثبت چارج وارا بڻجي وڃن ٿا، جڏهن ته آزاد برقي ڪيترن ئي ايٽمن ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، بغير ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان مستقل وابستگيءَ جي. ڌاتي بانڊ کي به وڏي پيماني تي برقين جي [[بي مرڪزيت]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزيشن) جي انتهائي صورت سمجهيو وڃي ٿو. هي بانڊ گهڻو ڪري تمام مضبوط هوندو آهي، جنهن سبب ڌاتن ۾ وڏي [[تناؤ واري مضبوطي]] (ٽينسائل اسٽرينٿ) پيدا ٿيندي آهي. بهرحال، ڌاتي بانڊ ٻين بندن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ اجتماعي نوعيت رکي ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڌاتن جا قلم آسانيءَ سان شڪل بدلائي سگهن ٿا، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ڪنهن خاص رخ ۾ نه، پر مجموعي طور هڪ ٻئي سان ڳنڍيل هوندا آهن. انهيءَ خاصيت سبب ڌاتون آسانيءَ سان ٺهي ۽ وڪڙجي سگهن ٿيون. ڌاتي بانڊ ۾ موجود آزاد برقين جو بادل ڌاتن کي بهترين برقي ۽ حرارتي چالڪ بڻائي ٿو، ۽ انهن کي مخصوص چمڪ (لسٽر) پڻ ڏئي ٿو، جيڪا سفيد روشنيءَ جي گهڻين موجي ڊگھائين کي موٽائي ٿي.

== تاريخ ==
{{Main|ڪيميا جي تاريخ|سالمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

=== ايٽمي نظريي کان اڳ وارو ڪيميائي نظريو ===
سترهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ۾ ڪم ڪندي، [[رابرٽ بوائل]] ڪيميائي عنصر جو تصور اهڙي مادي طور پيش ڪيو، جيڪو مرڪب کان مختلف هجي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;/&gt;{{rp|293}}

ارڙهين صديءَ جي پڇاڙيءَ ڌاري، ايٽمي نظريي جي تصور کان سواءِ ئي ڪيميا ۾ ڪيتريون اهم اڳڀرايون ٿيون. انهن مان پهرين اڳڀرائي [[انطوان لاووازيه]] ڪئي، جنهن ڏيکاريو تہ مرڪب مقرر تناسب سان عنصرن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن. هن عنصر جي نئين وصف اهڙي مادي طور ڪئي، جنهن کي سائنسدان تجربن وسيلي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهن. هن دريافت سان مادي جي عنصرن بابت باهه، ڌرتي، هوا ۽ پاڻي وارو قديم تصور ختم ٿي ويو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان جي پٺڀرائيءَ ۾ ڪو تجرباتي ثبوت موجود نہ هو. لاووازيه ڏيکاريو تہ پاڻيءَ کي [[هائڊروجن]] ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] ۾ ٽوڙي سگهجي ٿو، جڏهن تہ هو انهن ٻنهي کي وڌيڪ سادن مادن ۾ ٽوڙي نہ سگهيو؛ اهڙيءَ طرح ثابت ٿيو تہ اهي عنصر آهن.&lt;ref name=Pullman-1998&gt;{{cite book|last1=Pullman|first1=Bernard|title=The Atom in the History of Human Thought|date=1998|publisher=Oxford University Press|location=Oxford, England|isbn=978-0-19-515040-7|pages=31–33|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;|access-date=25 October 2020|archive-date=5 February 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210205165029/https://books.google.com/books?id=IQs5hur-BpgC&amp;q=Leucippus+Democritus+atom&amp;pg=PA56|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|197}}

لاووازيه [[ڪميت جي بقا جو قانون]] پڻ بيان ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪيميائي عمل دوران مادو نہ اوچتو پيدا ٿيندو آهي ۽ نہ ئي غائب ٿيندو آهي؛ عمل ۾ شامل مادا بدلجي وڃن، تڏهن بہ انهن جي گڏيل ڪميت ساڳي رهندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Whittaker&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Whittaker |first=Edmund T. |title=A history of the theories of aether &amp; electricity. 1: The classical theories |date=1989 |publisher=Dover Publ |isbn=978-0-486-26126-3 |edition=Repr |location=New York}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|293}}

1797ع ۾ فرانسيسي ڪيمياگر [[جوزف پروسٽ]] [[مقرر تناسب جو قانون]] قائم ڪيو. هن قانون موجب، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن مرڪب کي ان جي بنيادي ڪيميائي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙيو وڃي تہ انهن عنصرن جون ڪميتون، اصل مرڪب جي مقدار يا ذريعي کان سواءِ، هميشه وزن جي هڪجهڙي تناسب ۾ هونديون. هن وصف مرڪبن کي آميزن کان ڌار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Law of definite proportions {{!}} chemistry|url=https://www.britannica.com/science/law-of-definite-proportions|access-date=2020-09-03|website=Encyclopedia Britannica|language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي شروعاتي سالن ۾، [[همفري ڊيوي]] نئين ايجاد ٿيل [[وولٽائي ڍير]] کي استعمال ڪندي مرڪبن کي عنصرن ۾ ٽوڙڻ جا تجربا ڪيا.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992&gt;{{Cite book |last=Hudson |first=John |url=http://link.springer.com/10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2 |title=The History of Chemistry |date=1992 |publisher=Springer US |isbn=978-1-4684-6443-6 |location=Boston, MA |language=en |doi=10.1007/978-1-4684-6441-2}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|94}} انهن تجربن مان اهو خيال پيدا ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بندش جو واسطو بجليءَ سان آهي. 1812ع ۾ [[يونس ياڪوب برزيليوس]] ڪيميائي ميلاپ بابت هڪ نظريو شايع ڪيو، جنهن ۾ گڏ ٿيندڙ ايٽمن جي برقي منفي ۽ برقي مثبت خاصيتن تي زور ڏنو ويو.&lt;ref name=Hudson-1992/&gt;{{rp|99}}

اوڻويهين صديءَ جي وچ تائين، [[ايڊورڊ فرينڪلينڊ]]، [[آگسٽ ڪيڪولي|ايف. اي. ڪيڪولي]]، اي. ايس. ڪوپر، [[اليگزينڊر بٽلروف]] ۽ [[هرمن ڪولبي]]، [[ريڊيڪل (ڪيميا)|ريڊيڪلن جي نظريي]] تي اڳتي ڪم ڪندي، [[تڪافؤ (ڪيميا)|تڪافؤ جو نظريو]] جوڙيو. ان کي شروعات ۾ ”ميلاپ جي سگهه“ چيو ويندو هو. هن نظريي موجب مرڪب مثبت ۽ منفي قطبن جي وچ ۾ ڪشش سبب ٺهندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Frankland |first1=E. |year=1852 |title=On a New Series of Organic Bodies Containing Metals |journal=Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London |volume=142 |pages=417–444 |doi=10.1098/rstl.1852.0020 |s2cid=186210604}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1904ع ۾ [[رچرڊ ابيگ]] [[ابيگ جو قانون|پنهنجو قانون]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ڪنهن عنصر جي وڌ ۾ وڌ ۽ گهٽ ۾ گهٽ تڪافؤ جي وچ وارو فرق گهڻو ڪري اٺ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Abegg |first=R. |year=1904 |title=Die Valenz und das periodische System. Versuch einer Theorie der Molekularverbindungen |trans-title=Valency and the periodic table. Attempt at a theory of molecular compounds |url=https://babel.hathitrust.org/cgi/pt?id=uc1.b3959087;view=1up;seq=344 |journal=Zeitschrift für anorganische Chemie |language=German |volume=39 |issue=1 |pages=330–380 |doi=10.1002/zaac.19040390125}}&lt;/ref&gt;

=== ايٽمي نظريو ===
{{main|ايٽمي نظريي جي تاريخ}}

1911ع ۾ [[ارنسٽ ردر فورڊ]] طرفان برقين سان گهيريل [[ايٽمي مرڪز]] جي دريافت کان پوءِ ايٽم جي فطرت وڌيڪ واضح ٿي وئي. ردر فورڊ پنهنجي مقالي ۾ جاپاني طبعياتدان [[هانتارو ناگاؤڪا]] جي نموني جو ذڪر ڪيو،&lt;ref&gt;The Genesis of the Bohr Atom, John L. Heilbron and Thomas S. Kuhn, Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, Vol. 1 (1969), pp. vi, 211-290 (81 pages), University of California Press.&lt;/ref&gt; جنهن ٿامسن جي [[پلم پڊنگ نمونو|پلم پڊنگ نموني]] کي ان بنياد تي رد ڪيو هو تہ ابتڙ چارج هڪ ٻئي مان گذري نٿا سگهن.

1904ع ۾ ناگاؤڪا [[ايٽم]] جو هڪ متبادل [[سياروي نمونو]] پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ هڪ مثبت چارج وارو مرڪز، زحل ۽ ان جي ڇلن وانگر، ان جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڪيترن برقين سان گهيريل هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite book
|author=B. Bryson
|title=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|title-link=A Short History of Nearly Everything
|publisher=[[Broadway Books]]
|year=2003
|isbn=0-7679-0817-1
|author-link=Bill Bryson
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ناگاؤڪا جي نموني ۾ هي مفروضا شامل هئا:

* هڪ تمام ڳرو ايٽمي مرڪز، جيئن هڪ تمام ڳرو سيارو؛
* مرڪز جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ برقي، جيڪي برقي سڪوني قوتن سان ٻڌل هجن، جيئن زحل جي چوڌاري ڦرندڙ ڇلا ڪشش ثقل جي قوتن سان ٻڌل هوندا آهن.

1911ع واري سولوي گڏجاڻيءَ ۾، ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ توانائيءَ جي فرق کي ڪهڙي شيءِ ضابطي ۾ رکي سگهي ٿي، تنهن بابت بحث ڪندي [[ميڪس پلانڪ]] چيو: ”وچ وارا وسيلا شايد برقي هجن.“&lt;ref&gt;Original Proceedings of the 1911 Solvay Conference published 1912. THÉORIE DU RAYONNEMENT ET LES QUANTA. RAPPORTS ET DISCUSSIONS DELA Réunion tenue à Bruxelles, du 30 octobre au 3 novembre 1911, Sous les Auspices dk M. E. SOLVAY. Publiés par MM. P. LANGEVIN et M. de BROGLIE. Translated from the French, p. 127.&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مرڪزي نمونن مان اهو خيال سامهون آيو تہ ڪيميائي رويو برقين جي ترتيب سان مقرر ٿئي ٿو.
ان کان پوءِ [[نيلز بوهر]] 1913ع ۾ برقي مدارن تي ٻڌل مرڪزي ايٽم جو [[بوهر نمونو|نمونو]] پيش ڪيو.

=== جديد ڪيميائي نظريو ===
[[File:electron dot.svg|300px|thumb|right|ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڪيميائي بندن اندر برقين کي ڏيکارڻ لاءِ استعمال ٿيندڙ [[ليوس بناوت|ليوس نقطي خاڪن]] جا مثال؛ هتي [[ڪاربان]] (C)، [[هائڊروجن]] (H) ۽ [[آڪسيجن]] (O) ڏيکاريل آهن. ليوس خاڪا 1916ع ۾ [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] ڪيميائي بندش جي وضاحت لاءِ ٺاهيا هئا ۽ اڄ بہ وڏي پيماني تي استعمال ٿين ٿا. هر ليڪي ٽڪرو يا نقطن جو جوڙو برقين جي هڪ جوڙي کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود جوڙا بندن کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.]]

1916ع ۾ ڪيمياگر [[گلبرٽ اين. ليوس]] [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ|برقي-جوڙي واري بانڊ]] جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن موجب ٻہ ايٽم هڪ کان ڇهن برقين تائين گڏيل نموني ورهائي سگهن ٿا ۽ اهڙيءَ ريت [[هڪ-برقي بند]]، [[اڪيلو بانڊ]]، [[ٻٽو بانڊ]] يا [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] ٺاهي سگهن ٿا. ليوس جي پنهنجي لفظن موجب: ”هڪ برقي ٻن مختلف ايٽمن جي خول جو حصو ٿي سگهي ٿو ۽ ان کي رڳو ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان خاص طور لاڳاپيل نٿو چئي سگهجي.“&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Lewis|first=Gilbert N.|author-link=Gilbert N. Lewis|year=1916|title=The Atom and the Molecule|journal=[[Journal of the American Chemical Society]]|volume=38|page=772|url=http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/papers/corr216.3-lewispub-19160400.html|doi=10.1021/ja02261a002|issue=4|bibcode=1916JAChS..38..762L |s2cid=95865413|url-access=subscription}} [http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 a copy] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418014936/http://www.itis.arezzo.it/index.php?option=com_content&amp;view=article&amp;id=221%3Athe-atom-and-the-molecule-&amp;catid=106%3Apagine-html&amp;Itemid=98 |date=2021-04-18 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1916ع ۾ ئي [[والٽر ڪوسل]] ليوس سان مشابهت رکندڙ هڪ نظريو پيش ڪيو، پر سندس نموني ۾ برقين جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ مڪمل منتقلي فرض ڪئي وئي هئي، تنهن ڪري اهو [[آئني بانڊ]] جو نمونو هو. ليوس ۽ ڪوسل ٻنهي پنهنجا بندش وارا نمونا [[ابيگ جو قانون|ابيگ جي قانون]] (1904ع) تي آڌاريا.

[[نيلز بوهر]] پڻ 1913ع ۾ [[ڪيميائي بانڊ جو بوهر نمونو|ڪيميائي بانڊ جو هڪ نمونو]] پيش ڪيو. سندس [[ٻه-ايٽمي سالمو|ٻه-ايٽمي سالمي]] واري نموني موجب، سالمي جي ايٽمن جا برقي هڪ ڦرندڙ ڇلو ٺاهين ٿا، جنهن جو ميدان سالمي جي محور سان عمودي ۽ ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کان هڪجهڙي مفاصلي تي هوندو آهي. سالمي نظام جو [[حرڪتي توازن]] انهن قوتن جي توازن وسيلي قائم ٿئي ٿو، جيڪي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي برقين جي ڇلي جي ميدان ڏانهن ڇڪين ٿيون، ۽ انهن قوتن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي مرڪزن کي هڪ ٻئي کان ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيميائي بانڊ جي بوهر نموني ۾ [[ڪولمبي ڌڪ]] کي بہ شامل ڪيو ويو هو؛ ڇلي ۾ موجود برقي هڪ ٻئي کان وڌ ۾ وڌ مفاصلي تي رهن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Pais&quot;&gt;{{Cite book|last=Pais|first=Abraham |year=1986|location=New York|title=Inward Bound: Of Matter and Forces in the Physical World|publisher=Oxford University Press|isbn=978-0-19-851971-3|pages=[https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228 228–230]|url=https://archive.org/details/inwardboundofmat00pais_0/page/228}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Svidzinsky|first=Anatoly A. |author2 = Marlan O. Scully |author3-link=Dudley R. Herschbach |author3=Dudley R. Herschbach|year=2005|title=Bohr's 1913 molecular model revisited |journal=Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences |volume=102|pages=11985–11988|doi=10.1073/pnas.0505778102 |pmid=16103360 |pmc=1186029 |issue=34|arxiv=physics/0508161|bibcode=2005PNAS..10211985S|doi-access=free |url=http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180718233029/http://www.pnas.org/content/102/34/11985.full.pdf |archive-date=2018-07-18 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1927ع ۾ هڪ سادي ڪيميائي بانڊ جي پهرين رياضياتي طور مڪمل مقداري وضاحت ڊينمارڪي طبعياتدان [[اويوينڊ بُرائو]] پيش ڪئي. هي بند هائڊروجن جي سالمي آئن [[ٻه هائڊروجن ڪيٽائن|H&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;]] ۾ هڪ برقيءَ وسيلي ٺهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| author=Laidler, K. J. |year=1993|title=The World of Physical Chemistry| url=https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid | url-access=registration |publisher=Oxford University Press | page=[https://archive.org/details/worldofphysicalc0000laid/page/346 346]|isbn=978-0-19-855919-1}}&lt;/ref&gt; هن ڪم مان ثابت ٿيو تہ ڪيميائي بانڊن بابت مقداري طريقو بنيادي ۽ عددي طور درست ٿي سگهي ٿو، پر استعمال ڪيل رياضياتي طريقا هڪ کان وڌيڪ برقين وارن سالمَن تائين وڌائي نٿي سگهيا.

ساڳئي سال [[والٽر هائٽلر]] ۽ [[فريٽز لنڊن]] هڪ وڌيڪ عملي، جيتوڻيڪ گهٽ عددي، طريقو پيش ڪيو. هائٽلر–لنڊن طريقو ان نظريي جو بنياد بڻيو، جنهن کي اڄ [[تڪافؤ بند نظريو]] چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref name = London&gt;{{cite journal|first1=W. |last1=Heitler |first2=F. |last2=London |title=Wechselwirkung neutraler Atome und homoopolare Bindung nach der Quantenmechanik |trans-title=Interaction of neutral atoms and homeopolar bonds according to quantum mechanics |journal=Zeitschrift für Physik |volume=44 |issue=6–7 |pages=455–472 |date=1927 |doi=10.1007/bf01397394 |bibcode=1927ZPhy...44..455H |s2cid=119739102}} English translation in {{cite book| last = Hettema| first = H.| title = Quantum Chemistry: Classic Scientific Papers| url = https://books.google.com/books?id=qsidHRJmUoIC| access-date = 2012-02-05| year = 2000| publisher = World Scientific| isbn = 978-981-02-2771-5| pages = 140}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1929ع ۾ سر [[جان لينارڊ-جونز]] [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ واري سالمي مدار طريقي]] (LCAO) جو لڳ ڀڳ طريقو متعارف ڪرايو. هن بنيادي مقداري اصولن مان F&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[فلورين]]) ۽ O&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt; ([[آڪسيجن]]) سالمَن جي برقي بناوتن کي اخذ ڪرڻ جا طريقا پڻ تجويز ڪيا. هي [[سالمي مدار]] نظريو هم اشتراڪي بند کي اهڙي مدار طور بيان ڪري ٿو، جيڪو اڪيلن ايٽمن ۾ برقين لاءِ مفروض ڪيل مقداري ميخانياتي [[شروڊنگر مساوات|شروڊنگر ايٽمي مدارن]] جي ميلاپ سان ٺهي ٿو.

گهڻن برقين وارن ايٽمن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ برقين جون مساواتون مڪمل رياضياتي نموني، يعني ''تجزياتي طور''، حل نٿي ڪري سگهجن، پر انهن بابت لڳ ڀڳ حل اڃا بہ ڪيترائي درست معياري اڳڪٿيون ۽ نتيجا ڏين ٿا. جديد [[مقداري ڪيميا]] ۾ گهڻا عددي حساب يا تہ تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي يا سالمي مدار نظريي کان شروع ٿين ٿا، جڏهن تہ ٽيون طريقو، [[گهاٽائي فعلي نظريو]]، تازن سالن ۾ وڌندڙ مقبوليت حاصل ڪري چڪو آهي.

1933ع ۾ ايڇ. ايڇ. جيمس ۽ اي. ايس. ڪولج ٻه هائڊروجن سالمي بابت هڪ حساب ڪيو. اڳين سڀني حسابن ۾ رڳو ايٽمي مرڪز کان برقيءَ جي مفاصلي تي دارومدار رکندڙ دالا استعمال ڪيا ويا هئا، پر هن حساب ۾ اهڙا دالا پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا، جن ۾ ٻن برقين جي وچ وارو مفاصلو سڌيءَ طرح شامل هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal
| last = James
| first = H.H.
|author2=Coolidge, A S.
| title = The Ground State of the Hydrogen Molecule
| journal = [[Journal of Chemical Physics]]
| volume = 1
| issue =12
| pages = 825–835
| year = 1933
| doi = 10.1063/1.1749252 | bibcode = 1933JChPh...1..825J
}}&lt;/ref&gt;

13 تائين ترتيب ڏئي سگهجندڙ پيمانن سان انهن اهڙو نتيجو حاصل ڪيو، جيڪو ٽٽڻ واري توانائي جي تجرباتي نتيجي جي تمام ويجهو هو. پوءِ واري توسيعن ۾ 54 تائين پيمانا استعمال ڪيا ويا ۽ تجربن سان انتهائي سٺي موافقت حاصل ٿي. هن حساب سائنسي برادريءَ کي ان ڳالهه جو يقين ڏياريو تہ مقداري نظريو تجرباتي نتيجن سان ٺهڪي اچي سگهي ٿو. تنهن هوندي بہ، هن طريقي ۾ تڪافؤ بند ۽ سالمي مدار نظرين جهڙي طبعي تصوير موجود نہ آهي، ۽ ان کي وڏن سالمَن تي لاڳو ڪرڻ ڏکيو آهي.

== ڪيميائي فارمولن ۾ بانڊ ==

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ايٽم ۽ سالما ٽن-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) بناوت رکن ٿا، تنهن ڪري مدارن ۽ بانڊن کي ظاهر ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪو هڪ ئي طريقو استعمال ڪرڻ ممڪن ناهي. '''[[سالمي فارمولو|سالمي فارمولن]]''' ۾ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪيميائي بانڊن (يعني بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ مدارن) کي بحث جي نوعيت موجب مختلف طريقن سان ڏيکاريو ويندو آهي. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ ڪجهه تفصيل ڄاڻي واڻي نظرانداز ڪيا ويندا آهن.

مثال طور، [[نامياتي ڪيميا]] ۾ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن رڳو سالمي جي [[فعالي گروهه|فعالي گروهه]] (فنڪشنل گروپ) تي ڌيان ڏنو ويندو آهي. انهيءَ ڪري [[اٿانول]] جو سالمو مختلف صورتن ۾ لکيو وڃي ٿو، جيئن:
* [[تشڪيلي همجيسيت]] (ڪمفرميشنل) واري صورت،
* ٽي-رخي (ٿري-ڊائميشنل) صورت،
* مڪمل ٻه-رخي (ٽو-ڊائميشنل) صورت، جنهن ۾ هر بند ڏيکاريل هوندو آهي پر ٽين رخ جي ڄاڻ نه هوندي آهي،
* مختصر ٻه-رخي صورت (CH&lt;sub&gt;3&lt;/sub&gt;–CH&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;–OH)،
* فعالي گروهه کي باقي سالمي کان الڳ ڏيکاريندي (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;5&lt;/sub&gt;OH)،
* يا صرف ان جي ايٽمي جوڙجڪ (C&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;H&lt;sub&gt;6&lt;/sub&gt;O) جي صورت ۾.

ڪهڙي صورت استعمال ڪئي ويندي، اهو ان ڳالهه تي دارومدار رکي ٿو ته بحث جو موضوع ڪهڙو آهي.

ڪڏهن ڪڏهن اهي تڪافؤ برقين (وئلنس اليڪٽران) پڻ ڏيکاريا ويندا آهن، جيڪي بند ٺاهڻ ۾ حصو نٿا وٺن، ۽ انهن جي لڳ ڀڳ ٻه-رخي رخ بندي به ظاهر ڪئي ويندي آهي؛ مثال طور بنيادي [[ڪاربان]] کي &lt;sub&gt;.&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt;C&lt;sup&gt;'&lt;/sup&gt; جي صورت ۾ ڏيکاريو وڃي ٿو. ڪجهه ڪيمياگر لاڳاپيل مدارن کي به ظاهر ڪندا آهن، جيئن فرضي اٿين (Ethene) آئن &lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt; کي (&lt;sub&gt;\&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;/&lt;/sup&gt;C=C&lt;sub&gt;/&lt;/sub&gt;&lt;sup&gt;\&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;sup&gt;−4&lt;/sup&gt;) جي صورت ۾ لکڻ، جيڪو بانڊ ٺهڻ جي امڪان کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو.

== مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ ==

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; clear:right; margin:0 0 1em 1em; text-align:center;&quot;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; | '''عام [[بانڊ جي ڊگھائي|بانڊ ڊگھايون]] (pm ۾)&lt;br /&gt;۽ بانڊ جون [[توانائي|توانائيون]] (kJ/mol ۾).'''&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry_Textbook_Maps/Supplemental_Modules_(Physical_and_Theoretical_Chemistry)/Chemical_Bonding/Fundamentals_of_Chemical_Bonding/Bond_Energies |title=Bond Energies |date=2 October 2013 |publisher=Chemistry Libre Texts |access-date=2019-02-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;بانڊ جي ڊگھائي کي 100 سان ورهائي [[اينگسٽروم|Å]] ۾ تبديل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;br /&gt;(1 Å = 100 pm)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|-
! بانڊ
! ڊگھائي&lt;br /&gt;(pm)
! توانائي&lt;br /&gt;(kJ/mol)
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | H — [[هائڊروجن]]
|-
| H–H || 74 || 436
|-
| H–O || 96 || 467
|-
| H–F || 92 || 568
|-
| H–Cl || 127 || 432
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | C — [[ڪاربان]]
|-
| C–H || 109 || 413
|-
| C–C || 154 || 347
|-
| C–C= || 151 ||
|-
| =C–C≡ || 147 ||
|-
| =C–C= || 148 ||
|-
| C=C || 134 || 614
|-
| C≡C || 120 || 839
|-
| C–N || 147 || 308
|-
| C–O || 143 || 358
|-
| C=O || || 745
|-
| C≡O || || 1,072
|-
| C–F || 134 || 488
|-
| C–Cl || 177 || 330
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | N — [[نائيٽروجن]]
|-
| N–H || 101 || 391
|-
| N–N || 145 || 170
|-
| N≡N || 110 || 945
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | O — [[آڪسيجن]]
|-
| O–O || 148 || 146
|-
| O=O || 121 || 495
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; | F، Cl، Br، I — [[هيلوجن]]
|-
| F–F || 142 || 158
|-
| Cl–Cl || 199 || 243
|-
| Br–H || 141 || 366
|-
| Br–Br || 228 || 193
|-
| I–H || 161 || 298
|-
| I–I || 267 || 151
|}

'''مضبوط ڪيميائي بانڊ''' اهي ''بين-سالمي'' (انٽرا ماليڪيولر) قوتون آهن، جيڪي [[سالمو|ماليڪيولن]] جي اندر ايٽمن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي رکن ٿيون. مضبوط ڪيميائي بند، ايٽمي مرڪزن جي وچ ۾ [[اليڪٽران|اليڪٽرانن]] جي منتقلي يا گڏيل ورهاست سان ٺهن ٿا ۽ انهن جو بنياد ايٽمي مرڪزن ۾ موجود پروٽانن ۽ مدارن ۾ موجود برقين جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني ڪشش]] تي هوندو آهي.

مضبوط بندن جا مختلف قسم، بند ٺاهيندڙ عنصرن جي [[برقي منفيت]] (اليڪٽرونيگيٽوٽي) ۾ فرق سبب پيدا ٿيندا آهن. برقي منفيت ڪنهن [[ايٽم]] جي اها لاڙو ظاهر ڪري ٿي، جنهن تحت اهو [[ڪيميائي عنصر]] ڪيميائي بند ٺهڻ دوران گڏيل برقين کي پنهنجي طرف ڇڪيندو آهي. جيتري وڌيڪ برقي منفيت هوندي، اوتري ئي وڌيڪ اها گڏيل برقين کي پاڻ ڏانهن متوجهه ڪندي.
برقي منفيت، [[بانڊ توانائي]] جو مقداري اندازو لڳائڻ لاءِ هڪ سادي پيماني طور پڻ ڪم اچي ٿي. بانڊ توانائي بانڊ جي نوعيت کي [[هم اشتراڪي بند]] کان [[آئني بانڊ]] تائين هڪ لڳاتار سلسلي تي بيان ڪري ٿي. جڏهن ٻن عنصرن جي برقي منفيت ۾ وڏو فرق هوندو آهي، تڏهن بانڊ ۾ قطبيت وڌندي آهي ۽ ان جو آئني ڪردار وڌيڪ نمايان ٿيندو آهي.

=== آئني بانڊ ===
{{Main|آئني بانڊ}}

[[File:NaCl octahedra.svg|thumb|left|[[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (NaCl) جي قلمي بناوت، جنهن ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] ({{color|purple|Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|purple|واڱڻائي}} ۽ [[ڪلورائيڊ]] [[آئڻ]] ({{color|green|Cl&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;}}) کي {{color|green|سائي}} رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريو ويو آهي. پيلن نقطن سان ابتڙ چارج وارن [[آئن|آئنن]] جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] ڏيکاريل آهي.]]

آئني بانڊ ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[برقي سڪوني قوت]] جي اهڙي قسم جي ڪشش آهي، جيڪا انهن عنصرن ۾ پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ وڏو فرق هجي. اهڙو ڪو درست عددي قدر موجود ناهي، جيڪو آئني بانڊ کي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ کان واضح طور جدا ڪري، پر جيڪڏهن برقي منفيت جو فرق 1.7 کان وڌيڪ هجي ته بانڊ گهڻو ڪري آئني نوعيت جو هوندو، جڏهن ته 1.7 کان گهٽ فرق عام طور هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڏانهن اشارو ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book
 | last = Atkins
 | first = Peter
 | author-link = Peter Atkins
 |author2=Loretta Jones
 | title = Chemistry: Molecules, Matter and Change
 | publisher = W.H. Freeman &amp; Co.
 | year = 1997
 | location = New York
 | pages = 294–295
 | isbn = 978-0-7167-3107-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

آئني بانڊ جي نتيجي ۾ الڳ الڳ مثبت ۽ منفي [[آئن]] ٺهن ٿا. عام طور تي آئنن جا چارج −3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] کان +3[[ايليمينٽري چارچ|e]] جي وچ ۾ هوندا آهن. آئني بانڊ گهڻو ڪري [[لوڻ (ڪيميا)|ڌاتي لوڻن]]، جهڙوڪ [[سوڊيم ڪلورائيڊ]] (کاڌي جو لوڻ)، ۾ ملي ٿو.
آئني بانڊن جي هڪ خاص خصوصيت اها آهي ته اهي مادي کي آئني قلم (آئني ڪرسٽل) جي صورت ڏين ٿا، جتي ڪو به آئن ڪنهن هڪ مخصوص آئن سان رخائتي بانڊ ذريعي ڳنڍيل نه هوندو آهي. ان جي بدران، هر آئن پنهنجي چوڌاري مخالف چارج وارن ڪيترن ئي آئنن سان گهيريل هوندو آهي، ۽ انهن سڀني سان ان جو مفاصلو ساڳيو هوندو آهي. تنهن ڪري ڪنهن هڪ آئن کي ڪنهن خاص پاڙيسري آئن سان وابسته نٿو ڪري سگهجي.

هيءَ حالت هم اشتراڪي قلمَن کان مختلف آهي، جتي مخصوص ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ اڃا به سڃاڻپ لائق هوندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ٻين ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جيئن [[ايڪس-ري تفرقي]] (ايڪس-ري ڊسفريڪشن) جهڙين طريقن سان معلوم ڪري سگهجي ٿو.
آئني قلم ڪڏهن ڪڏهن هم اشتراڪي ۽ آئني ٻنهي قسمن جي بندن تي مشتمل هوندا آهن، جيئن پيچيده تيزابن جي لوڻن، مثال طور [[سوڊيم سائينائيڊ]] (NaCN)، ۾ ڏسي سگهجي ٿو. ايڪس-ري تفرقي مان معلوم ٿيو آهي ته NaCN ۾ سوڊيم [[ڪيٽائن]] (Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt;) ۽ سائينائيڊ [[آئڻ]] (CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt;) جي وچ ۾ بند ''آئني'' نوعيت جا آهن، ۽ ڪو به [[سوڊيم]] آئن ڪنهن هڪ خاص [[سائينائيڊ]] آئن سان ڳنڍيل ناهي. پر سائينائيڊ آئن جي اندر [[ڪاربان]] (C) ۽ [[نائيٽروجن]] (N) جي وچ وارو بند ''هم اشتراڪي'' هوندو آهي، تنهن ڪري هر ڪاربان رڳو هڪ نائيٽروجن سان مضبوط نموني ڳنڍيل هوندو آهي، جنهن سان ان جو مفاصلو ٻين ڪاربان يا نائيٽروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ گهڻو گهٽ هوندو آهي.

جڏهن اهڙا قلم ڳري مايع بڻجن ٿا ته سڀ کان پهرين آئني بند ٽٽندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي رخائتا (ڊائريڪشنل) نه هوندا آهن ۽ چارج وارن ذرڙن کي آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪرڻ ڏيندا آهن. ساڳيءَ طرح، جڏهن اهڙا لوڻ پاڻيءَ ۾ حل ٿين ٿا ته پاڻيءَ سان رابطي سبب آئني بند ٽٽي ويندا آهن، جڏهن ته هم اشتراڪي بند برقرار رهندا آهن.
مثال طور، محلول ۾ سائينائيڊ آئن اڃا به هڪ واحد CN&lt;sup&gt;−&lt;/sup&gt; آئن جي صورت ۾ موجود رهندو آهي ۽ آزاديءَ سان حرڪت ڪندو آهي، بلڪل اهڙيءَ طرح جيئن سوڊيم جا Na&lt;sup&gt;+&lt;/sup&gt; آئن. پاڻيءَ ۾ چارج وارا آئن هڪ ٻئي کان پري ٿي ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ هر آئن جي ڪشش ٻين آئنن جي ڀيٽ ۾ پاڻيءَ جي ڪيترن ئي ماليڪيولن سان وڌيڪ مضبوط هوندي آهي. اهڙن محلولن ۾ آئنن ۽ پاڻيءَ جي ماليڪيولن جي وچ واري ڪشش، ڪمزور [[بين-سالمي قوت]] جي هڪ قسم، يعني ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش، سبب هوندي آهي.
ڳريل آئني مرڪبن ۾ به آئن هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن متوجهه رهندا آهن، پر انهن جي ترتيب هاڻي منظم يا قلمي نه رهندي آهي.
=== هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ===
{{Main|هم اشتراڪي بانڊ}}

[[File:covalent.svg|thumb|left|160px|[[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ. [[ليوس بناوت]] ۾ C ۽ H ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ گڏيل برقين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي.]]

هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ڪيميائي بانڊن جو سڀ کان عام قسم آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه يا وڌيڪ ايٽم تڪافؤ برقين کي لڳ ڀڳ هڪجهڙي نموني پاڻ ۾ ورهائيندا آهن. ان جو سڀ کان سادو ۽ عام قسم [[اڪيلو بانڊ]] آهي، جنهن ۾ ٻه ايٽم برقين جو هڪ جوڙو گڏيل طور استعمال ڪندا آهن. ٻين قسمن ۾ [[ٻٽو بانڊ]]، [[ٽهڻو بانڊ]]، [[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ#هڪ- ۽ ٽي-برقي بانڊ|هڪ- ۽ ٽن-برقي بانڊ]]، [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو ٻه-برقي بانڊ]] ۽ [[ٽن-مرڪزن وارو چار-برقي بانڊ]] شامل آهن.

غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن ۾ بانڊ ٺاهيندڙ ايٽمن جي [[برقي منفيت]] ۾ فرق تمام گهٽ، عام طور 0 کان 0.3 تائين، هوندو آهي. گهڻن [[نامياتي مرڪب]]ن ۾ موجود بانڊ هم اشتراڪي نوعيت جا هوندا آهن. شڪل ۾ ڏيکاريل [[ميٿين]] (CH&lt;sub&gt;4&lt;/sub&gt;) ۾ هر هائڊروجن ايٽم ڪاربان سان هڪ هم اشتراڪي بانڊ ٺاهي ٿو. اهڙي بانڊ جي LCAO وضاحت لاءِ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ [[پائي بانڊ]] ڏسو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book|title=Introduction to organic chemistry.|last1=Streitwieser|first1=Andrew|last2=Heathcock|first2=Clayton H.|last3=Kosower|first3=Edward M.|publisher=Macmillan|others=Heathcock, Clayton H., Kosower, Edward M.|year=1992|isbn=978-0024181701|edition=4th|location=New York|pages=[https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250 250]|oclc=24501305|url-access=registration|url=https://archive.org/details/introductiontoor00stre_0/page/250}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيڪي سالما بنيادي طور غير قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊن مان ٺهيل هوندا آهن، اهي پاڻي يا ٻين [[قطبي محلل]]ن ۾ عام طور نه ڳرندا آهن، پر [[غير قطبي محلل]]ن، جهڙوڪ [[هيڪسين]]، ۾ آسانيءَ سان حل ٿي ويندا آهن.

[[قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] اهڙو هم اشتراڪي بانڊ آهي، جنهن ۾ نمايان [[آئني بانڊ]] وارو ڪردار پڻ موجود هوندو آهي. اهڙي حالت ۾ گڏيل ٻئي برقي هڪ ايٽم ڏانهن ٻئي جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ ويجهو هوندا آهن، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ چارج جي غير يڪسان ورڇ پيدا ٿيندي آهي. اهڙا بانڊ وچولي درجي جي برقي منفيت جي فرق رکندڙ ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ٺهن ٿا ۽ [[ڊائپول#سالمي ڊائپول|ڊائپول–ڊائپول ڪشش]] جو سبب بڻجن ٿا. اهڙن بانڊن ۾ ٻنهي ايٽمن جي برقي منفيت جو فرق عام طور 0.3 کان 1.7 جي وچ ۾ هوندو آهي.

==== اڪيلا ۽ گهڻا بانڊ ====

[[اڪيلو بانڊ]] ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ برقين جي هڪ جوڙي جي گڏيل ورڇ کي ظاهر ڪري ٿو. هائڊروجن (H) جي هر ايٽم وٽ هڪ تڪافؤ برقي هوندو آهي. جڏهن ٻه هائڊروجن ايٽم پاڻ ۾ گڏجن ٿا، ته اهي برقين جو هڪ گڏيل جوڙو استعمال ڪندي هڪ سالمو ٺاهين ٿا. اهڙيءَ طرح هر هائڊروجن ايٽم کي [[هيليم]] (He) جهڙي عظيم گئس واري برقي ترتيب حاصل ٿي وڃي ٿي. ٻنهي ايٽمن جي وچ واري علائقي ۾ هن گڏيل برقي جوڙي جي برقي ڪثافت، الڳ الڳ ٻن غير رابطي وارن هائڊروجن ايٽمن جي ڀيٽ ۾ وڌيڪ هوندي آهي.

[[File:Pi-Bond.svg|thumb|right|ٻه p-مدار جيڪي هڪ پائي بانڊ ٺاهي رهيا آهن.]]

[[ٻٽو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٻن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي. انهن مان هڪ [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ ٻيو [[پائي بانڊ]] هوندو آهي، جنهن ۾ برقي ڪثافت ٻنهي ايٽمي مرڪزن کي ملائيندڙ محور جي ٻنهي پاسن تي مرڪوز هوندي آهي.
[[ٽهڻو بانڊ]] برقين جي ٽن گڏيل جوڙن تي مشتمل هوندو آهي، جيڪي هڪ سگما بانڊ ۽ ٻن پائي بانڊن مان ٺهندا آهن. ان جو مشهور مثال [[نائيٽروجن]] جو سالمو آهي.
[[چوڻو بانڊ]] ۽ ان کان وڌيڪ درجي جا بانڊ تمام ناياب هوندا آهن ۽ صرف ڪجهه [[منتقلي ڌاتو]]ن جي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ئي ٺهندا آهن.

== بين-سالمي بانڊ ==
{{Main|بين-سالمي قوت}}

ٻن يا وڌيڪ اهڙن سالمَن جي وچ ۾، جيڪي پاڻ ۾ هم اشتراڪي بانڊن سان ڳنڍيل نه هجن، ڪيترن قسمن جا ڪمزور بانڊ ٺهي سگهن ٿا. [[بين-سالمي قوت]]ون سالمَن کي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڇڪين يا هڪ ٻئي کان پري ڌڪين ٿيون. ڪيترين حالتن ۾ اهي قوتون ڪنهن مادي جي طبعي خاصيتن، جهڙوڪ [[ڳرڻ جو گرمي پد]]، تي اهم اثر وجهنديون آهن.

[[وان ڊر والز قوت]]ون بند-خول (ڪلوزڊ-شيل) وارن سالمَن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ لاڳاپا آهن. انهن ۾ [[ڪيميائي قطبيت|قطبي]] سالمَن جي جزوي چارجن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ ڪولمي ڪشش ۽ بند برقي خولن جي وچ ۾ [[پائولي اخراج اصول#مادي جي استحڪام|پائولي ڌڪ]] (پائولي ريپلشن) شامل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref name=Atkins&gt;{{cite book |last1=Atkins |first1=Peter |last2=de Paula |first2=Julio |title=Physical Chemistry |date=2002 |publisher=W.H.Freeman |isbn=0-7167-3539-3 |pages=696–706 |edition=7th}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|696}}

[[ڪيسوم قوت|ڪيسوم قوتون]] ٻن قطبي سالمَن جي مستقل [[ڊائپول#سالمي ڊائپول|ڊائپولن]] جي وچ ۾ پيدا ٿيندڙ قوتون آهن.{{r|Atkins|p=701}} [[لنڊن ورڇ قوت]]ون مختلف سالمَن ۾ پيدا ٿيل (Induced) ڊائپولن جي وچ ۾ ٿيندڙ قوتون آهن.{{r|Atkins|p=703}} اهڙيءَ طرح هڪ سالمَي جي مستقل ڊائپول ۽ ٻئي سالمَي جي پيدا ٿيل ڊائپول جي وچ ۾ به لاڳاپو پيدا ٿي سگهي ٿو.{{r|Atkins|p=702}}

[[هائڊروجن بانڊ]] A--H•••B جي صورت ۾ تڏهن ٺهندو آهي، جڏهن A ۽ B ٻه انتهائي برقي-منفي ايٽم (عام طور [[نائيٽروجن]]، [[آڪسيجن]] يا [[فلورين]]) هجن. اهڙي حالت ۾ A، H سان انتهائي قطبي هم اشتراڪي بند ٺاهي ٿو، جنهن جي نتيجي ۾ H تي جزوي مثبت چارج پيدا ٿئي ٿي، جڏهن ته B وٽ [[اڪيلو برقي جوڙو]] موجود هوندو آهي، جيڪو انهيءَ جزوي مثبت چارج ڏانهن متوجهه ٿي هائڊروجن بند ٺاهي ٿو.{{r|Atkins|p=702}} هائڊروجن بند پاڻي ۽ [[امونيا]] جي بلند اُبال گرمي پد جا بنيادي ذميوار آهن، جڏهن انهن جي وڌيڪ ڳرن هم منصبن سان ڀيٽ ڪئي وڃي. ڪجهه حالتن ۾، ٻن مختلف سالمَن جي انتهائي برقي-منفي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ موجود ڪنهن هيلوجن ايٽم ذريعي ساڳئي نوعيت جو [[هيلوجن بند]] پڻ ٺهي سگهي ٿو.
تمام ننڍن مفاصلن تي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ ڌڪيندڙ (ريپلسو) قوتون پڻ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ لڳن ٿيون.{{r|Atkins|p=705-6}}

== ڪيميائي بانڊ جا نظريا ==

&quot;خالص&quot; [[آئني بانڊ]] جي (غير حقيقي) حد ۾، برقي بانڊ ۾ شامل ٻنهي ايٽمن مان رڳو هڪ تي مڪمل طور مقامي (لوڪلائيزڊ) هوندا آهن. اهڙن بانڊن کي [[طبعيات ڪلاسيڪي|ڪلاسيڪي طبعيات]] جي مدد سان سمجهي سگهجي ٿو. ايٽمن جي وچ واري قوت [[هم رخ]] (آئسوٽراپڪ) مسلسل برقي سڪوني امڪانن (اليڪٽرو اسٽيٽڪ پوٽينشل) تي دارومدار رکي ٿي. هن قوت جي شدت [[ڪولمب جو قانون|ڪولمب جي قانون]] موجب ٻنهي آئنن جي چارجن جي حاصل ضرب سان سڌي تناسب ۾ هوندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fundamentals of Electromagnetics |url=https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/chapter/monograph/abs/pii/B9780124722576500057 |access-date=2026-05-08 |website=www.sciencedirect.com |language=en-US |doi=10.1016/B978-0-12-472257-6.50005-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] کي [[تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريو|تڪافؤ بانڊ (VB) نظريي]] يا [[سالمي مدار نظريو|سالمي مدار (MO) نظريي]] جي ذريعي وڌيڪ بهتر نموني سمجهي سگهجي ٿو. بانڊ ۾ شامل ايٽمن جون خاصيتون [[آڪسائيڊيشن انگ]]، [[رسمي چارج]] ۽ [[برقي منفيت]] جهڙن تصورن جي مدد سان بيان ڪري سگهجن ٿيون. بانڊ جي اندر موجود برقي ڪثافت ڪنهن هڪ ايٽم سان وابسته نه هوندي آهي، پر ٻنهي ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[بي مرڪزيت|بي مرڪز]] (ڊيلوڪلائيزڊ) هوندي آهي.

تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريي موجب، بانڊ برقين جي اهڙن جوڙن مان ٺهن ٿا، جيڪي ٻن ايٽمن جي وچ ۾ [[ايٽمي مدار]]ن جي هڪ ٻئي تي چڙهڻ (Overlap) سبب مقامي طور گڏيل هوندا آهن. [[مداري هائبرڊائيزيشن]] ۽ [[گونج (ڪيميا)|گونج]] جا تصور هن بنيادي برقي-جوڙي واري خيال کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪن ٿا.
ٻئي طرف، سالمي مدار نظريي ۾ بانڊ کي اهڙي برقي ورڇ طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيڪا سڄي سالمي ۾ پکڙيل هوندي آهي ۽ اهڙن مدارن ۾ ورهايل هوندي آهي، جيڪي سالمي جي تماثل (سميٽري) مطابق ترتيب ڏنل هوندا آهن. ان لاءِ عام طور [[ايٽمي مدارن جي ليڪي ميلاپ وارو سالمي مدار طريقو]] (LCAO) استعمال ڪيو ويندو آهي.
تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ بانڊن کي مقامي انداز ۾ بيان ڪري ٿو، تنهن ڪري ڪيميائي تبديلين ۾ شامل سالمي جي مخصوص حصن تي ڌيان ڏيڻ وڌيڪ آسان بڻائي ٿو. ان جي ابتڙ، سالمي مدار نظريو مقداري ميخانيات جي نقطۂ نظر کان وڌيڪ &quot;قدرتي&quot; سمجهيو وڃي ٿو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ مدارن جون توانائيون حقيقي طبعي اهميت رکن ٿيون ۽ [[فٽو برقي طيف نگاري]] مان حاصل ٿيندڙ تجربي واري آئنائزيشن توانائين سان سڌي طرح لاڳاپيل هونديون آهن.
انهيءَ ڪري تڪافؤ بانڊ نظريو ۽ سالمي مدار نظريو اڪثر هڪ ٻئي جا مقابلي وارا، پر هڪ ٻئي کي مڪمل ڪندڙ، نظريا سمجهيا ويندا آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي ڪيميائي نظامن بابت مختلف بصيرتون مهيا ڪن ٿا. برقي بناوت جي نظرين طور، اصولي طور ٻنهي VB ۽ MO طريقن سان گهربل درستگيءَ تائين ويجهڙائيون حاصل ڪري سگهجن ٿيون. البت، گهٽ درجي جي ويجهڙائين ۾ ٻنهي جا نتيجا مختلف ٿي سگهن ٿا، ۽ ڪنهن خاص نظام يا خاصيت جي حساب لاءِ هڪ طريقو ٻئي کان وڌيڪ موزون ثابت ٿي سگهي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=2014-11-26 |title=21.7: Which Is Better- MO or VB? |url=https://chem.libretexts.org/Bookshelves/Organic_Chemistry/Basic_Principles_of_Organic_Chemistry_(Roberts_and_Caserio)/21%3A_Resonance_and_Molecular_Orbital_Methods/21.07%3A_Which_Is_Better-_MO_or_VB |access-date=2026-05-08 |website=Chemistry LibreTexts |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;
خالص آئني بانڊن ۾ موجود گوليائي هم رخ ڪولمبي قوتن جي ابتڙ، هم اشتراڪي بانڊ عام طور رخائتا (ڊائريڪشنل) ۽ [[غير هم رخ]] (اينئاسوٽراپڪ) هوندا آهن. انهن کي عام طور سالمي جي ميدان (پلين) جي لحاظ کان تماثل جي بنياد تي [[سگما بانڊ]] ۽ [[پائي بانڊ]] ۾ ورهايو ويندو آهي.
عام حالتن ۾، ايٽم اهڙا بانڊ ٺاهيندا آهن جيڪي آئني ۽ هم اشتراڪي بانڊن جي وچ واري نوعيت جا هوندا آهن، ۽ انهن جو دارومدار شامل ايٽمن جي لاڳاپيل [[برقي منفيت]] تي هوندو آهي. اهڙي قسم جي بانڊن کي [[قطبي هم اشتراڪي بانڊ]] چيو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |last1=Ouellette |first1=Robert J. |last2=Rawn |first2=J. David |title=Polar Covalent Bond |url=https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/chemistry/polar-covalent-bond |publisher=Science Direct |access-date=14 September 2023 |date=2015 |quote=A polar covalent bond exists when atoms with different electronegativities share electrons in a covalent bond.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
* [[ويلنسي]]
* [[آئني بانڊ]]
* [[ڪوويلنٽ بانڊ]]
==خارجي لنڪس==
{{wikiquote}}
{{Commons category|Chemical bonding}}
* W. Locke (1997). [http://www.ch.ic.ac.uk/vchemlib/course/mo_theory/main.html Introduction to Molecular Orbital Theory]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* Carl R. Nave (2005). [http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/chemical/bond.html HyperPhysics]. Retrieved May 18, 2005.
* [http://osulibrary.oregonstate.edu/specialcollections/coll/pauling/bond/index.html Linus Pauling and the Nature of the Chemical Bond: A Documentary History]. Retrieved February 29, 2008.

{{Authority control}}
[[زمرو:ڪيميا]]
[[زمرو:ڪيميائي بانڊنگ]]
[[زمرو:طبيعيات جي اصطلاحون]]
[[Category:Quantum chemistry]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}</text>
      <sha1>lrkumf08wap3uh9g2drpthp3uhsnl8p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>افريڪن يونين</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>43672</id>
    <redirect title="آفريڪي يونين" />
    <revision>
      <id>394096</id>
      <parentid>123212</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T23:19:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>EmausBot</username>
        <id>1754</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Fixing double redirect from [[آفريڪي اتحاد]] to [[آفريڪي يونين]]</comment>
      <origin>394096</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39" sha1="rrjagkkesnziz7y94q5msff0v8610b4" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[آفريڪي يونين]]</text>
      <sha1>rrjagkkesnziz7y94q5msff0v8610b4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ھٽيان ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>51614</id>
    <redirect title="ھٽيان بالا ضلعو" />
    <revision>
      <id>394100</id>
      <parentid>167803</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T23:20:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>EmausBot</username>
        <id>1754</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Fixing double redirect from [[ھٽيان مٿيون ضلعو]] to [[ھٽيان بالا ضلعو]]</comment>
      <origin>394100</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" sha1="ho1fz8w9yyt6cos1emhsvmsockfjjg2" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[ھٽيان بالا ضلعو]]</text>
      <sha1>ho1fz8w9yyt6cos1emhsvmsockfjjg2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>سرحدي علائقو بنون</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>60973</id>
    <redirect title="وزير تعلقو" />
    <revision>
      <id>394098</id>
      <parentid>205763</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T23:19:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>EmausBot</username>
        <id>1754</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Fixing double redirect from [[بنون سب ڊويزن]] to [[وزير تعلقو]]</comment>
      <origin>394098</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35" sha1="jlf0npztcjv154fw1qcz365amxi7pbz" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[وزير تعلقو]]</text>
      <sha1>jlf0npztcjv154fw1qcz365amxi7pbz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>اتمان خيل تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>76329</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394155</id>
      <parentid>317614</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:37:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394155</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2261" sha1="7zlk9sz1ffdmng4xlw5nm8x2e5e2jl0" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement
| official_name = 
| name = اتمان خيل تعلقو
| native_name = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل اتمان خیل}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|اتمان خيل تحصیل}}}}
| settlement_type = [[تعلقو]]
| other_name = 
| image_skyline = 
| imagesize = 
| image_caption = ضلعی باجوڙ م اتمان خيل تعلقو
| image_map = Utmankhel Tehsil.png
| pushpin_map = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_mapsize = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| subdivision_type = [[ملڪ]]
| subdivision_name = {{flagicon|Pakistan}}
[[پاڪستان]]
| subdivision_type1 = [[صوبو]]
| subdivision_name1 = {{Flagicon|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
[[خيبر پختونخوا]]
| subdivision_type2 = [[ضلعو]]
| subdivision_name2 = [[باجوڙ ضلعو|باجوڙ]]
| subdivision_type3 = گادي
| subdivision_name3 = 
| subdivision_type4 = قصبا
| subdivision_name4 = 
| subdivision_type5 = یونین ڪونسلون
| subdivision_name5 = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type = 
| leader_title = 
| leader_name = 
| leader_title1 = 
| leader_name1 = 
| established_title = 
| established_date = 
| area_total_km2 = 
| area_metro_km2 = 
| population_as_of = 2017ع آدمشماري
| population_footnotes = 
| population_note = 
| population_total = 1,07,356
| population_urban = 
| population_density_urban_km2 = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m = 
| elevation_ft = 
| timezone1 = پاڪستان جو معیاری وقت ([[Pakistan Standard Time|PST]])
| postal_code_type = 
| postal_code = 
| area_code = 
| map_caption = ضلعی باجوڑ م اتمان خيل تعلقو
}}'''اتمان خیل''' ( {{Lang-ps|اتمان خيل تحصیل}}) [[پاڪستان]] جي صوبي [[خيبر پختونخوا]] جي ضلعي [[باجوڙ ضلعو|باجوڙ]] جو هڪ انتظامي سب ڊويزن ([[تعلقو|تعلقو)]] آهي. اتمان خيل باجوڙ ضلعي جي ستن تعلقن مان پنجون نمبر وڏو آهي.
==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:اتمان خيل تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي ۾ آبادي واريون جايون]]</text>
      <sha1>7zlk9sz1ffdmng4xlw5nm8x2e5e2jl0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>اسماعيل زئي تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>76341</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394163</id>
      <parentid>317616</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:46:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394163</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2560" sha1="mn7im4umpwbingii088o8oikkkkyt9x" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement
| official_name = 
| name = اسماعيل زئي تعلقو
| native_name = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل اسماعیل زئی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|اسماعیلزي تحصیل}}}}
| settlement_type = [[تعلقو]]
| other_name = 
| image_skyline = 
| imagesize = 
| image_caption = 
| image_map = 
| pushpin_map = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_mapsize = 
| pushpin_map_caption = [[پاڪستان]] م مقام
| subdivision_type = [[ملڪ]]
| subdivision_name = {{flagicon|Pakistan}}
[[پاڪستان]]
| subdivision_type1 = [[صوبو]]
| subdivision_name1 = {{Flagicon|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
[[خيبر پختونخوا]]
| subdivision_type2 = [[ضلعو]]
| subdivision_name2 = [[اورڪزئي ضلعو]]
| subdivision_type3 = گادي
| subdivision_name3 = 
| subdivision_type4 = قصبا
| subdivision_name4 = 
| subdivision_type5 = یونین ڪونسلون
| subdivision_name5 = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type = 
| leader_title = 
| leader_name = 
| leader_title1 = 
| leader_name1 = 
| established_title = 
| established_date = 
| area_total_km2 = 
| area_metro_km2 = 
| population_as_of = [[2017 Pakistani census|2017]]
| population_footnotes = 
| population_note = 
| population_total = 23965
| population_rural = 
| population_urban = 
| population_density_urban_km2 = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m = 
| elevation_ft = 
| timezone1 = [[Pakistan Standard Time|PST]]
| postal_code_type = 
| postal_code = 
| area_code = 
}}
'''اسماعيل زئي تعلقو''' (Ismailzai Tehsil) هڪ سب ڊويزن آهي جيڪو [[پاڪستان]] جي صوبي [[خيبر پختونخوا|خيبر پختونخواه]] جي ضلعي [[اورڪزئي ضلعو|اورڪزئي]] ۾ واقع آهي. [[آدمشماري پاڪستان، 2017ع|سال 2017ع جي مردم شماري]] جي مطابق تعلقي جي آبادي 23,965 آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;census&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/bwpsr/fata/ORAKZAI_SUMMARY.pdf|title=district and Tehsil level population summary with region breakup [PDF]|date=2018-01-03|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180326141522/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/bwpsr/fata/ORAKZAI_SUMMARY.pdf|archive-date=2018-03-26|access-date=2018-03-25}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:اسماعيل زئي تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:اورڪزئي ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:اورڪزئي ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>mn7im4umpwbingii088o8oikkkkyt9x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>خار باجوڙ تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>79235</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394157</id>
      <parentid>317624</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:39:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394157</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="726" sha1="3eo80g9m3c4gdgkvguh51z0ly3k6x4a" xml:space="preserve">'''خار باجوڙ تعلقو''' (پشتو: خار باجوړ تحصیل)، ڪڏهن ڪڏهن مختصر ڪري خار تعلقو، پاڪستان جي صوبي خيبرپختونخواه جي  ضلعي باجوڙ جي هڪ انتظامي سب ڊويزن (تعلقو) آهي. خار باجوڙ، باجوڙ ضلعي جي ستن تعلقن مان ٻيو نمبر وڏو تعلقو آهي.

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:خار باجوڙ تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي ۾ آبادي واريون جايون]]</text>
      <sha1>3eo80g9m3c4gdgkvguh51z0ly3k6x4a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>نواگئي تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>79301</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394159</id>
      <parentid>317625</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:42:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394159</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2505" sha1="ed7ij9iuizsxeewkvpho4nd5jy4i6bn" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|Pakistani administrative subdivision}}{{Infobox settlement
| official_name = 
| name = نواگئي تعلقو
| native_name = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل ناواگئ }}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ناوګي تحصیل}}}}
| settlement_type = [[تعلقو]]
| other_name = 
| image_skyline = 
| imagesize = 
| image_caption = Nawagai Tehsil (red) in Bajaur District
| image_map = Nawagai Tehsil.png
| pushpin_map = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_mapsize = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| subdivision_type = [[ملڪ]]
| subdivision_name = {{flagicon|Pakistan}} [[پاڪستان]]
| subdivision_type1 = [[صوبو]]
| subdivision_name1 = {{Flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2 = [[ضلعو]]
| subdivision_name2 = [[باجوڙ ضلعو|باجوڙ]]
| seat_type = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| seat = [[نواگئي، باجوڙ|نواگئي]]
| subdivision_type3 = گاديء جو ھنڌ
| subdivision_name3 = 
| subdivision_type4 = قصبا
| subdivision_name4 = 
| subdivision_type5 = يونين ڪائونسلون
| subdivision_name5 = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type = 
| leader_title = 
| leader_name = 
| leader_title1 = 
| leader_name1 = 
| established_title = 
| established_date = 
| area_total_km2 = 
| area_metro_km2 = 
| population_as_of = [[2017 Census of Pakistan|2017]]
| population_footnotes = 
| population_note = 
| population_total = 79,002
| population_density_km = 
| population_urban = 
| population_density_urban_km2 = 
| coordinates = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m = 
| elevation_ft = 
| timezone = [[Pakistan Standard Time|PST]]
| utc_offset = +5
| timezone_DST = 
| utc_offset_DST = 
| postal_code_type = 
| postal_code = 
| area_code = 
| blank_name = 
| blank_info = 
| map_caption = [[باجوڙ ضلعو|باجوڙ ضلعي]] جي نقشي ۾ نواگئي تعلقو (ڳاڙهو)
}}
'''نواگئي تعلقو''' ({{lang-ps|تحصیل ناوګای}}) پاڪستان جي صوبي خيبر پختون خواه جي ضلعي باجوڙ جي هڪ انتظامي ماتحت (تعلقو) آهي. نواگئي، باجوڙ ضلعي جي ستن تعلقن مان چوٿيون وڏو تعلقو آهي.

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:نواگئي تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي ۾ آبادي واريون جايون]]</text>
      <sha1>ed7ij9iuizsxeewkvpho4nd5jy4i6bn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>82846</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394142</id>
      <parentid>317464</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:24:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394142</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="0" sha1="phoiac9h4m842xq45sp7s6u21eteeq1" />
      <sha1>phoiac9h4m842xq45sp7s6u21eteeq1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394143</id>
      <parentid>394142</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:26:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>added [[Category:خيبر پختونخوا جي انتظامي ورهاست]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394143</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="71" sha1="19krpaeb7vq23bgmducvuwavoot4jim" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:خيبر پختونخوا جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</text>
      <sha1>19krpaeb7vq23bgmducvuwavoot4jim</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394144</id>
      <parentid>394143</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:27:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394144</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="54" sha1="pg4xqjcqtvl7yz2x1uwmgel1eur5zxg" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>pg4xqjcqtvl7yz2x1uwmgel1eur5zxg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394150</id>
      <parentid>394144</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:34:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394150</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="87" sha1="b8cleygd3d6b0tqzc5zk34huc5cl6ni" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>b8cleygd3d6b0tqzc5zk34huc5cl6ni</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394151</id>
      <parentid>394150</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:34:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[زمرو:خيبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]] کي [[زمرو:زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394150</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="87" sha1="b8cleygd3d6b0tqzc5zk34huc5cl6ni" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>b8cleygd3d6b0tqzc5zk34huc5cl6ni</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394153</id>
      <parentid>394151</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:35:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[زمرو:زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]] کي [[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394150</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="87" sha1="b8cleygd3d6b0tqzc5zk34huc5cl6ni" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>b8cleygd3d6b0tqzc5zk34huc5cl6ni</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>لورا تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>88441</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394147</id>
      <parentid>348835</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:30:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394147</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3036" sha1="2rgjifb1fbchyfpzerzlo8wrffzmaut" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement
| official_name = Lora Tehsil
| name = لورا تعلقو
| native_name = &lt;br/&gt;{{Nastaliq|تحصیل لورا}}
| settlement_type = [[تعلقو]]
| image_skyline = 
| imagesize = 
| image_alt = 
| image_caption = 
| image_blank_emblem = 
| seat = لورا
| seat_type = گادي
| blank_emblem_size = 100px
| blank_emblem_type = Logo
| blank_emblem_link = 
| image_map = Abbottabad District.png
| mapsize = 280px
| map_alt = 
| map_caption = 
| image_map1 = 
| mapsize1 = 
| map_alt1 = 
| map_caption1 = Location within [[Pakistan]]
| subdivision_type = [[ملڪ]]
| subdivision_name = {{flag|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1 = [[صوبو]]
| subdivision_name1 = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2 = [[ضلعو]]
| subdivision_name2 = [[ايبٽ آباد ضلعو]]
| population_total = 98717
| population_rural = 
| population_urban = 
| population_as_of = 2023
| population_est = 
| pop_est_as_of = 
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
 | title        = Table 3 – Number of Rural Localities by Population Size and Their Population by Sex, Census 2023
 | url          = https://www.pbs.gov.pk/sites/default/files/population/2023/tables/table_3_kp_districts.pdf
 | publisher    = Pakistan Bureau of Statistics
 | date         = 2023
 | access-date  = 2025-11-06
}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| area_total_km2 = 187
| leader_title = 
| leader_name = 
| leader_title1 = 
| leader_name1 = 
| blank_name_sec1 = Number of [[town]]s
| blank_info_sec1 = 
| blank_name_sec2 = Number of [[Union councils of Pakistan|Union Councils]]
| blank_info_sec2 = 
| timezone1 = [[Pakistan Standard Time|PST]]
| utc_offset1 = +5
| website = 
| footnotes = 
}}
'''لورا تعلقو''' (اردو، هندڪو: تحصیل لورا) [[پاڪستان]] جي صوبي، [[خيبر پختونخوا]] جي ضلعي [[ايبٽ آباد ضلعو|ايبٽ آباد]] جي هڪ انتظامي ذيلي ورهاست ([[تعلقو]]) آهي. اها ايبٽ آباد ضلعي جي ڏاکڻي حصي ۾ واقع آهي ۽ پنجاب صوبي جي سرحد سان لڳندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=https://ecp.gov.pk/storage/files/1/Kpk-Na/s1.jpg|title=Abbottabad District map|publisher=[[Election Commission of Pakistan]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20240722045306/https://ecp.gov.pk/storage/files/1/Kpk-Na/s1.jpg|archive-date=2024-07-22|access-date=2025-11-06}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهو 187 چورس ڪلوميٽر جي ايراضي تي پکڙيل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=https://www.pbs.gov.pk/sites/default/files/population/2023/tables/table_1_kp_districts.pdf|title=Table 1 – Area, Population by Sex, Sex Ratio, Population Density, Urban Population, Household Size and Annual Growth Rate, Census 2023, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa|date=2023|publisher=Pakistan Bureau of Statistics|access-date=2025-11-06}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:لورا تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:ايبٽ آباد ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:ايبٽ آباد ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>2rgjifb1fbchyfpzerzlo8wrffzmaut</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:لورا تعلقو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>88442</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394145</id>
      <parentid>348836</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:28:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394145</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95" sha1="ip985qqjyixrexfnansicsaxuv839tt" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:ايبٽ آباد ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:ايبٽ آباد ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>ip985qqjyixrexfnansicsaxuv839tt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>90678</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394112</id>
      <parentid>386620</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:06:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* رڪن ملڪ */</comment>
      <origin>394112</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197644" sha1="5o75n3x4venm5wjigk04tqbojx62hdv" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}


{{Infobox country 
| name                   = '''قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه'''
| linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}

'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ جي استعمال]]، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون تنظيمون|تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[برطانيه]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون|جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريباتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسينٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سليمان ٻيٽ|سولومن آئيلينڊ]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:اهي ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن ۾ قائم بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}

[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:برطانوي سلطنت]]</text>
      <sha1>5o75n3x4venm5wjigk04tqbojx62hdv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394113</id>
      <parentid>394112</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:10:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* رڪن ملڪ */</comment>
      <origin>394113</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197620" sha1="a46h9berxgmz85jtmobxxfjh5njzrzj" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}


{{Infobox country 
| name                   = '''قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه'''
| linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}

'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ جي استعمال]]، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون تنظيمون|تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[برطانيه]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون|جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:اهي ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن ۾ قائم بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

== حوالا ==
{{حوالا}}

[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:برطانوي سلطنت]]</text>
      <sha1>a46h9berxgmz85jtmobxxfjh5njzrzj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394114</id>
      <parentid>394113</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:12:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394114</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197607" sha1="pef26enywti7d7j4k4dq3kohzntfzfc" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}


{{Infobox country 
| name                   = '''قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه'''
| linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}

'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ جي استعمال]]، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون تنظيمون|تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[برطانيه]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون|جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:اهي ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن ۾ قائم بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>pef26enywti7d7j4k4dq3kohzntfzfc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394115</id>
      <parentid>394114</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:14:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:اهي ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]; added [[Category:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394115</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197605" sha1="quhymfmsi89xuwc4qpz1dk14y5wbyth" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}


{{Infobox country 
| name                   = '''قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه'''
| linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}

'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ جي استعمال]]، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون تنظيمون|تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[برطانيه]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون|جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن ۾ قائم بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>quhymfmsi89xuwc4qpz1dk14y5wbyth</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394116</id>
      <parentid>394115</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:15:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:لنڊن ۾ قائم بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]; added [[Category:لنڊن]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394116</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197554" sha1="pkj8pn63poi752nlcchrh4zsqxzztjs" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}


{{Infobox country 
| name                   = '''قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه'''
| linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}

'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ جي استعمال]]، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون تنظيمون|تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[برطانيه]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون|جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن]]
[[زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>pkj8pn63poi752nlcchrh4zsqxzztjs</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394117</id>
      <parentid>394116</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:15:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل تنظيمون]]; added [[Category:1949ع]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394117</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197520" sha1="rm6zgbjekrkgi3a5k77lr5n2jf17gvs" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}


{{Infobox country 
| name                   = '''قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه'''
| linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}

'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ جي استعمال]]، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون تنظيمون|تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[برطانيه]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون|جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن]]
[[زمرو:1949ع]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>rm6zgbjekrkgi3a5k77lr5n2jf17gvs</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394118</id>
      <parentid>394117</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:20:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394118</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197428" sha1="8rd7j02vy2yo6olz234hcokdrbbi4fv" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن]]
[[زمرو:1949ع]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>8rd7j02vy2yo6olz234hcokdrbbi4fv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394119</id>
      <parentid>394118</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:21:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]; added [[Category:آسٽريليا جي سياست]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394119</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197417" sha1="ruvqmaom9fw6lj0ey1raq1jrqtp9qoj" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن]]
[[زمرو:1949ع]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>ruvqmaom9fw6lj0ey1raq1jrqtp9qoj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394120</id>
      <parentid>394119</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:22:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>added [[Category:آسٽريليا جي تاريخ]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394120</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197463" sha1="sz8ne5y3nw2t6vzrnyorgsocqajrdh5" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن]]
[[زمرو:1949ع]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي تاريخ]]</text>
      <sha1>sz8ne5y3nw2t6vzrnyorgsocqajrdh5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394121</id>
      <parentid>394120</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:23:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:ڪئناڊا جي سياسي تاريخ]]; added [[Category:ڪئنيڊا جي سياست]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394121</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197452" sha1="b6p8kldh2d676joiew74tnbhzw6tpdv" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن]]
[[زمرو:1949ع]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي تاريخ]]</text>
      <sha1>b6p8kldh2d676joiew74tnbhzw6tpdv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394122</id>
      <parentid>394121</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:24:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:نيوزيلينڊ جي سياسي تاريخ]]; added [[Category:نيوزي لينڊ جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394122</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197468" sha1="cml21nana9n2tvr6hdus8htrujwbum8" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن]]
[[زمرو:1949ع]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:نيوزي لينڊ جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي تاريخ]]</text>
      <sha1>cml21nana9n2tvr6hdus8htrujwbum8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394123</id>
      <parentid>394122</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:25:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]; added [[Category:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياست]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394123</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197457" sha1="f1wursthxknozwc77rzv1u1qdmrc8zw" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن]]
[[زمرو:1949ع]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:نيوزي لينڊ جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي تاريخ]]</text>
      <sha1>f1wursthxknozwc77rzv1u1qdmrc8zw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394124</id>
      <parentid>394123</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:27:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394124</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197428" sha1="94uli3yen3g9d3tow7wrmeqakazd123" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ قومون| ]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:لنڊن]]
[[زمرو:1949ع]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:نيوزي لينڊ جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياست]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]


[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي تنظيمون]]

[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي تاريخ]]</text>
      <sha1>94uli3yen3g9d3tow7wrmeqakazd123</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394125</id>
      <parentid>394124</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:37:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394125</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197463" sha1="tvf47ne3gpm92imv25wedsey4ux47nk" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''Commonwealth of Nations'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 رڪن ملڪ]] شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا اهم ادارا [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] آهن، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو، ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن]]، جيڪا رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان علاوه، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري [[تنظيمون]] پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ [[نوآبادياتي خاتمو|نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي]] دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران [[بالفور اعلان]] وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. 1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران [[هاءِ ڪميشن]] قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪ ٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. [[دولتِ مشترڪه منشور]] انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ [[قانون جي حڪمراني]] کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

[[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه]] [[چارلس ٽيون]] آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي رياستون]] سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن [[جمهوري رياستون]] آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:نيوزي لينڊ جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل ادارا ۽ تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]</text>
      <sha1>tvf47ne3gpm92imv25wedsey4ux47nk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394136</id>
      <parentid>394125</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:04:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394136</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="197404" sha1="9xri1wzw3013cbqanfawfk3s2pr780r" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = Commonwealth Flag 2013.svg
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = Commonwealth of Nations logo.svg
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#موجوده رڪن ملڪ|موجوده رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|[[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ]]}}
{{Legend|lightblue|[[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]&lt;br /&gt;۽ [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = [[دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ|56 ملڪ]]
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[لنڊن]]، [[برطانيه]]
| languages_type         = [[ڪاريگري ٻولي]]
| languages              = [[انگريزي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]]
| leader_name1           = [[چارلس ٽيون]]
| leader_title2          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل|سيڪريٽري جنرل]]
| leader_name2           = [[شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي]]
| leader_title3          = [[دولتِ مشترڪه چيئر اِن آفيس|چيئر اِن آفيس]]
| leader_name3           = [[لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ]]
| established_event1     = [[بالفور اعلان]]
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]]
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = [[لنڊن اعلان]]
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''&lt;small&gt;Commonwealth&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;of Nations&lt;/small&gt;'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ 56 رڪن ملڪ شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اها ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا مکيه ادارا دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن، جيڪي رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي، آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان سواء، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري تنظيمون پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس دوران بالفور اعلان وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. سال 1949ع جي لنڊن اعلان تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کانپوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران هاءِ ڪميشن قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه منشور انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه چارلس ٽيون آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهي رياستون سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن جمهوري ملڪ آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبٿ ٻين (برطانيا)|ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ٻيٽ تي مشتمل ملڪ|ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:نيوزي لينڊ جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل ادارا ۽ تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]</text>
      <sha1>9xri1wzw3013cbqanfawfk3s2pr780r</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394137</id>
      <parentid>394136</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:11:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394137</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="196978" sha1="qoyvn1onpiktzc3l0m1y4f5zw2fe34t" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = 
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = 
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|موجوده رڪن ملڪ}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ}} 
{{Legend|lightblue|برطانيه جا سمنڊ پار علائقا&lt;br /&gt;۽ تاج جا انحصاري علائقا}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = 56 ملڪ
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = مارلبرو هائوس، [[لنڊن]]، [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
| languages_type         = ڪاريگري ٻولي
| languages              = [[انگريزي ٻولي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = سربراهه
| leader_name1           = چارلس ٽيون
| leader_title2          = سيڪريٽري جنرل
| leader_name2           = شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي
| leader_title3          = چيئر اِن آفيس
| leader_name3           = لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ
| established_event1     = بالفور اعلان
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = لنڊن اعلان
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016ع
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''&lt;small&gt;Commonwealth&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;of Nations&lt;/small&gt;'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ 56 رڪن ملڪ شامل آهن. انهن مان گهڻا ملڪ ان جي اڳوڻي وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا اڳوڻا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اها ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا مکيه ادارا دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن، جيڪي رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي، آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان سواء، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري تنظيمون پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس دوران بالفور اعلان وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. سال 1949ع جي لنڊن اعلان تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کانپوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران هاءِ ڪميشن قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه منشور انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه چارلس ٽيون آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهي رياستون سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن جمهوري ملڪ آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبٿ ٻين (برطانيا)|ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ٻيٽ تي مشتمل ملڪ|ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:نيوزي لينڊ جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل ادارا ۽ تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]</text>
      <sha1>qoyvn1onpiktzc3l0m1y4f5zw2fe34t</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394138</id>
      <parentid>394137</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:15:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394138</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="196965" sha1="m1d4po667zeh91s4iutvvr78wqpvr7y" xml:space="preserve">{{Short description|برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪندڙ سياسي انجمن}}
{{Infobox country 
| name    = قومن جي دولتِ مشترڪه&lt;br&gt;
Commonwealth of Nations | linking_name           = دولتِ مشترڪه قومون
| image_flag             = 
| symbol_type            = لوگو
| image_symbol           = 
| symbol_width           = 150px
| image_map              = File:Commonwealth of Nations.svg
| image_map_size         = 300px
| map_caption            = {{Legend|#000081|موجوده رڪن ملڪ}}
{{Legend|#F57A00|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ|اڳوڻا رڪن ملڪ}} 
{{Legend|lightblue|برطانيه جا سمنڊ پار علائقا&lt;br /&gt;۽ تاج جا انحصاري علائقا}}
| org_type               = رضاڪارانه انجمن&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/our-charter|title=Commonwealth Charter|date=6 June 2013|access-date=5 March 2019}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| membership_type        = رڪن ملڪ
| membership             = 56 ملڪ
| admin_center_type      = هيڊ ڪوارٽر
| admin_center           = مارلبرو هائوس، [[لنڊن]]، [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
| languages_type         = ڪاريگري ٻولي
| languages              = [[انگريزي ٻولي]]
| p1                     = British Empire
| flag_p1                = Flag of the United Kingdom.svg
| leader_title1          = سربراهه
| leader_name1           = چارلس ٽيون
| leader_title2          = سيڪريٽري جنرل
| leader_name2           = شرلي ايورڪور بوچوي
| leader_title3          = چيئر اِن آفيس
| leader_name3           = لااُولي ليواتيا شمڊٽ
| established_event1     = بالفور اعلان
| established_date1      = 19 نومبر 1926ع
| established_event2     = ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع
| established_date2      = 11 ڊسمبر 1931ع
| established_event3     = لنڊن اعلان
| established_date3      = 28 اپريل 1949ع
| area_km2               = 29,958,050
| population_estimate    = 2,418,964,000
| population_estimate_year = 2016ع
| population_density_km2 = 75
| official_website       = {{URL|https://thecommonwealth.org/|thecommonwealth.org}}
}}
'''دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' (''&lt;small&gt;Commonwealth&lt;/small&gt; &lt;small&gt;of Nations&lt;/small&gt;'')، جنهن کي اڪثر '''برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه''' يا رڳو '''دولتِ مشترڪه''' سڏيو ويندو آهي،&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |last=Srinivasan |first=Krishnan |title=The rise, decline, and future of the British Commonwealth |date=2008 |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan |isbn=978-0-230-20367-9}}&lt;/ref&gt; هڪ [[بين الاقوامي تنظيم]] آهي، جنهن ۾ 56 رڪن ملڪ شامل آهن. ان مان گهڻي ملڪن جا اڳوڻا وجود [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا علائقا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=About Us |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us |access-date=25 March 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اها ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ [[انگريزي ٻولي|انگريزي ٻوليءَ]] جي استعمال، گڏيل ثقافتي ورثي ۽ تاريخي لاڳاپن جي ذريعي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍيل آهن. هن تنظيم جا مکيه ادارا دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ، جيڪو بين الحڪومتي لاڳاپن تي ڌيان ڏئي ٿو ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه فائونڊيشن، جيڪي رڪن ملڪن جي غير سرڪاري تنظيمن جي وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏئي ٿي، آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;the commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/191247/the_commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان سواء، ڪيتريون ئي بين الحڪومتي ۽ شهري تنظيمون پڻ سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان سرڪاري طور تسليم ٿيل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعات ويهين صديءَ جي پهرئين اڌ ۾ نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي دوران ٿي، جڏهن برطانوي سلطنت جي مختلف علائقن کي وڌندڙ خودمختياري حاصل ٿيڻ لڳي. 1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس دوران بالفور اعلان وسيلي '''برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون''' جو تصور سامهون آيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=November 1926 |title=Imperial Conference 1926 Inter-Imperial Relations Committee Report, Proceedings and Memoranda |url=https://www.foundingdocs.gov.au/resources/transcripts/cth11_doc_1926.pdf}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ 1931ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع وسيلي برطانيه ان کي قانوني حيثيت ڏني. سال 1949ع جي لنڊن اعلان تحت [[ڀارت]] کي جمهوريت بڻجڻ باوجود تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي اجازت ڏني وئي، جنهن کانپوءِ ٻين ملڪن به اهو رستو اختيار ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 1949 |title=The London Declaration |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/181889/34293/35468/214257/londondeclaration.htm}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Our history |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/history |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ڪجهه رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور تي [[گڏيل بادشاھت]] ۾، مخصوص سهولتن جا حقدار هوندا آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي وٽ سفارتخانن بدران هاءِ ڪميشن قائم ڪندا آهن.

رڪن ملڪن تي هڪٻئي ڏانهن ڪا قانوني ذميواري لاڳو ناهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ئي ملڪن جي وچ ۾ اقتصادي، عدالتي ۽ فوجي انتظام موجود آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه منشور انهن جي گڏيل قدرن جهڙوڪ [[جمهوريت]]، [[انساني حق]] ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني کي بيان ڪري ٿو،&lt;ref name=&quot;charter&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Charter |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/charter |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن کي هر چئن سالن بعد ٿيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون وسيلي به فروغ ڏنو ويندو آهي.

دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه چارلس ٽيون آهي. هو 15 رڪن ملڪن جو بادشاهه آهي، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهي رياستون سڏجن ٿيون، جڏهن ته ٻيا 36 رڪن جمهوري ملڪ آهن ۽ 5 ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا بادشاهه آهن.

جيتوڻيڪ چارلس ٽيون پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبٿ ٻين (برطانيا)|ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي تي فائز ٿيو، پر هي عهدو فني طور موروثي ناهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=The Commonwealth|url=https://www.victorialeague.co.uk/our-commonwealth}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت ننڍين رياستن تي مشتمل آهي، جڏهن ته [[ٻيٽ تي مشتمل ملڪ|ننڍيون ٻيٽياتي ترقي پذير رياستون]] ان جي ڪل رڪنيت جو لڳ ڀڳ اڌ حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

====رڪن ملڪ====

{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ هن وقت 56 خودمختيار رياستون شامل آهن. گهڻا رڪن ملڪ اڳوڻي [[برطانوي سلطنت]] جا حصا رهيا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪجهه ملڪ اهڙا به آهن، جيڪي برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيا هئا پر پوءِ به تنظيم ۾ شامل ٿيا، جهڙوڪ [[موزمبيق]]، [[روانڊا]]، [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]].

رڪن ملڪ هي آهن:

{{div col|3}}* [[انٽيگوا ۽ باربودا]]
* [[آسٽريليا]]
* [[بنگلاديش]]
* [[بارباڊوس]]
* [[بيليز]]
* [[بوٽسوانا]]
* [[برونائي]]
* [[ڪيمرون]]
* [[ڪينيڊا]]
* [[قبرص]]
* [[ڊومينيڪا]]
* [[اسواتيني]]
* [[فجي]]
* [[گيبون]]
* [[گيمبيا]]
* [[گھانا]]
* [[گريناڊا]]
* [[گيانا]]
* [[ڀارت]]
* [[جميڪا]]
* [[ڪينيا]]
* [[ڪريبتي]]
* [[ليسوٿو]]
* [[ملاوي]]
* [[ملائيشيا]]
* [[مالديپ]]
* [[مالٽا]]
* [[موريشس]]
* [[موزمبيق]]
* [[نميبيا]]
* [[نائورو]]
* [[نيوزيلينڊ]]
* [[نائيجيريا]]
* [[پاڪستان]]
* [[پاپوا نيو گني]]
* [[روانڊا]]
* [[سينٽ ڪٽس ۽ نيوس]]
* [[سينٽ لوسيا]]
* [[سينٽ ونسنٽ ۽ گريناڊائنز]]
* [[ساموا]]
* [[سيشلز]]
* [[سيرا ليون]]
* [[سنگاپور]]
* [[سولومن آئلينڊز]]
* [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]]
* [[سري لنڪا]]
* [[تنزانيا]]
* [[بهاماس]]
* [[ٽوگو]]
* [[ٽونگا]]
* [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]]
* [[ٽوالو]]
* [[يوگنڊا]]
* [[گڏيل بادشاھت]]
* [[وانوآتو]]
* [[زيمبيا]]
{{div col end}}

==تاريخ==
===تصوري شروعات===

{{Main|برطانوي سلطنت|برطانوي سلطنت جي تاريخ نگاري}}

[[File:British Commonealth of Nations handwritten on Anglo-Irish Treaty draft.png|thumb|upright=1.3|1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] جو مسودو، جنهن ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; کي ڪٽي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; هٿ سان لکيو ويو آهي]]
[[File:CommonwealthPrimeMinisters1944.jpg|thumb|upright=1.3|1944ع واري [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ پنجن رڪنن جا وزيراعظم: (کاٻي کان ساڄي) [[وليئم ليون ميڪنزي ڪنگ]] (ڪينيڊا)، [[يان سموٽس]] ([[ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي يونين|ڏکڻ آفريڪا]])، [[ونسٽن چرچل]] (برطانيه)، [[پيٽر فريزر]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[جان ڪرٽن]] (آسٽريليا)]]

[[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] 1959ع ۾ [[ڪينيڊا]] کي پنهنجي [[ڪينيڊا ڏينهن|ڊومينين ڏينهن]] واري خطاب ۾ نشاندهي ڪئي ته 1 جولاءِ 1867ع تي [[ڪينيڊا جي وفاق]] جو قيام &quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر پهرئين خودمختيار ملڪ&quot; جي پيدائش هو. هن اعلان ڪيو: &quot;تنهنڪري اهو آزاد رياستن جي انهيءَ رضاڪارانه انجمن جي شروعات به آهي، جيڪا اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي نالي سان سڃاتي وڃي ٿي.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite video| title=Queen Elizabeth's 1959 Dominion Day Message| publisher=CBC| url=http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| date=1 July 1959| location=Government House (Rideau Hall), Ottawa| people=Queen Elizabeth II| access-date=9 November 2015| archive-date=20 November 2015| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20151120073412/http://www.cbc.ca/archives/entry/queen-elizabeths-1959-dominion-day-message| url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

18 جنوري 1884ع تي ئي [[لارڊ روزبري]]، جڏهن [[ايڊيليڊ]] (ڏکڻ آسٽريليا) جي دوري تي هو، تڏهن هن بدلجندڙ برطانوي سلطنت بابت، جنهن جون ڪجهه نوآباديون وڌيڪ خودمختيار بڻجي رهيون هيون، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح استعمال ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=18 January 1884 |url=https://liberalhistory.org.uk/timeline-event/on-this-day-18-1-1884/ |access-date=18 March 2025 |website=Journal of Liberal History |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=History – Though the modern Commonwealth is just 60 years old, the idea took root in the 19th century |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100619122654/http://thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/history/ |archive-date=19 June 2010 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانوي ۽ نوآبادياتي وزيراعظمن جون گڏجاڻيون 1887ع کان باقاعدگي سان ٿينديون رهيون، جنهن جو نتيجو 1911ع ۾ [[شاهي ڪانفرنس]]ن جي قيام جي صورت ۾ نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Mole|first=Stuart|title=Seminars for statesmen': the evolution of the Commonwealth summit|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|date=September 2004|volume=93|issue=376|pages=533–546 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000289128|s2cid=154616079|doi-access= | issn = 0035-8533 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last1=Kendle |first1=J.E. |author-link1=John Kendle |year=1967 |title=The Colonial and Imperial Conferences, 1887-1911: A Study in Imperial Organization |journal=The American Historical Review |url=https://academic.oup.com/ahr/article-abstract/74/3/999/91500 |series=Imperial Studies |volume=XXVIII |publication-place=[[London]] |publisher=[[Longman]]s for the [[Royal Commonwealth Society]] |asin=B0000CO3QA |doi=10.1086/ahr/74.3.999 |url-access=subscription }}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه شاهي ڪانفرنسن مان ترقي ڪندي وجود ۾ آئي. هڪ خاص تجويز [[يان سموٽس]] 1917ع ۾ پيش ڪئي، جڏهن هن &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; جو اصطلاح گهڙيو ۽ 1919ع جي [[پيرس امن ڪانفرنس]] دوران &quot;مستقبل جي آئيني لاڳاپن ۽ بنيادي جوڙجڪ جي نئين ترتيب&quot; جو تصور پيش ڪيو، جنهن ۾ برطانيه سان گڏ ڊومينينن جا نمائندا به شامل هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=McDonald |first=Simon |date=12 March 2018 |title=Commonwealth Heads Of Government Meeting 2018 |url=https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230601223841/https://civilservice.blog.gov.uk/2018/03/12/commonwealth-heads-of-government-meeting-2018/ |archive-date=1 June 2023 |access-date=1 June 2023 |website=civilservice.blog.gov.uk |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;F.S. Crafford, ''Jan Smuts: A Biography'' (2005) p. 142&lt;/ref&gt;

هن اصطلاح کي پهريون ڀيرو 1921ع جي [[اينگلو-آئرش معاھدي]] ۾ قانوني سڃاڻپ ملي، جڏهن [[آئرش آزاد رياست]] جي پارليامينٽ جي ميمبرن جي حلف نامي ۾ &quot;برطانوي سلطنت&quot; جي جاءِ تي &quot;برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومون&quot; لکيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|title=Peace by ordeal: an account, from first-hand sources of the negotiation and signature of the Anglo-Irish Treaty 1921|last=Pakenham|first=Frank|author-link=Frank Pakenham, 7th Earl of Longford|year=1972|publisher=Sidgwick and Jackson|isbn=978-0-283-97908-8}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ باضابطه قيام===

1926ع جي [[بالفور اعلان]] ۾، جيڪو [[1926ع جي شاهي ڪانفرنس]] دوران منظور ٿيو، برطانيه ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن ان ڳالهه تي اتفاق ڪيو ته اهي:

{{blockquote|
&quot;برطانوي سلطنت اندر خودمختيار برادريون آهن، حيثيت ۾ هڪ ٻئي جي برابر آهن، پنهنجن اندروني يا خارجي معاملن جي ڪنهن به پهلوءَ ۾ هڪ ٻئي جا ماتحت ناهن، پر تاج سان گڏيل وفاداريءَ ذريعي ڳنڍيل آهن ۽ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا آزاد رڪن آهن.&quot;
}}

هن اعلان سان &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; جو اصطلاح سرڪاري طور اختيار ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=green&gt;{{cite book|title=Historical Dictionary of European Imperialism|year=1991|publisher=Greenwood Publishing Group|location=Westport, Connecticut|isbn=978-0-313-26257-9|pages=297–298|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=uyqepNdgUWkC&amp;pg=PA297}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي اصول 1931ع جي [[ويسٽ منسٽر قانون 1931ع]] ذريعي قانوني صورت اختيار ڪري ويا. هي قانون ڪينيڊا، آئرش آزاد رياست ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا تي بنا ڪنهن اضافي منظوريءَ جي لاڳو ٿيو، جڏهن ته آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ [[نيوفائونڊلينڊ جي ڊومينين]] کي ان جي توثيق ڪرڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/Geo5/22-23/4/enacted Statute of Westminster] as enacted&lt;/ref&gt;

نيوفائونڊلينڊ اقتصادي بحران سبب قانون جي توثيق نه ڪئي. 1934ع ۾ هن رضاڪارانه طور پنهنجي خودمختيار حڪومت معطل ڪئي ۽ انتظام ٻيهر لنڊن جي سڌي سنڀال هيٺ آيو. بعد ۾ 1949ع ۾ نيوفائونڊلينڊ ڪينيڊا جو ڏهون صوبو بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |author-last1=Webb|author-first1= Jeff A. |date=January 2003 |title=The Commission of Government, 1934–1949 |url=http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141220171931/http://www.heritage.nf.ca/law/commission_gov.html |archive-date=20 December 2014 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=Newfoundland and Labrador Heritage |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ ترتيبوار 1942ع ۽ 1947ع ۾ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون جي توثيق ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite Legislation AU|Cth|act|sowaa1942379|Statute of Westminster Adoption Act 1942}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=August 2007 |title=New Zealand Sovereignty: 1857, 1907, 1947, or 1987? |url=http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110522195038/http://www.parliament.nz/en-NZ/ParlSupport/ResearchPapers/9/1/8/00PLLawRP07041-New-Zealand-sovereignty-1857-1907-1947-or-1987.htm |archive-date=22 May 2011 |access-date=29 July 2011 |work=New Zealand Parliament |publisher=}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڏکڻ آفريڪا لاءِ پڻ 1934ع ۾ [[يونين جي حيثيت وارو قانون، 1934ع]] ۽ [[شاهي انتظامي اختيارن ۽ مُهرن وارو قانون، 1934ع]] منظور ڪيا ويا، جن ذريعي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي خودمختيار حيثيت جي تصديق ڪئي وئي ۽ ويسٽ منسٽر قانون کي ڏکڻ آفريڪا جي قانون جو حصو بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|last1=Dugard|first1=John|last2=Bethlehem|first2=Daniel|last3=Plessis|first3=Max du|last4=Katz|first4=Anton|title=International law: a South African perspective|date=2005|publisher=Juta|location=Lansdowne, South Africa|isbn=978-0-7021-7121-5|page=19}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ٻي عالمي جنگ===

[[File:British Commonwealth and allies.jpg|thumb|ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران تيار ڪيل هڪ اشتهاري پوسٽر، جنهن ۾ برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ، [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا جي ڪالوني|ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ [[برطانوي هندستان]] جي سپاهين کي ڏيکاريو ويو آهي]]

{{Main|ٻي عالمي جنگ ۾ برطانوي سلطنت}}

دولتِ مشترڪه ۽ برطانوي سلطنت [[ٻي عالمي جنگ]] جي تقريباً هر وڏي محاذ تي سرگرم رهيون. جنگ دوران برطانيه، ڪينيڊا، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حڪومتن گڏجي [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه هوائي تربيت رٿا]] قائم ڪئي، جنهن تحت سلطنت ۽ ان جي ڊومينينن مان ايندڙ هوابازن کي تربيت ڏني ويندي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=28 September 2010 |title=History of the Creation of the British Commonwealth Air Training Plan |url=http://www.airmuseum.ca/bcatp.html |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20100928040820/http://www.airmuseum.ca:80/bcatp.html |archive-date=28 September 2010 |access-date=22 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth Air Training Plan Museum}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fact File : Commonwealth and Allied Forces |url=https://www.bbc.co.uk/history/ww2peopleswar/timeline/factfiles/nonflash/a6651218.shtml |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ ختم ٿيڻ کان فوراً پوءِ آسٽريليا، برطانيه، [[برطانوي هندستان]] ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي فوجن تي مشتمل [[برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه قبضا فوج]] جاپان ۾ مقرر ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=British Commonwealth Occupation Force 1945–52 |url=https://www.awm.gov.au/articles/atwar/bcof |access-date=7 June 2024 |website=Australian War Memorial}}&lt;/ref&gt; بعد ۾ اها ئي قوت [[ڪوريا ۾ برطانوي دولتِ مشترڪه فوجون]] قائم ڪرڻ جو بنياد بڻي.&lt;ref&gt;[[Jeffrey_Grey]], ''The Commonwealth Armies and the Korean War: An Alliance Study.'' Manchester University Press ND, 1990, {{ISBN|0719027705}}, 9780719027703, p. 110&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوآبادياتي خاتمو ۽ خودحڪومتي دور===

{{Main list|برطانيه کان آزادي حاصل ڪندڙ ملڪن جي فهرست}}

ٻي عالمي جنگ جي خاتمي کان پوءِ برطانوي سلطنت آهستي آهستي ختم ٿيڻ لڳي. ان جا گهڻا حصا آزاد ملڪن ۾ تبديل ٿي ويا، جيڪي يا ته [[دولتِ مشترڪه بادشاهتي ملڪ]] بڻيا يا جمهوري رياستون، ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن به رهيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot; /&gt;

اڄ به 14 اهڙا [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]] موجود آهن، جيڪي وڏي حد تائين خودحڪومتي آهن ۽ [[برطانيه]] سان ڪجهه آئيني ۽ سياسي لاڳاپا برقرار رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Supporting the Overseas Territories|url=https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|publisher=UK Government|access-date=8 November 2014|quote=There are 14 Overseas Territories which retain a constitutional link with the UK. .... Most of the Territories are largely self-governing, each with its own constitution and its own government, which enacts local laws. Although the relationship is rooted in four centuries of shared history, the UK government's relationship with its Territories today is a modern one, based on mutual benefits and responsibilities. The foundations of this relationship are partnership, shared values, and the right of the people of each territory to choose to freely choose whether to remain a British Overseas Territory or to seek an alternative future.|archive-date=6 October 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141006161120/https://www.gov.uk/government/policies/protecting-and-developing-the-overseas-territories|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[لنڊن اعلان]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه جي نالي مان لفظ &quot;برطانوي&quot; هٽايو ويو، جيئن تنظيم جي بدلجندڙ نوعيت ۽ وسيع دائري جي عڪاسي ٿي سگهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:8&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=26 April 2009 |title=Celebrating thecommonwealth@60 |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090804012916/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/191086/34493/187367/celebrating_thecommonwealth_60/ |archive-date=4 August 2009 |access-date=29 July 2011 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ميانمار|برما]] (1989ع کان پوءِ سرڪاري نالو ميانمار) ۽ [[عدن جي ڪالوني|عدن]] (هاڻي [[يمن]] جو حصو) اهي واحد علائقا هئا، جيڪي جنگ جي زماني ۾ برطانوي نوآباديون هئا پر آزادي حاصل ڪرڻ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل نه ٿيا.

اڳوڻيون برطانوي [[تحفظ هيٺ رياست]]ون ۽ [[ليگ آف نيشنز جي مينڊيٽ]] وارا علائقا، جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن نه بڻيا، تن ۾ [[مصر]] (1922ع ۾ آزاد)، [[عراق]] (1932ع)، [[اردن|ٽرانس جورڊن]] (1946ع)، [[فلسطين جو مينڊيٽ]] (جنهن جو هڪ حصو 1948ع ۾ اسرائيل بڻيو)، [[سوڊان]] (1956ع)، [[برطانوي صومالي لينڊ]] (جنهن 1960ع ۾ اڳوڻي [[اطالوي صومالي لينڊ]] سان ملي [[صومالي جمهوريه]] قائم ڪئي)، [[ڪويت]] (1961ع)، [[بحرين]] (1971ع)، [[عمان]] (1971ع)، [[قطر]] (1971ع) ۽ [[گڏيل عرب امارات]] (1971ع) شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Chris Cook and John Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).&lt;/ref&gt;

جنگ کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] پنهنجي 1953ع جي ڪرسمس واري نشري خطاب ذريعي هڪ نئون مقصد ڏنو. هن دولتِ مشترڪه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;هڪ مڪمل طور نئون تصور، جيڪو انساني روح جي اعليٰ خوبين ــ دوستي، وفاداري، آزادي ۽ امن جي خواهش ــ تي ٻڌل هجي.&quot;
}}

قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Brian Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'' (Oxford UP, 2009), p. 102.&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به برطانيه جو خزانو ايترو ڪمزور ٿي چڪو هو جو اهو [[آمريڪا]] کان آزاد ٿي عالمي سطح تي اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪرڻ جي قابل نه رهيو. ان کان علاوه دفاعي ۽ مالي ذميوارين جي گهٽجڻ [[جوزف چيمبرلين]] جي ويهين صدي جي شروعات واري ان تصور کي به ڪمزور ڪري ڇڏيو، جنهن ۾ شاهي واپاري ترجيحات، گڏيل دفاع ۽ سماجي ترقي تي ٻڌل عالمي سلطنت جو خواب شامل هو.

ساڳئي وقت عالمي معاملن ۾ [[برطانيه]] جو بين الاقوامي ڪردار به محدود ٿيندو ويو، خاص طور تي [[ڀارت]] ۽ [[سنگاپور]] جي آزادي کان پوءِ.&lt;ref&gt;Harrison, ''Seeking a Role: The United Kingdom 1951—1970'', p. 103.&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪرشنن سرينواسن]] جي راءِ موجب، برطانوي سياستدانن کي شروعات ۾ اميد هئي ته دولتِ مشترڪه برطانوي اثر ۽ حيثيت کي برقرار رکندي، پر وقت سان گڏ سندن جوش گهٽجندو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين ۾ برطانوي پاليسين تي وڌندڙ تنقيد ۽ غير سفيد فام رڪن ملڪن مان وڏي پيماني تي لڏپلاڻ سبب عوامي راءِ به تبديل ٿيڻ لڳي (پڻ ڏسو: [[دولتِ مشترڪه مهاجر برادري]]).&lt;ref&gt;Krishnan Srinivasan,  &quot;Nobody's Commonwealth? The Commonwealth in Britain's post-imperial adjustment.&quot; ''Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 44.2 (2006): 257–269.&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيه ۾ &quot;نئين دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''New Commonwealth'') جو اصطلاح خاص طور تي 1960ع ۽ 1970ع واري ڏهاڪن ۾ عام ٿيو. هي اصطلاح تازو نوآبادياتي حڪمراني کان آزاد ٿيندڙ، گهڻو ڪري غير سفيد فام ۽ ترقي پذير ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪيو ويندو هو. اهو اصطلاح اڪثر انهن ملڪن مان ٿيندڙ لڏپلاڻ بابت سياسي بحثن ۾ به استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last=Hennessy |first=Patrick |date=5 June 2004 |title=Blair calls for quotas on immigrants from 'New Commonwealth' |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203727/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/uknews/1463759/Blair-calls-for-quotas-on-immigrants-from-New-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=19 August 2018 |access-date=6 April 2018 |newspaper=[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي پاسي، [[برطانيه]] ۽ 1945ع کان اڳ وارا ڊومينين غير رسمي طور &quot;پراڻي دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''Old Commonwealth'') يا وڌيڪ مخصوص طور &quot;سفيد دولتِ مشترڪه&quot; (''White Commonwealth'') سڏبا هئا، جيڪو اصطلاح اڳوڻين &quot;سفيد ڊومينينن&quot; جي حوالي سان استعمال ٿيندو هو.&lt;ref&gt;
{{cite journal |last=de Villiers |first=Marq |year=1998 |title=Review of ''The Ambiguous Champion: Canada and South Africa in the Trudeau and Mulroney Years'' by Linda Freeman |journal=International Journal |volume=53 |issue=4 |pages=783–785 : 783 |doi=10.2307/40203728 |issn=0020-7020 |jstor=40203728}};
{{cite journal |last=Miles |first=Robert |year=2016 |title=The Racialization of British Politics |journal=Political Studies |volume=38 |issue=2 |pages=277–285 |doi=10.1111/j.1467-9248.1990.tb01493.x |issn=0032-3217 |s2cid=145691345}}
&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;merriman&quot;&gt;{{cite encyclopedia |title=British Empire |encyclopedia=Europe since 1914: Encyclopedia of the Age of War and Reconstruction |publisher=Charles Scribner's Sons |location=Detroit |date=2006 |editor1-last=Merriman |editor1-first=J. |volume=1 |pages=45 |isbn=978-0-684-31366-5 |oclc=68221208 |editor2-last=Winter |editor2-first=J.}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه جون جمهوري رياستون}}

18 اپريل 1949ع تي [[آئرلينڊ]] پنهنجي پارليامينٽ پاران منظور ڪيل [[ريپبلڪ آف آئرلينڊ ايڪٽ 1948ع]] مطابق سرڪاري طور جمهوري رياست بڻجي ويو. ان سان گڏ هن رسمي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان به نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |last1=Whyte |first1=J. H. |author-link1=John Henry Whyte |editor1-last=Hill |editor1-first=J. R. |title=A New History of Ireland |volume=VII: Ireland, 1921–84 |date=2010 |publisher=Oxford University Press |isbn=978-0-19-161559-7 |page=277 (footnote 20) |chapter-url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |access-date=6 August 2019 |chapter=Economic crisis and political cold war, 1949-57 |quote=The Republic of Ireland Act, 1948...repealed the external relations act, and provided for the declaration of a republic, which came into force on 18 Apr. 1949, when Ireland left the commonwealth. |archive-date=15 February 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230215111753/https://books.google.com/books?id=PfFXarIhGqEC&amp;pg=PA277 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

جيتوڻيڪ آئرلينڊ 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي جي شروعات کان دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال طور شامل نه رهيو هو، پر ٻيا ڊومينين اهڙا هئا جيڪي دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپا برقرار رکندي جمهوري رياستون بڻجڻ چاهيندا هئا. اهو مسئلو اپريل 1949ع ۾ [[1949ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس|لنڊن ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزيراعظمن جي اجلاس]] دوران اهم بحث جو موضوع بڻيو.

[[لنڊن اعلان]] تحت، جيڪو [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] تيار ڪيو هو، [[ڀارت]] اتفاق ڪيو ته جڏهن اهو جنوري 1950ع ۾ جمهوري رياست بڻجندو، تڏهن به دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو ۽ برطانوي بادشاهه کي:

{{Quotation|
&quot;آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي آزاد انجمن جي علامت ۽ ان حيثيت سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot;
}}

تسليم ڪندو.

اهو ٻڌڻ کان پوءِ [[جارج ڇهون|بادشاهه جارج ڇهون]]، [[وي. ڪي. ڪرشنا مينن]] کي مذاقي انداز ۾ چيو:

{{Quotation|
&quot;ته پوءِ مان هاڻي صرف 'ان حيثيت سان' سربراهه بڻجي ويو آهيان.&quot;
}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=19 February 2010 |title=Staying loyal to George |url=http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110515213125/http://www.indianexpress.com/news/staying-loyal-to-george/581730/0 |archive-date=15 May 2011 |access-date=13 April 2011 |work=Indian Express}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بعد ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ڪجهه ٻيا ملڪ جڏهن جمهوري رياستون بڻيا ته انهن تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو انتخاب ڪيو، جڏهن ته [[گيانا]]، [[ماريشس]] ۽ [[ڊومينيڪا]] جهڙا ملڪ جمهوري رياست بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن رهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|title=Barbados to remove Queen Elizabeth as head of state|work=BBC News|date=16 September 2020|access-date=18 March 2021|archive-date=11 March 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210311160055/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-latin-america-54174794|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڀارت جي پهرين وزيراعظم [[جواهر لال نهرو]] 16 مئي 1949ع تي، [[ڀارت جي آئين ساز اسيمبلي]] جي بحثن دوران، لنڊن اعلان کان ٿوري ئي دير پوءِ چيو:&lt;ref name=&quot;debate-cad&quot;&gt;{{cite web |date=16 May 1949 |title=Constituent Assembly Debates (India) |url=http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131109080743/http://parliamentofindia.nic.in/ls/debates/vol8p1.htm |archive-date=9 November 2013 |access-date=25 July 2014 |publisher=[[Parliament of India]] |location=[[Delhi]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

{{cquote|
اسان واضح طور دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ان ڪري شامل آهيون جو اسان سمجهون ٿا ته اهو اسان لاءِ ۽ انهن عالمي مقصدن لاءِ فائديمند آهي جن کي اسان اڳتي وڌائڻ چاهيون ٿا. دولتِ مشترڪه جا ٻيا ملڪ به اسان کي ان ۾ برقرار ڏسڻ چاهين ٿا، ڇو ته اهي ان کي پنهنجي لاءِ به فائديمند سمجهن ٿا. اهو گڏيل طور سمجهيو وڃي ٿو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل قومن جي مفاد ۾ آهي، ۽ انهيءَ سبب اهي ان جو حصو بڻجن ٿيون.

ساڳئي وقت اهو مڪمل طور واضح ڪيو ويو آهي ته هر ملڪ پنهنجي رستي تي هلڻ لاءِ مڪمل آزاد آهي. ممڪن آهي ته هو ڪڏهن دولتِ مشترڪه کان الڳ به ٿي وڃن.

پر ان صورت کان سواءِ، جو تنظيم جي خراب پهلوئن کي ختم ڪيو وڃي، دنيا ۾ ڀلائي آڻڻ لاءِ اهڙي تعاون واري تنظيم کي برقرار رکڻ، ان کي ٽوڙڻ کان بهتر آهي.
}}

[[لنڊن اعلان]] کي اڪثر جديد دولتِ مشترڪه جي شروعاتي نقطي طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي. ڀارت جي مثال کان پوءِ ٻيا ڪيترائي ملڪ جمهوري رياستون يا پنهنجي جدا بادشاهن واريون [[آئيني بادشاهتون]] بڻيا.

جيتوڻيڪ ڪجهه ملڪن ساڳئي بادشاهه کي برقرار رکيو جيڪو [[برطانيه]] جو بادشاهه هو، پر وقت سان گڏ انهن جون بادشاهتون مختلف رستن تي ترقي ڪنديون ويون ۽ جلد ئي (يا اڳ ئي) برطانوي بادشاهت کان عملي طور آزاد ٿي ويون.

هر بادشاهتي رياست ۾ بادشاهه کي هڪ الڳ قانوني شخصيت طور ڏٺو ويندو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ساڳيو فرد ڪيترن ئي بادشاهتي رياستن جو بادشاهه هوندو آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Bogdanor&quot;&gt;{{citation| last=Bogdanor| first=Vernon| author-link=Vernon Bogdanor| title=The Monarchy and the Constitution| publisher=Oxford University Press| date=12 February 1998| location=New York| page=288| url=https://books.google.com/books?id=mN6SzMefot4C&amp;q=%22overseas+realms%22&amp;pg=PA289| isbn=978-0-19-829334-7}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;HCUK&quot;&gt;{{Cite journal|last=High Commissioner in United Kingdom |title=Royal Style and Titles |journal=Documents on Canadian External Relations &gt; Royal Style and Titles |volume=18 |issue=2 |date=24 November 1952 |url=http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498 |id=DEA/50121-B-40 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20111123050633/http://www.international.gc.ca/department/history-histoire/dcer/details-en.asp?intRefid=3498| archive-date=23 November 2011| df=dmy}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal| last=Smy| first=William A.| title=Royal titles and styles| journal=The Loyalist Gazette| volume=XLVI| issue=1| year=2008| url=http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| archive-url=https://archive.today/20120711172851/http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb1372/is_1_46/ai_n29437278/| url-status=dead| archive-date=11 July 2012| access-date=3 January 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Toporoski&quot;&gt;{{cite web| title=The Invisible Crown| publisher=Monarchy Canada| url=http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| author-last1=Toporoski|author-first1= Richard| access-date=20 April 2008| archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080209220704/http://www.monarchist.ca/mc/invisibl.htm| archive-date=9 February 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===يورپ کي شامل ڪرڻ بابت تجويزون===

ان دور ۾ جڏهن [[جرمني]] ۽ [[فرانس]]، [[بيلجيم]]، [[اٽلي]]، [[لگزمبرگ]] ۽ [[نيدرلينڊز]] سان گڏجي ان منصوبي تي ڪم ڪري رهيا هئا جيڪو بعد ۾ [[يورپي يونين]] بڻيو، ۽ نوان آزاد ٿيل آفريقي ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي رهيا هئا، تڏهن اهڙا نوان خيال سامهون آيا جن جو مقصد [[برطانيه]] کي معاشي معاملن ۾ اڪيلو ٿيڻ کان بچائڻ هو.

ان وقت برطانيه جي دولتِ مشترڪه سان واپار جو مقدار يورپ سان ٿيندڙ واپار کان چار ڀيرا وڌيڪ هو. 1956ع ۽ 1957ع ۾ وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] جي حڪومت هڪ ''&quot;پلان جي&quot;'' (Plan G) تي غور ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد هڪ يورپي آزاد واپاري علائقو قائم ڪرڻ هو، جڏهن ته ساڳئي وقت دولتِ مشترڪه جي ملڪن کي حاصل ترجيحي حيثيت به برقرار رکڻي هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=David |last = Gowland |title = Britain and European Integration Since 1945: On the Sidelines |url = https://books.google.com/books?id=dvt-AgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |year=2009 |publisher=Routledge|page=46|display-authors=etal|isbn=978-1-134-35452-8 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;James R. V. Ellison, &quot;Perfidious Albion? Britain, Plan G and European Integration, 1955–1956&quot;, ''Contemporary British History'' (1996) 10#4 pp 1–34.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;Martin Schaad, &quot;Plan G – A &quot;Counterblast&quot;? British Policy Towards the Messina Countries, 1956&quot;, ''Contemporary European History'' (1998) 7#1 pp 39–60.&lt;/ref&gt;

1956ع جي [[سوئيز بحران]] دوران، نوآبادياتي بيچيني ۽ عالمي سياسي ڇڪتاڻ جي پسمنظر ۾، فرانس جي وزيراعظم [[گي مولي]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[اينٿني ايڊن]] کي تجويز ڏني ته ٻنهي ملڪن کي هڪ [[فرانڪو-برطانوي اتحاد]] ۾ شامل ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/expat/expatfeedback/4202596/France-offered-to-merge-with-UK-in-1950s.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|title=France offered to 'merge' with UK in 1950s|first=Laura|last=Clout|date=15 January 2007|work=The Telegraph}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن اها تجويز قبول نه ڪئي وئي، تڏهن مولي هڪ ٻي تجويز پيش ڪئي ته فرانس دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿي وڃي، ۽ ممڪن طور تي [[آئرلينڊ]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل هڪ گڏيل شهريت جو انتظام به قائم ڪيو وڃي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last1=Thomson |first1=Mike |date=15 January 2007 |title=UK – When Britain and France nearly married |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/6261885.stm |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090123072141/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/6261885.stm |archive-date=23 January 2009 |access-date=12 September 2016 |website=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

بهرحال، [[سوئيز بحران]] جي خاتمي سان اهي سڀ تجويزون ۽ خيال آهستي آهستي ختم ٿي ويا ۽ عملي شڪل اختيار نه ڪري سگهيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Frank|author-last1= Heinlein|title=British Government Policy and Decolonisation, 1945–63: Scrutinising the Official Mind|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=ZAFeAgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA143|year=2013|publisher=Taylor &amp; Francis|pages=137–43|isbn=978-1-135-28441-1}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===وسعت ۽ عالمي لاڳاپا===

[[File:Prime Minister Keir Starmer attends CHOGM Summit in Samoa -Day 2 (54091742846).jpg|thumb|2024ع ۾ [[ساموا]] ۾ ٿيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]]]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جو پهريون اهڙو رڪن جيڪو [[برطانوي سلطنت]] سان ڪنهن به آئيني لاڳاپي کان سواءِ شامل ٿيو، [[موزمبيق]] هو، جيڪو اڳ [[پورچوگالي موزمبيق]] جي نالي سان هڪ پورچوگالي نوآبادي هو. 1995ع ۾ پنهنجي پهرين جمهوري چونڊن کان پوءِ اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. ان جي رڪنيت [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] ۽ موجوده رڪنيتي اصولن کان به اڳ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]] دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيندڙ ٻيو اهڙو ملڪ بڻيو، جنهن جو برطانيا سان ڪو به آئيني تعلق نه هو. اهو اڳ [[روانڊا-يورونڊي]] نالي بيلجيم جي امانتي علائقي جو حصو هو ۽ [[پهرين عالمي جنگ]] تائين [[جرمن اوڀر آفريڪا]] جو ضلعو رهيو هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot; /&gt;

2022ع ۾ [[ٽوگو]] (اڳوڻو فرانسيسي امانتي علائقو) ۽ [[گيبون]] (اڳوڻي فرانسيسي نوآبادي) به دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيا، جيتوڻيڪ اهي ڪڏهن به برطانوي حڪمراني هيٺ نه رهيا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot; /&gt;

ٽوگو جي پرڏيهي وزير [[روبرٽ ڊوسي]] چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شموليت سان ٽوگو جي شهرين کي [[انگريزي ٻولي]] سکڻ، تعليم ۽ ثقافتي موقعن مان فائدو حاصل ڪرڻ جا بهتر امڪان ملندا. ٽوگو خاص طور تي [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]] سان پنهنجا لاڳاپا مضبوط ڪرڻ چاهيو ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:2&quot;&gt;{{Cite news |last=Lawson |first=Alice |date=24 June 2022 |title=Togo sees Commonwealth entry as pivot to English-speaking world |url=https://www.reuters.com/world/africa/togo-sees-commonwealth-entry-pivot-english-speaking-world-2022-06-24/ |access-date=1 July 2022 |work=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

صرف 2024ع دوران ٽوگو ۽ برطانيا جي وچ ۾ واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو اضافو ٿيو. ملڪ ڀارت سان به واپاري لاڳاپا وڌائڻ جو خواهشمند هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Togo's Commonwealth Advantage: A Gateway to Investment and Growth |url=https://www.cweic.org/insights/interview-with-togo/ |access-date=2025-06-01 |website=CWEIC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Verma |first=Nidhi |date=6 March 2025 |editor-last=Paul |editor-first=Sonali |title=India fertiliser company in talks to buy phosphate from Togo, sources say |url=https://www.reuters.com/markets/deals/india-fertiliser-company-talks-buy-phosphate-togo-sources-say-2025-03-06/ |access-date=10 March 2025 |website=Reuters}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ٻئي طرف، [[گيبون]] کي آگسٽ 2023ع جي [[2023ع گيبون بغاوت]] کان پوءِ سيپٽمبر 2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه مان جزوي طور معطل ڪيو ويو. دولتِ مشترڪه جي وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ ملڪ کي نيون چونڊون ڪرائڻ لاءِ ٻه سال جو وقت ڏنو، ٻي صورت ۾ مڪمل معطلي تي غور ٿيڻ وارو هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Gabon partially suspended from the Commonwealth pending restoration of democracy |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230930044928/https://thecommonwealth.org/news/gabon-partially-suspended-commonwealth-pending-restoration-democracy |archive-date=30 September 2023 |access-date=1 October 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=20 September 2023 |title=Gabon partially suspended from Commonwealth after coup |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231004115135/https://www.bbc.com/news/world-africa-66861734 |archive-date=4 October 2023 |access-date=3 October 2023 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جولاءِ 2025ع ۾ صدارتي چونڊن کان پوءِ گيبون جي جزوي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |date=16 August 2025 |title=Commonwealth lifts Gabon's partial suspension following April presidential vote |url=https://www.africanews.com/2025/07/16/commonwealth-lifts-gabons-partial-suspension-following-april-presidential-vote/ |access-date=2025-08-08 |website=Africanews}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آمريڪا جي صدر [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] جي ٻئي دورِ حڪومت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه سان لاڳاپن ۾ ٻيهر دلچسپي ڏسڻ ۾ آئي. 2025ع ۾، [[روس جي يوڪرين تي حملي]] دوران، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]]، [[قبرص]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڪيئر اسٽارمر]] جي اڳواڻي هيٺ قائم ٿيندڙ يوڪرين نواز ''&quot;رضاڪار اتحاد&quot;'' (Coalition of the Willing) ۾ شامل ٿيا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Harris |first=Rob |date=11 March 2025 |title=Rubio says Ukraine may need to do 'difficult things' to get peace deal |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/europe/peacekeeper-nations-including-australia-to-meet-on-ukraine-20250311-p5lij4.html?ref=rss |access-date=12 March 2025 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:03&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |last=Wong |first=Vicky |date=2 March 2025 |title=Starmer: Coalition of willing to guarantee Ukraine peace |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/articles/c9vygkzkkrvo |access-date=2 March 2025 |website=BBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Liboreiro |first=Jorge |date=2025-04-02 |title=Everything we know about the 'Coalition of the Willing' for Ukraine |url=https://www.euronews.com/my-europe/2025/04/02/everything-we-know-so-far-about-the-coalition-of-the-willing-for-ukraine |access-date=2025-04-06 |website=euronews}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=14 March 2025 |title=Prime Minister confirms he will join world leaders in 'coalition of the willing' phone call |url=https://www.rnz.co.nz/news/political/544860/prime-minister-confirms-he-will-join-world-leaders-in-coalition-of-the-willing-phone-call |access-date=14 March 2025 |website=RNZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2025ع ۾ ڪينيڊا جي [[لبرل پارٽي آف ڪينيڊا]] جي قيادت لاءِ چونڊ مهم دوران، آخرڪار ڪامياب ٿيندڙ [[مارڪ ڪارني]] آمريڪا جي جارحاڻي قدمن جي پسمنظر ۾ [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]] سان لاڳاپا وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪرڻ جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |last1=Tasker |first1=John Paul |title=Canada races to revive Commonwealth ties with its U.S. relationship on shaky ground |url=https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20250311064841/https://www.cbc.ca/news/politics/canada-commonwealth-canzuk-1.7468363 |archive-date=11 March 2025 |access-date=11 March 2025 |publisher=CBC}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال [[ڊونلڊ ٽرمپ]] به اظهار ڪيو ته آمريڪا دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن يا ''&quot;شريڪ رڪن&quot;'' بڻجڻ ۾ دلچسپي رکي سگهي ٿو، جڏهن ڪجهه برطانوي اخبارن ۾ اهڙي امڪان بابت خبرون شايع ٿيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=21 March 2025 |title=Donald Trump suggests US could join British Commonwealth |url=https://www.newsweek.com/donald-trump-suggests-us-could-join-british-commonwealth-2048679 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=Newsweek}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آسٽريليا-برطانوي قانوندان [[جيفري رابرٽسن]]، آمريڪا جي عالمي ذميوارين کان پري ٿيڻ ۽ [[گڏيل قومن]] جي محدود اثر بابت لکندي، راءِ ڏني ته جيڪڏهن مثال طور [[چين]] [[تائيوان]] تي حملو ڪري، ته [[يورپ]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ، [[جاپان]]، [[برازيل]] ۽ [[انڊونيشيا]] گڏجي شايد [[گڏيل قومن جي سلامتي ڪائونسل]] کان به وڌيڪ اثرائتو ڪردار ادا ڪري سگهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Robertson |first=Geoffrey |date=2025-04-18 |title=Trump has declared war on the world order, so nations like Australia must step up |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/north-america/trump-has-declared-war-on-the-world-order-so-nations-like-australia-must-step-up-20250418-p5lsql.html?dicbo=v2-t66SDOG |access-date=2025-04-20 |website=The Sydney Morning Herald}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[غزه جنگ]] دوران [[برطانيا]]، [[آسٽريليا]]، [[ڪينيڊا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ]]، [[ناروي]] سان گڏجي اسرائيلي حڪومت جي ٻن وزيرن تي پابنديون لاڳو ڪيون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Julian |first=Hana Levi |date=2025-06-11 |title=British Commonwealth, Norway Impose Sanctions on 2 Israeli Government Ministers |url=https://www.jewishpress.com/news/global/uk/british-commonwealth-norway-impose-sanctions-on-2-israeli-government-ministers/2025/06/11/ |access-date=2025-07-10 |website=The Jewish Press}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2026ع ۾، جڏهن [[مارڪ ڪارني]] وچولي قوتن (Middle Powers) کي گڏ ڪرڻ جي ڪوشش ڪري رهيو هو، تڏهن [[اينٽيگوا ۽ باربوڊا]] جي وزيراعظم [[گيسٽن برائون]] ''[[ڊيلي ٽيليگراف]]'' ۾ لکيل هڪ مضمون ۾ دليل ڏنو ته دولتِ مشترڪه اهڙي اتحاد لاءِ هڪ مثالي بنياد فراهم ڪري سگهي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Browne |first=Gaston |date=9 March 2026 |title=The Commonwealth can be the basis for Mark Carney’s alliance of middle powers |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2026/03/09/commonwealth-basis-mark-carneys-alliance-middle-power/ |access-date=16 March 2026 |work=The Telegraph}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڍانچو==

===دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا سربراھ}}

[[File:Queen Elizabeth II official portrait for 1959 tour (retouched) (cropped) (3-to-4 aspect ratio).jpg|thumb|[[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]]، دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي عرصي تائين خدمت ڪندڙ سربراهه، 70 سالن تائين هن عهدي تي فائز رهي.]]

[[لنڊن اعلان]] جي اصولن موجب [[چارلس ٽيون]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه|سربراهه]] آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;commonwealth 090922&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;&gt;{{cite web |last=Patterson |first=Percival |author-link=P.J. Patterson |date=24 October 2007 |title=Report of the Committee on Commonwealth Membership |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090426044116/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/GFSR.asp?NodeID=174532 |archive-date=26 April 2009 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، جڏهن بادشاهه يا راڻي وفات ڪري ٿي ته تاج جو وارث پاڻمرادو دولتِ مشترڪه جو نئون سربراهه نٿو بڻجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Head of the Commonwealth |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930063803/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150757/head_of_the_commonwealth/ |archive-date=30 September 2006 |access-date=29 June 2008 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان باوجود، اپريل 2018ع ۾ ٿيل اجلاس دوران دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن اتفاق ڪيو ته [[پرنس چارلس]] پنهنجي ماءُ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻيون]] جي وفات کان پوءِ هن عهدي جو وارث ٿيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |url=https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |title=Prince Charles to be next head of Commonwealth |last=Walker |first=Peter |date=20 April 2018 |work=The Guardian |access-date=3 December 2018 |archive-date=22 April 2021 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210422065938/https://www.theguardian.com/uk-news/2018/apr/20/prince-charles-next-head-commonwealth-queen |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي عهدو علامتي نوعيت جو آهي ۽ آزاد رڪن ملڪن جي رضاڪارانه اتحاد جي نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot;/&gt; دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت، يعني 36 رڪن، جمهوريه آهن، جڏهن ته پنج رڪن ملڪن جا پنهنجا جدا جدا بادشاهي خاندان آهن: [[برونائي]]، [[ايسواٽيني]]، [[ليسوٿو]]، [[ملائيشيا]] ۽ [[ٽونگا]].

===دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جي حڪومتي سربراھن جي گڏجاڻي }}

تنظيم جو سڀ کان اهم فيصلو ڪندڙ فورم هر ٻن سالن کان پوءِ ٿيندڙ [[دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جو اجلاس]] (CHOGM) آهي، جنهن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جي حڪومتن جا سربراهه]]، جن ۾ وزيراعظم، صدر ۽ ٻيا قومي اڳواڻ شامل هوندا آهن، گڏ ٿي گڏيل دلچسپيءَ وارن معاملن تي بحث ڪندا آهن.

هي اجلاس اڳوڻن [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي گڏجاڻين]]، [[شاهي ڪانفرنسن]] ۽ [[نوآبادياتي ڪانفرنسن]] جو تسلسل آهي، جن جي شروعات 1887ع ۾ ٿي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

ان کان علاوه ناڻي، قانون، صحت ۽ ٻين شعبن جي وزيرن جون به باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ٿينديون آهن. جيڪي رڪن ملڪ پنهنجي ذميوارين ۾ پوئتي هوندا آهن، انهن کي وزارتي گڏجاڻين يا CHOGM ۾ نمائندا موڪلڻ جي دعوت نه ڏني ويندي آهي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Report of the CCM&quot; /&gt;

جنهن ملڪ جو سربراهه CHOGM جي ميزباني ڪري ٿو، اهو [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو چيئرمين اِن آفيس]] (CIO) سڏبو آهي ۽ ايندڙ اجلاس تائين ان عهدي تي برقرار رهندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |date=22 August 2013 |title=How we are run |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201114191058/https://thecommonwealth.org/about-us/how-we-are-run |archive-date=14 November 2020 |access-date=17 November 2020 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ}}

[[File:Marlborough House.jpg|thumb|[[مارلبرو هائوس]]، لنڊن، جيڪو [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] جو هيڊڪوارٽر ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جو اهم بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي.]]

1965ع ۾ قائم ڪيل [[دولتِ مشترڪه سيڪريٽريٽ]] دولتِ مشترڪه جو بنيادي بين الحڪومتي ادارو آهي، جيڪو رڪن حڪومتن ۽ ملڪن جي وچ ۾ مشاورت ۽ سهڪار کي هٿي ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/ |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201116192301/https://thecommonwealth.org/ |archive-date=16 November 2020 |access-date=1 June 2023 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي ادارو گڏيل طور سڀني رڪن حڪومتن آڏو جوابده آهي. دولتِ مشترڪه کي [[گڏيل قومن جي جنرل اسيمبلي]] ۾ هڪ مبصر اداري جي حيثيت سان سيڪريٽريٽ نمائندگي ڪري ٿو.

سيڪريٽريٽ دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس، وزارتي گڏجاڻيون، صلاح مشوري واريون گڏجاڻيون ۽ فني بحث مباحثا منظم ڪري ٿو. اهو پاليسي سازي ۾ مدد، فني صلاحون، گهڻ طرفي رابطا ۽ سماجي توڙي معاشي ترقي لاءِ فني سهڪار فراهم ڪري ٿو. ان سان گڏوگڏ دولتِ مشترڪه جي بنيادي سياسي قدرن جي واڌاري ۾ به ڪردار ادا ڪري ٿو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Paxton, 1978&quot;&gt;Cook and Paxton, ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (1978) part 3.&lt;/ref&gt;

سيڪريٽريٽ جو سربراهه [[دولتِ مشترڪه جو سيڪريٽري جنرل]] هوندو آهي، جنهن کي CHOGM طرفان وڌ ۾ وڌ ٻن چئن سالن وارن مدتن لاءِ چونڊيو ويندو آهي. هن جي مدد لاءِ ٻه نائب سيڪريٽري جنرل هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth appoints two Deputy Secretaries-General to advance strategic priorities and delivery |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/news/commonwealth-appoints-two-deputy-secretaries-general-advance-strategic-priorities-and-delivery |access-date=2026-05-30 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

موجوده سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي اييورڪر بوچوي]] آهن، جيڪي [[گھانا]] سان تعلق رکن ٿيون. هنن [[پيٽريشيا اسڪاٽلينڊ]] جي جاءِ والاري آهي.

پهريون سيڪريٽري جنرل [[آرنولڊ سمٿ]] (ڪينيڊا) هو، جنهن 1965ع کان 1975ع تائين خدمتون سرانجام ڏنيون. ان کان پوءِ [[شريڌت رامڦال]] (گايانا)، [[ايميڪا اينياڪو]] (نائيجيريا)، [[ڊان ميڪنن]] (نيوزيلينڊ) ۽ [[ڪماليش شرما]] (ڀارت) هن عهدي تي فائز رهيا.

===دولتِ مشترڪه شهريت ۽ هاءِ ڪمشنر===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ شھري|ھاء ڪمشنر (ڪامن ويلٿ)}}

[[File:The Gambia High Commission in New Delhi.jpg|thumb|[[نئين دهلي]] ۾ [[گيمبيا]] جو هاءِ ڪميشن]]

ڪجهه رڪن ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي خاص حق فراهم ڪندا آهن. برطانيا ۽ خاص طور تي [[ڪيريبين]] جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي ملڪ ۾ رهندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين کي ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق ڏين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal |last=Belton |first=Kristy A. |date=2 January 2019 |title=Muddy waters: citizenship and the right to vote in the Commonwealth Caribbean migratory context |url=https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526 |journal=Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics |volume=57 |issue=1 |pages=93–122 |doi=10.1080/14662043.2019.1545526}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا سميت ڪجهه ملڪ دولتِ مشترڪه جي شهرين لاءِ شهريت حاصل ڪرڻ يا مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ بابت ترجيحي پاليسيون به رکن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Prove you have right of abode in the UK |url=https://www.gov.uk/right-of-abode/commonwealth-citizens |access-date=2 June 2024 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

شروعاتي دور ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جا ملڪ هڪ ٻئي لاءِ &quot;پرڏيهي&quot; نه سمجهيا ويندا هئا، ڇاڪاڻ ته سندن شهري [[برطانوي رعيت]] شمار ٿيندا هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Dale |first=William |date=July 1982 |title=Is the Commonwealth an International Organisation? |journal=International and Comparative Law Quarterly |volume=31 |issue=3 |pages=451–73}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري ٻين رڪن ملڪن کان قونصلر مدد پڻ حاصل ڪري سگهن ٿا. مثال طور، جيڪڏهن ڪنهن غير دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪ ۾ سندن ملڪ جو سفارتي مشن موجود نه هجي ته برطانوي سفارتخانا ۽ قونصل خانا مدد فراهم ڪري سگهن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |year=2013 |title=Support for British nationals abroad: a guide |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/224126/FCOBritsAbroadA4_0713xx.pdf |page=5}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===عدالتي نظام===
[[File:London - Judicial Committee of the Privy Council 02.jpg|thumb|[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] ڪيترن ئي دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن لاءِ اعليٰ ترين اپيل عدالت آهي.]]

[[پرائيوي ڪائونسل جي عدالتي ڪميٽي]] 14 دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي آخري اپيل واري عدالت آهي، جن ۾ [[ڪُڪ ٻيٽ]] ۽ [[نيوئي]] به شامل آهن، جيڪي [[نيوزيلينڊ جي سلطنت]] سان لاڳاپيل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Practice direction 1 |url=https://www.jcpc.uk/procedures/practice-direction-01.html |access-date=8 January 2024 |publisher=The Judicial Committee of the Privy Council}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پئسفڪ ٻيٽن جا ڪيترائي ملڪ پنهنجي عدالتن لاءِ ٻين دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جا جج مقرر ڪندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Dziedzic |first=Anna |date=4 April 2022 |title=When judging meets development: foreign judges on Pacific courts |url=https://devpolicy.org/when-judging-meets-development-foreign-judges-on-pacific-courts-20220404/}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===فوجي تعاون===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي ھٿياربند ريجمينٽٽن جي فھرست|ڪامن ويلٿ  جي انفنٽري ريجمينٽٽن جوي فھرست}}

[[File:Exercise Bersama Lima 18 PHOTEX 2.jpg|thumb|[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] جي گڏيل فوجي مشق دوران جنگي جهاز]]

دولتِ مشترڪه جا شهري [[برطانوي هٿياربند فوج]] ۾ ڀرتي ٿيڻ جا اهل آهن. برطانوي فوج موجب، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جا سپاهي هميشه فوج جو اهم ۽ قابلِ قدر حصو رهيا آهن&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Nationality and Commonwealth |url=https://jobs.army.mod.uk/how-to-join/can-i-apply/nationality/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=British Army}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ برطانيا ۾ مستقل رهائش اختيار ڪرڻ چاهيندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه فوجي اهلڪارن لاءِ ويزا فيسون ختم ڪيون ويون.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Visa fees scrapped for Non-UK Service Personnel |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/visa-fees-scrapped-for-non-uk-service-personnel |access-date=2025-09-22 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فائيو پاور ڊفينس ارينجمينٽس]] آسٽريليا، ملائيشيا، نيوزيلينڊ، سنگاپور ۽ برطانيا وچ ۾ هڪ دفاعي شراڪتداري آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Citation |title=On the Establishment of the Five Power Defence Arrangements |date=21 October 2015 |work=The Five Power Defence Arrangements at Forty |pages=24–35}}&lt;/ref&gt;

====گورکا====
[[گورکا]] سپاهي، جيڪي [[نيپال]] سان تعلق رکن ٿا (جيڪو دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن ناهي)، ڊگهي عرصي کان برطانوي فوج ۽ ڪيترن دولتِ مشترڪه ملڪن جي فوجن ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏيندا رهيا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Taylor |first=Claire |date=12 June 2009 |title=Gurkhas: Terms and Conditions of Service |url=https://researchbriefings.files.parliament.uk/documents/SN04671/SN04671.pdf |access-date=9 June 2024 |publisher=UK Parliament}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي [[گورکا بريگيڊ]] جي صورت ۾ برطانوي فوج، [[گورکا رجمنٽون (ڀارت)]] جي صورت ۾ ڀارتي فوج، [[برونائي جي شاهي هٿياربند فوج]] جي [[گورکا ريزرو يونٽ]] ۽ [[سنگاپور پوليس فورس]] جي [[گورکا ڪنٽينجنٽ]] ۾ خدمتون سرانجام ڏين ٿا.
برونائي جي گورکا ريزرو يونٽ جا گهڻا ميمبر اڳ برطانوي فوج يا سنگاپور پوليس جا اڳوڻا اهلڪار هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |last=Ethirajan |first=Anbarasan |date=27 August 2023 |title=Agnipath scheme: The pain of Nepal's Gurkhas over Indian army's new hiring plan |url=https://www.bbc.com/news/world-asia-india-66603133 |access-date=9 June 2024 |work=BBC News}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=18 October 2022 |title=The Gurkha Regiments Explained |url=https://www.gwt.org.uk/news/the-gurkha-regiments-explained/ |access-date=9 June 2024 |website=The Gurkha Welfare Trust}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==رڪنيت==

[[File:Commonwealth realms republics and monarchies.svg|275px|thumb|left|دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن ملڪ سندن سياسي حيثيت موجب ڏيکاريل آهن. دولتِ مشترڪه جون بادشاهتي سلطنتون نيري رنگ ۾، جمهوريائون گلابي رنگ ۾، جڏهن ته پنهنجن مقامي بادشاهتن وارا ملڪ سائي رنگ ۾ ڏيکاريل آهن.]]

===رڪنيت جا معيار===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ قومون جي رڪنيت لاء ڪرائيٽيريا }}

دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت جا معيار وقت سان گڏ مختلف دستاويزن جي بنياد تي ترقي ڪندا رهيا آهن. تنظيم جي بنيادي باني دستاويز [[Statute of Westminster 1931|اسٽيٽيوٽ آف ويسٽ منسٽر 1931ع]] موجب رڪنيت لاءِ ''ڊومينين'' حيثيت ضروري هئي.

1949ع جي [[لنڊن اعلان]] هن شرط ۾ تبديلي آندي ۽ جمهوري ملڪن يا مقامي بادشاهتن وارن ملڪن کي به رڪنيت جي اجازت ڏني وئي، بشرطيڪ اهي [[جارج ڇهون]] کي &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه&quot; تسليم ڪن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=de Smith|first=S.A.|date=July 1949|title=The London Declaration of the Commonwealth Prime Ministers, 28 April 1949|journal=The Modern Law Review|volume=12|issue=3|pages=351–354|jstor=1090506|author-link=Stanley Alexander de Smith|doi=10.1111/j.1468-2230.1949.tb00131.x|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1960ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ نوآبادياتي آزاديءَ جي لهر کان پوءِ انهن آئيني اصولن سان گڏ سياسي، معاشي ۽ سماجي اصول پڻ شامل ڪيا ويا. 1961ع ۾ فيصلو ڪيو ويو ته [[نسلي برابري]] جو احترام رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي هوندو. انهيءَ سبب [[ڏکڻ آفريڪا]] جي ٻيهر رڪنيت واري درخواست رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ ته جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ ان کي ٻيهر درخواست ڏيڻي پئي هئي.

1971ع جي [[سنگاپور اعلان]] ۾ سڀني رڪنن کي [[عالمي امن]]، [[آزادي]]، [[انساني حقن]]، [[برابري]] ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي اصولن سان وابستگي اختيار ڪرڻي پئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;/&gt;

تقريباً ٻن ڏهاڪن تائين انهن اصولن تي عمل ڪرائڻ لاءِ ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite journal|last=Williams |first=Paul D.|date=July 2005|title=Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth|journal=The Round Table|volume=94|issue=380|pages=381–391|doi=10.1080/00358530500174960|s2cid=154400556}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1991ع ۾ [[هراري اعلان]] جاري ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ رڪن ملڪن جي اڳواڻن کي سنگاپور اعلان جي اصولن تي عمل ڪرڻ، نوآبادياتي نظام جي خاتمي، [[سرد جنگ]] جي پڄاڻي ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۾ [[اپارتھائيڊ]] جي خاتمي جي حمايت ڪرڻ جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20040207030954/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=34457 |url-status=dead |archive-date=7 February 2004 |date=20 October 1991 |title=Harare Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

1995ع جي [[ملبروڪ دولتِ مشترڪه ايڪشن پروگرام]] تحت [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) قائم ڪيو ويو، جنهن کي اهو اختيار ڏنو ويو ته هو جاچي سگهي ته رڪن ملڪ هراري اعلان جي شرطن تي پورو لهن ٿا يا نه.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930122424/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/38125/cmag/|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group|access-date=29 July 2007|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ساڳئي سال هڪ بين الحڪومتي گروپ پڻ قائم ڪيو ويو جنهن رڪنيت جي مڪمل شرطن کي ترتيب ڏئي هڪ ضابطي ۾ آندو. 1997ع ۾ [[ايڊنبرا اعلان]] تحت سفارش ڪئي وئي ته مستقبل جا نوان رڪن &quot;عام اصول طور&quot; ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي رکن.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|title=The future of the modern Commonwealth: Widening vs. deepening?|access-date=29 July 2007|date=10 October 2005|first=Victoria|last=te Velde-Ashworth|publisher=Commonwealth Policy Studies Unit|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070722134850/http://www.cpsu.org.uk/downloads/future_aide.pdf|archive-date=22 July 2007}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ضابطن موجب رڪن ملڪن لاءِ هي شرطون مقرر ڪيون ويون:

* [[هراري اعلان]] جي اصولن کي قبول ڪرڻ ۽ انهن تي عمل ڪرڻ.
* مڪمل خودمختيار رياست هجڻ.
* [[چارلس ٽيون]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه جو سربراهه تسليم ڪرڻ.
* انگريزي ٻولي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رابطي جي بنيادي ٻولي طور قبول ڪرڻ.
* رڪنيت بابت عوامي خواهشن جو احترام ڪرڻ.&lt;ref name=&quot;The future of the modern Commonwealth&quot;/&gt;

2007ع جي دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس ۾ انهن شرطن جو ٻيهر جائزو ورتو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070313234502/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/157526/commonwealth_membership_in_focus_at_london_meeting.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 March 2007 |title=Commonwealth membership in focus at London meeting |access-date=29 July 2007 |date=6 December 2006 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نوان رڪن===
عام طور تي نون رڪنن لاءِ ڪنهن موجوده رڪن سان سڌي آئيني وابستگي هجڻ ضروري آهي. گهڻن حالتن ۾ اها وابستگي برطانوي نوآبادياتي ماضيءَ سبب هوندي آهي، پر ڪجهه ملڪن جا لاڳاپا ٻين رڪن ملڪن سان وڌيڪ ويجها آهن، جهڙوڪ:

* بنگلاديش – پاڪستان
* ساموا – نيوزيلينڊ
* پاپوا نيو گني – آسٽريليا
* سنگاپور – ملائيشيا

1995ع ۾ [[موزمبيق]] اهڙو پهريون ملڪ بڻيو جيڪو ڪنهن به آئيني وابستگي کان سواءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيو. انهيءَ واقعي کان پوءِ ئي ايڊنبرا اعلان ۽ موجوده رڪنيت جا ضابطا تيار ڪيا ويا.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times&quot; /&gt;

2009ع ۾ [[روانڊا]]، جيڪو اڳ بيلجيم ۽ جرمني جي حڪمراني هيٺ رهيو هو، دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;NYT admission&quot;&gt;{{cite news|last=Kron|first=Josh|title=Rwanda Joins British Commonwealth|url=https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|newspaper=The New York Times|date=28 November 2009|access-date=29 November 2009|archive-date=18 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210418031605/https://www.nytimes.com/2009/11/29/world/africa/29rwanda.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[دولتِ مشترڪه انساني حقن جي شروعات]] (CHRI) جي اعتراضن باوجود روانڊا کي &quot;غيرمعمولي حالتن&quot; تحت رڪنيت ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;New Times exceptional circumstance&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Conference on Rwanda's Commonwealth bid to be held|url=http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|newspaper=The New Times|date=3 August 2008|access-date=25 September 2015|archive-date=25 September 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150925133322/http://www.newtimes.co.rw/section/article/2008-08-03/40316/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2022ع ۾ اڳوڻيون فرانسيسي علائقا [[ٽوگو]] ۽ [[گيبون]] پڻ دولتِ مشترڪه جا رڪن بڻيا.&lt;ref name=&quot;:3&quot;&gt;{{cite news |last1=Turner |first1=Camilla |date=22 June 2022 |title=Togo and Gabon to become newest members of Commonwealth this week |newspaper=The Telegraph |url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |access-date=26 June 2022 |archive-date=27 June 2022 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220627070129/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/politics/2022/06/22/togo-gabon-become-newest-members-commonwealth-week/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن قومي ملڪ }}

[[File:Parliament Square 11 3 09 (3346753423).jpg|thumb|لنڊن جي [[پارليامينٽ اسڪوائر]] ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه ڏينهن]] تي رڪن ملڪن جا جهنڊا]]
[[File:Commonwealth flag Ottawa.jpg|thumb|[[اوٽاوا]] ۾ [[ڪينيڊا جي پارليامينٽ]] تي ڦڙڪندڙ دولتِ مشترڪه جو جهنڊو]]

دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ دنيا جي سڀني آباد براعظمن مان 56 ملڪ شامل آهن.&lt;ref&gt;Three Commonwealth countries also have long-standing claims to sovereignty in Antarctica...&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مان 33 ملڪ ننڍيون رياستون آهن، جڏهن ته 25 ننڍيون ٻيٽيا ترقي پذير رياستون آهن.

2023ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏيل آبادي لڳ ڀڳ 2.5 ارب هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot;&gt;{{Cite web |title=Fast Facts: The Commonwealth |url=https://production-new-commonwealth-files.s3.eu-west-2.amazonaws.com/s3fs-public/2023-01/Fast%20Facts%20on%20the%20Commonwealth.pdf |access-date=20 October 2024 |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

هي تنظيم [[ٽئين دنيا]] يا [[عالمي ڏکڻ]] سان لاڳاپيل ملڪن جو دنيا ۾ سڀ کان وڏو اتحاد آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Brandis |first=George |date=20 October 2024 |title=The King loves Australia but his next stop's the big one (and China will be watching) |url=https://www.smh.com.au/world/oceania/the-king-loves-australia-but-his-next-stop-s-the-big-one-and-china-will-be-watching-20241017-p5kj8q.html}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2023ع ۾ [[ڀارت]] 1.4 ارب آبادي سان دولتِ مشترڪه جو سڀ کان گهڻي آبادي وارو ملڪ هو، جڏهن ته [[ٽووالو]] تقريباً 12,000 ماڻهن سان سڀ کان ننڍو رڪن هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;:4&quot; /&gt;

===بقايادار رڪن===
&quot;بقايادار رڪن&quot; (Member in arrears) اها حيثيت آهي جيڪا انهن ملڪن لاءِ استعمال ڪئي ويندي آهي جيڪي پنهنجي رڪنيت جي مالي ادائگين ۾ پوئتي رهجي وڃن.

هي حيثيت اڳ ۾ &quot;خصوصي رڪنيت&quot; جي نالي سان سڃاتي ويندي هئي، پر بعد ۾ ان جو نالو تبديل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McIntyre|first=W. David|date=April 2008|title=The Expansion of the Commonwealth and the Criteria for Membership|journal=Round Table|volume=97|issue=395|pages=273–85|doi=10.1080/00358530801962089|s2cid=219623317}}&lt;/ref&gt;

في الحال دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ڪو به بقايادار رڪن موجود ناهي. آخري اهڙو ملڪ [[نائورو]] هو، جيڪو جون 2011ع ۾ ٻيهر مڪمل رڪنيت تي بحال ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.rnzi.com/pages/news.php?op=read&amp;id=61413|title=Nauru back as full Commonwealth member|access-date=26 July 2011|publisher=Radio New Zealand International|date=26 June 2011}}&lt;/ref&gt;

نائورو پنهنجي مالي حالتن موجب ڪڏهن مڪمل رڪنيت ۽ ڪڏهن خصوصي رڪنيت جي وچ ۾ تبديلي ڪندو رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/34786/nauru_accedes_to_full_membership_of_the_commonweal.htm|title=Nauru Accedes to Full Membership of the Commonwealth |access-date=30 January 2009|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|date=12 April 1999}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===رڪن ملڪن جي معيشت===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست نالي ماتر خام ملڪي پيداوار موجب}}

2019ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪن ملڪن جي گڏيل [[خام ملڪي پيداوار]] 9 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالرن کان وڌيڪ هئي، جنهن جو 78 سيڪڙو حصو چئن سڀ کان وڏين معيشتن وٽ هو: ڀارت (3.737 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، برطانيه (3.124 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر)، ڪينيڊا (1.652 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر) ۽ آسٽريليا (1.379 ٽريلين آمريڪي ڊالر).&lt;ref name=&quot;GDP IMF&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|title=World Economic Outlook Database|date=18 April 2017|publisher=[[International Monetary Fund]]|access-date=20 June 2017|archive-date=24 June 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170624044404/http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/weo/2017/01/weodata/weorept.aspx?pr.x=32&amp;pr.y=19&amp;sy=2015&amp;ey=2016&amp;scsm=1&amp;ssd=1&amp;sort=country&amp;ds=.&amp;br=1&amp;c=512%2C672%2C914%2C946%2C612%2C137%2C614%2C546%2C311%2C962%2C213%2C674%2C911%2C676%2C193%2C548%2C122%2C556%2C912%2C678%2C313%2C181%2C419%2C867%2C513%2C682%2C316%2C684%2C913%2C273%2C124%2C868%2C339%2C921%2C638%2C948%2C514%2C943%2C218%2C686%2C963%2C688%2C616%2C518%2C223%2C728%2C516%2C558%2C918%2C138%2C748%2C196%2C618%2C278%2C624%2C692%2C522%2C694%2C622%2C142%2C156%2C449%2C626%2C564%2C628%2C565%2C228%2C283%2C924%2C853%2C233%2C288%2C632%2C293%2C636%2C566%2C634%2C964%2C238%2C182%2C662%2C359%2C960%2C453%2C423%2C968%2C935%2C922%2C128%2C714%2C611%2C862%2C321%2C135%2C243%2C716%2C248%2C456%2C469%2C722%2C253%2C942%2C642%2C718%2C643%2C724%2C939%2C576%2C644%2C936%2C819%2C961%2C172%2C813%2C132%2C199%2C646%2C733%2C648%2C184%2C915%2C524%2C134%2C361%2C652%2C362%2C174%2C364%2C328%2C732%2C258%2C366%2C656%2C734%2C654%2C144%2C336%2C146%2C263%2C463%2C268%2C528%2C532%2C923%2C944%2C738%2C176%2C578%2C534%2C537%2C536%2C742%2C429%2C866%2C433%2C369%2C178%2C744%2C436%2C186%2C136%2C925%2C343%2C869%2C158%2C746%2C439%2C926%2C916%2C466%2C664%2C112%2C826%2C111%2C542%2C298%2C967%2C927%2C443%2C846%2C917%2C299%2C544%2C582%2C941%2C474%2C446%2C754%2C666%2C698%2C668&amp;s=NGDPD&amp;grp=0&amp;a=|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ===
{{see also|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن جا رڪن ملڪ#امڪاني رڪن}}

1997ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي سربراهن اتفاق ڪيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن بڻجڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندڙ ملڪ کي، عام اصول طور، ڪنهن موجوده دولتِ مشترڪه رڪن سان آئيني وابستگي هجڻ گهرجي؛ ان کي [[هراري اعلان]] ۾ بيان ڪيل دولتِ مشترڪه جي قدرن، اصولن ۽ ترجيحن تي عمل ڪرڻ گهرجي؛ ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي روايتن ۽ ضابطن کي قبول ڪرڻ گهرجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|title=New Criteria for Commonwealth Membership|work=thecommonwealth.org|date=23 August 2013|access-date=7 November 2013|archive-date=16 April 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140416182858/http://thecommonwealth.org/history-of-the-commonwealth/new-criteria-commonwealth-membership|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڏکڻ سوڊان]] جي سياستدانن دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ٿيڻ ۾ دلچسپي ظاهر ڪئي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|title=South Sudan Launches Bid to Join Commonwealth|work=gurtong.net|access-date=10 July 2011|archive-date=11 July 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170711061322/http://www.gurtong.net/ECM/Editorial/tabid/124/ctl/ArticleView/mid/519/articleId/5418/South-Sudan-Launches-Bid-to-Join-Commonwealth.aspx|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2006ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه جي هڪ سينيئر ذريعي چيو ته &quot;گهڻن ماڻهن [[اسرائيل]] جي دلچسپيءَ جو اندازو لڳايو آهي، پر ڪا به رسمي درخواست نه آئي آهي&quot;.&lt;ref name=Isr&gt;{{cite news|last=Alderson|first=Andrew|title=Israelis and Palestinians could join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1537176/Israelis-and-Palestinians-could-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=17 December 2006|access-date=29 November 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[اسرائيل]] ۽ [[فلسطين]] ٻئي رڪنيت لاءِ امڪاني اميدوار سمجهيا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=Isr/&gt;

صدر [[يحيٰ جامع]] آڪٽوبر 2013ع ۾ [[گيمبيا]] کي هڪ طرفي طور دولتِ مشترڪه مان ڪڍي ڇڏيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|title=Statement by Commonwealth Secretary-General Kamalesh Sharma on The Gambia|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=4 October 2013|access-date=6 October 2013|archive-date=1 May 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210501144316/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/statement-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma-gambia|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; پر [[2016ع گيمبيا صدارتي چونڊ|نئين چونڊيل]] صدر [[آداما بارو]] فيبروري 2018ع ۾ ملڪ کي ٻيهر تنظيم ۾ شامل ڪرايو.&lt;ref name=gambia/&gt;

ٻيا اهل درخواست ڏيندڙ اهي آباد [[برطانوي سامونڊي علائقا]]، [[تاج جا انحصاري علائقا]]، [[آسٽريليا جا ٻاهريان علائقا]] ۽ [[نيوزيلينڊ سان لاڳاپيل رياستون]] ٿي سگهن ٿا، جيڪڏهن اهي مڪمل طور آزاد رياستون بڻجن.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp;jsessionid=367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|title=States and Territories|website=15CCEM|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070929181918/http://www.15ccem.com/15CCEM/CCEM_MainContent.jsp%3Bjsessionid%3D367113CBDAC84B7DEAC85D1F77B477D0?pContentID=830&amp;p_applic=CCC&amp;pElementID=443&amp;pMenuID=171&amp;p_service=Content.show&amp;|archive-date=29 September 2007|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهڙين ڪيترين ئي عملدارين کي اڳ ئي دولتِ مشترڪه اندر سڌي نمائندگي حاصل آهي، خاص طور تي [[دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان]] وسيلي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Baldacchino|first=Godfrey|author-last2=Milne|author-first2=David|date=September 2006|title=Exploring sub-national island jurisdictions: An editorial introduction|journal=The Round Table|volume=95|issue=386|pages=487–502|doi=10.1080/00358530600929735|s2cid=154689097 |url=https://www.um.edu.mt/library/oar//handle/123456789/13927 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

اڳوڻا [[برطانوي قبضا]] به آهن جيڪي آزاد ملڪ نه بڻيا آهن. جيتوڻيڪ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] هاڻي چين جو حصو آهي، پر اهو دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪجهه ادارن ۾ اڃا به حصو وٺي ٿو، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، دولتِ مشترڪه ايسوسيئيشن آف ليجسليٽو ڪائونسل&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot; /&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن واري ڪميشن]] شامل آهن.

ٽنهي تاج جي انحصاري علائقن پنهنجي موجوده حيثيت کي غير اطمينان بخش قرار ڏنو آهي ۽ تبديلي لاءِ ڪوششون ڪيون آهن. 2012ع ۾ [[جرسي رياستون]] برطانيا جي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري کي چيو ته دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن کان درخواست ڪئي وڃي ته جرسي ۽ ٻين تاج جي انحصاري علائقن کي، ۽ اهڙن ٻين اعليٰ خودمختيار علائقن کي، شريڪ رڪنيت ڏيڻ تي غور ڪيو وڃي.

جرسي تجويز ڏني ته ان کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀني گڏجاڻين ۾ پاڻ نمائندگي ڪرڻ، بحثن ۽ طريقيڪار ۾ مڪمل شرڪت ڪرڻ، جتي لاڳاپيل هجي اتي ڳالهائڻ جو حق، ۽ مڪمل رڪنن سان ڳالهين ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جو موقعو ڏنو وڃي؛ پر وزارتي يا سربراهي گڏجاڻين ۾ ووٽ ڏيڻ جو حق نه هجي، ڇاڪاڻ ته اهو صرف مڪمل رڪنن لاءِ مخصوص آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from States of Jersey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|publisher=Chief Minister of Jersey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074134/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we22.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گرنسي رياستون]] ۽ [[آئل آف مين جي حڪومت]] به ساڳئي سال دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ مربوط لاڳاپن، سڌي نمائندگي ۽ دولتِ مشترڪه جي ادارن ۽ گڏجاڻين، بشمول سربراهي اجلاس، ۾ وڌيڪ شرڪت جي گهر ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=The role and future of the Commonwealth|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|publisher=House of Commons|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=6 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130206123019/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/11410.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|title=Written evidence from the States of Guernsey|url=https://publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|publisher=Policy Council of Guernsey|access-date=18 March 2013|archive-date=9 February 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130209074131/http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm201213/cmselect/cmfaff/114/114we18.htm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[آئل آف مين]] جي چيف منسٽر چيو ته &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه سان وڌيڪ ويجهو لاڳاپو ٻيٽ جي بين الاقوامي لاڳاپن لاءِ هڪ خوش آئند اڳڀرائي هوندي&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |date=23 November 2012 |title=Isle of Man welcomes report on Commonwealth future |url=http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130302143313/http://www.gov.im/lib/news/cso/isleofmanwelcome5.xml |archive-date=2 March 2013 |access-date=19 March 2013 |publisher=Isle of Man Government}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===معطلي===
{{Main|دولتِ مشترڪه قومن مان معطلي}}

رڪن ملڪن کي [[هراري اعلان]] جي &quot;سنگين يا لڳاتار ڀڃڪڙي&quot; جي صورت ۾، خاص طور تي جمهوري حڪومت برقرار رکڻ واري ذميواري ختم ڪرڻ تي، &quot;دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن&quot; مان معطل ڪري سگهجي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal |last=Colvile |first=Robert |date=July 2004 |title=A Place to Stand: the Problems and Potential of the Commonwealth Ministerial Action Group |journal=The Round Table |volume=93 |issue=375 |pages=343–53 |doi=10.1080/0035853042000249942|s2cid=153984328 |doi-access=free }}&lt;/ref&gt;

معطلي جو فيصلو [[دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ]] (CMAG) ڪندو آهي، جيڪو هراري اعلان جي امڪاني ڀڃڪڙين بابت باقاعده گڏجاڻيون ڪندو آهي. معطل رڪن دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڳواڻن ۽ وزيرن جي گڏجاڻين ۾ نمائندگي نٿا ڪن، جيتوڻيڪ اهي تنظيم جا رڪن رهندا آهن.

[[File:Robert Mugabe, 12th AU Summit, 090202-N-0506A-187.jpg|thumb|220x220px|[[زمبابوي]] کي [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي صدارت دوران دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪيو ويو، جنهن کان پوءِ ان تنظيم مان نڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو. موگابي جي اقتدار مان هٽڻ کان پوءِ زمبابوي ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.]]

[[نائيجيريا]] کي 11 نومبر 1995ع کان 29 مئي 1999ع تائين معطل ڪيو ويو، ڇاڪاڻ ته هن [[ڪين سارو-ويوا]] کي [[1995ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهي اجلاس]] کان ٿورو اڳ ڦاسي ڏني هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 1999|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table |volume=88 |issue=352|pages=547–567|doi=10.1080/003585399107758}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=October 2007|title=Twenty Commonwealth steps from Singapore to Kampala|journal=The Round Table|volume=96|issue=392|pages=555–563|doi=10.1080/00358530701625877|s2cid=154737836}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[پاڪستان]] ٻيو ملڪ هو، جنهن کي [[پرويز مشرف]] جي [[1999ع پاڪستاني فوجي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 18 آڪٽوبر 1999ع تي معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist) |date=January 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=353|pages=45–57|doi=10.1080/750459452|s2cid=219628879}}&lt;/ref&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سڀ کان ڊگهي معطلي 22 مئي 2004ع تي ختم ٿي، جڏهن ملڪ جي آئين جي بحالي کان پوءِ پاڪستان جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram |first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2004|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=375|pages=311–42|doi=10.1080/0035853042000249933|s2cid=219627311}}&lt;/ref&gt;

پاڪستان کي ٻيهر، هن ڀيري مختصر عرصي لاءِ، 22 نومبر 2007ع کان ڇهن مهينن لاءِ معطل ڪيو ويو، جڏهن مشرف ملڪ ۾ [[2007ع پاڪستاني ايمرجنسي]] لاڳو ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Gruenbaum|first=Oren|date=February 2008|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=97|issue=394|pages=3–17|doi=10.1080/00358530701864963|s2cid=219625114}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[زمبابوي]] کي 2002ع ۾ [[رابرٽ موگابي]] جي [[زمبابوي آفريڪن نيشنل يونين – پيٽرياٽڪ فرنٽ|ZANU-PF]] حڪومت جي چونڊن ۽ زميني سڌارن واري پاليسين بابت خدشن سبب معطل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=April 2002|title=Commonwealth Update |journal=The Round Table|volume=91|issue=364|pages=131–59|doi=10.1080/00358530220144148|s2cid=219627051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2003ع ۾ زمبابوي پاڻ تنظيم مان نڪري ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal| date=January 2004 |title=Editorial: CHOGM 2003, Abuja, Nigeria |journal=The Round Table|volume=93|issue=373|pages=3–6|doi=10.1080/0035853042000188139|s2cid=219624427 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

15 مئي 2018ع تي زمبابوي دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|title=Zimbabwe applies to rejoin Commonwealth|date=22 May 2018|website=Al Jazeera|access-date=22 May 2018|archive-date=22 May 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180522125429/https://www.aljazeera.com/news/2018/05/zimbabwe-applies-rejoin-commonwealth-180522062016470.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

برطانيا ۾ زمبابوي جا شهري اڃا تائين [[دولتِ مشترڪه شهري]] طور سڃاتا وڃن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;BNA1981&quot;&gt;{{Cite legislation UK|type=act|year=1981|chapter=61|act=British Nationality Act 1981|schedule=3}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[فجي]] ۾ 1987ع ۾ جمهوريه جو اعلان، جيڪو [[1987ع فجي فوجي بغاوتون|فوجي بغاوتن]] کان پوءِ ڪيو ويو هو ۽ جنهن جو مقصد [[انڊو-فجي باشندن]] کي سياسي طاقت کان محروم ڪرڻ هو، دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست سان گڏ نه هو. نتيجي طور دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت ختم ٿيل سمجهي وئي، جيستائين 1997ع ۾ جمهوري آئين مان امتيازي دفعات ختم نه ڪيون ويون ۽ رڪنيت لاءِ ٻيهر درخواست نه ڏني وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20041101052757/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Templates/Internal.asp?NodeID=140761 |url-status=dead |archive-date=1 November 2004 |title=Fiji Rejoins the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=30 September 1997 |access-date=1 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان کان پوءِ فجي کي ٻه ڀيرا معطل ڪيو ويو. پهرين معطلي 6 جون 2000ع تي لاڳو ڪئي وئي&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Ingram|first=Derek|author-link=Derek Ingram (journalist)|date=July 2000|title=Commonwealth Update|journal=The Round Table|volume=89|issue=355|pages=311–55|doi=10.1080/00358530050083406|s2cid=219626283}}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[2000ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|هڪ ٻي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ 20 ڊسمبر 2001ع تي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Apr 2002&quot;/&gt;

فجي کي ڊسمبر 2006ع ۾ [[2006ع فجي فوجي بغاوت|تازي بغاوت]] کان پوءِ وري معطل ڪيو ويو. شروعات ۾ اها معطلي رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن جي رڪنيت تائين محدود هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |title=Fiji Suspended from the Commonwealth |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |date=1 September 2009 |access-date=1 September 2009 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090904153829/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/34580/213088/010909fijisuspended.htm |archive-date=4 September 2009 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Fiji suspended from Commonwealth|url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|work=BBC News|date=8 December 2006|access-date=1 February 2009|archive-date=19 November 2007|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20071119181425/http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/asia-pacific/6161587.stm|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

جڏهن فجي 2010ع تائين قومي چونڊن جي تاريخ مقرر ڪرڻ بابت دولتِ مشترڪه جي مقرر ڪيل آخري مهلت پوري نه ڪئي، تڏهن 1 سيپٽمبر 2009ع تي ان کي &quot;مڪمل طور معطل&quot; ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspension 2006&quot;/&gt;

دولتِ مشترڪه جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[ڪمليش شرما]] تصديق ڪئي ته مڪمل معطلي جو مطلب اهو هو ته فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي گڏجاڻين، [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون|دولتِ مشترڪه راندين]] ۽ فني امدادي پروگرامن مان خارج ڪيو ويندو، سواءِ جمهوريت جي بحالي لاءِ ڏنل امداد جي. شرما چيو ته معطلي دوران فجي دولتِ مشترڪه جو رڪن رهندو، پر سيڪريٽريٽ طرفان علامتي نمائندگي کان محروم رهندو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Fiji suspended&quot;/&gt;

19 مارچ 2014ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي جي مڪمل معطلي کي تبديل ڪري رڳو دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪائونسلن مان معطلي ۾ بدلائي ڇڏيو، جنهن سان فجي کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي ڪيترين سرگرمين، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه رانديون]] پڻ شامل هيون، ۾ شرڪت جي اجازت ملي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Foreign &amp; Commonwealth Office Minister welcomes Commonwealth statement on Fiji |url=https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20201002083406/https://www.gov.uk/government/news/foreign-commonwealth-office-minister-welcomes-commonwealth-statement-on-fiji |archive-date=2 October 2020 |access-date=31 July 2014 |website=GOV.UK}}&lt;/ref&gt;

سيپٽمبر 2014ع ۾ فجي جي معطلي ختم ڪئي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|title=Fiji rejoins Commonwealth as a full member|publisher=The Commonwealth|date=26 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=1 September 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190901024106/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/press-release/fiji-rejoins-commonwealth-full-member|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[2014ع فجي عام چونڊون|سيپٽمبر 2014ع جي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه وزارتي ايڪشن گروپ فجي کي مڪمل رڪن طور بحال ڪري ڇڏيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Nasik|author-last1=Swami|url=http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|title=We're back|work=Fiji Times|date=28 September 2014|access-date=28 September 2014|archive-date=10 December 2014|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20141210201056/http://www.fijitimes.com/story.aspx?id=281480|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تازو ترين دور ۾، 2013ع ۽ 2014ع دوران، [[سري لنڪا]] کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان معطل ڪرڻ لاءِ بين الاقوامي دٻاءُ وڌيو، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ صدر [[مهيندا راجاپڪسا]] جي حڪومت تي انساني حقن جي سنگين ڀڃڪڙين جا الزام لڳايا ويا هئا. [[2013ع دولتِ مشترڪه سربراهن جي اجلاس]] کي به سري لنڪا بدران ڪنهن ٻئي رڪن ملڪ ڏانهن منتقل ڪرڻ جون گهرون ڪيون ويون.

ڪينيڊا جي وزيراعظم [[اسٽيفن هارپر]] اجلاس جو بائيڪاٽ ڪرڻ جي ڌمڪي ڏني، پر آخرڪار سندس نمائندگي [[ديپڪ اوڀرائي]] ڪئي. برطانيا جي وزيراعظم [[ڊيوڊ ڪيمرون]] اجلاس ۾ شرڪت ڪرڻ جو فيصلو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|author-first1=David |author-last1=Miliband|url=https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|title=Britain must stand up for human rights in Sri Lanka|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|newspaper=The Guardian|archive-date=21 April 2015|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150421121545/http://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2013/mar/11/britain-human-rights-sri-lanka|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|author-first1=Mike |author-last1=Blanchfield|url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673|title=Harper rebukes Sri Lanka over jurist's dismissal as talk of summit boycott heats up|work=The Globe and Mail|date=14 January 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=24 May 2013|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130524092528/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/politics/harper-rebukes-sri-lanka-over-jurists-dismissal-as-talk-of-summit-boycott-heats-up/article7341673/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

اهي خدشا 2015ع ۾ اپوزيشن اڳواڻ [[ميٿريپالا سريسينا]] جي [[2015ع سري لنڪا صدارتي چونڊ|صدر چونڊجڻ]] کان پوءِ بي معنيٰ ٿي ويا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/80301-sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president/|title=Sirisena sworn in as Sri Lanka's new president|website=Rappler|date=9 January 2015|access-date=31 October 2021|archive-date=31 October 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20211031150116/https://www.rappler.com/world/south-central-asia/sirisena-sri-lanka-new-president|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===واپسي ۽ رڪنيت جي خاتمو===
{{See also|قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا رڪن ملڪ# قومن جي ڪامن ويلٿ جا سابق رڪن ملڪ #تحليل ٿيل رڪن}}

ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت مڪمل طور رضاڪارانه آهي، تنهنڪري رڪن حڪومتون ڪنهن به وقت تنظيم ڇڏڻ جو فيصلو ڪري سگهن ٿيون. ائين ڪندڙ پهريون ملڪ [[آئرلينڊ]] هو، جنهن 1949ع ۾ پاڻ کي [[1948ع آئرلينڊ جمهوريه ايڪٽ|جمهوريه قرار ڏيڻ]] کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي ڏني، جيتوڻيڪ اهو 1932ع کان ئي دولتِ مشترڪه جي سرگرمين ۾ فعال حصو نه وٺي رهيو هو. ان وقت رڪنيت لاءِ لازمي شرط اهو هو ته سڀئي ملڪ [[برطانوي بادشاهت|برطانوي بادشاهه]] کي پنهنجو سربراهه رياست تسليم ڪن. آئرلينڊ جي نڪرڻ کان پوءِ هن اصول ۾ تبديلي ڪئي وئي ته جيئن [[ڀارت]] 1950ع ۾ جمهوريه بڻجڻ باوجود دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ رهي سگهي. بهرحال، آئرلينڊ ٻيهر شامل نه ٿيو. اڄ دولتِ مشترڪه جي اڪثريت رڪن ملڪن، خاص طور آفريڪا جي سڀني ملڪن، يا ته جمهوريه آهن يا پنهنجا مقامي بادشاهه رکن ٿا.

[[پاڪستان]] 30 جنوري 1972ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان الڳ ٿيندڙ [[بنگلاديش]] کي تسليم ڪرڻ خلاف احتجاج طور تنظيم ڇڏي ڏني، پر 2 آگسٽ 1989ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿيو. [[زمبابوي]] جي رڪنيت 2002ع ۾ [[زمبابوي ۾ انساني حق|انساني حقن جي مبينا ڀڃڪڙين]] ۽ دانسته بدانتظامي جي بنياد تي معطل ڪئي وئي، جنهن کان پوءِ زمبابوي جي حڪومت 2003ع ۾ پنهنجي رڪنيت ختم ڪري ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080705162909/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/press/31555/34582/35505/zimbabwes_withdrawal_from_the_commonwealth.htm|url-status=dead|title=Commonwealth website confirms Zimbabwe &quot;terminated&quot; its membership with effect from 7 December 2003|archive-date=5 July 2008}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[گيمبيا]] 3 آڪٽوبر 2013ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;thecommonwealth.org&quot; /&gt; پر 8 فيبروري 2018ع تي ٻيهر شامل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;gambia&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|title=The Gambia rejoins the Commonwealth|date=8 February 2018|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=14 July 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180714083101/http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/gambia-rejoins-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[مالديپ]] 13 آڪٽوبر 2016ع تي دولتِ مشترڪه مان نڪري ويو،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|title=The Commonwealth Secretariat|date=13 October 2016|access-date=13 October 2016|archive-date=17 May 2020|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20200517085315/https://thecommonwealth.org/media/news/secretary-general-statement-maldives-decision-leave-commonwealth|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |title=The Maldives decides to leave the Commonwealth; commits to continue with its international engagement |publisher=Maldivian Ministry of Foreign Affairs |date=13 October 2016 |access-date=13 October 2016 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20161014060506/http://www.foreign.gov.mv/v2/en/media-center/news/article/1999 |archive-date=14 October 2016 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ ان جو سبب 2012ع کان پوءِ دولتِ مشترڪه طرفان مالديپ خلاف اختيار ڪيل &quot;سزاوار قدمن&quot; کي قرار ڏنو ويو، جيڪي اڳوڻي صدر [[محمد نشيد]] جي مبينا طور زبردستي استعيفيٰ کان پوءِ اختيار ڪيا ويا هئا.&lt;ref name=&quot;mfa&quot;/&gt;

نومبر 2018ع ۾ [[ابراهيم محمد صالِح]] جي صدر چونڊجڻ کان پوءِ مالديپ اعلان ڪيو ته اهو دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ ٻيهر شامل ٿيڻ لاءِ درخواست ڏيندو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.thenationalnews.com/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|title=Maldives to rejoin Commonwealth of former British colonies|date=20 November 2018|work=The National|access-date=23 November 2018|language=en|archive-date=24 November 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181124162202/https://www.thenational.ae/world/asia/maldives-to-rejoin-commonwealth-of-former-british-colonies-1.793718|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; آخرڪار، مالديپ 1 فيبروري 2020ع تي ٻيهر رڪن بڻجي ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url = https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|title = Maldives rejoins Commonwealth after over three years|newspaper = The Hindu|date = February 2020|last1 = Srinivasan|first1 = Meera|access-date = 31 October 2021|archive-date = 31 October 2021|archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20211031132756/https://www.thehindu.com/news/international/maldives-rejoins-commonwealth-as-united-kingdom-leaves-european-union/article30712478.ece|url-status = live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Mandela voting in 1994.jpg|thumb|[[نسلي امتياز]] واري پاليسي سبب 1961ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه ڇڏيندڙ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] 1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|غير نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ٻيهر شامل ٿيو.]]

هينئر تائين ڪنهن به ملڪ کي دولتِ مشترڪه مان رسمي طور خارج نه ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Withdrawals and Suspension |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/commonwealth/commonwealth-membership/withdrawals-and-suspension/ |access-date=29 October 2024 |website=Commonwealth Network |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

البت، 1961ع ۾ [[ڏکڻ آفريقا]] جي جمهوريه بڻجڻ کان پوءِ تنظيم ۾ رهڻ جي درخواست عملي طور تي رد ٿي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جي ڪيترن ئي رڪن ملڪن، ۽ ڪينيڊا، [[نسلي امتياز]] (Apartheid) جي سخت مخالفت ڪئي. جڏهن ڏکڻ آفريقا جي حڪومت کي محسوس ٿيو ته [[1961ع دولتِ مشترڪه وزيراعظمن جي ڪانفرنس]] ۾ ان جي درخواست منظور نه ٿيندي، تڏهن هن پنهنجي درخواست واپس وٺي ڇڏي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=South Africa withdraws from the Commonwealth |url=https://www.sahistory.org.za/dated-event/south-africa-withdraws-commonwealth |access-date=21 May 2024 |website=South African History Online}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1994ع ۾ [[1994ع ڏکڻ آفريقا عام چونڊون|پهرين گهڻ نسلي چونڊن]] کان پوءِ ڏکڻ آفريقا کي ٻيهر دولتِ مشترڪه ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو. چونڊن کان اڳ دولتِ مشترڪه امن قائم رکڻ واري فورس جي تربيت ۽ فني مدد فراهم ڪئي، جڏهن⁠تہ دولتِ مشترڪه جا مبصر چونڊن دوران وڏي تعداد ۾ موجود هئا.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author=Commonwealth Observer Group|title=The National and Provincial Elections in South Africa, 2 June 1999|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|year=1999|page=7|publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat|isbn=978-0-85092-626-2|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=26 March 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230326164807/https://books.google.com/books?id=vOVHuLGt-YwC&amp;pg=PA7|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

1997ع ۾ [[هانگ ڪانگ]] جي خودمختياري [[چين]] ڏانهن منتقل ٿيڻ سان اهو علائقو برطانيا جي ذريعي دولتِ مشترڪه سان وابستگي وڃائي ويٺو. غير خودمختيار رياستن يا علائقن کي دولتِ مشترڪه جي رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ جي اجازت نه آهي، ۽ چين جي حڪومت به رڪنيت حاصل ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪا ڪوشش نه ڪئي آهي.

تنهن هوندي به هانگ ڪانگ دولتِ مشترڪه خاندان جي ڪيترين تنظيمن ۾ شموليت جاري رکي آهي، جن ۾ [[دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي انجمن]] (جنهن 1983ع ۽ 2009ع ۾ دولتِ مشترڪه وڪيلن جي ڪانفرنس جي ميزباني ڪئي)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه پارلياماني انجمن]] (۽ ويسٽ منسٽر پارلياماني سيمينار)، [[دولتِ مشترڪه يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]]، [[دولتِ مشترڪه قانون ساز صلاحڪارن جي انجمن]]&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |title=Office of Parliamentary Counsel – CALC – Constitution &amp; Membership |date=11 March 2011 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311223653/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/constit.htm |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:1&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |website=OPC.gov.au |title=Legislative drafting offices in which there are CALC members |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20110311234928/http://www.opc.gov.au/calc/docs/LDOs.pdf |archive-date=11 March 2011 }}&lt;/ref&gt; ۽ [[دولتِ مشترڪه جنگي قبرن وارو ڪميشن]] (CWGC) شامل آهن.

==سياست==

===مقصد ۽ سرگرميون===
ڪامن ويلٿ جا مقصد پهريون ڀيرو 1971ع جي [[سنگاپور پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيا ويا، جنهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ کي [[عالمي امن]] جي قيام، [[نمائنده جمهوريت]] ۽ [[فردي آزادي]] جي واڌاري، برابري جي حصول ۽ نسل پرستي جي مخالفت، غربت، اڻڄاڻائي ۽ بيمارين خلاف جدوجهد، ۽ [[آزاد واپار]] جي حمايت جو پابند بڻايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|date=22 January 1971|title=Singapore Declaration of Commonwealth Principles 1971|access-date=15 November 2013|work=thecommonwealth.org|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20131202223804/http://thecommonwealth.org/sites/default/files/history-items/documents/Singapore%20Declaration.pdf|archive-date=2 December 2013|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن مقصدن ۾ وڌيڪ اضافو 1979ع جي [[لوساڪا پڌرنامو]] وسيلي ڪيو ويو، جنهن ۾ جنس جي بنياد تي امتيازي سلوڪ جي مخالفت شامل ڪئي وئي،&lt;ref name=&quot;Singapore Declaration text&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060930123038/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/document/34293/35468/35776/lusaka.htm|url-status=dead|archive-date=30 September 2006|title=Lusaka Declaration on Racism and Racial Prejudice|access-date=3 April 2008|date=7 August 1979|publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; جڏهن ته 1989ع جي [[لانگڪاوي پڌرنامو]] ذريعي [[ماحولياتي پائيداري]] کي پڻ مقصدن ۾ شامل ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|title=Langkawi Declaration on the Environment|access-date=3 April 2008|date=21 October 1989|publisher=USM Regional Center of Expertise in Education for Sustainable Development|archive-date=16 April 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20080416202526/http://www.greenpages.net.my/node/4|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt; انهن مقصدن کي 1991ع جي [[هراري پڌرنامو]] ۾ وڌيڪ مضبوط ڪيو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;Patel, Hasu (2000), &quot;Southern Africa and democracy, in the light of the Harare declaration.&quot; ''The Round Table'' 89.357: 585–592.&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا سڀ کان اهم مقصد جمهوريت ۽ ترقي جي واڌاري سان لاڳاپيل آهن، جيئن 2003ع جي [[آسو راڪ پڌرنامو]] ۾ بيان ڪيو ويو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060820140553/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/150952/our_work/ |url-status=dead |archive-date=20 August 2006 |title=Our Work |access-date=3 April 2008 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt; هي پڌرنامو سنگاپور ۽ هراري پڌرنامن جي بنيادن تي تيار ڪيو ويو ۽ انهن جي دائري کي وڌيڪ واضح ڪندي چيو ويو ته:

{{cquote|اسان جمهوريت، سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن، صنفي برابري ۽ عالمگيريت جي فائدن جي وڌيڪ منصفاڻي ورڇ لاءِ پرعزم آهيون۔}}&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060613105849/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/shared_asp_files/uploadedfiles/%7BE7A2A23D-FD9F-418B-B2D4-CC39FFD2FEF2%7D_Aso%20Rock%20Declaration.pdf |url-status=dead |archive-date=13 June 2006 |title=Aso Rock Commonwealth Declaration |access-date=3 April 2008 |date=8 December 2003 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]] }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===اختيار ۽ اثرائيت===

آڪٽوبر 2010ع ۾ سيڪريٽري جنرل جي هڪ لِيڪ ٿيل يادداشت (ميمو) شايع ٿي، جنهن ۾ عملي کي هدايت ڪئي وئي هئي ته هو انساني حقن بابت عوامي طور آواز نه اٿارين. ان کان پوءِ ڪامن ويلٿ تي الزام لڳايو ويو ته اها پنهنجي بنيادي قدرن جي تحفظ ۽ واڌاري بابت ڪافي واضح ۽ سرگرم موقف اختيار نه ڪري رهي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news|url=https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|title=Commonwealth has abandoned human rights commitment – leaked memo|first1=Julian|last1=Borger|date=8 October 2010|newspaper=The Guardian|access-date=14 December 2016|archive-date=29 September 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210929032835/https://www.theguardian.com/law/2010/oct/08/commonwealth-human-rights-leaked-document|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 2011ع]] دوران [[ڪامن ويلٿ ممتاز شخصيتن جو گروپ]] (EPG) جي هڪ رپورٽ تي غور ڪيو ويو. هن رپورٽ ۾ دعويٰ ڪئي وئي ته تنظيم پنهنجي اهميت وڃائي رهي آهي ۽ زوال پذير ٿي رهي آهي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ان وٽ اهڙو ڪو مؤثر نظام موجود نه هو جيڪو انساني حقن يا جمهوري اصولن جي ڀڃڪڙي ڪندڙ ميمبر ملڪن کي جوابده ٺهرائي سگهي.&lt;ref name=star30/&gt;

هن گروپ 106 &quot;فوري&quot; سفارشون پيش ڪيون، جن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور کي اختيار ڪرڻ، قانون جي حڪمراني، جمهوريت ۽ انساني حقن بابت هڪ نئين ڪمشنر جي مقرري، ميمبر ملڪن ۾ جاري انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙين ۽ سياسي جبر جي الزامن جي نگراني، 41 ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ [[هم جنس پرستي بابت قانوني حيثيت|هم جنس پرستي خلاف قانونن]] جي خاتمي بابت سفارشون، ۽ [[زبردستي شادي]] تي پابندي شامل هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders still haggling over human rights reforms|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=28 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120328053107/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/politics/article/1078175--commonwealth-leaders-still-haggling-over-human-rights-reforms?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=2011Meeting&gt;{{cite news|last=Watt|first=Nicholas|title=Commonwealth leaders under fire for refusing to publish human rights report|url=https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|access-date=29 October 2011|newspaper=The Guardian|date=29 October 2011|archive-date=16 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210816202352/https://www.theguardian.com/world/2011/oct/29/commonwealth-meeting-human-rights-disgrace|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

رپورٽ کي شايع نه ڪرڻ يا انساني حقن، جمهوريت ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني بابت ان جي سڌارن کي قبول نه ڪرڻ تي EPG جي ميمبر ۽ اڳوڻي برطانوي پرڏيهي سيڪريٽري [[مالڪم رفڪنڊ]] ان صورتحال کي &quot;شرمناڪ&quot; قرار ڏنو. هن هڪ پريس ڪانفرنس ۾ چيو:

{{cquote|ڪامن ويلٿ کي هڪ انتهائي اهم مسئلي کي منهن ڏيڻو پئجي رهيو آهي. هي دشمني يا مخالفت جو مسئلو نه آهي، بلڪه بيپرواهي جو مسئلو آهي. ان جي مقصد تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ان جي اهميت تي سوال اٿاريا پيا وڃن، ۽ ان جو هڪ سبب اهو آهي ته جن قدرن جي اها نمائندگي ڪري ٿي، انهن کي لاڳو ڪرائڻ بابت ان جو عزم ڪيترن ئي ميمبر ملڪن جي نظر ۾ غير واضح ٿيندو پيو وڃي. ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن يا سيڪريٽريٽ جو ذاتي ڪلب نه آهي؛ اها ڪامن ويلٿ جي عوام جي ملڪيت آهي.}}&lt;ref name=2011Meeting/&gt;

آخرڪار EPG جي 106 فوري سفارشن مان لڳ ڀڳ ٻه ٽيون حصو مطالعاتي گروپن حوالي ڪيو ويو. EPG جي هڪ ميمبر هن عمل کي سفارشَن کي &quot;ڊگهي گاهه ۾ اڇلائڻ&quot; سان تشبيهه ڏني، يعني انهن کي عملي طور ملتوي ڪرڻ. سفارش ڪيل انساني حقن واري ڪمشنر جي عهدي تي اتفاق نه ٿيو؛ ان جي بدران هڪ وزارتي انتظامي گروپ کي نگراني ۽ نفاذ جا اختيار ڏنا ويا، حالانڪه ان گروپ ۾ اهڙا ملڪ به شامل هئا جن تي پاڻ انساني حقن جي ڀڃڪڙي جا الزام لڳل هئا. ان سان گڏ اهو به طئي ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ قدرن جو هڪ منشور تيار ڪيو ويندو، پر ان ڳالهه بابت ڪو فيصلو نه ٿيو ته ان جي اصولن تي عملدرآمد کي ڪيئن يقيني بڻايو ويندو.&lt;ref name=star30&gt;{{cite news|last=Cheadle|first=Bruce|title=Commonwealth leaders agree to develop charter of values and little else|url=https://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|access-date=30 October 2011|newspaper=Toronto Star|date=30 October 2011|archive-date=23 March 2012|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20120323043809/http://www.thestar.com/news/canada/article/1078397--commonwealth-leaders-agree-to-develop-charter-of-values-and-little-else?bn=1|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

انهن ڪوششن جي نتيجي ۾ نئون [[ڪامن ويلٿ جو منشور]] 11 مارچ 2013ع تي [[راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي]] طرفان [[مارلبرو هائوس]] ۾ صحيح ڪيو ويو. هن منشور ۾ &quot;هر قسم جي امتيازي سلوڪ&quot; جي مخالفت ڪئي وئي، ڀلي اهو جنس، نسل، رنگ، عقيدي، سياسي عقيدي يا ڪنهن ٻئي بنياد تي هجي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|title=Queen to sign new charter backing equal rights for gay people across Commonwealth|publisher=Standard.co.uk|date=11 March 2013|access-date=18 April 2013|archive-date=15 August 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210815190412/https://www.standard.co.uk/news/uk/queen-to-sign-new-charter-backing-equal-rights-for-gay-people-across-commonwealth-8528587.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|archive-url=https://archive.today/20130411035652/http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/2013-03-11/uk/37622297_1_gay-rights-equal-rights-commonwealth-secretary-general-kamalesh-sharma|url-status=dead|archive-date=11 April 2013|title=Commonwealth charter to focus on gay rights|first=Kounteya|last=Sinha|date=11 March 2013|work=[[The Times of India]]|access-date=18 April 2013}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==معيشت==
{{also|جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست}}

===ميمبرن بابت معاشي انگ اکر===
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center; border:1px solid #a2a9b1; background:#f8fbff;&quot;
 ! style=&quot;background:#d8ecff; color:#202122; font-size:110%;&quot; | ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جون معيشتون، 2012ع&amp;nbsp;&lt;!-- مهرباني ڪري انفرادي خانن جا انگ اکر تبديل نه ڪريو. اهي سڀ انگ اکر جولاءِ 2013ع ۾ ورلڊ بئنڪ جي اشاعتن مان ورتل آهن. مختلف تاريخن يا ذريعن جا انگ اکر ڀيٽ ۽ درجابندي لاءِ ڪمزور بنياد آهن. --&gt;
 |-
 | style=&quot;padding:0; border:none;&quot; |
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; style=&quot;text-align:right; margin:0; width:100%;&quot;
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جا ميمبر رياستون|ميمبر رياستون]]
 ! rowspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | آبادي{{UN_Population|ref}}&lt;br /&gt;{{small|({{UN_Population|Year}})}}
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#dff0d8;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، نالي ماتر، آمريڪي ڊالر
 ! colspan=&quot;2&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff3cd;&quot; | جي ڊي پي، خريداري طاقت برابري، آمريڪي ڊالر
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url= https://web.archive.org/web/20130810035505/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP.pdf
  | archive-date= 10 August 2013 }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#eef8ea;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita (current US$)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 11 May 2011
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20110511123254/http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | ملين&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | title = Gross domestic product 2012, PPP
  | date = 1 July 2013
| publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20130810005545/http://databank.worldbank.org/data/download/GDP_PPP.pdf
  | archive-date = 10 August 2013
| url-status=live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 ! scope=&quot;col&quot; data-sort-type=&quot;number&quot; style=&quot;background:#fff9e6;&quot; | في ماڻهو&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web
  | url = http://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | title = GDP per capita, PPP (current international $)
  | publisher = [[World Bank]]
  | access-date = 1 July 2013
| archive-date = 22 June 2019
| archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20190622102516/https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.PCAP.PP.CD
  | url-status = live
  }}&lt;/ref&gt;
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Antigua and Barbuda}}
 | 1,176
 | 12,480
 | 1,778
 | 18,492
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Australia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Australia}}
 | 1,520,608
 | 61,789
 | 1,008,547
 | 41,974
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bahamas}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bahamas}}
 | 8,149
 | 22,431
 | 11,765
 | 31,978
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Bangladesh}}
 | {{UN_Population|Bangladesh}}
 | 115,610
 | 743
 | 291,299
 | 1,777
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Barbados}}
 | {{UN_Population|Barbados}}
 | 3,685
 | 13,453
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Belize}}
 | {{UN_Population|Belize}}
 | 1,448
 | 4,059
 | 2,381
 | 6,672
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Botswana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Botswana}}
 | 14,411
 | 8,533
 | 34,038
 | 14,746
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Brunei}}
 | {{UN_Population|Brunei Darussalam}}
 | 16,954
 | 40,301
 | 21,992
 | 51,760
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cameroon}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cameroon}}
 | 24,984
 | 1,260
 | 50,820
 | 2,359
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Canada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Canada}}
 | 1,821,424
 | 50,344
 | 1,489,165
 | 40,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Cyprus}}
 | {{UN_Population|Cyprus}}
 | 22,981
 | 30,670
 | 26,720
 | 32,254
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Dominica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Dominica}}
 | 480
 | 7,154
 | 906
 | 13,288
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Eswatini}}
 | {{UN_Population|Eswatini}}
 | 3,747
 | 3,831
 | 6,458
 | 6,053
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Ghana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Ghana}}
 | 40,710
 | 1,570
 | 51,943
 | 1,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Grenada}}
 | {{UN_Population|Grenada}}
 | 790
 | 7,780
 | 1,142
 | 10,837
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Guyana}}
 | {{UN_Population|Guyana}}
 | 2,851
 | 3,408
 | 2,704
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|India}}
 | {{UN_Population|India}}
 | 3,732,224
 | 2,171
 | 11,468,022
 | 7,874
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Jamaica}}
 | {{UN_Population|Jamaica}}
 | 14,840
 | 5,335
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kenya}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kenya}}
 | 37,229
 | 808
 | 76,016
 | 1,710
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Kiribati}}
 | {{UN_Population|Kiribati}}
 | 176
 | 1,649
 | 248
 | 2,337
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Lesotho}}
 | {{UN_Population|Lesotho}}
 | 2,448
 | 1,106
 | 4,027
 | 1,691
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malawi}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malawi}}
 | 4,264
 | 365
 | 14,344
 | 893
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malaysia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malaysia}}
 | 303,526
 | 9,977
 | 501,249
 | 16,051
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Maldives}}
 | {{UN_Population|Maldives}}
 | 2,222
 | 6,405
 | 3,070
 | 8,871
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Malta}}
 | {{UN_Population|Malta}}
 | 8,722
 | 21,380
 | 12,138
 | 27,504
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mauritius}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mauritius}}
 | 10,492
 | 8,755
 | 20,210
 | 14,420
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Mozambique}}
 | {{UN_Population|Mozambique}}
 | 14,588
 | 533
 | 25,805
 | 975
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Namibia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Namibia}}
 | 12,807
 | 5,383
 | 16,918
 | 6,801
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nauru}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nauru}}
 | —
 | —
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|New Zealand}}
 | {{UN_Population|New Zealand}}
 | 139,768
 | 36,254
 | 139,640
 | 31,082
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Nigeria}}
 | {{UN_Population|Nigeria}}
 | 262,606
 | 1,502
 | 449,289
 | 2,533
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Pakistan}}
 | {{UN_Population|Pakistan}}
 | 231,182
 | 1,189
 | 517,873
 | 2,745
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Papua New Guinea}}
 | {{UN_Population|Papua New Guinea}}
 | 15,654
 | 1,845
 | 20,771
 | 2,676
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Rwanda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Rwanda}}
 | 7,103
 | 8,874
 | 15,517
 | 1,282
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Kitts and Nevis}}
 | 748
 | 13,144
 | 966
 | 17,226
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Lucia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Lucia}}
 | 1,186
 | 7,154
 | 2,016
 | 11,597
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | {{UN_Population|Saint Vincent and the Grenadines}}
 | 713
 | 6,291
 | 1,202
 | 10,715
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Samoa}}
 | {{UN_Population|Samoa}}
 | 677
 | 3,485
 | 853
 | 4,475
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Seychelles}}
 | {{UN_Population|Seychelles}}
 | 1,032
 | 12,321
 | 2,371
 | 25,788
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sierra Leone}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sierra Leone}}
 | 3,796
 | 496
 | 8,125
 | 1,131
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Singapore}}
 | {{UN_Population|Singapore}}
 | 274,701
 | 46,241
 | 328,323
 | 60,688
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Solomon Islands}}
 | {{UN_Population|Solomon Islands}}
 | 1,008
 | 1,517
 | 1,718
 | 2,923
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|South Africa}}
 | {{UN_Population|South Africa}}
 | 384,313
 | 8,070
 | 585,625
 | 10,960
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Sri Lanka}}
 | {{UN_Population|Sri Lanka}}
 | 59,421
 | 2,835
 | 126,993
 | 5,582
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tanzania}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Republic of Tanzania}}
 | 28,249
 | 532
 | 74,269
 | 1,512
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tonga}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tonga}}
 | 472
 | 4,152
 | 527
 | 4,886
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | {{UN_Population|Trinidad and Tobago}}
 | 23,986
 | 16,699
 | 35,638
 | 25,074
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Tuvalu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Tuvalu}}
 | 37
 | 3,636
 | —
 | —
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Uganda}}
 | {{UN_Population|Uganda}}
 | 19,881
 | 487
 | 49,130
 | 1,345
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|United Kingdom}}
 | {{UN_Population|United Kingdom}}
 | 3,124,650&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|title=Report for Selected Countries and Subjects|url=https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|access-date=31 August 2021|website=IMF|language=en|archive-date=7 April 2021|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20210407080844/https://www.imf.org/en/Publications/WEO/weo-database/2021/April/weo-report|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;
 | 38,974
 | 3,174,921
 | 35,598
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Vanuatu}}
 | {{UN_Population|Vanuatu}}
 | 785
 | 3,094
 | 1,139
 | 4,379
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot; | {{flag|Zambia}}
 | {{UN_Population|Zambia}}
 | 20,678
 | 1,425
 | 24,096
 | 1,621
 |-
 ! scope=&quot;row&quot; style=&quot;text-align:left; background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | {{flag|Commonwealth of Nations|name=ڪامن ويلٿ}}
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''2,418,964,000'''&lt;!-- 2016 --&gt;
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''9,766,209'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''3,844'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''13,119,929'''
 | style=&quot;background:#eaf4ff;&quot; | '''4,035'''
 |-
 |}
 |}


===جنگ کان پوءِ===
ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران، برطانوي سلطنت برطانيا جي ماليات جي سهائتا ۾ اهم ڪردار ادا ڪيو. پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا جا ذخيرا لنڊن ۾ گڏ ڪيا ويا، ته جيئن جنگ لاءِ استعمال ٿي سگهن. عملي طور، گڏيل بادشاهت £2.3&amp;nbsp;ارب حاصل ڪيا، جن مان £1.3&amp;nbsp;ارب [[برطانوي راڄ|برطانوي هندستان]] مان هئا. اهو قرض برطانوي حڪومت جي ضمانتي ڪاغذن جي صورت ۾ رکيو ويو ۽ &quot;اسٽرلنگ بيلنس&quot; جي نالي سان مشهور ٿيو. 1950ع تائين هندستان، پاڪستان ۽ سيلون پنهنجي اسٽرلنگ جو وڏو حصو خرچ ڪري چڪا هئا، جڏهن ته ٻين ملڪن وڌيڪ گڏ ڪيو. اسٽرلنگ علائقي ۾ ڪئناڊا کانسواءِ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ شامل هئي، گڏوگڏ ڪجهه ننڍا ملڪ، خاص طور تي فارس نار وارا ملڪ. انهن پنهنجو پرڏيهي مٽاسٽا اسٽرلنگ ۾ رکيو، جنهن سان ان ڪرنسي کي اوچتين نيڪالين کان تحفظ مليو ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۽ سيڙپڪاري آسان ٿي. اهو مقرر مٽاسٽا جي شرح، واپاري پاليسي هم آهنگ ڪرڻ لاءِ ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهي اجلاسن ۾ وقت بوقت گڏجاڻين، ۽ گهريلو معاشي پاليسين تي ٻڌل هڪ رسمي لاڳاپو هو. گڏيل بادشاهت کي واپاري اضافو حاصل هو، ۽ ٻيا ملڪ گهڻو ڪري خام مال پيدا ڪندڙ هئا، جيڪو گڏيل بادشاهت کي وڪرو ڪيو ويندو هو. ڪامن ويلٿ لاءِ واپاري جواز آهستي آهستي گهٽ پرڪشش ٿيندو ويو؛ تنهن هوندي به وڌندڙ لنڊن سرمائي منڊي تائين رسائي نون آزاد ٿيل ملڪن لاءِ اهم فائدو رهي. جيئن جيئن گڏيل بادشاهت يورپ جي ويجهو ٿيندي وئي، تيئن ڊگهي مدي وارا لاڳاپا شڪ هيٺ اچڻ لڳا.&lt;ref&gt;Catherine R. Schenk,  &quot;Britain in the world economy.&quot; in Paul Addison and Harriet Jones, eds., ''A Companion to Contemporary Britain: 1939–2000'' (2005): 436–481, esp. 469-71.&lt;/ref&gt;

====گڏيل بادشاهت (برطانيا) جو يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شامل ٿيڻ====
1961ع تائين، سست معيشت سبب، گڏيل بادشاهت [[يورپي معاشي برادري]] ۾ شامل ٿيڻ جي ڪوشش ڪئي، پر [[چارلس ڊي گال]] بار بار ان کي ويٽو ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;Alan S. Milward, ''The rise and fall of a national strategy, 1945–1963'' (2002).&lt;/ref&gt; [[يورپي برادرين ۾ گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت|شموليت]] آخرڪار 1973ع ۾ حاصل ٿي. راڻي ايلزبيٿ گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ وچ ۾ بچيل ٿورن لاڳاپن مان هڪ هئي. تاريخدان [[بين پملٽ]] دليل ڏئي ٿو ته يورپ ۾ شامل ٿيڻ &quot;گڏيل بادشاهت ۽ ان جي اڳوڻي سلطنت وچ ۾ خانداني لاڳاپن جي ٽٽڻ واري عمل ۾ اڃا تائين سڀ کان وڌيڪ فيصلائتو قدم ثابت ٿيو... ان بچيل لاڳاپن کي جذباتي ۽ ثقافتي لاڳاپن ۽ قانوني نزاڪتن تائين محدود ڪري ڇڏيو.&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Ben |author-last1=Pimlott|title=The Queen: A Biography of Elizabeth II|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=VkhSn5Fi7c4C|date=1998|page=416|publisher=Wiley |isbn=978-0-471-28330-0}}&lt;/ref&gt;

آفريڪا ۽ ايشيا جا نوان آزاد ملڪ پنهنجي اندروني سياسي ۽ معاشي ترقي تي ڌيان ڏيڻ لڳا، ۽ ڪڏهن ڪڏهن [[ٿڌي جنگ]] ۾ پنهنجي ڪردار تي پڻ. آمريڪا، بين الاقوامي ادارا ۽ سوويت يونين اهم رانديگر بڻجي ويا، ۽ برطانوي ڪردار پوئتي هٽي ويو. جيتوڻيڪ ڪيترن ملڪن، جهڙوڪ آسٽريليا، گڏيل بادشاهت جي يورپي معاشي برادري ۾ شموليت جي مخالفت ڪئي، ٻين ملڪن برطانيا جي گڏيل منڊي تائين رسائي مان ملندڙ معاشي فائدن کي ترجيح ڏني.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book|author-first1=Gill |author-last1=Bennett|title=Six Moments of Crisis: Inside British Foreign Policy|url=https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|date=2013|page=87|publisher=OUP Oxford|isbn=978-0-19-164163-3|access-date=10 February 2018|archive-date=30 March 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330171246/https://books.google.com/books?id=m1_EUTmXbDwC&amp;pg=PP87|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳوڻين ڊومينين قومن ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت وچ ۾ تاريخي لاڳاپا تيزي سان ڪمزور ٿي رهيا هئا. ڪئناڊا جي معيشت وڌ کان وڌ آمريڪا سان واپار تي مرڪوز ٿيڻ لڳي، نه ڪي گڏيل بادشاهت يا ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان واپار تي. ڪئناڊا جا اندروني تڪرار وڌندڙ آمريڪي ثقافتي ۽ معاشي موجودگي، ۽ [[ڪيوبيڪ قومپرستي]] جي مضبوط قوت جي چوڌاري گهمندا هئا. 1964ع ۾ [[ڪئناڊا جو جهنڊو|ميپل ليف جهنڊي]] [[ڪئناڊين ريڊ اينسائن|ڪئناڊين اينسائن]] جي جاءِ ورتي، جنهن کي گريگري جانسن &quot;سلطنت جو آخري ساهه&quot; قرار ڏنو.&lt;ref&gt;Gregory A. Johnson, &quot;The Last Gasp of Empire: The 1964 Flag Debate Revisited&quot;, in Phillip Buckner, ed., ''Canada and the End of Empire'' (University of British Columbia Press, 2005), p.  6.&lt;/ref&gt; آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ عام طور تي گڏيل بادشاهت جي شموليت جا مخالف هئا ۽ 1972ع ۾ شموليت جي آخري شرطن تي ڪافي اثرانداز ٿيا، جنهن لاءِ گڏيل بادشاهت اهم برآمدي منڊين جي تحفظ لاءِ عبوري انتظامن ۽ مالي معاوضي تي راضي ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;Andrea Benvenuti,  {{&quot;'}}Layin' Low and Sayin' Nuffin': Australia's Policy towards Britain's Second Bid to Join the European Economic Community (1966–67)&quot; ''Australian Economic History Review'' 46#2 (2006): 155–175.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |first=Bruce |last=Brown |title=New Zealand in World Affairs: 1972–1990 |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |date=1977 |publisher=Victoria UP |page=23 |isbn=978-0-86473-372-6 |access-date=10 February 2018 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330153527/https://books.google.com/books?id=-pRHIw8R0-kC&amp;pg=PA23 |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt; رسل وارڊ ان دور کي معاشي اصطلاحن ۾ هن ريت بيان ڪري ٿو:&lt;ref&gt;Russell  Ward, ''A Nation for a Continent: the history of Australia, 1901–1975'' (1977) p 343&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;حقيقت ۾، گڏيل بادشاهت آسٽريليا جي اهم واپاري ساٿي طور ان وقت تمام تيزي سان آمريڪا ۽ معاشي طور ٻيهر اڀرندڙ جاپان جي هٿان بدلجي رهي هئي، پر گهڻا ماڻهو مشڪل سان ان کان واقف هئا.... اهو ڊپ هو ته گڏيل بادشاهت جي گڏيل منڊي ۾ شموليت جو مطلب آسٽريليائي شين لاءِ ترجيحي محصولي انتظامن جو خاتمو، يا گهٽ ۾ گهٽ انهن ۾ وڏي گهٽتائي هوندو.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

===واپار===
[[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] جي 2010ع واري تحقيق مان ظاهر ٿيو ته ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ، سراسري طور، تنظيم جي ٻين ملڪن کان 50 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ درآمد ڪندا هئا ۽ سراسري طور 38 سيڪڙو وڌيڪ برآمد ڪندا هئا. ننڍن ۽ گهٽ دولتمند ملڪن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ڪرڻ جو رجحان وڌيڪ هوندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|title=Trading Places: The &quot;Commonwealth effect&quot; revisited, p. 9.|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20150704235738/https://thercs.org/assets/Uploads/Trading-Places-the-Commonwealth-effect-revisited.pdf|archive-date=4 July 2015|url-status=usurped}}&lt;/ref&gt; رڳو 2024ع ۾، ٽوگو جي شامل ٿيڻ کان ٻه سال پوءِ، برطانيا سان ان جي واپار ۾ 94 سيڪڙو واڌ ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;:5&quot; /&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:6&quot; /&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ اندر واپار ۾ قانوني ۽ لساني هڪجهڙائين، جن ۾ عام قانون جو وسيع استعمال به شامل آهي، ۽ قائم ٿيل ڪاروباري نيٽ ورڪن سبب ڏيتي ليتي جا خرچ گهٽ ٿين ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Henderson |first=Andrew |date=2026-03-02 |title=The Commonwealth: a ceremonial relic that could be a supply-chain backstop |url=https://www.aspistrategist.org.au/the-commonwealth-a-ceremonial-relic-that-could-be-a-supply-chain-backstop/ |access-date=2026-05-04 |website=The Strategist |language=en-AU}}&lt;/ref&gt;

2005ع ۾ مالٽا واري سربراهي اجلاس ۾ حڪومتن جي سربراهن ڪامن ويلٿ ميمبرن وچ ۾ ٻه طرفي بنياد تي آزاد واپار کي اڳتي وڌائڻ جي منظوري ڏني.&lt;ref name=&quot;VallettaStatement&quot;&gt;{{cite web |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |archive-url=https://archive.today/20130415225827/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/news/190628/163075/147476/valletta_statement_on_multilateral_trade.htm |url-status=dead |archive-date=15 April 2013 |title=Commonwealth Secretariat – Valletta Statement on Multilateral Trade |publisher=Thecommonwealth.org |date=26 November 2005 |access-date=27 September 2012}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2025ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سيڪريٽري جنرل [[شرلي آيورڪر بوچوي]] آخرڪار [[ڪامن ويلٿ آزاد واپار]] واري علائقي جي قيام جي حمايت ڪئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite AV media |url=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nhED5_FVx8s |title=Shirley Botchwey, Commonwealth Secretary General interview with the BBC |date=2025-06-26 |last= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat |others=Interview by BBC News |access-date=2025-07-01 |via=YouTube}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ڪامن ويلٿ جون تنظيمون==
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ تنظيمن جي فهرست}}

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ملڪ حڪومتي لاڳاپن کان ٻاهر به ڪيترن ئي گڏيل رابطَن ۾ ٻڌل آهن. مختلف غير سرڪاري تنظيمون، خاص طور تي راندين، ثقافت، تعليم، قانون ۽ خيراتي خدمتن جي شعبن ۾، سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ سرگرم آهن. انهن مان ڪجهه، جهڙوڪ [[سائيٽ سيورز انٽرنيشنل]] ۽ [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙن جي يونين]]، ڪامن ويلٿ کان ٻاهر به ڪم ڪن ٿيون، پر انهن جون سرگرميون شروعاتي طور ڪامن ويلٿ اندر شروع ٿيون ۽ اڄ به گهڻو ڪري اتي ئي مرڪوز آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Family2&quot;&gt;{{cite web |title=Commonwealth Family |url=http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20070831143745/http://www.thecommonwealth.org/Internal/151814/commonwealth_family/ |archive-date=31 August 2007 |access-date=29 July 2007 |publisher=[[Commonwealth Secretariat]]}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:UCT Upper Campus landscape view.jpg|thumb|[[ڪيپ ٽائون يونيورسٽي]]، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] جي ميمبر آهي]]

ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ پنهنجي تصديق ڪميٽي ذريعي ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي منظوري (Accreditation) جو انتظام ڪري ٿو. داخلا جي شرطن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ جي منشور سان وابستگي برقرار رکڻ شامل آهي. رسمي طور منظور ٿيل تنظيمن ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ يونيورسٽين جي انجمن]] شامل آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ اسڪالرشپ]] جو انتظام ڪري ٿي ته جيئن شاگرد ٻين ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ تعليم حاصل ڪري سگهن، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]]، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي 180 کان وڌيڪ پارليامينٽن کي پاڻ ۾ ڳنڍي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web |title=Directory of accredited organisations |url=https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |url-status=live |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230325041630/https://thecommonwealth.org/organisations-directory |archive-date=25 March 2023 |access-date=25 March 2023 |website= |publisher=Commonwealth Secretariat}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]] هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ حڪومتن جي مالي سهڪار سان هلندي آهي، انهن کي رپورٽ پيش ڪندي آهي، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ جي قدرن ۽ ترجيحن جي رهنمائي هيٺ ڪم ڪندي آهي. ان جو بنيادي مقصد شهري سماج کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي ترجيحن جي حصول لاءِ مضبوط بڻائڻ آهي، جن ۾ جمهوريت ۽ سٺي حڪمراني، انساني حقن ۽ صنفي برابري جو احترام، غربت جو خاتمو، عوام-مرڪوز ۽ پائيدار ترقي، ۽ فنون ۽ ثقافت جي واڌاري شامل آهن.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot; /&gt;

فائونڊيشن 1965ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان قائم ڪئي وئي. ان جي رڪنيت ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني ميمبرن لاءِ کليل آهي، ۽ ڊسمبر 2008ع تائين 53 مان 46 ميمبر ملڪ ان ۾ شامل هئا. شريڪ رڪنيت، جيڪا ميمبر حڪومتن سان لاڳاپيل رياستن يا سمنڊ پار علائقن لاءِ کليل آهي، جبرالٽر کي ڏني وئي آهي. 2005ع ۾ فائونڊيشن جي قيام جي 40هين سالگرهه ملهائي وئي. فائونڊيشن جو مرڪز [[مارلبرو هائوس]]، [[پال مال، لنڊن]] ۾ واقع آهي. سيڪريٽريٽ ۽ فائونڊيشن وچ ۾ باقاعده رابطا ۽ سهڪار موجود آهن. فائونڊيشن اڄ به انهن وسيع مقصدن جي خدمت ڪري رهي آهي، جن لاءِ اها مفاهمتي يادداشت موجب قائم ڪئي وئي هئي.&lt;ref name=&quot;CF About&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |title=Commonwealth Foundation – About Us |date=5 January 2006 |url-status=dead |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20060105094948/http://www.commonwealthfoundation.com/about/index.cfm |archive-date=5 January 2006 }}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون}}

[[File:Rugby melbourne commonwealth games.jpg|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] دنيا جو ٽيون وڏو گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهن، جتي عالمي طور مشهور راندين سان گڏ خاص &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ&quot; راندون، جهڙوڪ [[رگبي سيونز]]، پڻ شامل هونديون آهن. تصوير 2006ع جي رانديون دوران [[ميلبورن]] ۾ ورتل آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون هڪ [[گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو]] آهن، جيڪي هر چئن سالن کان پوءِ منعقد ڪيون وينديون آهن. [[2018ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] آسٽريليا جي گولڊ ڪوسٽ ۾، [[2022ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] برمنگهم ۾، ۽ [[2026ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گلاسگو ۾ منعقد ٿيون. [[اونهاري اولمپڪ رانديون]] وانگر عام ايٿليٽڪس مقابلن کان علاوه، انهن رانديُن ۾ اهڙيون راندون به شامل هونديون آهن جيڪي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ خاص طور مشهور آهن، جهڙوڪ [[بالز]]، [[نيٽ بال]] ۽ [[رگبي سيونز]].

هي رانديون 1930ع ۾ &quot;ايمپائر گيمز&quot; جي نالي سان شروع ٿيون. انهن جي بنياد اولمپڪ جي [[شوقيه راندين]] واري تصور تي رکيو ويو، پر انهن کي ڄاڻي واڻي &quot;دوستانه رانديون&quot; بڻايو ويو،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;&gt;{{cite journal|last=McKinnon|first=Don|author-link=Don McKinnon|date=February 2008|title=A Commonwealth of Values: a Commonwealth of incomparable value|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=97|issue=394|pages=19–28|doi=10.1080/00358530801890561|s2cid=153395786}}&lt;/ref&gt; جن جو مقصد ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن وچ ۾ لاڳاپن کي هٿي ڏيڻ ۽ سندن گڏيل راندين ۽ ثقافتي ورثي کي ملهائڻ هو.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;&gt;{{cite journal| date=July 2002 |title=Commonwealth Games and Art Festival|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=91|issue=365|pages=293–296|doi=10.1080/0035853022000010308|s2cid=219624041}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جون سڀ کان نمايان سرگرميون انهن رانديُن سان لاڳاپيل آهن،&lt;ref name=&quot;A Commonwealth of Values&quot;/&gt; ۽ جڏهن رانديون ٿينديون آهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ بابت دلچسپي به گهڻي وڌي ويندي آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=McDougall|first=Derek|date=July 2005|title=Australia and the Commonwealth|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=94|issue=380|pages=339–349|doi=10.1080/00358530500175033|s2cid=154343051}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ان ڳالهه تي بحث جاري رهيو آهي ته ڇا رانديون ۽ راندين جا ادارا ڪامن ويلٿ جي وسيع سياسي معاملن سان لاڳاپيل هجڻ گهرجن يا نه.&lt;ref name=&quot;Commonwealth Games and Art Festival&quot;/&gt; 1977ع ۾ [[گلينيگلز معاهدو]] منظور ڪيو ويو، جنهن تحت ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن نسل پرست [[اپارتھائيڊ]] نظام خلاف جدوجهد لاءِ ڏکڻ آفريڪا سان راندين وارن لاڳاپن جي حوصله شڪني ڪرڻ جو واعدو ڪيو. ان وقت ڏکڻ آفريڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جو ميمبر نه هو. جڏهن ته [[1986ع ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] گهڻن آفريقي، ايشيائي ۽ ڪيريبين ملڪن طرفان بائيڪاٽ ڪيون ويون، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ ٻين ملڪن گلينيگلز معاهدي تي مؤثر عمل نه ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Muda|first=Muhammad|date=April 1998|title=The significance of the Commonwealth Games in Malaysia's foreign policy|journal=[[The Round Table Journal|The Round Table]]|volume=87|issue=346|pages=211–226|doi=10.1080/00358539808454416|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون}}

[[ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] ڪامن ويلٿ رانديُن جو نوجوانن لاءِ مخصوص نسخو آهن، جن جو مقصد 14 کان 18 سالن جي عمر وارن رانديگرن کي موقعا فراهم ڪرڻ آهي. پهريون ڀيرو [[2000ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون]] اسڪاٽلينڊ جي ايڊنبرگ شهر ۾ منعقد ٿيون.

رانديُن جو سڀ کان تازو ايڊيشن [[2023ع ڪامن ويلٿ نوجوان رانديون|2023ع]] ۾ [[ٽرينيڊاڊ ۽ ٽوباگو]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.

===ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن===
{{main|ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن}}

[[File:Azmak Cemetery, Gallipoli Peninsula.JPG|thumb|[[ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن]] ڪامن ويلٿ جي 17 لک جنگي شهيدن کي ياد ڪري ٿي ۽ دنيا ۾ 2,500 جنگي قبرستانن جي سنڀال ڪري ٿي، جن مان هي هڪ [[گليپولي]] ۾ واقع آهي.|220x220px]]

ڪامن ويلٿ جنگي قبرون ڪميشن (CWGC) انهن 17 لک فوجي اهلڪارن جي قبرن جي سنڀال جي ذميوار آهي، جيڪي پهرين ۽ ٻي عالمي جنگ دوران ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جي طرفان وڙهندي فوت ٿيا. هي ڪميشن 1917ع ۾ (امپيريل وار گريوز ڪميشن جي نالي سان) قائم ڪئي وئي هئي. هن 2,500 [[جنگي قبرستان]] تعمير ڪيا آهن ۽ دنيا جي 20,000 ٻين هنڌن تي موجود انفرادي قبرن جي به سنڀال ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Ten Key Things About War Graves&quot;&gt;{{cite news|title=Ten Key Things About War Graves|first=Annie|last=Dare|newspaper=[[The Observer]]|date=15 October 2000|page=29}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ}}

ڪامن ويلٿ آف لرننگ (COL) هڪ بين الحڪومتي تنظيم آهي، جيڪا [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن|حڪومتي سربراهن]] طرفان کليل سکيا/فاصلاتي تعليم بابت ڄاڻ، وسيلن ۽ ٽيڪنالاجين جي ترقي ۽ ورڇ کي هٿي ڏيڻ لاءِ قائم ڪئي وئي. COL ترقي پذير ملڪن کي معياري تعليم ۽ تربيت تائين رسائي بهتر بڻائڻ ۾ مدد ڪري رهيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=https://www.col.org/about/|title=About the Commonwealth of Learning|access-date=11 April 2023|archive-date=11 April 2023|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20230411163836/https://www.col.org/about/|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم===
{{Main|ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم}}

ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم (CLGF) هڪ عالمي مقامي حڪومت تنظيم آهي، جيڪا ڪامن ويلٿ جي ميمبر ملڪن ۾ مقامي اختيارين، انهن جي قومي انجمنن ۽ مقامي حڪومت بابت ذميوار وزارتن کي گڏ ڪري ٿي. CLGF قومي ۽ [[مقامي حڪومت]]ن سان گڏجي [[جمهوريت|جمهوري قدرن]] ۽ سٺي مقامي حڪمراني جي ترقي جي حمايت ڪري ٿو، ۽ اها ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مقامي حڪومت جي نمائنده اداري طور [[ڪامن ويلٿ جي سربراهن]] طرفان باضابطه طور تسليم ٿيل لاڳاپيل تنظيم آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|title=Commonwealth Local Government Forum (CLGF) {{!}} The Commonwealth|website=thecommonwealth.org|date=31 July 2013|language=en|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=1 February 2019|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190201155851/http://thecommonwealth.org/organisation/commonwealth-local-government-forum-clgf|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

CLGF ان لحاظ کان منفرد آهي ته اهو مقامي حڪومت جي پاليسي ۽ فيصلا سازي ۾ شامل مرڪزي، صوبائي ۽ مقامي حڪومتي سطحن کي گڏ ڪري ٿو. CLGF جي ميمبرن ۾ مقامي حڪومت جون انجمنون، انفرادي مقامي اختيارين، مقامي حڪومت سان لاڳاپيل وزارتون، ۽ اهي تحقيقي ۽ پيشور تنظيمون شامل آهن، جيڪي مقامي حڪومت سان ڪم ڪن ٿيون. عملي کان عملي تائين سهڪار CLGF جي ڪم جو بنيادي حصو آهي، جيڪو سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۽ علائقائي سطح تي CLGF جي پنهنجي ميمبرن کي استعمال ڪري ٻين جي مدد ڪري ٿو، علائقن اندر به ۽ علائقن جي وچ ۾ به. CLGF مقامي ۽ علائقائي حڪومتن جي عالمي ٽاسڪ فورس جو ميمبر آهي، جيڪا گڏيل قومن جي مقامي اختيارين واري ميجر گروپ جي رسمي ڀائيوار آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|title=Global Taskforce of Local and Regional Governments|website=globaltaskforce|access-date=23 February 2017|archive-date=11 January 2017|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170111201233/http://www.gtf2016.org/about-us|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;

==ثقافت==
{{See also|برطانوي ثقافت}}

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ هڪ گڏيل ثقافت رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ انگريزي ٻولي، رانديون، قانوني نظام، تعليم ۽ حڪومت شامل آهن. اهي هڪجهڙايون هن تنظيم جي ورثي جو نتيجو آهن، جيڪو برطانوي سلطنت مان ترقي ڪري نڪتو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |first= |title=The Commonwealth |url=https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/peace-rights-and-security/the-commonwealth/ |access-date=8 January 2024 |website=New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade |language=en-NZ}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=UK Representation in the Commonwealth |url=https://www.gov.uk/world/organisations/uk-representation-in-the-commonwealth |access-date=23 May 2024 |website=GOV.UK |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشانين ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جو جهنڊو|ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] شامل آهن. [[يادگيري جو ڏينهن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ ملهايو ويندو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last= |title=Remembrance |url=https://www.cwgc.org/our-work/outreach/remembrance/ |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=Commonwealth War Graces Commission |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Remembrance Day vs ANZAC Day explained |url=https://remembertoremember.com.au/blog/remembrance-day-vs-anzac-day-explained?dicbo=v4-9816lox-1076708621 |access-date=20 July 2024 |website=RSL Australia |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪجهه ملڪن ۾ [[گائي فاڪس نائيٽ]] جون تقريبون پڻ ٿينديون آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Slater |first=Jack |date=29 October 2022 |title=Do any other countries celebrate Bonfire Night? |url=https://metro.co.uk/2022/10/29/is-bonfire-night-only-in-the-uk-17662141/ |access-date=7 November 2024 |website=Metro |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جي برطانوي سڃاڻپ بابت ڪينيا جي عالم [[علي مزروئي]] چيو ته: &quot;آخرڪار، هڪ نيوزيلينڊر کي هڪ جميڪن يا زيمبين سان ڪهڙي شيءِ گڏيل ٿي سگهي ٿي، جيڪڏهن گڏيل برطانوي هجڻ جا رشتا نه هجن؟&quot;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last1=Mazrui |first1=Ali Al Amin |title=Anglo-African Commonwealth |last2=Taylor |first2=D. |last3=Bradley |first3=Kenneth |date=1967 |publisher=Pergamon |isbn=978-0-08-012253-3 |pages=40–41}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite book |last=Miller |first=J. D. B. |title=Survey of Commonwealth affairs: problems of expansion 1953-1969 |date=1974 |publisher=Oxford university press |isbn=978-0-19-214999-2 |location=London New York Toronto |pages=434}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;:7&quot; /&gt;{{rp|62}}

===راند===
[[File:Gahanga cricket stadium.jpg|thumb|[[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ اسٽيڊيم]]، ڪگالي، روانڊا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي رڪنيت کي ملڪ ۾ هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ جو سبب ڄاتو ويو آهي، جيتوڻيڪ اهو ملڪ ڪڏهن به برطانوي سلطنت جو حصو نه رهيو.]]

ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ اهڙيون ساڳيون رانديون کيڏن ٿا، جن کي بنيادي طور برطانوي ڪردار واريون سمجهيو ويندو آهي، جيڪي برطانوي حڪمراني يا بالادستي هيٺ جڙيون ۽ ترقي ڪريون، جن ۾ [[ڪرڪيٽ]]، [[ايسوسيئيشن فٽبال]]، [[رگبي فٽبال|رگبي]]، [[فيلڊ هاڪي]] ۽ [[نيٽ بال]] شامل آهن. اهي لاڳاپا خاص طور گڏيل بادشاهت، آسٽريليا، نيوزيلينڊ ۽ ڏکڻ آفريڪا وچ ۾ [[رگبي يونين]]، ڪرڪيٽ، نيٽ بال ۽ فيلڊ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن؛ آسٽريليا سان [[رگبي ليگ]] ۾، ڪيريبين ملڪن سان ڪرڪيٽ ۽ نيٽ بال ۾، ۽ هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ سان [[هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ ۾ ڪرڪيٽ|ڪرڪيٽ]] ۽ هاڪي ۾ مضبوط آهن. ان جي ابتڙ، ڪئناڊا تي اتر آمريڪي راندين جو غلبو آهي، جن ۾ ڪرڪيٽ بدران بيس بال، نيٽ بال بدران باسڪيٽ بال، فيلڊ هاڪي بدران آئس هاڪي ۽ رگبي يونين يا ليگ بدران ڪئناڊين فٽبال شامل آهن. تنهن هوندي به، ڪئناڊا ڪامن ويلٿ جي سڀني وڌيڪ روايتي راندين ۾ ننڍيون پر پرجوش برادريون برقرار رکي ٿو، ۽ انهن مان هر هڪ ۾ ورلڊ ڪپ تائين پهتو آهي. اهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] جو جنم هنڌ پڻ آهي، جتي 1930ع ۾ [[1930ع برطانوي سلطنت رانديون|پهريون ايڊيشن هئملٽن]] ۾ منعقد ٿيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|last=Perkin|first=Harold|date=September 1989|title=Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British Empire and Commonwealth |journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=6|issue=2|pages=145–155|doi=10.1080/09523368908713685}}&lt;/ref&gt;
هن گڏيل راندين واري منظرنامي سبب وڏين راندين وارين قومن وچ ۾ دوستانه قومي مقابلا پيدا ٿيا، جن اڪثر سندن هڪ ٻئي سان لاڳاپن جي تعريف ڪئي آهي. هندستان، آسٽريليا ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي حالتن ۾ انهن مقابليُن سندن اڀرندڙ قومي ڪردار جي تعمير ۾ وڏو حصو ادا ڪيو آهي، خاص طور ڪرڪيٽ، رگبي ليگ ۽ رگبي يونين ۾. حقيقت ۾، انهن مقابليُن عالمي لاڳاپن ۾ هڪ مستقل عنصر فراهم ڪري ويجها لاڳاپا برقرار رکيا، جيتوڻيڪ سلطنت ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ تبديل ٿي وئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite journal|first=Michael|last=Dawson|date=February 2006|title=Acting global, thinking local: 'Liquid imperialism' and the multiple meanings of the 1954 British Empire &amp; Commonwealth Games|journal=International Journal of the History of Sport|volume=23|issue=1|pages=3–27|doi=10.1080/09523360500386419|doi-access=free}}&lt;/ref&gt; ٻاهرين طور، انهن راندين کيڏڻ کي ڪامن ويلٿ جي هڪ خاص ثقافت ۾ شريڪ ٿيڻ جي نشاني سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ روانڊا جي اسڪولن ۾ [[روانڊا ڪرڪيٽ انجمن|ڪرڪيٽ]] اختيار ڪرڻ کي ملڪ جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت ڏانهن وڌڻ جي علامت طور ڏٺو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|last=Clayton|first=Jonathan|title=Schoolboy cricketers bat their way to a place in the Commonwealth|url=http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|newspaper=[[The Times]]|date=20 November 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London|archive-date=8 October 2008|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20081008004746/http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/africa/article2903598.ece|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|first=Mike |last=Pflanz|title=Rwanda in drive to join Commonwealth|url=https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-url=https://ghostarchive.org/archive/20220110/https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/1558285/Rwanda-in-drive-to-join-Commonwealth.html |archive-date=10 January 2022 |url-access=subscription |url-status=live|newspaper=[[The Daily Telegraph]]|date=24 July 2007|access-date=27 March 2009|location=London}}{{cbignore}}&lt;/ref&gt; روانڊا جي ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت کي ملڪ اندر هن راند کي مشهور ڪرڻ ۾ مددگار قرار ڏنو ويو، جتي مرد ۽ عورتون يتيم خانن، اسڪولن، يونيورسٽين ۽ ڪرڪيٽ ڪلبن ۾ ان کي کيڏن ٿا.&lt;ref name=&quot;Duncan&quot;&gt;{{cite book |last=Duncan |first=Isabelle |title=Skirting the Boundary: A History of Women's Cricket |publisher=Robson Press |year=2013 |isbn=9781849545464 |location=London}}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون، پنهنجي نوجوانن واري نسخي سان گڏ، هڪ چارسالي گهڻ-راندين وارو مقابلو آهي، جيڪو [[اولمپڪ رانديون|اولمپڪ]] چڪر جي وچ واري سال ۾ منعقد ٿيندو آهي، ۽ انهن راندين وارن لاڳاپن جو سڀ کان نمايان اظهار آهي. رانديُن ۾ عام گهڻ-راندين وارا شعبا، جهڙوڪ ايٿليٽڪس، ترڻ، جمناسٽڪ، وزن کڻڻ، باڪسنگ، فيلڊ هاڪي ۽ سائيڪلنگ شامل آهن، پر انهن ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ مشهور ۽ انهن رانديُن لاءِ مخصوص راندون، جهڙوڪ نيٽ بال، اسڪواش ۽ لان بالز پڻ شامل آهن. اهي رانديون اولمپڪس جهڙن مقابلن کان وڌيڪ واضح طور سياسي به آهن، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهي انهن ڳالهين کي فروغ ڏين ٿيون، جن کي ڪامن ويلٿ جا قدر سمجهيو ويندو آهي؛ تاريخي طور گڏيل فوجي ڪوششن جي تاريخ کي ملهايو ۽ فروغ ڏنو ويو، پيراسپورٽ ۽ معذورن جون رانديون مڪمل طور شامل ڪيون ويون، ۽ ڪامن ويلٿ گيمز فيڊريشن عوامي طور LGBT ماڻهن جي حقن جي حمايت ڪئي آهي، جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ جي ڪيترن ئي ملڪن ۾ هم جنس پرستي اڃا به ڏوهه قرار ڏنل آهي.

===ادب===
{{See also|ڪامن ويلٿ انگريزي|پس نوآبادياتي ادب|مهاجر ادب|ڪامن ويلٿ ادب جو جرنل}}

برطانوي موجودگي جي گڏيل تاريخ ڪيترين ئي ٻولين ۾ لکڻ جو هڪ وڏو ذخيرو پيدا ڪيو آهي، جنهن کي ڪامن ويلٿ ادب چيو وڃي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=A report on stories from the outposts of Commonwealth literature|first=Douglas|last=Hill|newspaper=[[The Globe and Mail]]|date=1 October 1988|page=21}}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=English Is a World Language – and That's to Be Prized|first=Robert|last=McCrum|newspaper=[[Los Angeles Times]]|date=13 October 2003|page=B15}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪامن ويلٿ ادب ۽ ٻولي جي مطالعي واري انجمن (ACLALS) جون دنيا ڀر ۾ 11 شاخون آهن ۽ اها هر ٽن سالن کان پوءِ هڪ بين الاقوامي ڪانفرنس منعقد ڪري ٿي.&lt;ref name=&quot;Tunca 2018&quot;&gt;{{cite web | last=Tunca | first=Daria | title=ACLALS: Association for Commonwealth Literature and Language Studies | website=ACLALS | date=27 September 2018 | url=http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | access-date=13 December 2018 | archive-date=16 December 2018 | archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20181216032000/http://www.aclals.ulg.ac.be/ | url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Jennifer-Nasubuga-Makumbi.jpg|left|thumb|يوگنڊا-برطانوي ناول نگار [[جينيفر نانسوبوگا ماڪومبي]] 2014ع ۾ [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] کٽيو.]]

1987ع ۾ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رائيٽرز پرائز]] قائم ڪيو، جنهن جو مقصد &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ جي نئين افسانوي ادب جي واڌ کي همٿائڻ ۽ انعام ڏيڻ، ۽ يقيني بڻائڻ هو ته معياري ڪم پنهنجي اصل ملڪ کان ٻاهر وسيع پڙهندڙن تائين پهچي&quot;. ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ انعام ڏنا ويندا هئا؛ چئن علائقن مان هر هڪ ۾ بهترين ڪتاب ۽ بهترين پهرين ڪتاب لاءِ علائقائي انعام پڻ هوندا هئا. جيتوڻيڪ ڪامن ويلٿ سان رسمي طور لاڳاپيل نه هو، پر معزز ساليانو [[بوڪر پرائز|مين بوڪر پرائز]]، جيڪو ادب جي اعليٰ ترين اعزازن مان هڪ آهي،&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news|title=The Empire Writes Back|first=Pico|last=Iyer|newspaper=[[The Straits Times]]|date=12 February 1993|page=1}}&lt;/ref&gt; اڳ ۾ رڳو ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن يا اڳوڻن ميمبرن، جهڙوڪ آئرلينڊ ۽ زمبابوي، جي ليکڪن کي ڏنو ويندو هو. 2014ع کان پوءِ، ڪنهن به قوميت جا ليکڪ ان انعام لاءِ اهل ٿي ويا آهن، بشرطيڪ اهي اصل ۾ انگريزي ۾ لکن ۽ سندن ناول گڏيل بادشاهت جي قائم ٿيل پبلشرن طرفان شايع ٿين.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite web|url=http://manbookerprize.com/news/2013/12/12/meet-man-booker-prize-2014-judges|title=Meet the Man Booker Prize 2014 Judges|website=The Man Booker Prizes|date=12 December 2013|access-date=10 June 2017}}{{Dead link|date=December 2023 |bot=InternetArchiveBot |fix-attempted=yes }}&lt;/ref&gt; اڄ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن ساليانو [[ڪامن ويلٿ شارٽ اسٽوري پرائز]] ڏئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth Short Story Prize |url=https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |access-date=5 January 2024 |website=Commonwealth Foundation |language=en-GB |archive-date=2 December 2023 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20231202062846/https://commonwealthfoundation.com/short-story-prize/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[File:Olive Schreiner00.jpg|thumb|ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]]]]

ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪ [[اوليو شرائنر]] جو مشهور ناول ''[[دي اسٽوري آف اين آفريڪن فارم]]'' 1883ع ۾ شايع ٿيو، ۽ نيوزيلينڊ جي [[ڪيٿرين مينسفيلڊ]] 1911ع ۾ پنهنجي مختصر ڪهاڻين جو پهريون مجموعو ''[[ان اي جرمن پينشن]]'' شايع ڪيو. [[هندستاني انگريزي ادب|هندستاني ننڍي کنڊ]] مان انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارو پهريون اهم ناول نگار [[آر. ڪي. نارائن]] هو، جنهن 1930ع واري ڏهاڪي ۾ انگلينڊ ۾ اشاعت شروع ڪئي، انگريزي ناول نگار [[گراهم گرين]] جي حوصلا افزائي سبب.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book| editor-last=Drabble|editor-first=Margaret|title=The Oxford Companion to English Literature|location=Oxford|publisher=Oxford University Press|year=1996}}&lt;/ref&gt; ڪيريبين ليکڪ [[جين ريس]] جو ادبي سفر 1928ع کان ئي شروع ٿيو، جيتوڻيڪ سندس سڀ کان مشهور ڪم، ''[[وائڊ سرگاسو سي]]''، 1966ع تائين شايع نه ٿيو. ڏکڻ آفريڪي [[ايلن پيٽن]] جو مشهور ''[[ڪرائي، دي بليوڊ ڪنٽري]]'' 1948ع جو آهي. [[ڏاکڻي روڊيشيا]]، هاڻوڪي زمبابوي، جي [[ڊورس ليسنگ]] انگريزي ادبي منظر ۾ هڪ غالب موجودگي هئي، جيڪا 1950ع کان پوءِ سڄي 20هين صديءَ ۾ لڳاتار شايع ٿيندي رهي. هن 2007ع ۾ [[ادب ۾ نوبل انعام]] حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web|url=https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|title=The Nobel Prize in Literature 2007|website=Nobelprize.org|access-date=10 June 2017|archive-date=10 August 2018|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180810175617/https://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2007/index.html|url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

[[سلمان رشدي]] ٻي عالمي جنگ کان پوءِ اڳوڻين برطانوي نوآبادين مان هڪ ٻيو ليکڪ آهي، جيڪو [[مهاجر ادب|مستقل طور گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ آباد ٿيو]]. رشدي ''[[مڊنائيٽس چلڊرن]]'' (1981ع) سان شهرت حاصل ڪئي. سندس سڀ کان تڪراري ناول ''[[دي سيٽينڪ ورسيز]]'' (1989ع) جزوي طور محمد جي زندگيءَ کان متاثر هو. [[وي. ايس. نائيپال]] (پيدائش 1932ع)، جيڪو [[ٽرينيڊاڊ]] ۾ ڄائو، هڪ ٻيو مهاجر ليکڪ هو، جنهن ٻين ڪمن سان گڏ ''[[اي بينڊ ان دي رور]]'' (1979ع) لکيو. نائيپال 2001ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو.&lt;ref name=&quot;nobelweb&quot;&gt;{{cite web | url = http://nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | work = Literature | title = The Nobel Prize in Literature 2001 | publisher = Nobel Prize Outreach AB | access-date = 26 June 2016 | archive-date = 15 September 2012 | archive-url = https://web.archive.org/web/20120915131638/http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/literature/laureates/2001/ | url-status = live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

ڪامن ويلٿ جا ڪيترائي ٻيا ليکڪ به انگريزي ۾ لکيل ڪم سبب بين الاقوامي شهرت حاصل ڪري چڪا آهن، جن ۾ نائيجيريا جو ناول نگار [[چنوا اچيبے]] ۽ ڊراما نگار [[وولي سوينڪا]] شامل آهن. سوينڪا 1986ع ۾ ادب ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو، جيئن ڏکڻ آفريڪي ناول نگار [[نادين گورڊيمر]] 1995ع ۾ حاصل ڪيو. انگريزي ۾ لکڻ وارن ٻين ڏکڻ آفريڪي ليکڪن ۾ ناول نگار [[جي. ايم. ڪوئٽزي]] (نوبل انعام 2003ع) ۽ ڊراما نگار [[ايٿول فوگارڊ]] شامل آهن. ڪينيا جو سڀ کان بين الاقوامي طور مشهور ليکڪ [[نگوگي وا ٿيونگو]] آهي، جيڪو انگريزي ۾ ناولن، ڊرامن ۽ مختصر ڪهاڻين جو ليکڪ آهي. ڪيريبين جي [[سينٽ لوشيا]] سان تعلق رکندڙ شاعر [[ڊيرڪ والڪوٽ]] هڪ ٻيو نوبل انعام يافته هو، جنهن 1992ع ۾ اهو انعام کٽيو. آسٽريليا جو [[پيٽرڪ وائٽ]] هن دور جو اهم ناول نگار هو، جنهن جو پهريون ڪم 1939ع ۾ شايع ٿيو ۽ جنهن 1973ع ۾ نوبل انعام حاصل ڪيو. هن دور جي آخر ۾ ٻيا قابل ذڪر آسٽريليائي ليکڪ شاعر [[ليس مري (شاعر)|ليس مري]] ۽ ناول نگار [[پيٽر ڪيري (ناول نگار)|پيٽر ڪيري]] آهن، جيڪو انهن صرف چئن ليکڪن مان هڪ آهي جن [[بوڪر پرائز]] ٻه ڀيرا کٽيو آهي.&lt;ref&gt;Man Booker official site: [http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell J. G. Farrell] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170129070148/http://themanbookerprize.com/search/node/j%20g%20farrell |date=29 January 2017 }}; [https://web.archive.org/web/20120921205624/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/hilary-mantel Hilary Mantel]: [http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee J. M. Coetzee] {{webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20160317185406/http://themanbookerprize.com/people/j-m-coetzee |date=17 March 2016 }}.&lt;/ref&gt;

===سياست ۽ عدليا===
[[File:Glimpses of the new Parliament Building, in New Delhi (2).jpg|thumb|[[نئون پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي|پارليامينٽ هائوس، نئين دهلي]]، هندستان. ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت سان ڪامن ويلٿ جي وابستگي بيان ڪري ٿو، ۽ ڪيترائي ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] استعمال ڪن ٿا.]]
[[File:The Queen's Platinum Jubilee Beacon Event, Wellington.jpg|thumb|2022ع ۾ [[ويلنگٽن]]، نيوزيلينڊ ۾ [[ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي|راڻي ايلزبيٿ ٻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي]] لاءِ [[راڻي جي پلاٽينم جوبلي بيڪنز|جوبلي بيڪن]] روشن ڪرڻ]]

ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن جا قانوني ۽ حڪومتي نظام هڪجهڙا آهن، جڏهن ته ڪامن ويلٿ منشور جمهوريت، انساني حقن ۽ قانون جي حڪمراني سان وابستگين کي شامل ڪري ٿو. گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[پارلياماني نظام]] واري جمهوريت جو [[ويسٽ منسٽر نظام]] رکن ٿا، جنهن ۾ چونڊيل قانون ساز ادارا، گهڻ پارٽي چونڊون، [[ذميوار حڪومت]] ۽ اڪثر ٻه ايوان هوندا آهن.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Commonwealth of Nations |url=https://www.parliament.uk/about/living-heritage/evolutionofparliament/legislativescrutiny/parliament-and-empire/contemporary-context/ |access-date=21 March 2025 |website= |publisher=UK Parliament |language=en}}&lt;/ref&gt; [[ڪامن ويلٿ پارلياماني انجمن]] سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ جي قانون ساز ادارن وچ ۾ سهڪار کي آسان بڻائي ٿي، ۽ [[ڪامن ويلٿ مقامي حڪومت فورم]] [[مقامي حڪومت]] جي عملدارن ۾ [[سٺي حڪمراني]] کي فروغ ڏئي ٿو.&lt;ref&gt;{{cite book |url=https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |title=The Statesman's Yearbook 2017: The Politics, Cultures and Economies of the World |publisher=Palgrave Macmillan UK |year=2017 |isbn=978-1-349-68398-7 |page=46 |access-date=27 January 2018 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20190330165149/https://books.google.com/books?id=PBs9DgAAQBAJ&amp;pg=PA46 |archive-date=30 March 2019 |url-status=live}}&lt;/ref&gt;

تنهن هوندي به، ڪامن ويلٿ قيادت تي 2022ع ۾ ڪگالي، روانڊا ۾ ٿيل ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس دوران گابون کي ميمبر طور قبول ڪرڻ تي تنقيد ڪئي وئي، ڇاڪاڻ⁠تہ اهو ملڪ انساني حقن جي خراب رڪارڊ وارو هو. گابون 56 سالن تائين ڪليپٽوڪريٽڪ بونگو خاندان جي حڪومت هيٺ رهيو، جيستائين 2023ع ۾ هڪ بغاوت ذريعي انهن کي اقتدار تان هٽايو ويو.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Gruenbaum |first=Oren |date=8 September 2023 |title=Why was a country as corrupt as Ali Bongo's Gabon ever admitted to the Commonwealth? |url=https://www.commonwealthroundtable.co.uk/general/eye-on-the-commonwealth/why-was-a-country-as-corrupt-as-ali-bongos-gabon-ever-admitted-to-the-commonwealth/# |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Round Table |language=en-GB}}&lt;/ref&gt;

گهڻا ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪ [[عام قانون]] استعمال ڪن ٿا، جيڪو [[انگريزي قانون]] جي نموني تي ٻڌل آهي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |title=Legal |url=https://www.commonwealthofnations.org/?sectors=business/legal |access-date=3 March 2025 |website=Commonwealth of Nations |language=en-UK}}&lt;/ref&gt; 2003ع ۾ اختيار ڪيل لاٽيمر هائوس اصول [[اختيارن جي ورهاست]] کي ظاهر ڪن ٿا.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |date=September 2023 |title=Commonwealth Latimer House Principles on the Three Branches of Government |url=https://www.cpahq.org/media/kafl4zuf/commonwealth_principles_cpa_sept_2023-v2_single.pdf |access-date=4 March 2025 |publisher=Commonwealth Parliamentary Association}}&lt;/ref&gt; گهڻن ڪامن ويلٿ ملڪن ۾ جج آزاد ڪميشنن ذريعي مقرر ٿين ٿا، هڪ تبديلي جيڪا 20هين صديءَ جي آخر ۽ 21هين صديءَ جي شروعات ۾ سڄي ڪامن ويلٿ ۾ آئي ۽ ڪيپ ٽائون اصولن ۾ پڻ ظاهر ٿئي ٿي.&lt;ref&gt;{{Cite web |last=Corder |first=Hugh |date=11 March 2016 |title=How Commonwealth countries have forged a new way to appoint judges |url=https://theconversation.com/how-commonwealth-countries-have-forged-a-new-way-to-appoint-judges-56090 |access-date=21 March 2025 |website=The Conversation |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt;

===نشانيون===
ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيترائي اهڙا نشان اختيار ڪيا آهن، جيڪي ان جي ميمبرن جي انجمن جي نمائندگي ڪن ٿا. انگريزي ٻولي کي ميمبرن جي ورثي جي نشاني طور تسليم ڪيو ويو آهي؛ ڪامن ويلٿ جي نشاني سمجهڻ کان علاوه، ان کي &quot;ڪامن ويلٿ رابطي جو ذريعو&quot; طور تسليم ڪرڻ ڪامن ويلٿ رڪنيت لاءِ هڪ اڳواٽ شرط آهي.

[[ڪامن ويلٿ جو جهنڊو]] ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ جي نشان تي مشتمل آهي، جنهن ۾ ڳاڙهي نيري ميدان تي نڪرندڙ ڪرڻن سان گهيريل سونهري گولو آهي؛ اهو 1973ع واري [[ڪامن ويلٿ سربراهن جي حڪومتي اجلاس 1973ع|ٻئي CHOGM]] لاءِ ٺاهيو ويو ۽ 26 مارچ 1976ع تي باضابطه طور اختيار ڪيو ويو. 1976ع ۾ تنظيم [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڏينهن]] ملهائڻ لاءِ هڪ گڏيل تاريخ تي پڻ راضي ٿي، يعني مارچ جو ٻيو سومر، جيڪو اڳ [[ايمپائر ڊي]] جي تقريبن مان الڳ الڳ تاريخن تي ترقي ڪري آيو هو.&lt;ref&gt;''Flags of All Nations: Flags of the British Commonwealth of Nations'' (Brown, Son &amp; Ferguson, 1952)&lt;/ref&gt;

===سڃاڻپ===
2009ع ۾، ڪامن ويلٿ جي قيام جي 60هين سالگرهه ملهائڻ لاءِ، [[رائل ڪامن ويلٿ سوسائٽي]] ستن ميمبر رياستن: آسٽريليا، ڪئناڊا، هندستان، جميڪا، ملائيشيا، ڏکڻ آفريڪا ۽ گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ عوامي راءِ جو هڪ سروي ڪرايو. ان مان معلوم ٿيو ته انهن ملڪن جا گهڻا ماڻهو [[ڪامن ويلٿ رانديون]] کان سواءِ ڪامن ويلٿ جي سرگرمين بابت وڏي حد تائين اڻڄاڻ هئا، ۽ ان جي مستقبل بابت به بي پرواهه هئا. ڪامن ويلٿ جي حمايت ترقي پذير ملڪن ۾ ترقي يافته ملڪن جي ڀيٽ ۾ ٻه ڀيرا وڌيڪ هئي؛ اها گڏيل بادشاهت ۾ سڀ کان گهٽ هئي.&lt;ref&gt;{{usurped|1=[https://web.archive.org/web/20140808043749/https://thercs.org/assets/Research-/Commonwealth-Conversation-Final-Report.pdf Royal Commonwealth Society, ''An Uncommon Association, a Wealth of Potential:  Final Report of the Commonwealth Conversation'' (London, Royal Commonwealth Society, 2010)]}}.&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |author-link=Dhananjayan Sriskandarajah|first= Dhananjayan |last=Sriskandarajah |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |title=Canada, Commonwealth and the key to relevance |work=The Globe and Mail|date=21 July 2009 |access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510024750/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/commentary/canada-commonwealth-and-the-key-to-relevance/article4279734/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |first=Elizabeth |last=Renzetti |url=https://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |title=Commonwealth: quaint historical relic or meaningful bloc? |work=The Globe and Mail |date=20 July 2009|access-date=18 April 2013 |archive-date=10 May 2013 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20130510011926/http://www.theglobeandmail.com/news/world/commonwealth-quaint-historical-relic-or-meaningful-bloc/article4279618/ |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{cite news |url=https://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |title=Queen marks Commonwealth launch |work=BBC News |date=9 March 2009|access-date=5 August 2014 |archive-date=10 August 2014 |archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20140810030912/http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/7931706.stm |url-status=live }}&lt;/ref&gt;

==پڻ ڏسو==
{{portal|ملڪ|گڏيل بادشاهت}}
* [[اينگلو سفير]]
* [[انگريزي ڳالهائيندڙ دنيا]]
* [[ڪامن ويلٿ ڪيريبين]]
* [[جي ڊي پي جي لحاظ کان ڪامن ويلٿ قومن جي ملڪن جي فهرست]]
* [[فرانڪوفوني جي بين الاقوامي تنظيم|لا فرانڪوفوني]] (OIF)، انهن ملڪن جي انجمن جتي فرينچ ٻولي ۽ فرينچ ثقافت نمايان آهن
* [[پرتگالي ٻولي وارن ملڪن جي برادري]]، [[پرتگالي ٻولي|پرتگالي ڳالهائيندڙ]] ملڪن ۽ علائقن جو گروهه
* [[آئبرو-آمريڪي رياستن جي تنظيم]]، جيڪا [[آئبيرين رومانس ٻوليون|آئبيروفون]] قومن تي مشتمل آهي
* [[لاطيني يونين]]، جيڪا [[رومانس ٻوليون]] استعمال ڪندڙ قومن تي مشتمل هئي
* [[ڊچ ٻولي يونين]]

==حوالا==
{{Reflist}}

==وڌيڪ پڙهڻ==
{{refbegin|40em}}
* Ashton, Sarah R. &quot;British government perspectives on the Commonwealth, 1964–71: An asset or a liability?&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 35.1 (2007): 73–94.
* Bloomfield, Valerie. ''Commonwealth Elections 1945–1970'' (1976).
* Cook, Chris and John Paxton. ''Commonwealth Political Facts'' (Macmillan, 1978).
* Hall, H. Duncan. &quot;The genesis of the Balfour declaration of 1926&quot;. ''Journal of Commonwealth &amp; Comparative Politics'' 1.3 (1962): 169–193.
* Holland, Robert F. ''Britain and the Commonwealth Alliance, 1918–39'' (Springer, 1981).
* {{cite book |last1=Jebb |first1=Richard |author-link=Richard Claverhouse Jebb|title=The Empire and the century |year = 1905 |publisher=John Murray |location=London |pages=332–348 |chapter=[[s:The Empire and the century/Imperial Organization|Imperial Organization]]}}
* Lloyd, Lorna. ''Diplomacy with a difference: the Commonwealth Office of High Commissioner, 1880–2006'' (Brill, 2007).
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The strange death of dominion status&quot;. ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 27.2 (1999): 193–212.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''The commonwealth of nations: Origins and impact, 1869–1971'' (University of Minnesota Press, 1977); Comprehensive coverage giving London's perspective on political and constitutional relations with each possession.
* McIntyre, W. David. ''A Guide to the Contemporary Commonwealth'', Palgrave, 2001. {{ISBN|978-0-333-96310-4}}.
* McIntyre, W. David. &quot;The Unofficial Commonwealth Relations Conferences, 1933–59: Precursors of the Tri-sector Commonwealth.&quot; ''Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History'' 36.4 (2008): 591–614.
* Madden, Frederick and John Darwin, eds. ''The Dependent Empire, 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and the Mandates'' (1994), 908 pp. [https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202045423/https://www.questia.com/library/91753673/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Maitland, Donald. ed. ''Britain, the Commonwealth and Europe'' (Palgrave Macmillan UK, 2001) [http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819203743/http://vm3.ehaus2.co.uk/macmillan/resources/sample-chapters/9780333800133_sample.pdf |date=19 August 2018 }}
* [[Nicholas Mansergh|نڪولس مانسرگ]] ''The Commonwealth in the World'', [[University of Toronto Press]], 1982. {{ISBN|978-0-8020-2492-3}}.
* Moore, R.J. ''Making the New Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1988. {{ISBN|978-0-19-820112-0}}.
* Murphy, Philip. ''Monarchy and the End of Empire: The House of Windsor, the British Government, and the Postwar Commonwealth'' (Oxford UP 2013) {{doi|10.1093/acprof:oso/9780199214235.001.0001}}
* Perkin, Harold. &quot;Teaching the nations how to play: sport and society in the British empire and Commonwealth&quot;. ''International Journal of the History of Sport'' 6.2 (1989): 145–155.
* Shaw, Timothy M. ''Commonwealth: Inter- and Non-State Contributions to Global Governance'', Routledge, 2008. {{ISBN|978-0-415-35120-1}}
* Srinivasan, Krishnan. ''The rise, decline and future of the British Commonwealth'' (Springer, 2005).
* Wheare, K. C. ''The Constitutional Structure of the Commonwealth'', Clarendon Press, 1960. {{ISBN|978-0-313-23624-2}}.
* Williams, Paul D. &quot;Blair's Britain and the Commonwealth&quot;. ''The Round Table'' 94.380 (2005): 381–391.
* Winks, Robin, ed. ''The Historiography of the British Empire-Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources'' (1966) [https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170623131142/https://www.questia.com/library/95979771/the-historiography-of-the-british-empire-commonwealth |date=23 June 2017 }}
{{refend}}

===بنيادي ماخذ===
{{refbegin}}
* Madden, Frederick, ed. ''The End of Empire: Dependencies since 1948: Select Documents on the Constitutional History of the British Empire and Commonwealth: The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and the Falklands'' (2000) [https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select  online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819204658/https://www.questia.com/library/120072134/the-end-of-empire-dependencies-since-1948-select |date=19 August 2018 }} 596pp
* Madden, Frederick, and John Darwin, ed. ''The Dependent Empire: 1900–1948: Colonies, Protectorates, and Mandates'' (1963), 908pp [https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170202050706/https://www.questia.com/read/91753692/the-dependent-empire-1900-1948-colonies-protectorates |date=2 February 2017 }}
* Mansergh, Nicholas, ed. ''Documents and Speeches on Commonwealth Affairs, 1952–1962'' (1963), 804pp [https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 online] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20180819212015/https://www.questia.com/library/1817157/documents-and-speeches-on-commonwealth-affairs-1952-1962 |date=19 August 2018 }}
{{refend}}

==ٻاهريان ڳنڍڻا==
{{Wikisource|Territories forming part of the Commonwealth|British Nationality Act (1981 c 61) Annex B – The territories forming part of the Commonwealth}}
* {{Commons-inline}}
* {{Wikivoyage inline}}
* [https://thecommonwealth.org/ ڪامن ويلٿ سيڪريٽريٽ]
* [https://commonwealthfoundation.com/ ڪامن ويلٿ فائونڊيشن]
{{Commonwealth of Nations topics}}
{{Commonwealth of Nations}}
{{Navboxes
|title = ڪامن ويلٿ قومن سان لاڳاپيل مضمون
| list =
{{Commonwealth of Nations key documents}}
{{British overseas territories}}
{{International organisations}}
{{Commonwealth Championships}}
}}
{{Authority control}}

{{DEFAULTSORT:Commonwealth Of Nations}}
[[زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز]]
[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:نيوزي لينڊ جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل ادارا ۽ تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:ملڪ ۽ علائقا جتي انگريزي هڪ سرڪاري ٻولي آهي]]</text>
      <sha1>m1d4po667zeh91s4iutvvr78wqpvr7y</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>بنون سب ڊويزن</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>100171</id>
    <redirect title="وزير تعلقو" />
    <revision>
      <id>394097</id>
      <parentid>393737</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T23:19:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>EmausBot</username>
        <id>1754</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Fixing double redirect from [[بنون تعلقو]] to [[وزير تعلقو]]</comment>
      <origin>394097</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35" sha1="jlf0npztcjv154fw1qcz365amxi7pbz" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[وزير تعلقو]]</text>
      <sha1>jlf0npztcjv154fw1qcz365amxi7pbz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100173</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394140</id>
      <parentid>393750</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:23:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394140</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="140" sha1="eo12anqh0n1ax7zk4i8zau4sy45j3dq" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>eo12anqh0n1ax7zk4i8zau4sy45j3dq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ڊوميل تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>100263</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393988</id>
      <parentid>393984</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:02:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>393988</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2436" sha1="jc8hutcakj3wya9wvyz28nlbxlxwq76" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement|name=ڊوميل تعلقو|other_name=ڊوميل تحصیل&lt;br&gt;ڊوميل وزير باغ|native_name=ډومیل تحصیل (پشتو)|native_name_lang=|official_name=تحصیل ڈومیل (اردو)|settlement_type=[[تعلقو]]|image_skyline=|imagesize=|image_alt=|image_caption=|pushpin_map=Khyber Pakhtunkhwa#Pakistan|map_caption=Domel Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]|coordinates={{coord|33|1|20|N|70|46|0|E|region:PK_type:city|display=inline,title}}|subdivision_type=[[Country]]|subdivision_name={{flag|Pakistan}}|subdivision_type1=[[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Province]]|subdivision_type2=[[Subdivisions of Pakistan|District]]|subdivision_name1={{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}|subdivision_name2=[[Bannu District|Bannu]]|leader_title=Chairman|leader_name=Israr Khan|leader_title1=|leader_name1=|area_total_km2=|population_total=209,388|population_as_of=[[2017 Census of Pakistan|2017]]|population_footnotes=&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;|population_est=|pop_est_as_of=|timezone1=[[Pakistan Standard Time|PST]]|utc_offset1=+5|blank_name_sec1=|blank_info_sec1=|blank_name_sec2=|blank_info_sec2=|website=|footnotes=|leader_party=[[Pakistan Tehreek-e-Insaf|PTI]]|image_map={{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}}}
'''ڊوميل تعلقو''' (پشتو: {{Langx|ps|ډومیل تحصیل}}؛ اردو:  {{Langx|ur|تحصیل ڈومیل}}) جنهن کي متبادل طور تي '''ڊوميل تحصيل''' جي نالي سان ترجمو ڪيو ويندو آهي، [[پاڪستان|پاڪستان جي]] [[خيبر پختونخوا|خيبر پختونخوا صوبي جي]] [[بنون ڊويزن]] جي [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جي هڪ انتظامي ذيلي تقسيم ( [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|تعلقو]]) آهي. &lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|archivedate=7 November 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=2016-06-10 |title=Breakdown: City plunges into darkness as feeders trip - The Express Tribune |url=https://tribune.com.pk/story/1120312/breakdown-city-plunges-darkness-feeders-trip/ |access-date=2017-11-12 |work=The Express Tribune |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهو [[بنون|بنون شهر]] کان بنون-ڪوهاٽ روڊ تي اٽڪل 15 ڪلوميٽر جي مفاصلي تي آهي.

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڊوميل تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خيبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>jc8hutcakj3wya9wvyz28nlbxlxwq76</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394141</id>
      <parentid>393988</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:24:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394141</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2491" sha1="rbn672wzkhcqapymwccdd64z58lpi05" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement|name=ڊوميل تعلقو|other_name=ڊوميل تحصیل&lt;br&gt;ڊوميل وزير باغ|native_name=ډومیل تحصیل (پشتو)|native_name_lang=|official_name=تحصیل ڈومیل (اردو)|settlement_type=[[تعلقو]]|image_skyline=|imagesize=|image_alt=|image_caption=|pushpin_map=Khyber Pakhtunkhwa#Pakistan|map_caption=Domel Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]|coordinates={{coord|33|1|20|N|70|46|0|E|region:PK_type:city|display=inline,title}}|subdivision_type=[[Country]]|subdivision_name={{flag|Pakistan}}|subdivision_type1=[[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Province]]|subdivision_type2=[[Subdivisions of Pakistan|District]]|subdivision_name1={{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}|subdivision_name2=[[Bannu District|Bannu]]|leader_title=Chairman|leader_name=Israr Khan|leader_title1=|leader_name1=|area_total_km2=|population_total=209,388|population_as_of=[[2017 Census of Pakistan|2017]]|population_footnotes=&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;|population_est=|pop_est_as_of=|timezone1=[[Pakistan Standard Time|PST]]|utc_offset1=+5|blank_name_sec1=|blank_info_sec1=|blank_name_sec2=|blank_info_sec2=|website=|footnotes=|leader_party=[[Pakistan Tehreek-e-Insaf|PTI]]|image_map={{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}}}
'''ڊوميل تعلقو''' (پشتو: {{Langx|ps|ډومیل تحصیل}}؛ اردو:  {{Langx|ur|تحصیل ڈومیل}}) جنهن کي متبادل طور تي '''ڊوميل تحصيل''' جي نالي سان ترجمو ڪيو ويندو آهي، [[پاڪستان|پاڪستان جي]] [[خيبر پختونخوا|خيبر پختونخوا صوبي جي]] [[بنون ڊويزن]] جي [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جي هڪ انتظامي ذيلي تقسيم ( [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|تعلقو]]) آهي. &lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|archivedate=7 November 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=2016-06-10 |title=Breakdown: City plunges into darkness as feeders trip - The Express Tribune |url=https://tribune.com.pk/story/1120312/breakdown-city-plunges-darkness-feeders-trip/ |access-date=2017-11-12 |work=The Express Tribune |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهو [[بنون|بنون شهر]] کان بنون-ڪوهاٽ روڊ تي اٽڪل 15 ڪلوميٽر جي مفاصلي تي آهي.

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڊوميل تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خيبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>rbn672wzkhcqapymwccdd64z58lpi05</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394148</id>
      <parentid>394141</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:31:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394148</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2436" sha1="9086cedna3kdr6h4sc10fch53vxjiqm" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement|name=ڊوميل تعلقو|other_name=ڊوميل تحصیل&lt;br&gt;ڊوميل وزير باغ|native_name=ډومیل تحصیل (پشتو)|native_name_lang=|official_name=تحصیل ڈومیل (اردو)|settlement_type=[[تعلقو]]|image_skyline=|imagesize=|image_alt=|image_caption=|pushpin_map=Khyber Pakhtunkhwa#Pakistan|map_caption=Domel Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]|coordinates={{coord|33|1|20|N|70|46|0|E|region:PK_type:city|display=inline,title}}|subdivision_type=[[Country]]|subdivision_name={{flag|Pakistan}}|subdivision_type1=[[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Province]]|subdivision_type2=[[Subdivisions of Pakistan|District]]|subdivision_name1={{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}|subdivision_name2=[[Bannu District|Bannu]]|leader_title=Chairman|leader_name=Israr Khan|leader_title1=|leader_name1=|area_total_km2=|population_total=209,388|population_as_of=[[2017 Census of Pakistan|2017]]|population_footnotes=&lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot; /&gt;|population_est=|pop_est_as_of=|timezone1=[[Pakistan Standard Time|PST]]|utc_offset1=+5|blank_name_sec1=|blank_info_sec1=|blank_name_sec2=|blank_info_sec2=|website=|footnotes=|leader_party=[[Pakistan Tehreek-e-Insaf|PTI]]|image_map={{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}}}
'''ڊوميل تعلقو''' (پشتو: {{Langx|ps|ډومیل تحصیل}}؛ اردو:  {{Langx|ur|تحصیل ڈومیل}}) جنهن کي متبادل طور تي '''ڊوميل تحصيل''' جي نالي سان ترجمو ڪيو ويندو آهي، [[پاڪستان|پاڪستان جي]] [[خيبر پختونخوا|خيبر پختونخوا صوبي جي]] [[بنون ڊويزن]] جي [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جي هڪ انتظامي ذيلي تقسيم ( [[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|تعلقو]]) آهي. &lt;ref name=&quot;:0&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|archivedate=7 November 2017}}&lt;/ref&gt; &lt;ref&gt;{{Cite news |date=2016-06-10 |title=Breakdown: City plunges into darkness as feeders trip - The Express Tribune |url=https://tribune.com.pk/story/1120312/breakdown-city-plunges-darkness-feeders-trip/ |access-date=2017-11-12 |work=The Express Tribune |language=en-US}}&lt;/ref&gt; اهو [[بنون|بنون شهر]] کان بنون-ڪوهاٽ روڊ تي اٽڪل 15 ڪلوميٽر جي مفاصلي تي آهي.

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڊوميل تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>9086cedna3kdr6h4sc10fch53vxjiqm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ڪڪي تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>100264</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393986</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:00:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: '''ڪڪي تعلقو''' (اردو، پشتو) پاڪستان جي صوبي خيبر پختونخوا جي بنون ڊويزن ۾ واقع [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جو هڪ انتظامي ذيلي حصو ([[تعلقو]]) آهي. ڪڪي تعلقو 16 ڏيهي علائقن تي مشتمل آهي، جتي 2023ع ۾ ڪل آبادي 92,021 هئي؛ ان ۾ 47,994 مرد ۽ 44,026 عورتون شامل هيون. 2017ع ۾ هتي ڪل آبادي 1,13,409 رڪار...</comment>
      <origin>393986</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="851" sha1="4uu2wrmo7bir7tb5q2nu4yyboi1xhq3" xml:space="preserve">'''ڪڪي تعلقو''' (اردو، پشتو) پاڪستان جي صوبي خيبر پختونخوا جي بنون ڊويزن ۾ واقع [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جو هڪ انتظامي ذيلي حصو ([[تعلقو]]) آهي. ڪڪي تعلقو 16 ڏيهي علائقن تي مشتمل آهي، جتي 2023ع ۾ ڪل آبادي 92,021 هئي؛ ان ۾ 47,994 مرد ۽ 44,026 عورتون شامل هيون. 2017ع ۾ هتي ڪل آبادي 1,13,409 رڪارڊ ڪئي وئي هئي. 2023ع جي مردم شماري ۾ گهرن جو تعداد 13,457 رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيڪي سڀئي ڳوٺاڻن علائقن ۾ واقع هئا.
==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪڪي تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خيبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>4uu2wrmo7bir7tb5q2nu4yyboi1xhq3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394139</id>
      <parentid>393986</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:22:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394139</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="906" sha1="d8v0epl5q64brgm4uvqov8nmyfluk3g" xml:space="preserve">'''ڪڪي تعلقو''' (اردو، پشتو) پاڪستان جي صوبي خيبر پختونخوا جي بنون ڊويزن ۾ واقع [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جو هڪ انتظامي ذيلي حصو ([[تعلقو]]) آهي. ڪڪي تعلقو 16 ڏيهي علائقن تي مشتمل آهي، جتي 2023ع ۾ ڪل آبادي 92,021 هئي؛ ان ۾ 47,994 مرد ۽ 44,026 عورتون شامل هيون. 2017ع ۾ هتي ڪل آبادي 1,13,409 رڪارڊ ڪئي وئي هئي. 2023ع جي مردم شماري ۾ گهرن جو تعداد 13,457 رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيڪي سڀئي ڳوٺاڻن علائقن ۾ واقع هئا.
==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪڪي تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خيبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>d8v0epl5q64brgm4uvqov8nmyfluk3g</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394149</id>
      <parentid>394139</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:32:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* حوالا */</comment>
      <origin>394149</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="851" sha1="c0ye7eb0hbxyzxgqmfxfbxdth06v9jz" xml:space="preserve">'''ڪڪي تعلقو''' (اردو، پشتو) پاڪستان جي صوبي خيبر پختونخوا جي بنون ڊويزن ۾ واقع [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جو هڪ انتظامي ذيلي حصو ([[تعلقو]]) آهي. ڪڪي تعلقو 16 ڏيهي علائقن تي مشتمل آهي، جتي 2023ع ۾ ڪل آبادي 92,021 هئي؛ ان ۾ 47,994 مرد ۽ 44,026 عورتون شامل هيون. 2017ع ۾ هتي ڪل آبادي 1,13,409 رڪارڊ ڪئي وئي هئي. 2023ع جي مردم شماري ۾ گهرن جو تعداد 13,457 رڪارڊ ڪيو ويو، جيڪي سڀئي ڳوٺاڻن علائقن ۾ واقع هئا.
==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:ڪڪي تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>c0ye7eb0hbxyzxgqmfxfbxdth06v9jz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:ڪڪي تعلقو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100265</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393987</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:00:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]] [[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</comment>
      <origin>393987</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="77" sha1="jramcwf96qku2fhmyt6m4edvlf67za0" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>jramcwf96qku2fhmyt6m4edvlf67za0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:ڊوميل تعلقو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100266</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393989</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:02:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]] [[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</comment>
      <origin>393989</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="77" sha1="jramcwf96qku2fhmyt6m4edvlf67za0" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>jramcwf96qku2fhmyt6m4edvlf67za0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:نيلم ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100267</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393992</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:13:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]</comment>
      <origin>393992</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="79" sha1="1s9pev8zycs83umeig93z1b4jwe2q6o" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>1s9pev8zycs83umeig93z1b4jwe2q6o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:باغ ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100268</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393994</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:15:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]</comment>
      <origin>393994</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="112" sha1="ju5vof809yf2ombb7mjo43et9022xws" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]</text>
      <sha1>ju5vof809yf2ombb7mjo43et9022xws</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:حويلي ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100269</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393996</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:17:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو:  [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</comment>
      <origin>393996</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="113" sha1="f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc" xml:space="preserve">
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</text>
      <sha1>f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:سڌنوتي ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100270</id>
    <revision>
      <id>393998</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:19:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو:  [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</comment>
      <origin>393998</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="113" sha1="f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc" xml:space="preserve">
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</text>
      <sha1>f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:مظفر آباد ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100271</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394000</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:21:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو:  [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</comment>
      <origin>394000</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="113" sha1="f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc" xml:space="preserve">
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</text>
      <sha1>f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:ميرپور ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100272</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394003</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:23:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو:  [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</comment>
      <origin>394003</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="113" sha1="f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc" xml:space="preserve">
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</text>
      <sha1>f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:پونڇ ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100273</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394005</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:24:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو:  [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</comment>
      <origin>394005</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="113" sha1="f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc" xml:space="preserve">
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</text>
      <sha1>f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:ڀمبر ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100274</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394007</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:26:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو:  [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</comment>
      <origin>394007</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="113" sha1="f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc" xml:space="preserve">
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</text>
      <sha1>f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:ڪوٽلي ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100275</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394009</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:27:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو:  [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</comment>
      <origin>394009</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="113" sha1="f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc" xml:space="preserve">
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</text>
      <sha1>f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:هٽيان بالا ضلعو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100276</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394011</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:29:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو:  [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]] [[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</comment>
      <origin>394011</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="113" sha1="f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc" xml:space="preserve">
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جا ضلعا]]
[[زمرو:آزاد ڪشمير جي انتظامي ورهاست]]</text>
      <sha1>f34gk61i4evj7z0by23fcekzwdc4cyc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ھٽيان مٿيون ضلعو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>100277</id>
    <redirect title="ھٽيان بالا ضلعو" />
    <revision>
      <id>394013</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T12:30:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[ھٽيان مٿيون ضلعو]] کي [[ھٽيان بالا ضلعو]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394013</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" sha1="ho1fz8w9yyt6cos1emhsvmsockfjjg2" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[ھٽيان بالا ضلعو]]</text>
      <sha1>ho1fz8w9yyt6cos1emhsvmsockfjjg2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>بنو تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>100278</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394015</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:13:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]] '''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اول...</comment>
      <origin>394015</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7318" sha1="m7aszrzwwtckdp8k83m8vv2mjm9qrzx" xml:space="preserve">[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]]
'''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اولھ ۾ اتر وزيرستان ۽ ڏکڻ ۾ ڏکڻ وزيرستان واقع آھن.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt;
==وزير تعلقو==
{{Short description|Subdivision of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan}}
{{Use american english|date=March 2024}}
{{Use dmy dates|date=March 2024}}{{Other uses|Bannu District|Bannu Tehsil}}
{{Infobox settlement
| name               = Wazir Tehsil
| native_name        = {{lang|ur|{{nq|تحصیل گومتی}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|ګوماتي تحصیل}}}}
| other_name         = Frontier Region Bannu&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ur|{{nq|سرحدی علاقہ بنوں}}}}&lt;br&gt;{{lang|ps|{{script/Arabic|بنو سرحدي سیمه}}}}
| native_name_lang   = 
| settlement_type    = Tehsil
| image_skyline      = 
| image_alt          = 
| image_caption      = 
| image_flag         = 
| flag_alt           = 
| image_seal         = 
| seal_alt           = 
| image_shield       = 
| shield_alt         = 
| etymology          = 
| nickname           = 
| motto              = 
| image_map          = {{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}
| map_alt            = 
| map_caption        = Wazir Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]
| pushpin_map        = 
| pushpin_label_position = 
| pushpin_map_alt    = 
| pushpin_map_caption = 
| coordinates        = &lt;!-- {{Coord}} --&gt;
| coor_pinpoint      = 
| coordinates_footnotes = 
| subdivision_type   = Country
| subdivision_name   = {{flagu|Pakistan}}
| subdivision_type1  = [[Subdivisions of Pakistan|Region]]
| subdivision_name1  = {{flag|Khyber Pakhtunkhwa}}
| subdivision_type2  = 
| subdivision_name2  = 
| subdivision_type3  = 
| subdivision_name3  = 
| established_title  = 
| established_date   = 
| founder            = 
| seat_type          = 
| seat               = 
| government_footnotes = 
| government_type    = 
| governing_body     = 
| leader_party       = 
| leader_title       = 
| leader_name        = 
| leader_title1      = 
| leader_name1       = 
| leader_title2      = 
| leader_name2       = 
| leader_title3      = 
| leader_name3       = 
| leader_title4      = 
| leader_name4       = 
| legislature        = 
| upper_house        = 
| lower_house        = 
| unit_pref          = Metric
&lt;!-- ALL fields with measurements have automatic unit conversion --&gt;
&lt;!-- for references: use &lt;ref&gt; tags --&gt;| area_footnotes     = 
| area_urban_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_rural_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_metro_footnotes = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_magnitude     = &lt;!-- &lt;ref&gt; &lt;/ref&gt; --&gt;
| area_note          = 
| area_water_percent = 
| area_rank          = 
| area_blank1_title  = 
| area_blank2_title  = &lt;!-- square kilometers --&gt;
| area_total_km2     = 
| area_land_km2      = 
| area_water_km2     = 
| area_urban_km2     = 
| area_rural_km2     = 
| area_metro_km2     = 
| area_blank1_km2    = 
| area_blank2_km2    = &lt;!-- hectares --&gt;
| area_total_ha      = 
| area_land_ha       = 
| area_water_ha      = 
| area_urban_ha      = 
| area_rural_ha      = 
| area_metro_ha      = 
| area_blank1_ha     = 
| area_blank2_ha     = 
| length_km          = 
| width_km           = 
| dimensions_footnotes = 
| elevation_footnotes = 
| elevation_m        = 
| population_as_of   = 2017
| population_footnotes = &lt;ref name=&quot;DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017&quot;&gt;{{cite web|url=http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|title=DISTRICT WISE CENSUS RESULTS CENSUS 2017|publisher=www.pbscensus.gov.pk|access-date=2017-12-17|archive-url=https://web.archive.org/web/20170829164748/http://www.pbscensus.gov.pk/sites/default/files/DISTRICT_WISE_CENSUS_RESULTS_CENSUS_2017.pdf|archive-date=2017-08-29|url-status=dead}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| population_total   = 43,114
| population_density_km2 = auto
| population_note    = 
| population_demonym = 
| timezone1          = 
| utc_offset1        = 
| timezone1_DST      = 
| utc_offset1_DST    = 
| postal_code_type   = 
| postal_code        = 
| area_code_type     = 
| area_code          = 
| iso_code           = 
| website            = &lt;!-- {{URL|example.com}} --&gt;
| footnotes          = 
}}

'''Wazir Tehsil''' is an administrative subdivision ([[Administrative units of Pakistan#Tehsil|tehsil]]) of [[Bannu District]], Bannu Division, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Province, Pakistan. The total population, according to the 1998 census, was {{sigfig|19593|3}},&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot;&gt;{{Cite book |title=1998 census report of Tribal Area Adjoining Bannu District |date=2001 |publisher=Population Census Organization, Statistics Division, Government of Pakistan |series=Census publication |volume=150 |location=Islamabad}}&lt;/ref&gt;{{rp|5}} 98.1% of which have [[Pashto]] as a [[first language]], and the remaining 1.9% speak [[Punjabi language|Punjabi]].&lt;ref name=&quot;1998census&quot; /&gt;{{rp|6}}

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

== __LEAD_SECTION__ ==
{{Infobox settlement|image_skyline=|image_map1={{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}|map_caption=Location in Pakistan|image_caption=Bannu Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]|name=بنون تعلقو|official_name=اردو|native_name=پشتو|settlement_type=[[تعلقو]]}}'''بنو تعلقو (اردو؛ پشتو: بنون''' تحصيل) [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جي هڪ انتظامي ذيلي ڊويزن ([[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|تعلقو]]) آهي، [[بنون ڊويزن|جيڪو بنون ڊويزن]]، [[خيبر پختونخوا|خيبر پختونخواه صوبي]]، [[پاڪستان|پاڪستان ۾ واقع]] آهي. سال [[آدمشماري پاڪستان، 2017ع|2017ع جي مردم شماري]] مطابق تعلقي جي آبادي 9,58,504 هئي. 

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>m7aszrzwwtckdp8k83m8vv2mjm9qrzx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394016</id>
      <parentid>394015</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:15:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394016</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2672" sha1="43xtyqwnviksf9cshnfffy0wdxg9zqd" xml:space="preserve">[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]]
'''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اولھ ۾ اتر وزيرستان ۽ ڏکڻ ۾ ڏکڻ وزيرستان واقع آھن.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt;
== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

== __LEAD_SECTION__ ==
{{Infobox settlement|image_skyline=|image_map1={{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}|map_caption=Location in Pakistan|image_caption=Bannu Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]|name=بنون تعلقو|official_name=اردو|native_name=پشتو|settlement_type=[[تعلقو]]}}'''بنو تعلقو (اردو؛ پشتو: بنون''' تحصيل) [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جي هڪ انتظامي ذيلي ڊويزن ([[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|تعلقو]]) آهي، [[بنون ڊويزن|جيڪو بنون ڊويزن]]، [[خيبر پختونخوا|خيبر پختونخواه صوبي]]، [[پاڪستان|پاڪستان ۾ واقع]] آهي. سال [[آدمشماري پاڪستان، 2017ع|2017ع جي مردم شماري]] مطابق تعلقي جي آبادي 9,58,504 هئي. 

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>43xtyqwnviksf9cshnfffy0wdxg9zqd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394017</id>
      <parentid>394016</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:15:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <origin>394017</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1841" sha1="e7rh6wjxqv4oe18p0bhf64160sjuu1f" xml:space="preserve">[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]]
'''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اولھ ۾ اتر وزيرستان ۽ ڏکڻ ۾ ڏکڻ وزيرستان واقع آھن.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt;
== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>e7rh6wjxqv4oe18p0bhf64160sjuu1f</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394018</id>
      <parentid>394017</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:16:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394018</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2648" sha1="1j5hd8emv13iplhfnh3dm0r9fyfabm9" xml:space="preserve">{{Infobox settlement|image_skyline=|image_map1={{wikidata|property|raw|P242}}|map_caption=Location in Pakistan|image_caption=Bannu Tehsil (red) in [[Bannu District]]|name=بنون تعلقو|official_name=اردو|native_name=پشتو|settlement_type=[[تعلقو]]}}'''بنو تعلقو (اردو؛ پشتو: بنون''' تحصيل) [[بنون ضلعو|بنون ضلعي]] جي هڪ انتظامي ذيلي ڊويزن ([[پاڪستان جا انتظامي ايڪا|تعلقو]]) آهي، [[بنون ڊويزن|جيڪو بنون ڊويزن]]، [[خيبر پختونخوا|خيبر پختونخواه صوبي]]، [[پاڪستان|پاڪستان ۾ واقع]] آهي. سال [[آدمشماري پاڪستان، 2017ع|2017ع جي مردم شماري]] مطابق تعلقي جي آبادي 9,58,504 هئي.
[[فائل:FATA_(8).jpg|thumb|بنون تعلقو]]
'''بنون تعلقو''' (Bannu subdivision) اڳوڻن [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقن]] ۾ اھڪ اھم انتظامي ايڪائي آھي. ھي تعلقو [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعي بنون]] جو حصو آھي، ھن جي سرحد اوڀر ۾ [[ڪرڪ ضلعو|ضلعي ڪرڪ]] سان ملي ٿي. ھن جي اتر ۾ [[لڪي مروت تعلقو]]، اولھ ۾ اتر وزيرستان ۽ ڏکڻ ۾ ڏکڻ وزيرستان واقع آھن.&lt;ref name=&quot;bannu&quot;&gt;{{حوالو ويب|url=http://www.fata.gov.pk/subpages/bannu.php|title=Historical background and administrative profile of the FR Kohat|publisher=FATA Secretariat|accessdate=2010-04-05}}&lt;/ref&gt;

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* [[وفاقي منتظم شده قبائلي علائقا|قبائلي علائقا]]
* [[بنون ضلعو|ضلعو بنون]]

== خارجي ڳنڍڻا ==
* [http://www.pakistani.org/pakistan/constitution/part12.ch3.html قبائلي علائقن تي آئيني شقون] - باب 3, پاڪستان جي آئين جو حصو ٻارنھن
* [http://www.fata.gov.pk حڪومت قبائلي علائقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20090720052328/http://www.fata.gov.pk/ |date=2009-07-20 }}
* [http://www.safron.gov.pk پاڪستاني وفاقي وزارت براءِ رياستون ۽ سرحدي علاقا] {{Webarchive|url=https://web.archive.org/web/20220318132844/http://www.safron.gov.pk/ |date=2022-03-18 }}

==حوالا==
{{حوالا}}
[[زمرو:بنون تعلقو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]
[[زمرو:1970ع ۾ ٺھيل ملڪ ۽ علائقا]]</text>
      <sha1>1j5hd8emv13iplhfnh3dm0r9fyfabm9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:وزير تعلقو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100279</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394025</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:31:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]] [[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</comment>
      <origin>394025</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="77" sha1="jramcwf96qku2fhmyt6m4edvlf67za0" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:بنون ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:بنون ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>jramcwf96qku2fhmyt6m4edvlf67za0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>بنون تعلقو</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>100280</id>
    <redirect title="وزير تعلقو" />
    <revision>
      <id>394027</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:31:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[بنون تعلقو]] کي [[وزير تعلقو]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394027</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35" sha1="jlf0npztcjv154fw1qcz365amxi7pbz" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[وزير تعلقو]]</text>
      <sha1>jlf0npztcjv154fw1qcz365amxi7pbz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>لنگئا فرانڪا</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>100281</id>
    <redirect title="رابطي جي ٻولي" />
    <revision>
      <id>394029</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:32:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[لنگئا فرانڪا]] کي [[عام ٻولي]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394029</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="31" sha1="bw1u41bzbq28lti04q3w8g0wkvpi3fd" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[عام ٻولي]]</text>
      <sha1>bw1u41bzbq28lti04q3w8g0wkvpi3fd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394099</id>
      <parentid>394029</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T23:19:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>EmausBot</username>
        <id>1754</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Fixing double redirect from [[عام ٻولي]] to [[رابطي جي ٻولي]]</comment>
      <origin>394099</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="40" sha1="gzucklhrujuun217f0a8fqmx96dxqhw" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[رابطي جي ٻولي]]</text>
      <sha1>gzucklhrujuun217f0a8fqmx96dxqhw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>عام ٻولي</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>100282</id>
    <redirect title="رابطي جي ٻولي" />
    <revision>
      <id>394031</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T13:33:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[عام ٻولي]] کي [[رابطي جي ٻولي]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394031</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="40" sha1="gzucklhrujuun217f0a8fqmx96dxqhw" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[رابطي جي ٻولي]]</text>
      <sha1>gzucklhrujuun217f0a8fqmx96dxqhw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:رابطي جي ٻولي</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100283</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394059</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:22:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:بوليون]] [[زمرو:ربطيات]]</comment>
      <origin>394059</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="51" sha1="rr5zxzk6mp9lzv17vvpi5kihmce0lq7" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:بوليون]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]</text>
      <sha1>rr5zxzk6mp9lzv17vvpi5kihmce0lq7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394060</id>
      <parentid>394059</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:22:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:بوليون]]; added [[Category:ٻوليون]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394060</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="51" sha1="bv5a1rf2vr44dd23qdefujgzu8f3d58" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:ربطيات]]</text>
      <sha1>bv5a1rf2vr44dd23qdefujgzu8f3d58</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:بين اللسانيات</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100284</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394061</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:23:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:لسانيات]]</comment>
      <origin>394061</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27" sha1="6eqpmnvp5epu8k9a428rexiuw6uc30o" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:لسانيات]]</text>
      <sha1>6eqpmnvp5epu8k9a428rexiuw6uc30o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي جا لفظ ۽ محاورا</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100285</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394062</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T17:24:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي]]</comment>
      <origin>394062</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="34" sha1="64yxk5zpr2roui0jgoeg8mo1qjy0jvw" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:اطالوي ٻولي]]</text>
      <sha1>64yxk5zpr2roui0jgoeg8mo1qjy0jvw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>فاھيان</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>100286</id>
    <redirect title="فاشيان" />
    <revision>
      <id>394088</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-13T20:42:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Intisar Ali</username>
        <id>8681</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Intisar Ali صفحي [[فاھيان]] کي [[فاشيان]] ڏانھن چوريو: غلط ھجي سان عنوان</comment>
      <origin>394088</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28" sha1="crxduav0zgnkm0r8ube486vfosu0929" xml:space="preserve">#چوريو [[فاشيان]]</text>
      <sha1>crxduav0zgnkm0r8ube486vfosu0929</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:بين الحڪومتي ثقافتي تنظيمون</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100287</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394126</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:39:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:ثقافتي تنظيمون]] [[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]</comment>
      <origin>394126</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="92" sha1="58rwvt307ztjz9w1pfvecr7xoyn698w" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>58rwvt307ztjz9w1pfvecr7xoyn698w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:1949ع ۾ قائم ٿيل ادارا ۽ تنظيمون</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100288</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394127</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:40:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:1949ع]] [[زمرو:تنظيمون]]</comment>
      <origin>394127</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="47" sha1="23l4zn88r7tlqqf09giddgech0kbf90" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:1949ع]]
[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>23l4zn88r7tlqqf09giddgech0kbf90</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100289</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394128</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:43:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:تنظيم بلحاظ ٻوليون]] [[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]</comment>
      <origin>394128</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="99" sha1="rly9pk30buk7jycvifytz5ripiz41jy" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:تنظيم بلحاظ ٻوليون]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>rly9pk30buk7jycvifytz5ripiz41jy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394129</id>
      <parentid>394128</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:44:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:تنظيم بلحاظ ٻوليون]]; added [[Category:تنظيمون بلحاظ ٻولي]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394129</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="99" sha1="efirzmy7cpbuft7k5fjfwlczf8o4zxp" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:تنظيمون بلحاظ ٻولي]]
[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>efirzmy7cpbuft7k5fjfwlczf8o4zxp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:تنظيمون بلحاظ ٻولي</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100290</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394130</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:45:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:تنظيمون]] [[زمرو:زمرا بلحاظ ٻوليون]]</comment>
      <origin>394130</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="73" sha1="s1fg06u7fuxtc5do0snttapaumi9320" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:زمرا بلحاظ ٻوليون]]</text>
      <sha1>s1fg06u7fuxtc5do0snttapaumi9320</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جا بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100291</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394131</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:47:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]] [[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جي سياست]]</comment>
      <origin>394131</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="91" sha1="r5zr4f81kb3cex33sdms6ni7ve1t8cd" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:بين الاقوامي لاڳاپا]]
[[زمرو:ڪئنيڊا جي سياست]]</text>
      <sha1>r5zr4f81kb3cex33sdms6ni7ve1t8cd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياسي تاريخ</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100292</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394132</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:49:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي تاريخ]] [[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياست]]</comment>
      <origin>394132</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="91" sha1="7pg89cggah6579cu6wx062rqpsqa7fg" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:آسٽريليا جي سياست]]</text>
      <sha1>7pg89cggah6579cu6wx062rqpsqa7fg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100293</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394133</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:49:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاھت جي تاريخ]] [[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياست]]</comment>
      <origin>394133</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="105" sha1="3o0b164hgv2v70k68zim70cmvngfbwp" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاھت جي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياست]]</text>
      <sha1>3o0b164hgv2v70k68zim70cmvngfbwp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:گڏيل بادشاھت جي تاريخ</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100294</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394134</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:51:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاھت]] [[زمرو:يورپ جي تاريخ]] [[زمرو:تاريخ بلحاظ ملڪ]]</comment>
      <origin>394134</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="116" sha1="l6qsuas1r95ek6h3v8op5x1h0yy62ju" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاھت]]
[[زمرو:يورپ جي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:تاريخ بلحاظ ملڪ]]</text>
      <sha1>l6qsuas1r95ek6h3v8op5x1h0yy62ju</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:ڪامن ويلٿ آف نيشنز</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100295</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394135</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T07:53:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي ثقافتي تنظيمون]] [[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]] [[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]</comment>
      <origin>394135</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="200" sha1="jkocmj34vvepkyi98iogmtve9u5ku2s" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:بين الحڪومتي ثقافتي تنظيمون]]
[[زمرو:گڏيل بادشاهت جي سياسي تاريخ]]
[[زمرو:ٻولي-بنياد بين الحڪومتي تنظيمون]]</text>
      <sha1>jkocmj34vvepkyi98iogmtve9u5ku2s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:ايبٽ آباد ضلعي جا تعلقا</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100296</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394146</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:29:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:ايبٽ آباد ضلعو]] [[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</comment>
      <origin>394146</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94" sha1="nnv37dv3g188u0flrw87m3gj5jk6hn0" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:ايبٽ آباد ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>nnv37dv3g188u0flrw87m3gj5jk6hn0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:خيبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100297</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394152</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:34:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[زمرو:خيبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]] کي [[زمرو:زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394152</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="86" sha1="m4dt7o8p49ex038lcd5ocjy6wn8hr61" xml:space="preserve">{{واپس منتقل زمرو|زمرو:زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا}}</text>
      <sha1>m4dt7o8p49ex038lcd5ocjy6wn8hr61</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100298</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394154</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:35:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Ibne maryam صفحي [[زمرو:زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]] کي [[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]] ڏانھن چوريو</comment>
      <origin>394154</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="77" sha1="rhkzb6edlf74muazdj2hrx8lneifi5r" xml:space="preserve">{{واپس منتقل زمرو|زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا}}</text>
      <sha1>rhkzb6edlf74muazdj2hrx8lneifi5r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:اتمان خيل تعلقو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100299</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394156</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:38:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]] [[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</comment>
      <origin>394156</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="81" sha1="48i89d06v79ytdv1hacgd74wx89ttta" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>48i89d06v79ytdv1hacgd74wx89ttta</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:خار باجوڙ تعلقو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100300</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394158</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:40:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]] [[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</comment>
      <origin>394158</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="81" sha1="48i89d06v79ytdv1hacgd74wx89ttta" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>48i89d06v79ytdv1hacgd74wx89ttta</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:نواگئي تعلقو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100301</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394160</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:42:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]] [[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</comment>
      <origin>394160</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="81" sha1="48i89d06v79ytdv1hacgd74wx89ttta" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>48i89d06v79ytdv1hacgd74wx89ttta</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394161</id>
      <parentid>394160</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:43:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>removed [[Category:باجوڙ ضلعو]] [[وڪيپيڊيا:ھاٽ ڪيٽ|ھاٽ ڪيت]] جي مدد سان</comment>
      <origin>394161</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="48" sha1="9ip4vfehao7u6wdyjnv8zv3ruj60ps0" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>9ip4vfehao7u6wdyjnv8zv3ruj60ps0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>394162</id>
      <parentid>394161</parentid>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:43:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* */</comment>
      <origin>394162</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="81" sha1="48i89d06v79ytdv1hacgd74wx89ttta" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:باجوڙ ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>48i89d06v79ytdv1hacgd74wx89ttta</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:اسماعيل زئي تعلقو</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100302</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394164</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:46:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:اورڪزئي ضلعو]] [[زمرو:اورڪزئي ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</comment>
      <origin>394164</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="89" sha1="c0kmmpnyh33dnb54oy0l2o8hbbpbk6s" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:اورڪزئي ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:اورڪزئي ضلعي جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>c0kmmpnyh33dnb54oy0l2o8hbbpbk6s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>زمرو:اورڪزئي ضلعي جا تعلقا</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>100303</id>
    <revision>
      <id>394165</id>
      <timestamp>2026-07-14T08:47:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ibne maryam</username>
        <id>17680</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>نئون صفحو: [[زمرو:اورڪزئي ضلعو]] [[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</comment>
      <origin>394165</origin>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="91" sha1="3398dw3i19ntaud0c31v6jwt0t1gr0x" xml:space="preserve">[[زمرو:اورڪزئي ضلعو]]
[[زمرو:خیبر پختونخوا جا تعلقا]]</text>
      <sha1>3398dw3i19ntaud0c31v6jwt0t1gr0x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
</mediawiki>